The URL can be used to link to this page

Permit 6010 Fleet Landing Blvd Gate House 2008 ,..` City of Atlantic Beach Building Department Certificate of Occupancy 1 This Certificate issued pursuant to the requirements of Section 110.2 of the Florida Building Code certifying that at the time of issuance this structure was in compliance with the various ordinances of the City regulating building construction or use. For the following: Date: February 5, 2008 Contractor: RPC Contractors Inc. Address: 6010 Fleet Landing Blvd., Atlantic Beach, Fl 32233 Construction Type: Commercial Occupancy Class: Group R-3 Permit Number: 07-1150 DAVID HUFSTETLER BUILDING OFFICIAL i er,l.yAli r�y? g! City of Atlantic Beach Building Department �1�SF Certificate of Occupancy c r This Certificate issued pursuant to the requirements of Section 110.2 of the Florida Building Code certifying that at the time of issuance this structure was in compliance with the various ordinances of the City regulating building construction or use. For the following: Date: February 5, 2008 Contractor: RPC Contractors Inc. Address: 6010 Fleet Landing Blvd., Atlantic Beach, Fl 32233 Construction Type: Commercial Occupancy Class: Group R-3 e mit Number: 07-1150 DA STETLER BUILDING OFFICIAL SIEMENS Fire Safety FireFinder XLS 71 FireFinder XLS Fire Alarm Control Panel ENGINEER AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS • Standard 2500 addressable point • Multiple Command Stations capacity system • Menu Driven Operator Commands • Networkable to other FireFinder XLS • 5000 Event History Logging with systems On Line&Off Line Reports • Powerful, easy-to-use programming • User Help Screens capabilities • Multiple Levels of Password • Fully Field Programmable Via Windows Protection Laptop Computer • Automatic Environmental • 6"Backlit LCD display Compensation for Smoke Detectors • User-friendly system interface • Alarm verification by Device or Zone • Touch screen for maintenance • Logic Controlled Output Functions operations and function keys • Time Based Controlled Output •Nem Global Annunciation and k' Fun• Holidaons y Schedule Control Capability ..-.• • City Tie/Leased Line • Multi-Language Display • Universal AC power input- 120/ • Coded Outputs 240VAC, 50/60Hz • 200 notification appliance circuits • 12 amps of system power, expandable capacity to 48 amps • Up to 4.0 amps(24VDC)per NAC • Numerous Relays-alarm, trouble, • Built-in strobe synchronization programmable... protocol • SureWire addressable loop technology • Supports Pre-Action, Deluge and • Polarity insensitive detection circuits agent releasing (Patented) • Voice evacuation system optional • Useful diagnostic LEDs on all cards • Modular assembly • Supports FirePrint application specific • NEC 760 Power Limited Circuits (UL detection 864 Compliant) • Security Device Monitoring • Intelligent Interface to Building! • Sprinkler Supervision Process Management Systems • Intelligent/Analog Detection Circuits, • Degrade mode operation style 6(Class A)or Style 4(Class B) • Distributed Processing • Detector Sensitivity Readout/Printout . UUKL Listed for Smoke Control • Operates as Interactive Peer with per NFPA 72 other XLS or XLSVs in a XNET • Supervised Remote Printer UL ULC Listed, FM,CSFM,& network • 32 Character Custom messages ti!NYMEA Approved • Pre-Alarm Operation •Ne�N Thermal Strip Printer • Supports Single Person Test, "Walk Test" •NeNN Alphanumeric Pocket Pager Interface • NCCG Graphics support > Introduction FireFinder XLS is a microprocessor based advanced life Factory Mutual as well as CSFM and NYMEA for use in safety system. Its 6"display and large lighted buttons those specific locales. makes it the most intuitive fire alarm user interface in the In addition to the standard fire applications,XLS is listed industry. Its use of the unique multiprocessor"Network" by Underwriters Laboratories under the category UUKL for design along with its ability to utilize both analog and conventional detection devices make it an extremely smoke control. XLS can be used as a listed Fireman's flexible and configurable life safety system. Smoke Control Station in high-rise office buildings,malls and other large structures. The XLS is ideally suited for commercial,institutional and XLS is listed by UL and approved by FM for releasing industrial fire detection and notification applications. It Halon 1301,Sinorix clean agent systems and pre-action or complies with the requirements of NFPA Standard 72 and is listed by Underwriters Laboratories under their standard deluge sprinkler systems.These include foam or water UL-864. Underwriter's Laboratories of Canada also lists it applications. XLS follows the releasing requirements for fire applications under ULC-S527 Itis approved by specified in the NFPA 12 Standards 12A, 13 and 2001. CATALOG NUMBER 6300 CITY OF ATLANTIC BEACH sr� € 800 SEMINOLE ROAD j - - ATLANTIC BEACH,FL 32233 INSPECTION PHONE LINE 247-5826 ' yFi1 INSPECTION EMAIL REQUEST: Building-deptgcoab.us Application Number . . . . . 08-00000016 Date 1/07/08 Property Address . . . . . . 6010 FLEET LANDING BLVD Application type description ELECTRIC ONLY Property Zoning . . . . . . . TO BE UPDATED Application valuation . . . . 0 ---- -- - --------- ---- -- ------------- ---------------------------- --- ------- ---- Application desc FIRE ALARM (APPROVED BY JAX FIRE) ---------- - ------ ----- --------------------------- ----- ---------------------- Owner Contractor ------------------------ --------------- ----- ---- W.W. GAY FIRE PROTECTION 522 STOCKTON STREET JACKSONVILLE FL 32204 (904) 387-7973 --- ---- ----------- ------------------------- --- --------- --- ------------------ Permit ELECTRICAL PERMIT Additional desc . . Permit Fee . . . . 35 . 00 Plan Check Fee . 00 Issue Date . . . . Valuation . . . . 0 Expiration Date . . 7/05/08 -------------------- -- --- ------- - --- -------- ---- --- ------- --- --------------- Fee summary Charged Paid Credited Due ----------- ------ ---------- -------- -- --- -- ---- - ---------- Permit Fee Total 35 . 00 35 . 00 . 00 . 00 Plan Check Total . 00 . 00 . 00 . 00 Grand Total 35 . 00 35 . 00 . 00 . 00 PERMIT IS APPROVED ONLY IN ACCORDANCE WITH ALL CITY OF ATLANTIC BEACH ORDINANCES AND THE FLORIDA BUILDING CODES. CITY OF ATLANTIC BEACH 800 SEMINOLE ROAD,ATLANTIC BEACH,FL 32233 07- OFFICE:(904)247-5826•FAX NO.:(904)247-5845 BUILDING-DEPT@COAB.US ELECTRICAL PERMIT APPLICATION DUVAL COUNTY > El NO U PIPES PERMIT#:-..-07— zZ.J ri /a9 -® 7 Atlantic Beach FL 32233 4.NAME: 5.ADDRESS IF DIFFERENT FROM JOB ADDRESS: S.PHONE: yay 7,532 , r 7.NAME OF COMPANY: . 8.ADDRESS 41 NTc° !� 5, s 700 TOayst �T/lct�soac�v�uE ��.9 9.STATE FLORIDA LICENSE N0: 10.CELL PHONE: 11.F�C�O.:' ' 12.EMAIL ADDRES . 13.OFFICE PHONE: 14.FV 15.Applicatio is heigby ma to obtain Jpk1mit to do the work and installations as indicated. I certify that all work will be performed to meet the standards of all laws regulating construction in this jurisdiction. This permit becomes null and void if work is not commenced within six(6) months,or if construction or work is suspended or abandoned for a period of six(6)months at an c coir �f CONTRACTORS SIGNATURE: ❑MULTI FAMILY-#OF UNITS: ❑ RESIDENTIAL ❑SINGLE FAMILY ❑TEMP SERVICE ❑COMMERCIAL ❑ADDITION ❑TRAILOR ❑ALTERATION ❑SIGN ❑OLD grNEW ❑'05 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE ❑REPAIR ❑ POOL/SPA ❑ REWIRE ❑OTHER: r7 4 20.TYPE OF SERVICE: ❑ OVERHEAD ❑ UNDERGROUND ❑ UNDERGROUND UP POLE 21. NEW SERVICE: CONDUCTORS PER PHASE: ❑ POWER IS ON ❑ POWER IS OFF 22.SIZE OF CONDUCTOR: AMPICITY: ❑COPPER ❑ALUMINUM 23.SWITCH OR BREAKER SIZE: AMPS: PH: W: VOLT: RACEWAY SIZE: 24.E """D( PH: _ W: VOLT: RACEWAY SIZE: 25. fl ^ � � #OF AMPS: #OF AMPS: 26. 1 uw' _ FLUORESCENT& M.V.: 27. 1 /} 31-100 AMPS: OVER 100 AMPS: 28. I r`e rvv�QlC . E FAMILY,MULTI-FAMILY AND ROOM ADDITIONS 29.-. Con-troG 30. 31-100 AMPS: OVER 100 AMPS: 31. �w�� Lc ^�- 31-100 AMPS: OVER 100 AMPS: �TT #C f---� �[reG �: AMPS: HEAT KW: #C G: AMPS: HEAT KW: N U ' KVA: N U '' KVA: � • UNDER 60OV: NUMBER: KVA: OVER 60OV: NUMBER: KVA: DESCRIBE IN DETAIL: COAB FORM BLDG02:REVISED:12/13/2007 MW The NIC-C Card has diagnostic LEDs that indicate Card Fail, CAN Fail, HNET Fail,XNET Fail,Ground Fault, Loop A Fail I-` and Loop B Fail,as well as LEDs to indicate Power,Style Op and Active Networks. ZIC-8B/ZIC-2C ZIC-8B/ZIC-2C HLIM Line Isolator Module The Zone Indicating Card ZIC-86 provides eight fully HLIM Line Isolator Module supervised programmable output circuits for use on the FireFinder XLS Fire Alarm Control Panel.The ZIC-813 The HLIM loop isolator module provides short circuit 9!ill' supplies 8 Class B (StyleY)type output circuits,power protection on FireFinder XLS intelligent device circuits limited to 2.0 amps maximum per circuit. Each circuit can (DLC).When a short is detected by the HLIM,it isolates be independently programmed for use with listed audible the affected segment of the circuit,allowing the remaining or visual notification appliances,or listed emergency audio devices to continue operation.The HLIM is self-restoring, " speakers. The ZIC-813 plugs into one slot in the CC-5 or automatically reconnecting to circuit segment when the CC-2 Card Cage,and has on-board LEDs for system status fault is removed. and troubleshooting.The ZIC-2C mounts directly on the It can be wired in either a Style 4 or Style 6 configuration. ZIC-813,and allows each of the ZIC-813 output circuits to be used for 2-channel voice applications. Indication of power, The HLIM does not occupy a device address on the DLC communication,internal operation,and ground fault circuit and requires no programming.Up to fifteen HLIMs conditions are provided,as well as indication of circuit may be installed on each DLC loop. activation or trouble conditions. oil f HCP HCP The HCP provides an intelligent control point for the NIC-C FireFinder XLS Control Panel. The HCP can be programmed as an independent,remotely located tele- phone zone,speaker zone or notification appliance circuit. The Model NIC-C Network Interface Card provides HNETor The HCP is designed to be used with the Siemens Fire XNET network communications between enclosures. In Safety notification appliance product line. addition to the HNET or XNET communication the NIC-C The HCP communicates through the DLC analog loop and provides CAN network communication within an enclosure can be wired either Class A(Style Z)or Class B (StyleY). or external to the enclosure. The HNET or XNET can be The 24VDC power input comes from either the control wired Style 4 or Style 7. The CAN network can be wired Style 4 only. panel or from any UL listed power limited,auxiliary power supply. When the NIC-Cis used for HNET communications it provides communication between enclosures on a single system. pip When the NIC-C is used for XNET communications it provides communication between systems.The maxi- mum of XNET NIC-Cs on a single system (single node) is one,for a total of 64 XNET NIC-Cs on a Peer-To-Peer Networked System. P programmed usage.The label slides behind a clear indicate Fan/Damper/Motor status:OFF(Red LED),ON protective membrane.One of the LED's assigned to each (Green LED),TROUBLE(Yellow LED). switch is a dual color LED used to indicate what type of signal is active. Each SCM-8 and each switch is fully programmable and may be used to control speaker circuits,and awide range ' of general system functions such as All Call,All Evac, Warden's Page,Speaker,etc. Anynumber of circuits may �� A k be grouped and controlled bya single switch. Switch usages and zone groupings are assigned using the ZEUS system programmingsoftware.The SCM-8s are mounted on a hinged panel as a partof the FireFinder XLS Command Console enclosure. PSC-12 Power Supply Charger Module PSC-12 Power Supply Charger Module The PSC-12 is a high current power supply that provides yw the FireFinder-XLS primary regulated 24VDC power to rI. Ini operate. It is rated at 12Amps(Alarm)/SAmps(Standby) and has a built in battery charger capable of charging up to 100AH batteries.The PSC-12 is an addressable intelligent + microprocessor controlled module that communicates it status to the system operator interface(PMI).The PMI is LCM-8 able to query the status of the power supply to obtain information regarding system charging current,terminal LCM-8 LED Control Module loading information,ground fault conditions and more. The LCM-8 is an FireFinder XLS option module which provides LED annunciation of system activity. Each LCM- 8 module contains eight groups of 2 LED's,each of which can be assigned to desired outputs using the ZEUS ' programming software. Eight LED's are dual color capable of being lighted either RED or GREEN flashing or steady. The remaining LED's are AMBER flashing or steady.A space is provided for labeling of LED functions.The label slides behind a clear protective membrane.The LCM-8 dimensions are identical to the SCM-8 and is mounted on the same hinged panel as a part of the FireFinder XLS Command Console enclosure. PTB Power Termination Board Pro PTB PowerTermination Board The PSC-12 comes packaged with a module called the PTB.The PTB is the PowerTerm i nation Board and is required for operation with the PSC-12.The PTB filters the power from the incoming AC mains and distributes it to the PSC-12 power supply and the optional PSX-12 power supply extender. The PTB has an optional connector that can be used during system installation,commissioning&service to provide the technician with a place to plug in their laptop computer if required.The AC-ADPT is an optional accessory cable FCM-6 that allows connection on one side to the PTB via a keyed connector and on the other end directly into to the laptop's FCM-6 Fan,Motor,dampers Control Module transformer.Most laptop computer external power trans- The FCM-6 is an FireFinder XLS command console option formers have removable AC power cords which can be module that provides manual control of building HVAC replaced by the AC-ADPT to temporarily provide an AC system fans,motors,and dampers. EachFCM-6 module power source for laptop computer used during system provides(6)sets of(3)push button switches for manual installation,service and maintenance calls when needed. system control. Each switch has3 associated LEDs to kr' n r CCU/M Alphanumeric Pager Interface 4p MDACT-Multi-Point Digital Alarm CCU/M Alphanumeric Pager Interface Communicator Transmitter The CCU/M is an ancillary module that connects to the MDACT-Multi-Point Digital Alarm RPM to transmit FireFinder XLS status information in text CommunicatorTransmitter message format to an alphanumeric pocket pager.The The Model MDACT Multi-Point Digital Alarm Communica- CCU/M can be connected to an exiting phone line and can torTransmitter is used in FireFinder XLS systems where dial out to a pager using its onboard modem to transmit point identification of alarm,supervisory,security and information via a paging service.The CCU/M can also trouble events is required at Central or Remote Receiving connect directly to an existing on-site paging system. Stations. An intelligent RS-485 communications protocol Through programming,the CCU/M can send different transmits all system information to the MDACT. The types of events to different pagers. Up to 8 different installer selects the specific events,or groups of events, messages can be sent to pagers directly from CCU/M. that are to be transmitted from the MDACT over phone Alarms,Troubles,Supervisory,Security,Arm/Disarm, lines to listed receiving station equipment.The MDACT Status Points,Audible status and Reset can be directed to can transmit point information via Ademco Contact ID and all or only certain alphanumeric pocket pagers. the SIA protocol. For installation,a MOM2-XMP Mounting Plate, MOM-2 card cage,and an XMI Interface Card are required. on k'4 " CAB2 Two Row Enclosure CA62Two Row Enclosure TSP-40A Thermal Strip Printer The Model CAB2 is the mid-sized FireFinder XLS enclo- sure capable of housing up to two CAB-MP cabinet TSP-40AThermal Strip Printer mounting plates. The inner door has two rows of four TheTSP-40A is a thermal strip printer designed for use mounting slots. The outer door has space for mounting with the FireFinder XLS system.The TSP-40A acts as two outer door plates(Models OD-LP OD-BP or OD-GP). event logging device providing a permanent history report The outer door can be configured to open from either side. of all system activity. It mounts in the FireFinder XLS The CAB2 consists of the CAB2-BB back box,the CAB2- CAB 1, CAB2 or CAB3 enclosure and its printout is visible BD black inner and outer door package,two CAB-MP cabinet mounting plates,and one OD-LP lens plate.The through a window in th locked enclosure door.Printouts are automatically spooled on a take-up reel for easy record outer door has a single lock and key set installed.A red storage. version called the CAB2R is also available.Approximate size is 45" High, 26"wide,and 8" deep. ID-MP. Up to four ID-SPs can be mounted in a single row on the inner door.Two blank plates are included in each Model ID-SP. ID-FP Inner Door Full Blank Plate The Model ID-FP is a blank plate that covers the full opening of the row on an inner door. It is used for applica- tions requiring full dead front protection. A single full blank plate is included in the ID-FP. lAllt OD-GP Outer Door Grill Plate OD-GP Outer Door Grill Plate The Model OD-GP also covers an entire row on the outer door of a system cabinet,but has four rows of ventilation louvers on it. The OD-GP is mounted in front of system bulk amplifiers,card amplifiers,or other modules that generate heat. Using the OD-GP will permit airflow across 1 these modules to aid in heat dissipation. A single grill BCM Blank Control Module plate plate is included with each OG-G P. BCM Blank Control Module plate BCMs can be mounted on a single ID-MP. Four blank Remote System Enclosures module plates are included in each Model BCM. The Models REMBOX2 and REMBOX4 are FireFinderXLS system enclosures that are used for remotely mounting inner door modules like the PMI interface,switch mod- ules, Model LVM live voice modules,and Model FMT PP firefighters master telephone modules.They are thinner than the regular CAB enclosures(just 5"deep overall)and are perfect for mounting in places where space is limited (like lobbies or behind a receptionist's desk). Due to their smaller depth, no card cages,power supplies or bulk amplifiers can be mounted in a REMBOX. However, the PMI and modules such as the RNI remote network interface module,the OCM-16 output control module,and OD-LP outer Door Lens Plate the SIM-16 supervised input module can be mounted in a REMBOX. Due to the depth of the live voice module and OD-LP Outer Door Lens Plate the firefighters master telephone,no CCM-16s or SIM-16s The Model OD-LP is a clear plastic lens plate mounted on can be used simultaneously with the LVM or the FMT. the outer door of a system cabinet. It is used to allow Both the REMBOX2 and the REMBOX4 are designed for operators to see the system interface and controls flush mounting with no trim kit required. Both enclosures mounted on the inner door,but restricts access to unautho- also come with a clear lens plate on the cover. rized users. It covers an entire row on the outer door. A single lens plate is included with each OD-LP. OD-BP Outer Door Blank Plate REMBOX2 Two Module Remote Enclosure OD-BP Outer Door Blank Plate REMBOX2Two Module Remote Enclosure The Model OD-BP is used to cover an entire row on the The REMBOX2 has two inner door module spaces,and outer door of a system cabinet. It is used when there is can hold a single PMI, up to two switch module brackets, no PMI or control modules mounted on the adjacent row of one LVM live voice module. Combinations are also the inner door. A single blank plate is included in each OD- allowed.The REMBOX2 can also mount a single RNI BP remote network interface on a bracket included in the Ordering Information Model Model Number Description Part Number Number Description Part Number PMI Operator Interface/System CPU 500-033070 CAB3 Complete three-row black cabinet with back box, DLC Device Loo Card 500033090 inner door,outer door,three CAB-MP mounting plates and one OD-LP lens plate 599-633764 ZIC-4A 4 CircuitZone Indicating Card 500-033050 CAB3R Complete three-row red cabinet 599-633765 ZIC-88 8 Circuit Zone Indicating Card 500-648670 CAB3-BB Three-row black back box 500-633011 ZIC-2C 2 CHANNEL ADAPTER CARD FOR ZIC-86 500-648671 CAB3-RB Three-row red back box 500-634942 HLIM Line Isolator Module 500-033170 CAB3-BD Three-row black inner&outer doorset 500-633010 PW HCP INTELLIGENT CONTROL POINT 500-034860 CAB3-RD Three-row red inner&outer door set 500-633757 NIC-C Network Interface Card 500-033240 CAB►-TK Single row cabinet black trim kit 500-633013 CRC-6 Controllable Relay Card 500-033250 CAB1R-TK Single row cabinet red trim kit 500-633729 SIM-16 Supervised Input Module 500-034060 CAB2-TK Two-row cabinet black trim kit 500-633014 VP�. CDC-4 Conventional Detector Card 500-034200 CAB2R-TK Two-row cabinet red trim kit 500-633753 PSC-12 Power Supply&Battery Charger 12A @ 24VOC 500-033340 CAB3-TK Three-row cabinet black trim kit 500-633015 PSX-12 Power Supply Extender 12A @ 24VDC 500-034120 CAB3R-TK Three-row cabinet red trim kit 500-633754 PTB PowerTermination Board 500-033390 CA82-X Complete CAB2 with transponder door AC-ADPT Technician Laptop Power Connector 500-633991 (no inner door) 599-034252 CC-5 Card Cage-5 Slots 500-633037 CAB2-XBD I CAB2 transponder door 500-633768 CC-2 Card Cage-2 Slots 500-633440 CAB3-X Complete CAB3 with transponder door RNI Remote Network Interface Module 500-033420 (no inner door) 599-034253 RPM Remote Printer Module 500033270 CAB3-XBD CAB3 transponder door 500-633769 PAL-1 UL Listed Parallel Printer 500-692407 CAB2-XRD LARGE ENCLOSURE TRANSPONDER 500-633792 DOOR-RED SSD System Status Display 500-034740 MOUNTS TO CAB2-RB SSD-C System Status Displayw/control 500-034750 CAB3-XRD LARGE ENCLOSURE TRANSPONDER 500-633793 SSD-C-REM System Status Display w/control for remote DOOR-RED lobby enclosure 500-634773 MOUNTS TO CAB3-RB MDACT Multipoint Digital PointAlarm Communication CAB-MP Back box module mounting plate 500-633012 Transmitter 500-699254 ID-MP Inner door module mounting plate DCT-P Programmer-MDACT 500-699291 (four per package) 500-633027 MOM2-XMP Mounting Plate for MOM-2 inFireFinderXLS ID-SP Inner door single module blank plate systems 500-634822 (two per package) 500-633028 MOM-2 MXL Module Cardcage(I full shot) 500-892766 ID-FP Inner doorfour module blank plate 500-633029 XMI Fire FinderXLS-MXLInterfaceCard 500-034870 BCM Blank control module plate(four per package) 500-033320 SCM-8 Switch Module(8 Switches) 500-033040 OD-LP Outer door lens plate 500-633016 LCM-8 LED Annunciator Module(8 LED Sets) 500-033100 OD-BP Outer door blank plate 500-633017 FCM-6 Fan Control Module 500-033140 OD-BP-R Outer door red blank plate 500634919 Switches(On-Off-Auto) OD-GP Outer door grill plate 500-633018 ID-MP Inner Door Mounting Plate 500-633027 OD-GP-R Outer door red grill plate 500-634920 (Accepts up to 4 Modules) REMBOX2 Two module black remote box lobbyenclosure 500-633772 CSB CAN Sounder Board 500 033130 REMBOX2-MP Mounting plate for OCM-16,SIM-16 in a CCL CAN-CABLE-Long 30 in.6-Conductor 599-634214 1 REMBOX2 500-364211 CA81 Complete single row black cabinet 500-633007 REMBOX4 Four module black remote box lobby enclosure 500-633914 CAB 1 R Complete single row red cabinet 500-633728 REMBOX4-MP Mounting plate for OCM-16,SIM-16 in a CAB2 Complete two-row black cabinetwith back box, REMBOX2 500-634212 inner door,outer door,two CAB-MP mounting TSP-40A Thermal Strip Printer 500-634933 plates and one OD LP lens plate 599-633762 TSRXB Brackets for Thermal Strip Printer 500-849949 CAB2R Complete two-row red cabinet 599-633763 TSP-XC Cables forThermal Strip Printer 500-849950 CAB2-BB Two-row black back box 500-633009 CCU/M Alphanumeric Pager Interface Module 500-895330 CAB2-RB Two-row red back box 500-634941 D2300-MP Mounting Plate for CCU/M and Fiber Module 500-634758 CAB2-BD Two-row black inner&outer door set 500-633008 GPMI UK Software Upgrade Kit for PMI toAllow 500-650066 CAB2 RD Two-row red inner&outer door set 500-633755 Global Functionality PMI and GPM[-UK 599-050092 SIEMENS Fire Safety NIC=C Network Interface Card — ENGINEER AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS • HNET communications • XNET communications • CAN network communications • Supports Style 4 or Style 7 wiring for XNET or HNET • Supervises the HNET or XNET and CAN network a • Diagnostic LEDs • Isolates short circuit faults • Ground fault detection • Network repeater • Downloadable firmware • U, UL, ULC Listed • NYMEA, CSFM Listed NIC-C FrontView NIC-C Side View Introduction The Model NIC-C Network Interface Card provides HNET When the NIC-C is used forXNET communications it or XNET network communications between enclosures. provides communication between systems. It is set for In addition to the HNET or XNET communication the XNET usage and an HNET address. The maximum of NIC-C provides CAN network communication within an XNET NIC-Cs on a single system (single node)is one,for enclosure or external to the enclosure.The HN ET or a total of 64 XNET NIC-Cs on a Peer-To-Peer Networked XNET can be wired Style 4 or Style 7. The CAN network System. The XNET NIC-C Card must reside in the same can be wired Style 4 only. enclosure as the PMI(Person Machine Interface). MXL systems may also reside on the same XNET with Description FireFinder-XLS systems. The NIC-C supervises the XNET network to insure proper operation.The NIC-C also A single NIC-C provides either HNET or XNET. isolates a short circuit fault to each individual segment The CAN interface is available regardless of the of the XNET network.The NIC-C provides an electrical HNET or XNET usage. repeater for each XN ET pair. When the NIC-C is used for H N ET comm un ications it The FireFinder-XLS will also report all events over the provides communication between enclosures on a single XNET to the Network Command Center NCCNT-G *► system. It is set for HNET usage and an HNET address. which is required for Global Control. The events will be The maximum HNET NIC-Cs on a single system (single displayed on the NCCNT-G and can be acknowledged, node)is 64. The NIC-C supervises the HNET network to audibles silenced and system reset from the NCCNT-G. insure proper operation. The NIC-C also isolates a short The NCCNT-G Command Center can also be used to circuit fault to each individual segment of the HNET perform Maintenance Commands on an individual network. The NIC-C provides an electrical repeater for FireFinder-XLS on the XNET. each HNET pair. CATALOG NUMBER 6338 slP SIEMENS Fire Safety HFP=11 Firefinder' Detector Intelligent Fire Detector for FireFinder XLS Control Panels ENGINEER AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Model HFP-11 • Most Sophisticated "Detector Intelligence"available today • Multi-Criteria fire detection for the price of a photoelectric detector • FirePrintTm Technology to discriminate between deceptive phenomena and an actual fire � • Easily programmed to match specific hazard profiles ' "f from the control panel • Polarity Insensitive with SureWireT"Technology y • Pre-Alarm reporting based on fire profile selected . ,"yr!�; dv • Remote sensitivity measurement capability • System logic activation based on any of three inputs from detector(smoke, heat or neural network) • Detectors are self-testing, completing diagnostics every 4 seconds • Field cleanable chamber with replaceable chamber parts available F" • Multi-color detector status LED • Two-wire operation • Compatible Model DPU field device programmer/tester unit • Supports software based automatic environmental compensation e Optional fully programmable relay base, audible base, and duct housing @ ULC Listed, CSFM, FM, NYMEAApproved Introduction The Siemens Building Technologies, Fire Safety Divi- The HFP-11 intelligent fire detector is compatible with sion HFP-11 Intelligent Fire Detector provides the life the Fire Safety Model DPU field device programmer/ safety industry with the most highly evolved detection tester unit, which is a compact, portable, menu-driven system available today.The HFP-11 utilizes advanced accessory for electronically programming and testing detection technology that allows the detector to detectors, easily and reliably.The DPU eliminates the distinguish non-threatening deceptive phenomena, need for cumbersome, unreliable mechanical program- such as cigarette smoke, from actual fire hazards, ming methods, such as dials or switches and reduces while optimizing detection for the area in which it is installation and service costs by electronically pro- installed. No other detection system available today gramming and testing the detector prior to installation. offers a higher level of protection or nuisance alarm The HFP-11 fire detector is compatible with the Fire PW immunity.The HFP-11 uses state-of-the-art micropro- Finder XLS series of control panels. cessor circuitry with error check, detector self-diagnos- tics and supervision programs. CATALOG NUMBER t—%,m programmed into the system are activated. detectors. Should questions arise regarding detector Detector sensitivity, calibration, and identification placement, observe NFPA 72 guidelines. Good fire are dynamically supervised by the control panel. protection system engineering and common sense Detector sensitivity and pre-alarm levels are a function dictate how and when fire detectors are installed and of the application chosen at the control panel and are used. Contact your local Siemens Fire Safety distribu- controlled by the panel. If an alternate, non-FirePrint for or sales office whenever you need assistance mode is selected, then the sensitivity can be changed applying FirePrint in unusual applications. Be sure to PIN from the control panel. follow NFPA guidelines and UL/ULC approved installation instructions, which are included with every Siemens The DPU Device Program/Test Unit accessory is used Fire Safety detector, and local codes as for all fire to program and verify the detector's address.The technician selects the accessory's program mode protection equipment. to enter the desired address.The DPU automatically sets and verifies the address and tests the detector. Dimensions The DPU operates on AC power or rechargeable w batteries, providing flexibility and convenience in 6"Diameter Base programming and testing equipment almost anywhere. When in the test mode, the DPU will perform a series of diagnostic tests without altering the address or T other stored data, allowing technicians to determine if the detector is operating properly.The HFP-11 fire detector may be installed on the same initiating ae ail circuit with HMS series manual stations, HTRI series Height interfaces, HCP output control devices, or HZM series of addressable, conventional zone modules. All HFP-11 detectors can be cleaned in the field, when required, by simply removing the detector cover and unsnapping the photo chamber.There is also the option of cleaning the interior of the detector with a clean, soft cloth Technical Specifications or brush, or replacing the labyrinth and bug screen Operating Temperature: +32°F (0°C) to 100°F (38°C) included in the detector maintenance kit, model per UL 268/268A DMK-11. Humidity: 0-93% Relative Humidity The HFP-11 uses the low-profile surface mounting Non-Condensing base, model DB-11.This base mounts on a 4-inch octagon, square, or a single gang electrical box. Maximum spacing: 30 foot centers (900 sq. ft.) The base utilizes screw clamp contacts for electrical per NFPA 72 Chapter 5 and connections and self-wiping contacts for increased CAN/ULC-S524 reliability.The base can be used with the optional LK-11 detector locking kit which contains 50 detector locks and an installation tool, to prevent unauthorized Part removal of the detector head.The DB-11 base has Model Description Number integral decorative plugs to cover the outer mounting HFP11 Addressable FirePrint Fire Detector 500-033290 screw holes. All HFP-11 detectors are approved for DB-11 Detector Mounting Base for Series 11 500-094151 operation within the UL specified temperature range DB-11E Detector Base(small) 500-094151E of 32 to 100 degrees F (0 to 38 degrees C). AD-11P Air Duct Housing for Series 11 500-095656 AD-HR Air Duct Housing w/Relay for H-Series 500-033260 Application Data Intelligent Detector DB-HR Relay Base for H-Series Intelligent Detectors 500.033220 Installation of the HFP-11 series of fire detectors ADBH-11 Audible base 500-033210 requires a two-wire circuit. In many retrofit cases, RL-HC Remote(red)alarm indicator-4'octagon box mount 500.033230 existing wiring may be used. "-tapping" is permittedRLMIN Remote(red)alarmindicator--sin le gang box mount 500o3s3to only for Style 4 (Class B) wiring.The HFP-11 is polarity LK-11 Base Locking Kit for Series 11 detectors 500-695350 insensitive.This feature can greatly reduce installation DMK-11 Series 11 Maint Kit(replacement labyrinth and bug 500-695336 an debugging time. HFP-11 fire detectors can be bug screen) applied within the maximum 30 foot center spacing In Canada Order: (900 sq. ft. areas) as referenced in NFPA 72.This HFR11C Addressable FirePrint Fire Detector(ULC) 500-0951127 applications guideline is based on ideal conditions, DB-11C Detector Mounting Base for Series1I(ULC) 500-095667 specifically, smooth ceiling surfaces, minimal air AD-11PC Air Duct Housing(ULC) 500-095984 movement, and no physical obstructions between DB-HRC Relay Base for Series 11 Intelligent Detectors(ULC) 500-033220C potential fire sources and the detector. Do not mount ADBH-11C Audible Base for Series 11Intelligent Detector(ULC) 500-0332107 detectors in close proximity to ventilation or heating * and air conditioning outlets. Exposed joints or beamed ceilings may also affect safe spacing limitations for SIEMENS Fire Safety Adapterm Stand Alone Selectable Strobe P" ENGINEER AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS • The Adapter'' feature offers four field selectable I�liifliyi VIII�r��i�i ��III 7�� AGENT RELEASE candela strobe values— 15/75, 30/75, 75 or 110 for ceiling and wall mount • Operates in either sync or non-sync mode ' • Low current draw • Integral universal mounting-single gang, 5 AGENT RELEASE I double gang or 4"square box • Colors-red or off-white Agent Release Strobe s_ • ADA/NFPA/ANSI compliant • 4 UL 1971 listed for both wall and ceiling mount-CSFM, FM and ULC Listed • Made in U.S.A., ISO 9001 certified • A Dual Sync Control Module or PAD-3 is only required to activate the Instant Sync feature, nothing to set or change at the strobe unit Ips Adapter Strobe Adapter Strobe Bell Plate Description The U-MCS series and U-MCS-6090V,U-MCS-609OV-W The U-MCS Series uses a terminal block for easy installa- strobes combine state of the art electronics to provide tion and the U-MCS-6090V, U-MCS-6090V-W uses a reliability and low current draw to meet visual life safety pigtail(4 wire)connection. applications.The Adapter feature offers four field select- able candela settings-15/75,30/75,75 or 110. Strobe Synchronization requires the Dual Sync Module or PAD-3. o®� Detail — Adapter Engineering Specifications 5L selector switch The visual notification appliances shall be Adapter U-MCS Series or U-MCS-6090V,U-MCS-609OV-W field selectable The integral universal mounting plate of the U-MCS candela strobe appliance,or approved equal.They shall be provides for easy installation with single gang,double listed to UL1971 (Standard for Safety Signaling Devices for gang or 4"square box mounting.The lens construction the Hearing Impaired)for indoor applications,and shall be provides high candela output with low current consump- ADA/NFPA/ANSI compliant. tion while meeting UL and ADA standards. The strobe shall produce a flash rate of one(1)flash per The U-MCS-6090V,U-MCS-609OV-W provides the same second over the Operating Voltage Range limits of 16 to strobe choices and is constructed of metal for mounting 32Vdc.The strobe light shall consist of a Xenon flash tube bell or chime devices to the plate. enclosed in a rugged,clear polycarbonate lens. Inputs The U-MCS Series&U-MCS-6090V, U-MCS-6090V-W shall be compatible with standard reverse polarity circuit supervision by an FACP.The Strobe shall be of low use a Xenon flashtube with solid state circuitry for current design,and shall provide a minimum of four(4) maximum reliability and efficiency.Strobes have a ,,, rounded dome shape made of clear polycarbonate. CATALOG NUMBER 2550 CERBERVS �' PYROTRONKS U=MMT Series 8-Tone Horn -- ENGINEER AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS • Universal Mount: 1, 2 Gang or 4" Square back Box Mounting • Horn or Horn / Strobe Units • 24 Vdc Units Available with 15/75, 30/75, 60/75, 75 or 110 Candela Strobes t "` • Electronic Selectable 8-Tone: Horn, Temporal, Bell, Hi-Lo, Chime, Siren, Slow-Whoop and , Single Stroke Bell ' " • Raised Mounting Design - Eliminating Need for Deeper Back Box • Very Low Inrush Current • Available for Wall or Ceiling Mount Devices (in Red or White Colors) ' "' • Light Plastic Grill Construction • Low Operating Current - DC or Full Wave • ADA/UL 1971 Horn-Strobe Versions • Screw Terminals Accept #12 AWG • OListed, CSFM, NYMEA & FM Approvals Pending Description the box.This design helps eliminate possible ground faults from jamming everything in the box. Units are also available Maximum dBA output,very low inrush current and the in two different colors, red or white. lowest operating current DC or Full Wave are characteristics The U-MMT horn/strobe units construction consists of of all new Cerberus Pyrotronics devices. The electronic Xenon flashtube with solid state circuitry for maximum U-MMT horns provide maximum reliability and low current reliability and efficiency. The full range of new strobes have drain for every application, a rounded dome shape made of clear Lexan�. "FIRE" The U-MMT series 8-tone horn operates on a current of 20 letters are visible on the front mounting plate.The overall to 40ma at 24Vdc depending on tone selected. The audio lens is 2.0"x 2 7/8"with a height of 1 3/8". portion of the signal provides a 91 to 97 dB output.The U- Strobe units can also be synchronous when used with the MMT mounts on a single gang,while all other units are either 1, 2 gang or 4" square mounting. SCM-F sync or DSC (Dual Sync Control) units. Cerberus Pyrotronics notification devices are designed with To order a device in "white" use a %W"at the end of the the installer in mind.The U-MMT series devices are con- model number(i.e., U-MMT-W). structed with all of the electronics in the housing and not in ' " CATALOG NUMBER 2542 h: Typical Wiring U-MMT-1G Horn fO (Dim. 4.50"H x 2.75"W x 1.25"D) ' To next device or E.O.L. (Style Y-Class Alarm Polarity - "B"ckts.) or return shown from to F.A.C.P. (Style Control Panel or Z-Class"A"ckts.) PR previous device NotificationPill Appliance ckt. U-MMT Horn/Strobe (Strobe&Horn on same circuits) U-MMT 8-Tone 1,2 or 4 Square Mounting Select o � o O o 0 00 `-' 0 o r- or Notification 1 or Appliance ct To next device IF or E.O.L. 11 U-MMT Horn/Strobe (Strobe& Horn on separate circuits) Cut jumpers to power audible signal and strobe om s parate c Device Dimemsions: 4.75"H frircuits x 4.75"W x 1.33"D Alarm Polarity shown from To next device or E.O.L. Control Panel or (Style Y-Class"B"ckts.) previous device or return to F.A.C.P.(Style Z-Class "A"ckts.) Strobe Notification Appliance ckt Audible Notification Appliance ckt. For more detailed wiring diagram refer to U-MMT Installation Instruction Sheet Notes: U-MMT-1 G,U-MMT and U-MMT Horn/Strobes devices must be connected to compatible non-pulsing signal circuits when temporal tone is chosen.Steady current output and appropriate voltage required. When audible signal and strobe are connected to same notification appliance circuit,current rating is a combination of audible signal and strobe current. (Add -C for Canadian ULC listed model) (Add -CF for Canadian French ULC listed model) SIEMENS Fire Safety HMS Series Intelligent InitiatingDevices Manual Fire Alarm Boxes ENGINEER AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS HMS-S and HMS-D Intelligent Manual Fire Alarm Boxes for FireFinder XLS Control Panels • Durable Design • Shock and Vibration Resistant • Pull Down Lever Remains Down Until Reset R '' • Custom MicrocomputerChipTechnology ° • Dynamic Supervision • Polarity Insensitive with SureWireT"^Technology - • a • Reset with Allen Key • No Break Rods Necessary !* • TWOWire Operation • Surface or Semif lush Installation • DPU Programs and Verifies Device's !!1" Address and Tests Device's Functionality • Electronic Address Programming is Easier HMS-S HMS-D and More Dependable Single-Action Station Dual-Action Station P" • Single and Double Action Models Available • @UL , Listed,CSFM, FM and NYMEA Submitted Introduction HMS-S and HMS-D intelligent manual fire alarm boxes The HM -S and HMS-D manual fire alarm boxes operate provide the markets' most advanced method of with FireFinderXLS Series control panels. address programming and supervision, combined with sophisticated control panel communication. Each HMS The manual fire alarm box's microcomputer chip has the manual fire alarm box incorporates custom microcom- capacity of storing,in memory,identification information puter chip.The microcomputer chip technology, and its as well as important operating status information. sophisticated bi-directional communication capabilities Siemens BuildingTechnologies Inc.,Fire Safety with the control panel, achieves the state of an "Intelli- Division innovative technology also allows all HMS gent Initiating Device" Series Intelligent manual fire alarm boxes to be pro- grammed by using the Model DPU Programmer/ Description Tester. The Programmer/Tester is a compact, portable, The HMS-S and HMS-D are constructed of durable menu driven accessory which makes programming and molded polycarbonate material which is matte finished testing a manual fire alarm box device faster, easier in red with raised white lettering.The housing accom- and more dependable than previous methods.The DPU eliminates the need for the device's mechanical modates a "pull-down" lever which, when operated, locks in position indicating the manual fire alarm box addressing mechanisms, such as program jumpers, has been activated.The pull down lever remains down calls stts thchese or rotary dials because the DPU einto ni- e�w calls sets the manual fire alarm box's address into and locked until the manual fire alarm box is reset. its microcomputer chip,nonvolatile memory.Vibration, The manual fire alarm box is reset only by opening the corrosion and other conditions which deteriorate mechani- hinged housing cover with an allen key and then cal addressing mechanisms are no longer a cause closing and locking the cover. for concern. CATALOG NUMBER 6306 SIEMENS Fire Safety TRI Series 7 Intelligent Initiating Devices Interface Modules for MXL Fire Detection Panels TRI-S,TRI-D,TRI-R ENGINEER AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS • Interfaces and Supervises Normally Open Contacts • Integral SPDT Relay (up to 4 amps) on TRI-R Model • Dual Input on TRI-D Model • Multi-color L.E.D. indicates status (green, amber, red) II a� • Easy front access to programming port and wiring terminals • Mounts in 4 inch square 21/4 deep box, or double gang box • Dynamic Supervision G Wr". esF J IP "A. • Comes with 5x5 inch faceplate ein� 6iE • Two wire operation ra'rk • Model DPU or FPI-32 Programs and Verifies Device's Address and Tests Device's functionalityM die u,. • Electronic Address Programming is Easy and Dependable • U(, UL Listed, ULC Listed CFSM, FM, NYMEA Approved Introduction module reports the contact's status to the control The TRI Series Intelligent interface modules are panel. The TRI-S model can only monitor and report the designed to provide the means of interfacing direct status of the contact, while the TRI-R incorporates an shorting devices to the MXL system's ALD loop addressable Form C relay. The TRI-R relay and contact device input are controlled at the same address. For circuit. the MXL system, the relay and input contact can be The TRI Series Intelligent interface modules provide controlled as a separate function. The relay is typically the market's most advanced method of address used where control or shunting of external equipment " programming and supervision, combined with sophis- is required. ticated control panel communication. Each TRI Series interface module incorporates a microcomputer chip. The TRI-D is a dual input module and is designed to The TRI Series microcomputer chip technology and its supervise and monitor two sets of dry contacts.This + sophisticated bi-directional communication capabilities interface module requires two address settings. The with the control panel, achieve the state of an "Intelli- TRI-D is ideal for monitoring a waterflow switch and its gent Device." respective valve tamper switch. The TRI has a multi-color Light Emitting Diode that Description flashes green when operating normally, amber if unit The TRI Series Intelligent interface modules are avail- able in three models. The TRI-S and TRI-R are designed to monitor a normally open dry contact. The interface CATALOG NUMBER 6179 Vis" t�" +�" �* �" �" CITY OF ATLANTIC BEACH PERMIT BUILDING /ZONING DEPARTMENT APPLICATION # 800 Seminole Road Atlantic Beach,Florida 32233 �� D 7 =; r (904)247-5800 (904)247-5845 Fax www.coab.us 0�f 01 APPLICATION TRACKING FORM a RE ED DEPT: Y PLANNING Property Address: % �'i��r L^,-)7;L71 Z Y N BUILDING �f7 Ile i�J,6 �� f' N PUBLIC WORKS Applicant: Y N PUBLIC UTILITIES Y N FIRE DEPT. Project: Ilaya Y N PUBLIC SAFETY APPROVAL REQUIRED AGENCY: RECEIVED BY: INITIAL: DATE: ix LU 0 W Y N D.E.P HUFSTETLER 0 UJ Y N SA.R.W.M.D. CARPER Q VN ARMY CORPS of ENG CARPER Y N HOTELS&RESAURANTS HUFSTETLER APPLICATION STATUS CIRCLE ONE: SITE BUILDING DA AP INITI L: E: 11 7-07 1ST REV 9 PLANNING BUILDIN 2ND REV PUBLIC WORKS PUBLIC UTILITIES FIRE DEPT. 3RD REV PUBLIC SAFETY Return this form to the Building Department once you have entered your comments into the AS400. CITY OF ATLANTIC BEACH 1 j 800 SEMINOLE ROAD J ATLANTIC BEACH,FL 32233 INSPECTION PHONE LINE 247-5826 wilt INSPECTION EMAIL REQUEST: Buildin�dept@coab.us Application Number . . . 07-00001704 Date 12/31/07 Property Address . . . G BLVD Application type descriptio ECTRIC ONLY Property Zoning . . . . . . . TO BE UPDATED Application valuation . . . . 0 ication desc early power gate house --- -- - --- -- --- - -- -- - - - - -- - ------- - Owner Contractor - --- ----- - - -- -- -- - -- - -- - -- --- - -- - - --- - - --------- AMERICAN ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR Q/A:GRASS, ROBERT 5065 ST. AUGUSTINE RD. 43 JACKSONVILLE FL 32207 (904) 737-7770 -- - - --- - - ----- - -- ---- - - - - - - - - - - - ------ ---- - -- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -- --- - -- - ----- Permit . . . . . . ELECTRICAL PERMIT Additional desc . . Permit Fee . . . . 300 . 00 Plan Check Fee . 00 Issue Date . . . . 12/19/07 Valuation . . . . 0 Expiration Date . . 6/18/08 - - --- -- - -- ------ -- ------ ----------- ---- - - -- ---- - -- - ---- --- - - --- -- - ------ ---- Fee summary Charged Paid Credited Due --- - ---- - -- - -- - -- - --- - - - - -- - - - ------ - - -- ---- - - - ---- -- - - -- Permit Fee Total 300 . 00 300 . 00 . 00 . 00 Plan Check Total . 00 . 00 . 00 . 00 Grand Total 300 . 00 300 . 00 . 00 . 00 PERMIT IS APPROVED ONLY IN ACCORDANCE WITH ALL CITY OF ATLANTIC BEACH ORDINANCES AND THE FLORIDA BUILDING CODES. \1j } CITY OF ATLANTIC BEACH 800 SEMINOLE ROAD ATLANTIC BEACH,FL 32233 INSPECTION PHONE LINE 247-5826 INSPECTION EMAIL REQUEST: Building dept(akoab.us Application Number . . . . . 07-00001365 Date 9/28/07 Property Address . . . . . . 6010 FLEET LANDING BLVD Application type description ELECTRIC ONLY Property Zoning . . . . . . . TO BE UPDATED Application valuation . . . . 0 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- Application desc TEMP POLE ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- Owner Contractor ------------------------ ------------------------ AMERICAN ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR Q/A:GRASS, ROBERT 5065 ST. AUGUSTINE RD. #3 JACKSONVILLE FL 32207 (904) 737-7770 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- Permit . . . . . . ELECTRICAL PERMIT Additional desc . . Permit Fee . . . . 70 . 00 Plan Check Fee . 00 Issue Date . . . . Valuation . . . . 0 Expiration Date . . 3/26/08 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- Fee summary Charged Paid Credited Due ----------------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- Permit Fee Total 70 . 00 70 . 00 .00 . 00 Plan Check Total . 00 . 00 . 00 . 00 Grand Total 70 . 00 70 . 00 . 00 . 00 PERMIT IS APPROVED ONLY IN ACCORDANCE WITH ALL My OF ATLANTIC BEACH ORDINANCES AND THE FLORIDA BUILDING CODES. CITY OF ATLANTIC BEACH ELECTRICAL PERMIT APPLICATION _..._ Date: 9 4 7. Property Addres ^ `1 : Owner: �ay)A(ns) Telephone#: Contractor: � � i� ( Telephone#: l} Contractor Address: Qom?' kc• RL11 )S- ,Of Fax Contractor Signature: In consideration of permit given for doing the work as described in the above statement, we hereby agree to perform said work in accordance with the attached plans and specifications which are a part hereof and in accordance with the City of Atlantic Beach ordinance and standards of good practice listed therein. Building: Building Type: ❑ Trailer Service: If other construction is p New ❑ Residence ❑ Temp. 00 New being done on this building Or site,list the building ❑ Old ® Commercial ❑ Signs ❑ Increase Permit number: ❑ Re-wire ❑ Addition Sq.Ft. ❑ Repair Conductor Size: AMPS: COPPER ALUMINUM Switch or RACE Breaker AMPS PH W VOLT�gt) WAY �6 Existing Service RACE Size AMPS PH W VOLT WAY Meter Number Feeders: NO. SIZE NO SIZE NO SIZE Lighting Outlets CONCEALED OPEN Receptacles CONCEALED OPEN Switches Incandescent Fluorescent & M.V. Fixed 0.100 AMPS OVER BELL Appliances TRANSFER. Air H.P.RATING H.P. RATING CEILING KW-HEAT Conditionin COMP. MOTOR OTHER MOTORS AMPS HEAT Motors 0-1 H.P. VOLTAGE PH NO. OVER 1 H.P. PHS UNDER600V OVER600V Transformers NO. KVA NO. KVA No.Neon_Transf. Ea.—Sign Miscellaneous 800 Seminole Road •Atlantic Beach, Florida 32233-5445 Phone: (904)247-5800. Fax: (904)247-5845. httn://www.ei.atiantic-beach.n.us Revised 1/04 4, CITY OF ATLANTIC BEACH J 800 SEMINOLE ROAD r) ►} ATLANTIC BEACH,FL 32233 INSPECTION PHONE LINE 247-5826 INSPECTION EMAIL REQUEST: Building-deptncoab.us Application Number . . . . . 07-00001150 Date 9/27/07 Property Address . . . . . . 1 FLEET LANDING BLVD Application type description COMMERCIAL ADDITION/ALTERATION Property Zoning . . . . . . . TO BE UPDATED Application valuation . . . . 250000 ----- ---- --------------------- --- ------------ ----------- ------ -------------- Application desc gate house 400 sq ftg --------- -- ------ -------------------------------- ------- ----------- ---- ----- Owner Contractor ------------ ------------ -------------------- -- -- R. P . C. GENERAL CONTRACTORS 248 LEVY RD ATLANTIC BEACH FL 32233 (904) 241-4416 -------------------- - Structure Information 000 000 - --------------------- Construction Type . . . . . TYPE 5-A Occupancy Type . . . . . . RESIDENTIAL Flood Zone . . . . . . . . ZONE X --- - ------------ -- ----------------------------- ----------- -------- - --------- Permit BUILDING PERMIT Additional desc . . Permit Fee . . . . 910 . 05 Plan Check Fee 455 . 00 Issue Date . . . . Valuation . . . . 250000 Expiration Date . . 3/25/08 ---- ---- ----- --- -------------------------------- ------- ---------- ----------- Special Notes and Comments *2004 FLORIDA BUILDING CODE W/ 105- 106 SUPPLEMENTS . 2004 FLORIDA FIRE PREVENTION CODE 2005 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE --- - -------------------- --------------------------------------- -- - ---------- Other Fees . . . . . . . . . CITY RADON SURCHARGE . 22 CAPITAL IMPROVEMENT 325 . 00 ST CONSTRUCTION SURCHARGE 4 . 03 AB CONSTRUCTION SURCHARGE . 44 STATE RADON SURCHARGE 4 . 26 SEWER IMPACT FEES 1250 . 00 WATER IMPACT FEE 200 . 00 WATER CROSS CONNECTION 35 . 00 ------------------------------------------- ---- -------- ---- ----------------- Fee summary Charged Paid Credited Due ---- ---- ----- ---- ---------- ---------- ---------- --- ------- Permit Fee Total 910 . 05 910 . 05 . 00 . 00 Plan Check Total 455 . 00 455 . 00 . 00 . 00 Other Fee Total 1818 . 95 1818 . 95 . 00 . 00 Grand Total 3184 . 00 3184 . 00 . 00 . 00 PERMIT IS APPROVED ONLY IN ACCORDANCE WITH ALL CITY OF ATLANTIC BEACH ORDINANCES AND THE FLORIDA BUILDING CODES. CITY OF ATLANTIC BEACH PERMIT BUILDING / ZONING DEPARTMENT APPLICATION # 800 Seminole Road Atlantic Beach,Florida 32233 LL` (904)247-5800 V (904)247-5845 Fax www.coab.us APPLICATION TRACKING FORM a RE ED DEPT: / [fN PLANNING 9 Property Address: �r��T Z^;7 ,n9 W1Vh Z BUILDING�mr fro 6e�'� Q A jPUBLIC WORKS Applicant: / ( � PUBLIC UTILITIES Y N FIRE DEPT. Project: Y N PUBLIC SAFETY APPROVAL REQUIRED AGENCY: RECEIVED BY: INITIAL: DATE: Ww Y N D.E.P HUFSTETLER CU wY S.J.R.W.M.D. CARPER Y ARMY CORPS of ENG CARPER' Y N HOTELS&RESAURANTS HUFSTETLER APPLICATION STATUS CIRCLE ONE: SITE BUILDING 24 AP INITIAL: DAT : 1 ST REV J G PLANNING BUILDING 0 0 2ND REV PUBLIC WORKS PUBLIC UTILITIES FIRE DEPT. 3RD REV PUBLIC SAFETY Return this form to the Building Department once you have entered your comments into the AS400. j"L'1lJ CITY OF ATLANTIC BEACH PERMIT BUILDING /ZONING DEPARTMENT APPLICATION # yr 800 Seminole Road J Atlantic Beach,Florida 32233 Jstl�r (904)247-5800 (904)247-5845 Fax www.coab.us Q 0� APPLICATION TRACKING FORM RE ED DEPT: Y PLANNING Property Address: ��T LR��n9 �y� Z Y N BUILDING N PUBLIC WORKS Applicant: Y N PUBLIC UTILITIES Y N FIRE DEPT. Project: Y N PUBLIC SAFETY APPROVAL N REQUIRED AGENCY: RECEIVED BY: INITIAL: DATE: WLU Y N D.E.P HUFSTETLER 0 0 LU Y N SA.R.W.M.D. CARPER Y N ARMY CORPS of ENG CARPER Y N HOTELS&RESAURANTS HUFSTETLER APPLICATION STATUS CIRCLE ONE: SITE BUILDING DA, A INITIAL: DATE: ❑ 1 ST REV PLANNING BUILDING 2ND REV ❑ PUBLIC WORKS PUBLIC UTILITIES FIRE DEPT. 3RD REV PUBLIC SAFETY Return this form to the Building Department once you have entered your comments into the AS400. ..... _....._.___._.. LETTER OF TRANSMITTAL General Contractors, Inc. 248 LEVY ROAD / P.O. Box 330775 ATLANTIC HACfl, fLORIDA 32233 (904) 241-4416 /FAX(904) 241-4427 COMPANY: City of Atlantic Beach ATTENTION: Shirley Graham ADDRESS: 1200 Sandpiper Lane DATE: April 12,2007 @ CITY/STATE/ZIP: Atlantic Beach,FL 32233 REFERENCE/JOB: The Palms Fleet Landing#050179 WE ARE SENDING YOU: ® ATTACHED ❑UNDER SEPARATE COVER VIA Hand Delivered THE FOLLOWING ITEMS: ❑SHOP DRAWINGS ❑PLANS ❑SAMPLES ❑SPECIFICATIONS ❑COPY OF LETTER ❑CHANGE ORDER ❑ OTHER COPIES DATE No. DESCRIPTION 2ea. Product Approval for roof the underlayment,EIFS.Roof Tiles, Aluminum Windows and Sliding Glass Doors 2ea, Energy Calculations 2ea. Structural Calculations I Permit Application 5sets Plans and specifications(2 signed and sealed) THESE ARE TRANSMITTED AS CHECKED BELOW: ® FOR APPROVAL ❑APPROVED AS SUBMITTED ❑RESUBMIT COPIES FOR APPROVAL ® FOR YOUR USE ❑APPROVED ❑SUBMIT COPIES FOR DISTRIBUTION ❑ AS REQUESTED ❑RETURN CORRECTED PRINTS ❑ FOR REVIEW AND COMMENT Remarks. SIGNED: BeyeYly Jones Contract Administrator Copy to File. NOTICE OF COMMENCEMENT State of_ L.pr?/ Tax Folio No. County of j t l V q To Whom It May Concern: The undersigned hereby informs you that improvements will be made to certain real property, and in accordance with Section 713 of the Florida Statutes,the following information is stated in this NOTICE OF COMMENCEMENT. Legal Description of property being improved: f'I ��:►�✓ � C�� r �o fir'C o�r l r , �-zr� y�� SV& 7 f 17 Address of property being improved: OM5- I ZIT J 4-x1b w6- Ir-DI , /)Q)0, 7-kP. &6 rL A)U General description of improvements: 1),—!�7r10 FI PV-2j _IVL H' -S Owner: ^(cam 0/'61 Ft.t c �.f vr�o "VC7 Address: �et/L J"ZCe�' Cr7N /k(7 �d1� Owner's interest in site of the improvement: Fee Simple Titleholder(if other than owner): /`VAA Name: 6le P Contractor: k Pc. Gi&y L-r x, Address: --q 4/9 !� �! • /�}'TLi�ax)r l g �3 �1 33 Telephone No.:/90q�A4/–)Y4f16 Fax No: Surety(if any) /v/R Address: Amount of Bond$ Telephone No: Fax No: Name and address of any person making a loan for the construction of the improvements Name: Address: Phone No: Fax No: Name of person within the State of Florida, other than himself, designated by owner upon whom notices or other documents may be served: Name: �- Address: //V(rf Telephone No: Fax No: In addition to himself, owner designates the following person to receive a copy of the Lienor's Notice as provided in Section 713.06(2)(b),Florida Statues. (Fill in at Owner's option) Name: Address: Telephone No: Fax No: Expiration date of Notice of Commencement(the expiration date is one (1)year from the date of recording unless a different date is specified): THIS SPACE FOR RECORDER'S USE ONLY OWNER / Signed: Date: 6'/ ` Before me thi /. day of �jG/51_ r '] in the County of Duval,State Doc#2007260554,OR BK 14134 Page 891, Df Florida,has > rsonall appeared -7otF Number Pages:1 Notary Public at arge,St, o-of Florida,Cotjnty of Duval. Filed&Recorded 08/13/2007 at 02:25 PM, qy commission expires: , JIM FULLER CLERK CIRCUIT COURT DUVAL COUNTY Personally Known: ver O or RECORDING$10.00 Produced Identification: '� nnmmission##DD5 expires September 3,L 9TP pp h�Q >00.355.7019 Sanded Tmy Fain-IMI-10a,Ine. s BUILDING PERMIT APPLICATION �n CITY OF ATLANTIC BEACH 800 Seminole Road,Atlantic Beach FL 32233 �,a�r Office: (904)247-5826 ■ Fax: (904)247-5845 /�ouSc Job Address: e i L� d/I C��lr'� ��y2%1C�. 61R-72E� Permit Number: Le al Description A- 7AR' C('71-167 ��e��' ��r✓c�� r�)i_5e 1 o�1 _ - I_ jV, � �«- �Al Reu�c�i�.C2 ry GF 77 5b/Vi,)& 71'i !9 ;Ott i/ht. GD. Wit-d4,,p.,4 Valuation of Work(Replacement Cost) 6;) "o4 bad ■ Class of Work(Circle one): � Addition Alteratio Repair Move _ tits ■ Use of existing/proposed structure s (Circle one): ommercia Residential usz= ■ If an existing structure, is a fire sprinkler system installed? ire a one): Yes No ■ Is approval of homeowner's association or other private entity required?(Circle one): Yes No Describe in detail the type of work to be performed: Tfy�v F xt5i/k6e 522tic lL(ez: Property Owner Information y� 'ou/VDgTiCti', 7 Name: A-✓ALC.-r r� 7-IN u i Al Z= T,QEi� Qress:Nkc FL o r L-14bi Y& 41 v City - State Zip 351,�33 Phone Contractor Information: /' �^r Name of Company:�J�C G -7lJFT,4-L- l�VT)P-fiCTRS Qualifying Agent:, ` e2-De Address:o2a5'L-ivy t�1 City�k6fi-�h'/L ff State 1'C Zip 3J�83 Office Phone 1l)D Job Site/Contact Number 5,5-32- State ' Z.State Certification/Registration# 04�,/n Office Fax# 4497 Architect Name& Phone # , ocL jl- u /—a63— �� , Engineer's Name & Phone# d/ Application is hereby made to obtain a permit to do the work and installations as indicated. I certify that no work or installation has commenced prior to the issuance of apermit and that all work will be performed to meet the standards o{all laws regulating construction in this1'urisdiction. This permit becomes null ani void if work as not commenced within six(6)months, or if construction or wor�C is suspended or abandoned for a period ofsiz(6)months at any time after work commenced. I understand that separate permits must be secured for Electrical Work,Plumbing,Signs, Wells,Pools,Furnaces,Boilers,Heaters,Tanks andAi. Conditioners,etc WARNING TO OWNER: YOUR FAILURE TO RECORD A NOTICE OF COMMENCEMENT MAY RESULT IN YOUR PAYING TWICE FOR IMPROVEMENTS TO YOUR PROPERTY. IF YOt INTEND TO OBTAIN FINANCING, CONSULT WITH YOUR LENDER OR AN ATTORNEY BEFORE RECORDING YOUR NOTICE OF COMMENCEMENT. I hereby certify that I have read a a i e this application and know the same to be true and correct. All provisions of aws and ordinances this ofwor will e complied with wh the a d herein or not. The granting of a ermit does not presume to give authori o violate or cancel the provisions o�; other federal,state, or local law eg c nstruction or the performance oyconstruction. Signature of Property Owner: Signature of Contract0 Sworn to and subsc ibed before. Swo, to and subs rib d before e this�Day of �f DO this Day ofzf i Notary Public;( Co missi # D 7168 Notary Public State of Florida °9 oe Ex ares September 3,2010 to "' uQaheth Teske rF OF P-�Bonded Troy Fain-Insurance,Inc.800.385-7019 My Commission DD415196 Expires 0410512009 DO NOT WRITE BELOW THIS LINE: OFFICE USE ONLY review RPc„t+ CITY OF ATLANTIC BEACH FPERMIT BUILDING / ZONING DEPARTMENT TION # Atlantic Seminole Road Atlantic Beach,Florida 32233 JF 11 (904)247-5800 pa (904)247-5845 Fax www.coab.us APPLICATION TRACKING FORM RE ED _ DEPT: gN PLANNING Property Address: % �'i��r L^�ng &Ih Z BUILDING N PUBLIC WORKS Applicant: / (. N PUBLIC UTILITIES Y N FIRE DEPT. Project: Y N PUBLIC SAFETY APPROVAL REQUIRED AGENCY: RECEIVED BY: INITIAL: DATE: w Y N D.E.P HUFSTETLER W0 0 w Y N SA.R.W.M.D. CARPER Y N ARMY CORPS of ENG CARPER Y N HOTELS&RESAURANTS HUFSTETLER APPLICATION STATUS CIRCLE ONE: SITE BUILDING DA AP INITIAL: DATE: 1ST REV D PLANNING ' BUILDING 0 2ND REV [3 P PLIC WORKS PU LI ITIES FIR DEPT. E] 3RD REVTE1 1:1PUBLIC SAFETY Return this form to the Building Department once you have entered your comments into the AS400. CITY OF ATLANTIC BEACH PERMIT CALCULATION SHEET J tt1 I Date: Address i SPECIAL NOTES /WATER IMPACT FEE $ 0 ,/SEWER IMPACT FEE $ 0 V/WATER METER/TAP $ tt11' ✓CAPITAL IMPROVEMENT$ EWER TAP TAP $ SECTION H PAVING ( ) $ CROSS CONNECTION $ �3 S OTHER $ GRAND TOTAL $ �S�C� WATER IMPACT FEE WORKSHEET ADDRESS: LJ-e- ID i �%2��• �7� jl--� RAI NAG E FIXTURE UN17 FIXTURE TYPE VALUE AS LOAD FD(TUR,E•S UNITS Automatic doth es washers comrnerciai 3 Aulomabb,cibttles washes, residential 2 Bathroom group consisting of water closet, lavatory, Bidet,'and bathtub or shower ' 6 Bathbsb (with or without overhead shovrer or whirlpool attachments) 2 t Bidet 2 Combination sink and trM 2 ' Dental Iayalory 0ishwashinq machine, domestic 2 Dr nkhg fountairvlcemaker Floor drains 2 Nose bib . / Ki Cc en sink, domestic 2 Kitchen.sink, dcx e wt food wasle grinder andlor &&washer 2 Lan dry tray 1 or 2 co artments 2 Lavato � Shower compartment; domestic 2 Sink 2 } Urinal 4 Urinal, 1 gallon perflush or less ' �1 ', '2 Wash sink d=(ar or multi le)each set of faucets 2 Water closet, fiushomeler tank, bllc or privals 4 Water dost privaLe Installation 4 / Water dosal pu0c installation 6 TOTAL NUMBER OF UMTS ..�. MULTIPLED X 20 TOTAL /9 LETTER OF TRANSMITTAL General Contractors, Inc. 248 LEVY ROAD / P.O.Box 330775 ATLANTIC BEAU, fLORIDA 32233 (904) 241-4416 /FAX(904) 241-4427 COMPANY: City of Atlantic Beach ATTENTION: Shirley Graham ADDRESS: 1200 Sandpiper Lane DATE: April 12,2007 REFERENCE/JOB: The Palms @ Fleet Landing CITY/STATE/ZIP: Atlantic Beach,FL 32233 #050179 WE ARE SENDING YOU: ® ATTACHED ❑UNDER SEPARATE COVER VIA Hand Delivered THE FOLLOWING ITEMS: ❑SHOP DRAWINGS ❑PLANS ❑SAMPLES ❑SPECIFICATIONS ❑COPY OF LETTER ❑CHANGE ORDER ❑ OTHER COPIES DATE No. DESCRIPTION 2ea Product Approval for roof tile underlayment,EIFS.Roof Tiles, Aluminum Windows and Sliding Glass Doors 2ea. Energy Calculations 2ea. Structural Calculations 1 Permit Application 5sets Plans and specifications(2 signed and sealed) THESE ARE TRANSMITTED AS CHECKED BELOW: ® FOR APPROVAL ❑APPROVED AS SUBMITTED ❑RESUBMIT COPIES FOR APPROVAL ® FOR YOUR USE ❑APPROVED ❑SUBMIT COPIES FOR DISTRIBUTION ❑ AS REQUESTED ❑RETURN CORRECTED PRINTS ❑ FOR REVIEW AND COMMENT Remarks. SIGNED: Beverly Jones Contract Administrator Copy to File. NOTICE OF COMMENCEMENT State of �L.v►�I r�f� Tax Folio No. County of To Whom It May Concern: The undersigned hereby informs you that improvements will be made to certain real property, and in accordance with Section 713 of the Florida Statutes,the following information is stated in this NOTICE OF COMMENCEMENT. Legal Description of property being improved: d&-,-9/1�- / �195 Address of property being improved: GIVE L-AWbw& 6 I rD /`��AP-774D• &fi-r I�OU54F General description of improvements: ASO X[Si/NFr :5F4ad7Ve,!E P�(p ALL W -S' 12- tC7'uQ� ✓A[, ONTI/VaiN L OaIVD&7-/cAJ Owner: 11>16id Address: 0016' Fz ee-r (-^D//1(6' &PD Owner's interest in site of the improvement: Fee Simple Titleholder(if other than owner): 6� Name: 'feP Contractor: kk- ��,rL=r�AZ, co UTieF&Cans' -=xjc.. Address: -q 4 8 /= � ?\J . /9 i c.6A)T-I L B N , >�� • 3 A:�33 Telephone No.:_�J 0�/'" ��' �`�' Fax No: q Oc/14/-y�7 Surety(if any) IR Address: Amount of Bond$ Telephone No: Fax No: Name and address of any person making a loan for the construction of the improvements Name: Address: Phone No: Fax No: Name of person within the State of Florida, other than himself, designated by owner upon whom notices or other documents may be served: Name: 06,6�'4 F�un G . Address:09)c-:; I''? � T 2-q-N-D 11v0- 13/VD191—L AMC- ,lr Telephone No: Fax No: In addition to himself, owner designates the following person to receive a copy of the Lienor's Notice as provided in Section 713.06(2)(b),Florida Statues. (Fill in at Owner's option) Name: Address: Telephone No: Fax No: Expiration date of Notice of Commencement (the expiration date is one (1)year from the date of recording unless a different date is specified): THIS SPACE FOR RECORDER'S USE ONLY OWNER / Signed: 11 Date: �7 Before me thi day of IlUOt45, ),Qp�7 in the County of Duval,State Doc#2007260554,OR BK 14134 Page 891, Df Florida,has rsonall appeared j-6,4 AI1:SJ5P-Vc Number Pages:1 votary Public at arge, St Florida,CoyRty of Duval. Filed&Recorded 08/13/2007 at 02:25 PM, �Iy commission expires: JIM FULLER CLERK CIRCUIT COURT DUVAL COUNTY Personally Known: ' <zY vert 0 or RECORDING$10.00 Produced Identification: z° '� Cnrornission#DD5671bb 9 n expires September 3,.Zulu 765.7019 rsr "vj''�� BUILDING PERMIT APPLICATION JS 't1 r CITY OF ATLANTIC BEACH 800 Seminole Road,Atlantic Beach FL 32233 Office: (904)247-5826 ■ Fax: (904)247-5845 Job Address: Oft :1_ee i Zan Jt�f,6l✓D el. Permit Number: Le al Description Iq 7�/4t�' D�i-14 t5 A(,e e ky weeS i o,41 _37,' 5,-�ri v ld �� c. 11V ryoFy ,Cs�ivr'i/lam �V1✓ C'o. d,ea��l Valuation of Work(Replacement Cost) $ O-A b a ■ Class of Work(Circle one): le Addition Alterati Repair Move ■ Use of existing/proposed structures (Circle one): mmercia Residential _ tsuS1= ■ If an existing structure, is a fire sprinkler system installed?( ire a one): Yes No ■ Is approval of homeowner's association or other private entity required? (Circle one): Yes No Describe in detail the type of work to be performed: Property Owner Information y,-- f �Q3/� E�-T -'OqND'"V 6 v Name: AM✓ _ dAl T n/u t/v 7t✓ T,-inc-AAddress:�2k e-4----rr L/4b/A/& ,&k D. City . - State Zip 33 Phone 0 4-,2 4/&-11460 Contractor Information: Name of Company:9k i6re-Agw, 4-c (�o/vTkfie-rRs 4-;14-Qualifying Agent: Address:,-2//9'4,—:,-v P� L RR. City� State 'E, Zip 11AA33 Office Phone '�0 U-"�),yl-qL1//v Job Site/Contact Number State Certification/Registration# (f 6GD!�D(v/n Office Fax# d L,/-.;Z'T/— 4491 Architect Name & Phone# &o�L y ct_ t C• G� n8��1✓n/ �f!`7f7-4/ -� &5/ Engineer's Name & Phone # FL -'o,c�su`Ti ufr 4&7 &1A14 -&-2S 94 Application is hereby made to obtain a ermit to do the work and installations as indicated. 1 certify that no work or installation has commenced prior to thr issuance of apermit and that all work will be performed to meet the standards o all laws regulating construction in this 'urisdiction. This permit becomes null anc void if work isnot commenced within six(6)months, or if construction or word s suspended or abandoned for a perioofsix(6)months at any time after work i, commenced. 1 understand that separate permits must be secured for Electrical Work,Plumbing,Signs, Wells,Pools,Furnaces,Boilers,Heaters,Tanks andAi, Conditioners,etc. WARNING TO OWNER: YOUR FAILURE TO RECORD A NOTICE OF COMMENCEMENT MAN RESULT IN YOUR PAYING TWICE FOR IMPROVEMENTS TO YOUR PROPERTY. IF YOL INTEND TO OBTAIN FINANCING, CONSULT WITH YOUR LENDER OR AN ATTORNEY BEFORE RECORDING YOUR NOTICE OF COMMENCEMENT. I hereby cern�y that 1 have read a a i e this application and know the same to be true and correct. All provisions of,Jaws and ordinances governing this pr ofwork will be complied with wh the a d herein or not. The granting of a ermit does not presume to give authori o violate or cancel the provisions of a other federal,state, or local law eg c nstruction or the performance of�onstruction. Signature of Property Owner: Signature of Contracto Sworn to and subsc ibed before Swo to and subs rib d efore e this lb Day of DU this Day of i Notary pablic• Nol ana�u C0 missi D# 7168 40 bty� Notary Public State of Florida v� 4' Ex ires September 3,2010 Flilaheth T@SI(e i F OF F-�Bonded Troy Fain-Insurance,Inc.wo•385-7o19 + Q My commission DD415196 Expires 04/05/2009 DO NOT WRITE BELOW THIS LINE: OFFICE USE ONLY Public Works Plan Review Comments Date: 8/21/07 Initials: Project Narne/Address:I Fleet Landing B,l.vd. Application/Permit#: 07-11.50 Check Box Application Tracking Comments To Add Comment Provide impervious surface calculations, ❑ Provide erosion and sediment control plans with.installation details, maintenance schedule and turbitity barriers Provide drainage plans showing site topography (flow arrows, etc.) ❑ Provide construction site management plan, including Right-of-Way Perm-ft if using right-of-way for constY tction parking. ' Provide a pre-construction.topographic survey prepared by a Florida Licensed ❑ Professional Land Surveyor. showing V contours, Section 24-66(b) of the Land Development Regulations requires on-si.te storage for increased runoff. Provide Delta volume calculations and on-site retention required.per- ❑ Section 24-66(b), (See attached info. Sheet) If on-site storage is.required, a post construction topographic survey documenting proper ❑ construction will be required. A Right-of-Way Permit must be obtained. ❑ A Revocable Encroachment Permit must be obtained for Pool.—Wellpoint(if used) must discharge into vegetated area 10' minimum froth street ❑ or drainage feature (swale or structwe) All driveway aprons must be concrete, 5 inches.thick, 4000 psi, with fibennesh from.the edge of the pavement to the property line. Reinforcing.rods or.mesh are not allowed in ❑ the ROW (Commercial driveways— 6"thick). Any utility cuts in the road must be repaired using COJ Standard Detail Case X and must be overlaid 1.0 feet in each direction from the center of the cut. Repair must be shown, on ❑ the plain, Provide maintenance of traffic plan detailing access for commercial traffic, especially WSI garbage trucks. ❑ 1nl --GQ tF3 i—c�J 97 V715; h1 F:1P1anRev,iewCommenrs-.PW.doc AUG `1 1 20 BY:--0 ----------- =RPC- • General Contractors, Inc. 248 Levy Road Atlantic Beach, Fl 32233 i i Fleet Landing "Gate House" M. O .T. Plan (Temporary North Gate) FOOD GENTE(, I G�q 4r, � d `k-bte- �SrDEd .S1GN TEMPORARY/ I `� FLIS FET LAm9Ik& ENTRANLF I � I � I2 i rj'""''J`% CITY OF ATLANTIC BEACH FAPPLICATION MIT BUILDING / ZONING DEPARTMENT # St1 J 800 Seminole Road Atlantic Beach,Florida 32233 (904)247-5800FaX �� (904)247-5845 O,'� www.coab.us APPLICATION TRACKING FORM RE ED DEPT: Ly-'141 PLANNING Property Address: T Z^i-)? 9 �Flyh z Y N BUILDING IlD(IcYp L/ �� = N PUBLIC WORKS Applicant: //lr, 0 Y N PUBLIC UTILITIES Y N FIRE DEPT. Project: Y N PUBLIC SAFETY APPROVAL U) REQUIRED AGENCY: RECEIVED BY: INITIAL: DATE: W U Y N D.E.P HUFSTETLER oLU Y S.J.R.W.M.D. CARPER Y ARMY CORPS of ENG CARPER* Y N HOTELS&RESAURANTS HUFSTETLER APPLICATION STATUS CIRCLE ONE: SITE BUILDING DA, AP INITIAL: DAT 7F-71 1 ST REV PLANNING BUILDING 0 717 [:] 2NP REV Fl, Q PUBLIC WORKS PUBLIC UTILITIES FIRE DEPT. 3RD REvT13 I r, I T- PUBLIC SAFETY Return this form to the Building Department once you have entered your comments into the AS400. Public Works Plan Review Comments Date: 8/21/07 Initials: Project Narne/Address:l Fleet Landing Blvd. Application/Permit 0: 07-11.50 Check Box Application Tracking Comments To Add Comment Provide impervious surface calculations. ❑ ]Provide erosion and sediment control plan,with.installation details, maintenance y schedule and turbitity barriers (51) Provide drainage plans showing site topography (flow arrows, etc.) ❑ Provide construction site management plan, including Right-of-Way Permit if using right-of-way for construction parking. ❑ ' Provide a pre-construction,topographic survey prepared by a Florida Licensed ❑ Professional Land Surveyor, showing I' contours, Section 24-66(b) of the Land Development Regulations requires on-site storage for increased runoff. Provide Delta volume calculations and on-site retention required per ❑ Section 24-66(b). (See attached info. Sheet) If on-site storage is.required, a post construction topographic survey documenting proper 11construction-will be required. A Right-of-Way Permit must be obtained. ❑ A Revocable Encroachment Permit must be obtained for ❑ Pool.—Wellpoint(if used) must discharge into vegetated area 10' minimum from.street ❑ or drainage feature (swale or structure) All driveway aprons must be concrete, 5 inches thick, 4000 psi, with fibenmesh.from,the edge of the pavement to the property line. Reinforcing.rods or mesh are not allowed in ❑ the ROW (Commercial driveways— 6"thick). Any utility cuts in the road must be repaired using COJ Standard Detail Case X and must be overlaid 1.0 feet in each direction from the center of the cut. Repair roust be shown.on ❑ the plap,:_ Provide ni:t ntenance of traffic plan detailing access for commercial traffic, especially WSJ garbage trucks, nl i i� s �i� 1 "� � rte, u (; t:\P)anReviewCom ments-.PW.docy' AUG �.,2 1 2007 tf J BY:--_�_'_L_____________ ERNE Contractors, Inc. 248 Levy Road Atlantic Beach, Fl 32233 Fleet Landing "Gate House" M. O . T. Plan (Temporary North Gate) FOOD Ljo► I � a CENTEP, If I I. �oc�blt• WAD SIGN - — TEMf AAky FLEET LAt4q LN&- ENTAAN GE I2 it f j -- I --- j ,1 f CITY OF ATLANTIC BEACH j 800 SEMINOLE ROAD ATLANTIC BEACH,FL 32233 INSPECTION PHONE LINE 247-5826 ! fiic 'r INSPECTION EMAIL REQUEST: Building-dept(a gab.us Application Number . . . . . 08-00000016 Date 1/07/08 Property Address . . . . . . 6010 FLEET LANDING BLVD Application type description ELECTRIC ONLY Property Zoning . . . . . . . TO BE UPDATED Application valuation . . . . 0 -- -- -- ------ -- -- --- - -- --------------- - --- ------ - --- ---- ---- - -- -------------- Application desc FIRE ALARM (APPROVED BY JAX FIRE) -------------- ------ -- ----------------- -- -- ----- ------- --- - -- - --- ----------- Owner Contractor --- -------- -- ----------- --- ---- - ----- -- - -- -- -- -- W.W. GAY FIRE PROTECTION 522 STOCKTON STREET JACKSONVILLE FL 32204 (904) 387-7973 ------------ -------- -- ---------------------------- ------- ---- --------------- Permit . . . . . . ELECTRICAL PERMIT Additional desc . . Permit Fee . . . . 35 . 00 Plan Check Fee . 00 Issue Date . . . . Valuation . . . . 0 Expiration Date . . 7/05/08 --- ---------- --- ------------------------------ -------- -- -------------------- Fee summary Charged Paid Credited Due ------------ ----- ---------- ---------- - -- ------- ---------- Permit Fee Total 35 . 00 35 . 00 . 00 . 00 Plan Check Total . 00 . 00 . 00 . 00 Grand Total 35 . 00 35 . 00 . 00 . 00 PERMIT IS APPROVED ONLY IN ACCORDANCE WITH ALL CITY OF ATLANTIC BEACH ORDINANCES AND THE FLORIDA BUILDING CODES. Turner Main Office:480 Edgewood Ave.S. Treasure/Space Coast,Floddo Order. 3184197 ,""Post FI 32205-3775 (772)621-7905 Work Date: 01/30/08 Wednesday Pest Phone:(904)355-5300 Tampa,Fiowo Daytona,Florida Time: 01:00 Fax:(904)353-1488 (813)681-6381 (386)788-8303 Map: !. i Control Toll Free:(800)225-5305 Si.Marys,Georgia Route: What's Bugging You? ;,.,.> ,,;;r,�s�.;.,c, (912)576-1300 Tech: BFOGLE BOB FOGLE Location:[162591] Bill-To:[128579] Lic: The Palms @ Fleet Landing Target Pest: Gate House Last Service: 1 Fleet Landing Blvd Terms NET 30 Mayport,FL 32233-4599 PO: PRE-COM FINAL FINAL SOIL GUARD HOUSE FINAL SOIL GUARD HOUSE/ANNA/POC:STEVE--219-8532/11/08/07-PRETREATMENT. ARCHITECT'S OWNER SUPPLEMENTAL INSTRUCTIONS ARCHITECT AIA DOCUMENT G710-ELECTRONIC FORMAT CONSULTANT CONTRACTOR ( FIELD OTHER [� THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL CONSEQUENCES;CONSULTATION WITH AN ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR MODIFICATION. AUTHENTICATION OF THIS ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE USING AIA DOCUMENT 0401. PROJECT: Fleet Landing-Gate House ARCHITECT'S SUPPLEMENTAL (Name,address) Atlantic Beach,FL INSTRUCTION NO: 1R OWNER: Fleet Landing One Fleet Landing Boulevard DATE OF ISSUANCE: October 26,2007 Atlantic Beach,FL 32233 TO: RPC General Contractors,Inc. ARCHITECT:Noelker and Hull Associates, Inc. (Contractor) 248 Levy Road 30 West King Street (PO Box 330775) Chambersburg,PA 17201 Atlantic Beach,rL 32233 CONTRACT FOR: General Construction 07014 ARCHITECT'S PROJECT NO: CONTRACT DATED: Contract Pending The Work shall be carried out in accordance with the following supplemental instructions issued in accordance with the Contract Documents without change in Contract Sum or Contract Time. Proceeding with the Work in accordance with these instructions indications you acknowledgment that there will be no change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time. Description: Reference RFI#2: Refer to attached revised sketch SK-S 1 R with additional uifonnation for revised footing grade beam. Attachments: (Here Insert listing of documents that support description.) Sketch SK-S 1 R FILE COPY ISSUED BY: Noelker and Hull Associates,Inc. Bcn Chamberlin,AIA ArchiteCtBen Chamberlin,AIA,LEER AP,Principal, Q 1992 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE,N.W.,WASHINGTON,D.C. 20006-5292. AIA DOCUMENT G710- ARCHITECT'S SUPPLEMENTAL INSTRUCTIONS-1992 EDITION-AIAO-WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of that AIA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. User Document: g710-92.aia-1010112003. AIA License Number 1008380,which expires on 12/7/2006 OCT 2 6 207 Electronic Format G710-1992 1 BY--------------------- ProjectlD By Shootlt Date d1 � / PROJECT Cox-is uldng Engineers !Z?",w 7z; -,cenloM4 7�-)- e f 6 6Y I C � 5. ,. , . To s EF S 5 ib mm,T>6 Nit) U M t >tO' - a � s I'. I I3.. �+.• I .NC 7 7 _ � �'�? I : : -•'� OFFSET 'd `. .'."..�'. �";. ` -. f�:. +gip.,., ::I � �� :�� _:�."., �'�6. ,�J• lit COLOWt� COLUMN � D 1: OFFS s ra nON �:�`-` . ►: a. "Awn• � w.� F7 �. ILA • .. :: mm b amt MIAM"DE Mo M14MI DADE COUNTY,FLORIDA METRO—DADS FLAGLER BUILDING BUILDING CODE COMPLIANCE OFFICE(BCCO) 140 WEST FLAGLER STREET,SUM 1603 PRODUCT CONTROL DIVISION MIAMI,FLORIDA 33130-1563 NOTICE OF ACCEPTANCE OA www.baildia—deontiae com PGT Industries,Inc. 1070 Technology Drive Nokomis,FL 34275 SCOPE: This NOA is being issued under the applicable rules and regulations governing the use of construction materials.The documentation submitted has been reviewed by Miami-Dade County Product Control Division and accepted by the Board of Rules and Appeals(BORA)to be used in Miami Dade County and other areas where allowed by the Authority Having Jurisdiction(AHJ). This NOA shalt not be valid after the expiration date stated below.The Miami-Dade County Product Control Division(In Miami Dade County)and/or the AHJ(in areas other than Miami Dade County)reserve the right to have this product or material tested for quality assurance purposes. If this product or material fails to perform m the accepted manner,the manufacturer will incur the expense of such testing and the AHJ may immediately revoke,modify,or suspend the use of such product or material within their jurisdiction. BORA reserves the right to revoke this acceptance, if it is determined by Miami-Dade County Product Control Division that this product or material fails to meet the requirements of the applicable building code. This product is approved as described herein,and has been designed to comply with the Florida Building Code,including the High Velocity Hurricane Zone. DESCRIPTION: Series"SGD-730"Aluminum Sliding Glass Doors–L.M.I. APPROVAL DOCUMENT:Drawing No.4406-1,titled"Alun.Sliding Glass Door,Impacr,sheets I through 17 of 17,dated 4/15/05 with revision E dated 4/12106,prepared by manufacturer,signed and sealed by Lucas Andrew Turner,P.E.,bearing the Miami Dade County Product Control Revision stamp with the Notice of Acceptance number and expiration date by the Miami-Dade County Product Control Division. MISSILE IMPACT RATING:Large and Small Missile Impact Resistant LABELING:Each unit shall bear a permanent label with the manuf icturefs name or logo,city,state and following statement:"Miami-Dade County Product Control Approved",unless otherwise noted herein. RENEWAL of this NOA shall be considered after a renewal application has been filed and there has been no change in the applicable building code negatively affecting the peaformarrce of this product. TERMINATION of this NOA will occur after the expiration date or if there has been a revision or change in the materials,use,and/or manufacture of the product or process.Misuse of this NOA as an endorsement of any product,for sales,advertising or any other purposes shall automatically terminate this NOA.Failure to comply with any section of this NOA shall be cause for termination and removal of NOA. ADVERTISEMENT: The NOA number preceded by the words Miami-Dade County, Florida, and followed by the expiration date may be displayed in advertising literature. If any portion of the NOA is displayed,then it shall be done in its entirety. INSPECTION:A copy of this entire NOA shall be provided to the user by the manufacturer or its distributors and shall be available for inspection at The job site at the request of the Building Official. This NOA revises NOA#05-0526.05 and consists of this page 1 and evidence pages E-1,E-2 and E-3,as well as approval document mentioned above. The submitted documentation was reviewed by Manuel Perez,P.E. NOA No 06-0523.03 o Expiration Date: November 11,2009 �f ogle Approval Date: August 3,2006 Page 1 PGT Industries.Inc. NOTICE OF ACCEPTANCE: EVIDENCE SUBMITTED A. DRAWINGS 1. Manufacturer's die drawings and sections. 2. Drawing No 4406-1, Sheets 1 through 17 of 17,titled"Alum. Sliding Glass Door, Impact", prepared by manufacturer,dated 4/15/05 with revision E dated 4/12/06, signed and sealed by Lucas Andrew Turner,P.E. B. TESTS 1. Test reports on 1) Uniform Static Air Pressure Test, Loading per FBC,TAS 202-94 2)Large Missile impact Test per FBC, TAS 201-94 3)Cyclic Wind Pressure Loading per FBC,TAS 203-94 along with marked-up drawings and installation diagram of aluminum sliding glass door, prepared by Fenestration Testing Laboratory, Inc.,Test Report No. FTL-4454, dated 01/31/05,signed and sealed by Edmundo Largaespada,P-E. (Submitted under NOA#04-0622.07) 2. Test reports on 1)Air Infiltration Test,per FBC,TAS 202-94 2)Uniform Static Air Pressure Test,Loading per FBC, TAS 202-94 3)Water Resistance Test,per FBC,TAS 202-94 4)Large hfissile Impact Test per FBC, TAS 201-94 5)Cyclic Wind Pressure Loading per FBC,TAS 203-94 6)Forced Entry Test, per FBC 2411 3.2.1 (b)and TAS 202-94 along with marked up drawings and installation diagram of aluminum sliding glass door,prepared by Fenestration Testing Laboratory,Inc.,Test Report No.FT1,4524, dated 01/31/05, signed and sealed by Edmundo Largaespada,P.E. (Submitted under NOA #04-0622.07) 3. Test reports on 1)Air Infiltration Test,per FBC,TAS 202-94 2)Uniform Static Air Pressure Test,Loading per FBC, TAS 202-94 3)Water Resistance Test,per FBC,TAS 202-94 4)Large Missile Impact Test per FBC, TAS 201-94 5)Cyclic Wind Pressure Loading per FBC,TAS 203-94 6)Forced Entry Test,per FBC 2411 3.2.1 (b)and TAS 202-94 along with marked-up drawings and installation diagram of an aluminum sliding glass door, prepared by Fenestration Testing Laboratory, Inc.,Test Report No. FTI-4159, dated 03/25/04, signed and sealed by Edmundo Largespada,P.E. (Submitted under NDA#04-0622.07) Manuel Pe .E. Product Control Elamyner NOA No 06-)@=.03 Expiration Date: November 11,2009 Approval Date: August 3,2006 E-1 PGT Industries,Inc. NOTICE OF ACCEPTANCE: EVIDENCE SUBMITTED 4. Test reports on 1)Air Infiltration Test,per FBC,TAS 202-94 2)Uniform Static Air Pressure Test,Loading per FBC, TAS 202-94 3)Water Resistance Test, per FBC, TAS 202-94 4)Large Missile Impact Test per FBC, TAS 201-94 5)Cyclic Wind Pressure Loading per FBC,TAS 203-94 6)Forced Entry Test,per FBC 241 I 3.2.1 (b)and TAS 202-94 along with marked-up drawings and installation diagram of an aluminum sliding glass door, prepared by Fenestration Testing Laboratory, Inc.,Test Report No. FITr4161, dated 03/26104, signed and sealed by Edmundo Largespada,PE. (Submitted under NOA#04-0622.07) 5. Test reports on 1)Large Missile Impact Test per FBC,TAS 201-94 2)Cyclic Wind Pressure Loading per FBC,TAS 203-94 along with marked-up drawings and installation diagram of an aluminum sliding glass door,prepared by Fenestration Testing Laboratory,Inc.,Test Report No.FTL4163, dated 03/25/04, signed and sealed by Edmundo Largespada,P.E. (Submitted under NOA#04 0622.07) C. CALCULATIONS 1. Anchor Calculations and structural analysis, complying with FBC-2004, prepared by manufacturer,dated 5/12/06,signed and sealed by Lucas A. Turner,P.E. Complies with ASTM E1300-98/02 2. Anchor Calculations,and strucku-9 analysis,dated 05/23/05,and last revised on 07122105,prepared,signed and sealed by Lucas A Turner,P.E., 3. Anchor Calculations and structural analysis,complying with FBC-2004,prepared by PGT Engineering, dated 06/17/04, signed and sealed by Lucas A. Turner,P.E. (Submitted under NOA#"462207) 4. Revised Anchor Calculations, and structural analysis,prepared by PGT Engineering, dated 10/08/04, signed and sealed by Lucas A.Turner,P.E. (Submitted under NOA#0¢0622.0?) D. QUALITY ASSURANCE 1. Miami Dade Building Code Compliance Office(BCCO). Manuel W11LO09 Product Control 1 No Eapiration Date: Novemb Approval Date: August 3,2006 E-2 PGT Industries,Inc. NOTICE OF ACCEPTANCE: EVIDENCE SUBMITTED E. MATERIAL CERTIFICATIONS 1. Notice of Acceptance No. 01-1204.01 issued to E.L DuPont DeNemours,for"Sentry Glass®Plus"dated 1/17/02,expiring on 1/14/07 2. Notice of Acceptance No. 01-0205.02 issued to Solutia, Inc. for"Saflex/Keepsafe Maximum" dated 05/17101,expiring on 05/21/06. 3. Notice of Acceptance No. 00-1212.04,issued to E.I.DuPont DeNemours for their "Dupont Butacite®PVB", approved on 02/15/01 and expiring on 12/11/05. F. STATEMENTS 1. Statement letters of conformance and"No financial interest",both dated 05/23/05, signed and sealed by Lucas A. Turner,P.E. G. OTHER 1. Notice of Acceptance No. 05-0526.05,issued to PGT Industries,Inc. for their Seriers "SGD-730 Aluminum Sliding Glass Door,approved on 08/25/05 and expiring on 11/11/09. paw Product ControlE NOA No .03 Expiration Date: November 11,2009 Approval Date: August 3,2006 E-3 GENERAL NOTES: IMPACT SLIDING GLASS DOOR t.GLAZING OPTIONS:(SEE DETAILS ON SHEET 2) A 7116'LAMI CONSISTING OF(1)LITE OF 3116'ANNEALED GLASS AND(1)LITE OF 3116"HEAT STRENGTHENED GLASS WITH AN.090 SENTRYGLAS PLUS(SGP) INTERLAYER. TEST REPORTS FTL-4158 AND FTL-4161. B.711W LAW CONSISTING OF(2)LITES OF 3116'HEAT STRENGTHENED GLASS WITH AN.090 SENTRYGLAS PIUS(SGP)!NTEP.LAYER TEST REPORT;T' 103. C.7116'LAMI CONSISTING OF(1)LITE OF 3/16'ANNEALED GLASS AND(1)LITE OF 3116"HEAT STRENGTHENED GLASS WITH AN.090 PVB INTERLAYER OF DUPONT BUTACITE OR SAFLEX/KEEPSAFE MAXIMUM PVB. TEST REPORT FTL-4171. NOA DRAWING MAP D,7116'LAMI CONSISTING OF(2)LITES OF 3116"HEAT STRENGTHENED GLASS WITH AN.090 PVB INTERLAYER OF DUPONT BUTACITE OR SAFLEX/KEEPSAFE MAXIMUM PVB. TEST REPORT FTL-4171. SHEET GENERAL NOTES.............1 E.1 1116 LAMI I.G.CONSISTING OF(1)LITE OF 3116'TEMPERED GLASS OUTSIDE,7/16'AIR SPACE AND(1)7/16'LAMI GLASS ASSEMBLY INSIDE. GLAZING DETAILS............2 THE 7116"LAMI COMPONENT IS ITEM C ABOVE. TEST REPORT FTL-4162. DESIGN PRESSURES.......3 ELEVATIONS.....................4 F_1 lti6'LAMI i_G.CONSISTING OF(1)LITE OF 3116"TEMPERED GLASS OUTSIDE,7/16"AIR SPACE AND(1)7116'LAMI GLASS ASSEMBLY INSIDE. CONFIGURATIONS........_..5 THE 7t16'LAMI COMPONENT IS ITEM D ABOVE. TEST REPORT FTL-4162. VERT,SECTIONS.............6-8 HORIZ.SECTIONS............9-10 G.9116'LAW CONSISTING OF(2)LITES OF 114"HEAT STRENGTHENED GLASS WITH AN.090 SENTRYGLAS PLUS(SGP)INTERLAYER. TEST REPORT FTL-4163. PARTS LIST.......................11 EXTRUSIONS.................... 12-11Z 2.CONFIGURATIONS:SEE DIMENSIONS SHEET 4 AND DIAGRAMS SHEET 5. ANCHORAGE.....................14-1 7 3.DESIGN PRESSURES:(SEE TABLES 1 THROUGH 6,SHEET 3) A NEGATIVE DESIGN LOADS BASED ON TESTED PRESSURE AND GLASS TABLES ASTM E 1300-98. B.POSITIVE DESIGN LOADS BASED ON WATER TEST PRESSURE AND GLASS TABLES ASTM E 1300-98. C.DESIGN PRESSURES UNDER 40 PSF NOT APPLICABLE IN MIAMI-DADE COUNTY. 4_ANCHORAGE:THE 331/3%STRESS INCREASE HAS NOT BEEN USED IN THE DESIGN OF THIS PRODUCT.FOR ANCHORAGE DETAILS SEE SHEETS 14 THROUGH 17. 5.SHUTTERS ARE NOT REQUIRED. 6_INSTALLATION SCREWS,FRAME AND PANEL CORNERS SEALED WITH NARROW JOINT SEALANT. 7.REFERENCE TEST REPORTS:FTL-4159,FTL-4161,FTL-4162,FTL-4163,FTL-4171,FTL-4454 AND FTL-4524. i'RODliCT REVlSED 8,SERIES/MODEL DESIGNATION SGD730,2-TRACK VERSION ALSO PREVIOUSLY REFERRED TO AS SGD70. as rnmppintwith the Ftur&lu Ba:diag Code Acftpft=P 03 £pir>Kion Dtrte 9 13Y lr�Ant Ia.,.aT tT.r ea..�ons a:n.ew. F,K. 4:'tus E NOCTi4NGETMS.SIffET P ..�..N OGENERAL NOTES AND MAP rba- 1070 ifCtN�OLCk+Y DRIVE FX. 415ms 0 REVtSKWADDSALT TRACKOPWNS REVISENOTES 1.4.ti.!88 N(AC04/M Ft 34215 ift— ALUM. SLIDING GLASS DOOR, IMPACT i A_P—al P E FK 07at C ADD GLASS TYPE G Y.16-LAW P.t?.Et]X 7519 �, qw. s . ' 0—. c,Igr 6— NOKG!til5 Ft 34214 ili.<iblY Berr�r �" s"" ' °"'9'O hE~58201 F.K. 6/78104 J3. VIS:trs SGO730 NTS 1 17 4406-1 E Mechanic+) __� EXTERIOR INTERIOR (ALL SECTIONS) 1 1/16"NOW 7116"NOM. 3/16"ANNEALED(OPT.E)OR HEAT 090 SENTRYGLAS PLUS INTERLAYER STRENGTHENED GLASS(OPT_F) 3(16"ANNEALED(OPT,A)OR HEAT AIR SPACE STRENGTHENED GLASS(OPT.8) .-1- I"r OSGP'voiivTcnLnrErc(SEE ivOit) I 3/16"TEMPERED GLASS --� f 1�— 3116'HEAT STRENGTHENED GLASS 46 39°f 55 47 42 or 43 49 51 .591 NOM. .591 NOW GLASS BITE GLASS BITE 16 16Ir 44 or 45 44 or 45 7/16" LAMI GLASS (SGP) 52 1 1/16" LAMI I.G. GLASS 52 GLAZING OPTIONS A& B GLAZING OPTIONS E& F NOTE:PVB INTERLAYER IS DUPONT BUTACITE OR ?/16"NOM. SAFLEXIKEEPSAFE MAXIMUM. 9/16"NOM. 3/16'ANNEALED(OPT.C)OR HEAT ( ) 090"PVB INTERLAYER SEE NOTE .090 SENTRYGLAS PLUS 114"HEAT STRENGTHENED GLASS INTERLAYER STRENGTHENED GLASS(OPT.D) 3/16"HEAT STRENGTHENED GLASS 1/4'HEAT STRENGTHENED GLASS 46 40°r 41 46 56 PRODUCT REVISED as complying with the Ftvrd2 49 57 RukUngAccrrtrCode 03 .591 NOM. .591 NOM. GLASS BITE GLASS BITE �lrtsi rmdact COatrvi 16 16 ft 44 or 45 44 or 45 7/16" LAMI GLASS (PVB) 52 9/16" LAMI GLASS (SGP) 52 GLAZING OPTIONS C & D GLAZING OPTION G Rr or r7sr FK 47ILaa E NO CHANGE TMS SHFET R. ar 77Le R".s:.a- 1070 TECHNOLOGY OMVE P -_- GLAZING DETAILS FK aSRS D RE41OVE IA"I.G.AM SPACE OIM NOKOM.S.Ft 37,75 R'F '�"�" ALUM. SLIDING GLASS DOOR, IMPACT FX 1tYlAM C AM GLA55 TYPE G.9Y/6"LM11 P.O.HOK 1529 Luras 4 Tunrer.P. 0—* Vr C�..naaar ptY"-- NOKOMIS.FL 34274 Lisrhh�Bruer 5Yn1� s�.r '�"r °i"'q"" PE 058201 FA 61 W04 3,L !77505 SGO7371 FUL 2 � 17 4406-1 "�E Mechanical EXTENDED SILL(3112"),MAX.96(8)HIGH DOOR. TABLE 1. EXTENDED SILL(3 112"),MAX.96"(8°)HIGH DOOR. TABLE 5. ALL CONFIGURATIONS WITH A MAX.NOM.PANEL WIDTH OF 60"(56) ALL CONFIGURATIONS WITH A MAX.NOW PANEL WIDTH OF 48"(40) GLASS TYPEA. 7116"LAMI(3116"ANN...090 SGP,3116"HS) FTL-4159 GLASS TYPE C. 7116"LAM[(3116"ANN-090 PVB,3/16"HS) FTL-4171 Rom Door Height GLASS TYPE E. 1 1116"LAMI LG W17/16`LAMI TYPE C FTL-4162 Paw Width 72"(fi°) 80"(6°) 84'(7°j 90"(76) 96"(8°) (3116"TEMP_7/16"AIR SPACE.3/16"ANN.,.090 PVB,3/16"HS) 30"(2 +70.Q -70.0 +70.0 -70.0 +70.0 -70.0 +70.0 -70.0 +70 0 -70 0 Nom. L)ocr YeigFa 36'(3°) +70.0 -70.0 +70.0 -70.0 +70.0 -70.0 +66.8 66.8 +64.8 -64.8 Width 72"(6°) 80"(6°) 84"(7°) 9Q'(76) 96"(80) 42"(3 +62.6 -62.6 +56.7 -56.7 +53.9 53.9 +50.7 -50.7 +48.2 -48.2 30'(2) +80.0 -80.0 +80.0 -80.0 +80.0 -80.0 +80.0 -80.0 +80.0 -80.0 +53.2 -53.2 +47.2 -47.2 +44.4 -44.4 +42.3 -42.3 +40.6 -40.6 36"(3°) +76.6 -76.6 +72.7 -72.7 +70.6 -70.6 +66.8 -66.8 +64.8 -64-8 54"(46) +46.2 -46.2 +41.3 -41.3 +39.4 -39.4 +37.1 -37.1 +34,6 -34.6 42-(36) +62.6 -62.6 +56.7 -56.7 +53.9 -53.9 +50.7 -50.7 +48.2 -48.2 fiQ"(5° +41.7 -41.7 +37.6 -37.6 +35.8 -35.8 +33.1 -33.1 +30.9 -30.9 48-(40) +53.2 -53.2 +47.2 -47.2 +44.4 -44.4 +42.3 -42.3 +40.6 -40.6 EXTENDED SILL(31/2"),MAX.96"(8 HIGH DOOR. TABLE 2. ALL CONFIGURATIONS WITH A MAX.NOM.PANEL WIDTH OF 60"(56) EXTENDED SILL(3 1/2"),MAX.96"(8°)HIGH DOOR. TABLE 6. GLASS TYPE B. 7116"LAMI(3/16"HS..090 SGP,3116"HS) FTL-4163 ALL SIZES AND CONFIGURATIONS WITH A MAX.NOM.PANEL WIDTH OF 48"(4 6) °m. Door Height GLASS TYPE O. 7116"LAMI(3116"HSA90 PVB,3116"HS) FTL-4171 +80.0 1 -80.0 Panel Width 72"(66) 80"(66) 84"(70) 90"(76) 96"(80) GLASS TYPE F. 1 1116"LAMI LG W/7/16"LAMI TYPE D. FTL4162 48-(401 +70.0 -70.0 +70.0 -70.0 +70.4 -70.0 +70.0 -70.0 +70.0 -70.0 (3116'TEMP.,7/16"AIR SPACE,3/16"HS,.090 PVB,3116"HS) 54"(4 +70.0 -70.0 +70.0 -70.0 +70.0 -70.0 +70.0 -70.0 +69.1 -69.1 60'(5) +70.0 -70.0 +70.0 -70.0 +70.0 -70.0 +66.2 -66.2 +61.8 -61.8 EXTENDED SILL(3112"),MAX.96"(86)HIGH DOOR. TABLE 2A. EXTENDED SILL(3 1/2%MAX.120"(10°)HIGH DOOR. TABLE 4. L SIZES AND CONFIGURATIONS WITH A MAX.NOM.PANEL WIDTH OF 60"(5e) ALL SIZES AND CONFIGURATIONS WITH A MAX.NOM.PANEL WIDTH OF 48"(4°) GLASS TYPE G. 9116"LAMI(1/4'HS,.090 SGP,1/4"HS) FTL-4163 +70.0 -70,0 GLASS TYPE B. 7/16"LAMI(3/16"HS,.090 SGP,3/16"HS) FTL-4161 +60.0 -60.0 EXTENDED SILL(3112"),MAX.120'(10°)HIGH DOOR. TABLE 3. L CONFIGURATIONS WITH A MAX.NOM.PANEL WIDTH OF 48"(40) GLASS TYPE A. 7/16'LAMI(3116"ANN.,.090 SGP,3/16"HS) FTL-4161 °m. Door Height Panel Width 72"(6) 80.(61) 84"(7) 90"(76) 96"(8°) 1102"(8) 108"(9) 114'(96) 120"(10°) PIWOUCT ua tsEt� 30"(25) +60.0 -60.0 +60.0 -60.0 +60.0 -60.0 +60.0 -60.0 +60.0 .60.0 +60.0 .60.0 +60.0 -60.0 +60.0 -60.0 +60.0 -60.0 r �A�ZBowl wii6:he �ri� Code 36"(3� +60.0 -60.0 +60.0 -60.0 +60.0 -60.0 +60.0 60.0 +60.0 -60.0 +60.0 -60.0 +60.0 -60.0 +58.9 -58.9 +58.2 -58.2 03 21.706 42-(3) +60.0 -60.0 +56.7 -56.7 +53.9 -53.9 +50.7 -50.7 +48.2 -48.2 +46.3 -46.3 +44.6 -44.6 +43.4 -43.4 +42.1 -42.1 -53.2 +47.2 -47.2 +44.4 -44.4 +42.3 42.3 +40.6 -40.6 +38.3 -38.3 +36.0 -36.0 +34.4 -34.4 1 +33.1 -33.1 efletratt Pr�dret Zo�rrea t3tr >, NOTES: 1.POSITIVE DESIGN PRESSURE IS LIMITED TO+40.0 PSF FOR ALL SIZES AND CONFIGURATIONS NOT EQUIPPED WITH 31/2"EXTENDED SILL RISER. NEGATIVE PRESSURES ARE NOT CHANGED. SEE VERTICAL SECTIONS,SHEETS 6 THROUGH 8 FOR EXACT SILL HEIGHTS. r � 2.REINFORCEMENTS NOT REQUIRED IN DOOR PANELS WITH GLASS TYPES C,D,E AND F(TABLES 5 AND 6). REINFORCEMENTS ARE REQUIRED IN DOOR PANELS WITH GLASS TYPES A,B AND G(TABLES 1,2,2A,3 AND 4). er F.X u,ao° E NO CHANGE lXIS SHEET M" P wWmrm DESIGN PRESSURES �11°�' �'*� IU7U TECHNOLOGY DRIVE FK us°s O REME NOTEn" �- Dae NOKOAiIS,FL 34275 FA WXN C non TMR.E 1A*16'L4" P.0.90X 1529 ALUM. SLIDING GLASS DOOR, IMPACT Lucas 'f":nEr.P.E. °r Orr b Dar- NOXOAIIS.FL 34274 Ilaibty B2RrT - I- - "�"" - PE#58201 FK. 6118M4 J.1 11503 SG073o FUL 1 17 4406-1 E Mecf,anfoal OVERALL WIDTH,sty ,.,,..._ x a pxx C5 nxXOOxxx—pMR � I PANEL 2 TRACK SINGLE POCKET 2 PANEL 2 TRACK SINGLE POCKET 3 PANEL 2 TRACK SINGLE POCKET 4 PANEL 2 TRACK BY-PASS J SINGLE POCKET 2 PANEL 2 TRACK BY-PASS 3 PANEL 2 TRACK BY-PASS 3 PANEL 2 TRACK BY-PASS 4 PANEL 2 TRACK SINGLE POCKET!BY-PASS INTERIOR (ALL CONFIGURATIONS) EXTERIOR pMp [3� OQO 0000 18 XXXX 2 PANEL 2 TRACK DOUBLE POCKET 3 PANEL 2 TRAGK FtXED 4 PANEL 2 TRACK FIXED 4 PANEL 2 TRACK BY-PASS xx 2 PANEL 2 TRACKK BYPASS OXO 4 PANEL 2 TRACK BY-PASS X�XX)C� 21 3 PANEL 2TRACK BY-PASS 4 PANEL 2 TRACK DOUBLE POCKET OOX 11 � 3 3 PANEL 3TFiACK BY-PASS x XXXXX 27 4 PANEL 4 TRACK BY-PASS 5 PANEL 3'P ACK PASS 4 � 3 PANEL 3 T t dCK®PASS Rmm—' Xa 2Q8 4 PANEL A TRACK BY-PASS 8 PANEL 3 TRACK DOUBLE POCKET 3 PANEL 3 T13ACt©PASS 4 PANEL 4 TRACK BY-PASS 6PANEL 3TW4Z°RBY-PASS 4c (R-Q� Ij ,I&V 1 xx 3 PANEL 3 TRACK SINGLE POCKET XXXX Q 4 PANEL 4 TRACK BY-PASS 8 PANEL 4 TRACK DOUBLE POCKET OXX Q <= –�»-- 3 PANEL 2 TRACK BY-PASS �XXxX 26 XXXXXXXX 31 4 PANEL 4 TRACK SINGLE POCKET 8 PANEL 4 RACK Y-PASS n..W sr. a.w racmv n.cvww' FJt arpms a rrocr+atrcerrussi er EX 4MPLE C.C1NPlGURATIOIY DIAGRAMS ma - 1070 MC,Nal.OGr DRIVE ..,, aK +sas n r{eflwnrrwown3ako<rracxcar rc unwr rrorvs rvaxczansFtaazr!bwwrs � ALUM.SLIDING GLASS C7OOR, IMPACT n..� � Lac as r Truer P.E. FK. canon c Na ctr'wGF nus sNEE7 Po.faX t34 PE#5 ay. rw.. ct..cuwei arr NOKaM1tiS,Fe J4?Ts Yicibh Gettcr FK. S!1&U4 J.J. YiSUS SGAF30 NTS 5 a J7 4406-1 E rytechenicaF 16 16 'cl .- u • ,r,fir -r 37 ASTRAGAL 37 ASTRAGAL 38 SIDE RAIL 38 SIDE RAIL t6 16 35 35 FiiO1tUL?RF.1'i5_ Bs cx��cia�tiai:a ii_Flv:^id; 2.436» F,s i O X05 OPTIONAL,A 4 ALL ORIGINALL 2-TRACK K 7t£v4�t ).?-,::; •-�.:,. CONFIGURATIONS sit. 3 5 6 U EXTERIOR INTERIOR (ALL SECTIONS) TYP. VERTICAL SECTION SHOWING ONE TYP. VERTICAL SECTION SNOWING ACTIVE PANEL AND ONE FIXED PANEL TWO ACTIVE PANELS FA 4112vs E rrorwwcE7m55+EET taro recyNVLocr oxrvE VERTICAL SECTIONS, ORIGINAL 2 TRACK FA rims a ADO srnrroaRnatoOprrcaw+LSILL RISER NErGr+rOrna NorcOMts.FL3az75 ALUM. SLIDING GLASS DOOR, IMPACT FN 1017,4 c No CmAwe rNs$rEE7 P.O.BOX 1329 ��-a;as A 1582131,P E. V—: —c_— . tri NOKOMr3.FL 34274 YTrrhlr 9 rt2r s».w su" s,xe� aa,.:,p n" an p€858241 F.K. 6119104 » vrsa5 sco73o 1!2 6 17 4406-1 F 16 16 65 70 &ALTERNATE 2 TRACK FRAME W/SCREEN RAIL. v NOTE: ITEM 61 OR 62,SILL RISERS ARE AVAILABLE ALL CONFIGURATIONS. 37 ASTRAGAL 37 ASTRAGAL 38 SIDE RAIL 38 SIDE RAIL I LJ 16In 1fi 35 35 3.500" UsstW 03 2.713" 62 SEE NOTE f udr'mdw:C•�cY;v D W 8 ALTERNATE 2 TRACK FRAME WITH SCREEN RAIL 69 fit SEE NOTE EXTERIOR INTERIOR F"� TYP. VERTICAL SECTION SHOWING ONE (ALL SECTIONS) TYR VERTICAL SECTION SHOWING ACTIVE PANEL AND ONE FIXED PANEL W/SCREEN TWO ACTIVE PANELS W/SCREEN m"War. aw FX W12M E AW!FENS 64 AW 7D ALMAIM TF 27RACK M046 Wi SCREEN RA2 Wr0 FEckmlOxc DRIVE VERTICAL SECTIONS, 2 TRACK FA H5i15 0 WWWLETAV0WF0R NEfY2 rRACXJlRMfE NOKooft FL 74275 `�sr D.W R " ALUM. SLIDING GLASS DOOR, IMPACT P.D.BOX tSZ9 !m as A 1 umer.P E. &=—ar bO Drs AtOK044S FL 34274 VaiMV getter se..,,N.ft s:.+, sn.• a vftu„. PE#58201 FK 6IF8N9 }� a•rsas SGOT30 112 7 .. 17 4406-1 E 16 OPTIONAL ON 3 OR 4 TRACK FRAME 16 St 7,S20 or S23 63 u ITEM 61 OR 62.SILL RISERS ARE AVAILABLE ALL CONFIGURATIONS. 37 ASTRAGAL 37 ASTRAGAL. 38 SIDE RAIL 3$ SIDE RAIL 16 35Lui U9 I nn 16 35 3.500" as c3� 3 d �itit�tv1z r2.713' 61 SEE NOTE I @nrlL gy 59 S16,S19 or S22 58 62 SEE NOTE OPTIONAL ON 3 OR 4 TRACK FRAME EXTERSOR INTERIOR TYP.VERTICAL SECTION SHOWING (ALL SECTIONS) TYP.VERTICAL SECTION SHOWING 'j; THREE ACTIVE PANELS W/O SCREENS FOUR ACTIVE PANELS Wl SCREEN TRACK GK 4g2ms E NO cl"-XE r"s-,*Ear R 0, w* w7o rmimaocroalve VERTICAL SECTIONS, 3&4 TRACK F,lf 415M D Acw6HEEJADDEDFLWJ.AV I TIWKFNRME NOKOWS FC 34Z75 '°'" W D— ALUM. SLIDING GLASS DOOR, IMPACT PO 8JX 1529 4 Yjr—.P.E. m�ar Va ai; aar NOKOW.n 34274 Vi.WY&-rr.•r e1P PE 958201 F.K. 6118D4 J.J. *1&03 SG0730 1/2 8 •* 17 4406-1 PrE LOCATED AT VERTICAL RE}NFORGEMENTS REVD W1 6iQ 4f fi9 25 18 CENTER,12-FROM TOP AND 12 27 (;f.ASS TYPES A,8 OR G ONLY 17 BOTTOM OF FIXED PANELS (3}REO'D EXfSTING STRUCTURE X 6Q ar 69 8,66,67, ------L 3, 58.59, 6 ITEM 68 SHOWN X 11 Q iQ 11 25 `1 Si$,527 fNTERK}R 1 ,S2 (ALL SECTIONS) -- __---- _ _— EXTERIOR SECT.A-A ITEM S24 SHOWN SECT. B-B V FIXED STELE AT JAMB(OUTSIDE) DOUBLE &SINGLE INTERLOCK -" - _ — SECT. D-D MOVABLE INTERLOCK AT P-HOOK 23 37 13 14 15 13 38 10 X I fiI I XX ITEM 68 SHOWN 8,66767), It !! 22 68 or 71 ?Rootct RFi"i5_3 a,rnmp"t'aw,t>c z•x: 6 ad+ae«r ITEM S24 SHOWN I..1 a.,z C-1-1 3,58,59, S18,S21 60 or 69 or S24 ——————————— ———v—F--- REINFORCEMENTS REQ'D wl SECT. C-G GLASS TYPES A,B OR G ONLY " SECT. E-E MOVABLE TO MOVABLE ASTRAGAL(INSIDE SHOWN} MOVABLE STILE AT JAMB (INSIDE) F 442X16 '17 AOOITEMS 69AM37t,AtTERM 7F2TRACK FRAME WSCREEN RIR. Ir HORIZONTAL SECTIONS Fw,s Bp Oa,e Ae„xs Kqp TECNNGrCOGY DRIVE �� Fx &.%W 0 a003RNQe TRACK OPTICW6,W0 GLA53 TYPE G W'RElNF NOKO"S.PC 3.75 ""w "° ALUM.SLIDING GLASS DOOR, IMPACT FK nmhW C rq,�6Hw•E Res s#ET P.O.®STK 1529 Lucas 0..'Comer.P E. &.+sew, xr s.« dam' .«. PE tl5620t am.e7 rsw- cnawser aM NacOMts.F(34124 Visibly 6c rrcr SGOT3U 1/Z 9 t7 440&t E Mech--ical F.K. 6116V4 1r arrsas 27 REINFORCEMENTS REQ'D Wi 23 3,58,59, REINFORCEMENTS REQ'D W/ GLASS TYPES A,B OR G ONLY & 27 GLASS TYPES A,B OR G ONLY 37 �60 or 69 12 13 i4 15 13 3,58,59, O 60 Or 69 - - — - —. — - - —Iii O _ X � 4 22 INTERIOR (ALL SECTIONS) EXTERIOR ia:i I 11 (1 FIXED - FIXED CONFIGURATION ----- --------------- DOUBLE & SINGLE INTERLOCK SECT. F-F (NOT SHOWN IN SHEET 4 ELEVATIONS) MOVABLE TO FIXED ASTRAGAL (INSIDE) LOCATED AT VERTICAL ® REINFORCEMENTS REQ'D W1 3 58, 59, ® 3, 58,59, CENTER,12'FROM TOP AND 3,58,59, GLASS TYPES A.a OR G ONLY 27 12 60 Or 69 ITEM 68 SHOWN 60 or 69 BOTTOM OF FIXED PANELS 60 or 69 (3)REQ'D 18 25 9�)— J 25 O 38 6 till 10 X raaaucs t�e-usa ITEM 68 SHOWN 8,66,67, 68 or 71 ® — ITEM S24 SHOWN Mtefa Vrrx£aca c"n:n:, i1M.. ® S18,S21 ITEM S24 SHOWN Or S24 S18,S21 --------------- orS24SECT. H-H SECT. 1-1 10 SECT. G-G MOVABLE STILE AT JAMB (OUTSIDE) r FIXED STILE AT JAMB (INSIDE) DOUBLE & SINGLE INTERLOCK (OX) F1 f, arays E ADD ITEMS 64 AND 71,ALTERNAiE2 rRAC1(FRAME Wr SCREEN RAIL P T. HORIZONTAL SECTIONS CONTINUED Riid�" Q"' R""°"' 1070 TECRNOLf7GY DRIVE F.K ti5A15 0 ADO 3ANO 4 MCK OPTKAYS AND GLASS TYPE G W%REfNF NOKLMIS.FL 14275 ALUM. SLIDING GLASS DOOR, IMPACT EK I(fl7.Ua C NO CHANGE IMS SFtEEi P.U.BOX 1529 ;_,,gas 4 Tomer,P E ora..0 Oar- .der Dde NOKOMIS.FL 34274 ilmil'4'Brfue SenaAkwt xrr 1 o.�..q�° PE 958201 FX &18104 �� 1n5os SGD73CI 1/2 10 17 4406-1 E McU,arrical ITEM DWG# PGT# DESCRIPTION ITEM UW—G#1 PGT# IDESCRIPTION 1 4302 612245 ORIGINAL FRAME,HEAD 41 7/16"LAMINATED GLASS-3/16"H.S.-.090 DUPONT BUTACITE OR 2 4386 7P4386 SB.UHEAD WEATHERSTRIPPING PAD SAFLEXIKEEPSAFE MAXIMUM INTERLAYER-3116"H.S- 3 4303 64303 ORIGINAL FRAME,SILL 42 1 1/16"LAMINATED GLASS 3116"TEMP-7/16"AIR SPACE-3/16"ANN.- 4 4361 64361 ORIGINAL FRAME.3.500 SILL ADD ON .090 DUPONT BUTACITE OR SAFLEX/KEEPSAFE MAXIMUM 5 4314 612254 ADAPTER,FIYED PANEL INTERLAYER-3116"H.S fi 4315 64315 THRESHOLD COVER 43 1 1116"LAMINATED GLASS 3/16"TEMP-7116"AIR SPACE-3116"H.S.- 7 14385 171164 HEAVY DUTY 4 HOLE BUMP STOP 8 4304 fi12247 OR{GINAF FRAME 14�t4P .090 DUPONT BUTACITE OR SAFI_FX/KFFocAFF nwa_Ylp,.gLl+! i INV IEkLAYtk-a/l6"H.J. 9 1155-1 781PQA #8 X 1"LG.S.STL QUADIPHIL PAN HEAD 44 DOW CORNING 899 SILICONE GLAZING SEALANT 10 14306 1612249 PANEL SIDE RAIL 45 DOW CORNING 995 SILICONE STRUCTURAL SEALANT 11 14383 164383 DOUBLE INTERLOCK 46 1224 6TP247 VINYL BULB WEATHERSTRIP(THICK) 12 4399 64399 INTERLOCK 47 1225 6TP248 VINYL BULB WEATHERSTRIP(THIN) 13 4398 64398 ASTRAGAL BASE 49 4324 6534601 7116"LAMI GLAZING BEAD 14 4380 64380 FEMALE ADD-ON 15 4381 64381 MALE ADD-0N 51 4395 64395 1 1116"LAMI I.G.GLAZING BEAD 15 4305 64305 TOP&BOTTOM RAIL 52 1267 71267N SETTING BLOCKS 1"X 1/2"X 1/8"THICK 17 440 5 64303A TOPPH &B FOR POCKET DOORS 53 749 7BRKTM25 REINFORCEMENT SPRING CLIP 18 403 64362 FIXED PANEL CLIP 54 43 74356A FIXED PANEL ANGLE BRACKET 19 1235 67S16G WSTP.170 X.270 BACK, FIN SEAL 55 PLU LAMINATED GLASS-3NN. H.S.-.090 DUPONT SENTRYGLAS 20 4393 67393G WSTP.400 X.270 BACK,FIN SEAL PLUS INTERLAYER-3/16"ANN. 21 720X112X 114-20 X 1.50 PH.PAN HEAD S.STL.TYPE F 56 9/16"LAMINATED GLASS-114"H.S.-.090 DUPONT SENTRYGLAS PLUS 22 7142OX114SHCSF 1/4-20 X 1.25 LG.SHCS S.STL. INTERLAYER-114"H.S. 23 71032XiFPFX #10-32 X 1"LG.PHILLIPS FLAT HEAD 18 8 S.STL. 57 4375 64375 9/16"LAMI GLAZING BEAD 58 4407 RECESS ADAPTER MOUNTING SCREW&HANDLES 64407 FRAME,4 TRACK SILL 59 4408 64408 FRAME,3 TRACK SILL 24 70834X #8 X 314"LG.PHILLIPS PAN HEAD 18-8 S.STL. 60 4409 64409 FRAME,2 TRACK SILL KEEPER MOUNTING SCREW 61 4410 64410 FRAME,2.713 STANDARD SILL ADAPTER 25 78X38PPT #8 X3/8 LONG PHILLIPS PAN HEAD TEK 62 4411 64411 FRAME,3.500 SILL ADAPTER 26 71032INSERT 10-32 ALUMIN THREADED INSERT 63 4412 64412 FRAME,4 TRACK HEAD 27 4357 64357M ALUM.REINFORCEMENT.500 X 1.500 64 4413 64413 FRAME,3 TRACK HEAD 28 4388 MOVING/FIXED INTERLOCK END PLUG 65 4414 64414 FRAME,2 TRACK HEAD 29 4387 44387 ASTRAGAL BASE END PLUG 66 4415 64415 FRAME,4 TRACK JAMB 30 14389 144389N LOCKSTILE END PLUG 67 4416 64416 FRAME,3 TRACK JAMB 31 14392 7)=IM BS TOP RIGHT STICKER COVER 68 4417 64417 FRAME,2 TRACK JAMB 32 14392 7)"M BSW) BOTTOM RIGHT STICKER COVER 69 4442 64442 FRAME,2 TRACK SILL W/SCREEN RAIL 33 14392 7)=M BSW) TOP LEFT STICKER COVER A 70 14441 164441 FRAME,2 TRACK HEAD W/SCREEN RAIL 34 14392 7)=M BSW BOTTOM LEFT STICKER COVER 6 71 14443 164443 FRAME,2 TRACK JAMB WI SCREEN RAIL 35 1049 71049 TANDEM ROLLER S1 4317 1612256 SCREEN, P RAIL 36 1636 72048 W,K,S 314"HOLE PLUG S4 4318 612257 SCREEN,BOTTOM RAIL PRODUCT REVISED 37 7SGD4050 (1)TRUTH INTERIOR PULL HANDLE&BASE 97 4319 612258 SCREEN;SIDE RAIL =compt-Ing"!;oLxFwrct (1)TRUTH EXTERIOR PULL HANDLE&BASE S11 4320 612259 SCREEN,MEETING RAIL DOWL-,",cede (2)#8-32 X1 314"COLOR MATCHED HANDLE BASE S13 4428 64428 SCREEN,DOUBLE INTERLOCK A �� SCREWS S14 4344 64344 SCPEEKASTRAGAL 38 7SGO2889 (1)TRUTH INTERIOR PULL HANDLE&BASE S15 4384 64384 SCREEN,ASTRAGAL ADAPTER rAt">A'11 (1)TRUTH EXTERIOR PULL HANDLE&BASE S16 4418 64418 SCREEN,3 TRACK SILLgl- �fQ4iIc1C� { (2)#8-32 X 1 314"COLOR MATCHED HANDLE BASE S17 4419 64419 SCREEN,3 TRACK TFEAD SCREWS S18 4420 64420 SCREEN,3 TRACK JAMB (1)MORTISE LOCK LATCH&KEEPERS 9 74T21 64421 SCREEN,2 TRACK SILL (1)STAINLESS MORTICE LOCK S20 _4iFff 64422 SCREER2 TRACK HEAD S 21 4423 64423 SCREEN,2 TRACK JAMB (1)ZINC DICHROMATE RECESS ADAPTER S22 4424 164424 CREEN, 1 TRACK SILL y� 39 7116"LAMINATED GLASS-3116"H.S.-.090 DUPONT SENTRYGLAS S23 4425 64425 SCREEN, 1 TRACK HEAD PLUS INTERLAYER-3/16"H.S. S24 4426 164426 SCREEN. 1 TRACK JAMBL- 40 7116"LAMINATED GLASS-3/16"H.S.-.090 DUPONT BUTACITE OR SAFLEX/KEEPSAFE MAXIMUM INTERLAYER-3/16"ANN_ R— - ADD 11EMS BY 70 ANO 71.ALiERNA lE 2 TRACK FRAME W/SCREEN RAIL 0� FX u11X16 E REVISELfNG1HOFITEMI7,P.HOOKFOR BETTER INSTALLATKJN. PARTS LIST R.."6e7. Dw. ate, 1070 TECHNOLOGY DRIVE FA a5A5 D ADD TTE11LS 56-R(S IJ aND 516-524 NOICOMIS FL Y27: 'k6� �" ALUM. SLIDING GLASS DOOR, IMPACT F.K. IWO$ C ADD ITEMS 56 AND 67 P.O.BOX 1529 Luca>a lamer,P E. tra,..er D,t' h 0We' NOKOMf�.FC 34<'7J 1'r.i/+/v 6.v7.. s""'"etl" 'N "" '""` pE#59201 F.K. 6/IB/D4 lJ. ulnas SGD73D NTS 1l ^ 17 4406-1 E Medlauio l a L1£v vt��t otos°d �tv„"is"i>3�u 91£g09 jau�9,;��,'' •stW��to, �W O1N��2j ytrsc tj,0 �31 1\d�d .✓` riap 1 Ocicles Sl nld 61 9pg 1 idW L-' 290 4 9oq° „ �otJ Ssd� Sr10►S�i� *0.,�'° 3ay�3p\S N �igos Mo � { 0 Cal ZLB' : WOv x90 ddOd Z90 ba�N� 7, M � r £� 59 M3 �S �4S ZLQ 4 !�' 0�0 aMa Na gp4 884 g0£ MtndW \ q Y C. £09 g dDl'g� L 004 ti 8Za O• ��,y,a� Aoo�a `,,,..- a 'Ude Z�. 9iyd O�x\�' LSLZ 51`£ 9 1£a5 M dW 005 ti a te Wn1d�LZ � �` ' d0 06 �--` �- 01011 � - 9av\ ,� L5£9 o—, Z !�' 9 66N£g4 M.i W�4 `�Og i4cw M �L£Z �6avqz �g, x�p��l � � �33dn� a#`.SMS � N�W`� BLS► 91£9p9 �1Sdb MQ Sd9-No �� 090dns\vt� , `g£v#�.idW, 03.00dM� V967, 1 �G 1� �e��£9 i°rj}ct�r+ -o�''` - La's X96 cf 3 rtya�u� `j r��id `ZC xg4 LL4S #VIIdW 'ta O #OW 9911 ALv 1£ 8"038 I 6.130 ( f; 4.222 -,; t 494 t 494 .076F- .078 � 2.625 2-6252-62s Imo_ 1 .078 ; _ 2713 . 3.500 _ - ", .: ; , 078 --_-�--1 _ - --- .078 ---►4--- 1:, � is SR_ d TRC('.K C!!1 c 2 T RAS:�S:�L � u�-o l ANDARU JILL KIJCK 62-3.50"SILL RISER MATL:6063-T6 MATL:' 6063-T6 ✓V MATL:6063-T6 MATL:6063-T6 MAT'L-,6063-T6 DWG#4407 DWG#4408 DWG#4409 DWG#4410 DWG#4411 8.038 .{~- 6.130 `�� 4.222 --�j j �� ,� L�w n rt-.r=; ii-F L--c,-n-,L•-._r �l I �- 8038 6.130 --�1 1 ( I( 1.619 j�jj {f l 11.619 �l I��l�- 1, 1.235 f ��"--- 1.235 1 C1 L I q I .078 078 .078 1.619 -078 078 63- 4 TRACK HEAD 64- 3 TRACK HEAD 65- 2 TRACK HEAD 66- 4 TRACK JAMB 67- 3 TRACK JAMB MATL 6063-T6 MATL:6063-T6 MATL 6063-T6 MATL:6063-T6 MAT'L:6063-T6 DWG#4412 DWG#4413 DWG#4414 DWG#4415 DWG#4416 3.810 3.810 3.870 � 2.546 �- 4.222 --y l I� I �` . 46 -1.235 810 Imo`L-�,�- 10 078 255 I j-I 1.611991 .81.619 1.619 . - - .078 .078 -y�� - "078 -��- F --41 -= .078 .078 -y II-�- 66- 2 TRACK JAMBE SCREEN S17- SCREEN S18- SCREEN S19- SCREEN S20- SCREEN MATL-6063-T6 3 TRACK FRAME SILL 3 TRACK FRAME HEAD 3 TRACK FRAME JAMB 2 TRACK FRAME SILL 2 TRACK FRAME HEAD DWG#4417 MATL:6063-T6 MATL:6063-T6 MATL:6063-T6 MATL:6063-T6 MATL"6063-T6 DWG#4418 DWG#4419 DWG#4420 DWG#4421 DWG#4422 2.546 1.283 1.283 r- -rj 1.283 1.619 810 1.61941.619 r--41-- 078.078 �-- .078 n .078 09 S21- SCREEN S22- SCREEN S23- SCREEN S24- SCREEN 2 TRACK FRAME JAMB 1 TRACK FRAME SILL 1 TRACK FRAME HEAD 1 TRACK FRAME JAMB = 1 P cdar�i 2 MATL-6063-T6 MAT'L:6063-T6 MAT'L:6063-T6 MAT'L.6063-T6 5.505 - -- -f DWG#4423 DWG#4424 DWG#4425 DWG#4426 F-�I� I-�-- 5.505 ----y 1 5.505 2.625 1.619 1.235 J .078 .078 "� .078 --•-i►�- t- --x"=- � 70- FRAME,2 TRACK HEAD W/SCREEN RAIL 71- FRAME,2 TRACK JAMB W/SCRJ RAIL 69- FRAME,2 TRACK SILL W/SCREEN RAIL ® MATL 6063-T6 MATL:6063-T6 ® MATL:6063-T6 DWG#4441 OWG#4443 DWG#4442 R. a7 oaa- e..vo,a II'aep0a' FK 41IZW E AM ITEMS 69 WANG 71.AL rERNATE 2 TRACK FRAME W/SCREEN RAIL P"way vm +�. 1070 TECMNCX OG Y VRIVE EXTRUSIONS, FRAME FK 43415 0 NEWSNEETF0R3AN04 TRACK OP OHS NOKOMIS.FL 34275 r- R°ft a° Ir-c3y-1 ALUM" SLIDING GLASS DOOR, IMPACT P.O.80X 1529 L,x;as A.Turner.P.E. aaM,eT ar crra.a o y NOKC*11S.FL 34274 VLsihly[term; 5"a`�e°" 5r1 y'R' a.,wy we - PE#58201 FX 6118/04 ,..r atsus SGD730 NTS 13 w 17 4406-1 E Mechanical HEAD AND SILL INTERLOCK&ASTRAGAL ANCHOR A.7/16 LAM[(A,.090 SGP.H) B.7116 LAM](K.090 SGP,H) INTERLOCK OR INTERLOCK O CLUSTER BY PANEL SIZE&GLASS TYPE C.OR E.7116 LAM[(A.H)OR W 1 1116 LAM]LG G 9/16"LAM[ ASTRAGAL CL r— ASTRAGAL CI D.OR F. 7'116 LAMt(H,H)OR IN 1 1116 LAME 1.G. (H•.090 SGP,M ANGFif)R TYPE DOOR HEIGHT a SUBSTRATE, 72"(6°} aN uZ o3oJ_ (o7° o90 _(o7)_ 98° fJ0Q 10J, oQ85}JJ oQ 10fJ6 (a9°) 1Jv14-(o96?) 12Qf"0' -(o1�0 cl ~°) u ZO 0. 30 a N �u 001 u Od 1--6— �• —.T' 1 ;F(r o ;No - ^ CLUSTER A-(4)ANCHORS CLUSTER B-(.6)ANCHORS RSwvca - aJ MIMIC WIDTH GLAZING Q Q JQ ! " z ! i n �C1 INTERLOIII INTERLOCK OR CK OI i fO i N OPTION i T n o A.B A A S -B A A 6 B B A C SIB A C 8 8 A C 8 8 A C 8 8 A C 8 8 A C B B B C 8 C--- ASTRAGAL CL ("-- ASTRAGAL CL 24•,{2°► C,D,E,F,G B A C 8 B A C 8 8 A C BIB 8 C C B 8 C Cl 3" 3" 3" A.8 B A B 8 B A C B 61A C 818 8 C C 8 8 C C B B C B B 8 C C B B C C B B D C _ _ 3Q"(x°) QD,E,F,G B A B B B A C 8 B A C 8 B 8 C C 8 8 C c 95(3°) A,S,C,E B A G 8 8 8 C 8 BIB C C 8 B O C B B D C B B C C 8 8 0 C C B D C C B D C 0.F,G B B C C B B D C BIB O C C B D C C B D D A.C,E B A C B 8 A C S B A C 8 8 A C.5 B A - B B A C B B A C B B B C B B B C C ---t--- —t--- 42"(36► B A C B 8 B C C SIB 0 C C 8 D C C 8 D C C B D C C B D C C B O D C B E D I f 816 �-�- 816 ;I t F 8 3�. y I� 8A" "1 FD-.'FG B BIC G G B D C C s D C C B E D C C E o CLUSTER C-(8)ANCHORS CLUSTER D-(10)ANCHORS A,C,E A AIB B A AIB 8 A A 8 B 8 A BIB B A C 8 8 A B B A C B B A C B B A C B 4T(q°} B B B c C B BID C C 8 D c C B DID C B E D C B O C C B E D C C E D C C E D INTERLOCK OR EXTERIOR(ALL) D,F,G 8 8 D C C B D D C B E D C C E D O C E D 3" ASTRAGAL Cl A A JAB B A A B B A A 8 8 A A B B A A B B —'t 3" 3"'••'-- ID SC(q6) e.c B c B B o c G B D c c s o o c c E D = NOTE:8 3/16' or ° a A A A A 8 8 A AS Ba A B B a A B BDa ' DIMENSION IS (5) B,G B C CIBID G C B D D G C E D D C E D MAX.AND 3' APPROVED ANCHORS:1.ELCO 11,C TAPCONS 2.ELCO 114"SS4 CRETE-FLEX 3-fl2 SCREWS TABLE 7. ———-———t O.C.IS MIN. MIAMI-DADE COUNTY ANCHORAGE SPACING REQUIREMENTS: & Imo- 8 6" - - 816 —1 FOR ALL 1, (2)ANCHORS REQUIRED AT EACH HEAD,SILL AND JAMB LOCATION. CLUSTER E-(12)ANCHORS CLUSTERS. (1)ANCHOR REQUIRED AT EACH P-HOOK LOCATION. ANCHOR LOCATIONS TO BE STAGGERED. 2, MAX_96"HIGH DOORS W/PANELS UP TO 48"WIDE. HEAD&SILL_,81/4"MAX,FROM CORNERS AND APPLICABLE CLUSTER(S)FROM TABLE 7 AT EACH ASTRAGAL AND INTERLOCK CENTERLINE 16 318"MAX.O.C.FOR 1/4"TAPCONS,CRETE-FLEX OR#12 SCREWS. JAMBS...........8"MAX FROM BOTTOM AND 24"MAX.O.C.FOR 114'TAPCONS OR CRETE-FLEX.16"MAX-O.C.FOR 412 SCREWS. P-HOOKS,,,._-.8"MAX.FROM BOTTOM AND 15"MAX.O.C.FOR 1/4"TAPCONS,CRETE-FLEX OR#12 SCREWS. 3. MAX.120"HIGH DOORS W/PANELS UP TO 48"WIDE. HEAD&SILL..8 114"MAX.FROM CORNERS AND APPLICABLE CLUSTER(S)FROM TABLE 7 AT EACH ASTRAGAL AND INTERLOCK CENTERLINE. 16 3/8"MAX.O.C.(1/4"TAPCONS,CRETE-FLEX OR#12 SCREWS, JAMBS............8"MAX FROM BOTTOM AND 26"MAX,O-C.FOR 114"TAPCONS OR CRETE-FLEX.22"MAX.O.C.FOR#12 SCREWS. PROUiUCT REVISED P-HOOKS.......8"MAX.FROM BOTTOM AND 20114"MAX_O.C.FOR 114"TAPCONS,CRETE-FLEX OR#12 SCREWS. Gaidin(y+gg C-- 151e 9iande 4. MAX.96'HIGH DOORS W/PANELS UP TO 60"WIDE. ko -QSZ3.03 HEAD&SILL.,81/4"MAX.FROM CORNERS AND APPLICABLE CLUSTER(S)FROM TABLE 7 AT EACH ASTRAGAL AND INTERLOCK CENTERLINE. t i IIS 009 22 13116"MAX.O.C.FOR 114"TAPCONS OR CRETE-FLEX. 15 3/8"MAX_O.C.FOR#12 SCREWS. g1. y/ JAMBS............8"MAX FROM BOTTOM AND 22"MAX.O.C.FOR 1/4"TAPCONS OR CRETE-FLEX.15"MAX.O.C.FOR#12 SCREWS, a Plmi.rt Co�vt P-HOOKS.......8"MAX.FROM BOTTOM AND 13 7/8"MAX.O.C.FOR 1/4"TAPCONS,CRETE-FLEX OR#12 SCREWS. M-0 ANCHORAGE SPACING FOR DOORS INSTALLED OUTSIDE MIAMI-DADE COUNTY: 5. MAX.96"HIGH DOORS W/PANELS UP TO 48"WIDE. HEAD&SILL,..........8 1/4"MAX FROM CORNERS AND CLUSTER A.AT EACH HEAD AND SILL ASTRAGAL AND INTERLOCK CENTERLINE. 16 3/8"MAX-O-C. JAMB....-8"MAX FROM BOTTOM AND 26 11116"MAX.O.C. P-HOOK.....8"MAX FROM BOTTOM AND 15"MAX-O.0 6. MAX_120'HIGH DOORS W/PANELS UP TO 48"WIDE. `� C HEAD&SILL..-........8 1/4"MAX FROM CORNERS AND CLUSTER A.AT EACH HEAD AND SILL ASTRAGAL AND INTERLOCK CENTERLINE. 16 3/8"MAX-O.C. JAMB.....8"MAX FROM BOTTOM AND 26'MAX-O.C. P-HOOK.....8"MAX FROM BOTTOM AND 20 114"MAX.O.0 7. MAX 96"HIGH DOORS W/PANELS UP TO 60"WIDE. ('�' HEAD&SILL-..........8 114'MAX.FROM CORNERS AND CLUSTER A,AT EACH HEAD AND SILL ASTRAGAL AND INTERLOCK CENTERLINE, 22 13/16'MAX.O.C.- JAMB.....W MAX FROM BOTTOM AND 26 11116"MAX.O.C. P-HOOK-----8"MAX FROM BOTTOM AND 13 7/8'MAX.O.0 R..W BY rtr. ate. oevo�. FK .11AK E REVISE P-NOOK SPAL NG ADD CRETE-FLEXANO UPGRADE NOTES ip-4c;TIALUM.ANCHORAGE, SPACING R"."ear B_ rtn s.,"< lOTU TECHNOLOGY O-5FK. 4h95 D CONDENSE TABLE).IND VF('.RADE ANCH(MgOE FER FB(,:qct NQKO>it!$.FL J4275, 8'. c, r; SLIDING GLASS DOOR, IMPACT 7 me, PE FX. tt1'1N4 C RECALC ANCHOR CAPACITIES.UPDATE SPAGNG NOTES AND TABLE P.0 BOA!519 Lu..aa� q,ro w 6Z 3;;-" ew., NOKORf15.FL 74274 L ctrl+/7 Betrrr s`""'""`• '"• �""� w,..vro PE M582D? EK 5118/174 Ji alsos sc�77o _1/8 14 + 17 4406-1 E I,e<.,:.dw' NOTES:1,MIN,DISTANCE FROM CONCRETE ANCHOR TO CONCRETE EDGE 15 EXTERIOR INTERIOR� 2x WOOD SILL AND JAMB AND 1"FOR P-NOOK INSTALLATION. FOR CONCRETE APPLICATIONS I (CONCRETE) (ALL SECTIONS) SEE Nd7£2 MIAMI-DADE COUNTY,USE ONLY MIAMI-DADE COUNTY APPROVED ELCO 114"TAPCOI, ( OR 1/4-ELCO SS4 CRETE-FLEX ANCHORS, FLAT HEADS TO BE#12 TRIMFIT TYPE. -1 1/4" f 2.WOOD BUCKS DEPICTED AS i x ARE LESS THAN 1 112"THICK. 1x WOOD BUCKS ARE - MIN, 1112, OPTIONAL IF UNIT IS INSTALLED DIRECTLY TO SOLID CONCRETE, WOOD BUCKS Ix WOOD BUCK L MIN. DEPICTED AS 2x ARE 1 112"THICK OR GREATER INSTALLATION TO THE SUBSTRATE SEE NOTE 2 OF WOOD BUCKS TO BE ENGINEERED BY OTHERS OR AS APPROVED BY THE 114- 114" 11 i1 e�"'.t"�. AI)TH[1(7tT!i{btll!tG.��IOISv:CTiC:�"i i ij. mm,SHIM : SHIM J.rOR ATTACHMENT TO ALUMINUM:THE ALUMINUM SHALL BE A MINIMUM STRENGTH OF 6063-T5 AND A MINIMUM OF 116"THICK. THE ALUMINUM STRUCTURAL MEMBER ti4"TAPCON,SEE NOTE 1 #12 SCREW,SEE NOTE 5 SHALL BE OF A SIZE TO PROVIDE FULL SUPPORT TO THE DOOR FRAME SIMILAR TO THAT SHOWN IN THE DETAILS ON SHEETS 15,16 AND 17 FOR 2x WOOD BUCKS. THE ORIGINAL 2-TRACK FRAME HEAD INSTALLATIONS ANCHORS SHALL BE#12 SHEET METAL SCREWS WITH FULL THREAD ENGAGEMENT INTO THE ALUMINUM. IF THESE CRITERIA ARE MET,THE PRESSURES SHOWN ON 2x WOOD SHEET 3 AND ANCHORAGE SPACING FOR#12 SCREWS SHOWN ON SHEET 14 MAY (CONCRETE) SEE NOTE 2 BE USED, 4.SCREEN FRAME AND DOOR FRAME MAY BE ATTACHED TO DIFFERENT SUBSTRATE 11/4 TYPES AS REQUIRED TO ACCOMMODATE THE EXTRA DEPTH OF MULTI-TRACK MIN, _ __ 1 112" CONFIGURATIONS,AS APPROVED BY AHJ. DESIGN OF COMPOSITE WOODIMASONRY Ix WOOD 13UCK f 11 MIN. OPENINGS DONE BY OTHERS OR AS ACCEPTED BY AHJ. FASTENER SIZE. SEE NOTE 2 EMBEDMENT.AND SPACING MUST BE AS INDICATED FOR THE SUBSTRATE INTO IIA"MAX. SCREEN•�i i 1f 'MAX, WHICH THE FASTNER IS EMBEDED. SHIM FRAME SHIM 5.FOR WOOD APPLICATIONS ELCO 1/4"TAPGONS OR 1/4"SS4 CRETE-FLEX ANCHORS WITH#12 TRIMFIT HEADS MAY BE USED INSTEAD OF#12 SCREWS. SEE TABLE 7. 1/4"TAPCON,SEE NOTE 1 #12 SCREW,SEE NOTE 5 2-TRACK FRAME HEAD INSTALLATIONS ALTERNATE 2 TRACK FRAME Wl SCREEN RAIL 2x WOOD (CONCRETE) SEE NOTE 2 « 1 114" t1/2" ix WOOD SUCK MIN. SEE NOTE 2 A. SCREEN FRAME T-1/4"MAX. SCREEN FRAME r. Z 114"MAX.SHIM i SHIM 1 , 114"TAPCON,SEE NOTE 1 #12 SCREW,SEE NOTE 5 3-TRACK FRAME HEAD INSTALLATIONS 2x WOOD a c- ;5-ice Wj- W e Fbri9t ,;Yid;rte, (CONCRETE) SEE NOTE 2 4. 1 114"MIN _ 1 x WOOD BUCK -- (� - _ `- 1 112" Fi al' a Ym,ss t Cna �s SEE NOTE 2 1 MIN. SCREEN FRAME —`` x 114"MAX. SCREEN k ? ri 114"MAX.SHIM SHIM FRAME U e 114'TAPCON,SEE NOTE 1 #12 SCREW,SEE NOTE 5 ` 4-TRACK FRAME HEAD INSTALLATIONS •�"'"~ �L-' 1Aeatbr :E x"»saaa: AOD UMfZ 4TEZMOICKFRAWWISrRE fiRMAW ROTES UPGRAM Maoo . Fx ur2A6 E NOTE rouxawECRE rs-FLExAND EDCELMSrANCEFOR P.rNOK ANCHORAGE DETAILS, HEAD la.rabr_ Aw�ne, 1070 TECtfNOLOGY DR/VE FX 6SW O REVtSENOTESAND A00344.MACK AND ALTERNATE,?.TRACK OPPONS NOKC%ftS,FL 3427. ALUM. SLIDING GLASS DOOR, IMPACT FK iMrg4 C REMOVE WA NAME.NOTE t P.O.Box 15.19 �� loves:..f urne..P E. Gae.rT Ore' ba. Dov" NOKOMI:FL 34274 Vi.,iNYBette, snraa.aee, s"ti sn.a' &_" . Fa, PE 258201 f.FC 6n8A7d r.r u,sms SG0739 1/4 15 {" 1 T 4406-7 E T+uehaMca+ 1 1/2"MIN. --( t 1/2'MIN. -*-( 1 112"MIN. t #12 SCREW 1 #12 SCREW SEE NOTE 5, SEE NOTE 5, WOE (�j SHEET 15 SHEET iS 2x WOOD SEE NOTE 2 SEE NOTE 2 SHT.15 SHT.15 SCREEN #12 SCREW SEE E NOTE S, INTERIOR 2x WOOD SHEET t5 SEE NOTE 2 (ALL SECTIONS) t/4`MAX,SHIM +►{ 114"MAX.SHIM (-- SHT.15 EXTERIOR 1x WOOD BUCK 1 114"MIN. IxWOOD BUCK 1 114"MIN. SEE NOTE 2 SEE NOTE 2 SCREEN SHT.15 SHT.15 FRAME 1. 1 ~: ALTERNATE 2 TRACK FRAME 1 J4"TAPCON w/SCREEN aJUL SEE NOTA t SHT.15 'j ;:(CONCRETE) (CONCRETE) 114"SHIM MAX. -►{f- i 1/4"TAPCON SEE NOTE 1 SHT.15 t 1/4"MIN. t i v 1 1x WOOD BUCK I/4"SHIM MAX -�-(� 1/4*SHIM MAX -((-"- SEE NOTE 2SHT.15 ORIGINAL 2-TRACK FRAME 2-TRACK FRAME JAMB INSTALLATIONS JAMB INSTALLATIONS 1 1/4"MIN. 1x WOOD BUCK ~ SEE NOTE 2 --I 1 112"MIN. 114'7APCQN SHT.15 i SEE NOTE i t SHT.15 :. (CONCRETE) 114'TAPCON #12 SCREW as campblmg..fck qe€srr;4a SEE NOTE i SEE NATE 5, 1 fade A: SHT.15 `+'+ ;.r, SHEET t5 ' SEE WOOD 2 4F a SCREENgmte (CONCRETE) SHT.15WAVO FRAME SCREEN _ SCREEN FRAME FRAME 114"SHIM MAX. 1/4"SHIM MAX- {(- 114"SHIM MAX. 4-TRACK FRAME 3-TRACK FRAME JAMB INSTALLATIONS JAMB INSTALLATIONS FA tnaus sAWA 7FMaTErrrAucFruwlscREENaan.ammaresREF, .r ANCHORAGE DETAILS,JAMS r070 TECWiMWY MVE F.K. uw b AOD3d -TRACd arra A4 YERNAtE 2-TRACK TONS NOKOMIS R34M75 1. �.�. ALUM. SL{DIlVG GLASS DOOR, IMPACT F.K. th"7�W C NO CNAM6E 7M551iEEt P.U.8i7.0 7529 Cin-vaA ':ucterP.E G—w- V- a;a�e mn NOK(zM1S.Ft.7421-1 Vaihls Berner 's`"" s"`µ a'""•A"d PE#58241 rr 8178Xt4 tf, ursns sco73o 114 16 17 4406-1 E ntachardcal SCREEN & #12 SCREW, & #12 SCREW. FRAME SEE NOTE 5.SHT 15 SEE NOTE 5,SHT 15 SCREEN FRAME SCREEN FRAME L+ t 1t4'MAX. a i SEE 1 112"MIN. 1r4'MAX. 1 112'MIN. 114'MAX. ry 1 1t2"MIN. NOTE 1 SEE NOTE 1 __ SEE NOTE 1 2x WOOD a„WOOD ty � Ott Nu r t L �- SEE NOTE 2 L.__2x WOOD SCREEN SHT.15 SCREEN SHT.15 SEE NOTE FRAME 114'TAPCON FRAME 1/4'TAPCON 1/4"TAPCON SHT.15 1/4"MAX. SEE NOTE 1 114'MAX. SEE NOTE 1 1/4"MAX. SEE NOTE 1 SEE NOTE 1 SHT.15 SEE NOTE 1 SHT.15 SEE NOTE 1 SHT.15 " .1 114"MIN. z 1 114"MIN. Y i '.1 114'M1N. t ;(CONCRETE) (CONCRETE) (CONCRETE) 4-TRACK FRAME SILL INSTALLATIONS 3-TRACK FRAME SILL INSTALLATIONS 2-TRACK FRAME A ALTERNATE 2 TRACK FRAME W/SCREEN RAIL SILL INSTALLATIONS ® EXTERIOR INTERIOR ANCHORS ARE STAGGERED 1"MN,AT P HOOK (ALL SILL SECTIONS) ANCHOR EMBEDMENT AT P-HOOK:1/4"TAPCON•1114*MIN. 114'CRETE-FLEX-1 314"MIN. #12 SCREW,SEE NOTE 5,SHT.15 lx WOOD BUCK (CONCRETE) SEE NOTE 2 (CONCRETE) 1114* SHT,15 1114" � 1 1t2'MIN. � �. 318'MIN. MIN. 318'MIN. MIN. 318'MIN. 114"MAX LI. SEE 1 112 MIN, 114'TAPCON ":"._ 1" 1/4"TAPCON "'" ?; i' #i2 SCREW . 1" NOTE i (SEE NOTE I) ,...<, (SEE NOTE 1) :. SEE NOTE 5, 2x WOOD 2x WOOD SHT.15 : ;,;;;? SHT.15 ��- ',:. SHT.15 pt'. •` SEE NOTE 2 SEE NOTE 2 SHT.15 SHT.15 114*TAPCON SEE NOTE 1 SHT.15 C: 1/4'MAX. (SILL) (SILL) (SILL) SEE NOTE 1 1114 - "MIN. 7?aE*., Psi: TYPICAL POCKET P-HOOK INSTALLATIONS (CONCRETE) INTERIOR ORIGINAL 2-TRACK FRAME (ALL P-HOOK SECTIONS) SILL INSTALLATIONS EXTERIOR NOTE: 1.IF SILL IS TIGHT TO SUBSTRATE,GROUT OR OTHER MATERIAL IS NOT REQUIRED. IF USED,GROUT OR OTHER MArL(DONE BY OTHERS)MUST ' FULLY SUPPORT THE ENTIRE LENGTH OF THE SILL THAT IS NOT TIGHT TO THE SUBSTRATE,AND TRANSFER SHEAR LOAD TO SUBSTRATE. 4 n.v.• bft o..ncem Enaoar nreztxnasFn wrscaEeNRAXarrorrra e+ikvice. ANCHORAGDETAILS,SILL&POCKE?"RHC10K tUlO rEGHNOtOGY ORIVE ^e4-TRACK.At TERWTE2,TRACtt OPYKAS ANOCII.ROUr NOTE NOKCWIS Ft 34275 T"Y ,��w�----- ALUM.SLIDING GLASS DOOR, IMPACT �n .P.e P.O.001T is NOK040S.R 34274 vi,4r lr awer se.wsfbdx aa+r Sr+.r w..*sx" +k+ Nt g5H2pt SG0730 114 17 17 4406-1 E Mechl M I A M MDADE MIAMI-DADE COUNTY,FLORIDA _ METRO-DADE FLAGLER BUILDING BUILDING CODE COMPLIANCE OFFICE(BCCO) 140 WEST FLAGLER STREET,SUITE 1603 PRODUCT CONTROL DIVISION MIAMI,FLORIDA 33130-1563 (305)375-2901 FAX(305)375-2908 NOTICE OF ACCEPTANCE (NOA) PGT Industries ,t 1070 Technology Drive CO Nokomis,FL 34275 PY SCOPE: This NOA is being issued under the applicable rules and regulations governing the use of construction materials. The documentation submitted has been reviewed by Miami-Dade County Product Control Division and accepted by the Board of Rules and Appeals(BORA)to be used in Miami Dade County and other areas where allowed by the Authority Having Jurisdiction(AHJ). This NOA shall not be valid after the expiration date stated below. The Miami-Dade County Product Control Division (In Miami Dade County) and/or the AHJ (in areas other than Miami Dade County)reserve the right to have this product or material tested for quality assurance purposes. If this product or material fails to perform in the accepted manner, the manufacturer will incur the expense of such testing and the AHJ may immediately revoke,modify,or suspend the use of such product or material within their jurisdiction. BORA reserves the right to revoke this acceptance,if it is determined by Miami-Dade County Product Control Division that this product or material fails to meet the requirements of the applicable building code. This product is approved as described herein,and has been designed to comply with the Florida Building Code, including the High Velocity Hurricane Zone. DESCRIPTION:Series"PW-701"Aluminum Picture Window-LMI APPROVAL DOCUMENT:Drawing No.42594,titled"Aluminum Picture Window,Impact",sheets 1 through 10 of 10,prepared by manufacturer,dated 7/14/03,with revision"A",dated 12/15/03,signed and sealed by Robert L.Clark,P.E.,bearing the Miami-Dade County Product Control Approval stamp with the Notice of Acceptance number and approval date by the Miami-Dade County Product Control Division. MISSILE IMPACT RATING:Large and Small Missile Impact LABELING:Each unit shall bear a permanent label with the manufacturer's name or logo,city,state and following statement: "Miami-Dade County Product Control Approved",unless otherwise noted herein. RENEWAL of this NOA shall be considered after a renewal application has been filed and there has been no change in the applicable building code negatively affecting the performance of this product. TERMINATION of this NOA will occur after the expiration date or if there has been a revision or change in the materials,use,and/or manufacture of the product or process.Misuse of this NOA as an endorsement of any product,for sales,advertising or any other purposes shall automatically terminate this NOA.Failure to comply with any section of this NOA shall be cause for termination and removal of NOA. ADVERTISEMENT: The NOA number preceded by the words Miami-Dade County, Florida, and followed by the expiration date may be displayed in advertising literature. If any portion of the NOA is displayed, then it shall be done in its entirety. INSPECTION:A copy of this entire NOA shall be provided to the user by the manufacturer or its distributors and shall be available for inspection at the job site at the request of the Building Official. This NOA consists of this page 1 and evidence pages E-I and E-2,as well as approval document mentioned above. The submitted documentation was reviewed by Theodore Berman,P.E. �-, NOA No 03-1105.01 Expiration Date:February 19,2009 Approval Date:February 19,2004 '? Page 1 PGT Industries NOTICE OF ACCEPTANCE: EVIDENCE SUBMITTED A. DRAWINGS 1. Manufacturer's die drawings and sections. 2. Drawing No.4259-4,titled"Aluminum Picture Window,Impact",sheets 1 through 10 of 10,prepared by manufacturer,dated 7/14/03,with revision"A"dated 12/15/03,signed and sealed by Robert L.Clark,P.E. B. TESTS 1. Test reports on 1)Air Infiltration Test,per FBC,TAS 202-94 2)Uniform Static Air Pressure Test,Loading per FBC,TAS 202-94 3)Water Resistance Test,per FBC,TAS 202-94 4)Large Missile Impact Test per FBC,TAS 201-94 5)Cyclic Wind Pressure Loading per FBC,TAS 203-94 along with marked-up drawings and installation diagram of an aluminum picture window,prepared by Fenestration Testing Laboratory,Inc.,Test Report No.FTL- 3835,dated 07/18/03,signed and sealed by Joseph Chan,P.E. 2. Test reports on 1)Air Infiltration Test,per FBC,TAS 202-94 2)Uniform Static Air Pressure Test,Loading per FBC,TAS 202-94 3)Water Resistance Test,per FBC,TAS 202-94 4)Large Missile Impact Test per FBC,TAS 201-94 5) Cyclic Wind Pressure Loading per FBC,TAS 203-94 along with marked-up drawings and installation diagram of an aluminum picture window,prepared by Fenestration Testing Laboratory,Inc.,Test Report No.FTL- 3850,dated 07/31/03, signed and sealed by Joseph Chan,P.E. C. CALCULATIONS 1. Anchor Calculations,ASTM-E1300-98,and structural analysis,prepared by manufacturer,dated 10/31/03,signed and sealed by Robert L. Clark,P.E. D. QUALITY ASSURANCE 1. Miami Dade Building Code Compliance Office(BCCO). E. MATERIAL CERTIFICATIONS 1. Notice of Acceptance No. 02-0828.15 issued to E.I.DuPont DeNemours for "DuPont Butacite PVB Material"dated 11/21/02,expiring on 12/11/05. 2. Notice of Acceptance No.01-0205.02issued to Solutia,Inc.for"Saflex/ Keepsafe Maximum"dated 5/17/01,expiring on 5/21/06. Theodore Berman,P.E. Deputy Director,Product Control Division NOA No 03.1105.01 Expiration Date:February 19,2009 Approval Date:February 19,2004 E-1 PGT Industries NOTICE OF ACCEPTANCE: EVIDENCE SUBMITTED F. STATEMENTS 1. Laboratory compliance letter for Test Report no.FTL-3835,issued by Fenestration Testing Laboratory,Inc.,dated 08/25/03, signed and sealed by Joseph Chan,P.E. 2. Laboratory compliance letter for Test Report no.FTL-3850,issued by Fenestration Testing Laboratory,Inc.,dated 08/21/03, signed and sealed by Joseph Chan,P.E. G. OTHER 1. Letter from the consultant stating that the product is in compliance with the Florida Building Code(FBC). Theodore Berman,P.E. Deputy Director,Product Control Division NOA No 03-1105.01 Expiration Date:February 19,2009 Approval Date:February 19,2M E-2 NOTES: LARGE MISSILE WINDOWS NOA DRAWIN(� 1.GLAZING OPTIONS: GENERALNOTES................ I A.7/16"LAMINATED GLASS COMPRISED OF(1)LITE OF 3/16'ANNEALED GLASS AND(1)LITE OF 3/16'HEAT STRENGTHENED GLAZING DETAILS........................ 2 GLASS WITH AN.090 INTERLAYER OF DUPONT BUTACITE OR SAFLEX KEEPSAFE MAXIMUM PVB. ELEVATIONS,FLANGED..........._.. 3 B.7116"LAMINATED GLASS COMPRISED OF(2)LITES OF 3116'HEAT STRENGTHENED GLASS GLASS WITH AN.090 ELEVATIONS,INTEGRAL FIN....... 4 INTERLAYER OF DUPONT BUTACITE OR SAFLEX KEEPSAFE MAXIMUM PVB. DESIGN PRESSURES FLANGED..5 C.11116'LAMI I.G,GLASS COMPRISED OF(1)LITE OF 3/16'HEAl STRENGTHENED GLASS,A 7116'AIRSPACE AND 7/16' DESIGN PRESSURES FINNED......6 LAMINATED GLASS WHICH IS COMPRISED OF(1)LITE OF 3116'ANNEALED GLASS AND(1)LITE OF 3116.HEAT SECTIONS,FLANGED................... 7 STRENGTHENED GLASS WITH AN.090 INTERLAYER OF DUPONT BUTACITE OR SAFLEX KEEPSAFE MAXIMUM PVB. CORNER ASSY,FLANGED........_7 D.1 1/16LAMI I.G.GLASS COMPRISED OF(1)LITE OF 3116'HEAT STRENGTHENED GLASS,A 7/16'AIRSPACE AND 7/16' SECTIONS,INTEGRAL FIN........... 8 LAMINATED GLASS WHICH IS COMPRISED OF(2)LITES OF 3/16'HEAT STRENGTHENED GLASS WITH AN.090 INTERLAYER CORNER ASStY,INTEGRAL FIN...8 OF DUPONT BUTACITE OR SAFLEX KEEPSAFE MAXIMUM PVB. EXTRUSION PROFILES.................9 2.DESIGN PRESSURE RATINGS:(FLANGED-SEE SHEET 5,TABLE I AND INTEGRAL FIN-SEE SHEET 6,TABLE 2) PARTS LIST................................... 9 A.NEGATIVE DESIGN LOADS BASED ON TESTED PRESSURE AND GLASS TABLES ASTM E 13MM(AND ASTM E 1300-94 ANCHORAGE.......... .................... 1&101 OUTSIDE MIAMI-DADE COUNTY). B.POSITIVE DESIGN LOADS BASED ON WATER TEST PRESSURE AND GLASS TABLES ASTM E 1300-98(AND ASTM E 1300-94 OUTSIDE MIAMI-DADE COUNTY). C.DESIGN PRESSURES UNDER 40 P.S.F,NOT APPLICABLE IN MIAMWADE COUNTY. 3.FLANGED UNIT ANCHORAGE:SINGLE ROW OF FASTENERS LOCATED AS FOLLOWS:(SEE SHEET 10,DETAILS C,D&E) HEAD&SILL: MAX.8 11r FROM CORNERS MAX,11�O.C. JAMBS: A MAX.8 1/2'FROM CORNERS MAX.11"O.C. (DESIGN PRESSURE LIMITED TO 60 P.S.F.WHEN ANCHORING WITH#12 SCREWS) 4.INTEGRAL FIN UNIT ANCHORAGE WITH NAILS:SINGLE ROW OF.130 DIA.x 2 lt2*LG.NAILS AS FOLLOWS:(SEE SHEET 10,DETAIL A) HEAD&SILL- AT EACH CORNER MAX.5*O,C. JAMBS: AT EACH CORNER MAX.5"O.C. 5.INTEGRAL FIN UNIT ANCHORAGE NTH#12 SCREWS:SINGLE RCIN OF SCREWS AS FOLLOWS:(SEE SHEET 10,DETAIL 8) HEAD&SILL: MAX.8 lr-r FROM CORNERS rb" MAX.11*0.C, JAMBS: A-MAX.8 It2o FROM CORNERS MAX.I I'O.C, (DESIGN PRESSURE LIMITED TO 60 P.S.F.WHEN ANCHORING WITH#12 SCREWS) 6.SHUTTER REQUIREMENT:NONE REQUIRED 7.NARROW JOINT SEALANT IS USED ON ALL FOUR CORNERS OF TAE FRAME. 8.REFERENCE TEST REPORTS:FTL-3835&FTL-38-50 tam TEchf"OGY o^w NOTES& TABLE OF CONTENTS Mwok",Fuwn T*l REDUCE ANCHOR SPACW5 P.0,"On PKX-T**= ALUMINUM PICTURE WINDOW IMPACT Ranvi 1,Ctwk Prz. WKCWK Ft 3074 Visibiy Better PE 039712 '=-., I NTS I I . 10 4259-4 IA sbuck" I 1116"LAMI GLASS NOMINAL 7116"LAMI GLASS NOMINAL 7116 LAMI GLASS NOMINAL 3116"ANNEALED OR HEAT 3116"ANNEALED OR HEAT STRENGTHENED GLASS STRENGTHENED GLASS .090 DUPONT BUTACITE OR .090 DUPONT BUTACITE OR SAFLEX KEEPSAFE MAXIMUM SAFLEX KEEPSAFE MAXIMUM PVB INTERLAYER 7116"AIR SPACE PVB INTERLAYER 3116"HEAT 3116"HEAT 3118'HEAT STRENGTHENED STRENGTHENED GLASS STRENGTHENED GLASS GLASS 12 12 10 @OR@ _SORg 11 LA OUTSIDE 11116"NOM OUTSIDE 11116"NOM GLASS BITE GLASS BITE 13 2 13 1 rt!fes+!warms 4MiwMY 1Me rlwY YIfIAi - ' 8OR 15 8OR 15 7/16" LAMI GLAZING DETAIL 1 1/16" LAMI I.G. GLAZING DETAIL FLANGED OR INTEGRAL FIN FRAME FLANGED OR INTEGRAL FIN FRAME (FLANGE FRAME SHOWN) (INTEGRAL FIN FRAME SHOWN) /� 03 Rrww": f0TA rfGa&I a nORrrE GLARING DETAILS it, Notes. ALUMINUM PICTURE WINDOW,IMPACT M Ift ""wfxE T+iIS SME'E'T PA SOX t579 Rak"ri i„CR,xk P.E. NOKO1W FE W74 Visibly Bette — a—" . ""` PE#Nll7 Pw-mr NTS 2 w 1t1 4259-4 A sau h" / C914 a0 �yq!setZ�pesos �1O�3�Sjy0 -60 ns N zy .�.- n 3��`l� p3�'' '. -° w-8° i3 a X•�; ��tdN dA .all md l6 Y,• z6 V � 09WWvt X r�'3 ��• / y/ opo os vt .sem' w °s tiEs s ��x•�`ld,�,� o � 1d - �wb Sym (/ ps ' `S �o � •d`4"�- �11n� X,dwaO ¢��d•� �•jeaw Np '�•°�X• d • Np / -A?" *t K;x ° ,tIQ'S,A tiLoto` pS3ipPt�3`'�,NQ11` got aii°� xqo of • ;��a w��tW�� .3�"S �� W�o t �. y dW�;MO�NIM dA3'13 Nth I �d.,oaw�p 1 '08X96-3�..�� 1 SNOtl �S ao zE +s. 3d 180 0113 aS' O 014 oS Li► 321S 60 l� �.pS 66�^gZiS' .)c4vA)AO Sl..413 Q ��cdw�°w bo ti ��.3Z+s' d3�d'XdrN N0� .99X 31��1 �4 COMPARATIVE ANALYSIS TABLE 1. A.7/16"LAMINATED GLASS(3/16"A, .090,3/16HS) FTL-3835 GLASS TYPE: B. 7/16"LAMINATED GLASS(3/16"HS, .090, 3/16HS) FTL-3835 C. 1 1/16"LAMI I.G., 3/16HS, 7/16"SPACE, 7/16"LAMI(3/16A, .090,3/16-HS) FTL-3850 D. 1 1/16"LAMI I.G. 3/16HS 7/16"SPACE 7/16"LAMI f3il6HS .090 3/16"HS FTL-3850 WINDOW WINDOW HEIGHT WIDTH 149.000 A&C 80.0 -80.0 80.0 -80.0 80.0 -80.0 80.0 -80.0 80.0 -80.0 80.0 -80.0 B&D 80.0 -80.0 80.0 -80.0 80.0 -80.0 80.0 -80.0 80.0 -80.0 80.0 -80.0 AREAS .FT. 9.698 11.569 13.441 15.313 15.823 16.333 54.500 A&C 80.0 -80.0 80.0 -80.0 80.0 -80.0 76.7 -76.7 74.0 -75.2 74.0 -74.0 B&D 80.0 -80.0 80.0 1 -80.0 80.0 -80.0 80.0 1 -80.0 80.0 -80.0 80.0 -80.0 AREA SQ.FT. 10.786 12.868 14.950 17.031 17.599 18.167 60.000 A&C 80.0 -80.0 80.0 -80.0 74.0 -74.0 69.9 -69.9 67.2 -68.6 67.2 -67.2 B&D 80.0 1 -80.0 80.0 -80.0 80.0 1 -80.0 80.0 -80.0 80.0 -80.0 80.0 -80.0 AREAS .FT. 11.875 14.167 16.458 18.750 19.375 20.000 65.500 A&C 80.0 -80.0 80.0 1 -80.0 68.5 1 -68.5 63.5 1X3.5 61.3 -62.3 61.3 -61.3 B&D 80.0 -80.0 80.0 -80.0 80.0 -80.0 80.0 -80.0 80.0 -80.0 80.0 -80.0 AREAS .FT. 12.964 15.465 17.967 20.469 21.151 21.833 71000 A&C 80.0 -80.0 79.4 -79.4 63.7 -63.7 57.9 -57.9 56.1 -57.1 56.1 -56.1 B&D 80.0 -80.0 80.0 -80.0 80.0 -80.0 80.0 -80.0 80.0 -80.0 80.0 -80.0 AREAS .FT. 14.052 16.764 19.476 22.188 22.927 23.667 76.500 A&C 80.0 -80.0 76.8 -76-8 59.7 -59.7 52.8 -52.8 51.9 -52.1 51.9 -51.9 B&D 80.0 -80.0 80.0 -80.0 80.0 -80.0 80.0 -80.0 80.0 -80.0 80.0 -80.0 AREAS .FT. 15.141 18.063 20.984 23.906 24.703 25.500 82.000 A&C 80.0 -80.0 74.1 -74.1 56.5 -56.5 48.3 -48.3 47.6 -48.0 47.6 -47.6 B&D 80.0 -80.0 80.0 -80.0 80.0 -80.0 80.0 -80.0 80.0 -80.0 80.0 -80.0 AREAS .FT 16.229 19.361 22.493 25.625 26.479 27.333 87 500 A&C 80.0 -80.0 70.7 -70.7 53.6 -53.6 43.6 -43.6 43.4 -43.2 43.4 1 -43.4 B&D 80.0 -80.0 80.0 -80.0 80.0 -80.0 80.0 -80.0 80.0 -80.0 80.0 1 -80.0 Ate„ „Mr,r. AREAS .FT. 17.318 20.660 24.002 27.344 28.255 29.167 Www O A&C 80.0 -80.0 69.1 -69.1 51.4 -51.4 42.5 -42.5 40.7 -41.0 40.7 -40.7 1wont 93.000 13&D 80.0 -80.0 80.0 -80.0 80.0 -80.0 80.0 -80.0 80.0 -80.0 79.4 -79.4 t ` AREA SQ.FT. 18.406 21.958 25.510 29.063 30.031 31.000 96.000 A&C 80.0 1 -80.0 68.8 1 -68.8 50.4 -50.4 41.6 41.6 39.4 -40.1 39.4 -39.4 B&D 1 80,0 -80.0 80.0 1 -80.0 80.0 1 -80.0 80.0 -80.0 80.0 1 -80.0 76.6 -76.6 AREAS .FT. 19.000 22.667 26.333 30.000 31.000 32.000 NO YES: 1.TABLE 1 PRESSURES ARE BASED ON THE LARGEST TESTED SIZE RECTANGULAR WINDOW ANCHORED WITH 114"TAPCONS.DESIGN PRESSURES ARE LIMITED TO+1-60 P.S.F.WHEN ANCHORING WITH#12 SCREWS. Q 2.ALL MAXIMUM SIZES SHOWN ON SHEET 3 ARE QUALIFIED TO THE PRESSURE OF A 32 SO.FT.UNIT IN TABLE 1. 3.ALL SHAPES LESS THAN THE MAXIMUM SIZE,QUALIFY TO PRESSURE FOR THE MAXIMUM SIZE LISTED IN TABLE 1,OR TO THE PRESSURE FOR THE SMALLESTF� v TAN "F IN TABLE I WHICH THEIR OVERAI I-WIDTH HEIGHT DIMFN;QNS COMPI ETFI IT WITHIN_ J FLANGED UNIT DESIGN PRESSURES lGamr. wwsv: 1070 MC'MIMOGYDRNE 1 NQK�.FI 31175 't F.K. 7 11/1sw n NOTE t AACHORNVG wear w11 SCREWS P.O.BM 1528 ALUMINUM PICTURE W/NDOW, IMPACT Rubwt 4 Cwk PF, D-my, ar: 7 o,,,. NOKOWS,Ft 3074 Visibly Bette s..rr s.r: s.r ww.. - PE SW12 F.K. 7it4iO3 Pw-7o+ NTS 5 - 10 4259-4 A S COMPARATIVE ANALYSIS TABLE 2. A.7/16"LAMINATED GLASS (3/16"A, .090,3/16HS) FTL-3835 GLASS TYPE: B. 7/16"LAMINATED GLASS (3/16"HS, .090, 3/16HS) FTL-3835 C. 1 1/16"LAMI I.G., 3/16HS, 7/16"SPACE, 7/16" LAMI (3/16A, .090, 3/16"HS) FTL-3850 D. 1 1/16" LAMI I.G. 3/16HS 7/16"SPACE 7/16"LAMI 3/16HS .090 3/16"HS FTL-3850 WINDOW WINDOW HEIGHT WIDTH 28.500 34. 00 39.500 45.000 46. 00 48.000 49.000 A&C 80.0 1 -80.0 80.0 -80.0 80.0 -80.0 80.0 -80.0 79.4 -80.0 79.4 -79.4 B&D 80.0 T -80.0 80.0 1 -80.0 80.0 1 -80.0 80.0 -80.0 80.0 -80.0 80.0 1 -80.0 AREA SQ.FT. 9.698 11.569 13.441 15.313 15. 23 16.333 54.500 A&C 80.0 -80.0 80.0 -80.0 78.9 -78.9 74.3 1 -74.3 71.9 -73.1 71.9 -71.9 B&D 80.0 -80.0 80.0 -80.0 80.0 -80.0 80.0 1 -80.0 80.0 -80.0 80.0 -80.0 AREA SQ.FT. 10.786 12.868 14.950 17.031 17.599 18.167 60.000 A&C 80.0 -80.0 80.0 -80.0 72.2 -72.2 67.8 1 -67.8 65.0 1 -66.4 65.0 -65.0 B&D 80.0 -80.0 80.0 -80.0 80.0 -80.0 80.0 -80.0 80.0 -80.0 80.0 -80.0 AREA SQ.FT 11.875 14.167 16.458 18.750 19.3 5 20.000 500 A&C 80.0 -80.0 78.9 -78.9 65.5 -65.5 61.7 -61.7 59.6 -60.7 59.6 -59.6 B&b 80.0 -80.0 80.0 -80.0 80.0 -80.0 80.0 -80.0 60.0 -80.0 80.0 -80.0 AREA SQ.FT. 1.2.964 15.465 17.967 20.469 21.151 3 71.000 A&C 80.0 -80.0 75.3 1 -75.3 61.1 -61.1 .56.4 1 -56.4 54.6 -55.5 54.6 -54.6 B&D 80.0 -80.0 80.0 1 -80.0 80.0 -80.0 80.0 -80.0 80.0 -80.0 80.0 -80.0 AREAS .FT 14.052 16.764 19.476 22.188 22.927 23.667 76.500 A&C 80.0 1 -80.0 72.6 -72.6 57.1 -57.1 51.5 -51.5 51.0 -51.3 51.0 -51.0 B&D 80.0 1 -80.0 80.0 1 -80.0 80.0 -80.0 80.0 -80.0 80.0 1 -80.0 80.0 -80.0 AREA SQ.FT 15.141 18.063 20.984 23.906 24.703 25.500 82.000 A&C 80.0 1 -80.0 69.4 -69.4 53.8 -53.8 47.2 -47.2 46.6 -46.9 46.6 -46.6 B&D 80.0 1 -80.0 80.0 -80.0 1 80.0 -80.0 80.0 -80.0 80.0 1 -80.0 80.0 1 -80.0 AREA SQ.FT. 16.229 19.361 1 22.493 25.625 26.479 27.333 87.500 A&C 80.0 -80.0 66.4 1 -66.4 51.0 1 -51.0 42.6 1 -42.6 43.1 -42.7 43.1 -43.1 B&D 80.0 -80.0 80.0 -80.0 80.0 1 -80.0 80.0 1 -80.0 80.0 1 -80.0 80.0 -80.0 AREA SQ.FT. 17.318 20.660 24.002 27.344 28.255 29.167 1 A&C 80.0 -80.0 65.0 -65.0 48.9 -48.9 41.2 -41.2 40.4 -40.2 40.4 -40.4 a.. _ 93.000 B&D 80.0 -80.0 80.0 -80.0 80.0 -80.0 80.0 -80.0 79.7 -79.7 76.0 -76.0 $ AREA SQ.FT. 18.406 Aj - 25.510 29.063 30.031 31.000 96.000 A&C 80.0 -80.0 648.0 -48.0 40.2 -40.2 39.0 -38.9 39.0 -39.0 B&D 80.0 -80.0 880.0 -80.0 80.0 -80.0 76.9 -76.9 73.1 -73.1 AREA SQ.FT. 19.000 26.333 30.000 31.000 32.000 _j 1.TABLE 2 PRESSURES ARE BASED ON THE LARGEST TESTED SIZE RECTANGULAR WINDOW ANCHORED WITH 114'TAPCONS.DESIGN PRESSURES ARE LIMITED TO+/-60 P.S.F.WHEN ANCHORING WITH#12 SCREWS. QA 2.ALL MAXIMUM SIZES SHOWN ON SHEET 4 ARE QUALIFIED TO THE PRESSURE OF A 32 SQ.FT.UNIT IN TABLE 2. 3.ALL SHAPES LESS THAN THE MAXIMUM SIZE,QUALIFY TO PRESSURE FOR THE MAXIMUM SIZE LISTED IN TABLE 2,OR TO THE PRESSURE FOR THE SMALLEST RECTANGULAR SIZE IN TABLE 2.WHICH THEIR OVERALL WIDTH AND HEIG14T DIMENSONSCOMPLETELY ITWITHIN, 1071 TECFWOLOGYORIVE INTEGRAL FIN UNIT DESIGN PRESSURES f tures NOKOWS.fL 31 of r e F.K 12HSW A CHANGE NOTE t AN04MINGa WITH#12 SCREWS Ro.Boar 1528 ALUMINUM PICTURE WINDOW, IMPACT Rrrbal L Cbrk PE- PE o.... wr chra.eM mw NOKOMIS,FT.N271 v slbt y Bette "�""` '�"` �" .r,- #W12 F.K. 7/10103 PYK7vt NTS 6 a 10 4259-4 A Slncwal 13 13 2 2.784' 2.784" 2 OUTSIDE 2 10 11 17 18 21 22 MAX.DAYLIGHT OPENING MAX.WINDOW WIDTH 13 10 HORIZONTAL SECTVDN 11 (FLANGE FRAME) 2 20 $ 20 WINDOW HEIGHT 1 2 188 g ALONG ALONG 8 ENTIRE 8 ENTIRE 21 INSIDE JOINT 2 JOINT 22 MAX. &a— DAYLIGHT OPENING SCREWED CORNER ASSY KEYED CORNER ASSY (FLANGE FRAME) a ..,.�Ifn•r►+e WELD (FLANGE FRAME) + . a« 13 T-- E ALONG 8 ENTIRE JOINT 2 VERTICAL SECTION WELDED CORNER ASSY (FLANGE FRAME) (FLANGE FRAME) ,azo TECHUMOGY MAIF E' ..�.. SECTIONS&CORNER ASSY, FLANGED II FIC 12115MA NO CHANGE THIS SHEET P.O.80X 1379 ALUMINUM .PICTURE WINDOW, IMPACT RaOatl L Cleft,PE. w+* r. Q D ---- or: N0KG4fk%R 30274 Visibly Bette "' °"" — rd PE09712 F.K. 711403 PW-7af IVIS 7 + !0 4259-4 A Shuck" 13 13 2.784" 1 1 2.784" OUTSIDE 10 i1 17 18 21 22 MAX.DAYLIGHT OPENING 8 MAX.WINDOW WIDTH 10 HORIZONTAL SECTION 11 (INTEGRAL FIN FRAME) MAX, WINDOW 1 HEIGHT 17 $ 20 8 20 18 ALONG / 21 INSIDE 8 ENTIRE ALONG 1 JOINT ENTIRE 22 8 JOINT MAX. 7 DAYLIGHT 74OPENING SCREWED CORNER ASSY KEYED CORNER ASSY (INTEGRAL FIN FRAME) WELD (INTEGRAL FIN FRAME) 13Mw�•+ .•+►�•+ 1 ALONG l ENTIRE 8 JOINT 1 1 VERTICAL SECTION WELDED CORNER ASSY (INTEGRAL FIN FRAME) (INTEGRAL FIN FRAME) ft.omift-i— 1070 m;twp6oGfv&w SECTIONS,INTEGRAL FIN YL N a 3075ALUMINUM PICTURE WINDOWIMPACT F.K. 12115W A NO CHANGE THIS SHEET P,o.BOX 1STg CArk P.E. D—ill.: ow.: cl.ara a. HaKOWS.fx 9127 Visibly 8e1 t e """" a"` ish �•-4«, •• PEAM112 f.K. 7114113 PW-70f PVTS 8 - to 4259.4 A sbuchaw ITEM DWG N0. PART# DESCRIPTION 1 4256A 64256 INTEGRAL FIN FRAME HEAD,SILL&JAMB 2.784" 2 4253 64253 FLANGED FRAME HEAD,SILL&JAMB 7 1155 781PQX #8 X 1 QUAD PN SMS STAINLESS STEEL 8 SCHNEE-MOREHEAD SM5504 ACRYL-R NARROW JOINT SEALANT OR EQUAL 10 4255 64255 7/16 LAMI GLASS BEAD ll 4254 64254 1 1/16 LAMI I.G.GLASS BEAD 2.500" 12 1224 6TP247 VINYL BULB WEATHERSTRIP(THICK) 13 4224 INSTALLATION FASTENER COVER 14 DOW CORNING 899 GLAZING SEALANT 062" DOW CORNING 995 SILICONE STRUCTURAL SEALANT, dr7" 15 BLACK 7116"LAMI GLASS:3116"ANNEALED-.090 DUPONT 17 BUTACITE OR SAFLEX KEEPSAFE MAXIMUM PVB INTERLAYER-3/16"HEAT STRENGTHENED ITEM 1, INTEGRAL FIN FRAME 1 1/16"LAMI I.G.GLASS:3/16"HEAT STRENGTHENED MArL:6063-T5 18 OUTBOARD-7/16"AIRSPACE-3/16"ANNEALED-.090 DWG NO.4256A DUPONT BUTACITE OR SAFLEX KEEPSAFE MAXIMUM PVB INTERLAYER-3/16"HEAT STRENGTHENED 20 4262 64262 ARCHITECTURAL CORNER KEY 7/16"LAMI GLASS:3/16"HEAT STRENGTHENED-.090 21 DUPONT BUTACITE OR SAFLEX KEEPSAFE MAXIMUM PV8 INTERLAYER-3/16"HEAT STRENGTHENED 1 1/16"LAMI I.G.GLASS:3/16"HEAT STRENGTHENED OUTBOARD-7/16"AIRSPACE-3116"HEAT 22 STRENGTHENED-.090 DUPONT BUTACITE OR SAFLEX KEEPSAFE MAXIMUM PVB INTERLAYER-3116"HEAT STRENGTHENED .970' -�{ .346" .—'-1 }-- 1.875" ^^, now coo 050" .975" 975" 050" r -- .062 h' " 2.784" ITEM 10, ITEM 11, 7/16 LAMI GLASS BEAD 1 1/16 LAMI I.G. GLASS BEAD ITEM 2, FLANGED FRAME MAT'L:6063-T5 MAT'L:6063-T5 MArL:6063-T5 n DWG NO.4255 DWG NO.4254 DWG NO.4253 JJLJ / ton TEcw,aocYDRAFE EXTRUSION PROFILES&PARTS USTA"KOW,FL 3C L ". ALUMINUM PICTURE WINDOW,IMPACT FA 1211-"3 p WO CHANCE THlS SHEET P.O.BOX 1519 � — me a�..e N P Robot CtMk N.E. ik- 4" y,.: wotaowrs Ft3t2>e Visibly Bette ;Z., PE an*f 12 NTS 9 " 10 4259-4 A Sauctaa� F.K. 7114103 #12 SCREW,8112"MAX.FROM CORNERS&11"MAX.O.C. /A\ FROM CUn„_ 11"MAX. O.C. A 1/4"MAX. (' 1I4"MAX. 1/4"MAX. SHlM _L____.� ::-:• �_-:-: _-: .-:-;-__ 1 SHIM � SHIM .130"DIA.MIN. x 21/2"NAIL, 1 112"MIN, '—� 1 112"MIN. AT CORNERS <"G { --- EMBEDMENT EMBEENT AND 5'O.C. DM -. ;T WOOD BUCK OR FRAMING 2x WOOD BUCK 2x WOOD BU (SEE NOTE 2) (SEE NOTE 2) INTEGRAL FIN DETAIL A INTEGRAL FIN DETAIL B FLANGED DETAIL C 114"TAPCON,8 i/2'MAX.FROM 114*TAPCCM�I,$112'MAX.FROM CORNERS&11"MAX.Q.C.A (SEE NOTE i) CORNERS&11"MAX.O.C. A (SEE NOTE 1) 1/4"MAX, 114"MAX. 1 SHIM SHIM 1 1/4"MIN, 1 114"MIN. .. EMBEDMENT EMBEDMENT: : : • ix WOOD BUCK C SEE NOTE 2 r t7Z CONCRETE SOLID CONCRETE FOR BEAD&SILL as ^ OR HOLLOW BLOCK FOR JAMBS NOTES: FLANGED DETAIL D(SILL ONLY) FLANGED DETAIL E 1.USE ONLY MIAMI-DADE COUNTY APPROVED ELCO TAPCONS.d 2. A-IN MIAMI-DADE COUNTY INSTALLATION TO THE SUBSTRATE OF WOOD BUCKS TO BE ENGINEERED,PROPERLY ATTACHED TO TRANSFER LOAD AND TO BE REVIEWED BY BUILDING OFFICIAL. B-OUTSIDE MIAMI-DADE COUNTY INSTALLATION TO THE SUBSTRATE OF WOOD BUCKS TO BE ENGINEERED BY OTHERS OR AS APPROVED BY BUILDING OFFICIAL. ANCHORAGE-HFA©,SILL AND JAMBST 1or<t TEp9ltxosr oR1ve ! rtacauss a.3fzrs '� ALUMINUM PICTURE WINDOW,IMPACT '—VOTE t MAFASTENER SPACM P.O.ww 1529 Fast L Unk.P.E. hYMtO6'fS.Ft.3f2Tf Visibly Baha s..r.++ tew- sr awwrr. w. PE#W12 PW.701 NTS 10 + 10 4259-/ A S�nwxurM LETTER OF TRANSMITTAL General Contractors, Inc. 248 LEVY ROAD / P.O.Box 330775 ATLANTIC BEACFI, FLORIDA 32233 (904) 241-4416 / FAX (904) 241-4427 COMPANY: City of Atlantic Beach ATTENTION: Shirley Graham ADDRESS: 1200 Sandpiper Lane DATE: April 12,2007 REFERENCE/JOB: The Palms @ Fleet Landing CITY/STATE/ZIP: Atlantic Beach,FL 32233 4050179 WE ARE SENDING YOU: ® ATTACHED ❑UNDER SEPARATE COVER VIA Hand Delivered THE FOLLOWING ITEMS: ❑SHOP DRAWINGS ❑PLANS ❑SAMPLES ❑SPECIFICATIONS ❑COPY OF LETTER ❑CHANGE ORDER ❑ OTHER COPIES DATE No. DESCRIPTION Zea Product Approval for roof tile underlayment,EIFS.Roof Tiles, Aluminum Windows and Sliding Glass Doors Zea Energy Calculations Zea. Structural Calculations I Permit Application 5sets Plans and specifications(2 signed and sealed) THESE ARE TRANSMITTED AS CHECKED BELOW: ® FOR APPROVAL ❑APPROVED AS SUBMITTED ❑RESUBMIT COPIES FOR APPROVAL ® FOR YOUR USE ❑APPROVED ❑SUBMIT COPIES FOR DISTRIBUTION ❑ AS REQUESTED ❑RETURN CORRECTED PRINTS ❑ FOR REVIEW AND COMMENT Remarks. SIGNED: Beyg lX Jones Contract Administrator Copy to File. NOTICE OF COMMENCEMENT State of n-OP-112 14 Tax Folio No. County of /,t,yr , To Whom It May Concern: The undersigned hereby informs you that improvements will be made to certain real property, and in accordance with Section 713 of the Florida Statutes,the following information is stated in this NOTICE OF COMMENCEMENT. Legal Description of property being improved: d _a/,�- Address of property being improved: ONE- aeL--F Z-AW7yl-f >.)lV7 1919Yr1 ,e7-kD• &ffrCz IAV6 General description of improvements: )C= Qo50/�(y S%,� +�iLl�G a U /yL W" 41 xz. ✓/l G. - OeV7'0A1afA1Cy / Z t-'SGPN7a�Tja�J Owner: D jw r7- c—r Address: 0Af F tz e er 6.r7ND1,VEy' A-1 1T." Owner's interest in site of the improvement: Fee Simple Titleholder(if other than owner): Name: Contractor: k.f c- Gtfw c-r,&s Address: -;�419 4=9V /55 li-i clt MIS Telephone No.: `J GSC/ ,1171 Fax No: Surety(if any) /q�R - Address: Amount of Bond$ Telephone No: Fax No: Name and address of any person making a loan for the construction of the improvements Name: Address: Phone No: Fax No: Name of person within the State of Florida, other than himself, designated by owner upon whom notices or other documents may be served: Name:_SO&a:-4 Address:09) r-Z-6-e-r li-Ivb llv(r 61 V7 1�I L I�- � tl f2 A-3 3 Telephone No: Fax No: In addition to himself, owner designates the following person to receive a copy of the Lienor's Notice as provided in Section 713.06(2)(b),Florida Statues. (Fill in at Owner's option) Name: Address: Telephone No: Fax No: Expiration date of Notice of Commencement (the expiration date is one(1)year from the date of recording unless a different date is specified): 1 THIS SPACE FOR RECORDER'S USE ONLY OWNER Signed: ` Date: �� Before me thi /• day of in the County of Duval,State Doc#2007260554,OR BK 14134 Page 891, Df Florida,has rsonall appeared --16-t1 rj x'1'1 I1✓ Number Pages:1 Notary Public at arge,St, o of Florida,Coigity of Duval. Filed&Recorded 08/13/2007 at 02:25 PM, �Iy commission expires: JIM FULLER CLERK CIRCUIT COURT DUVAL COUNTY Personally Known: ' w,166,. severlyj. joneSor RECORDING$10.00 Produced Identification: •Oil#DD bts N9T Expires September F OF Bended Troy Fain-insurante,fnc.600.365.7019 BUILDING PERMIT APPLICATION CITY OF ATLANTIC BEACH 800 Seminole Road,Atlantic Beach FL 32233 Office: (904)247-5826 ■ Fax: (904)247-5845 p �us, Job Address: DAC :lfe i e��r LIVD,17kz aer7— •e �r �� Permit Number: Le al Description /� ' © /�e 7uZ)et� u�,J SN-t,P,_2 Jou 7741 9u c z-- .G'; ry r�F y ,CsUNr i/lam Tye% A ;:D, moo.div ea��4 Valuation of Work(Replacement Cost) $ o b b p ■ Class of Work(Circle one): Addition Alteratio Repair Move ■ Use of existing/proposed structures (Circle one): ommercia Residentialust- ■ If an existing structure, is a fire sprinkler system installed?( trcle one): Yes No - T/ ■ Is approval of homeowner's association or other private entity required?(Circle one): Yes No Describe in detail the type of work to be performed: perfformed:: �xts� 6cifi1—u—2� k,1`— i At�A( ' 12 uCTc,C'E Property Owner Information Name: l-1�✓AL�� i Biu i N � �T,�r>��ddress:�Nc ��-r-G�b��Cr ��Y D. City State Zip X33 Phone Contractor Information: Name of Company:g1G'C��1 C9ty7j_1H67-d)z S -� ,Qualifying Agent: vv�2 141"'6T5Address:�2Z/5'/-ivy P<a- _ City�k6eX-�1� # State f`C Zip 3,5�A83 Office Phone Job Site/Contact Number State Certification/Registration# C'��GD��(/� Office Fax# d 4- 2�4/- 4414-7 Architect Name& Phone # &�L G v A&6 L AW 71-7-,3-064 Engineer's Name & Phone Q4)_-vut:T1aib, k�,_&Iueeizg > /f' �l- S�- m4 Application is hereby made to obtain a ermit to do the work and installations as indicated. I certify that no work or installation has commenced prior to th( issuance ofa permit and that all work will be performed to meet the standards o all laws regulating construction in thisjurisdiction. This permit becomes null an( void if work as not commenced within six(6)months,or if construction or word s suspended or abandoned for a period ofsix(6)months at any time after work i, commenced. I understand that separate permits must be secured for Electrical Work,Plumbing,Signs, Wells,Pools,Furnaces,Boilers,Heaters,Tanks andAi, Conditioners,etc. WARNING TO OWNER: YOUR.FAILURE TO RECORD A NOTICE OF COMMENCEMENT MAN RESULT IN YOUR PAYING TWICE FOR IMPROVEMENTS TO YOUR PROPERTY. IF YOL: INTEND TO OBTAIN FINANCING, CONSULT WITH YOUR LENDER OR AN ATTORNEN BEFORE RECORDING YOUR NOTICE OF COMMENCEMENT. I hereby cern that I have read a a i e this application and know the same to be true and correct. All provisions of aws and ordinances governing this pf of work will Ce complied with wh the 1 d herein or not. The granting ofa ermit does not presume to give authori o violate or cancel the provisions ojan; other federal,state, or local law eg c nstruction or the performance ofconstruction. Signature of Property Owner: Signature of Contracto Sworn to and subsc ibed before, Swo to and subs rib d before e this lb Day of s'f �O this&&Day of i Notary P;tblic.— No 9jn '1 Co missio # 6W7168 o�� Notary Public State of Florida P�r �oF Ex fires September 3,2010 X '�' �1;zahefh Teske — F OF P-� Bonded Troy Fain•Insurance,Inc.800.385.7019 o r�ty C�mmisslon DD415196 '* p`'� Expires 0410512009 DO NOT WRITE BELOW THIS LINE: OFFICE USE ONLY .eview RPc„1t ice: �. Florida Building Code Online Page 1 of 3 v err � � - r�A=• �, 1 ' A �(rr BCIS Home I Log In Hot Topics Submit Surcharge I Stats &Facts I Publications FBC Staff { & k i Product Approval USER: Public User ' Product Approval Menu > Product or Application Search > Application List > Application Detail � FL # FL5988l � Application Type New Code Version 2004 Application Status Approved Comments Archived Product Manufacturer Degussa Wall Systems, Inc. Address/Phone/Email 3550 St. Johns Bluff Rd., South Jacksonville, FL 32224-2614 (904) 996-6363 eric.auman@basf.com Authorized Signature Eric Auman eric.auman@basf.com E Technical Representative Eric Auman V �6 Address/Phone/Email 3550 St Johns Bluff Rd South Jacksonville, FL 3 4 � (904) 996-6000 eric.auman@deg s COP Y Quality Assurance Representative Address/Phone/Email Category Panel Walls Subcategory Exterior Insulation Finish System Compliance Method Evaluation Report from a Product Eval Evaluation Entity ICBO Evaluation Service, Inc. Quality Assurance Entity RADCO, INC. http://www.floridabuilding.org/pr/pr_app_dtl.aspx?param=wGEVXQwtDgsmgaNMvAd2J... 9/28/2006 Florida Building Code Online Page 2 of 3 Validated By RADCO, INC. Certificate of Independence Referenced Standard and Year (of Standard Standard) Florida Building Code Florida Building Code Alternate Test P ICC ES Acceptance Criteria AC24 Equivalence of Product Standards Certified By Sections from the Code 1711.1 2603 Product Approval Method Method 1 Option C Date Submitted 12/19/2005 Date Validated 12/30/2005 Date Pending FBC Approval 01/10/2006 Date Approved 02/07/2006 Summary of Products FL # Model, Number or Name Description 5988.1 Senerflex Channeled Exterior Insulation and Fir Adhesive/Insulation Design of insulation board, adhes systems fasteners, base coat, glas mesh, finish and a means behind the system Limits of Use (See Other) Installation Instruction Approved for use in HVHZ. Verified By: Approved for use outside HVHZ: Evaluation Reports Impact Resistant: PTID 5988 T ICCES CC Design Pressure: +/- PTID 5988 T Senergy E Other: Per ICC-ES ER6025 and subject to the PTID 5988 T Senergy E limitations published in that report. Not for use in HVHZ. 5988.2 iSenerflex Wall System Exterior Insulation and Fir of insulation board, adhes fasteners, base coat, glas mesh and finish Limits of Use (See Other) Installation Instruction Approved for use in HVHZ: Verified By: http://www.floridabui lding.org/pr/pr_app_dtl.aspx?param=wGE VXQwtDgsmgaMDvAd2J... 9/28/2006 x Florida Building Code Online Page 3 of 3 Approved for use outside HVHZ: Evaluation Reports Impact Resistant: Design Pressure: +/- Other: Per ICC-ES report ER3850 and subject to the limitations published in that report. Not for use in HVHZ. 5988.3 Senerthik Class PM Exterior Insulatii consisting of insulation be fasteners, base coat, Blas \ mesh and finish Limits of Use (See"Gther) Installation Instruction Approved for use in"HVHZ: Verified By: Approved for use outside HVHZ: Evaluation Reports Impact Resistant: `\ Design Pressure: +/- Other: Per ICC-ES ER3850 and subject to the limitations published in that report. Not for use in HVHZ. 5988.4 Senturion Systems Exterior Insulation and Fir of insulation board, mech coat, glass fiber reinforcin means of drainage from b Limits of Use (See Other) Installation Instruction Approved for use in HVHZ Verified Verified By: Approved for use outside HVHZ: Evaluation Reports Impact Resistant: Design Pressure: +/- Other: Per ICC-ES ER3850 and subject to the limitations in that report. Not for use in HVHZ. Back Next DCA Administration Department of Community Affairs Florida Building Code Online Codes and Standards 2555 Shumard Oak Boulevard Tallahassee, Florida 32399-2100 (850)487-1824, Suncom 277-1824, Fax(850)414-8436 © 2000-2005 The State of Florida. All rights reserved. Cowrioht and Disd Product Approval Accepts: Egck M Bob KEW' htPlkbYEb l,tt„•/Axnxnv flnrirlahuildina.onz/Dr/Ur app dtl.aspx?param=wGEVXQwtDgsmgaMDvAd2J... 9/28/2006 ER-3850 LEGACY REPORT Reissued March 1, 2004 ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. BusinesslRegional Office■5360 Workman Mill Road,Whittier,California 90601 ■(562)699-0543 Regional Office■900 Montclair Road,Suite A,Birmingham,Alabama 35213 ■(205)599-9800 WWW.ICC-eS.org Regional Office x 4051 West Flossmoor Road,Country Club Hills,Illinois 60478 m(708)799-2305 Legacy report on the 1997 Uniform Building Code T11,the 2000 International Building Code®and the 2000 International Residential Code° DIVISION:07—THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 2.1.2.1.2 Gypsum Sheathing:Gypsum sheathing must be Section:07240—Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems water-resistant core, with minimum 1/2-inch (12.7 mm) thickness (unless noted otherwise in this report), and must SENERFLEX AND SENERTHIK EXTERIOR INSULATION comply with ASTM C 79. AND FINISH SYSTEMS 2.1.2.1.3 Structural Wood-based Sheathing:Wood-based sheathing must be exterior or Exposure 1 plywood complying SENERGY,LLC with the 1997 Uniform Building Code TM(UBC)Standard 23-2 3550 SAINT JOHNS BLUFF ROAD,SOUTH or 23-3.[For the 2000 International Building Code®(IBC)and JACKSONVILLE, FLORIDA 32224-2614 the 2000 International Residential Code TM (IRC),compliance is with USDOC PS-1 or PS-2];or Exposure 1 oriented strand 1.0 SUBJECT board (OSB),complying with UBC Standard 23-3(IBC, IRC: Senerflex and Senerthik Exterior Insulation and Finish USDOC PS-2);and must be a minimum of/1,inch(11.1 mm) Systems(EIFS). thick unless noted otherwise. 2.1.2.2 Adhesive: Adhesives used to attach insulation 2.0 DESCRIPTION board to substrates must be one of the materials described in 2.1 Senerflex Wall System: Sections 2.1.2.2.1 through 2.1.2.2.3. 2.1.1 General:The Senerflex exterior insulation and finish 2.1.2.2.1 Senerflex Base Coat: Senerflex Base Coat is systems are exterior wall covering systems applied to exterior available as Standard Base Coat,Alpha Base Coat and Alpha concrete or concrete masonry walls and to exterior framed Dry Base Coat.Senerflex Standard Base Coat and Senerflex walls with water-resistant core gypsum or wood-based Alpha Base Coat consist of acrylic polymer,graded sand and sheathings, or gypsum plaster attached to steel or wood proprietary chemicals, packaged in 60-pound (27 kg) studs.The system components consist of an insulation board, containers. The difference between the two products is the adhesive or mechanical fasteners, polystyrene insulation size of the aggregate.The products have a shelf life of one board, a base coat, woven glass fiber reinforcing mesh and year when stored at temperatures of 40°F to 80°F(4.4°C to a finish coat. 26.7°C). To prepare for application, the base coat mix is agitated in a mixer, after which a Type I or Type II portland Insulation boards in the Senerflex EIFS are either cement complying with ASTM C 150 is added in small mechanically attached or adhered. The Senerflex Wall increments and mixed to a final volumetric ratio of 1:1.Water System is an adhered system. The Senerflex Senturion may be added to adjust workability. Systems include the following mechanically attached Alpha Dry Base Coat consists of a dry mix of acrylic systems: Secondary Barrier System (also identified as polymer, graded sand, Type I or Type II portland cement Senturion 1), Senerflex Channeled Insulation System (also complying with ASTM C 150,and proprietary chemicals.It is identified as Senturion II) and Senerflex CD System (also mixed in the field with 1'/2 gallons (5.7 L)of clean, potable identified as Senturion III). water. The product has a shelf life of two years when The Senerflex EIFS,installed inaccordance with this report, unopened and stored at temperatures no lower than 40°F is permitted to be installed in combustible or noncombustible (4.4`C). (UBC) or Type 1, II, III or IV (IBC) construction and in fire- No additional additives are permitted. The pot life of the resistive construction.The systems recognized in this report mixture is the same as mortar(21/2 hours, maximum). Over are permitted in the types of construction shown in Table 1. wood-based sheathing,the Senerprime described in Section 2.1.2 Materials: 2.1.2.7 is required over the sheathing prior to the adhesive 2.1.2.1 Substrates: application. 2.1.2.2.2 Senerquick Adhesive: Senerquick adhesive 2.1.2.1.1 Concrete and Concrete Masonry:Concrete and adheres insulation board to concrete or concrete masonry concrete masonry substrates must comply with applicable and to plywood or OSB.Shelf life is one year when storage is sections of the applicable code. at temperatures of 40°F to 80°F(4.4°C to 26.7°C). ICC-ES legacy reports are not to be construed as representing aesthetics or airy other attributes not specifically addressed,nor are they to be construed as an endorsement of the subject of the report or a recommendation for its use.There is no warranty by ICC Evaluation Semite,Inc.,express or implied,as to any finding or other matter in this report,or as to mhy product covered by the report. �o "� Copyright©2003 Page 1 of 23 Page 2 of 23 ER-3850 Senerquick is a water-reducible, translucent adhesive 2.1.2.8 Weather-resistive Barrier: A weather-resistive packaged in 5-gallon (18.9 L) pails. To prepare for barrier is required for systems in Type V construction,Group application,the adhesive is mixed to a uniform consistency by R, Divisions 1 and 3, Occupancies (UBC), and in Type V, means of a high-speed mixer. Water may be added for Groups R1, R2, R3 and R4, Occupancies (IBC, IRC). Two workability.No other additives are permitted.Pot life is similar layers of Grade D kraft building paper complying with UBC to that of mortar. Standard 14-1,or one layer of Grade D paper with 60-minute 2.1.2.2.3 NC-II: NC-11 adhesive is a 100 percent acrylic water resistance, is required over wood-based sheathing in polymer-based coating.The adhesive is supplied in 5-gallon accordance with UBC Section 2506.4 or IBC Section 2510.6. (18.9 L)pails and has a shelf life of one year when stored at The weather-resistive barrier must be placed over the temperatures of 40°F to 80°F(4.4°C to 26.7°C). To prepare sheathing and behind the insulation board.Application of the for application,the adhesive is mixed with a high-speed mixer barrier must comply with UBC Section 1402.1, IBC Section until a uniform,workable consistency is achieved.Water may 1404.2 or IRC Section R703.2. Specific weather-resistive be added forworkability.No other additives are permitted.Pot barriers for use with the Senturion systems are noted in life is similar to that of mortar. The adhesive is used for Sections 2.1.3.2. adhering insulation board to concrete, concrete masonry, 2.1.2.9 Mechanical Fasteners: Wind Devil 2 fasteners water-resistant core gypsum sheathing or wood-based manufactured by Wind-lock Corporation are polypropylene sheathing substrates. disks measuring 2 inches (51 mm) in diameter by 3/, inch 2.1.2.3 Base Coats: (19.1 mm)deep. Fasteners include WT1 to WT2 screws,for wood attachments, and STI to ST3 screws, for steel 2.1.2.3.1 Senerflex Base Coat:Senerflex Base Coat is as attachments.All fasteners must be corrosion-resistant. described in Section 2.1.2.2.1. 2.1.2.10 Drainage Mat: Senergy drainage mat consists of 2.1.2.3.2 NC-II Base Coat:NC-11 base coat is as described fused, entangled, nonwoven nylon filament mat,weighing 4 in Section 2.1.2.2.2. oz./yd'(135 g/m2). 2.1.2.4 Insulation Board: 2.1.2.11 Drainage Track: Drainage track must be of rigid, Insulation board is supplied as flat and channeled boards. exterior-grade polyvinyl chloride(PVC)material conforming to The expanded polystyrene (EPS) board has a nominal ASTM D 1784 and ASTM C 1036. The drainage track has density of 1 pound per cubic foot (16 kg/M3), and a flame- minimum'/e inch-diameter(3.2 mm)drain holes spaced at 3 spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke-density rating not inches(76 mm)on center along the base,and a nominally 3- exceeding 450 when determined in accordance with UBC inch-high(76 mm)back flange. Standard 8-1 (IBC, IRC:ASTM E 84),and must comply with 2.1.2.12 Sealants:The sealants must be compatible with the ASTM C 578-01. EIFS components and be recommended by Senergy, LLC. The flat boards are available in thicknesses ranging from 3/4 Evidence must be submitted to the building official showing inch to 4 inches(19.1 mm to 102 mm).Thicknesses up to 13 that the EIFS manufacturer-rcommended sealant is Type S inches(330 mm)are permitted in jurisdictions enforcing the or M, minimum Grade NS, minimum Class 25 and Use O IBC for installations of the adhered Senerflex Wall System. sealant complying with ASTM C 920. Under the Type O Channeled insulation boards are available in thicknesses classification,the sealant shall be qualified for each material ranging from I V,inches to 4 inches(38 mm to 102 mm).The to which the sealant is applied. The details for sealant vertical channels are I'/, inch (31.7 mm) wide and 'I, inch installation,including the width and thickness of the sealant, (6.4 mm) deep, and are spaced '/2 inch (12.7 mm) apart. shall be designed by the registered design professional, Boards must be stored flat and protected from direct sunlight. designer, builder or Senergy,LLC, in that order, to the Acceptable suppliers of flat and channeled EPS insulation satisfaction of the building official. boards are: 2.1.2.13 Senergy ASAP: Senergy ASAP is a 100 percent 1. Senergy. acrylic-based coating designed for use in sealant joint conditions.For aesthetic conditions,ASAP is applied over the 2. Associated Foam Manufacturers Type WSG(ESR-1006). dry base coat at joints before the installation of the sealant 3. Falcon Type EWG(ER-4059). system. Once ASAP is dry,the sealant system can then be installed. 2.1.2.5 Reinforcing Mesh: Senergy reinforcing mesh is a balanced, open-weave, glass fiber of twisted multi-end 2.1.3 Application: strands spaced at 6 per inch (4.2 mm on center)each way 2.1.3.1 Adhered System: Senerflex Wall System: The and having a minimum weight of 4.2 ounces per square yard concrete,concrete masonry,gypsum board,gypsum plaster (142 g/M2).The glass fiber is alkali-resistant.The mesh must or wood-based substrate must be structurally sound, clean, be stored in a dry location,protected from moisture exposure. dry and free of all material that may reduce bonding of the 2.1.2.6 Finish Coat: Senerflex finish coat is a proprietary adhesive. Substrate surface irregularities up to 1/4 inch (6.4 mixture of acrylic polymer, special chemicals and graded mm)are permitted. sand packaged in 70-pound(31.8 kg)containers.Shelf life is Gypsum or wood-based sheathing, with the longitudinal two years when storage is at temperatures of 40°F to 807 dimension placed vertically, is attached to minimum No. 20 (4.4°C to 26.7°C). To prepare for application, the finish coat gage [0.0359 inch (0.91 mm)] steel studs, spaced at a is blended to homogeneous consistency with a high-speed maximum of 24 inches (610 mm)on center,with No.8, 1'/,- mixer. '/4mixer. inch-long (31.7 mm), '/1,-inch-diameter(11.1 mm), washer- 2.1.2.7 Senerprime: Senerprime is a 100 percent acrylic- head, self-drilling screws spaced at 8 inches (203 mm) on based primer serving as an intermediary adhesion between center along all sheathing edges and 12 inches(305 mm)on wood-based sheathing substrates and Senerflex Base Coat center in the field. Gypsum sheathing is fastened to 2-by-4 used as adhesive for adhering insulation boards.The primer wood studs,spaced at a maximum of 24 inches(610 mm)on is supplied in 5-gallon (18.9 L) pails. Shelf life is one year center,with Wind-lock,No.8 by 1'/,-inch-long(41.3 mm),Hi- when stored at temperatures of 40°F to 80°F (4.4°C to Lo waferhead screws spaced at 8 inches(203 mm)on center. 26.7°C).The primer must be mixed thoroughly prior to use. Wood-based sheathing is attached to wood framing in Page 3 of 23 ER-3850 accordance with UBC Table 23-II-B-1,IBC Table 2304.9.1 or 2.1.3.2 Mechanically Attached Systems: Senerflex IRC Table R602.3(I). Secondary Barrier System (Senturion I) and Senerflex When Senerflex Base Coat is used to adhere insulation Channeled Insulation System(Senturion/I):All substrates board to wood-based sheathing, the sheathing must be are limited to planar irregularities not exceeding'/,inch(6.4 primed with Senerprime prior to adhesive application. The mm).They must be structurally sound,clean,dry and smooth, primer is applied with a brush or roller at a minimum rate of with all dust and deleterious materials removed prior to 1,000 square feet per 5-gallon pail(4.9 m2/L),and allowed to system application.Typical installations are shown in Figure dry for a minimum of one hour. 5• The adhesive must not be applied if the ambient air Walls must be framed with lumber having a specific gravity temperature is expected to fall below 40°F (4.4°C)during a of 0.49 or greater, or minimum No. 20 gage [0.0359 inch 24-hour period following application, unless supplementary (0.91 mm)] steel studs spaced at a maximum of 24 inches heat is provided. The insulation board is attached to the (610 mm) on center. Minimum '/16 inch-thick (11.1 mm), substrate using the adhesives described in Section 2.1.2.2 of wood-based sheathing is attached to the wood framing with this report, and is applied to the entire insulation board minimum 6d common nails having maximum 8-inch(203 mm) surface with a stainless steel trowel that has '/Z inch-by-'/2 spacing at intermediate studs and 6-inch (152 mm)spacing inch (12.7 mm by 12.7 mm) notches spaced '/2 inch (12.7 at sheathing edges. mm)apart,ora/e inch-by 3/e inch(9.5 mm by 9.5 mm)notches Minimum 1/2-inch-thick (12.7 mm) gypsum sheathing is spaced 31,inch(9.5 mm)apart. fastened to the steel framing with No. 6 by 1.25-inch-long The insulation board is installed by sliding it into place onto (31.7 mm)buglehead screws spaced 8 inches(203 mm)on the substrate and then applying pressure over the entire center. Minimum 15/12-inch-thick (11.9 mm) plywood is surface to ensure uniform contact.All joints are butted tightly fastened to steel framing with No. 6 by 1.25-inch-long(31.7 to ensure an overall flush surface. The insulation board is mm),buglehead screws spaced 6 inches(152 mm)on center applied horizontally in running bond to vertical surfaces, at sheathing edges and 12 inches (305 mm) on center at beginning at the base of the wall.The adhesive must be dry intermediate framing locations. Sheathing must be oriented (this normally requires 8 to 10 hours)before application of the vertically. base coat. The drainage track described in Section 2.1.2.11 of this Corner beads, casing beads and expansion joints are report is attached at the bottom of the wall and through the installed and completely embedded in the wet adhesive.All sheathing into the framing with 1'/4 inch (31.8 mm), No. 6, insulation board irregularities greater than 1/1,inch(1.6 mm) self-drilling bugle head screws spaced at a maximum of 8 must be eliminated. The base coat is then applied to the inches(203 mm)on center. entire board surface by troweling to a uniform thickness of In the Senturion I system,either Tyvek Homewrap or Tyvek approximately '/,,inch (1.6 mm). The fiberglass reinforcing StuccoWrap, recognized in ER-4000, is applied over the fabric is placed against the wet base coat,and, by troweling sheathing in accordance with ER-4000 and IBC Section from the center to the edges, is embedded into the coating. 1404.2, IRC Section R703.2 or UBC Section 1402.1, as The reinforcing fabric must be continuous at all corners and applicable, prior to installation of the flat insulation board. In lapped at least 2'/2 inches(63.5 mm)at fabric edges. the Senturion II system,a weather-resistive barrier complying When the system is placed over wood-frame construction, with Section 2.1.2.8 is applied over the sheathing in control joints are required at each floor level. Control joints accordance with the applicable code prior to installation of the are specified by the architect,builder or Senergy,LLC,in that channeled insulation board. The insulation boards are order. fastened to the sheathing with Wind Devil 2 fasteners, with one of the following fastener patterns: Before the finish-coat application takes place,the base coat 1. Wood-based sheathing over wood studs: "W" Series must be dry and hard,which normally requires 8 to 10 hours. fasteners must be long enough to protrude at least 5/8 inch The finish coat is then applied directly to the fabric and base (15.9 mm)through sheathing.Eight fasteners per24-inch- coat,and leveled during the same operation to the minimum by-48-inch (610 mm by 1219 mm) insulation board are obtainable thickness consistent with uniform coverage. The used, spaced no greater than 12 inches (305 mm) on final thickness shall not be less than the diameter of the center vertically and horizontally. largest aggregate of the finish coat, approximately /15 inch (1.6 mm).The system must then cure for at least 24 hours at 2. Gypsum sheathing over steel studs:"S"Series fasteners a minimum temperature of 40°F (4.4°C). See Figure 1 for must be long enough to protrude at least 5/a inch (15.9 details. mm)through studs.For 16-inch-on-center(406 mm)stud Joints and penetrations are treated with sealants described spacing,twelve fasteners per 24-inch-by-48-inch(610 mm by 1219 mm) insulation board are used, spaced no in Section 2.1.2.12 of this report. greater than 8 inches (203 mm)on center vertically. For Senerflex EIFS may be applied to 3.4-pounds-per-square- 24-inch-on-center(610 mm)stud spacing,nine fasteners yard (1.3 kg/m2), diamond-patterned, expanded galvanized per 24-inch-by-48-inch(610 mm by 1219 mm)insulation metal lath complying with UBC Table 25-B or ASTM C 847 board are used, spaced no more than 24 inches (610 (IBC, IRC).The lath application must be in accordance with mm) on center horizontally and 8 inches (203 mm) on UBC Section 2506, IBC Section 2510 or IRC Section center vertically. R703.6.1, except the lath is fastened through '/2-inch-thick 3. Plywood over steel studs: "S" Series fasteners must be (12.7 mm)gypsum sheathing to minimum No.20 gage steel long enough to protrude at least 5/e inch (15.9 mm) framing members spaced a maximum of 16 inches(406 mm) through sheathing.Eightfasteners per 24-inch-by-48-inch on center with No. 8, 1'/,-inch-long (31.7 mm), wafer head, (610 mm by 1219 mm)insulation board are used,spaced corrosion-resistant steel drywall screws at 8 inches(203 mm) no more than 12 inches(305 mm)on center vertically and on center.The insulation board is then adhesively attached to horizontally. the metal lath with Senerflex Alpha Base Coat/Adhesive.The remainder of this system is applied in accordance with this The Senerflex base coat, reinforcing fabric and finish section. coating are applied over the insulation board in accordance Page 4 of 23 ER-3850 with Section 2.1.3.1.Sealants used at joints,openings and The sheathing and wallboard are fastened to studs in penetrations must comply with Section 2.1.3.1. accordance with UBC Table 25-G or ASTM C 1280 and The adequacy of the framing system to resist applied ASTM C 840,respectively(IBC,IRC),using No.6,Type S-12, loads must be investigated. buglehead screws, 1%inches (41.3 mm)long.Thermafiber Safing Insulation,4.0 pcf(64.07 kg/m )and described in ER- 2.1.3.3 Mechanically Attached System: Senerflex CD 2331, is used to fire-stop the stud cavities at floor lines.The (Senturion lin: The Senerflex CD system (Senturion III) is insulation pieces measure 4 inches (102 mm)thick by the similarto the Senerflex Secondary Barrier System(Senturion stud depth by the stud spacing. Wall openings must be 1) described in Section 2.1.3.2, with the addition of the framed with minimum No. 20 gage steel. The remainder of Senergy Drainage Mat, as described in Section 2.1.2.10, construction is as described in Section 2.1.3.1 for the except that the weather-resistive barrier can be materials Senerflex Wall System. Maximum EPS insulation thickness described in Section 2.1.2.8 or Tyvek StuccoWrap or Tyvek is 4 inches(102 mm). HomeWrap(ER-4000).The mat is placed over the weather- When the Senerflex Wall System is applied to concrete or resistive barrier, free of wrinkles and with all edges butted. masonry substrates in accordance with Section 2.1.3.1,the The mat is temporarily secured to sheathing with a sufficient walls may be considered noncombustible construction. number of corrosion-resistant staples or nails to hold the mat in place until the insulation board is attached.All other details 2.1.4.4 Assembly 3:Application to walls required to be of of installation are in accordance with Section 2.1.3.2 for the noncombustible construction (UBC)or Types I, 11, 111 and IV Senturion I system. Details are shown in Figure 6. construction(IBC)involves 3'/,, inch-deep(92 mm),minimum No.20 gage[0.0359 inch(0.91 mm)]steel studs spaced at a 2.1.4 Noncombustible Construction(UBC)and Types I, maximum of 16 inches(406 mm)on center.One layer of II,III and IV Construction(IBC): inch-thick (12.7 mm) gypsum wallboard, complying with 2.1.4.1 General:For application to exterior walls required to ASTM C 36,is attached vertically to interior stud flanges,with be of noncombustible construction under the UBC or exterior vertical joints staggered. Fasteners used are 11/4-inch-long walls of Types I, 11, 111 or IV construction under the IBC, (32 mm),No.6,Type S buglehead screws spaced at 8 inches installation shall be in accordance with Section 2.1.4.2, (203 mm)on center at the joints and 12 inches(305 mm)on 2.1.4.3 or 2.1.4.4 of this report.The assemblies described in centerat intermediate locations.Water-resistant core gypsum those sections comply with IBC Section 1406.2.1.1.The fire sheathing,'/2 inch(12.7 mm)thick and complying with ASTM separation distance shall comply with IBC Table 602 based C 79,is installed with the long dimension perpendicularto the on a fire-resistance rating of zero. studs.Vertical joints are offset from interior wallboard joints. The gypsum sheathing is fastened to the steel framing in a 2.1.4.2 Assembly 1:Application to walls required to be of similar fashion as the interior face, except the screws are noncombustible construction (UBC)or Types 1, 11, 111 and IV spaced 8 inches(203 mm)on center along sheathing edges construction(IBC)involves 3'/,-inch-deep(92 mm),minimum and at intermediate locations.Wallboard and sheathing joints No.20 gage[0.0359 inch(0.91 mm)]steel studs spaced at a are staggered.All wallboard joints are backed and taped with maximum of 24 inches(610 mm)on center.One layer of /2 joint tape and compound;screw heads are covered with joint inch-thick (12.7 mm) gypsum wallboard, complying with compound. Thermafiber Safing Insulation, 4.0 pcf (64.07 ASTM C 36,is applied horizontally to interior stud flanges with kg/m3)and described in ER-2331,is used to fire-stop the stud verticaljoints staggered.Type X,water-resistant core gypsum cavities at floor lines.The insulation pieces measure 4 inches sheathing,5/8 inch(15.9 mm)thick and complying with ASTM (102 mm)thick by the stud depth by the stud spacing.Wall C 79,is installed similarly to exterior stud flanges,with vertical openings must be framed in with minimum No.20 gage steel. joints offset from interior wallboard joints.The sheathing and The remainder of construction is as described in Section wallboard are fastened to studs in accordance with UBC 2,1.3.1 for the Senerflex Wall System; or Section 2.1.3.2 for Table 25-G or ASTM C 1280 and ASTM C 840, respectively the Senerflex Senturion I, II or III systems,with the exception (IBC, IRC), using No. 6, Type S-12, buglehead screws, 15/8 that the base coat is limited to Senerflex Base Coat. inches(41.3 mm)long.Thermafiber Safing Insulation,4.0 pcf Maximum EPS insulation thickness for the Senerflex (64.07 kg/m3)and described in ER-2331, is used to fire-stop Senturion I, II, III Systems and the Senerflex Wall System the stud cavities at floor lines.The insulation pieces measure when installed in jurisdictions enforcing the UBC is 4 inches 4 inches (102 mm) thick by the stud depth by the stud (102 mm);maximum thickness for the Senerflex Wall System spacing.Wall openings must be framed in with minimum No. when installed in jurisdictions enforcing the IBC is 13 inches 20 gage [0.0359 inch (0.91 mm)] steel. The remainder of (330 mm). construction is as described in Section 2.1.3.1 of this report for the Senerflex Wall System. Maximum EPS insulation 2.1.5 Interior Finish: When applied to the following thickness is 4 inches(102 mm). substrates, Senerflex base coat and finish coat comply with Section 802.2 of the UBC as a Class I interior finish, with When the Senerflex Wall System is applied directly onto Section 803.1 of the IBC as a Class A interior finish,and with concrete or masonry substrates in accordance with Section Section R319 of the IRC: concrete, concrete masonry, 2.1.3.1, the walls may be considered noncombustible gypsum plaster, gypsum wallboard and portland cement construction. plaster.Surfaces must be clean,dry,sound and free of paint, 2.1.4.3 Assembly 2:Application to walls required to be of efflorescence,or other coatings.Gypsum surfaces are coated noncombustible construction (UBC)or Types I, 11, 111 and IV with latex primer.The Senerflex base coat and finish coat are construction(IBC)involves 35/8-inch-deep(92 mm),minimum then applied in accordance with Section 2.1.3.1. No.20 gage[0.0359 inch(0.91 mm)]steel studs spaced at a 2,1.6 Fire-resistance-rated Construction: Nonbearing maximum of 16 inches(406 mm)on center.One layer of construction of walls requiring a combustible or inch-thick (12.7 mm) gypsum wallboard, complying with noncombustible, one-hour fire-resistance rating includes ASTM C 36,is applied vertically to interior stud flanges,with minimum 35/,-inch-deep(92 mm), No. 18 gage[0.0478 inch vertical joints staggered. Water-resistant core gypsum (1,21 mm)]steel studs spaced up to 16 inches on center. If sheathing,'/2 inch(12.7 mm)thick and complying with ASTM the wall permits combustible construction,studs may be No. C 79, is installed similarly to the installation of exterior stud 18 gage [0.0478 inch (1.21 mm)], spaced up to 24 inches flanges,with vertical joints offsetfrom interior wallboard joints. (610 mm)on center.The interior side is covered with 5/,-inch- Page 5 of 23 ER-3850 thick (15.9 mm), Type X gypsum wallboard complying with 2.2.2.1 Substrates: ASTM C 36.The wallboard is applied vertically and fastened 2.2.2.1.1 Concrete and Concrete Mason Concrete and to framing with 15/,-inch-long (41.3 mm), Type S-12, self- Masonry: tapping buglehead screws spaced 8 inches (203 mm) on concrete substrates must comply with applicable sections of center around edges and 12 inches (305 mm)on center at the code. intermediate framing locations. 2.2.2.1.2 Gypsum Sheathing:Gypsum sheathing must be Board joints are covered with joint tape and compound. at least'/2 inch(12.7 mm)thick unless noted otherwise in this Fastener heads are covered with joint compound. report, with a water-resistant core. The sheathing must comply with ASTM C 79. The exterior side is covered with 5/8-inch-thick (15.9 mm), Type X, water-resistant core gypsum sheathing complying 2.2.2.2 Senerthik Base Coat: The base coat consists of with ASTM C 79.The sheathing is fastened identically to the acrylic polymer and proprietary chemicals packaged in 5- gypsum wallboard,except tape and compound are optional. gallon(18.9 L)containers.The product has a shelf life of one year when stored at temperatures of 40°F to 80°F(4.4°C to The sheathing is placed vertically with joints offset from 26.7°C).To prepare for application,one container of the base joints on the interior side.The Senerflex Wall System is then coat is mixed with one 94-pound (42.6 kg) bag of Type I, 1 applied as described in Section 2.1.3.1. Maximum EPS white, ll,or 1-II portland cement complying with ASTM C 150, insulation thickness is 4 inches(104 mm). and 150 to 200 pounds (68 to 90.7 kg)of No. 40 to No. 45 2.1.7 Wind Design: sieve silica sand.Afterthe mixture is thoroughly blended,a I- pound(454 g)package of'/2-inch-long(12.7 mm),chopped, 2.1.7.1 Adhered System: Type E, Fiberfill glass fiber is added, with further mixing to 2.1.7.1.1 System Application over Concrete and Masonry thoroughly blend the fibers. Water may be added to adjust Walls:The allowable negative wind load for systems applied workability.No other additives are permitted. to concrete or concrete masonry walls is 30 pounds per 2.2.2.3 Insulation Board: Extruded polystyrene (XEPS) square foot(1436 Pa). insulation board with a 2 pcf(32 kg/m3) nominal density is 2.1.7.1.2 System Application over Framed Walls: Wind required.The thickness may range from 1 to 2 inches(25 to loads up to 30 pounds per square foot(1436 Pa), positive or 51 mm)in minimum dimensions of 2 feet by 4 feet(610 mm negative, are permitted on systems applied to gypsum and by 1219 mm).Boards must be stored flat and protected from direct sunlight. Acceptable extruded insulation boards, wood-based sheathing over No. 18 gage steel or wood provided the maximum 2.0 pcf (32 kg/m3) density is framing described in this report. The maximum allowable maintained,are: deflection of structural wall components is'/180 of span.When installation is over No.20 gage steel framing,wind loads up 1. Dow Chemical Styrofoam(ER-2257). to 23 pounds per square foot (1100 Pa) negative and 30 2. UC Foamular 250(ER-3628). pounds per square foot(1436 Pa)positive are permitted. Wind loads up to 54 pounds per square foot (2585 Pa), 3. Amoco AmoFoam(ER-4280). positive or negative,are permitted on systems applied to 3.4- 2.2.2.4 Reinforcing Mesh:The Fiberlath Mesh consists of pounds-per-square-yard (1.3 kg/M2) metal lath and gypsum Type E glass fiber, coated for compatibility with the other sheathing, when installation is over minimum No. 18 gage Senerthik materials. The mesh weighs 4.75 ounces per steel studs as described in Section 2.1.3.1. square yard (161 g/m2). The mesh must be stored in a dry 2.1.7.2 Mechanically Attached Systems: Where the location and protected from moisture. Minimum thread system is installed in accordance with Section 2.1.3.2 or spacing in the warp and weft directions is 3 per inch(8.4 mm 2.1.3.3 of this report, allowable positive and negative wind on center).The mesh is supplied in rolls 39 inches(910 mm) loads are as shown in Table 2. wide by 50 yards(45.7 m)long. 2.1.8 Special Inspection:In jurisdictions enforcing the IBC, 2.2'2.5 Finish Coat:Senerthikfinish coat consists ofacrylic special inspections in accordance with IBC Sections 1704.1 polymer graded sands and proprietary chemicals, packaged and 1704.12 are required for the Senerflex Wall System in 70-pound(31.8 kg)containers.The product has a shelf life applied over framed walls. Duties of the special inspector of two years. To prepare for application, the finish coat is include verifying field preparation of materials, expiration mixed to a uniform consistency. Water may be added to dates, installation of components, curing of components, adjust workability. No other additives are permitted. installation of joints and sealants. 2.2.2.6 Weather-resistive Barrier: A weather-resistive 2.2 Senerthik Wall Systems: barrier is mandatory for system installation in Type V construction, Group R, Divisions 1 and 3, Occupancies 2.2.1 General:The Senerthik,Senerthik Secondary Barrier (UBC); and in Type V construction, Groups R1, R2, R3 and and Senerthik CD wall systems are mechanically attached R4 Occupancies(IBC,IRC).As required in Section 2.2.3.3 for EFS applied over gypsum sheathing attached to steel or the Senerthik Secondary Barrier System, the weather- wood framing, or to exterior walls of concrete or concrete resistive barrier shall be Tyvek StuccoWrap, recognized in masonry substrates. The wall systems consist of five ER-4000.The weather-resistive barrier must comply with and components: foam plastic insulation board, mechanical be applied in accordance with UBC Section 1402.1, IBC fasteners, glass fiber reinforcing mesh, base coating and Section 1404.2 or IRC Section R703.2.The weather-resistive finish coating. barrier is placed overthe sheathing and behind the insulation Only the Senerthik Secondary Barrier and Senerthik CD board. systems described in Section 2.2.3.4 are permitted to be 2.2.2.7 Mechanical Fasteners: The fastening system is installed in Type V construction of Group R, Division 1 and manufactured by Wind-lock Corporation and is used for Division 3,Occupancies(UBC)and in Type V construction of insulation board attachment.The fastening system consists Group R1, R2, R3 and R4 Occupancies(IBC, IRC), utilizing of a ULP-302 plate, a 2-inch-diameter (51 mm) surface- wood or steel stud framing. mounted polypropylene washer with no chamber, and minimum No. 8 bugle head Types WTI to WT2 screws,for 2.2.2 Materials: Page 6 of 23 ER-3850 wood attachments, and Types STI to ST3 screws, for steel protrude through studs at least% inch (15.9 mm). Vertical attachments.Fasteners forconcrete and masonry substrates board edges must butt over studs. To ensure a smooth must be qualified as described in Section 2.2.3.2.3. The surface, surface irregularities must not exceed '/, inch (6.4 screws must be corrosion-resistant. mm). 2.2.2.8 Senergy Drainage Mat:The Senergy Drainage Mat The insulation board is applied horizontally in a running consists of fused, entangled, nonwoven nylon filament mat, bond pattern to the sheathing and temporarily fastened weighing 4 oz/yd2(135 g/m2). through the sheathing and into studs with two No.8,Type S, 2.2.2.9 Drainage Track: Drainage track must be of rigid, self-drilling screws, centered in the board. The fiberglass exterior-grade polyvinyl chloride(PVC)material conforming to mesh is applied over the insulation with 3-inch-wide(76 mm) ASTM D 1784 and ASTM C 1036. The drainage track has overlaps and is fastened through the insulation board and minimum'/e inch-diameter(3.2 mm)drain holes spaced at 3 sheathing into the steel studs with the plates and appropriate inches(76 mm)on center along the base,and a nominally 3- screws as described in Section 2.2.2.7.The screws must be inch-high(76 mm)back flange. long enough to protrude through the studs at least /e inch (15.9 mm), with spacing at 12 inches (305 mm) on center 2.2.2.10 Sealants:The sealants must be compatible with the vertically to all framing locations. EIFS components and be recommended by Senergy, LLC. 2.2.3.2.2 Wood Framing: The gypsum sheathing is Evidence must be submitted to the building official showing attached horizontally to wood studs and mechanically that the EIFS manufacturer—recommended sealant is Type S fastened in accordance with UBC Table 25-G or ASTM C or M, minimum Grade NS, minimum Class 25 and Use O 1280 (IBC, IRC), with a maximum fastener spacing of 8 sealant complying with ASTM C 920. Under the Type O inches(203 mm).Vertical board edges must butt over studs. classification,the sealant shall be qualified for each material The insulation board is placed horizontally in a running bond to which the sealant is applied. The details for sealant pattern and is fastened with Type W buglehead screws or the installation, including the width and thickness of the sealant, equivalent.The Fiberlath mesh is applied over insulation with shall be designed by the registered design professional, 3-inch-wide (76 mm) overlaps and is fastened through the designer, builder or Senergy, LLC, in that order, to the insulation and sheathing boards into the framing with satisfaction of the building official. minimum 12d,corrosion-resistant,common nails with plates 2.2.3 Application: described in Section 2.2.2.7.The nails are placed 12 inches 2.2.3.1 General: Substrates must be structurally sound, (305 mm)on center vertically to all framing at board edges and at intermediate locations. Nails must penetrate a clean,dryand free of deleterious materials priorto application minimum of 1 inch(25 mm)into wood framing.The remainder of EIFS components. The system must be applied at of the application is as described in Section 2.2.3.2.1. minimum ambient temperatures of 40°F(4.4°C).A minimum temperature of 40°F(4.4°C)must be maintained for at least Overwood-frame construction,control joints are required at 24 hours following completion of system installation.Using a each floor level.Control joints are specified by the architect, stainless steel trowel, the base coat is applied to a % inch builder,or Senergy, LLC, in that order. (3.2 mm)thickness,at a rate of 5 gallons per 200 square feet (1 L/m2),over the surface of the insulation board and mesh, 2.2.3.2.3 Concrete and Concrete-Masonry Substrates: embedding the mesh.A second coat is then applied to a'/B The insulation board is installed horizontallyto the substrates inch (3.2 mm)thickness,yielding a total thickness of'/,inch in a running bond pattern and is temporarily fastened with two (6.4 mm). Trim includes zinc or wire-corner beads, casing fasteners placed through plates as described in Section beads,control and dryjoints and expansion joints.Acceptable 2.2.2.7.Thefasteners must have a minimum'/,-inch-diameter products include those of Stockton Wire Products, K-Lath, (6.4 mm)shank with a minimum 1/2-inch-diameter(12.7 mm) Niles Building Products, Keene Corporation, or the steel washer, and must be recognized in a current ICC-ES equivalent. Set in a bed of trim sealant, trim must have '/,- evaluation report for installation into concrete or masonry. inch (6.4 mm) grounds. Acceptable trim sealants are as The Fiberlath mesh is applied over the insulation with 3- described in Section 2.2.2.10. inch-wide (76 mm) overlaps. Fasteners consist of the For abutting trim pieces,a% inch(3.2 mm)gap is required. previously mentioned fasteners placed 12 inches(305 mm) Trim pieces generally may be fastened to the insulation board on center vertically, in rows 16 inches(406 mm)on center. with nylon fasteners. Expansion joints, however, must be To prove the adequacy of fasteners in concrete or masonry fastened to the structural substrate. substrates,a proof-load test program, consisting of fastener For intersecting trim, vertical pieces are continuous, with withdrawal from the wall of each building, must be provided. horizontal pieces abutting the verticals. Reinforcing mesh The testing must be conducted by an independent testing must be cut at all control and expansion joints and overlap laboratory approved by the building official. The average trim flanges. Sealants applied at discontinuities and withdrawal strength, in pounds, must be eight times the penetrations are as described in Section 2.2.2.10. required fastener load.As an example,a 240-pound(1068 N) average withdrawal load must be achieved to qualify a The base coat is cured 8 to 10 hours, until the surface is fastener for an hard and dry.The finish coat is then applied and leveled to a allowable load of minimum'/, inch (1.6 mm)thickness, and is textured to the minimum of five tests per program is required, with results s pounds (133 N). A s varying by no more than 15 percent from the average. If a desired finish.See Figure 2 for details. minimum of 10 tests is provided,variation from the average 2.2.3.2 Senerthik System: may be disregarded. For masonry substrates,40 percent of the tests must be run in masonry joints. A certificate of 2.2.3.2.1 Steel Framing: Gypsum sheathing is attached compliance, concerning test results relating to load horizontally to minimum No.16 gage[0.0598 inch(0.91 mm)] requirements in this evaluation report, must be submitted to steel studs spaced a maximum of 24 inches (610 mm) on and approved by the building official prior to installation of center. The sheathing is fastened to studs with No. 6, concrete/masonry fasteners. buglehead,self-drilling screws,spaced 8 inches(203 mm)on center at board edges, and 12 inches (305 mm) at The remainder of the application is as described in Section intermediate studs.The screws must have sufficient length to 2.2.3.1. Page 7 of 23 ER-3850 2.2.3.3 Senerthik Secondary Barrier System: The materials,expiration dates,installation of components,curing Senerthik Secondary Barrier System is similar to the of components, installation of joints and sealants. Senerthik system described in Section 2.2.3.2, with the 2.3 Identification: addition of Tyvek StuccoWrap as the weather-resistive barrier. Drainage track described in Section 2.2.2.9 is All containers or packages for the Senerflex and Senerthik attached at the bottom of the wall through the sheathing into Wall Systems components bear a label with the name of the the framing with V/,-inch(31.8 mm),No.6,self-drilling bugle product; the manufacturer's name (Senergy, LLC) and head screws spaced at a maximum of 8 inches(203 mm)on address; the expiration date and batch number (for liquid center. Tyvek StuccoWrap must be applied over the components);and the evaluation report number(ER-3850). sheathing in accordance with ER-4000 and UBC Section Each Senergy insulation board is labeled with the name 1402.1,and must overlap the mounting flange of the drainage "Senergy," the block molder identification number, the track prior to installation of the insulation board. The evaluation report number (ER-3850), the flame-spread insulation boards are fastened to the stud framing spaced 12 characteristics and the name of the inspection agency inches(305 mm)on center vertically. See Figure 7. (RADCO).Other foam plastic insulation boards are identified The base coat of Senerthik primer/adhesive,the reinforcing in accordance with their respective ICC-ES evaluation fabric and the finish coating are applied over the insulation reports. board in accordance with Section 2.2.3.1 of this report. Where foam plastic insulation boards are used on walls Sealants used at joints, openings and penetrations must required to be of noncombustible construction, each board comply with Section 2.2.2.10 of this report. must additionally be labeled with the following information: The adequacy of the framing system to resist applied loads 1. Inspection agency name. must be investigated. 2. Product for which the insulation is listed (Senerflex or 2.2.3.4 Senerthik CD:The Senerthik CD system is similar Senerthik). to the Senerthik Secondary Barrier System described in Section 2.2.3.3, with the addition of the Senergy Drainage 3. Identification of insulation manufacturer. Mat described in Section 2.2.2.8.The mat is placed over the 4. Evaluation report number(ER-3850). weather-resistive barrier, free of wrinkles, with all edges butted. To hold the mat in place before insulation board The Wind-Lock Corporation plates and screws are placement,the mat is temporarily secured to sheathing with packaged in cartons containing 1,000 units. Cartons are sufficient galvanized staples or nails.See Figure 8 for details. identified with the manufacturer's name, product name, 2.2.4 Wind Load: When installation is in accordance with quantity, and installation instructions. Section 2.2.3 of this report, the wind pressures shown in 3.0 EVIDENCE SUBMITTED Table 3 are permitted.(The maximum deflection of structural Data in accordance with the ICC-ES Acceptance Criteria for wall components is limited to 1/180 of span.) Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems (AC24), dated June 2.2.5 Noncombustible Construction(UBC)and Types I, 2003, and a quality control manual. 11,111 and IV Construction(IBC):Application to walls required 4.0 FINDINGS to be of noncombustible construction (UBC)and Types I, II, III and IV construction(IBC)requires 3%-inch-deep(92 mm), That the Senerflex and Senerthik Wall Systems described minimum No. 16 gage [0.0598 inch (0.91 mm)] steel studs in this evaluation report comply with the 1997 Uniform spaced a maximum of 24 inches (610 mm) on center. One Building Code TM (UBC), the 2000 International Building layer of 1/2-inch-thick(12.7 mm)gypsum wallboard,complying Code®(IBC)and the 2000 International Residential Code'" with ASTM C 36, is placed horizontally on the interior flange (IRC),subject to the following conditions: with vertical joints staggered.Water-resistant core,Type X(or regular) gypsum sheathing, 5/8 inch (15.9 mm) thick and 4.1 Construction is as set forth in this report and the complying with ASTM C 79, is installed horizontally, with manufacturer's instructions. vertical joints staggered,to the exterior flange of the studs.All 4.2 Foam plastic insulation board is separated from the gypsum boards are fastened to studs with No. 6, 15/,-inch- building interior by a thermal barrier complying with long (41.3 mm), Type S-12, buglehead screws. Wallboard UBC Section 2602.4, IBC Section 2603.4.1 or IRC fastener spacing is 12 inches (305 mm) on center, while sheathing fastener spacing is 8 inches(203 mm)on center. Section R318.1.2, such as minimum '/Z-inch-thick Wallboard joints must be blocked and taped and treated with (12.7 mm)gypsum wallboard mechanically attached joint compound.Thermafiber Safing Insulation, described in in accordance with the applicable code. ER-2331, is used to fire-stop the stud cavities at floor lines. 4.3 For use under the UBC, the systems may be The insulation pieces measure 4 inches (102 mm) thick by attached to the surface of combustible exterior fire- the stud depth by the stud spacing. Wall openings must be resistance-rated assemblies described in UBC Table framed in with minimum No.20 gage steel.The remainder of 7-13 without changing the assigned hourly rating of the construction is as described in Section 2.2.3.2.1. When the assemblies. the Senerthik EIFS is applied to concrete or masonry substrates in accordance with Section 2.2.3.2.3, the walls 4.4 The Senerflex wall system may be installed on may be considered noncombustible construction. exterior walls required to be of noncombustible The assembly described in this section complies with IBC construction (UBC) and Types 1, 11, III and IV Section 1406.2.1.1.The fire separation distance shall comply construction (IBC), provided construction is in with IBC Table 602 based on a fire-resistance rating of zero. accordance with Section 2.1.4. A noncombustible, 2.2.6 Special Inspection:In jurisdictions enforcing the IBC, fire-resistance-rated wall assembly with Senerflex is special inspections in accordance with IBC Sections 1704.1 described in Section 2.1.6. and 1704.12 are required for the Senerthik and Senerthik 4.5 The Senerthik wall system may be installed on Secondary Barrier Systems installed on framed walls.Duties exterior walls required to be of noncombustible of the special inspector include verifying field preparation of construction (UBC) and Types I, 11, 111 and IV Page 8 of 23 ER-3850 construction (IBC), provided construction is in 4.8 For framed construction of Type V, Group R, accordance with Section 2.2.5. Division 1 or Division 3,Occupancies(UBC),orType 4.6 Installation ofsystems is byapplicators approved by V,Groups 111, R2, R3 and R4,installation complies Senergy, LLC. Installation cards, such as those with Sections 2.1.3.2 or 2.1.3.3 for the Senerflex shown in Figures 3 and 4, must be filed with the systems and Section 2.2.3.4 for the Senerthlk building official upon completion of each project. system. 4.7 The Senergy insulation board is labeled in 4.9 In- jurisdictions enforcing the 113C, special accordance with this report and manufactured inspections are required in accordance with under a quality control program with inspections by Sections 2.1.8 and 2.2.6 of this report. the inspection agency noted in Section 2.3 of this This report is subject to re-examination in two years. report. TABLE 1—TYPES OF CONSTRUCTION IN WHICH THE SENERFLEX AND SENERTHIK SYSTEMS RECOGNIZED IN THIS REPORT ARE PERMITTED CODE TYPE OF CONSTRUCTION PERMITTED SYSTEM Framed walls of Type V,Group R1 or R3, Senturion I,II or III Occupancies' Senerthik Secondary Barrier or Senerthik CD UBC Concrete or masonry walls or framed walls of Senerflex,or Senturion I, II or III other than Type V,Group R1 or R3, Senerthik Secondary Barrier,Senerthik, Occupancies' or Senerthik CD Framed walls of Type V,Group R1,R2,R3 or Senturion 1,II or III R4,Occupancies Senerthik Secondary Barrier or Senerthik CD IBC Concrete or masonry walls or framed walls of Senerflex,or Senturion I,II or III other than Type V,Group R1,R2,R3 or R4, Senerthik Secondary Barrier,Senerthik,or Occupancies2 Senerthik CD IRC Framed walls Senturion I,II or III Senerthik Secondary Barrier or Senerthik CD Concrete or masonry walls' Senerflex,or Senturion 1, If or III Senerthik Secondary Barrier,Senerthik or Senerthik CD 'See Section 2.1.6 of this report for assemblies permitted to be used in fire-resistance-rated construction. 2The weather-resistive barrier is optional. TABLE 2—ALLOWABLE WIND LOADS FOR MECHANICALLY ATTACHED SENERFLEX SYSTEMS' FRAMING STUD EPS THICKNESS POSITIVE WIND LOAD NEGATIVE WIND LOAD SPACING (inches) (psf) (psf) (inches) Wood 16 1 27 35 Wood 16 2 28 41 Wood 24 1 19 33 Wood 24 2 19 36 Wood 16 1'!2(channeled) 52 28 Steel(20 gage) 16 1 21 29 Steel(20 gage) 16 2 21 29 Steel(20 gage) 24 1 10 21 Steel(20 gage) 1 24 2 12 21 For SI: 1 inch=25.4 mm, 1 psf=47.88 Pa. 'Systems are described in Sections 2.1.3.2 and 2.1.3.3 of this report. TABLE 3—ALLOWABLE WIND PRESSURES FOR SENERTHIK SYSTEMS INSTALLED AS DESCRIBED IN SECTION 2.2.4 OF THIS REPORT SUBSTRATE STUD SPACING POSITIVE WIND LOAD NEGATIVE WIND LOAD (inches) (psf) (psf) Gypsum sheathing over min.16 16 35 50 gage steel framing 24 30 35 Gypsum sheathing over wood 16 35 28 framing 24 30 19 Concrete or masonry concrete _ In accordance with the code for 50 the given substrate For SI: 1 inch=25.4 mm, 1 psf=47.88 Pa. Page 9 of 23 ER-3850 STEEL STUD STEEL STUD GYPSUM SHEATHING SENERGY INSULATION BO WRAP LAMINA GYPSUM INTO JOINT SHEATHING W'MIN. APPROVED SEALANT OEM SENERGY SENERGY SECONDARY INSULATION BOARD LAMINA BACKER ROD SEAL OPTIONAL SENERGY DRIP or DECORATIVE JOINT LAMINA ti 12 SENERGY INSULATION BD. EXPANSION JOINT r MIN. SENERGY . LAMINA WRAP LAMINA GYPSUM — DRIP OR WRAP SHEATHING AND SEAL STEEL STUD 8"MIN.ABOVE ROOF SENERGY STEEL STUD ROOF INSULATION SYSTEM GYPSUM APPROVED SHEATHING INSULATION SENERGY LAMINA PARAPET CAP ° TREATED WOOD BLOCKING c opx ROOF SYSTEM 12"MAX. �b �Sa�� AT FOUNDATION Fy, 2"MIN. c STEEL STUD WRAP LAMINA TO FOUNDATION 1�1 SENERGY APPROVED SEALANT INSULATION BD. GYPSUM SHEATHING SENERGY LAMINA ROOF-EDGE WINDOW FRAME WINDOW FRAME E APPROVED SEALANT a METALSILL L 5 2"LAPP 6 GYPSUM WRAP LAMINA — SHEATHING SENERGY LAMINA GYPSUM SENERGY SHEATHING INSULATION STEEL STUD SENERGY STEEL STUD INSULATION 8D. DRIP SENERGY LAMINA WINDOW SILL WINDOW SILL FIGURE 9—SENERFLEX DETAILS Page 10 of 23 ER-3850 STEEL STUD ROOF ;t;< SYSTEM SENERGY GYPSUM SHEATHING INSULATION BD. 0 SENERGY LAMINA 3> 77 WRAP LAMINA O APPROVED SEALANT AND BACKER ROD ` Q - n WINDOW FRAME uu❑ ,WINDOW HEAD WINDOW HEAD =Sr WINDow JAMB �j STEEL STUD I 12 GYPSUM WINDOW SILL 6 SHEATHING SENERGY INSULATION BD. SENERGY _ . LAMINA TYPICAL CURTAIN WRAP LAMINA WALL SECTION R O 'fes DRIP WINDOW FRAME O APPROVED SEALANT El BACKER ROD WINDOW HEAD SENERGY GYPSUM SHEATHING INSULATION BD. GYPSUM SENERGY SHEATHING SENERGY INSULATION BD. LAMINA STEEL STUDS STEEL STUDS SENERGY WRAP LAMINA LAMINA APPROVED SEALANTV= WINDOlW WRAP LAMINA AND BACKER ROD FRAME APPROVED SEALANTVWINDOW FRAME AND BACKER ROD WINDOW JAMB WINDOW JAMB FIGURE 1—SENERFLEX DETAILS—(Continued) Page 11 of 23 ER-3850 A COMPLETED MECHANICAL ATTACHMENT PATTERN FOR THE EXTRUDED POLYSTYRENE d FINISH SENERTHIK FIBERLATH FABRIC COAT MECHANICAL ' FASTENERS x x SENERTHIK r BASE x x SENERTHIK FIBERLATH FABRIC EXTRUDED PRELIMINARY MECHANICAL GYPSUM SHEATHING POLYSTYRENE ATTACHMENT PATTERN FOR THE EXTRUDED POLYSTYRENE F*M cat ETuo BENERTHIK Alto SASE_ COAT EEMRTHIK Sw ExPANSKM! OYPSULI JOINT SHEAITHIND GYPSUM EXPANSION SHEATHING_ JOINT > D D EXTRUDED V"UDED G . POLYSTYRENE POLYSTYRENE D � STUD MASONRY p 7 EXPANSION JOINT CHANGE IN SUBSTRATE FIGURE 2—SENERTHIK DETAILS ER-3850 Page 12 of 23 PUSH CWT SEHOITM BASE WINDOW EnFIUOED POLVBTV"" PRAME GYnw MEATHING enrD r MIN. FLASHING CASING BEAD RUSH COAT BE/EP?NIK BASE VRTKIDED ROOF SYSTEM POI.VSTYNNE Gnaw SHEATHING STUD WINDOW SILL WALUROOF TRANSITION PRRAPET CAP FINISH can r Mw. SENERTHIX EKTRUDED I CASING BEAD POL ROOFING FINISH GYPSUM COAT SHEATHING II I SENERTHIK BTUb BASE STUD WALIDED CAWING aEAD I POLYSTYRENE II II GYPSUM SHEATHING BACKER ROD i APPROVED BFALAMT 9lM I O O D P. V• P' p .. PARAPET FOUNDATION FIGURE 2—SENERTHIK DETAILS—(Continued) Page 13 of 23 ER-3850 (EIFS CONTRACTOR NAME) Completion Date: THE EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM(EIFS)INSTALLED ON THE STRUCTURE LOCATED AT THE ADDRESS INDICATED BE- LOW: CONFORMS TO(EIFS MANUFACTURER'S NAME)RECOMMENDED INSTALLATION PRACTICES AND SECTION(S) OF ICC-ES,INC.,EVALUA- TION REPORT ER- Address of Structure: Product Component Names: Adhesive(s) Fasteners(mech) Base Coat Reinforcing Fabric Finish Coat(s) INSTALLATION CONFORMS A. Substrate Type and Tolerance B. EIFS 1. Adhesive and/or Fasteners 2. Insulation 3. Reinforcing Fabric 4. Base Coat 5. Finish 6. Weather-resistive Barrier C. The information entered above is offered in testimony that the EIFS installation conforms with the EIFS manufacturer's installation methods and procedures,and the EIFS manufacturer's ES report. NOTE:An installation card shall be received from the Sealant Installer indicating that the sealant installation conforms with the EIFS evaluation report and sealant manufacturer's installation methods and procedures must accompany this declaration. EIFS Contractor Company Name and Address: Signature of Responsible Officer: Typed Name and Title of Officer: Telephone Number:( ) cc: Original: Building Department (Must be submitted with sealant Copy: EIFS Manufacturer installer declaration.) FIGURE 3 Page 14 of 23 ER-3850 (SEALANT INSTALLER NAME) Completion Date: THE SEALANT INSTALLED IN CONJUNCTION WITH AN EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM(EIFS)INSTALLED ON THE STRUC- TURE LOCATED AT THE ADDRESS INDICATED BELOW: CONFORMS TO (EIFS MANUFACTURER NAME)AND(SEALANT MANUFACTURER'S NAME) RECOMMENDED INSTALLATION PRACTICES AND SEC- TION(S) OF ICC-ES,INC.,EVALUATION REPORT ER- Address of Structure: Product Component Names: Primer(s) Sealers Bond Breakers Sealant Materials INSTALLATION CONFORMS A. Designer's requirements, details and instructions B. Sealant manufacturer's details and requirements C. Exterior insulation manufacturer's requirements D. The information entered above is offered in testimony that the Sealant installation conforms with the sealant manufacturer's installation methods and procedures,and the EIFS manufacturer's evaluation report. Sealant Installer Company Name and Address: Signature of Responsible Officer: Typed Name and Title of Officer: Telephone Number:( ) cc: Original: Building Department (Must be submitted with EIFS Copies: EIFS Manufacturer contractor declaration.) EIFS Contractor Sealant Manufacturer FIGURE 4 Page 15 of 23 ER-3850 FRAMING FRAMING SHEATHING �-SHEATHING MOISTURE PROTECTION BARRIER 0 SENERFLEX O�p00t4 MECHANICAL FASTENER INSULATION BOARD SENERFLEX OV INSULATION BOARD �o D MECHANICAL FASTENER I MOISTURE PROTECTION BARRIER BY OTHERS) 0 SENERFLEX LAMINA: � �-a ---SENERFLEX BASE COAT -SENERFLEX BASE COAT 0 .� -FLEXGUARD REINFORCING MESH 0a FLEXOUARD REINFORCING -SENERGY FINISII COAT opo MESH 00 �SENERGY FINISH COAT TYPICAL SENERFLEX WALL SYSTEM APPLICATION MP3-1 Oo FLASHING OR WEEP WITH MOISTURE PROTECTION BARRIER SCREED(BY OTHERS) MPB-2 TYPICAL SENERFLEX WALL SYSTEM INSTALLg'p A WITH MOISTURE PROTECTICIN BARRIER SENERFLEX INSULATION / BOARDMOISTURE PROTECTION BARRIER STAGGER SENERFLEX INSULATION SENERFLEX BOARD JOINTS AT INSULATION BOARD CORNER OF OPENINGS MECHANICAL SHEATHING WRAP SENERFLEX BASE COAT AND FASTENER I _ ` —FRAMING Ell _ FLEXGUREINFORCING MESH AT EDGES SENERFLEX INSULATION BOARD SENERFLEX LAMINA I FLEXCUARO 4 REINFORCING FOUNDATION I . MESH EMBEDDED IN a SENERFLEX BASE COAT 12"f5O m)MMAX ° a d NOTE: 1.ALL TERMINATIONS OF THE SENERFLEX WALL SYSTEM AT FLASHMGS MUST BE e BACKW9RAPPED d 2.TERMIN NOTE: ATE SENERFI.E%WALL A d. SYSTEM D'(200—)MIN, 61 i -TYPICAL AT VMNDOWS,DOORS,ETC. ABOVE GRADE -MAINTAIN A MIN.1/Y'(13—)PERIMETER �� FLASHING--^�� SEALANT JOINT ry TYPICAL INSULATION BOARD REINFORCING SEALANT MPB-23 MESH APPLICATION AT OPENINQS MPB-b TERMINATION AT FOUNDATION FIGURE 5—SECONDARY BARRIER SYSTEM AND SENERFLEX CHANNELED INSULATION SYSTEM Page 16 of 23 ER-3850 FRAMING--_ FRAMING f SHEATHING SHEATHING MOISTURE SENERFLEX PROTECTION BARRIER INSULATION BOARD SENERFLEX SENERFLEX LAMINA I NSULATION BOARD MECHANICAL FASTENER MECHANICAL FASTENER I I � MOISTURE SENERFLEX LAMINA PROTECTION BARRIER SENERGY ASAP SENERGY ASAP 1/2"(13mm1/2"(13mm) MIN. ) MIN. BACKER ROD BACKER ROD AND SEALANT Z7 AND SEALANT W/ WEEP TUBES CLAD WINDOW CLAD WINDOW NOTE: INSTALL HEAD FLASHING AT ALL MULLED WINDOWS. MPB-8 MPB-9 TYPICAL CLAD WINDOW JAMB TYPICAL CLAD WINDOW HEAD MOISTURE CLAD WINDOW PROTECTION BARRIER BACKER ROD AND SEALANT SENERGY ASAP SENERGY ASAP SHEATHING 1/2"(13mm) MIN. I --- i I ,24 I I I MECHANICAL FASTENER I MOISTURE PROTECTION BARRIER SENERFLEX LAMINA - I JOINT WIDTH PER DESIGN I SENERFLEX BACKER ROD INSULATION BOARD AND SEALANT SHEATHING SENERFLEX LAMINA FRAMING SENERFLEX INSULATION BOARD MPB-10 TYPICAL CLAD WINDOW SILL MPB-15 EXPANSION JOINT AT CHANGE IN SUBSTRATE FIGURE 5—SECONDARY BARRIER SYSTEM AND SENERFLEX CHANNELED INSULATION SYSTEM—(Continued) Page 17 of 23 ER-3850 FRAMING------- SHEATHING--`SHEATHING MOISTURE PROTECTION BARRIER 1/2"(13mm) MW. SEALANT AT PERIMETER OF PENETRATION BACKER ROD _ AND SEALANT- ---I SENERGY ASAP SENERFLEX LAMINA-"� SENERFLEX INSULATION BOARD -- TYPICAL PIPE PENETRATION MPB-18 FRAMING SHEATHING MOISTURE PROTECTION BARRIER --- SENERFLEX INSULATION BOARD 3/4"MIN. (tUmm) --- -- -- --- BACKER ROD / AND SEALANT SENERGY ASAP SENERFLEX LAMINA ' MPS-14 TYPI AL10_3L7QN.TALEXP_AL45tQN_JCINT DCTAIL AT F OOR INE WQQD FRAME CONSTRUCTION FRAMING „�--^SHEATHINO CHANNELS MECHANICAL FASTENER SENERFLEX CHANNEL INSULATION BOARD MDISTURE PROTECTION BARRIER(BY OTHERS) SENERFLEX BASE COAT FLEXGUARD REINFORCING MESH SENERGY FINISH COAT FLASHING OR STARTER TRACK(BY OTHERS) CI-2 TYPICAL SENERFLEX CHANNEL INSULATION SYSTEM INSTALLATION FIGURE 5—SECONDARY BARRIER SYSTEM AND SENERFLEX CHANNELED INSULATION SYSTEM—(Continued) Page 18 of 23 ER-3850 CD FRAMING FRAMING SIiEATI/1HIREINFORCING SHEATHING MOISTURE PROTECTION MOISTUREITE TION BARRIER(BY DINERS)—..�� BARRIER ERBI SENERGY SmGY DRAINAGE DRAINAGE MAT SENERFLE INSULATION AES7H0C OR MECHANICNER SEMERFLEX IN BOARD MW.S 4'N I—) SENERFLEIAX I MECHANICAL FASTENER -SENERFLEX COAT -FLEYWAORCING MESH -SENERGYCOAT SENERFLEX LAMINA TYPICAL S NER FX CglygiCED APP I ATO(Y CD-1 TYPICAL AEe71iETIG GROOM CD-3 FRAMING SHEATHING !SENERFLEX INSULATION BOARD SENERGY DRAINAGE MAT / STAGGER SENERFLEX INSULATION BOARD JOINTS AT nn8 CORNER OF OPENINGS G o�d MECHANICAL FASTENER WRAP SENERFLEX BASE COAT AND ® SEWERS" REINfORONIG MEED At INSULATION EDGES PNSLILARON BOARD INSULATION BOARD EDar MOISTURE PROTE077M FLEXCUARD 4 REINFORCING IN O BARRIER(BY OTHERS) EMBEDSENERFLEX BAS COAT 0 SENERFLEX BASE COAT g FEXGUARO REINFORCING r oO 0 oqN SENERGY FINISH COAT o°000 Oo FLASHING OR WEEP NOTE: SCREED(BY OTHERS) -711PICAL AT WINDOWS,DOORS.ETC. MAINTAIN A MIN.1/I'(1Jmm)PERIMETTA IYPICAL SFNFRFLFX CDBhtem INCTAI I ATIQN SEALANT JOINT Ctl-2 TYPICAL INSULATOR BOAaIA&INFOR IN MESH APPURR()N CD-9 CD-4 FRAMING SHEATHING FRAMING SENERGY DRAINAGE MAT MECHANICAL FASTENER MECHANICAL FASTENE SHEATHING SENEROY ASAP I/2"(T}mm)MIN.-+ BACKER RDD - ANO SEALANT W/WEEP TUBES FLASHING By OTHERS) CLAD WINOOW BACKER ROD AND SEALANT SENERGYCLAD WINDOW DRAINAGE MAT SENERFLEX BACKER ROD INSULATION BOARD AND SEALANT 1/2"(1Jmm)MIN, MOISTURE PROTECTION SENERGY ASAP BARRIER (BY OTHERS) SENERGY ASAP SENERFLEX LAMINA 1/2"(13mm) MIN. SENERFLEX LAMINA y MOISTURE PROTECTION it BARRIER(BY OTHERS) SENERFLEX INSULATION BOARD TYPICAL CLAD WINDOW JAMB CD-8 TYPICAL CLAD VANDOW SILL CO-10 FIGURE 6—SENERFLEX CD Page 19 of 23 ER-3850 FRAMING SHEATHING SHEATHING MdsnRRE PiROTECTON BARRIER(BY OTHERS) I BLOCKING SENERGY DRAINAGE 11A7 FLEX SOFFIT SEN" INSUUTIGN BOARD ROM LINE I L_ O�A'm N. (1wn ) 9A ER ROD I TRIM AND SEALANT SENERGY ASAP 51'NEPfliJf LUTWA TYPICAL HORIZONTAL EXPAN[ION JOINT OETAIL AT FLOORLINE CD-T4 FRIEZE BOARD ON r— WDOD FRAME CONSTRUCTI I I 2- (50mm) I MDSMA, PIIOTECTION MIN. BARRIER(FLY On1ER5 sENRc ASAP I I SHEATHING I SENERFLEX LAMINA SENERFLEX SERRoy INSULATION BOARD DRAINAGE MAT JOINT WIDTH SENERGY DRAINAGE MAT PER DESIGN 1 I SENERFLEX BACKER Roo INSULATION ROARO AND SEALANT MOISTURE PROTECTION sID+FxFcoc LAMINA I BARRIER (BY OTHERS) TERMINATION AT SOFFIT/GABLE END FXPAN[ION JOINT AT CHANCE IN SUB[TRATE FA CO-TD SLEEVE TE�7I SEALANT WNIRGY DRAINAGE W MAT µ SENERFLEX INSULATION BARRIER(9V OnIflt4N). BOARD SHEATHING DOWNSPOUT STRAP MECHANICAL FASTENER------ I FRAMING DOWNSPOUT saunEx LAMINA SFM RGY DRAINAGE MAT I I A PRRIFOUNDA1N NOTE. TALL TEMI1NA10"S OF THE (aER r 1 OTHERS) I 12(]Wmm)MAX A A LCMPm -BMYPESENIRIFLEX 2.TERMINATE SENERFLEX .v MW.ABOVE GRADE. SENERFLEX INSULATION BOARD aQ -- FLASH . SHEATHING SEA ANT FRAM"G TERMINATION AT FOUNDATION TICAL DOWNSPOUT APPLICATION CO-17 CO-23 FRAMING MdSNRE PRO nG)1 SHEA71iINC SENERG11A YAT BARRIER(BY 0 5 MOISI 'A SENERFLEX BARIURE PROTECTOR r INSULATI SHEATHINBARRIER(BY OTHERS)• MECHANSENERGY FAST NFRAMING DRAINAGEMAT SEOIRFL1�FOUNDAI SEAL PERIMETER OF PENETRATION )WN)4AX I I v. 1.LL T-MIHATON5 OF THE ,k,' I I SENERFLEX CAAptemBACK-ROD AT FLASHINGS MUTBEANO SEALANT i. v PNE-BACKWRAPPED. SEN-OYASAPL�¢ 2 I.MINATE..FLEX f Czylem a-WOmm)SENERFLEXW/wA WN.ABOVE D ADEWEPSC'�-FLE% INSULATION BOARD SEALANT1ERMINATON AT FDUNDATION TYPICAL PIPE PENETRATION CO-24 •cD-)e FIGURE 6—SENERFLEX CD—(Continued) Page 20 of 23 ER-3850 COMPLETED MECHANICAL FASTENER PATTERN FOR SENERTHIK INSULATION BOARD AND FIBERLATH MESH FRAMING --.- SHEATHING SENERTHIK BASE COAT MECHANICAL FASTENER ASSEMBLY (REFER TO SENERTHIK SPEC. FOR FASTENER RECOMMENDATIONS) MOISIURE PROTECTION PSENERGY BARRIER FINISH//� FINISH COAT SENERTHIK BASE COAT SENERTHIK FIBERLATH MESH I SENERTHIK FIBERLATH MESH SENERTHIK PRELIMINARY MECHANICAL FASTENER PATTERN FORSENERTHIK INSULATION BOARD INSULATION BOARD I SENERTHIK INSULATION BOARD SENERGY FINISH COAT SHEATHING NOTE., MECHANICAL FASTENER MOISTURE PROTECTION BARRIER P M-M P B-1 PATTERN SHOWN IS FOR STUDS 0 610 mm O,C. (24" REFER TO SPECS FOR FASTENER SPACING TYPICAL SENERTHIK WALL SYSTEM APPLICATION & REOUIR£MENTS FOR STUDS 0 406 mm O.C. (16"), MASONRY, ETC. WITH MOISTURE PROTECTION BARRIER TYPICAL SENERTHIK WALL SYSTEM INSTALLATION (NOT TO SCALE) WITH MOISTURE PROTECTION BARRIER PM-MPB-2 SHEATHING CORNER BEAD-- SENERTHIK INSULATION THIK BOARD- FIBERLATH MESH SENERGY FINISH COAT- y BASESENECOAT MOISTURE PROTECTION NYLON ANCHOR BARRIER NYLON ANCHOR MOISTURE PROTECTION FRAMING BARRIER SENERGY FINISH COAT II STOPBEAD SENERTHIK BASE COAT I MASONRY BACKER ROD��J•, AND SEALANT FIBERLATH MESH j SENERTHIK FLASHING lu' INSULATION BOARD WINDOW CORNER BEAD DETAIL PM-MPB-8 PM-MPB-6 WINDOW HEAD DETAIL WITH STOPBEAD FIGURE 7—SENERTHIK Page 21 of 23 ER-3850 SENERTHIK INSULATION BOARp--- FIBERLATH MESH ��"`• WINDOW SENERTHIK BASE COAT— i ,J MOISTURE PROTECTION I NOTE; EXTEND FLASKING BARRIER MINIMUM 50 mm (T) SHEATHING OVER SENERTHIK WALL SYSTEM NYLON ANCHOR SENERGY FINISH COAT----- FLASHING STOPBEAD SENERTHIK �r INSULATION BOARD i FRAMING NYLON ANCHOR BACKER ROD—_�`' AND SEALANT MOISTURE PROTECTION BARRIER SHEATHING WINDOW STOPBEAD �IIIw PM—MPB-10 SENERTHIK BASE COAT FIBERLATH MESH— WINDOW ESH—WINDOW JAMB WITH STOPBEAD (PLAN VIEW SENERGY FINISH COAT WINDOW SILL DETAIL (FLUSH)..- PM-MPB-12 NYLON ANCHOR METAL COPING SENERTHIK INSULATION BOARD SENERTHIK BASE COAT FIBERLATH MESH MIN. 50 mm (2") FRAMING SHEATHING I SENERGY FINISH COAT--- STOPBEAD I NYLON ANCHOR FIBERLAihI MESH- MOISTURE PROTECTION SENERTHIK BASE COAT -FRAMING BARRIER I MOISTURE PROTECTION STOPBEAD�:L BARRIER SENERGY ROOF FLASHING -- FINISH COAT SYSTEM SENERTHIK INSULATION I FOUNDATION BOARD '' ' SHEATHING -_ e - PM—MPB-16 METAL COPING DETAIL PM—MPB-15 TERMINATION AT FOUNDATION (FLUSH) FIGURE 7—SENERTHIK—(Continued) Page 22 of 23 ER-3850 COMPLETED MECHANICAL FASTENER PATTERN FOR SENERTHIK INSULATION _- BOARD AND FIBERLATH MESII FRAMING ' SHEATHING SENERTHIK BASE COAT MECHANICAL FASTENER 1 ASSEMBLY (REFER TO SENERTHIK SPEC. FOR FASTENER mm RECOMMENDATIONS) PSENERFINISHCOAT MOISTURE PROTECTION SENERTHIK BASE COAT BARRIER SENERGY DRAINAGE MAT PRELIMINARY MECHANICAL SENERTHIK INSULATION MESH FASTENER PATTERN FOR SENERTHIK INSULATION BOARD SENERTHIK FIBERLATH MESH I SENERTTIIK INSULATION BOARD SFIFATHING SENERGY DRAINAGE MAT SENERTHIK I NOTE,MECHANICAL FASTENER MOISTURE PROTECTION BARRIER INSULATION BOARD I PATTERN SHOWN 1.5 FOR STUDS H SENERGY FINISH COAT - 610 mm O.C. (24") REFER TO SPECS FOR FASTENER SPACING G REQUIREMENTS FOR STUDS 0 406 mm O.C. (16"), MASONRY, ETC. PM-CD-1 TYPICAL SENERTHIK WALL SYSTEM INSTALLATION (NOT TO SCALE) TYPICAL SENERTHIK WALL SYSTEM APPLICATION CORNER BEAD SHEATHING SENERTHIK INSULATION BOARD -� FIBERLATH MESH T SENERGY FINISH COAT I SENERTHIK BASE COAT MOISTURE PROTECTION NYLON ANCHOR EmIlD BARRIER SENERGY DRAINAGE MAT MOISTURE PROTECTION NYLON ANCHOR BARRIER FRAMING - SENERGY DRAINAGE MAT SENERGY FINISH COAT STOPBEAD - SENERTHIK BASE COAT MASONRY I BACKER ROD FIBERLATH MESH AND SEALANT SENERTHIK I FLASHING INSULATION BOARD WINDOW - CORNER BEAD DETAIL PM-CD-6 PM-MPB-8 WINDOW HEAD DETAIL WITH STOPBEAD FIGURE 8-SENERTHIK CD Page 23 of 23 ER-3850 SENERTHIK INSULATION BOARD 0 FIDERLATH MESH I WINDOW SENERTHIK BASE COAT MOISTURE PROTECTION --" -- BARRIER NOTE:MINIMEXTEND FFLASHING SENERGY DRAINAGE MAT -I OVER SENERTHIK WALL - SHEATHING------ -I--- SYSTEM NYLON ANCHOR FLASHING---.� SENERGY FINISH COAT SENERTHIK STOPBEAD INSULATION BOARD ti NYLON ANCHOR BACER ROD _ FRAMING MOISTURE PROTECTION AND KSEALANT -,r -'T BARRIER � SENERGY DRAINAGE MAT SHEA1'I-IING------ STOPBEAD WINDOW----- SCNCRTIiiK BASO COAT FIBERLATH MESH PM-CD-10 SENERGY FINISH COAT--- WINDOW JAMES WITH STOPBEAD (PLAN VIE WINDOW SILL DETAIL (FLUSH) PM-CD-12 NYLON ANCHOR METAL COPING _'�-- SENERTHIK - INSULATION BOARD- SENERTHIK BASE COAT-- I FIBERLATH MESH MIN. 50 mm (7") I FRAMING--------------�----- -- JIM h> SHEATHING SENERGY FINISH COAT--- NIYLON ANCHOR STOPBEAD MOIISTURE PROTECTION FIBERLATH MESH BARRIER SENERTHIK BASE COAT I -FRAMING STOPSEAD MOISTURE PROTECTION I BARRIER SENERGY DRAINAGE MAT SENERGY DRAINAGE MAT -ROOF FLASHING---- SENERGY I SYSTEM FINISH COAT SENERTHIK INSULATION I FOUNpATION--- ' BOARD ^ SHEATHING PM-CD-16 METAL COPING DETAIPM-CD-15 TERMINATION AT FOUNDATION (FLUSH) L FIGURE 8—SENERTHIK CD—(Continued) Florida Building Code Online Page 1 of 4 M. ,._. BCIS Home Log In ! Hot Topics f Submit Surcharge Stats &Facts Publications FBC Staff B- l� 3 Product Approval (�j w USER: Public User Product Approval Menu > Product or Application Search > Application List > Application Detail f ' FL # FL986-R1 f1 L£ Application Type Revision Code Version 2004 Application Status Approved Comments Archived Product Manufacturer POLYGLASS USA Address/Phone/Email 150 Lyon Drive Fernley, NV 89408 Y, (800) 894-4563 +� akins@polyglass.com ARYy'3 Authorized Signature James Akins akins@polygiass.com Technical Representative James E. FILE Address/Phone/Email 555 Oakridge Road I Humboldt Ind. Park Hazleton, PA 18202 b (800) 894-4563 p akins@polyglass.com �w .. Quality Assurance Representative Address/Phone/Email Category Roofing Subcategory Underlayments Compliance Method Certification Mark or Listing Certification Agency Miami-Dade BCCO - CER http://www.floridabuilding.org/pr/pr_app_dti.aspx?param=wGEVXQwtDgtRxollctMPLgU... 9/28/2006 Florida Building Code Online Page 2 of 4 Referenced Standard and Year (of Standard Standard) ASTM D1970 ASTM D226 TAS 103 TAS 114 TAS 117 Equivalence of Product Standards Certified By Product Approval Method Method 1 Option A Date Submitted 08/01/2005 Date Validated 08/01/2005 Date Pending FBC Approval 08/05/2005 Date Approved 08/24/2005 Summary of Products FL # Model, Number or Name Description 986.1 PolyProtector UDL Synthetic underlayment fc \\ Adhered Systems as well roofing systems (I.E. Tile, etc.) Limits of Use (See Other) Certification Agency Ce Approved for use in HVHZ: Installation Instruction Approved for use outside HVH PTID 986 R1 I M-D NO. Impact Resistant: PolyProtector UDL.pdf Design Pressure: +/- PTID 986 R1 I M-D NO Other: Refer to current Miami-Dad>NOAS.'__ IRX TU TUPlus MU.pdf IT D_986 R1 I Polysticl recolrli endations. dfdf PTID 86 R1 I Polysticl application recommendati Verified By: 986.2 Polystick IR-X 2.Omm, Sand or Slag Suri Ice&amp;amp;amp;' ti and Waterproofing Limits of Use (See Other) Certification Agency Ce Approved for use in HVHZ: \�, Installation Instruction Approved for use outside HVHZ: \, Verified By: Impact Resistant: httn://www.floridabuildin2.or�z/pr/pr app dtl.aspx?param=wGEVXQwtDgtlxoIktMPLaU... 9/28/2006 Florida Building Code Online Page 3 of 4 Design Pressure: Other: Refer to current Miami-Dade NOAs. 986.3 Polystick MU 2.Omm, Non-Wicking Fabi for High Temperature Cor Panels, Metal Underlayme Limits of Use (See Oth r) Certification Agency Ce Approved for use in HVInstallation Instruction Approved for use outside . HZ: Verified By: Impact Resistant: Design Pressure: Other: Refer to current Miami-Dade N 986.4 Polystick P 1.02mm, High-Strength L Ice and Water Underlaym Membrane Limits of Use (See Othe Certification Agency Ce Approved for use in HVHZ: Installation Instruction Approved for use outside HV Verified By: Impact Resistant: Design Pressure: +/- Other: Refer to current Miami-Dade NOAs. 986.571Polystick TU 2.5mm, Granulated Surfa IlUnderlayment Limits of Use (See Other) Certification Agency Ce Approved for use in HVHZ: Installation Instruction Approved for use outside HVHZ: Verified By: Impact Resistant: Design Pressure: +/- Other: Refer to current Miami-Dade NOAs. 986.6 Polystick TU Plus 2.Omm, High-Tensile Fabr Adhering Underlayment a Membrane Limits of Use (See Other) Certification Agency Ce Approved for use in HVHZ: Installation Instruction Approved for use outside HVHZ:`, Verified By: Impact Resistant: Design Pressure: +/- Other: Refer to current Miami-Dade NOAs. Back Next DCA Administration Department of Community Affairs Florida Building Code Online Codes and Standards 2555 Shumard Oak Boulevard Tallahassee, Florida 32399-2100 1 tff"-l/xxTxxnx7 flnrMnkiii1r1ina nrU/nr/nr Ann tit] ncnx?nnrnm=wCTFVXOwtDatRxoIktMPLaU... 9/28/2006 Y MIAMI DA MIAMI-DADS Wl/NIl',FLORIDA METRO-DARE FLAGLER BUILDING BUILDING CODE COMPLIANCE OFFICE(BCCO) 140 WEST FLAGLER STREET,SUITE 1603 PRODUCT CONTROL DIVISION MIAML FLORIDA 33130-1563 (305)375-2901 FAX(305)375.29DS NOTICE OF ACCEPTANCE(NOA) Polyglass USA 150 Lyon Drive Fernley,NV 89408 SCOPE: This NOA is being issued under the applicable Hiles and regulations governing the use of construction materials. The documentation submitted has been reviewed by the BCCO and accepted by the Building Code and Product Review Committee to be used in Miami Dade County and other areas where allowed by the Authority Having Jurisdiction(AHI). This NOA shall not be valid after the cxpaation date stated below.The Miami-Dade County Product Control Division(In Miami Dade County)and/or the AHI(in areas other than Miami Dade County)reserve the right to have this product or material tested for quality assurance purposes.If this product or material fails to perform in the accepted manner,the manufacturer will incur the expense of such testing and the AHI may immediately revoke,modify,or suspend the use of such product or material within thein jurisdiction.BORA reserves the right In revoke this acceptance,if it is determined by Miami-Dade County Product Control Division that this product or material fails to meet the requirements of the applicable holding code. This product is approved es described herein,and has been designed to comply with the High Velocity Hurricane Zone of the Florida Building Code. DESCRIPTION:PolyProtectorTM UDL LABELING:Each unit shall bear a permanent label with the manufacturer's name or logo,city,state and following statement:"Miami-Dade County Product Control Approved',unless otherwise noted haeia. RENEWAL of this NOA shall be considered after a renewal application has been filed and there has been no change in the applicable building code negatively affecting the performance of this product TERMINATION of this NDA will occur atter the expiration date or if there has been a revision or change in the materials,use,and/or manufacture of the product or process.Misuse of this NOA as an endorsement of any product for sales,advertising or any other purposes shall automatically terminate this NOA.Fal=to comply with any section of this NOA chall be cause for termination and removal of NOA- ADVERTTSEMENT:The NOA number preceded by the words Miand-Dade County,Florida,and followed by the expiration date may be displayed in advertising literature.If any portion of the NOA is displayed,then it shall be done in its entirety. INSPECTION:A copy of this entire NOA shall be provided to the user by the manufacturer or its distributors and shall be available for inspection at the job site at the request of the Building Official. This NOA consists of pages 1 through 3. The submitted documentation was reviewed by Frank Zuloaga,RRC Aft NOA Na.:03-0311.01 Expiration Date:07114/08 Approval Date:07/24103 Page 1 of 3 ROOFING ASSEMBLY APPROVAL Cateeorv: Rmofng Sub-Cateeorv: 07520 Underlayment Material: Synthetic polymers 1. SCOPE This acceptance is for Polyprolector—'UDL Underlsyment as manufactu nd by Polyglass USA, as described in Section 2 of this Notice of Acceptance,for use with approved prepared roof assemblies. 2. PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Product Dlmessions Test Product Soerlfiesdon Deserlotioa Polyproleemr UDL 60"x 200'rolls ASTM D 226 High strenth,polylefmic multi-latmnated Type B coated with UV protected and formulated anti-skid resistant protection. 3. EVIDENCE SUBNEn=: Test Aeencv Test Identifier Test Name/Report Date PRI Asphalt Technologies,Inc PUSA-013-02-01 ASTM D 226 1223/02 PUSA-013-02-02 TAS 114 1223/02 PUSA-013-02-03 TAS 117 1223/02 Exterior Research&Design,LLC 4724.01.03-10 TAS 114&117 03/04/03 11779.05.03 ICC-ES AC 100 05/29/03 4. LIMITATIONS 3.1 Fire classification is not part of this acceptance,refs to a current Approved Roofing Materials Directory for fm ratings ofthis product 3.2 This acceptance is for prepared roofing applications.hfmitmin deck requirements shall be in compliance with applicable building code. 33 Polypmtector UDL shall not be hot mopped,refer to manufacturer's published litetature for product comparability. 4. INSTALLATION 41 PolypmtecmrUDL shall be installed in strict compliance with applicable Building Code. 4.2 Poiyprotector UDL shall be installed with a minims m4-incb head lap in a single layer fashion. 43 Polypmtector UDL its component used m roof assemblies.Roof assemblies are approved under specific assembly Notice of Acceptance. 4.4 Polyproteclor UDL may be used with Asphaltic shingles,Wood shakes and shingles,Non- stmclmal metal roofing,and quarry slate. 45 For roof the applications Polyproteclor UDL shall be used solely in combination with Polystick MU or Polystick TU as top membrane layer only. (Sce Polystick MU&TU current NOA for installation guidelines).. 4.6 For fere classification of specific roof astcmblies using Polyprotecmr UDL refer to a current Approved Roofing Materials Directory for fire ratings of this product. NOA No.:03-0311.01 Fspiratioo Date:07/24/00 Approval Date:07/24/03 Page 2 of 3 t 5. LABELING 5.1 All packaging shall bear the imprint or identifiable marling of the manufacturer's name or logo and yellow line to identify the ASTM Standard designation. 6. WELDING PERMIT REQUIREMENTS 6.1 Application for building permit shall be accompanied by copies of the following: 6.1.1 This Notice of Acceptance. 6.1.2 Any other documents required by the Building Official or applicable building code in order to properly evaluate the installation of this material. END OF THIS ACCEPTANCE oft NOA Na.:03-0311.01 Expiration Date:07/29/08 Approval Date:07/24/03 Page 3 of 3 • L L k., L AM POLYSTICK TU is a homogeneous, rubberized asphalt waterproofing 1 Self-Adhered Roofing • • membrane, glass fiber reinforced, with a unique surface designedWaterproofing Underlayment specifically for use as file underlayment. POLYSTICK TU membranes are manufactured using patent-pending Zdual compound technology,whereby an APP compound is applied on the top layer and an aggressive self-adhesive compound on the bottom layer. Top surface of membrane is provided with mineral granules to provi-de maximum skid resistance. The rubberized asphalt seals around correctly installed nails on the CL Q weathering surface. Split release backing film aids in the easy positioning of sheets to maintain a proper line. The material is packaged in a roll of approx. 100 sq.ft. (finished roof coverage) weighing approx_ 70 lbs. Material is packaged in patented box,EASYBOX-that faciliates easy handling of rolls. • �� '��'.�� MI�DADE �M • ASTM D 1970 • MIAMI-DADE County Product Control Approved (NOA # 002-0603.08) • ICBO-ES ER# 5954 POLYSTICK TU uses include but are not limited to: the underlayment, chimney flashings, skylight flashings, pipe penetrations, application at ridges and eaves,valley underlayments,and certain below grade V waterproofing applications HIPS AND VALLEYS Apply POLYSTICK TU directly to the roof deck. Do not apply to shingles or other roof coverings. Apply only when the weather is dry and material interface temperatures (air, roof deck, mem- FOUNDATIONWATERPROOFING brone) are 40'F and rising. Always start at the lowest point of a the roof deck where possible. Cut POLYSTICK TU to a suitable, Q 0 workable length (typically between 9 and 15 feet). Lay the mate- TILE UNDERLAYMENT W` rial flat in place, starting at the lowest point. Overlap seams S`. 3.5" minimum and endlaps 6" minimum. Peel half of theMETAL 6 0 backing off the roll and apply firm, even pressure from the cen ter to the outer edges. Remove the backing from the remaining half of the roll and apply pressure. In full roof coverage applica- tions, proper venting of the structure is required. POLYO e QConsult a design professional for proper venting requirements. LUC In steep slope applications (i.e. 3:12 slope or higher) where WATERPROOFING MATERIALS AND INSMATING backnailing will be required, be sure that all nails are covered by the overlapping next sheet. POLYSTICK TU must be covered within 90 days of installation. • TU ASTM D 1970 TEST METHOD PROPERTY VALUES VALUES Inch-pound Metric ASTM D5147 Sec 5 Thickness,nominal. 100 mils 2.5 mm ASTM D2523 Maximum load,min Longitudinal 25 Ibf/in. 4.4 kN/m z Transverse 25 Win. 4.4 kN/m Q ASTM D2523 Elongation at break,min of modified bitumen portion 10% 10% 0. ASTM D1970 Sec 7.4 Adhesion to plywood min at 407 5161/ftwidth 2.3 4/30.5cm W min at 757 18 lbf/k width 8.15 k f/30.5cm 1A ASTM D1970 Sec 7.6 Thermal stabili ,max 0.1 in 3 mm W ASTM D1970 Sec 7.7 Flexibility temperature -207 -29eC ASTM D4073 Tear resistance J Longitudinal,min 20 Ibf 89N VTransverse,min 20 Ibf 89 N .. ASTM E96 Moisture vapor eobili ,max 0.1 U.S.Perms 5.7 /Pa.S.M.2 Z ASTM D1970 Sec 7.10 Sealability around nail Pass = ASTM D1970 Sec 7.10 Waterproof integrity after low temperature V Hexibility Pass W tFr ASTM D1970 Sec 7.10 Waterproof integrity of lap seam Pass Slip Resistance Greater than asphalt saturated 61t when tested under the same conditions of temperature and wetness The properties in the table are"as manufactured"unless otherwise noted. N PRODUCT NAME IVERSIONIMPROXWEIGM1 ROLL SIZE I ROLLS/PALLET NET COVERAGE GROSS COVERAGE N Z WPOLYSTICK TU 2.5 70 lbs 32'10"x3'3-3/8' 20 98 f12 107.6 ft' X (20mx1m) d 0 G -Al materials should be srored it rheic original unopened packaging c 0 -Roll goods shall be stared an end on a dean Aar surface N Score all rooting materials in a dry place,on raised platforms,our of direct exposure to the elements until time of application.This requirement applies equally to rooftop Omaterials,temporarily on the roof before installation. i -store membranes of room temperature wherever possible,until immediately prior to installing the roll. •Materials skull be stored in a Tidy and safe way in a,der to avoid exceeding the allowable lie load of the storage arecs. -Do nor double stack pullets of POLYGLASS�membrane. s © POLYGLASS USA,Inc.:Corporate Office,L ATanufacturing Facility Fernley,Nevada 89408 Phone (ring 575-6007 - Pax (776) 18202-14 - Toll Free (800) 222-9783 A9anufaciuring Fhcility Hazleton,Pennsylvania 18203-Phone(570)3$4-1330-Fas(570)384-5382 WA2FHPHOnPIN6 YARBBIALH AN0INBIILARtNG HPHTBHH Toll Free(800)894-4563-www.polyglass.com-e-mail:cnstomerservice@polyglass.com POLYGLASS S.pA.-111mfdmid,,Hearlqu—ters(Italy)-MSP Scotland Ltd.-Subsidion,(Great Britain) Florida Building Code Online Page 1 of 5 .�M +ft RiM �.�. BCIS HomeLog In ; Hot Topics Submit Surcharge j Stats&G Facts j Publications FBC Staff B >, i. .Product Approval, USER: Public User Product Approval Menu > Product or Application Search > Application List > Application Detail 4 FL # FL3505-R1 dna ))1.£ Application Type Revision Code Version 2004 YI 4 Application Status Approved Comments — ..��. Archived Y Product Manufacturer Hanson Roof Tile Address/Phone/Email 1340 SW 34th Ave. 6.«- Deerfield Beach, FL 33442 h� (954) 421-2077 ext 4052 marc.ceritelli@hanson.biz Authorized Signature Marc Ceritelli marc.ceritelli@hansonFIL COPY Technical Representative Marc Ceritelli e Address/Phone/Email 858 SE Military Tr. Deerfield Beach, FL 33442 marc.ceritelli@hansonamerica.com Quality Assurance Representative John Laisy Address/Phone/Email 1340 SW 34th Ave. Deerfield Beach, FL 33442 john.laisy@hansonamerica.com Category Roofing Subcategory Roofing Tiles Compliance Method Evaluation Report from a Product Eval httn•/hxnxnx7 flrn•iriahnilrlina rn•a/nr/nr ann rltl "IrT�T—T .� Florida Building Code Online Page 2 of 5 Evaluation Entity ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. Quality Assurance Entity RI Ogawa &Associates, Inc. Validated By PRI Asphalt Technologies, Inc. Certificate of Independence Re.fere.nced,Standard and.:Year.(of, Standard Standard) 02-0916.08 02-0916.09 02-0916.10 02-0916.11 02-0916.12 03-0102.01 04-0728.01 ASTM C 1492 FRSA/RTI 07320 FRSA/RTI07320 FRSA/RTI 07320 FRSA/RTI 07320 SSTD 11 Equivalence of Product Standards Certified By Sections from the Code 1507.3.2 1507.3.5 1507.3.7 1507.3.8 1507.3.9 1715.2 Product Approval Method Method 1 Option C Date Submitted 08/02/2005 Date Validated 08/17/2005 Date Pending FBC Approval 08/20/2005 Date Approved 08/24/2005 Summary of Products FL # IlModell, Number or Name IlDescription 3505.1 �9" Flat --1 Flat Profile Roof Tile l++ //,<..,z, FI�r; 7,1.,,;1 l;r„r nrrr/rr/,ter arzrz rlt� a�„v�„ara,,,�x,rFzrunzzrlTln+z: 7Y.1.0/7fr1T71�T C) 0/1)nnc Florida Building Code Online Page 3 of 5 Limits of Use (See Other) Installation Instructions Approved for use in HVHZ: Verified By: Approved for use outside HVHZ: Evaluation Reports Impact Resistant: PTID 3505 R1 T 04072801 Design Pressure: +/- PTID 3505 R1 T Certificate Other: (A) Class A roof covering (B) Roof PTID 3505 R1 T ICC-ES-2: tiles may be used in both high velocity hurricane zones (HVHZ) and in non high velocity hurricane zones. 3505.2 Barrel High Profile Roof Tile Limits of Use (See Other) Installation Instruction Approved for use in HVHZ: Verified By: Approved for use outside HVHZ: Evaluation Reports Impact Resistant: Design Pressure: +/- Other: (A) Class A roof covering (B) Roof tiles may be used in both high velocity hurricane zones (HVHZ) and in non high velocity hurricane zones. 3505.3 ---]Hacienda Double Roll Low Profile Roof Tile Limits of Use (See Other) Installation Instruction Approved for use in HVHZ: Verified By: Approved for use outside HVHZ: Evaluation Reports Impact Resistant: Design Pressure: +/- Other: (A) Class A roof covering (B) Roof tiles may be used in both high velocity hurricane zones (HVHZ) and in non high velocity hurricane zones. 3505.4 Nordic IFFlat Profile Roof Tile Limits of Use (See Other) Installation Instruction Approved for use in HVHZ: Verified By: Approved for use outside HVHZ: Evaluation Reports Impact Resistant: Design Pressure: +/- Other: (A) Class A roof covering (B) Roof tiles may be used in both high velocity hurricane zones (HVHZ) and in non high velocity hurricane zones. 3505.5 ----]Palema Double Roll Low Profile Roof Tile Limits of Use (See Other) Installation Instruction Approved for use in HVHZ: Verified By: Approved for use outside HVHZ: Evaluation Reports Impact Resistant: Design Pressure: +/- Other: (A) Class A roof covering (B) Roof tiles may be used in both high velocity hurricane zones (HVHZ) and in non high velocity hurricane ann rltl.,g.-,nx?narani=wGEVXQwtDatw2pk%2fDHN... 9/28/2006 MM DADE MIAMI-DADS COUNTY,FLORIDA 1� METRO-DADE FLAGLER BUILDING BUILDING CODE COMPLIANCE OFFICE(BCCO) 140 WEST FLAGLER STREET,SUITE 1603 PRODUCT CONTROL DIVISION MIAMI,FLORIDA 33130-1563 (305)375-2901 FAX(305)375-2908 NOTICE OF ACCEPTANCE(NOA) Hanson,Roof Tile. 1340 SW 34a'Avenue Deerfield Beach, FL 33442 SCOPE: This NOA is being issued under the applicable rules and regulations governing the use of construction materials. The documentation submitted has been reviewed by Miami-Dade County Product Control Division and accepted by the Board of Rules and Appeals(BORA)to be used in Miami Dade County and other areas where allowed by the Authority Having Jurisdiction(AHJ). This NOA shall not be valid after the expiration date stated below. The Miami-Dade County Product Control Division (In Miami Dade County) and/or the AHJ(in areas other than Miami Dade County)reserve the right to have this product or material tested for quality assurance purposes. If this product or material fails to perform in the accepted manner, the manufacturer will incur the expense of such testing and the AHJ may immediately revoke,modify,or suspend the use of such product or materialwithin their jurisdiction. BORA reserves the right to revoke this acceptance,if it is determined by Miami-Dade County Product Control Division that this product or material fails to meet the requirements of the applicable building code. This product is approved as described herein,and has been designed to comply with the Florida Building Code, including the High Velocity Hurricane Zone. DESCRIPTION: Venetian Roll Roof Tile LABELING:Each unit shall bear a permanent label with the manufacturer's name or logo,city, state and following statement: "Miami-Dade County Product Control Approved",unless otherwise noted herein RENEWAL of this NOA shall be considered after a renewal application has been filed and there has been no change in the applicable building code negatively affecting the performance of this product. TERMINATION of this NOA will occur after the expiration date or if there has been a revision or change in the materials,use,and/or manufacture of the product or process.Misuse of this NOA as an endorsement of any product,for sales,advertising or any other purposes shall automatically terminate this NOA.Failure to comply with any section of this NOA shall be cause for termination and removal of NOA. ADVERTISEMENT: The NOA number preceded by the words Miami-Dade County,Florida, and followed by the expiration date may be displayed in advertising literature. If any portion of the NOA is displayed,then it shall be done in its entirety. INSPECTION:A copy of this entire NOA shall be provided to the user by the manufacturer or its distributors and shall be available for inspection at the job site at the request of the Building Official. This NOA consists of pages 1 through 4. The submitted documentation was reviewed by Frank Zuloaga,RRC NOA No.:04-0728.01 Expiration Date:07/24/08 Approval Date:09/02/04 Page 1 of 4 ROOFING ASSEMBLY APPROVAL Category: Roofing Sub Category: Roofing Tile Material: Concrete 1. SCOPE This new roofing system using Venetian Roll Tile, as manufactured Hanson Roof Tile as described in Section 2 of this Notice of Acceptance. For the locations where the pressure requirements, do not exceed the values listed in section 4 herein. The attachment calculations shall be done as a moment based system. 2. PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Manufactured by Test Product Applicant Dimensions Specifications Description Venetian Roll Tile Length: 16%z" TAS 112 Low profile,interlocking,extruded concrete Width: 13" roof tile equipped with two nail holes. For 1"thick direct deck or battened nail-on,mortar or adhesive set applications. Trim Pieces Length: varies TAS 112 Accessory trim,concrete roof pieces for use Width: varies at hips,rakes,ridges and valley terminations. Varying thickness Manufactured for each tile profile. 2.1 SUBMITTED EVIDENCE: Test Agency Test Identifier Test Name/Report Date PRI Asphalt Technologies,Inc. CRTL-001-02-01 TAS 112 03/04/03 TAS 101 PRI Asphalt Technologies,Inc. CRTL-001-02-02 TAS 102 01/16/03 PRI Asphalt Technologies,Inc. CRTL-001-02-03 TAS 102 01/16/03 PRI Asphalt Technologies,Inc. CRTL-001-02-04 TAS 100 03/03/03 3. LIMITATIONS 3.1 Fire classification is not part of this acceptance. 3.2 For mortar or adhesive set tile applications, a static field uplift test in accordance with RAS 106 may be required,refer to applicable building code. 3.3 Applicant shall retain the services of a Miami-Dade County Certified Laboratory to perform quarterly test in accordance with TAS 112,appendix `A'.Such testing shall be submitted to the Building Code Compliance Office for review. 3.4 Minimum underlayment shall be in compliance with the applicable Roofing Applications Standards listed section 4.1 herein. Q NOA No.:04-0728.01 Expiration Date:07/24/08 Approval Date:09/02/04 Page 2 of 4 3.5 30/90 hot mopped underlayment applications may be installed perpendicular to the roof slope unless stated otherwise by the underlayment material manufacturers published literature. 3.6 This acceptance is for wood deck applications. Minimum deck requirements shall be in compliance with applicable building code. 4. INSTALLATION 4.1 Currier `Venetian Roll' Roof Tile and its components shall be installed in strict compliance with Roofing Application Standard RAS 118, 119,& 120. 4.2 Data For Attachment Calculations Table 1: Average Weight(W)and Dimensions(I x w) Tile Profile Weight-W(Ibf) Length-1 (ft) Width-w(ft) Venetian Roll 11 1.50 1.08 Table 1: Aerodynamic Multipliers-I ft3 Tile a.(ft) x(fe) Profile Batten Application Direct Deck Application Venetian Roll 0.303 0.329 Table 2: Restoring Moments due to Gravity- M ft-lbf) Tile 2"- 12" 3"• 12" 4 12" 511 • 12" 611 • 12" 7": 12" or Profile greater Venetian Battens Direct Battens Direct Battens Direct Battens Direct Battens Direct Battens Direct Roll Deck Deck Deck Deck I Deck Deck 7.41 7.42 7.34 7.35 7.22 7.23 7.06 7.08 6.89 16.91 6.69 N/A Table 3: Attachment Resistance Expressed as a Moment-Mf(ft-ibf) For Nall-On S stems Tile Fastener Type Direct Deck Battens Profile (Min 15/32" plywood) Venetian Roll 1 #8 Screw 28.3 21.1 1 Fastener placed in Factory formed opening 1-3/a"from the head of the and 4-3/a"from the overlap edge of tile. Table 4: Attachment Resistance Expressed as a Moment-Mf(ft-Ibf) For Single Patty Adhesive Set Systems Tile Tile Application Minimum Attachment Profile Resistance Venetian Roll Polyfoam Pol ProTM 42.3 2 Medium paddy placement of 38 grars of Pol ProTM. 5. LABELING All tiles shall bear the imprint or identifiable marking of the manufacturer's name or logo, or following statement: "Miami-Dade County Product Control Approved". © ' NOA No.:04-0728.01 K Expiration Date:07/24/08 Approval Date:09/02/04 Page 3 of 4 6. BUILDING PERMIT REQUIREMENTS 6.1 Application for building permit shall be accompanied by copies of the following: 6.1.1 This Notice of Acceptance. 6.1.2 Any other documents required by the Building Official or applicable building code in order to properly evaluate the installation of this system. PROFILE DRAWINGS FASTENER HOLES OVERLOCK UNDERLOCK 13 VENETIAN ROLL CONCRETE ROOF TILE END OF THIS ACCEPTANCE o ` NOA No.:04-0728.01 Expiration Date:07/24/08 Approval Date:09/02/04 Page 4 of 4 2203 LEGACY REPORT Reissued January 1,2005 ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. Business/Regional Office■5360 Workman Mill Road,Whittier,California 90601 ■(562)699-0543 Regional Office■900 Montclair Road,Suite A,Birmingham,Alabama 35213■(205)599-9800 WWW.icc-es.org Regional Office■4051 West Flossmoor Road,Country Club Hills,Illinois 60478■(708)799-2305 The Subcommittee on Evaluation has reviewed the data 1.4 Traditional Flat Tile submitted for compliance with the Standard Building Code©, 1.5 Palema Tile the Florida Building Code,and the International One and Two 1.6 Nordic Tile Family Dwelling Code and submits to the Building Official or 1.7 Barrel Tile other authority having jurisdiction the following report. The 1.8 Regal AKA Spanish S II Subcommittee on Evaluation, ICC-ES and its staff are not responsible for any errors or omissions to any documents, 2. SCOPE OF EVALUATION calculations, drawings, specifications, tests or summaries Weather Resistance, Wind Uplift, and Roof Covering Fire prepared and submitted by the design professional or Classification preparer of record that are listed in the Substantiating Data Section of this report.Portions of this report were previously 3. USES included in Evaluation Reports #9131, #9388, #9803, and #9803A. Hanson Roof Tiles are used as a class A roof covering. REPORT NO.: 2203 4. DESCRIPTION EXPIRES: See the current EVALUATION REPORT INDEX 4.1 General CATEGORY: ROOF COVERING AND ROOF DECK Hanson Roof Tiles are interlocking individual extruded Portland CONSTRUCTION Cement concrete roof tiles and are available in a variety of colors and styles. Hanson Roof Tile also produces the various SUBMITTED BY: accessory tiles needed for a complete roof covering system. HANSON ROOF TILE Hanson Roof tiles are attached to the roof deck with mechanical d.b.a.PIONEER CONCRETE TILE fastening systems, mortar set systems, or adhesive systems. 1340 S.W.34TH AVENUE Mechanical fastening systems are covered in Section 5 of this DEERFIELD BEACH,FLORIDA 33442 report.See the appropriate National Evaluation Services,Inc.or SBCCI PST& ESI evaluation report for mortar set or adhesive 1. PRODUCT TRADE NAME fastening systems. Hanson Concrete Tiles: 1.1 Spanish S Tile 1.2 Rustic Shake and Slate Tile 1.3 Hacienda Tile ICC-ES legacy reports are not to be construed as representing aesthetics or any other attributes not specifically addressed,nor are they to be construerl as an endorsement of the subject of the report or a reconunendation for its use.There is no warranty by ICC Evaluation Service,Inc.,express or implied,as to anyfinding or other natter in this report,or as to any product covered by the report. Copyright 0 2005 Page 1 of 12 2203 PAGE 2 OF 12 4.2 Spanish S Tile See Section 5.5 of this report for the minimum required aerodynamic uplift moment(Ma)capacity of the Spanish S Tile. See Section 5.4 of this report for the maximum allowable aerodynamic uplift moment(Ma)capacity of the Spanish S Tile based on fastening method. Nominal dimensions and weight per square are: 1045 lbs(474 kg)with 21/2 inch(64mm)head lap. FASTENER HOLES I \ �OVERLOOK FIGURE 1 SPANISH`S'TILE r� UNDERLOCK "' r K�� Spanish'S" 4.3 Rustic Shake and Slate Tile See Section 5.5 of this report for the minimum required aerodynamic uplift moment(Me)capacity of the Rustic Shake and Slate Tile. See Section 5.4 of this report for the maximum allowable aerodynamic uplift moment(Ma)capacity of the Rustic Shake and Slate Tile based on fastening method. Nominal dimensions and weight per square are: 1262 lbs(572 kg)with 2'/z inch(64mm)head lap. 1305 lbs(592 kg)with 3 inch(76 mm)head lap. FASTENER HOLES OVERLOCK FIGURE 2 RUSTIC SHAKE AND SLATE TILE UNDERLOCK f Rustic Slate/ Shake PAGE 3 OF 12 2203 4.4 Hacienda Tile See Section 5.5 of this report for the minimum required aerodynamic uplift moment(M,)capacity of the Hacienda Tile. See Section 5.4 of this report for the maximum allowable aerodynamic uplift moment(Ma)capacity of the Hacienda Tile based on fastening method. Nominal dimensions and weight per square are: 784 lbs(356 kg)with 2 inch(51 mm)head lap. 843 lbs(382 kg)with 3 inch(76 mm) head lap. 902 lbs(409 kg)with 4 inch(102 mm)head lap. FASTENER HOLES rOVERLOCK FIGURE 3 HACIENDA TILE UNDERLOCK Hacienda 4.5 Traditional Flat Tile See Section 5.5 of this report for the minimum required aerodynamic uplift moment(Me)capacity of the Traditional Flat Tile. See Section 5.4 of this report for the maximum allowable aerodynamic uplift moment(M.)capacity of the Traditional Flat Tile based on fastening method. Nominal dimensions and weight per square are: 966 lbs(438 kg)with 2 inch(51 mm)head lap. 1033 lbs(469 kg)with 3 inch(76 mm)head lap. FASTENER HOLES UNDERLOCK FIGURE 4 TRADITIONAL FLAT TILE Zby OVERLOCK Traditional Flat 2203 PAGE 4 OF 12 4.6 Palema Tile See Section 5.5 of this report for the minimum required aerodynamic uplift moment(Ma)capacity of the Palema Tile. See Section 5.4 of this report for the maximum allowable aerodynamic uplift moment(Ma)capacity of the Palema Tile based on fastening method. Nominal dimensions and weight per square are: 823 lbs(373 kg)with 2 inch(51 mm)head lap. 882 lbs(400 kg)with 3 inch(76 mm)head lap. 941 lbs(427 kg)with 4 inch(102 mm)head lap. FASTENER HOLES OVERLOCK FIGURE 5 PALEMA TILE UNDERLOCKi Palema 4.7 Nordic Tile See Section 5.5 of this report for the minimum required aerodynamic uplift moment(Me)capacity of the Nordic Tile. See Section 5.4 of this report for the maximum allowable aerodynamic uplift moment (Ma) capacity of the Nordic Tile based on fastening method. Nominal dimensions and weight per square are: 980 lbs(445 kg)with 2 inch(51 mm)head lap. 1049 lbs(476 kg)with 3 inch(76 mm)head lap. 1120 lbs(508 kg)with 4 inch (102 mm)head lap. FASTENER HOLES OVERLOCK FIGURE 6 / NORDIC TILE ex_ UNDERLOCK Nordic PAGE 5 OF 12 2203 4.8 Barrel Tile See Section 5.5 of this report for the minimum required aerodynamic uplift moment(Ma)capacity of the Barrel Tile. The Barrel Tile is attached to the roof deck with mortar set or adhesive set systems only. See the appropriate National Evaluations Services, Inc.or SBCCI PST&ESI mortar set or adhesive set evaluation report for attachment of the barrel tile to the roof deck. Nominal dimensions and weight per square are: 1323 lbs(600 kg)with 2 inch(51 mm)head lap. 1382 lbs(627 kg)with 3 inch(76 mm) head lap. FIGURE 7 BARREL TILE rte_ Barrel Tile 4.9 Regal AKA Spanish S II Tile See Section 5.5 of this report for the minimum required aerodynamic uplift moment(Ma)capacity of the Regal AKA Spanish S II Tile. See Section 5.4 of his report for the Maximum allowable aerodynamic uplift moment (Ma)capacity of the Regal AKA Spanish S II Tile based on fastening method. Nominal dimensions and weight per square are: 922 lbs(418 kg)with 2 inch(51 mm)head lap. 990 lbs(449 kg)with 3 inch (76 mm)head lap. 1060 lbs(481 kg)with 4 inch(102 mm)head lap. FASTENER HOLES OVERLOCK FIGURE 8 REGAL AKA SPANISH S II TILE F- 1 UNDERLOCK Regal AKA Spanish "S" 11 2203 PAGE 6 OF 12 5. INSTALLATION When using a mortar set or adhesive set system, a 2 inch(51 mm)minimum headlap is required.See the appropriate SBCCI 5.1 General PST&ESI or NES report for mortar set or adhesive set systems, The manufacturer's published installation instructions,Chapter 15 5.2 Rake Treatment of the Standard Building Code or Chapter 15 of the Florida Building Code as applicable, and this report shall be strictly Rake treatment shall be in accordance with Section 1507.2.2.9 adhered to.A copy of the manufacturer's installation instructions of the Standard Building Code using two 10d corrosion resistant shall be available at all times on the job site during installation. box nails per tile. Fasteners shall meet the applicable sections of the adopted code. The tiles shall be mechanically fastened such that the allowable aerodynamic uplift momentforthe tile/fastener/deck combination 5.3 Hips and Ridges noted in Section 5.4 of this report as applicable, equals to or exceeds the aerodynamic uplift moment, M, required by the When using a mechanical fastening system, the hip and ridge code as noted in Section 5.5 of this report. tiles shall be fastened to hip and ridge boards in accordance with Table 1. Fasteners shall be 10d corrosion resistant box nails or When using a mechanical fastening system,the Spanish"S"Tile 21/2 inch (64 mm) long #8 corrosion resistant wood screws shall have a minimum 21/2 inch (64 mm) headlap. All other conforming to ANSI/ASME B18.6.1. Fasteners shall meet the profiles require a minimum 3 inch(76 mm)headlap. For all roof applicable sections of the adopted code. slopes, Spanish"S"Tile is a direct deck application. TABLE 1 HIP AND RIDGE TILES Nailer Fasteners Spruce-Pine-Fir 1 #8 Wood Screw Southern Pine 1 10d Box Nail or 1 #8 Wood Screw PAGE 7 OF 12 2203 5.4 Maximum Allowable Aerodynamic Uplift Moment TABLE 2 ALLOWABLE AERODYNAMIC UPLIFT MOMENT(ft-lbs) RUSTIC SHAKE AND SLATE TILE, TRADITIONAL FLAT TILE,NORDIC HACIENDA TILE SPANISH S TILE TILE,PALEMA TILE,and REGAL AKA FASTENERS SPANISH S 11 TILE 15/32" 5/8" Baen 15/32" 5/8" Baen 15/32" 5/8" Plywood Plywood Insttallat on Plywood Plywood Insttall ton Plywood Plywood Sheathing Sheathing Sheathing Sheathing Sheathing Sheathing 2-10d Ring Shank 39 46 25 36 46 36 29 41 Nails 2-10d Ring Shank 59" 74* 56' 51` 76` 58" --- --- Nails 148 Screw 39 39 26 33 33 30 29 29 248 Screws 50 50 36 56 56 42 51 51 1-10d Smooth or Screw Shank 14 16 10 13 15 9 12 13 Nails 2-10d Smooth or Screw Shank 20 25 13 19 24 12 13 15 Nails 1-10d Smooth or Screw Shank 31 31 30 31 31 30 29 29 Nails-Field Clip 1-10d Smooth or Screw Shank 25 25 28 25 25 28 36 36 Nails-Eave Clip 2-10d Smooth or Screw Shank 42 42 40 42 42 40 34 34 Nails-Field Clip 2-10d Smooth or Screw Shank 38 38 38 38 38 38 44 44 Nails-Eave Clip " Fasteners are located a minimum of 21/2 inches from the head of the tile. NOTES: 1. Fasteners shall have a minimum edge distance of 11/2 inches from the head of the tile. 2. Ring shank nails shall be 10d ring shank corrosion resistant steel nails(3 inches long,0.283 inch flat head diameter,0.121 inch shank diameter,and 0.131 inch ring diameter). 3. Smooth or screw shank nails shall be 10d corrosion resistant steel(3 inches long,0.28 inch flat head diameter,0.128 inch screw or 0.131 inch smooth shank diameter). 4. Screws are#8 course threaded,21/2 inches long corrosion resistant steel wood screws conforming to ANSI/ASME B 18.6.1. 5. The fastener hole nearest the overlock shall be used when a single nail or screw is required. The fastener hole nearest the underlock and the fastener hole nearest the overlock shall be used when two nails or screws are required. 6. When using eave and field clips,attachment of the tiles is accomplished by a combination of nails and clips. Tiles are nailed to the sheathing or through the battens to the sheathing with one or two 10d corrosion resistant nails (Note 2 and 3 above) as indicated in Tables 5. Additionally,each tile is secured with a 0.060 inch thick and 0.5 inch wide clip which is secured to the plywood sheathing or eave fascia,as appropriate,with a single nail per clip.The nail shall be place in the hole closest to the tile for clips having more than one nail hole.The following clip/nail combinations are permitted: a. Aluminum alloy clip with 1.25 inch HD galvanized roofing nail(0.128 inch shank diameter). b. Galvanized steel deck clip with 1.25 inch HD galvanized roofing nail(0.128 inch shank diameter). C. Stainless steel clip with 1.25 inch HD galvanized roofing nail(0.128 inch shank diameter). 7. Field clips and eave clips are to be located along the tile where the clip's preformed height and the tiles's height above the underlayment are identical. 8. SI Conversion: 1 inch=25.4 mm 1 Ib=0.45 kg 1 foot=0.305 m 1 mph=0.447 m/s 1 ft-Ib=1.356 N-m AIR Consulting Engineers 814 West Diamond Avenue • Suite 360 Gaithersburg, MD 20878 Fleet Landing Gate House Atlantic Beach, Florida Project Number 07103 Structural Calculations (Permit Set) July 2, 2007 FILE COPS CO A :* 2?0�3 Structural Design * Professional Corporation Voice: 301.258.8884 0 Fax: 301.258.9457 0 Web: www.ACEPA.NET s Consulting Engineers Title: Fleet Landing - Gate House Project ID: 07103 General Information:Gate House Main Structural System: Structural Steel &Metal Stud Bearing Lateral System: Moment Frame Foundations:Spread &Continuous Building Code: Florida Building Code 2004 w/ 2006 Supplements Lateral Loads: Seismic:see attached Wind : V = 120 mph - Wind Borne Debris Region I = 1.15 Exposure C - per Atlantic Beach requirements Roof Loading: Roof: Live = 20 PSF Top Chord Dead Load= Concrete Roof Tiles 12PSF Battens/Shims/Underlayment 2 PSF Sheathing 3 PSF Truss 8 PSF 25 PSF Bottom Chord Dead Load = 10 PSF CD ' a ProjectlD By Sheet# Date b 5-15 0� Ag PROJECT EL Consulting Engineers Z/ duse VZ s oaSlo C. 9Y) C /o)(. 29.E �%ua ,e E �� 29•f�S l 8S� �D.8� t 29 yS t/8� - 2 S, 3 3 p� Z9•yS �. 8S��o,S,> -f ZS•�/S / � l7• 62-17 X5F A)mwe, = 9S 33 t /78 Z = •5/3.2 r � ' R ProjectlDBy Sheet# Date l C) s• A PROJECT �E L Consulting Engineers A Jse - R�►M Z- ti11 � t � o i ^ j ProjectlD By Sheet# Date 'f, a3 . ABEL PROJECT Consulting Engineers � � '' � Q- P? U.IIP7) 7S) o` ProjectlD By Sheet# Date _. ABEL PROJECT Consulting Engineers -' a � S t 1 ,Jr-A TO%C. Von- W. -n = G• SAor 7 * T` 5) ' 5116. 7I'CF o / � 8 '�. = 13• �1 x � �.. 5.3 65.2 -; 2, Z 0 _Story Displacements RAM Frame v 11.0 Brian Abel DataBase: Fleet Gate House - Model 05/31/07 15:46:52 1NMNAT Nk Building Code: IBC CRITERIA: Rigid End Zones: Ignore Effects Member Force Output: At Face of Joint P-Delta: Yes Scale Factor: 1.00 Ground Level: Base Wall Mesh Criteria : Wall Element Type : Shell Element with No Out-of-Plane Stiffness Max. Allowed Distance between Nodes (ft) : 8.00 LOAD CASE DEFINITIONS: D DeadLoad RAMUSER Lp PosLiveLoad RAMUSER W1 Wind X RAMUSERNODAL W W2 Wind Y RAMUSERNODAL W Level: Roof, Diaph: 1 Center of Mass (ft): (7.00, 7.00) LdC Disp X Disp Y Theta Z in in rad D 0.00000 0.00000 -0.00000 Lp 0.00000 0.00000 -0.00000 W1 0.29031 -0.00000 -0.00000 W2 -0.00000 0.60578 0.00000 Level: Mid Level, Diaph: 1 Center of Mass (ft): (7.00, 7.00) LdC Disp X Disp Y Theta Z in in rad D 0.00000 0.00000 -0.00000 Lp 0.00000 0.00000 -0.00000 W1 0.17307 -0.00000 -0.00000 W2 -0.00000 0.32694 0.00000 O RAM Frame v1 1.0 Nodal Displacements RAM Brian Abel �eA DataBase: Fleet Gate House - Model 05/31/07 15:46:52 CRITERIA: Rigid End Zones: Ignore Effects Member Force Output: At Face of Joint P-Delta: Yes Scale Factor: 1.00 Diaphragm: Rigid Ground Level: Base Wall Mesh Criteria : Max. Allowed Distance between Nodes (ft) : 8.00 LOAD CASES: D DeadLoad RAMUSER Lp PosLiveLoad RAMUSER W1 Wind X RAMUSERNODAL_W W2 Wind Y RAMUSERNODAL W Note: Nodal Displacements for Live Load Cases are based on Unreduced Live Loads. Frame#0 Level: Roof Node LdC Disp X Disp Y Disp Z Theta X Theta Y Theta Z in in in (rad) (rad) (rad) 1 D -0.00004 0.00004 -0.00207 -0.00017 0.00024 -0.00000 Lp -0.00002 0.00002 -0.00069 -0.00008 0.00011 -0.00000 W1 0.29032 0.00000 0.00032 -0.00000 0.00022 -0.00000 W2 0.00000 0.60578 0.00081 -0.00069 0.00000 0.00000 2 D 0.00004 0.00004 -0.00294 0.00016 0.00023 -0.00000 Lp 0.00002 0.00002 -0.00125 0.00008 0.00011 -0.00000 WI 0.29032 0.00000 0.00032 -0.00000 0.00022 -0.00000 W2 -0.00000 0.60578 -0.00081 -0.00069 -0.00000 0.00000 3 D -0.00004 -0.00004 -0.00294 -0.00016 -0.00023 -0.00000 Lp -0.00002 -0.00002 -0.00125 -0.00008 -0.00011 -0.00000 W1 0.29032 -0.00000 -0.00032 0.00000 0.00022 -0.00000 W2 0.00000 0.60578 0.00081 -0.00069 0.00000 0.00000 4 D 0.00004 -0.00004 -0.00207 0.00017 -0.00024 -0.00000 Lp 0.00002 -0.00002 -0.00069 0.00008 -0.00011 -0.00000 W1 0.29032 -0.00000 -0.00032 0.00000 0.00022 -0.00000 W2 -0.00000 0.60578 -0.00081 -0.00069 -0.00000 0.00000 Level: Mid Level Node LdC Disp X Disp Y Disp Z Theta X Theta Y Theta Z in in in (rad) (rad) (rad) 5 D -0.00000 0.00000 -0.00101 -0.00001 0.00001 -0.00000 Lp -0.00000 0.00000 -0.00028 0.00001 -0.00002 -0.00000 W1 0.17307 0.00000 0.00026 -0.00000 0.00118 -0.00000 W2 0.00000 0.32694 0.00062 -0.00263 0.00000 0.00000 O Nodal Displacements RAM Frame v 11.0 Page 2/2 Brian Abel f DataBase: Fleet Gate House - Model 05/31/07 15:46:52 Node LdC Disp X Disp Y Disp Z Theta X Theta Y Theta Z 6 D 0.00000 0.00000 -0.00136 0.00001 0.00001 -0.00000 Lp 0.00000 0.00000 -0.00051 -0.00001 -0.00002 -0.00000 W1 0.17307 0.00000 0.00026 -0.00000 0.00118 -0.00000 W2 -0.00000 0.32694 -0.00062 -0.00263 -0.00000 0.00000 7 D -0.00000 -0.00000 -0.00136 -0.00001 -0.00001 -0.00000 Lp -0.00000 -0.00000 -0.00051 0.00001 0.00002 -0.00000 W1 0.17307 -0.00000 -0.00026 0.00000 0.00118 -0.00000 W2 0.00000 0.32694 0.00062 -0.00263 0.00000 0.00000 8 D 0.00000 -0.00000 -0.00101 0.00001 -0.00001 -0.00000 Lp 0.00000 -0.00000 -0.00028 -0.00001 0.00002 -0.00000 W1 0.17307 -0.00000 -0.00026 0.00000 0.00118 -0.00000 W2 -0.00000 0.32694 -0.00062 -0.00263 -0.00000 0.00000 ProjectlD By Sheet# Date ► 03 (o - 2I -0 ABEL PROJECT Consulting Engineers 3.2 psF ?�- z 0 y� 3•-7? K/ rvs e = 75 y I�IRV&S l'S r _ s S !�;C-YzEw S fi; S 1', rSd N 0 R ProjectlD By Sheet# Date t O -o ABEL PROJECT Consulting Engineers p v� - uj�Z. >1 4, z 11177 + . 9610 x I 1-17 IA2 N tVi 2 7 � x8 3(96 =god L�.9 9.17x12, Zgo�x tan � x 29oo�x100 q sg /D Gravity Beam Design RAM RAM SBeam v3.0 mE"'��, Licensed to: Abel Consulting Engineers, P.A 06/01/07 12:46:0( STEEL CODE: ASD 9th Ed. SPAN INFORMATION(ft): I-End (0.00,0.00) J-End (14.67,0.00) Beam Size (Optimum) = W8X24 Fy = 50.0 ksi Total Beam Length(ft) = 14.67 LINE LOADS (k/ft): Load Dist(ft) DL LL 1 0.000 0.024 0.000 14.670 0.024 0.000 2 0.000 0.000 1.000 14.670 0.000 1.000 SHEAR: Max V(DL+LL) = 7.51 kips fv=3.87 ksi Fv=20.00 ksi MOMENTS: Span Cond Moment @ Lb Cb Tension Flange Compr Flange kip-ft ft ft fb Fb fb Fb Center Max+ 27.5 7.3 14.7 1.00 15.82 30.00 15.82 22.35 Controlling 27.5 7.3 14.7 1.00 --- --- 15.82 22.35 REACTIONS (kips): Left Right DL reaction 0.18 0.18 Max+LL reaction 7.33 7.33 Max +total reaction 7.51 7.51 DEFLECTIONS: Dead load (in) at 7.34 ft = -0.010 L/D = 16817 Live load(in) at 7.34 ft = -0.435 L/D = 405 Net Total load (in) at 7.34 ft = -0.445 L/D = 396 FilGravity Beam Design RAM RAM SBeam v3.0 FTERNAnoi,k Licensed to: Abel Consulting Engineers, P.A 06/01/07 12:46:42 STEEL CODE: ASD 9th Ed. SPAN INFORMATION (ft): I-End (0.00,0.00) J-End (14.00,0.00) Beam Size (User Selected) = HSS6X6X5/8 Fy = 50.0 ksi Total Beam Length(ft) = 14.00 LINE LOADS (k/ft): Load Dist (ft) DL LL 1 0.000 0.040 0.000 14.000 0.040 0.000 2 0.000 0.000 1.000 14.000 0.000 1.000 SHEAR: Max V (DL+LL)= 7.28 kips fv= 1.04 ksi Fv=20.00 ksi MOMENTS: Span Cond Moment @ Lb Cb Tension Flange Compr Flange kip-ft ft ft fb Fb fb Fb Center Max + 25.5 7.0 14.0 1.00 16.61 30.00 16.61 30.00 Controlling 25.5 7.0 14.0 1.00 16.61 30.00 --- --- REACTIONS (kips): Left Right DL reaction 0.28 0.28 Max+LL reaction 7.00 7.00 Max+total reaction 7.28 7.28 DEFLECTIONS: Dead load (in) at 7.00 ft = -0.022 L/D = 7801 Live load (in) at 7.00 ft = -0.541 L/D = 311 Net Total load(in) at 7.00 ft = -0.562 L/D = 299 Pagel of 4 814 W. Diamond Ave, Suite 630 Tel 301-258-8884 Gaithersburg, MD 20878 Fax 301-258-9457 www.ACEPA.net info@ACEPA.net Consulting Engineers COLUMN PIER, PLATE AND BOLT DESIGNER Project: Fleet Landing Gate House This sheet has been developed using the AISC Project ID: 07103 Design Guide 1 (second edition), the Description: Column Base 13th Edition AISC and ACI 318-05 Load and Dimension Input f (pier) = 3 ksi fy(plate) = 36 ksi Base PI Size= 18 X 18 lin Edge Distance to bolt= 2 in Moment Arm = 14.0" Column Size= w8x24 qV d = 7.93 in bf= 6.5 in. tf= 0.40 in. Anchor Bolt Size= 3/4 W] in Ase = 0.334 in Type of Anchor= bolts _7�] Distance from bolt to dowel, g = in Number of Anchors = half the bolts are placed at each end of plate at edge dist above(even number required) DL LL WIND SEISMIC Load Combinations Checked M (unfactored) _ [k-ft] 28.2 0.0 1) 1.4D V(unfactored) _ [kips] 0.0 0.0 2) 1.2D + 1.61- U .6LU (unfact'rd uplift) _ [kips] 0.0 0.0 3) 1.2D + L P (unfactored) _ [kips] 4.8 1.8 0.0 0.0 4) 1.2D + 1.6W+ L enter all values as positve numbers 5) 1.2D + 1.0E + L 6) 0.9D + 1.6W Is L > 100 psf or Garage Load or Assembly Load ? 7) 0.9D + 1.0E yes L = 0.9 kips no used in load combinations 3,4 and 5 Factored Loads for Design Tension per Bolt due to Uplitt= Factored Axial Load Number of Bolts Factored Tension Force, TU = 0.0 kips/bolt Controlling Load Combo#: No Net Tension Shear per Bolt-_ Factored Shear Force Half of total number of bolts Factored Sheat Force, Vu = 0.0 kips/bolt Controlling Load Combo#: No Shear Maximum downward Load for bearing design Factored Axial Load, Pu = 8.7 kips Controlling Load Combo#: 2 Maximum Moment(M,) and associated Axial Load (Pr)for Base Plate Design Factored Moment, Mr= 45.2 kip-ft Controlling Load Combo#: 6 Factored Axial Load, Pr= 4.3 kips From load Combo#: 6 Page 2 of 4 Base plate thickness due to uplift x = (N/2 -edge dist.) -d/2 + tf/2 = 3.24 in. beff= 2 *x= 6.47 in 4 -T„ *x tmin - = 0.00 in. Fy beff per equation 3.3.15a Base plate thickness due to moment M, e > ecr;t Design as Large Moment Base Plate e = P = 10.39 in. f= N/2 -edge dist. = 7 in. N P� Check equation 3.4.4: 256.0 > 5.1 ecra = 2 - 2 * = 8.93 in. gmax gmax= fp(max) * B = 29.84 kips/in. fp(max) = �c(0.85 fc) = 1.66 ksi M = N -0.95d = 5.23 in. 9 n = N -0.95 d = 6.40 in. > m (controls) 2 Large Moment Base Plate Y= 0.16 in. Tu = gmax *Y- Pr= 0.4 kips x= f-d/2 + tf/2 = 3.24 in tp(req, bearing) 0.45 in. tp(req, tension) 0.09 in. For Y m: Base plate thickness equations for small F9F and large moment base plates t = =1.sm Jp LRFD (3.3.14x) substitute n for m when n > m p(req) F. ( )> For Y<m: use 3.3.15a for moment caused by T,,for large moment Y) base plates(substitute Tu for fpY and x for(m-Y/2) fpY�m—Yl tp(req)=2.11 2 (LRFD) (3.3.15a) from A/SC Design Guide 1 FY ( Y 1 �)2 2P,(e+f) Bearing length and dimension compatiblity Y= f+— t V f+— — (3.4.3) check for large moment base plates 2) q,nax (f+N �)z 2P,.(e+f) 2 (3.4.4) r/mar from AISC Design Guide 1 Page 3 of 4 Base plate thickness due to axial load __ P A1(regd) 0.85 f� = 5.2 in. A1(Prov) = N * B = 324 in. SPP = 0.85 fc Al = 537.03 kips 4 d bf P„ X = (d + bf)2 �P = 0.02 in. P _ 2 *X1/2 1 + (1 -X)1/2 < 1 = 0.13 in. (d bf)1/2 0.23 in. 4 I = max (m, n, Xn') = 6.40 in * tm1O = I FY B N = 0.26 in. Anchor Bolt Selection Max factored Tension per bolt= 0.20 kips controled by moment Max factored Shear per bolt= 0.00 kips Factored Shear force taken by Base Plate Friction = µ P„ _< 0.2 f Ac 1.6 kips Net Shear taken by bolt= 0.00 kips Bolt Values Tension (kips) Shear(kips) Status f�,t(ksi) fy(ksl) c N.= fiAt fy fiV3 = 0.8 finA.J t Tension Shear A307 - 58 36 10.8 11.6 OK OK Studs - 60 50 15.0 12.0 OK OK F1554 (36) - 58 36 10.8 11.6 OK OK F1554 (55) - 75 55 16.5 15.0 OK OK F1554 (105) - 1 125 105 1 31.6 1 25.1 1 OK OK Tension assumed to be lapped with reinforcement in pier ¢ =0.9 l � Page 4 of 4 Pier Dowels and Anchor Bolt Length A.,req'd = T. fy) = 0.00 int Total area per pier side= 0.01 int Provide 1 - #8 dowels per side of pier. 4 total dowels. Anchor/ Bar Splice = Development length > 17 x db+ 0.75 g Ldh of Pier dowels= 15.34 in controls Minimum length = 14.25 in Total Pier height= 15.34 + 2.5"top cover+ 1" above footing = 19 in Summary Minimum Base Plate Size Controled by Moment Size 18 x 18 x 1/2 Minimum Recommended Bolt Size(see bolt schedule for other materials) Controled by Moment ASTM F1554 Grade 36 3/4 in. diameter anchor bolts Pier Reinforcement 4 #8 dowels even spaced around perimeter of pier 19 high pier minimum. Allows for 2.5" above hooked dowel bar and 1" below bottom of anchor. /b Build.ing Code: ACI 318-95 f'c=3000 psi Allow. Soil Bearing=2500 psf fy=60000 psi Soil/Footing Friction=0.4000 'oj; % Min. Steel=0.0018 Concrete Wt.=145 pcf RL 1.0 kips D 3.6 kips �y W 28.2 kip-ft 12 12 K D 240 p s f 12 4 16" 3 1/2" L R B T:.: 6f-011 6'-0„ Length Width Serv. Bearing LC Serv. Bearing LC DL + FLL + WL ,•gym -^ �� 0 psf y :� 1395 psf " DL + FLL + RLL �� 561 psf Service Soil Bearing r Left Right Top Bottom Allow SF OTM Allow SF Slide Allo �L+-Fff oad Case �� (psf) (psf) (psf) (psf) (psf) I _ + RLL 561 561 561 561 2500 N/A 1.50 N/A 1.50 DL + FLL + SNL 533 533 533 533 2500' N/A 1.50 N A 1.50 DL + FLL + WL 0 1395 533 533 3333 2.04 1.50 N/A 1.50 IDL + FLL + SEL 533 533 533 533 3333 N/A 1.50 N/A 1.50 LD FLL + WL + 1/2 SNL 0 1395 533 533 3333 2.04 1.50 N/A 1.50 FLL + SNL + 1/2 WL 141 925 533 533 3333. 4.08 1.50 N/A 1.50 FLL + SNL + SEL 533 533 533 533 3333E N/A 1_50 N/Aj 1.50 Factored Soil Bearing Load 7 Case LeftRight Top Bottom _ _ (psf)j (P (p (psf) LO75(l.4DL DL + 1.7FLL + 1.7RLL + 1.7SNL 793; 793 793 793 5(1.4DL + 1.7FLL + 1.7RLL + 1.7SNL + 1.7WL) 0 1804 595 595 DL + 1.3WL 0 2195 480 480 + 1.7FLL + 1.7RLL + 1.7SNL + 1.87SEL) 595 595 595 595DL + 1.43SEL 4801 480 480 480 Shear Design Punching one Way _ -._.. vu L-P, vu-T'--B vc vu L-R vu T-E vc _ _(_psi) (psi) (psi) (psi) (psi) (psi) 1.4DL + 1.7FLL + 1.7RLL + 1.7SNL 6 6 219 2 2 110 0.75(1.4DL + 1.7FLL + 1.7RLL + 1.7SNL +7SEL) 5' 4 219 12 2 110 0.9DL + 1.3WL 3 3 219 14 1 110 0.75(1.4DL + 1.7FLL + 1.7RLL + 1.7SNL + 4 4 219 2 2 110 0.9DL + 1.43SEL _ 3 3 219 1 1 110; Moment Design Load Case Mu L-R Ru L-R As L-R Mu T-B Ru T-B As T-B (kip-ft) (psi) (in^2) (kip-ft) (psi) (in^2) 1.4DL + 1.7FLL + 1.7RLL + 1.7SNL7+ 1.7WL) 3.5 4 1.620* 3.5 4 1.620* 0.75(1.4DL + 1.7FLL + 1.7RLL + 1. 18.2; 22 1.620* 2.6 3 1.620*0.9DL + 1.3WL 20.81 25! 1.620* 1.7 2 1.620*I0.75(1.4DL + 1.7FLL + 1.7RLL + 1. L) 2.6 3 1.620* 2.6 3 1.620* 0.9DL + 1.43SEL 1.7i 2 1.620* 1.7 2 1.62.0* * Min Steel Controls, +Bending Controls Sug. As Width X-Sect. Sug. As Length X-Sect. Rebar Size Total CountRebar Size Total Count US#3 15 US#3 15 US#4 9 US#4 9 US#5; 6] US#5 6 0 Building Code: ACI 318-95 f'c=3000 psi Allow. Soil Bearing=2500 psf fy=60000 psi Soil/Footing Friction=0.4000 % Min. Steel=0.0018 Concrete Wt.=145 pcf 1�RL 1.8 kips D 4.8 kips � NW 28.2 kip-ft 12" 1211 S )� 5n� D 240 p s f 12"� , y 16,E 3 1/2" L R B T1 61-0" 61-01, Length Width Serv. Bearing LC Serv. Bearing LC DL + FLL + WL r" `b�; iw � � DL + FLL + RLL 0 psf ,..y�, 1403 psf . , �� z 618 psf Service Soil Bearing Load Case Left Right Top Bottom AAllow SFTN/A1.510 w SF Slide Allow (psf) (psf) (psf) (psf) I (psf) �DL + FLL + RLL 618 618 618 618 2500 0 N/A 1.50 DL + FLL + SNL 568 568 568 568 2500 0 N/A 1.50 'DL + FLL + WL I 0 1403 568 568 3333 0 N/A 1.50 IDL + FLL + SEL 568 568 568 568 3333 N/A 1.50 IDL + FLL + WL + 1/2 SNL 0 1403 568 5681 3333 2.17 1.50 N/A 1.50 DL + FLL + SNL + 1/2 WL 175 960 568 568 3333 4.34 1.50 N/A 1.50 1DL + FLL + SNL + SEL 568 568 568 568 3333 N/A 1.50' N/A 1.50 Factored Soil Bearing Load Case -T Left Right Top Bottom' (psf) (psf) (psf) (psf) 1.4DL + 1.7FLL + 1.7RLL + 1.7SNL 880 880 J15!111 880 10.75(1.4DL + 1.7FLL + 1.7RLL + 1.7SNL + 1.7WL) 0 1778 660 0.9DL + 1.3WL 0 2035 511 0.75(1.4DL + 1.7FLL + 1.7RLL + 1.7SNL + 1.87SEL) I 660 660 60 0.9DL + 1.43SEL 1 511 511 Shear Design Punching One Way Load Case vu L P, vu T-B vc vu L-R vu T B vc (Psi) (psi) (psi) (psi) (psi) (psi) 1.4DL + 1.7FLL + 1.7RLL + 1.78NL 8 R 219 3 3 110 0.75(1.4DL + 1.'/FLL + 1.7RLL + 1.7SNL + 1.7WL) 7 6 219 12 2 110 0.9DL + 1.3WL 4 4 219 13 1 110 0.75(1.4DL + 1.7FLL + 1.7RLL + 1.7SNL + 1.87SEL) 6 6 219 2 2 110 10.9DL + 1.43SEL 4 4 219 1 1 110 Moment Design 1Load Case Mu L-R Ru L-R As L-R Mu T-B Ru T-B As T-B 1 (kip-ft) (psi) (in^2) (kip-ft) (psi) (i ^2) 1.4DL + 1.7FLL + 1.7RLL + 1.7SNL 5.1' 6 1.620* 5.1 6 1.620* 0.75(1.4DL + 1.7FLL + 1.7RLL + 1.7SNL + 1.7WL) 18.6 22 1.620* 3.8 5 1.620* 100.9DL .9DL + 1.3WL 20.3 24 1.620* 2.3 3 1.620* .75(1.4DL + 1.7FLL + 1.7RLL + 1.7SNL + 1.87SEL) 3.8� 5 1.620* 3.8 5 1.620* + 1.43SEL 2.3 3 1.620* 2.3 3j 1.620*� * Min Steel Controls, + Bending Controls Sug. As Width X-Sect. Sug. As Length X-Sect. Rebar Size Total Count Rebar Size Total Coui US#3 15 US#3 15 US#4 9 US#4 91 US#5 6 _ US#5 61 ' Building Code: ACI 318-95 f'c=3000 psi Allow. Soil Bearing=2500 psf fy=60000 psi Soil/Footing Friction=0.4000 Min. Steel=0.0018 Concrete Wt.=145 pcf -I- �RL 1.0 kips D 3.6 kips 40.5 kip-ft 12" 12" D 240 psf `� -- i 16 3 1/2 L RI B T 6'-4" Length Width Serv. Bearing LC Serv. Bearing LC DL + FLL + WL `;3 ¢ r z § <3 0 sf " DL + FLL + RLL P 1786 psf ' 547 psf Service Soil Bearing `Load Case Left Right Top Bottom Allow SF OTM Allow SF Slide Allow (psf) (psf) (psf) (psf) (psf) IDL + FLL + RLL 547 547 547 547 2500 N/A 1.50 N/A 1.50 DL + FLL + SNL 523 523 523 523 2500 N/A 1.50 N/A 1.50 IDL + FLL + WL 0 1786 523 523 33L .64 1.50 N/A 1.50 DL + FLL + SEL 523 523 523 523 33N/A 1.50 N/A 1.50 DL + FLL + WL + 1/2 SNL 0 1786 523 523 33 .64 1.50 N/A 1.50 IDL + FLL + SNL + 1/2 WL 44. 1001 523 523 33 .28 1.501 N/A 1.50 ADL + FLL + SNL + SEL 523 523 523 523 33N/A 1.50 N/A 1.50 Factored Soil Bearing _ `Load Case Left Right Top :Botto�m _ (psf) (pr47 f) psf) r1.4DL + 1.7FLL + 1.7RLL + 1.7SNL 774 741 774I0.75(1.4DL + 1.7FLL + 1.7RLL + 1.7SNL + 1.7WL) 0 280 580;0.9DL + 1.3WL 0 5270 470�0.75(1.4DL + 1.7FLL + 1.7RLL + 1.7SNL + 1.87SEL) 5801 580 580 0.9DL + 1.43SEL 470L__1191 470 470 Shear Design Puiic:hing One Way Load Case vu L7vuT-B vc vuL-R vu T-B vc(Pal) i) (psi) psni 1.4DL + 1.7FLL + 1.7RLL + 1.7SNL 66 219 ' 0.75(1.4DL + 1.7FLL + 1.7RLL + 1.7SNL + 1.7WL) 54 219 0.9DL + 1.3WL 53 219 0.75(1.4DL + 1.7FLL + 1.7RLL + 1.7SNL + 1.87SEL) 44 219 0.9DL + 1.43SEL - 3�- 3 219 Moment Design Load Case Mu L-R Ru L-R As L-R� Mu T-B Ru T-B As T� (kip-ft) (psi) (in^2) (kip-ft) (psi) (in^2)� r1.4DL + 1.7FLL + 1.7RLL + 1.7SNL 3.8 4 1.710* 3.8 4 1.710* 0.75(1.4DL + 1.7FLL + 1.7RLL + 1.7SNL + 1.7WL) 29.7 33 1.710* 2.8 3 1.710*, !0.9DL + 1.3WL 34.4 3911.710* 1.8 2 1.710*I 0.75(1.4DL + 1.7FLL + 1.7RLL + 1.7SNL + 1.87SEL) 2.8 3! 1.710* 2.8 3 1.710* 0.9DL + 1.43SEL 1.8 2 1.710* 1.8 2 1.710*l * Min Steel Controls, + Bending Controls Sug. As Width X-Sect. Sug. As Length X-Sect. Re=Total Rebar Size Total CounUS#3 16 US#4 91 US#5 __6 Building Code: ACI 318-95 f'c=3000 psi Allow. Soil Bearing=2500 psf fy=60000 psi Soil/Footing Friction=0.4000 % Min. Steel=0.0018 Concrete Wt.=145 pcf (S N o P RL 1.1 kips D 1.3 kips �T(o. � NW 12.3 kip-ft 12" 12" D 240 psf 12rr 16 3 1/2 1 L R I.B T 51-0" Length Width Serv. Bearing LC Serv. Bearing LC DL + FLL + WL "'"tla w ;„ �,� r �� ': DL + FLL + RLL O psf 1087 psf ,a p � ,,, 526 psf n- Service Soil Bearing Load Case Left Right TopBottom Allow SF OTM Allow SF Slide Allow (psf) (psf) (psf) ! (psf) (psf) DL + FLL + RLL 526 526 526 526 2500 N/A 1.50 N/A 1.50 DL + FLL + SNL 484 484 484 484 2500 N/A 1.50 N/A 1.50 ,DL + FLL + WL 0 1087 4841 484 3333 2.46 1.50 N/A 1.50 DL + FLL + SEL 4841 484 484 484 3333 N/A 1.50! N/A 1.50 DL + FLL + WL + 1/2 SNE484 0 1087 484 484 3333 2.46 1.50 N/A 1.50 DL + FLL + SNL + 1/2 W189 779 484 484 3333 4.92 1.50 N/A 1.50 DL + FLL + SNL + SEL 484 484, 484 3333 N/A 1.50 N/A, 1.50 Factored Soil Bearing [Load Case -B Left��Right Top Bottom I- (psi: ' ( f) (psf) (psf) I1.4DL + 1.7FLL + 1.7RLL + 1.7SNL 749 749 749 749 10.75(1.4DL + 1.7FLL + 1.7RLL + 1.7SNL + 1.7WLLL) 0 1354 561 561 10.9DL + 1.3wL 0. 1408 435 435 I0.75(1.4DL + 1.7FLL + 1.7RLL + 1.7SNL + 1.87SEL) I 561 561 561 561 L0.9DL + 1.43SEL - _ 435 435 435 435 Shear Design Punching One Way (Load Case -- vu L-R vu T-B vc vu L-R vu T-B vc� _ (psi) (psi) (psi) (psi) (psi) (psi) ! 1 .4DT + 1 .7FT,T, + 1 .7RT,T, + 1.75NL 3 3 219 1 1 110 U.'/b(1.4DL + 1.7FLL 1 1.71u i, I 1.73NL + 1.7WL) 2 2 219 61 1 1101 0.9DL + 1.3WL 1 1 2191 6 0 110 0.75(1.4DL + 1.7FLL + 1.7RLL + 1.7SNL + 1.87SEL) 2 2 219 1 1 110 0.9DL + 1.43SEL _ 1 1 219 0 0 1101 Moment Design Load Case Mu L-R Ru L-R As L-R Mu T-B Ru T-BIAS T-B _ (kip-ft) (psi) (in^2) (kip-ft) (psi) ! (in^2) , 1.4DL + 1.7FLL + 1.7RLL + 1.7SNL 1.4 2 1.350* 1.4 211.350* 0.75(1.4DL + 1.7FLL + 1.7RLL + 1.7SNL + 1.7WL) 6.8 10 1.350* 1.1 211.350* 0.9DL + 1.3WL 7.1 10 1.350* 0.5 1 1.350* 0.75(1.4DL + 1.7FLL + 1.7RLL + 1.7SNL + 1.87SEL) 1 1.1 2 1.350* 1.1 2 1.350* 0.9DL + 1.43SEL 0.5 1 1.350* 0.5 1 1.350*' * Min Steel Controls, + Bending Controls Sug. As Width X-Sect. Sug. As Length X-Sect. Rebar Size Total Count IRebar Size Total Count US#3 13 US#3 13� US#4 7 US#4 7' US#5 5 US#5 51 Member Force Summary RAM Frame v 11.0 FilBrian Abel RAMDataBase: Fleet Gate House - Model 06/01/07 10:56:12 �A Building Code: IBC CRITERIA: Rigid End Zones: Ignore Effects Member Force Output: At Face of Joint P-Delta: Yes Scale Factor: 1.00 Ground Level: Base Wall Mesh Criteria : Wall Element Type : Shell Element with No Out-of-Plane Stiffness Max. Allowed Distance between Nodes (ft) : 8.00 LOAD CASE DEFINITIONS: D DeadLoad RAMUSER Lp PosLiveLoad RAMUSER W1 Wind X RAMUSERNODAL_W W2 Wind Y RAMUSERNODAL_W Frame #0: Level: Roof Steel Column: # LoadC @ P Mmajor Mminor Vmajor Vminor Tors kips kip-ft kip-ft kips kips kip-ft 5 D T 2.57 1.08 -0.98 -0.12 0.11 -0.00 B 2.57 -0.55 0.52 -0.12 0.11 -0.00 Lp T 0.99 0.47 -0.42 -0.05 0.04 -0.00 B 0.99 -0.15 0.14 -0.05 0.04 -0.00 W1 T -0.14 -0.00 1.00 0.00 -0.00 -0.00 B -0.14 0.00 0.99 0.00 -0.00 -0.00 W2 T -0.46 -3.20 0.00 0.00 -0.00 0.00 B -0.46 -3.17 -0.00 0.00 -0.00 0.00 6 D T 3.82 -1.06 -0.96 0.12 0.11 -0.00 B 3.82 0.54 0.50 0.12 0.11 -0.00 Lp T 1.81 -0.45 -0.40 0.04 0.04 -0.00 B 1.81 0.15 0.13 0.04 0.04 -0.00 W1 T -0.14 -0.00 1.00 0.00 -0.00 -0.00 B -0.14 0.00 0.99 0.00 -0.00 -0.00 W2 T 0.46 -3.20 -0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 B 0.46 -3.17 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 7 D T 3.82 1.06 0.96 -0.12 -0.11 -0.00 B 3.82 -0.54 -0.50 -0.12 -0.11 -0.00 Lp T 1.81 0.45 0.40 -0.04 -0.04 -0.00 B 1.81 -0.15 -0.13 -0.04 -0.04 -0.00 W1 T 0.14 0.00 1.00 -0.00 -0.00 -0.00 B 0.14 -0.00 0.99 -0.00 -0.00 -0.00 W2 T -0.46 -3.20 0.00 0.00 -0.00 0.00 n2v Member Force Summary RAM Frame v 11.0 Page 2/4 Brian Abel "IITEITRDataBase: Fleet Gate House - Model 06/01/07 10:56:12 Building Code: IBC # LoadC @ P Mmajor Mminor Vmajor Vminor Tors B -0.46 -3.17 -0.00 0.00 -0.00 0.00 8 D T 2.57 -1.08 0.98 0.12 -0.11 -0.00 B 2.57 0.55 -0.52 0.12 -0.11 -0.00 Lp T 0.99 -0.47 0.42 0.05 -0.04 -0.00 B 0.99 0.15 -0.14 0.05 -0.04 -0.00 W 1 T 0.14 0.00 1.00 -0.00 -0.00 -0.00 B 0.14 -0.00 0.99 -0.00 -0.00 -0.00 W2 T 0.46 -3.20 -0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 B 0.46 -3.17 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 Steel Beam: # LoadC @ P Mmajor Mminor Vmajor Vminor Tors kips kip-ft kip-ft kips kips kip-ft 1 D i 0.00 -0.93 -0.00 0.55 -0.00 -0.00 j 0.00 -0.90 -0.00 -0.54 -0.00 -0.00 Lp i 0.00 -0.40 -0.00 0.23 -0.00 -0.00 j 0.00 -0.38 -0.00 -0.23 -0.00 -0.00 W 1 i 0.00 0.00 0.00 -0.00 -0.00 0.00 j 0.00 -0.00 -0.00 -0.00 -0.00 0.00 W2 i 0.00 3.04 0.00 -0.46 0.00 -0.00 j 0.00 -3.04 0.00 -0.46 0.00 -0.00 2 D i 0.00 -0.90 -0.00 0.54 -0.00 -0.00 j 0.00 -0.93 -0.00 -0.55 -0.00 -0.00 Lp i 0.00 -0.38 -0.00 0.23 -0.00 -0.00 j 0.00 -0.40 -0.00 -0.23 -0.00 -0.00 W 1 i 0.00 -0.00 0.00 0.00 -0.00 0.00 j 0.00 0.00 -0.00 0.00 -0.00 0.00 W2 i -0.00 3.04 0.00 -0.46 0.00 -0.00 j -0.00 -3.04 0.00 -0.46 0.00 -0.00 3 D i 0.00 -0.87 -0.00 0.55 -0.00 0.00 j 0.00 -0.84 -0.00 -0.55 -0.00 0.00 Lp i 0.00 -0.37 -0.00 0.24 -0.00 0.00 j 0.00 -0.35 -0.00 -0.23 -0.00 0.00 W 1 i -0.00 0.97 -0.00 -0.14 0.00 0.00 j -0.00 -0.97 -0.00 -0.14 0.00 0.00 W2 i 0.00 0.00 0.00 -0.00 0.00 -0.00 j 0.00 -0.00 0.00 -0.00 0.00 -0.00 4 D i 0.00 -0.84 -0.00 0.55 -0.00 0.00 j 0.00 -0.87 -0.00 -0.55 -0.00 0.00 Lp i 0.00 -0.35 -0.00 0.23 -0.00 0.00 j 0.00 -0.37 -0.00 -0.24 -0.00 0.00( ► Summary RAM Frame v11.0 Member Force Page 3/ Brian Abel RA M DataBase: Fleet Gate House - Model 06/01/07 10:56:12 IIJ�ERNATK�NAL Building Code: IBC # LoadC @ P Mmajor Mminor Vmajor Vminor Tors W 1 i 0.00 0.97 -0.00 -0.14 0.00 0.00 j 0.00 -0.97 -0.00 -0.14 0.00 0.00 W2 i 0.00 -0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 -0.00 j 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 -0.00 Level: Mid Level Steel Column: # LoadC @ P Mmajor Mminor Vmajor Vminor Tors kips kip-ft kip-ft kips kips kip-ft 5 D T 3.58 0.06 -0.09 -0.01 0.01 -0.00 B 3.58 -0.03 0.04 -0.01 0.01 -0.00 Lp T 1.00 -0.13 0.11 0.02 -0.02 -0.00 B 1.00 0.07 -0.06 0.02 -0.02 -0.00 W 1 T -0.93 -0.00 6.09 0.00 -1.75 -0.00 B -0.93 0.00 -10.13 0.00 -1.75 -0.00 W2 T -2.22 -14.38 0.00 4.61 -0.00 0.00 B -2.22 28.23 -0.00 4.61 -0.00 0.00 6 D T 4.83 -0.06 -0.08 0.01 0.01 -0.00 B 4.83 0.03 0.04 0.01 0.01 -0.00 Lp T 1.80 0.13 0.11 -0.02 -0.02 -0.00 B 1.80 -0.07 -0.06 -0.02 -0.02 -0.00 W1 T -0.93 -0.00 6.09 0.00 -1.75 -0.00 B -0.93 0.00 -10.13 0.00 -1.75 -0.00 W2 T 2.22 -14.38 -0.00 4.61 0.00 0.00 B 2.22 28.23 0.00 4.61 0.00 0.00 7 D T 4.83 0.06 0.08 -0.01 -0.01 -0.00 B 4.83 -0.03 -0.04 -0.01 -0.01 -0.00 Lp T 1.80 -0.13 -0.11 0.02 0.02 -0.00 B 1.80 0.07 0.06 0.02 0.02 -0.00 W 1 T 0.93 0.00 6.09 -0.00 -1.75 -0.00 B 0.93 -0.00 -10.13 -0.00 -1.75 -0.00 W2 T -2.22 -14.38 0.00 4.61 -0.00 0.00 B -2.22 28.23 -0.00 4.61 -0.00 0.00 8 D T 3.58 -0.06 0.09 0.01 -0.01 -0.00 B 3.58 0.03 -0.04 0.01 -0.01 -0.00 Lp T 1.00 0.13 -0.11 -0.02 0.02 -0.00 B 1.00 -0.07 0.06 -0.02 0.02 -0.00 W 1 T 0.93 0.00 6.09 -0.00 -1.75 -0.00 B 0.93 -0.00 -10.13 -0.00 -1.75 -0.00 W2 T 2.22 -14.38 -0.00 4.61 0.00 0.00 B 2.22 28.23 0.00 4.61 0.00 0.00�� t �--�/ Member Force Summary RAM Frame v 11.0 Page 4/z Brian Abel RAM DataBase: Fleet Gate House - Model 06/01/07 10:56:1 q"^ Building Code: IBC Steel Beam: # LoadC @ P Mmajor Mminor Vmajor Vminor Tors kips kip-ft kip-ft kips kips kip-ft 1 D i 0.00 -0.56 -0.00 0.27 0.00 -0.00 j 0.00 -0.54 -0.00 -0.26 0.00 -0.00 Lp i 0.00 -0.03 -0.00 0.00 -0.00 -0.00 j 0.00 -0.02 -0.00 0.00 -0.00 -0.00 W 1 i 0.00 0.00 0.00 -0.00 -0.00 0.00 j 0.00 -0.00 -0.00 -0.00 -0.00 0.00 W2 i 0.00 11.77 0.00 -1.77 0.00 -0.00 j 0.00 -11.77 0.00 -1.77 0.00 -0.00 2 D i 0.00 -0.54 -0.00 0.26 0.00 -0.00 j 0.00 -0.56 -0.00 -0.27 0.00 -0.00 Lp i 0.00 -0.02 -0.00 -0.00 -0.00 -0.00 j 0.00 -0.03 -0.00 -0.00 -0.00 -0.00 W 1 i 0.00 -0.00 0.00 0.00 -0.00 0.00 j 0.00 0.00 -0.00 0.00 -0.00 0.00 W2 i 0.00 11.77 0.00 -1.77 0.00 -0.00 j 0.00 -11.77 0.00 -1.77 0.00 -0.00 3 D i 0.00 -0.57 -0.00 0.27 0.00 0.00 j 0.00 -0.55 -0.00 -0.27 0.00 0.00 Lp i 0.00 -0.04 -0.00 0.00 -0.00 0.00 j 0.00 -0.03 -0.00 0.00 -0.00 0.00 W 1 i -0.00 5.34 -0.00 -0.79 0.00 0.00 j -0.00 -5.34 -0.00 -0.79 0.00 0.00 W2 i 0.00 0.00 0.00 -0.00 0.00 -0.00 j 0.00 -0.00 0.00 -0.00 0.00 -0.00 4 D i 0.00 -0,55 -0.00 0.27 0.00 0.00 j 0.00 -0.57 -0.00 -0.27 0.00 0.00 Lp i 0.00 -0.03 -0.00 -0.00 -0.00 0.00 j 0.00 -0.04 -0.00 -0.00 -0.00 0.00 W 1 i -0.00 5.34 -0.00 -0.79 0.00 0.00 j -0.00 -5.34 -0.00 -0.79 0.00 0.00 W2 i 0.00 -0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 -0.00 j 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 -0.00 24 0 2001 North American Specification Project: Date: 6/11/2007 Model: 57.6 Unif Ld Ib/ft R1 R2 9.50 ft Section : 60OS200-54 Single C Stud (X-X Axis) Fy= 50.0 ksi Maxo= 2533.9 Ft-Lb Moment of Inertia, 1= 3.319 in^4 Va= 2822.9 Ib Loads have not been modified for strength checks Loads have not been modified for deflection calculations Flexural and Deflection Check Mmax Mmax/ Mpos Bracing Ma(Brc) Mpos/ Deflection Span Ft-Lb Maxo Ft-Lb (in) Ft-Lb Ma(Brc) (in) Ratio Center Span 649.8 0.256 649.8 Full 2533.9 0.256 0.108 L/1057 Combined Bending and Web Crippling Reaction or Load Brng Pa Mmax Intr. Stiffen Pt Load P(lb) (in) (lb) (Ft-Lb) Value Req'd? R1 273.6 1.00 598.9 0.0 0.55 No R2 273.6 1.00 598.9 0.0 0.55 No Combined Bending and Shear Reaction or Vmax Mmax Va Intr. Intr. Pt Load (lb) (Ft-Lb) Factor V/Va M/Ma Unstiffen Stiffen R1 273.6 0.0 1.00 0.10 0.00 0.01 NA R2 273.6 0.0 1.00 0.10 0.00 0.01 NA Florida Energy Efficiency Code For Building Construction Florida Department of Community Affairs EnergyGauge FLA/COM 2004 v3.00 -- Form 40OA-2004 Method A: Whole Building Performance Method for Commercial Buildings Effective December 8, 2006 PROJECT SUMMARY Short Desc: Fleet Landing Description: Fleet Landing Gatehouse Owner: Addressl: 1 Fleet Landing City: Atlantic Beach Address2: State: FL Zip: 32233 Type: Office Class: New Finished building Jurisdiction: ATLANTIC BEACH,DUVAL COUNTY,FL(261100) Cond Area: 327 SF Cond&UnCond Area: 327 SF No of Storeys: 1 Area entered from Plans 0 SF Permit No: 0 Max Tonnage 3 If different,write in: 8/9/2007 EnergyGauge FLA/COM 2004 v3.00 In AUG 10 2001 BY�--- ----------- Compliance Summary Component Design Criteria Result Gross Energy Use 529.6 664.6 PASSES LIGHTING CONTROLS PASSES EXTERNAL LIGHTING PASSES HVAC SYSTEM PASSES PLANT None Entered WATER HEATING SYSTEMS PASSES PIPING SYSTEMS PASSES Met all required compliance from Check List? Yes/No/NA IMPORTANT NOTE:An input report of this design building must be submitted along with this Compliance Report. 8/9/2007 EnergyGauge FLA/COM 2004 v3.00 2 CERTIFICATIONS 1 hereby certify that the plans and specifications covered by this calculation are in compliance with the Florida Energy Code Prepared By: Cr�c.r �O"N","�'� ing Official: Date: 8• �' �� Date: 1 certify that this building is in compliance with the FLorida Energy Efficiency Code Owner Agent: Date: If Required by Florida law, I hereby certify(`)that the system design is in compliance with the FLorida Energy Efficiency Code Architect: Michael Hull Reg No: AR91762 Electrical Designer: Dave Simes Reg No: 51249 Lighting Designer: Dave Simes Reg No: 51249 Mechanical Designer: Caren Doherty Reg No: 55021 Plumbing Designer: Caren Doherty Reg No: 55021 (*) Signature is required where Florida Law requires design to be performed by registered design professionals. Typed names and registration numbers may be used where all relevant information is contained on signed/sealed plans. 8/9/2007 EnergyGauge FLA/COM 2004 v3.00 3 Project:Fleet Landing Title: Fleet Landing Gatehouse Type:Office (WEA File:JACKSON"LLE.TMI) Whole Building Compliance Design Reference Total 80.18 100.00 $530 $665 ELECTRICITY(MB A 80.18 100.00 Wh/$) 10529 13160 $530 $665 AREA LIGHTS 6.46 9.35 848 1229 $43 $62 MISC EQUIPMT 2.90 2.90 378 378 $19 $19 PUMPS&MISC 15.59 15.59 2040 2045 $103 $103 SPACE COOL 21.83 30.73 2870 4055 $144 $205 SPACE HEAT 13.14 16.93 1724 2221 $87 $112 VENT FANS 20.27 24.50 2669 3232 $134 $163 Credits & Penalties (if any): Modified Points: =80.18 �PAS ES 8/9/2007 EnergyGauge FLA/COM 2004 v3.00 4 Project: Fleet Landing Title: Fleet Landing Gatehouse Type:Office (WEA File:JACKSONVILLE.TMY) External Lighting Compliance Description Category Allowance Area or Length ELPA CLP (W/Unit) or No.of Units (W) (W) (Sgft or ft) Ext Light 2 Main entries 30.00 13.5 405 42 Design: 252 (W) PASSES —� Allowance: 405 (W) Project: Fleet Landing Title: Fleet Landing Gatehouse Type: Office (WEA File:JACKSONVILLE.TMY) Lighting Controls Compliance Acronym Ashrae Description Area No.of Design Min Compli- ID (sq.ft) Tasks CP CP ance lobby 12 Lobby(General)-Reception and 163 1 1 1 PASSES Waiting workstation ,001 Post Office Sorting Area 41 1 1 1 PASSES kitchen 7 Food Service-Kitchen 68 1 1 1 PASSES toilet 6 Toilet and Washroom 41 1 1 1 PASSES mech 1 Electrical Mechanical Equipment 15 1 1 1 PASSES Room-General PASSES Project: Fleet Landing Title:Fleet Landing Gatehouse Type:Office (WEA File:JACKSONVILLE.TMY) System Report Compliance ghpl System 1 Water Loop System No.of Units 1 Component Category Capacity Design Eff Design IPLV Comp- Eff Criteria IPLV Criteria liance Cooling System Water Source> 17000 Btu/h 17.00 12.00 PASSES Heating System Water Source 5.00 4.20 PASSES Air Handling Air Handler(Supply)- 0.80 0.90 PASSES System-Supply Constant Volume PASSES 8/9/2007 EnergyGauge FLA/COM 2004 v3.00 5 Plant Compliance Description Installed Size Design Min Design Min Category Comp No Eff Eff IPLV IPLV Hance None ,Project: Fleet Landing Title: Fleet Landing Gatehouse Type: Office (WEA File:JACKSONVILLE.TMY) Water Heater Compliance Design Min Design Max Comp Description Type Category Eff Eff Loss Loss Hance Water Heater I Electric water heater r— 12[kW] 95.00 0.93 PASSES PASSES Project: Fleet Landing Title:Fleet Landing Gatehouse Type: Office (WEA File:JACKSONVILLE.TMY) Piping System Compliance Category Pipe Dia Is Operating Ins Cond Ins Req Ins Compliance [inches] Runout? Temp [Btu-in/hr Thick[in] Thick[in] [F] .SF.F] Domestic and Service Hot Water 0.75 False 120.00 0.28 0.75 0.50 PASSES Systems PASSES 8/9/2007 EnergyGauge FLA/COM 2004 v3.00 6 Project: Fleet Landing Title: Fleet Landing Gatehouse Type:Office (WEA File:JACKSONVILLE.TMY) Other Required Compliance Category Section Requirement(write N/A in box if not applicable) Check Infiltration 406.1 Infiltration Criteria have been met System 407.1 HVAC Load sizing has been performed d Ventilation 409.1 Ventilation criteria have been met ADS 410.1 Duct sizing and Design have been performed T&B 410.1 Testing and Balancing will be performed Motors 414.1 Motor efficiency criteria have been met Lighting 415.1 Lighting criteria have been met O&M 102.1 Operation/maintenance manual will be provided to owner Roof/Ceil 404.1 R-19 for Roof Deck with supply plenums beneath it d Report 101 Input Report Print-Out from EnergyGauge FlaCom attached? 8/9/2007 EnergyGauge FLA/COM 2004 v3.00 7 Florida Energy Efficiency Code For Building Construction Florida Department of Community Affairs EnergyGauge FLA/COM 2004 v3.00 -- Form 40OB-2004 Method B: Envelope Trade-Off Compliance for Commercial Buildings Effective December 8, 2006 PROJECT SUMMARY Short Desc: Fleet Landing Description: Fleet Landing Gatehouse Owner: Addressl: I Fleet Landing City: Atlantic Beach Address2: State: FL Zip: 32233 Type: Office Class: New Finished building Jurisdiction: ATLANTIC BEACH, DUVAL COUNTY,FL(261100) Cond Area: 327 SF Cond&UnCond Area: 327 SF No of Storeys: 1 Area entered from Plans 0 SF Permit No: 0 Max Tonnage 3 If different,write in: 8/9/2007 EnergyGauge FLA/COM 2004 v3.00 1 Compliance Summary Component Design Criteria Result ENVELOPE 57.3 62.2 PASSES LIGHTING POWER 277.0 401.2 PASSES LIGHTING CONTROLS PASSES EXTERNAL LIGHTING PASSES HVAC SYSTEM PASSES PLANT None Entered WATER HEATING SYSTEMS PASSES PIPING SYSTEMS PASSES Met all required compliance from Check List? Yes/No/NA IMPORTANT NOTE:An input report of this design building must be submitted along with this Compliance Report. 8/9/2007 EnergyGauge FLA/COM 2004 v3.00 2 CERTIFICATIONS 1 hereby certify that the plans and specifications covered by this calculation are in compliance with the Florida Energy Code / Prepared By: Building Official: l Date: Date: ' O _ Date: I certify that this building is in compliance with the FLorida Energy Efficiency Code Owner Agent: Date: If Required by Florida law, I hereby certify(*)that the system design is in compliance with the FLorida Energy Efficiency Code Architect: Michael Hull Reg No: AR91762 Electrical Designer: Dave Simes Reg No: 51249 Lighting Designer: Dave Simes Reg No: 51249 Mechanical Designer: Caren Doherty Reg No: 55021 Plumbing Designer: Caren Doherty Reg No: 55021 (*) Signature is required where Florida Law requires design to be performed by registered design professionals. Typed names and registration numbers may be used where all relevant information is contained on signed/sealed plans. Project: Fleet Landing Title: Fleet Landing Gatehouse Type:Office (WEA File:JACKSONVILLE.TM ) Envelope Compliance Design Load Criteria Zone Heating Cooling Heating Cooling Building 31.50 25.80 35.40 26.80 Total Loads: Design=57.3 Criteria=62.2 PASSES 8/9/2007 EnergyGauge FLA/COM 2004 v3.00 3 Project: Fleet Landing Title:Fleet Landing Gatehouse Type: Office (WEA File:JACKSONMLE.T" External Lighting Compliance Description Category Allowance Area or Length ELPA CLP (W/Unit) or No.of Units (W) (W) (Sgft or ft) Ext Light 2 Main entries 30.00 13.5 405 42 Design: 252 (W) �— PASSES Allowance: 405 (W) Project: Fleet Landing Title: Fleet Landing Gatehouse Type: Office (WEA File:JACKSONMLE.TMY Lighting Power Compliance Space Ashrae Description Area Height No.of Design Effective Allowance ID (sq.ft) (ft) Spaces (w) (W) (W) lobby 12 Lobby(General)-Reception 163 10.5 1 525 75 211 and Waiting workstation23,00 Post Office Sorting Area 41 9.5 1 150 75 49 kitchen 7 Food Service-Kitchen 68 7.8 1 150 75 82 toilet 6 Toilet and Washroom 41 9.5 1 30 30 37 mech I Electrical Mechanical 15 13.0 1 22 22 22 Equipment Room-General Design 877 (W) PASSES Effective: 277 (W) Allowance: 401.21 (W) 8/9/2007 EnergyGauge FLA/COM 2004 v3.00 4 Project: Fleet Landing Title:Fleet Landing Gatehouse Type:Office (WEA File:JACKSONVILLE.TMY) Lighting Controls Compliance Acronym Ashrae Description Area No.of Design Min Compli- ID (sq.ft) Tasks CP CP ance lobby 12 Lobby(General)-Reception and 163 1 1 1 PASSES Waiting workstation ,001 Post Office Sorting Area 41 1 1 1 PASSES kitchen 7 Food Service-Kitchen 68 1 1 1 PASSES toilet 6 Toilet and Washroom 41 1 1 1 PASSES mech 1 Electrical Mechanical Equipment 15 1 1 1 PASSES Room-General PASSES Project: Fleet Landing Title:Fleet Landing Gatehouse Type: Office (WEA File:JACKSONVILLE.TMY) System Report Compliance ghpl System 1 Water Loop System No.of Units 1 Component Category Capacity Design Eff Design IPLV Comp- Eff Criteria IPLV Criteria liance Cooling System Water Source> 17000 Btu/h 17.00 12.00 PASSES Heating System Water Source 5.00 4.20 PASSES Air Handling Air Handler(Supply)- 0.80 0.90 PASSES System-Supply Constant Volume PASSES Plant Compliance Description Installed Size Design Min Design Min Category Comp No Eff Eff IPLV IPLV liance None 8/9/2007 EnergyGauge FLA/COM 2004 v3.00 5 Project: Fleet Landing Title: Fleet Landing Gatehouse Type: Office (WEA File:JACKSONVILLE.TMY) Water Heater Compliance Description Type Category sign Min Design Max Comp Eff Eff Loss Loss liance Water Heater 1 Electric water heater <= 12 [kW] 95.00 0.93 PASSES PASSES Project: Fleet Landing Title: Fleet Landing Gatehouse Type: Office (WEA File:JACKSONVILLE.TMY) Piping System Compliance Category Pipe Dia Is Operating Ins Cond Ins Req Ins Compliance [inches] Runout? Temp [Btu-in/hr Thick[in] Thick[in] [F] .SF.F] Domestic and Service Hot Water 0.75 False 120.00 0.28 0.75 0.50 PASSES Systems �— PASSES —� 8/9/2007 EnergyGauge FLA/COM 2004 v3.00 6 Project: Fleet Landing Title: Fleet Landing Gatehouse Type: Office (WEA File:JACKSONVILLE.TMY) Other Required Compliance Category Section Requirement(write N/A in box if not applicable) Check Infiltration 406.1 Infiltration Criteria have been met System 407.1 HVAC Load sizing has been performed Ventilation 409.1 Ventilation criteria have been met d ADS 410.1 Duct sizing and Design have been performed d T&B 410.1 Testing and Balancing will be performed Motors 414.1 Motor efficiency criteria have been met Lighting 415.1 Lighting criteria have been met O&M 102.1 Operation/maintenance manual will be provided to owner RooFCeil 404.1 R-19 for Roof Deck with supply plenums beneath it Report 101 Input Report Print-Out from EnergyGauge FlaCom attached? 8/9/2007 EnergyGauge FLA/COM 2004 v3.00 7 EnergyGauge FLAXOM 2004 v3.00 INPUT DATA REPORT Proiectnform�ation Project Name: Fleet Landing Orientation: North Project Title: Fleet Landing Gatehouse Building Type: Office Address: l Fleet Landing Building Classification: New Finished building State: FL No.of Storeys: l Zip: 32233 GrossArea: 327 SF Owner: Zones No Acronym Description Type Area Multiplier Total Area lsfl lsfl I gatehouse Zone I CONDITIONED 327.3 1 327.3 ❑ Spaces No Acronym Description Type Depth Width Height Multi Total Area Total Volume lftl lftl lftl plier lsfl lcfl EnergyGauge FLAXOM 2004 v3.00 1 In Zone: gatehouse 1 lobby ZoOSp 1 Lobby(General)-Reception 12.50 13.00 10.50 1 162.5 1706.3 and Waiting 2 workstation Zo0Sp1 Post Office Sorting Area 4.30 9.50 9.50 1 40.9 388.1 3 kitchen Zo0Sp1 Food Service-Kitchen 10.50 6.50 7.75 1 68.3 528.9 4 toilet Zo0Sp1 Toilet and Washroom 4.30 9.50 9.50 1 40.9 388.1 5 mech ZoOSp 1 Electrical Mechanical 3.30 4.50 13.00 1 14.9 193.1 Equipment Room-General Lighting No Type Category No.of Watts per Power Control Type No.of Luminaires Luminaire [W] Ctrl pts In Zone: gatehouse In Space: lobby 1 Recessed Fluorescent- Lighting for medical 3 150 450 Manual On/Off 1 No vent procedures/equipment 2 Recessed Fluorescent- General Lighting 1 75 75 Manual On/Off 1 No vent In Space: workstation 1 Recessed Fluorescent- Lighting for medical 1 75 75 Manual On/Off 1 El No vent procedures/equipment 2 Recessed Fluorescent- General Lighting 1 75 75 Manual On/Off 1 El No vent In Space: kitchen 1 Recessed Fluorescent- Lighting in Food 1 75 75 Manual On/Off 1 El No vent warming/prep Equipment 2 Recessed Fluorescent- General Lighting 1 75 75 Manual On/Off 1 El No vent In Space: toilet 1 Recessed Fluorescent- General Lighting 1 30 30 Manual On/Off 1 El No vent In Space: mech 1 Recessed Fluorescent- General Lighting 1 22 22 Manual On/Off 1 No vent 8/9/2007 EnergyGauge FLA/COM 2004 v3.00 2 Walls No Description Type Width H(Effec) Multi Area DirectionConductance Heat Dens. R-Value IN [ft] plier [sf] (Btulhr.sf.F] Capacity [lb/cf] [h.sf.F/Btu] [Btu/sf.F] In Zone: gatehouse 1 PrOZo1Wal 1 in. stucco,5 in. 29.00 10.50 1 304.5 North 0.0730 1.045 13.34 13.7 ❑ insul,0.75 in. gypsum 2 PrOZo 1 Wal 1 in. stucco, 5 in. 29.00 10.50 1 304.5 South 0.0730 1.045 13.34 13.7 ❑ insul,0.75 in. gypsum 3 PrOZoIWa3 1 in. stucco, 5 in. 7.75 9.50 1 73.6 West 0.0730 1.045 13.34 13.7 ❑ insul,0.75 in. gypsum 4 PrOZo1Wa3 1 in. stucco, 5 in. 10.75 10.50 1 112.9 East 0.0730 1.045 13.34 13.7 ❑ insul,0.75 in. gypsum Windows No Description Type Shaded U SHGC Vis.Tra W H(Effec) Multi Total Area [Btu/hr sf F] IN [ft] plier [sf] In Zone: gatehouse In Wall: northl 1 PrOZol Wal Wit User Defined No 0.6000 0.42 0.39 6.50 6.75 1 43.9 ❑ 2 PrOZolWalWil User Defined No 0.6000 0.42 0.39 2.00 3.00 1 6.0 ❑ In Wall: south 3 PrOZo 1 Wal Wit User Defined No 0.6000 0.42 0.39 6.50 6.75 1 43.9 n 4 PrOZolWalWil User Defined No 0.6000 0.42 0.39 2.00 3.00 1 6.0 LH In all: west 1 PrOZolWa3Wil User Defined No 0.6000 0.42 0.39 2.00 3.00 3 18.0 ❑ 8/9/2007 EnergyGauge FLA/COM 2004 v3.00 3 Doors No Description Type Shaded? Width H(Effec) Multi Area Cond. Dens. Heat Cap. R-Value IN [ft] plier [sf] [Btu/hr.sf.F] [lb/cf] [Btu/sf.F] [h.sf.FBtu] In Zone: In Wall: Roofs No Description Type Width H(Effec) Multi Area Tilt Cond. Heat Cap Dens. R-Value [ft] IN plier [sf] [deg] [Btu/hr.SE F] [Btu/sf.F] [lb/cf] [h.sf.FBtu] In Zone: gatehouse 1 PrOZolRfl Conc Tile/l/2"WD 22.00 8.00 1 176.0 27.00 0.0445 1.20 10.82 22.5 ❑ Deck/WD Truss/9"Batt/Gyp 2 PrOZo1Rfl Conc Tile/l/2"W13 22.00 8.00 1 176.0 27.00 0.0445 1.20 10.82 22.5 ❑ Deck/WD Truss/9"Batt/Gyp 3 PrOZo 1 Rfl Conc Tile/1/2"WD 22.00 8.00 1 176.0 27.00 0.0445 1.20 10.82 22.5 ❑ Deck/WD Truss/9"Batt/Gyp 4 PrOZolRfl Conc Tile/l/2"WD 22.00 8.00 1 176.0 27.00 0.0445 1.20 10.82 22.5 ❑ Deck/WD Truss/9"Batt/Gyp Skylights No Description Type U SHGC Vis.Trans W H(Effec) Multiplier Area Total Area [Btu/hr sf F] IN IN [Sf] [Sf) In Zone: In Roof: 8/9/2007 EnergyGauge FLA/COM 2004 Q.00 4 Floors No Description Type Width H(Effec) Multi Area Cond. Heat Cap. Dens. R-Value [ft] [ft] plier [sf[ [Btu/hr.sf.Fj [Btu/sf.F] [lb/cf[ [h.sf.FBtuj In Zone; gatehouse 1 Pr4Zo1F11 1 ft.soil,concrete 11.00 32.00 1 352.0 4.1745 54.04 108,00 5.73 ❑ floor,carpet and rubber pati Systems ghpl System 1 Water Loop System No.Of Units 1 Component Category Capacity Efficiency IPLV 1 Cooling System(Water Source> 17000 Btu/h) 35780.00 17.00 ❑ 2 Heating System(Water Source) 24570.00 5.00 ❑ 3 Air Handling System-Supply(Air Handler(Supply)- 1200.00 0.80 ❑ Constant Volume) Plant Equipment Category Size Inst.No Ef€. IPLV El 11 Water Heaters W-Heater Description Capacit3Cap.Unit Up Rt. Efficiency Loss I Electric water heater [Gal] 4 [kW] 95.0004 [Efj [Btu/h] ❑ EnergyGauge FLA/COM 2004 v3.00 5 Ext-Lighting Description Category No.of Watts per Area/Len/No.of units Control Type Wattage Luminaires Luminaire [sVfVNo] [w] 1 Ext Light 2 Main entries 6 42 13.50 Photo Sensor control 252.00 ❑ Piping No Type Operating Insulation Nomonal pipe Insulation Is Runout? Temperature Conductivity Diameter Thickness [F] [Btu-in/h.sf.F] [in[ [in[ 1 Domestic and Service Hot Water Systems 120.00 0.28 0.75 0.75 No ❑ Fenestration Used Name Glass Type No.of Glass SHGC VLT Panes Conductance [Btu/h.sf.F] ASHULDb1TntW User Defined 2 0.6000 0.4200 0.3900 ❑ d-Vy-Fg f n Materials Used Mat No Acronym Description Only R-Value RValue Thickness Conductivity Density SpecificHeat Used [h.sLF/Btu[ [ft] [Btu/h.ft.Fj pb/cfj [Btuflb.F[ 187 Mat1187 GYP OR PLAS No 0.4533 0.0417 0.0920 50.00 0.2000 ❑ BOARD,1/21N 178 Mat1178 CARPET W/RUBBER PAD Yes 1.2300 ❑ 265 Mat1265 Soil, I ft No 2.0000 1.0000 0.5000 100.00 0.2000 0 EnergyGauge FLA/COM 2004 v3.00 6 1�10 C) 0 uj A 'p a, C) �K t6 logs- lei tj % IPA 19 19 Simple Massless Conductance Heat Capacity Density RValue No Name Construct Construct [Btu/h.sf.F] [Btu/sf.F] [lb/cf[ [h.sf.FBtu] 1060 1 in.stucco, 5 in. insul,0.75 in.gypsum No No 0.07 1.05 13.34 13.7 ❑ Layer Material Material Thickness Framing No. [ft] Factor 1 2 1 in. Stucco 0.0833 0.000 ❑ 2 2 1 in. Stucco 0.0833 0.000 ❑ 3 1001 POLYURETHANE,EXP.,21N, 0.1667 0.000 ❑ 4 187 GYP OR PLAS BOARD,1/21N 0.0417 0.000 ❑ 8/9/2007 EnergyGauge FLA/COM 2004 v3.00 8 LETTER OF TRANSMITTAL -RPG= General Contractors, Inc. 248 LEVY ROAD / P.O. Box 330775 ATLANTIC BEAU, fLORIDA 32233 (904) 241-4416 /fAX (904) 241-4427 COMPANY: City of Atlantic Beach ATTENTION: Shirley Graham ADDRESS: 1200 Sandpiper Lane DATE: April 12,2007 REFERENCE/JOB: The Palms @ Fleet Landing CITY/STATE/ZIP: Atlantic Beach,FL 32233 #050179 WE ARE SENDING YOU: ® ATTACHED ❑UNDER SEPARATE COVER VIA Hand Delivered THE FOLLOWING ITEMS: ❑SHOP DRAWINGS ❑PLANS ❑SAMPLES ❑SPECIFICATIONS ❑COPY OF LETTER ❑CHANGE ORDER ❑ OTHER COPIES DATE No. DESCRIPTION Zea. Product Approval for roof tile underlayment,EIFS.Roof Tiles, Aluminum Windows and Sliding Glass Doors 2ea. Energy Calculations 2ea. Structural Calculations I Permit Application 5sets Plans and specifications(2 signed and sealed) THESE ARE TRANSMITTED AS CHECKED BELOW: ® FOR APPROVAL ❑APPROVED AS SUBMITTED ❑RESUBMIT COPIES FOR APPROVAL ® FOR YOUR USE ❑APPROVED ❑SUBMIT COPIES FOR DISTRIBUTION ❑ AS REQUESTED ❑RETURN CORRECTED PRINTS ❑ FOR REVIEW AND COMMENT Remarks. SIGNED: BeyePly Jones Contract Administrator Copy to File. NOTICE OF COMMENCEMENT State of Fe !P F4 Tax Folio No. County of Qt4ya ( f To Whom It May Concern: The undersigned hereby informs you that improvements will be made to certain real property, and in accordance with Section 713 of the Florida Statutes,the following information is stated in this NOTICE OF COMMENCEMENT. Legal Description of property being improved: d&-.9/ Ig Address of property being improved: (WE- /'Z-&&-r Z-A-Albw& &Di General description of improvements: 1:)&-7s1P L—X 1 Si/,V('y ✓iqc. ' vA17"irviceievh Owner: 1,:::: C)/6114 r=L.t--err {((7 Address: ®,167f-LEe-r 64ND/HF' 6//D Owner's interest in site of the improvement: Fee Simple Titleholder(if other than owner): Name: Contractor: k.Pc- Goy i-rux C:.O,i1 ✓PC T(25 -ale-� Address: ,A4/9 L� /5'� lT�i3;eJTlH 33 Telephone No.: 3oq/' .;4/- 4'/� Fax No: Surety(if any) ZI R Address: Amount of Bond$ Telephone No: Fax No: Name and address of any person making a loan for the construction of the improvements Name: Address: Phone No: Fax No: Name of person within the State of Florida, other than himself, designated by owner upon whom notices or other documents may be served: Name: 906,6:2 '-4 e,�=lt-m e-f Address:09) 1�2 c%y" Z-4-ND e/v(r Z/Vz;) 19 Z-A:�IC. 46 Telephone No: Fax No: In addition to himself, owner designates the following person to receive a copy of the Lienor's Notice as provided in Section 713.06(2)(b),Florida Statues. (Fill in at Owner's option) Name: Address: Telephone No: Fax No: Expiration date of Notice of Commencement(the expiration date is one (1)year from the date of recording unless a different date is specified): (� THIS SPACE FOR RECORDER'S USE ONLY OWNER , / Signed: `' Date: Before me the / ra /"�ZIF/G1S1r u^7 in the County of Duval,State Doc#2007260554,OR BK 14134 Page 891, Df Florida,has rsonalld}ti/ lfYl Sc 2y�Number Pages:1 �lotay Public at arge,Srida,Con of Duval. Filed&Recorded 08/13/2007 at 02:25 PM, VIy commission expires: JIM FULLER CLERK CIRCUIT COURT DUVAL COUNTY Personally Known: O bfBeverly O or RECORDING$10.00 Produced Identification: z° �n jon#DD N9r � Expires September 3, F pF F Banded Troy Fain.insuraneo,Inc.SDD•3E5.7019 BUILDING PERMIT APPLICATION j CITY OF ATLANTIC BEACH ^ 800 Seminole Road,Atlantic Beach FL 32233 JRl �i Office: (904)247-5826 • Fax: (904)247-5845 �y� lq,, Job Address: DA '� �1 JInq 61Y/D, , r-ZI,/,0y2%ell. 6r4J-6� Permit Number: Le al Description /� �AA3°' Cr'-7 E 14w"DE'h' l✓r�51i�cZiio� �7,� �� ri�� /��c- ir✓ 5#1P z :504,r7y, ry 6,01- t,Csb�vr7ilz% awl 4d,�t�✓rte Co.{�v,e��.4 � Valuation of Work(Replacement Cost) $ o4e>66 ■ Class of Work(Circle one): Addition Alteratio Repair Move CusL ■ Use of existing/proposed structures (Circle one): ommercia Residential C7 ■ If an existing structure, is a fire sprinkler system installed? ( irc a one): Yes No ■ Is approval of homeowner's association or other private entity required? (Circle one): YesNo Describe in detail the type of work to be performed: T mC) Gxlsiik(-,,'5 c,ee Property Owner Information � �uivDr�-Heti'; �i� l L��rl�ni7ji�v<r Name: A-YA- -(-v i Nu n Nc`r 6 -r"-;Qress:-0,uc t"c r-`-AWbl A161 41 y D. City brLaua State Zip "Phone Contractor Information: Name of Company:/1 PC ��-n/c +� (�oky-,gfif "Qualifying Agent:� ov,2 141-14;-5Address:o'ZWS'4t .Vy k; City�iC��Jr/� , # State /C Zip 30�� Office Phone— !�0 U� Lll-golf o Job Site/Contact Number ?eV-,21-Y-5-5-32- State D -,2/ -5'3ZState Certification/Registration# C'(ACU 066' Office Fax Architect Name &Phone# , oe cam- � t c f . G/ m8��ri✓ � `7 1— 3- �`� Engineer's Name & Phone# � �o,c�c`�i i mfr %Fi�,v��2S /© �1-�Se" -go 84 Application is hereby made to obtain a permit to do the work and installations as indicated. I certify that no work or installation has commenced prior to thr issuance of a permit and that all work will be performed to meet the standards o all laws regulating construction in thisjurisdiction. This permit becomes null ant void if work is not commenced within six(6)months, or if construction or words suspended or abandoned for a period of six(6)months at any time after work i, commenced. I understand that separate permits must be secured for Electrical Work,Plumbing,Signs, Wells,Pools,Furnaces,Boilers,Heaters,Tanks and Ai. Conditioners,etc. WARNING TO OWNER: YOUR FAILURE TO RECORD A NOTICE OF COMMENCEMENT MAN RESULT IN YOUR PAYING TWICE FOR IMPROVEMENTS TO YOUR PROPERTY. IF YOL INTEND TO OBTAIN FINANCING, CONSULT WITH YOUR LENDER OR AN ATTORNEN BEFORE RECORDING YOUR NOTICE OF COMMENCEMENT. I hereby cert that I have read a a i e this application and know the same to be true and correct. All provisions of aws and ordinances governing this pr of work will e complied with wh the a d herein or not. The granting of a ermit does not presume to give authori o violate or cancel the provisions ojan, other federal,state, or local law eg c nstruction or the performance ojconstruction. Signature of Property Owner: Signature of Contracto Sworn to and subsc ibed before Swo to and subs rib d efore e this�Day of 15"f' Dv this Day of i Notary Public Noi * * Co missio # D 7168 " ; o` Ex ires September 3,2010 AA ��aY�� Nctary Public State of Florida -� I! " el, �ItZ3heth Teske rF OF F-�Bonded Troy Fain-Insurance,Inc.800.385-7019 y Commission DD415196 " Expires 04!05/2009 DO NOT WRITE BELOW THIS LINE: OFFICE USE ONLY ,eview Rec„lr f0;,..-1- .. I ADDENDUM NO. I DATE: July 30, 2007 RE: Gatehouse at Fleet Landing 1 Fleet Landing Atlantic Beach,FL 32233 PROD.NO. 07014 FROM: NOELKER AND HULL ASSOCIATES,INC. ARCHITECTS 30 West King Street „ Chambersburg,PA 17201 TO: Plan Holders This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Bidding Documents dated 2 July 2007 and the attached Drawings as noted below. Acknowledge receipt of this Addendum in the space provided on the Bid Form. Failure to do so may subject Bidder to disqualification. This Addendum consists of one(1)pages,the attached Sketch SK-M1 CHANGES TO THE DRAWINGS: 1. Sheet M1.1 HVAC Floor Plan,Notes, Schedules A. Refer to attached SK-Ml dated July 24, 2007, for added 10 x 6 intake louver. END OF ADDENDUM ADDENDUM NO. 1 PAGE - 1 low r F 0X6 NT INAKE LOUVER A ;_..__________ I 20 t1 ---__---------------_ - 20X12_.._, ,. --........-_ COAT __... L CK ®r-- I F. 0 ER 18 -....._C 18X12ECH 8 10 o EN WORK 1Ox12 14X12 ,' 16X12STATION 6"o0" L088Y -' KITCHEN - - - - ,. °�i ,,•;,;, :; �-, � ASI 1:2 �- TOILET �'•••::'•.,''•�:; i Oaf � _....._ EF-1 f 20 MIC. SHELVING i WALLCAP I ' 2 HVAC FLOOR PLAN M1.1 SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" NOELKER SHerr•rrrL[: R PLAN NHA SK NO-- AND O-- AND HULL HVAC FLoo SK-Nil aOCIAM,INC. ARCHITECTS NOTES, SCHEDULES w.l 30 WEST KING SrBEET 5 -nL CHAlAtM8UR0,PA 11201 - V4"=I--X j PH.:717.263-8464 1 FAX:7 17-263-6031 06 NAME ZON.SK NO. Are ajoB NO-. GATEHOUSE AT FLEET LANDING 07-24-07 107014 J PROJECT MANUAL for GATE HOUSE AT FLEET LANDING ATLANTIC BEACH, FLORIDA Florida Firm License #AA26000738 NOELKER AND HULL ASSOCIATES, INC. Architect 30 West King Street Chambersburg, Pennsylvania 17201 717.263.8464 717.263.6031 Fax ABEL CONSULTING ENGINEERS, PA Structural Suite 360 Engineer 814 West Diamond Avenue Gaithersburg, Maryland 20877 301 .258.8884 301.258.9457 Fax DOHERTY SOMMERS ARCHITECTS, ENGINEERS Mechanical/Plumbing 1639 Beach Blvd. Engineer Suite 14 & 15 Jacksonville, Florida 32250 904.249.0698 904.241 .0691 Fax SIMES AND ROSCH ENGINEERING Electrical 3020 Hartley Road Engineer Suite 100 Jacksonville Florida 32257 904.260.3031 904.260.9273 Fax DATE: 02 July 2007 Proj. No.07014 TABLE OF CONTENTS BIDDING REQUIREMENTS 00100 Invitation to Bid 00200 Instructions to Bidders 00300 Information Available to Bidders 00400 Bid Form CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS AIA A201 General Conditions (not included) 00800 Supplementary Conditions DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01100 Summary 01210 Allowances 01290 Payment Procedures 01300 Administrative Requirements 01330 Submittal Procedures 01353 CADD File Waiver 01400 Quality Requirements 01460 Testing laboratory Services 01500 Temporary Facilities and Controls 01600 Product Requirements 01601 Substitution Request Form 01700 Execution Requirements DIVISION 2 - SITE CONSTRUCTION 02221 Building Demolition 02301 Earthwork for Structures 02362 Termite Control 02740 Flexible Pavement 02750 Rigid Pavement 02832 Vinyl Fence 02843 Precast Bollards 02920 Seeding DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE 03100 Concrete Forms and Accessories 03200 Concrete Reinforcement 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete 03350 Concrete Finishing 03355 Colored Concrete Finish 03390 Curing and Sealing DIVISION 4 - MASONRY Not Used DIVISION 5 - METALS 05120 Structural Steel 05400 Cold-Formed Metal Framing 05410 Cold-Formed Metal Roof Trusses 05500 Metal Fabrications Proj. No. 07014 Table of Contents TC - 1 no DOCUMENT 00100 - INVITATION TO BID Sealed bids, in duplicate, addressed to Mr. Scott Chism for the construction of the Gate House in accordance with the Contract Documents prepared by Noelker and Hull Associates, Inc. Architects and adopted by the Owner, will be received until 2 p.m. July 24, 2007 at Fleet Landing. Each Bidder shall identify his sealed bid by writing on the outside of the envelope: "Bid - Gate House at Fleet Landing." All bids will be privately opened at which time a tabulation will be made for consideration for the Owner in awarding a contract. Any bids received after the closing time will be returned unopened. Scope: Contract will be a general contract for the construction of a gate house at Fleet Landing. All work will be under one contract. Bidding Documents: Invited Bidders will receive two (2) sets of Drawings, Project Manual and other bidding documents for this project. Additional complete single sets of bid documents may be obtained by General Contractors, Bidders, Suppliers and Subcontractors from the Architect's Office, upon receipt of a refundable check in the amount of $100.00 each payable to Noelker and Hull Associates, Inc., Architects. The deposit checks will be refunded to Bidders who submit a bona fide bid and return the Contract Documents to the Architect in good condition within 10 days of the date of the Bid otherwise, no refund will be made. Partial sets of Drawings and Specifications will not be available. Bidding Documents may be examined at no charge at the following locations: A. Architect's Office: Noelker and Hull Associates, Inc. 30 West King Street Chambersburg, PA. 1 7201-1 540 No bidder may withdraw his bid within 60 days after the actual date of the opening thereof. END OF DOCUMENT Proj. No. 07014 Invitation to Bid 00100 - 1 DOCUMENT 00200 - INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DEFINITIONS A. All definitions set forth in the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, AIA Document A-201, are applicable to the Construction Documents. B. Bidding documents include the Advertisement for Bid, Instructions to Bidders, the bid forms, and the proposed Contract Documents including any Addenda issued prior to receipt of Bids. C. The Contract Documents proposed for the Work consist of the Owner-Contractor Agreement, the Conditions of the Contract (General and Supplementary Conditions), the Drawings, the Specifications and all Addenda issued prior to and all Modifications issued after execution of the Contract. D. Addenda are written or graphic instruments issued prior to the execution of the Contract which modify or interpret the bidding documents, including Drawings and Specifications, by additions, deletions, clarifications or corrections. Addenda will become part of the Contract Documents when the Construction Contract is executed. E. "Noelker and Hull Associates, Inc." will be hereafter referred to in this Project Manual as "Architect". F. A Bid is a complete and properly signed proposal to do the Work for designated portion thereof for the sums stipulated therein, submitted in accordance with the Bidding Documents. G. The Base Bid is the sum stated in the Bid for which the Bidder offers to perform the Work described in the Bidding Documents as the base, to which work may be added or from + which work may be deleted for sums stated in Alternate Bids. H. An Alternate Bid (or Alternate) is an amount stated in the Bid to be added to or deducted from the amount of the Base Bid in the corresponding change in the Work, as described in the Bidding Documents or in the proposed Contract Documents. I. A Unit Price is an amount stated in the Bid as a price per unit of measurement for materials or service as described in the Bidding Documents or in the proposed Contract Documents. J. A Bidder is a person or entity who submits a Bid. K. A Sub-Bidder is a person or entity who submits a bid to a Bidder for materials or labor for a portion of the Work. 1.2 EXAMINATION OF DOCUMENTS AND SITE A. Each Bidder, by making his Bid, represents that he has read and understands the Bidding Documents. B. Each Bidder, by making his Bid, represents that he has visited the site performed investigations and verifications as he deems necessary, and familiarized himself with the local conditions under which the Work is to be performed and will be responsible for any 40 and all errors in his proposal resulting from his failure to do so. C. The location and elevations of the various utilities and pipe work included within the scope of the work are offered as a general guide only, without guarantee as to accuracy. The Contractor shall verify and investigate to his own satisfaction the location and elevation of all utilities, pipe work, and the like and shall adequately inform himself of their relation to the work before submitting a proposal. D. Each Bidder by making his Bid represents that his Bid is based upon the materials, systems and equipment required by the Bidding Documents without exception. 1.3 BIDDING PROCEDURES A. All Bids shall be prepared on the forms provided by the Architect and submitted in accordance with the Instructions to Bidders. The Architect will furnish Bidders with Bid Forms which will provide for the following Bid Items Proj. No. 07014 Instructions to Bidders 00200 - 1 an on 1.7 PREPARATION OF BID • A. Bidder shall submit his Bid on the forms furnished by the Architect. All blank spaces in forms shall be correctly filled in and the Bidder shall state the prices, written in words and in figures. Where there is discrepancy between the price written in words and the price written in figures, the price written in words shall govern. If Bid is submitted by an individual, his name must be signed by him or his duly authorized agency. If the Bid is submitted by a firm, association or partnership, the name and address of each member must be given, and the Bid must be signed by an official or duly authorized agent. Powers of attorney authorizing agents or others to sign Bids must be properly certified and must be in writing and submitted with the Bid. 1.8 BID GUARANTY A. A Bid Security is not required for this project. 1.9 PERFORMANCE BOND AND LABOR AND MATERIAL PAYMENT BOND A. The Owner will not require Performance and Labor and Material Payment Bonds. 1.10 FILING BID A. No Bid will be considered unless it is filed with the Owner within the time limit for receiving Bids as stated in the Advertisement. Each Bid shall be in a sealed envelope plainly marked with the word "BID", and the name and description of the project as designated in the Advertisement. 1.11 MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BID A. Bid may not be modified after submittal. Bidders may withdraw at any time before opening, but may not resubmit them. No Bid may be withdrawn or modified after the Bid opening except where the award of the Contract has been delayed beyond 60 days after date of Bid. 1.12 OPENING BID A. The Bids submitted will be opened at the time stated in the Advertisement, and shall thereafter remain on file with the Owner. 1.13 IRREGULAR BID A. Bids will not be considered if they show any omissions, alterations of form, additions, or conditions not requested, unauthorized alternate Bids or irregularities of any kind. However, the Owner reserves the right to waive any irregularities and to make the award in the best interest of the Owner. 1.14 REJECTION OF BID A. The Bidder acknowledges the right of the Owner to reject any or all Bids and to waive any informality or irregularity in any Bid received. In addition, the Bidder recognizes the right of the Owner to reject a Bid if the Bidder failed to furnish any required Bid security, or to submit the data required by the Bidding Documents, or if the Bid is any way incomplete or irregular. 1.15 SUBMISSION OF POST-BID INFORMATION A. Upon request by the Architect, the selected Bidder shall, within seven days thereafter submit the following: 1. A statement of cost for each major item of Work included in the Bid. 2. A designation of the Work to be performed by the Bidder with his own forces. 3. A list of names of the Subcontractors or other persons or organizations (including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design) proposed for each portion of the Work. The Bidder will be required to establish to the satisfaction of the Architect and the Owner the reliability and responsibility of the proposed Subcontractors. Prior to the award of the Contract, the Architect will notify the Bidder in writing if either the Owner or the Architect, after due Proj. No. 07014 Instructions to Bidders 00200 - 3 DOCUMENT 00300 - INFORMATION AVAILABLE TO BIDDERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 INVESTIGATION A. An investigation of subsurface soil conditions at the building site or the Palms at Fleet Landing, was authorized by Owner, and these investigations were made by Ellis and Associates, Inc., in Report No. 06JX-1154 dated 20 June 2006, and in addendum dated 29 November 2006. 1.2 REPORT A. The complete text of the subsurface investigation report may be examined by qualified Bidders in the office of the Architect. B. Report and log of borings are available for Contractor's information but is not a warranty of subsurface conditions, nor is it a part of the Contract Documents. 1.3 RESPONSIBILITY A. Bidders are expected to examine the site and subsurface investigation reports and then decide for themselves the character of the materials to be encountered. B. The Architect and Owner assume no responsibility for variations of subsoil quality or conditions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS & PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used END OF DOCUMENT Proj. No. 07014 Information Available to Bidders 00300 - 1 .. OR DOCUMENT 00400 - BID FORM m DATE: 2007 TO: Mr. Scott Chism PROJECT: Gate House at Fleet Landing Gentlemen +• Pursuant to the Invitation to Bid, Instructions to Bidders, Conditions of the Contract, General Requirements and the Drawings and Specifications prepared by Noelker and Hull Associates, Inc., the undersigned bidder hereby proposes to do all the work and furnish all materials and to complete all the work upon which he bids, as provided by the Bidding Documents, and binds himself on acceptance of the Bid to execute a contract and bonds, according to the standard forms included herein, for performing and completing the said Work within the required time, and furnish all required guaranties, for the following prices to wit: BID: For the construction of Gate House at Fleet Landing including Allowances in Section 01210 The Sum of DOLLARS and CENTS ($ ). ADDENDA: This will acknowledge receipt of the following addenda which are part of the Bidding Documents: Addendum No. Addendum No. Addendum No. Addendum No. Addendum No. Addendum No. CONTRACT TIME: The undersigned Bidder hereby declares that he has visited the site of the Work and has carefully examined the Contract Documents pertaining to the Work covered by the above Bid, and he further agrees to commence work within ten days after date of written notice to do so and to substantially complete the work on which he has bid within 120 consecutive calendar days subject to such extensions of time allowed by Specifications. Proj. No. 07014 Bid Form 00400 - 1 O AIA Document A201TM - 1997 9-r General Conditions of the Contract for Construction for the following PROJECT: (Name and location or address): ADDITIONS AND DELETIONS: The author of this document has added information needed for its completion.The author may also have revised the text of the original AIA standard form.An Additions and THE OWNER: Deletions Report that notes added (Name and address): information as well as revisions to the standard form text is available from the author and should be reviewed.A vertical line in the left THE ARCHITECT: margin of this document indicates PIP (Name and address): where the author has added Noelker and Hull Associates,Inc. necessary information and where 30 West King Street the author has added to or deleted Chambersburg,PA 1.7201 from the original AIA text. + * This document has important legal consequences. Consultation with an TABLE OF ARTICLES attorney is encouraged with respect to its completion or modification. " 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS This document has been approved 2 OWNER and endorsed by The Associated General Contractors of America 3 CONTRACTOR 4 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 5 SUBCONTRACTORS 6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 7 CHANGES IN THE WORK 8 TIME 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS 12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT AIA Document A201 TM—1997.Copyright ®1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA"Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties.Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA'Document,or any portion of It,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 16:30:44 on 12/28/2006 under Order No.1000271037 1 which expires on 12/7/2007,and is not for resale. — User Notes: (3175293692) 1110. go 9.8.3,9.8.4,9.8.5 1.6.1,3.2.2,3.6,3.7,3.12.10,3.13,4.1.1,4.4.8,4.6.4, Certificates for Payment 4.6.6,9.6.4, 10.2.2, 11.1, 11.4, 13.1, 13.4, 13.5.1, 4.2.5,4.2.9,9.3.3,9.4,9.5,9.6.1,9.6.6,9.7.1,9.10.1, 13.5.2, 13.6, 14.1.1, 1.4.2.1.3 9.10.3, 13.7, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.4 Concealed or Unknown Conditions " Certificates of Inspection,Testing or Approval 4.3.4,8.3.1, 10.3 13.5.4 Conditions of the Contract Certificates of Insurance 1.1.1, 1.1.7,6.1.1,6.1.4 9.10.2, 11.1.3 Consent,Written Change Orders 1.6,3.4.2, 3.12.8,3.14.2,4.1.2,4.3.4,4.6.4,9.3.2, 1.1.1,2.4.1,3.4.2,3.8.2.3,3.11.1,3.12.8,4.2.8,4.3.4, 9.8.5,9.9.1,9.10.2,9.10.3, 11.4.1, 13.2, 13.4.2 4.3.9,5.2.3,7.1,7.2,7.3, 8.3.1,9.3.1.1,9.10.3, CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY 11.4.1.2, 11.4.4, 11.4.9, 12.1.2 SEPARATE CONTRACTORS Change Orders,Definition of 1.1.4,6 7.2.1 Construction Change Directive,Definition of CHANGES IN THE WORK 7.3.1 3.11,4.2.8,7,8.3.1,9.3.1.1, 11.4.9 Construction Change Directives Claim,Definition of 1.1.1,3.12.8,4.2.8,4.3.9,7.1,7.3,9.3.1.1 4.3.1 Construction Schedules,Contractor's Claims and Disputes 1.4.1.2,3.10,3.12.1,3.12.2,4.3.7.2,6.1.3 3.2.3,4.3,4.4,4.5,4.6,6.1.1,6.3,7.3.8,9.3.3,9.10.4, Contingent Assignment of Subcontracts 10.3.3 5.4,14.2.2.2 Claims and Timely Assertion of Claims Continuing Contract Performance AW 4.6.5 4.3.3 Claims for Additional Cost Contract,Definition of 3.2.3,4.3.4,4.3.5,4.3.6,6.1.1,7.3.8, 10.3.2 1.1.2 Claims for Additional Time CONTRACT,TERMINATION OR 3.2.3,4.3.4,4.3.7,6.1.1,8.3.2, 10.3.2 SUSPENSION OF THE Claims for Concealed or Unknown Conditions 5.4.1.1, 11.4.9,14 4.3.4 Contract Administration Claims for Damages 3.1.3,4,9.4,9.5 3.2.3,3.18,4.3.10,6.1.1, 8.3.3,9.5.1,9.6.7, 10.3.3, Contract Award and Execution,Conditions Relating 11.1.1, 11.4.5, 11.4.7, 14.1.3, 14.2.4 to Claims Subject to Arbitration 3.7.1,3.10,5.2,6.1, 11.1.3, 11.4.6, 11.5.1 4.4.1,4.5.1,4.6.1 Contract Documents,The Cleaning Up 1.1,1.2 3.15,6.3 Contract Documents,Copies Furnished and Use of Commencement of Statutory Limitation Period 1.6,2.2.5, 5.3 13.7 Contract Documents,Definition of Commencement of the Work,Conditions Relating to 2.2.1,3.2.1,3.4.1,3.7.1,3.10.1, 3.12.6,4.3.5,5.2.1, Contract Sum 5.2.3,6.2.2,8.1.2,8.2.2,8.3.1, 11.1, 11.4.1, 11.4.6, 3.8,4.3.4,4.3.5,4.4.5,5.2.3,7.2,7.3,7.4,9.1,9.4.2, 11.5.1 9.5.1.4,9.6.7,9.7, 10.3.2, 11.4.1, 14.2.4, 14.3.2 Commencement of the Work,Definition of Contract Sum,Definition of 8.1.2 9.1 Communications Facilitating Contract Contract Time Administration 4.3.4,4.3.7,4.4.5,5.2.3,7.2.1.3,7.3,7.4,8.1.1,8.2, 3.9.1,4.2.4 8.3.1,9.5.1,9.7, 10.3.2, 12.1.1, 14.3.2 Completion,Conditions Relating to Contract Time,Definition of 1.6.1,3.4.1,3.11,3.15,4.2.2,4.2.9,8.2,9.4.2,9.8, 8.1.1 9.9.1,9.10, 12.2, 13.7, 14.1.2 CONTRACTOR COMPLETION,PAYMENTS AND 3 9 Contractor,Definition of Completion, Substantial 3.1,6.1.2 4.2.9, 8.1.1,8.1.3, 8.2.3,9.4.2,9.8,9.9.1,9.10.3, Contractor's Construction Schedules 9.10.4.2, 12.2, 13.7 1.4.1.2,3.10,3.12.1,3.12.2,4.3.7.2,6.1.3 Compliance with Laws Contractor's Employees AIA Document A201 TM—1997.Copyright ®1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American 40 Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA"Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties.Unauthorized 3 reproduction or distribution of this Al a Document,or an portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal Y P Y penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 16:30:44 on 12/28/2006 under Order No.1 0002710371 which expires on 12/7/2007,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3175293692) imp 1.1.3, 1.2.1, 1.2.2,2.2.3,2.2.5,3.1,3.3,3.4,3.5,3.7, Insurance,Project Management Protective 3.10,3.12,3.14,4.2.2,4.2.3,4.3.3,6.2.2,7.1.3,7.3.4, Liability 8.2,9.5,9.9.1, 10.2, 10.3, 12.2, 14.2, 14.3 11.3 Extensions of Time Insurance,Property 3.2.3,4.3.1,4.3.4,4.3.7,4.4.5,5.2.3,7.2.1,7.3,7.4.1, 10.2.5,11.4 9.5.1,9.7.1, 10.3.2, 10.6.1, 14.3.2 Insurance,Stored Materials Failure of Payment 9.3.2, 11.4.1.4 4.3.6,9.5.1.3,9.7,9.10.2, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.1.2, 13.6 INSURANCE AND BONDS Faulty Work 11 (See Defective or Nonconforming Work) Insurance Companies,Consent to Partial Occupancy Final Completion and Final Payment 9.9.1, 11.4.1.5 4.2.1,4.2.9,4.3.2,9.8.2,9.10, 11.1.2, 11.1.3, 11.4.1, Insurance Companies,Settlement with 11.4.5, 12.3.1, 13.7, 14.2.4, 14.4.3 11.4.10 Financial Arrangements,Owner's Intent of the Contract Documents 2.2.1, 13.2.2, 14.1.1.5 1.2.1,4.2.7,4.2.12,4.2.13,7.4 Fire and Extended Coverage Insurance Interest 11.4 13.6 GENERAL PROVISIONS Interpretation 1 1.2.3, 1.4,4.1.1,4.3.1,5.1,6.1.2, 8.1.4 Governing Law Interpretations,Written 13.1 4.2.11,4.2.12,4.3.6 Guarantees(See Warranty) Joinder and Consolidation of Claims Required Hazardous Materials 4.6.4 10.2.4,10.3, 10.5 Judgment on Final Award Identification of Contract Documents 4.6.6 1.5.1 Labor and Materials,Equipment Identification of Subcontractors and Suppliers 1.1.3, 1.1.6,3.4,3.5.1,3.8.2,3.8.3,3.12,3.13,3.15.1, 5.2.1 42.6,4.2.7,5.2.1,6.2.1,7.3.6, 9.3.2,9.3.3,9.5.1.3, Indemnification 9.10.2, 10.2.1, 10.2.4, 14.2.1.2 3.17,3.18,9.10.2, 10.3.3, 10.5, 11.4.1.2, 11.4.7 Labor Disputes Information and Services Required of the Owner 8.3.1 2.1.2,2.2,3.2.1,3.12.4,3.12.10,4.2.7,4.3.3,6.1.3, Laws and Regulations 6.1.4,6.2.5,9.3.2,9.6.1,9.6.4,9.9.2,9.10.3, 10.3.3, 1.6,3.2.2, 3.6,3.7,3.12.10,3.13,4.1.1,4.4.8,4.6, 11.2, 11.4, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 14.1.1.4, 14.1.4 9.6.4,9.9.1, 10.2.2, 11.1, 11.4, 13.1, 13.4, 13.5.1, Injury or Damage to Person or Property 13.5.2, 13.6, 14 4.3.8,10.2,10.6 Liens Inspections 2.1.2,4.4.8,8.2.2,9.3.3,9.10 3.1.3,3.3.3,3.7.1,4.2.2,4.2.6,4.2.9,9.4.2,9.8.2, Limitation on Consolidation or Joinder 9.8.3,9.9.2,9.10.1, 12.2.1, 13.5 4.6.4 Instructions to Bidders Limitations,Statutes of 1.1.1 4.6.3, 12.2.6, 13.7 Instructions to the Contractor Limitations of Liability 3.2.3,3.3.1,3.8.1,4.2.8,5.2.1,7, 12,8.2.2, 13.5.2 2.3,3.2.1,3.5.1,3.7.3,3.12.8,3.12.10,3.17,3.18, Insurance 4.2.6,4.2.7,4.2.12,6.2.2,9.4.2,9.6.4, 9.6.7,9.10.4, 3.18.1,6.1.1,7.3.6,8.2.1,9.3.2,9.8.4,9.9.1,9.10.2, 10.3.3, 10.2.5, 11.1.2, 11.2.1, 11.4.7, 12.2.5, 13.4.2 9.10.5, 11 Limitations of Time Insurance,Boiler and Machinery 2.1.2,2.2,2.4,3.2.1,3.7.3,3.10,3.11,3.12.5,3.15.1, 11.4.2 4.2.7,4.3,4.4,4.5,4.6,5.2,5.3, 5.4,6.2.4,7.3,7.4, Insurance,Contractor's Liability 8.2,9.2,9.3.1,9.3.3,9.4.1,9.5,9.6,9.7,9.8,9.9, 11.1 9.10, 11.1.3, 11.4.1.5, 11.4.6, 11.4.10, 12.2, 13.5, Insurance,Effective Date of 13.7, 14 8.2.2, 11.1.2 Loss of Use Insurance Insurance,Loss of Use 11.4.3 11.4.3 Material Suppliers Insurance,Owner's Liability 1.6,3.12.1,4.2.4,4.2.6,5.2.1,9.3,9.4.2,9.6,9.10.5 sae 11.2 Materials,Hazardous 10.2.4, 10.3, 10.5 AIA Document A201TM—1997.Copyright ©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American on Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIAs Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties,Unauthorized 5 reproduction or distribution of this A10 Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 16:30:44 on 12/28/2006 under Order No.1000271037_1 which expires on 12/7/2007,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3175293692) N Performance Bond and Payment Bond Review of Contractor's Submittals by Owner and 7.3.6.4,9.6.7,9.10.3, 11.4.9, 11.5 Architect Permits,Fees and Notices 3.10.1,3.10.2,3.11,3.12,4.2,5.2,6.1.3,9.2,9.8.2 v. 2.2.2,3.7,3.13,7.3.6.4, 10.2.2 Review of Shop Drawings,Product Data and PERSONS AND PROPERTY,PROTECTION Samples by Contractor OF 3.12 10 Rights and Remedies 1.1.2,2.3,2.4,3.5.1,3.15.2,4.2.6,4.3.4,4.5,4.6,5.3, Polychlorinated Biphenyl 5.4,6.1,6.3,7.3.1, 8.3,9.5.1,9.7, 10.2.5, 10.3, 10.3.1 12.2.2, 12.2.4, 13.4, 14 Product Data,Definition of Royalties,Patents and Copyrights M 3.12.2 3.17 Product Data and Samples,Shop Drawings Rules and Notices for Arbitration 3.11,3.12,4.2.7 4.6.2 Progress and Completion Safety of Persons and Property 4.2.2,4.3.3,8.2,9.8,9.9.1, 14.1.4 10.2,10.6 Progress Payments Safety Precautions and Programs 4.3.3,9.3,9.6,9.8.5,9.10.3, 13.6, 14.2.3 3.3.1,4.2.2,4.2.7,5.3.1, 10.1, 10.2, 10.6 Project,Definition of the Samples,Definition of 1.1.4 3.12.3 Project Management Protective Liability Samples,Shop Drawings,Product Data and Insurance 3.11,3.12,4.2.7 11.3 Samples at the Site,Documents and Project Manual,Definition of the 3.11 1.1.7 Schedule of Values Project Manuals 9.2,9.3.1 2.2.5 Schedules, Project Representatives 1.4.1.2,3.10,3.Constructionl2.1,3.12.2,4.3.7.2, 4.2.10 6.1.3 Property Insurance Separate Contracts and Contractors 10.2.5,11.4 1.1.4,3.12.5,3.14.2,4.2.4,4.2.7,4.6.4,6,8.3.1, PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 11.4.7, 12.1.2, 12.2.5 10 Shop Drawings,Definition of law Regulations and Laws 3.12.1 1.6,3.2.2,3.6,3.7,3.12.10,3.13,4.1.1,4.4.8,4.6, Shop Drawings,Product Data and Samples 9.6.4,9.9.1, 10.2.2, 11.1, 11.4, 13.1, 13.4, 13.5.1, 3.11,3.12,4.2.7 13.5.2, 13.6, 14 Site,Use of Rejection of Work 3.13,6.1.1,6.2.1 3.5.1,4.2.6, 12.2.1 Site Inspections Releases and Waivers of Liens 1.2.2,3.2.1,3.3.3,3.7.1,4.2,4.3.4,9.4.2,9.10.1, 13.5 9.10.2 Site Visits,Architect's Representations 4.2.2,4.2.9,4.3.4,9.4.2,9.5.1,9.9.2,9.10.1, 13.5 1.5.2, 3.5.1,3.12.6,6.2.2,8.2.1,9.3.3,9.4.2,9.5.1, Special Inspections and Testing 9.8.2,9.10.1 4.2.6, 12.2.1, 13.5 Representatives Specifications,Definition of the 2.1.1,3.1.1,3.9,4.1.1,4.2.1,4.2.10,5.1.1,5.1.2, 1.1.6 13.2.1 Specifications,The Resolution of Claims and Disputes 1.1.1, 1.1.6, 1.1.7, 1.2.2, 1.6,3.11,3.12.10,3.17 4.4,4.5,4.6 Statute of Limitations Responsibility for Those Performing the Work 4.63, 12.2.6, 13.7 3.3.2,3.18,4.2.3,4.3.8,5.3.1,6.1.3,6.2,6.3,9.5.1, Stopping the Work 10 2.3,4.3.6,9.7, 10.3, 14.1 Retainage Stored Materials 9.3.1,9.6.2,9.8.5,9.9.1,9.10.2,9.10.3 6.2.1,9.3.2, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.4, 11.4.1.4 Review of Contract Documents and Field Subcontractor,Definition of Conditions by Contractor 5.1.1 1.5.2,3.2,3.7.3,3.12.7,6.1.3 SUBCONTRACTORS AIA Document A201 TM—1997.Copyright ®1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American , Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA'Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties.Unauthorized 7 reproduction or distribution of this AIA'Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 16:30:44 on 12/28/2006 under Order No.1 0002710371 which expires on 12/7/2007,and is not for resale. — User Notes: (3175293692) 1.6,3.4.2,3.12.8,3.14.2,4.1.2,4.3.4,4.6.4,9.3.2, 2.3,2.4,3.3.1,3.9,3.12.9,3.12.10,4.3,4.4.8,4.6.5, 9.8.5,9.9.1,9.10.2,9.10.3, 11.4.1, 13.2, 13.4.2 5.2.1,8.2.2,9.7,9.10, 10.2.2, 10.3, 11.1.3, 11.4.6, Written Interpretations 12.2.2, 12.2.4,13.3, 14 4.2.11,4.2.12,4.3.6 Written Orders Written Notice 1.1.1,2.3,3.9,4.3.6,7,8.2.2, 11.4.9, 12.1, 12.2, 13.5.2, 14.3.1 AIA Document A201TM—1997.Copyright 01911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This A10 Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties.Unauthorized 9 reproduction or distribution of this AIA'Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 16:30:44 on 12/28/2006 under Order Nc.1000271037_1 which expires on 1217/2007,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3175293692) so 10 no §1.3 CAPITALIZATION §1.3.1 Terms capitalized in these General Conditions include those which are(1) specifically defined,(2)the titles of numbered articles or(3)the titles of other documents published by the American Institute of Architects. am §1.4 INTERPRETATION §1.4.1 In the interest of brevity the Contract Documents frequently omit modifying words such as"all" and any and articles such as "the"and"an,"but the fact that a modifier or an article is absent from one statement and appears in another is not intended to affect the interpretation of either statement. §1.5 EXECUTION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS §1.5.1 The Contract Documents shall be signed by the Owner and Contractor.If either the Owner or Contractor or both do not sign all the Contract Documents,the Architect shall identify such unsigned Documents upon request. §1.5.2 Execution of the Contract by the Contractor is a representation that the Contractor has visited the site, become generally familiar with local conditions under which the Work is to be performed and correlated personal " observations with requirements of the Contract Documents. §1.6 OWNERSHIP AND USE OF DRAWINGS,SPECIFICATIONS AND OTHER INSTRUMENTS OF SERVICE §1.6.1 The Drawings,Specifications and other documents,including those in electronic form,prepared by the Architect and the Architect's consultants are Instruments of Service through which the Work to be executed by the Contractor is described.The Contractor may retain one record set.Neither the Contractor nor any Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor or material or equipment supplier shall own or claim a copyright in the Drawings,Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect or the Architect's consultants,and unless otherwise indicated the Architect and the Architect's consultants shall be deemed the authors of them and will retain all common law, statutory and other reserved rights,in addition to the copyrights.All copies of Instruments of Service,except the Contractor's record set,shall be returned or suitably accounted for to the Architect,on request,upon completion of ` the Work.The Drawings,Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect and the Architect's consultants,and copies thereof furnished to the Contractor,are for use solely with respect to this Project.They are not to be used by the Contractor or any Subcontractor,Sub-subcontractor or material or equipment supplier on other 5, projects or for additions to this Project outside the scope of the Work without the specific written consent of the Owner,Architect and the Architect's consultants.The Contractor,Subcontractors,Sub-subcontractors and material or equipment suppliers are authorized to use and reproduce applicable portions of the Drawings,Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect and the Architect's consultants appropriate to and for use in the execution of their Work under the Contract Documents.All copies made under this authorization shall bear the statutory copyright notice,if any,shown on the Drawings,Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect and the Architect's consultants. Submittal or distribution to meet official regulatory requirements or for other purposes in connection with this Project is not to be construed as publication in derogation of the Architect's or Architect's consultants'copyrights or other reserved rights. ARTICLE 2 OWNER §2.1 GENERAL §2.1.1 The Owner is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and,is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number.The Owner shall designate in writing a representative who shall have express authority to bind the Owner with respect to all matters requiring the Owner's approval or authorization. Except as otherwise provided in Section 4.2.1,the Architect does not have such authority.The term"Owner" means the Owner or the Owner's authorized representative. §2.1.2 The Owner shall furnish to the Contractor within fifteen days after receipt of a written request,information necessary and relevant for the Contractor to evaluate,give notice of or enforce mechanic's lien rights.Such information shall include a correct statement of the record legal title to the property on which the Project is located, usually referred to as the site,and the Owner's interest therein. §2.2 INFORMATION AND SERVICES REQUIRED OF THE OWNER §2.2.1 The Owner shall,at the written request of the Contractor,prior to commencement of the Work and thereafter, furnish to the Contractor reasonable evidence that financial arrangements have been made to fulfill the Owner's ro obligations under the Contract.Furnishing of such evidence shall be a condition precedent to commencement or AIA Document A201 rm—1997.Copyright ©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American wo institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA' Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties.Unauthorized 1 reproduction or distribution of this AIA®Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 16:30:44 on 12/28/2006 under Order No.1000271037_1 which expires on 12/7!2007,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3175293692) on me Am Work,as well as the information furnished by the Owner pursuant to Section 2.2.3,shall take field measurements of any existing conditions related to that portion of the Work and shall observe any conditions at the site affecting it. These obligations are for the purpose of facilitating construction by the Contractor and are not for the purpose of discovering errors,omissions,or inconsistencies in the Contract Documents;however,any errors,inconsistencies or omissions discovered by the Contractor shall be reported promptly to the Architect as a request for information in such form as the Architect may require. §3.2.2 Any design errors or omissions noted by the Contractor during this review shall be reported promptly to the Architect,but it is recognized that the Contractor's review is made in the Contractor's capacity as a contractor and not as a licensed design professional unless otherwise specifically provided in the Contract Documents.The Contractor is not required to ascertain that the Contract Documents are in accordance with applicable laws,statutes, ordinances,building codes,and rules and regulations,but any nonconformity discovered by or made known to the Contractor shall be reported promptly to the Architect. §3.2.3 If the Contractor believes that additional cost or time is involved because of clarifications or instructions issued by the Architect in response to the Contractor's notices or requests for information pursuant to Sections 3.2.1 and 3.2.2,the Contractor shall make Claims as provided in Sections 4.3.6 and 4.3.7.If the Contractor fails to perform the obligations of Sections 3.2.1 and 3.2.2,the Contractor shall pay such costs and damages to the Owner as r would have been avoided if the Contractor had performed such obligations.The Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner or Architect for damages resulting from errors,inconsistencies or omissions in the Contract Documents or for differences between field measurements or conditions and the Contract Documents unless the Contractor recognized such error,inconsistency, omission or difference and knowingly failed to report it to the Architect. §3.3 SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES §3.3.1 The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work,using the Contractor's best skill and attention.The Contractor shall be solely responsible for and have control over construction means,methods,techniques,sequences and procedures and for coordinating all portions of the Work under the Contract,unless the Contract Documents give other specific instructions concerning these matters.If the Contract Documents give specific instructions concerning construction means,methods,techniques,sequences or procedures,the Contractor shall evaluate the jobsite safety thereof and,except as stated below,shall be fully and solely responsible for the jobsite safety of such means,methods,techniques,sequences or procedures.If the Contractor determines that such means,methods, techniques,sequences or procedures may not be safe,the Contractor shall give timely written notice to the Owner and Architect and shall not proceed with that portion of the Work without further written instructions from the Architect.If the Contractor is then instructed to proceed with the required means,methods,techniques,sequences or procedures without acceptance of changes proposed by the Contractor,the Owner shall be solely responsible for any resulting loss or damage. §3.3.2 The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for acts and omissions of the Contractor's employees, Subcontractors and their agents and employees,and other persons or entities performing portions of the Work for or on behalf of the Contractor or any of its Subcontractors. §3.3.3 The Contractor shall be responsible for inspection of portions of Work already performed to determine that such portions are in proper condition to receive subsequent Work. §3.4 LABOR AND MATERIALS §3.4.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,the Contractor shall provide and pay for labor, materials,equipment,tools,construction equipment and machinery,water,heat,utilities,transportation,and other facilities and services necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work,whether temporary or permanent and whether or not incorporated or to be incorporated in the Work. §3.4.2 The Contractor may make substitutions only with the consent of the Owner,after evaluation by the Architect and in accordance with a Change Order. §3.4.3 The Contractor shall enforce strict discipline and good order among the Contractor's employees and other persons carrying out the Contract.The Contractor shall not permit employment of unfit persons or persons not skilled in tasks assigned to them. AIA Document A201 Tm—1997.Copyright ®1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA®Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties.Unauthorized 13 reproduction or distribution of this A10 Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 16:30:44 on 12/28/2006 under Order No.1000271037_1 which expires on 121712007,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3175293692) 1 communications shall be confirmed in writing.Other communications shall be similarly confirmed on written request in each case. §3.10 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES §3.10.1 The Contractor,promptly after being awarded the Contract,shall prepare and submit for the Owner's and Architect's information a Contractor's construction schedule for the Work.The schedule shall not exceed time limits current under the Contract Documents,shall be revised at appropriate intervals as required by the conditions of the aw Work and Project,shall be related to the entire Project to the extent required by the Contract Documents,and shall provide for expeditious and practicable execution of the Work. §3.10.2 The Contractor shall prepare and keep current,for the Architect's approval,a schedule of submittals which is coordinated with the Contractor's construction schedule and allows the Architect reasonable time to review submittals. §3.10.3 The Contractor shall perform the Work in general accordance with the most recent schedules submitted to the Owner and Architect. §3.11 DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES AT THE SITE §3.11.1 The Contractor shall maintain at the site for the Owner one record copy of the Drawings,Specifications, Addenda,Change Orders and other Modifications,in good order and marked currently to record field changes and selections made during.construction,and one record copy of approved Shop Drawings,Product Data,Samples and similar required submittals.These shall be available to the Architect and shall be delivered to the Architect for w submittal to the Owner upon completion of the Work. §3.12 SHOP DRAWINGS,PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES §3.12.1 Shop Drawings are drawings,diagrams,schedules and other data specially prepared for the Work by the Contractor or a Subcontractor,Sub-subcontractor,manufacturer,supplier or distributor to illustrate some portion of the Work. §3.12.2 Product Data are illustrations,standard schedules,performance charts,instructions,brochures,diagrams and other information furnished by the Contractor to illustrate materials or equipment for some portion of the Work. §3.12.3 Samples are physical examples which illustrate materials,equipment or workmanship and establish PON standards by which the Work will be judged. §3.12.4 Shop Drawings,Product Data,Samples and similar submittals are not Contract Documents.The purpose of their submittal is to demonstrate for those portions of the Work for which submittals are required by the Contract Documents the way by which the Contractor proposes to conform to the information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents.Review by the Architect is subject to the limitations of Section 4.2.7. Informational submittals upon which the Architect is not expected to take responsive action may be so identified in the Contract Documents.Submittals which are not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the Architect without action. §3.12.5 The Contractor shall review for compliance with the Contract Documents,approve and submit to the Architect Shop Drawings,Product Data,Samples and similar submittals required by the Contract Documents with reasonable promptness and in such sequence as to cause no delay in the Work or in the activities of the Owner or of separate contractors. Submittals which are not marked as reviewed for compliance with the Contract Documents and approved by the Contractor may be returned by the Architect without action. §3.12.6 By approving and submitting Shop Drawings,Product Data,Samples and similar submittals,the Contractor represents that the Contractor has determined and verified materials,field measurements and field construction criteria related thereto,or will do so,and has checked and coordinated the information contained within such submittals with the requirements of the Work and of the Contract Documents. §3.12.7 The Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work for which the Contract Documents require submittal O. and review of Shop Drawings,Product Data,Samples or similar submittals until the respective submittal has been approved by the Architect. AIA Document A201Tm—1997.Copyright ®1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This Al a Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties,Unauthorized 15 reproduction or distribution of this Ale Document,or any portion of It,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 16:30:44 on 12/28/2006 under Order No.1000271037_1 which expires on 12/7/2007,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3175293692) am M. §3.16 ACCESS TO WORK §3.16.1 The Contractor shall provide the Owner and Architect access to the Work in preparation and progress wherever located. §3.17 ROYALTIES,PATENTS AND COPYRIGHTS §3.17.1 The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees.The Contractor shall defend suits or claims for infringement of copyrights and patent rights and shall hold the Owner and Architect harmless from loss on account a" thereof,but shall not be responsible for such defense or loss when a particular design,process or product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is required by the Contract Documents or where the copyright violations are contained in Drawings,Specifications or other documents prepared by the Owner or Architect.However,if the Contractor has reason to believe that the required design,process or product is an infringement of a copyright or a IV patent,the Contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless such information is promptly furnished to the Architect. §3.18 INDEMNIFICATION §3.18.1 To the fullest extent permitted by law and to the extent claims,damages,losses or expenses are not covered by Project Management Protective Liability insurance purchased by the Contractor in accordance with Section 11.3, the Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner,Architect,Architect's consultants,and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims,damages,losses and expenses,including but not limited to attorneys' fees,arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work,provided that such claim,damage,loss or expense is attributable to bodily injury,sickness,disease or death,or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself),but only to the extent caused by the negligent acts or omissions of the Contractor,a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, regardless of whether or not such claim,damage,loss or expense is caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder. Such obligation shall not be construed to negate,abridge,or reduce other rights or obligations of indemnity which would otherwise exist as to a party or person described in this Section 3.18. §3.18.2 In claims against any person or entity indemnified under this Section 3.18 by an employee of the Contractor, a Subcontractor,anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable,the indemnification obligation under Section 3.18.1 shall not be limited by a limitation on amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for the Contractor or a Subcontractor under workers' compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts. ARTICLE 4 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT §4.1 ARCHITECT §4.1.1 The Architect is the person lawfully licensed to practice architecture or an entity lawfully practicing architecture identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number.The term"Architect"means the Architect or the Architect's authorized representative. §4.1.2 Duties,responsibilities and limitations of authority of the Architect as set forth in the Contract Documents shall not be restricted,modified or extended without written consent of the Owner,Contractor and Architect. Consent shall not be unreasonably withheld. §4.1.3 If the employment of the Architect is terminated,the Owner shall employ a new Architect against whom the Contractor has no reasonable objection and whose status under the Contract Documents shall be that of the former Architect. §4.2 ARCHITECT'S ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT §4.2.1 The Architect will provide administration of the Contract as described in the Contract Documents,and will be an Owner's representative(1)during construction, (2)until final payment is due and(3)with the Owner's concurrence,from time to time during the one-year period for correction of Work described in Section 12.2.The Architect will have authority to act on behalf of the Owner only to the extent provided in the Contract Documents, unless otherwise modified in writing in accordance with other provisions of the Contract. §4.2.2 The Architect,as a representative of the Owner,will visit the site at intervals appropriate to the stage of the V!, Contractor's operations(1)to become generally familiar with and to keep the Owner informed about the progress and quality of the portion of the Work completed,(2)to endeavor to guard the Owner against defects and AIA Document A201 rm—1997.Copyright®1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American 40 Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA' Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties.Unauthorized 17 reproduction or distribution of this AIO Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 16:30:44 on 12/28/2006 under Order No.1000271037_1 which expires on 12/7/2007,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3175293692) §4.2.11 The Architect will interpret and decide matters concerning performance under and requirements of,the Contract Documents on written request of either the Owner or Contractor.The Architect's response to such requests will be made in writing within any time limits agreed upon or otherwise with reasonable promptness.If no agreement is made concerning the time within which interpretations required of the Architect shall be furnished in " compliance with this Section 4.2,then delay shall not be recognized on account of failure by the Architect to furnish such interpretations until 15 days after written request is made for them. §4.2.12 Interpretations and decisions of the Architect will be consistent with the intent of and reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents and will be in writing or in the form of drawings.When making such interpretations and initial decisions,the Architect will endeavor to secure faithful performance by both Owner and Contractor,will not show partiality to either and will not be liable for results of interpretations or decisions so rendered in good faith. §4.2.13 The Architect's decisions on matters relating to aesthetic effect will be final if consistent with the intent expressed in the Contract Documents. §4.3 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES §4.3.1 Definition. A Claim is a demand or assertion by one of the parties seeking,as a matter of right,adjustment or interpretation of Contract terms,payment of money,extension of time or other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract.The term"Claim" also includes other disputes and matters in question between the Owner and Contractor arising out of or relating to the Contract.Claims must be initiated by written notice.The responsibility to substantiate Claims shall rest with the party making the Claim. §4.3.2 Time Limits on Claims.Claims by either party must be initiated within 21 days after occurrence of the event giving rise to such Claim or within 21 days after the claimant first recognizes the condition giving rise to the Claim, whichever is later.Claims must be initiated by written notice to the Architect and the other party. §4.3.3 Continuing Contract Performance.Pending final resolution of a Claim except as otherwise agreed in writing or as provided in Section 9.7.1 and Article 14,the Contractor shall proceed diligently with performance of the Contract and the Owner shall continue to make payments in accordance with the Contract Documents. §4.3.4 Claims for Concealed or Unknown Conditions.If conditions are encountered at the site which are(1) subsurface or otherwise concealed physical conditions which differ materially from those indicated in the Contract Documents or(2)unknown physical conditions of an unusual nature,which differ materially from those ordinarily ,. found to exist and generally recognized as inherent in construction activities of the character provided for in the Contract Documents,then notice by the observing party shall be given to the other party promptly before conditions are disturbed and in no event later than 21 days after first observance of the conditions.The Architect will promptly investigate such conditions and,if they differ materially and cause an increase or decrease in the Contractor's cost of,or time required for,performance of any part of the Work,will recommend an equitable adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time,or both.If the Architect determines that the conditions at the site are not materially different from those indicated in the Contract Documents and that no change in the terms of the Contract is justified, the Architect shall so notify the Owner and Contractor in writing,stating the reasons.Claims by either party in opposition to such determination must be made within 21 days after the Architect has given notice of the decision.If the conditions encountered are materially different,the Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be equitably adjusted, but if the Owner and Contractor cannot agree on an adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time,the adjustment shall be referred to the Architect for initial determination,subject to further proceedings pursuant to Section 4.4. §4.3.5 Claims for Additional Cost. If the Contractor wishes to make Claim for an increase in the Contract Sum, written notice as provided herein shall be given before proceeding to execute the Work.Prior notice is not required for Claims relating to an emergency endangering life or property arising under Section 10.6. §4.3.6 If the Contractor believes additional cost is involved for reasons including but not limited to(1)a written interpretation from the Architect, (2)an order by the Owner to stop the Work where the Contractor was not at fault, (3)a written order for a minor change in the Work issued by the Architect,(4)failure of payment by the Owner,(5) termination of the Contract by the Owner,(6)Owner's suspension or(7)other reasonable grounds,Claim shall be filed in accordance with this Section 4.3. AIA Document A201 Tu—1997.Copyright ®1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA*Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties.Unauthorized 19 reproduction or distribution of this AIA* Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 16:30:44 on 12/28/2006 under Order No.1000271037_1 which expires on 12/712007,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3175293692) am V. qK §4.4.5 The Architect will approve or reject Claims by written decision,which shall state the reasons therefor and which shall notify the parties of any change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time or both.The approval or rejection of a Claim by the Architect shall be final and binding on the parties but subject to mediation and arbitration. §4.4.6 When a written decision of the Architect states that(1)the decision is final but subject to mediation and arbitration and(2)a demand for arbitration of a Claim covered by such decision must be made within 30 days after the date on which the party making the demand receives the final written decision,then failure to demand arbitration within said 30 days'period shall result in the Architect's decision becoming final and binding upon the Owner and Contractor.If the Architect renders a decision after arbitration proceedings have been initiated,such decision may be entered as evidence,but shall not supersede arbitration proceedings unless the decision is acceptable to all parties concerned. §4.4.7 Upon receipt of a Claim against the Contractor or at any time thereafter,the Architect or the Owner may,but is not obligated to,notify the surety,if any,of the nature and amount of the Claim.If the Claim relates to a possibility of a Contractor's default,the Architect or the Owner may,but is not obligated to,notify the surety and request the surety's assistance in resolving the controversy. §4.4.8 If a Claim relates to or is the subject of a mechanic's lien,the party asserting such Claim may proceed in accordance with applicable law to comply with the lien notice or filing deadlines prior to resolution of the Claim by the Architect,by mediation or by arbitration. a. §4.5 MEDIATION §4.5.1 Any Claim arising out of or related to the Contract,except Claims relating to aesthetic effect and except those waived as provided for in Sections 4.3.10,9.10.4 and 9.10.5 shall,after initial decision by the Architect or 30 days after submission of the Claim to the Architect,be subject to mediation as a condition precedent to arbitration or the institution of legal or equitable proceedings by either party. §4.5.2 The parties shall endeavor to resolve their Claims by mediation which,unless the parties mutually agree otherwise,shall be in accordance with the Construction Industry Mediation Rules of the American Arbitration Association currently in effect.Request for mediation shall be filed in writing with the other party to the Contract and with the American Arbitration Association.The request may be made concurrently with the filing of a demand for arbitration but,in such event,mediation shall proceed in advance of arbitration or legal or equitable proceedings, which shall be stayed pending mediation for a period of 60 days from the date of filing,unless stayed for a longer period by agreement of the parties or court order, §4.5.3 The parties shall share the mediator's fee and any filing fees equally.The mediation shall be held in the place where the Project is located,unless another location is mutually agreed upon.Agreements reached in mediation shall be enforceable as settlement agreements in any court having jurisdiction thereof. §4.6 ARBITRATION §4.6.1 Any Claim arising out of or related to the Contract,except Claims relating to aesthetic effect and except those waived as provided for in Sections 4.3.10,9.10.4 and 9.10.5,shall,after decision by the Architect or 30 days after submission of the Claim to the Architect,be subject to arbitration.Prior to arbitration,the parties shall endeavor to am resolve disputes by mediation in accordance with the provisions of Section 4.5. §4.6.2 Claims not resolved by mediation shall be decided by arbitration which,unless the parties mutually agree otherwise,shall be in accordance with the Construction Industry Arbitration Rules of the American Arbitration Association currently in effect.The demand for arbitration shall be filed in writing with the other party to the Contract and with the American Arbitration Association,and a copy shall be filed with the Architect. §4.6.3 A demand for arbitration shall be made within the time limits specified in Sections 4.4.6 and 4.6.1 as applicable,and in other cases within a reasonable time after the Claim has arisen,and in no event shall it be made after the date when institution of legal or equitable proceedings based on such Claim would be barred by the applicable statute of limitations as determined pursuant to Section 13.7. AIA Document A201 TO—1997.Copyright ®1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American r Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA' Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties.Unauthorized 21 reproduction or distribution of this AIA'Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 16:30:44 on 12/28/2006 under Order No.1000271037 1 which expires on 12/7/2007,and is not for resale. — User Notes: (3175293692) §5.3 SUBCONTRACTUAL RELATIONS §5.3.1 By appropriate agreement,written where legally required for validity,the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor,to the extent of the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor,to be bound to the Contractor by terms of the Contract Documents,and to assume toward the Contractor all the obligations and responsibilities, including the responsibility for safety of the Subcontractor's Work,which the Contractor,by these Documents, assumes toward the Owner and Architect.Each subcontract agreement shall preserve and protect the rights of the Owner and Architect under the Contract Documents with respect to the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor so that subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such rights,and shall allow to the Subcontractor,unless specifically provided otherwise in the subcontract agreement,the benefit of all rights,remedies and redress against the Contractor that the Contractor,by the Contract Documents,has against the Owner.Where appropriate,the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor to enter into similar agreements with Sub-subcontractors.The ' Contractor shall make available to each proposed Subcontractor,prior to the execution of the subcontract agreement, copies of the Contract Documents to which the Subcontractor will be bound,and,upon written request of the Subcontractor,identify to the Subcontractor terms and conditions of the proposed subcontract agreement which may be at variance with the Contract Documents. Subcontractors will similarly make copies of applicable portions of such documents available to their respective proposed Sub-subcontractors. §5.4 CONTINGENT ASSIGNMENT OF SUBCONTRACTS §5.4.1 Each subcontract agreement for a portion of the Work is assigned by the Contractor to the Owner provided that: .1 assignment is effective only after termination of the Contract by the Owner for cause pursuant to Section 14.2 and only for those subcontract agreements which the Owner accepts by notifying the Subcontractor and Contractor in writing;and .2 assignment is subject to the prior rights of the surety,if any,obligated under bond relating to the Contract. §5.4.2 Upon such assignment,if the Work has been suspended for more than 30 days,the Subcontractor's compensation shall be equitably adjusted for increases in cost resulting from the suspension. ARTICLE 6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS §6.1 OWNER'S RIGHT TO PERFORM CONSTRUCTION AND TO AWARD SEPARATE CONTRACTS §6.1.1 The Owner reserves the right to perform construction or operations related to the Project with the Owner's own forces,and to award separate contracts in connection with other portions of the Project or other construction or operations on the site under Conditions of the Contract identical or substantially similar to these including those portions related to insurance and waiver of subrogation.If the Contractor claims that delay or additional cost is involved because of such action by the Owner,the Contractor shall make such Claim as provided in Section 4.3. §6.1.2 When separate contracts are awarded for different portions of the Project or other construction or operations on the site,the term"Contractor"in the Contract Documents in each case shall mean the Contractor who executes each separate Owner-Contractor Agreement. §6.1.3 The Owner shall provide for coordination of the activities of the Owner's own forces and of each separate contractor with the Work of the Contractor,who shall cooperate with them,The Contractor shall participate with other separate contractors and the Owner in reviewing their construction schedules when directed to do so.The Contractor shall make any revisions to the construction schedule deemed necessary after a joint review and mutual agreement.The construction schedules shall then constitute the schedules to be used by the Contractor,separate contractors and the Owner until subsequently revised. " §6.1.4 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,when the Owner performs construction or operations related to the Project with the Owner's own forces,the Owner shall be deemed to be subject to the same obligations and to have the same rights which apply to the Contractor under the Conditions of the Contract,including,without excluding others, those stated in Article 3,this Article 6 and Articles 10, 11 and 12. §6.2 MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY §6.2.1 The Contractor shall afford the Owner and separate contractors reasonable opportunity for introduction and storage of their materials and equipment and performance of their activities,and shall connect and coordinate the Contractor's construction and operations with theirs as required by the Contract Documents. AIA Document A201 TM—1997.Copyright ®1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA6 Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and international Treaties.Unauthorized 23 reproduction or distribution of this AIA"'Document,or any portion of It,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 16:30:44 on 1 212812 00 6 under Order No.1000271037 1 which expires on 121712007,and is not for resale. — User Notes: (3175293692) §6.2.2 If part of the Contractor's Work depends for proper execution or results upon construction or operations by the Owner or a separate contractor,the Contractor shall,prior to proceeding with that portion of the Work,promptly report to the Architect apparent discrepancies or defects in such other construction that would render it unsuitable for such proper execution and results.Failure of the Contractor so to report shall constitute an acknowledgment that the Owner's or separate contractor's completed or partially completed construction is fit and proper to receive the Contractor's Work,except as to defects not then reasonably discoverable. §6.2.3 The Owner shall be reimbursed by the Contractor for costs incurred by the Owner which are payable to a separate contractor because of delays,improperly timed activities or defective construction of the Contractor.The Owner shall be responsible to the Contractor for costs incurred by the Contractor because of delays,improperly timed activities,damage to the Work or defective construction of a separate contractor. §6.2.4 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage wrongfully caused by the Contractor to completed or partially completed construction or to property of the Owner or separate contractors as provided in Section 10.2.5. §6.2,5 The Owner and each separate contractor shall have the same responsibilities for cutting and patching as are described for the Contractor in Section 3.14. §6.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CLEAN UP §6.3,1 If a dispute arises among the Contractor,separate contractors and the Owner as to the responsibility under their respective contracts for maintaining the premises and surrounding area free from waste materials and rubbish, the Owner may clean up and the Architect will allocate the cost among those responsible. *+ ARTICLE 7 CHANGES IN THE WORK §7.1 GENERAL §7.1.1 Changes in the Work may be accomplished after execution of the Contract,and without invalidating the Contract,by Change Order,Construction Change Directive or order for a minor change in the Work,subject to the limitations stated in this Article 7 and elsewhere in the Contract Documents. §7.1.2 A Change Order shall be based upon agreement among the Owner,Contractor and Architect;a Construction Change Directive requires agreement by the Owner and Architect and may or may not be agreed to by the Contractor;an order for a minor change in the Work may be issued by the Architect alone. §7.1.3 Changes in the Work shall be performed under applicable provisions of the Contract Documents,and the Contractor shall proceed promptly,unless otherwise provided in the Change Order,Construction Change Directive or order for a minor change in the Work, §7.2 CHANGE ORDERS §7.2.1 A Change Order is a written instrument prepared by the Architect and signed by the Owner,Contractor and Architect, stating their agreement upon all of the following: ,1 change in the Work; .2 the amount of the adjustment,if any,in the Contract Sum;and .3 the extent of the adjustment,if any,in the Contract Time. §7.2.2 Methods used in determining adjustments to the Contract Sum may include those listed in Section 7.3.3. §7.3 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVES §7.3.1 A Construction Change Directive is a written order prepared by the Architect and signed by the Owner and Architect,directing a change in the Work prior to agreement on adjustment,if any, in the Contract Sum or Contract Time,or both.The Owner may by Construction Change Directive,without invalidating the Contract,order changes in the Work within the general scope of the Contract consisting of additions,deletions or other revisions,the Contract Sum and Contract Time being adjusted accordingly. §7.3.2 A Construction Change Directive shall be used in the absence of total agreement on the terms of a Change Order. -� AIA Document A201 TM—1997.Copyright ®1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIAe Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties.Unauthorized 24 reproduction or distribution of this AIAe Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 16:30:44 on 12/28/2006 under Order No.1000271037_1 which expires on 12/7/2007,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3175293692) -10 NP §7.3.3 If the Construction Change Directive provides for an adjustment to the Contract Sum,the adjustment shall be based on one of the following methods: .1 mutual acceptance of a lump sum properly itemized and supported by sufficient substantiating data to permit evaluation; .2 unit prices stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon; .3 cost to be determined in a manner agreed upon by the parties and a mutually acceptable fixed or percentage fee;or .4 as provided in Section 7.3.6. §7.3.4 Upon receipt of a Construction Change Directive,the Contractor shall promptly proceed with the change in the Work involved and advise the Architect of the Contractor's agreement or disagreement with the method,if any, ^" provided in the Construction Change Directive for determining the proposed adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time. §7.3.5 A Construction Change Directive signed by the Contractor indicates the agreement of the Contractor therewith,including adjustment in Contract Sum and Contract Time or the method for determining them. Such agreement shall be effective immediately and shall be recorded as a Change Order. §7.3.6 If the Contractor does not respond promptly or disagrees with the method for adjustment in the Contract Sum, the method and the adjustment shall be determined by the Architect on the basis of reasonable expenditures and savings of those performing the Work attributable to the change,including,in case of an increase in the Contract Sum,a reasonable allowance for overhead and profit.In such case,and also under Section 7.3.3.3,the Contractor " shall keep and present,in such form as the Architect may prescribe,an itemized accounting together with appropriate supporting data.Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,costs for the purposes of this Section 7.3.6 shall be limited to the following: .1 costs of labor,including social security,old age and unemployment insurance,fringe benefits required by agreement or custom,and workers' compensation insurance; .2 costs of materials,supplies and equipment,including cost of transportation,whether incorporated or consumed; .3 rental costs of machinery and equipment,exclusive of hand tools,whether rented from the Contractor or others; .4 costs of premiums for all bonds and insurance,permit fees,and sales,use or similar taxes related to the Work;and Pill .5 additional costs of supervision and field office personnel directly attributable to the change. §7.3.7 The amount of credit to be allowed by the Contractor to the Owner for a deletion or change which results in a net decrease in the Contract Sum shall be actual net cost as confirmed by the Architect.When both additions and credits covering related Work or substitutions are involved in a change,the allowance for overhead and profit shall be figured on the basis of net increase,if any, with respect to that change. §7.3.8 Pending final determination of the total cost of a Construction Change Directive to the Owner,amounts not in dispute for such changes in the Work shall be included in Applications for Payment accompanied by a Change Order indicating the parties' agreement with part or all of such costs.For any portion of such cost that remains in dispute,the Architect will make an interim determination for purposes of monthly certification for payment for those costs.That determination of cost shall adjust the Contract Sum on the same basis as a Change Order,subject to the right of either party to disagree and assert a claim in accordance with Article 4. §7.3.9 When the Owner and Contractor agree with the determination made by the Architect concerning the adjustments in the Contract Sum and Contract Time,or otherwise reach agreement upon the adjustments, such agreement shall be effective immediately and shall be recorded by preparation and execution of an appropriate Change Order. §7.4 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK §7.4.1 The Architect will have authority to order minor changes in the Work not involving adjustment in the Contract Sum or extension of the Contract Time and not inconsistent with the intent of the Contract Documents. '* Such changes shall be effected by written order and shall be binding on the Owner and Contractor.The Contractor shall carry out such written orders promptly. AIA Document A201 TM—1997.Copyright ®1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1967 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIAO'Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties.Unauthorized 25reproduction or distribution of this AIA®Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 16:30:44 on 12/28/2006 under Order No.1000271037 1 which expires on 12/7/2007,and is not for resaie. — User Notes: (3175293692) ARTICLE 8 TIME §8.1 DEFINITIONS §8.1.1 Unless otherwise provided,Contract Time is the period of time,including authorized adjustments,allotted in the Contract Documents for Substantial Completion of the Work. §8.1.2 The date of commencement of the Work is the date established in the Agreement. §8.1.3 The date of Substantial Completion is the date certified by the Architect in accordance with Section 9.8. §8.1.4 The term"day" as used in the Contract Documents shall mean calendar day unless otherwise specifically defined. §8.2 PROGRESS AND COMPLETION §8.2.1 Time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract.By executing the Agreement the Contractor confirms that the Contract Time is a reasonable period for performing the Work. §8.2.2 The Contractor shall not knowingly,except by agreement or instruction of the Owner in writing,prematurely commence operations on the site or elsewhere prior to the effective date of insurance required by Article 11 to be *■+ furnished by the Contractor and Owner.The date of commencement of the Work shall not be changed by the effective date of such insurance.Unless the date of commencement is established by the Contract Documents or a notice to proceed given by the Owner,the Contractor shall notify the Owner in writing not less than five days or other agreed period before commencing the Work to permit the timely filing of mortgages,mechanic's liens and other security interests. §8.2,3 The Contractor shall proceed expeditiously with adequate forces and shall achieve Substantial Completion within the Contract Time. §8.3 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME §8.3.1 If the Contractor is delayed at any time in the commencement or progress of the Work by an act or neglect of the Owner or Architect,or of an employee of either,or of a separate contractor employed by the Owner,or by changes ordered in the Work,or by labor disputes,fire,unusual delay in deliveries,unavoidable casualties or other causes beyond the Contractor's control,or by delay authorized by the Owner pending mediation and arbitration,or by other causes which the Architect determines may justify delay,then the Contract Time shall be extended by Change Order for such reasonable time as the Architect may determine. §8.3.2 Claims relating to time shall be made in accordance with applicable provisions of Section 4.3. .. §8.3.3 This Section 8.3 does not preclude recovery of damages for delay by either party under other provisions of the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION §9.1 CONTRACT SUM §9.1.1 The Contract Sum is stated in the Agreement and,including authorized adjustments,is the total amount payable by the Owner to the Contractor for performance of the Work under the Contract Documents. §9.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES §9.2.1 Before the first Application for Payment,the Contractor shall submit to the Architect a schedule of values allocated to various portions of the Work,prepared in such form and supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as the Architect may require.This schedule,unless objected to by the Architect,shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Contractor's Applications for Payment. §9.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT §9.3.1 At least ten days before the date established for each progress payment,the Contractor shall submit to the Architect an itemized Application for Payment for operations completed in accordance with the schedule of values. Such application shall be notarized,if required,and supported by such data substantiating the Contractor's right to AIA Document A201TM—1997.Copyright ®1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserve®. WARNING:This AIA' Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties.Unauthorized 26 reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the low. This document was produced by AIA software at 16:30:44 on 12/28/2006 under Order No.1000271037_1 which expires on 12/7/2007,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3175293692) payment as the Owner or Architect may require,such as copies of requisitions from Subcontractors and material suppliers,and reflecting retainage if provided for in the Contract Documents. §9.3.1.1 As provided in Section 7.3.8,such applications may include requests for payment on account of changes in the Work which have been properly authorized by Construction Change Directives,or by interim determinations of the Architect,but not yet included in Change Orders. der §9.3.1.2 Such applications may not include requests for payment for portions of the Work for which the Contractor does not intend to pay to a Subcontractor or material supplier,unless such Work has been performed by others whom the Contractor intends to pay. §9.3.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,payments shall be made on account of materials and equipment delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent incorporation in the Work.If approved in advance by the Owner,payment may similarly be made for materials and equipment suitably stored off the site at a location agreed upon in writing.Payment for materials and equipment stored on or off the site shall be conditioned upon compliance by the Contractor with procedures satisfactory to the Owner to establish the Owner's title to such materials and equipment or otherwise protect the Owner's interest,and shall include the costs of applicable insurance, storage and transportation to the site for such materials and equipment stored off the site. §9.3.3 The Contractor warrants that title to all Work covered by an Application for Payment will pass to the Owner no later than the time of payment.The Contractor further warrants that upon submittal of an Application for Payment all Work for which Certificates for Payment have been previously issued and payments received from the ' Owner shall,to the best of the Contractor's knowledge,information and belief,be free and clear of liens,claims, security interests or encumbrances in favor of the Contractor,Subcontractors,material suppliers,or other persons or entities making a claim by reason of having provided labor,materials and equipment relating to the Work. §9.4 CERTIFICATES FOR PAYMENT §9.4.1 The Architect will,within seven days after receipt of the Contractor's Application for Payment,either issue to the Owner a Certificate for Payment,with a copy to the Contractor,for such amount as the Architect determines is properly due,or notify the Contractor and Owner in writing of the Architect's reasons for withholding certification in whole or in part as provided in Section 9.5.1. §9.4.2 The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will constitute a representation by the Architect to the Owner, based on the Architect's evaluation of the Work and the data comprising the Application for Payment,that the Work has progressed to the point indicated and that,to the best of the Architect's knowledge,information and belief,the quality of the Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents.The foregoing representations are subject to an evaluation of the Work for conformance with the Contract Documents upon Substantial Completion,to results of subsequent tests and inspections,to correction of minor deviations from the Contract Documents prior to completion and to specific qualifications expressed by the Architect.The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will further constitute a representation that the Contractor is entitled to payment in the amount certified.However,the issuance of a Certificate for Payment will not be a representation that the Architect has(1)made exhaustive or continuous on- site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work,(2)reviewed construction means,methods,techniques, sequences or procedures,(3)reviewed copies of requisitions received from Subcontractors and material suppliers and other data requested by the Owner to substantiate the Contractor's right to payment,or(4)made examination to ascertain how or for what purpose the Contractor has used money previously paid on account of the Contract Sum. §9.5 DECISIONS TO WITHHOLD CERTIFICATION §9.5.1 The Architect may withhold a Certificate for Payment in whole or in part,to the extent reasonably necessary to protect the Owner,if in the Architect's opinion the representations to the Owner required by Section 9.4.2 cannot be made.If the Architect is unable to certify payment in the amount of the Application,the Architect will notify the Contractor and Owner as provided in Section 9.4.1.If the Contractor and Architect cannot agree on a revised amount,the Architect will promptly issue a Certificate for Payment for the amount for which the Architect is able to make such representations to the Owner.The Architect may also withhold a Certificate for Payment or,because of subsequently discovered evidence,may nullify the whole or a part of a Certificate for Payment previously issued,to such extent as may be necessary in the Architect's opinion to protect the Owner from loss for which the Contractor is responsible,including loss resulting from acts and omissions described in Section 3.3.2,because of. .1 defective Work not remedied; AIA Document A201TM—1997.Copyright ®1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIAt'Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties.Unauthorized 27 reproduction or distribution of this AIO Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 16:30:44 on 12/28/2006 under Order No.1 0002710371 which expires on 12/7/2007,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3175293692) so .2 third party claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of such claims unless security acceptable to the Owner is provided by the Contractor; .3 failure of the Contractor to make payments properly to Subcontractors or for labor,materials or equipment; .4 reasonable evidence that the Work cannot be completed for the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum; .5 damage to the Owner or another contractor; .6 reasonable evidence that the Work will not be completed within the Contract Time,and that the unpaid balance would not be adequate to cover actual or liquidated damages for the anticipated delay; or .7 persistent failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. §9.5.2 When the above reasons for withholding certification are removed,certification will be made for amounts previously withheld. §9.6 PROGRESS PAYMENTS §9.6.1 After the Architect has issued a Certificate for Payment,the Owner shall make payment in the manner and within the time provided in the Contract Documents,and shall so notify the Architect. §9.6.2 The Contractor shall promptly pay each Subcontractor,upon receipt of payment from the Owner,out of the amount paid to the Contractor on account of such Subcontractor's portion of the Work,the amount to which said Subcontractor is entitled,reflecting percentages actually retained from payments to the Contractor on account of such Subcontractor's portion of the Work.The Contractor shall,by appropriate agreement with each Subcontractor, require each Subcontractor to make payments to Sub-subcontractors in a similar manner. §9.6,3 The Architect will,on request,furnish to a Subcontractor,if practicable,information regarding percentages of completion or amounts applied for by the Contractor and action taken thereon by the Architect and Owner on ., account of portions of the Work done by such Subcontractor. §9.6.4 Neither the Owner nor Architect shall have an obligation to pay or to see to the payment of money to a Subcontractor except as may otherwise be required by law. -• §9.6.5 Payment to material suppliers shall be treated in a manner similar to that provided in Sections 9.6.2,9.6.3 and 9.6.4. §9.6.6 A Certificate for Payment,a progress payment,or partial or entire use or occupancy of the Project by the Owner shall not constitute acceptance of Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents. w §9.6.7 Unless the Contractor provides the Owner with a payment bond in the full penal sum of the Contract Sum, payments received by the Contractor for Work properly performed by Subcontractors and suppliers shall be held by the Contractor for those Subcontractors or suppliers who performed Work or furnished materials,or both,under contract with the Contractor for which payment was made by the Owner.Nothing contained herein shall require money to be placed in a separate account and not commingled with money of the Contractor,shall create any fiduciary liability or tort liability on the part of the Contractor for breach of trust or shall entitle any person or entity - to an award of punitive damages against the Contractor for breach of the requirements of this provision. §9.7 FAILURE OF PAYMENT §9.7.1 If the Architect does not issue a Certificate for Payment,through no fault of the Contractor,within seven days after receipt of the Contractor's Application for Payment,or if the Owner does not pay the Contractor within seven .. days after the date established in the Contract Documents the amount certified by the Architect or awarded by arbitration,then the Contractor may,upon seven additional days' written notice to the Owner and Architect, stop the Work until payment of the amount owing has been received.The Contract Time shall be extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased by the amount of the Contractor's reasonable costs of shut-down,delay and ' start-up,plus interest as provided for in the Contract Documents. AIA Document A201 TM—1997.Copyright ©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA' Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties.Unauthorized 28 reproduction or distribution of this AIA' Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 16:30:44 on 12/28/2006 under Order No.1000271037 1 which expires on 12/7/2007,and is not for resale. -- User Notes: (3175293692) §9.8 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION §9.8.1 Substantial Completion is the stage in the progress of the Work when the Work or designated portion thereof is sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work for its intended use. §9.8.2 When the Contractor considers that the Work,or a portion thereof which the Owner agrees to accept separately,is substantially complete,the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Architect a comprehensive list of M" items to be completed or corrected prior to final payment.Failure to include an item on such list does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. §9.8.3 Upon receipt of the Contractor's list,the Architect will make an inspection to determine whether the Work or ++ designated portion thereof is substantially complete.If the Architect's inspection discloses any item,whether or not included on the Contractor's list,which is not sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work or designated portion thereof for its intended use,the Contractor shall,before issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion,complete or correct such item upon notification by the Architect.In such case,the Contractor shall then submit a request for another inspection by the Architect to determine Substantial Completion. §9.8.4 When the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete,the Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion which shall establish the date of Substantial Completion,shall establish responsibilities of the Owner and Contractor for security,maintenance,heat,utilities,damage to the Work and insurance,and shall fix the time within which the Contractor shall finish all items on the list accompanying the Certificate.Warranties required by the Contract Documents shall commence on the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof unless otherwise provided in the Certificate of Substantial Completion. §9.8.5 The Certificate of Substantial Completion shall be submitted to the Owner and Contractor for their written 1"'" acceptance of responsibilities assigned to them in such Certificate.Upon such acceptance and consent of surety,if any,the Owner shall make payment of retainage applying to such Work or designated portion thereof.Such payment shall be adjusted for Work that is incomplete or not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. §9.9 PARTIAL OCCUPANCY OR USE §9.9.1 The Owner may occupy or use any completed or partially completed portion of the Work at any stage when such portion is designated by separate agreement with the Contractor,provided such occupancy or use is consented fla to by the insurer as required under Section 11.4.1.5 and authorized by public authorities having jurisdiction over the Work. Such partial occupancy or use may commence whether or not the portion is substantially complete,provided the Owner and Contractor have accepted in writing the responsibilities assigned to each of them for payments, retainage,if any,security,maintenance,heat,utilities,damage to the Work and insurance,and have agreed in writing concerning the period for correction of the Work and commencement of warranties required by the Contract Documents.When the Contractor considers a portion substantially complete,the Contractor shall prepare and submit a list to the Architect as provided under Section 9.8.2.Consent of the Contractor to partial occupancy or use shall not be unreasonably withheld.The stage of the progress of the Work shall be determined by written agreement between the Owner and Contractor or,if no agreement is reached,by decision of the Architect. §9.9.2 Immediately prior to such partial occupancy or use,the Owner,Contractor and Architect shall jointly inspect the area to be occupied or portion of the Work to be used in order to determine and record the condition of the Work. §9.9.3 Unless otherwise agreed upon,partial occupancy or use of a portion or portions of the Work shall not P" constitute acceptance of Work not complying with the requirements of the Contract Documents. §9.10 FINAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT §9.10.1 Upon receipt of written notice that the Work is ready for final inspection and acceptance and upon receipt of a final Application for Payment,the Architect will promptly make such inspection and, when the Architect finds the Work acceptable under the Contract Documents and the Contract fully performed,the Architect will promptly issue a final Certificate for Payment stating that to the best of the Architect's knowledge,information and belief,and on +* the basis of the Architect's on-site visits and inspections,the Work has been completed in accordance with terms and conditions of the Contract Documents and that the entire balance found to be due the Contractor and noted in AIA Document A201 TM—1997.Copyright ®1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American vp Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA6 Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties.Unauthorized 29 reproduction or distribution of this AIO Document,or any portion of It,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 16:30:44 on 12/28/2006 under Order No.1000271037 1 which expires on 12/7/2007,and is not for resale. — User Notes: (3175293692) the final Certificate is due and payable.The Architect's final Certificate for Payment will constitute a further representation that conditions listed in Section 9.10.2 as precedent to the Contractor's being entitled to final payment have been fulfilled. §9.10.2 Neither final payment nor any remaining retained percentage shall become due until the Contractor submits to the Architect(1)an affidavit that payrolls,bills for materials and equipment,and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which the Owner or the Owner's property might be responsible or encumbered(less amounts withheld by Owner)have been paid or otherwise satisfied,(2)a certificate evidencing that insurance required by the Contract Documents to remain in force after final payment is currently in effect and will not be canceled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days'prior written notice has been given to the Owner, (3)a written statement that the Contractor knows of no substantial reason that the insurance will not be renewable to cover the period required by the Contract Documents,(4)consent of surety,if any,to final payment and(5),if required by the Owner,other data •* establishing payment or satisfaction of obligations,such as receipts,releases and waivers of liens,claims,security interests or encumbrances arising out of the Contract,to the extent and in such form as may be designated by the Owner.If a Subcontractor refuses to furnish a release or waiver required by the Owner,the Contractor may furnish a bond satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify the Owner against such lien.If such lien remains unsatisfied after payments are made,the Contractor shall refund to the Owner all money that the Owner may be compelled to pay in discharging such lien,including all costs and reasonable attorneys' fees, §9.10.3 If,after Substantial Completion of the Work,final completion thereof is materially delayed through no fault of the Contractor or by issuance of Change.Orders affecting final completion,and the Architect so confirms,the Owner shall,upon application by the Contractor and certification by the Architect,and without terminating the Contract,make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted.If the remaining balance for Work not fully completed or corrected is less than retainage stipulated in the Contract Documents,and if bonds have been furnished,the written consent of surety to payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Architect prior to certification of such payment.Such payment shall be made under terms and conditions governing final payment, except that it shall not constitute a waiver of claims. §9.10.4 The making of final payment shall constitute a waiver of Claims by the Owner except those arising from: .1 liens,Claims,security interests or encumbrances arising out of the Contract and unsettled; .2 failure of the Work to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents;or .3 terms of special warranties required by the Contract Documents, §9.10.5 Acceptance of final payment by the Contractor,a Subcontractor or material supplier shall constitute a waiver of claims by that payee except those previously made in writing and identified by that payee as unsettled at the time of final Application for Payment. ARTICLE 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY §10.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND PROGRAMS §10.1.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for initiating,maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the performance of the Contract. §10.2 SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY §10.2.1 The Contractor shall take reasonable precautions for safety of,and shall provide reasonable protection to .� prevent damage,injury or loss to: .1 employees on the Work and other persons who may be affected thereby; .2 the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein,whether in storage on or off the site,under care,custody or control of the Contractor or the Contractor's Subcontractors or Sub- subcontractors;and .3 other property at the site or adjacent thereto, such as trees,shrubs,lawns, walks,pavements, roadways,structures and utilities not designated for removal,relocation or replacement in the course of construction. § 10.2.2 The Contractor shall give notices and comply with applicable laws,ordinances,rules,regulations and lawful orders of public authorities bearing on safety of persons or property or their protection from damage,injury or loss. .�. AIA Document A201 TM—1997.Copyright ©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This Ale Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and international Treaties.Unauthorized 30 reproduction or distribution of this A10 Document,or any portion of It,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 16;30:44 on 12/28/2006 under Order No.1000271037_1 which expires on 12/7/2007,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3175293692) §10.2.3 The Contractor shall erect and maintain,as required by existing conditions and performance of the Contract, reasonable safeguards for safety and protection,including posting danger signs and other warnings against hazards, promulgating safety regulations and notifying owners and users of adjacent sites and utilities. §10.2.4 When use or storage of explosives or other hazardous materials or equipment or unusual methods are necessary for execution of the Work,the Contractor shall exercise utmost care and carry on such activities under supervision of properly qualified personnel. §10.2.5 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage and loss(other than damage or loss insured under property insurance required by the Contract Documents)to property referred to in Sections 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.1.3 caused in whole or in part by the Contractor,a Subcontractor,a Sub-subcontractor,or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them,or by anyone for whose acts they may be liable and for which the Contractor is responsible under Sections 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.1.3,except damage or loss attributable to acts or omissions of the Owner or Architect or anyone directly or indirectly employed by either of them,or by anyone for whose acts either of them may be liable, and not attributable to the fault or negligence of the Contractor.The foregoing obligations of the Contractor are in addition to the Contractor's obligations under Section 3.18, §10.2.6 The Contractor shall designate a responsible member of the Contractor's organization at the site whose duty shall be the prevention of accidents.This person shall be the Contractor's superintendent unless otherwise designated by the Contractor in writing to the Owner and Architect. §10.2.7 The Contractor shall not load or permit any part of the construction or site to be loaded so as to endanger its safety. §10.3 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS §10.3.1 If reasonable precautions will be inadequate to prevent foreseeable bodily injury or death to persons resulting from a material or substance,including but not limited to asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl(PCB), encountered on the site by the Contractor,the Contractor shall,upon recognizing the condition,immediately stop Work in the affected area and report the condition to the Owner and Architect in writing. §10.3.2 The Owner shall obtain the services of a licensed laboratory to verify the presence or absence of the material or substance reported by the Contractor and,in the event such material or substance is found to be present,to verify that it has been rendered harmless.Unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents,the Owner shall furnish in writing to the Contractor and Architect the names and qualifications of persons or entities who are to perform tests verifying the presence or absence of such material or substance or who are to perform the task of removal or safe containment of such material or substance.The Contractor and the Architect will promptly reply to the Owner in writing stating whether or not either has reasonable objection to the persons or entities proposed by the Owner.If either the Contractor or Architect has an objection to a person or entity proposed by the Owner,the Owner shall propose another to whom the Contractor and the Architect have no reasonable objection.When the material or substance has been rendered harmless,Work in the affected area shall resume upon written agreement of the Owner 410 and Contractor.The Contract Time shall be extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased in the amount of the Contractor's reasonable additional costs of shut-down,delay and start-up,which adjustments shall be accomplished as provided in Article 7. IMP §10.3.3 To the fullest extent permitted by law,the Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless the Contractor, Subcontractors,Architect,Architect's consultants and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims,damages,losses and expenses,including but not limited to attorneys' fees,arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work in the affected area if in fact the material or substance presents the risk of bodily injury or death as described in Section 10.3.1 and has not been rendered harmless,provided that such claim,damage,loss or expense is attributable to bodily injury,sickness,disease or death,or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself)and provided that such damage,loss or expense is not due to the sole negligence of a party seeking indemnity. §10.4 The Owner shall not be responsible under Section 10.3 for materials and substances brought to the site by the Contractor unless such materials or substances were required by the Contract Documents. AIA Document A201 TM—1997.Copyright ®1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIAO Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties.Unauthorized 31 reproduction or distribution of this AIA' Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 16:30:44 on 12/28/2006 under Order No.1000271037 1 which expires on 12/7/2007,and is not for resale. — User Notes: (3175293692) or §10.5 If,without negligence on the part of the Contractor,the Contractor is held liable for the cost of remediation of am a hazardous material or substance solely by reason of performing Work as required by the Contract Documents,the Owner shall indemnify the Contractor for all cost and expense thereby incurred. §10.6 EMERGENCIES A §10.6.1 In an emergency affecting safety of persons or property,the Contractor shall act,at the Contractor's discretion,to prevent threatened damage,injury or loss.Additional compensation or extension of time claimed by the Contractor on account of an emergency shall be determined as provided in Section 4.3 and Article 7. Am ARTICLE 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS §11.1 CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY INSURANCE §11.1.1 The Contractor shall purchase from and maintain in a company or companies lawfully authorized to do M+ business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located such insurance as will protect the Contractor from claims set forth below which may arise out of or result from the Contractor's operations under the Contract and for which the Contractor may be legally liable,whether such operations be by the Contractor or by a Subcontractor or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them,or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable: no .1 claims under workers' compensation,disability benefit and other similar employee benefit acts which are applicable to the Work to be performed; .2 claims for damages because of bodily injury,occupational sickness or disease,or death of the Contractor's employees; .3 claims for damages because of bodily injury,sickness or disease,or death of any person other than the Contractor's employees; .4 claims for damages insured by usual personal injury liability coverage; **� .5 claims for damages,other than to the Work itself,because of injury to or destruction of tangible property,including loss of use resulting therefrom; .6 claims for damages because of bodily injury,death of a person or property damage arising out of ownership,maintenance or use of a motor vehicle; .7 claims for bodily injury or property damage arising out of completed operations;and .8 claims involving contractual liability insurance applicable to the Contractor's obligations under Section 3.18. §11.1.2 The insurance required by Section 11.1.1 shall be written for not less than limits of liability specified in the Contract Documents or required by law,whichever coverage is greater.Coverages,whether written on an occurrence or claims-made basis,shall be maintained without interruption from date of commencement of the Work until date of final payment and termination of any coverage required to be maintained after final payment. §11.1.3 Certificates of insurance acceptable to the Owner shall be filed with the Owner prior to commencement of the Work.These certificates and the insurance policies required by this Section 11.1 shall contain a provision that coverages afforded under the policies will not be canceled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days'prior written notice has been given to the Owner.If any of the foregoing insurance coverages are required to remain in force after final payment and are reasonably available,an additional certificate evidencing continuation of such coverage shall be submitted with the final Application for Payment as required by Section 9.10.2.Information concerning reduction of coverage on account of revised limits or claims paid under the General Aggregate,or both,shall be furnished by the Contractor with reasonable promptness in accordance with the Contractor's information and belief. §11.2 OWNER'S LIABILITY INSURANCE §11.2.1 The Owner shall be responsible for purchasing and maintaining the Owner's usual liability insurance. §11.3 PROJECT MANAGEMENT PROTECTIVE LIABILITY INSURANCE §11.3.1 Optionally,the Owner may require the Contractor to purchase and maintain Project Management Protective Liability insurance from the Contractor's usual sources as primary coverage for the Owner's,Contractor's and Architect's vicarious liability for construction operations under the Contract.Unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents,the Owner shall reimburse the Contractor by increasing the Contract Sum to pay the cost of purchasing and maintaining such optional insurance coverage,and the Contractor shall not be responsible for purchasing any other liability insurance on behalf of the Owner. The minimum limits of liability purchased with such coverage shall be equal to the aggregate of the limits required for Contractor's Liability Insurance under •� Sections 11.1.1.2 through 11.1.1.5. AIA Document A201 TM—1997.Copyright ®1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA®Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties.Unauthorized 32 *� reproduction or distribution of this AIA®Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 16:30:44 on 12/28/2006 under Order No.1 0002710371 which expires on 12/7/2007,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3175293692) §11.3.2 To the extent damages are covered by Project Management Protective Liability insurance,the Owner, Contractor and Architect waive all rights against each other for damages,except such rights as they may have to the proceeds of such insurance.The policy shall provide for such waivers of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise. §11.3.3 The Owner shall not require the Contractor to include the Owner,Architect or other persons or entities as additional insureds on the Contractor's Liability Insurance coverage under Section 11.1. §11.4 PROPERTY INSURANCE §11.4.1 Unless otherwise provided,the Owner shall purchase and maintain,in a company or companies lawfully authorized to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located,property insurance written on a builder's risk"all-risk"or equivalent policy form in the amount of the initial Contract Sum,plus value of subsequent Contract modifications and cost of materials supplied or installed by others,comprising total value for the entire Project at the site on a replacement cost basis without optional deductibles. Such property insurance shall be maintained,unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents or otherwise agreed in writing by all persons and entities who are ' beneficiaries of such insurance,until final payment has been made as provided in Section 9.10 or until no person or entity other than the Owner has an insurable interest in the property required by this Section 11.4 to be covered, whichever is later.This insurance shall include interests of the Owner,the Contractor,Subcontractors and Sub- subcontractors in the Project. §11.4.1.1 Property insurance shall be on an"all-risk"or equivalent policy form and shall include, without limitation, insurance against the perils of fire(with extended coverage)and physical loss or damage including,without duplication of coverage,theft,vandalism, malicious mischief,collapse,earthquake,flood,windstorm,falsework, testing and startup,temporary buildings and debris removal including demolition occasioned by enforcement of any applicable legal requirements,and shall cover reasonable compensation for Architect's and Contractor's services and expenses required as a result of such insured loss. §11.4.1.2 If the Owner does not intend to purchase such property insurance required by the Contract and with all of the coverages in the amount described above,the Owner shall so inform the Contractor in writing prior to commencement of the Work.The Contractor may then effect insurance which will protect the interests of the Contractor,Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors in the Work,and by appropriate Change Order the cost thereof shall be charged to the Owner.If the Contractor is damaged by the failure or neglect of the Owner to purchase or maintain insurance as described above,without so notifying the Contractor in writing,then the Owner shall bear all s reasonable costs properly attributable thereto. §11.4.1.3 If the property insurance requires deductibles,the Owner shall pay costs not covered because of such a deductibles. §11.4.1.4 This property insurance shall cover portions of the Work stored off the site,and also portions of the Work in transit. 100 §11.4.1.5 Partial occupancy or use in accordance with Section 9.9 shall not commence until the insurance company or companies providing property insurance have consented to such partial occupancy or use by endorsement or otherwise.The Owner and the Contractor shall take reasonable steps to obtain consent of the insurance company or companies and shall,without mutual written consent,take no action with respect to partial occupancy or use that would cause cancellation,lapse or reduction of insurance. §11.4.2 Boiler and Machinery Insurance.The Owner shall purchase and maintain boiler and machinery insurance required by the Contract Documents or by law, which shall specifically cover such insured objects during installation and until final acceptance by the Owner;this insurance shall include interests of the Owner,Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors in the Work,and the Owner and Contractor shall be named insureds. §11.4.3 Loss of Use Insurance.The Owner,at the Owner's option,may purchase and maintain such insurance as will insure the Owner against loss of use of the Owner's property due to fire or other hazards,however caused.The Owner waives all rights of action against the Contractor for loss of use of the Owner's property,including consequential losses due to fire or other hazards however caused. AIA Document A201TM—1997.Copyright®1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA*Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties.Unauthorized 33 reproduction or distribution of this AIA°' Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 16:30:44 on 12/2812006 under Order No.1000271037_1 which expires on 1217/2007,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3175293692) §11.4.4 If the Contractor requests in writing that insurance for risks other than those described herein or other special causes of loss be included in the property insurance policy,the Owner shall,if possible,include such insurance,and the cost thereof shall be charged to the Contractor by appropriate Change Order. §11.4.5 If during the Project construction period the Owner insures properties,real or personal or both,at or adjacent to the site by property insurance under policies separate from those insuring the Project,or if after final payment property insurance is to be provided on the completed Project through a policy or policies other than those insuring the Project during the construction period,the Owner shall waive all rights in accordance with the terms of Section 11.4.7 for damages caused by fire or other causes of loss covered by this separate property insurance.All separate policies shall provide this waiver of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise. §11.4.6 Before an exposure to loss may occur,the Owner shall file with the Contractor a copy of each policy that includes insurance coverages required by this Section 11.4.Each policy shall contain all generally applicable conditions,definitions,exclusions and endorsements related to this Project.Each policy shall contain a provision that the policy will not be canceled or allowed to expire,and that its limits will not be reduced,until at least 30 days' ... prior written notice has been given to the Contractor. §11.4.7 Waivers of Subrogation. The Owner and Contractor waive all rights against(1)each other and any of their subcontractors,sub-subcontractors,agents and employees,each of the other,and(2)the Architect,Architect's consultants, separate contractors described in Article 6,if any,and any of their subcontractors,sub-subcontractors, agents and employees,for damages caused by fire or other causes of loss to the extent covered by property insurance obtained pursuant to this Section 11.4 or other property insurance applicable to the Work,except such rights as they have to proceeds of such insurance held by the Owner as fiduciary.The Owner or Contractor,as appropriate,shall require of the Architect,Architect's consultants,separate contractors described in Article 6,if any,and the subcontractors,sub-subcontractors,agents and employees of any of them,by appropriate agreements,written where legally required for validity,similar waivers each in favor of other parties enumerated herein.The policies shall ...t provide such waivers of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise.A waiver of subrogation shall be effective as to a person or entity even though that person or entity would otherwise have a duty of indemnification,contractual or otherwise,did not pay the insurance premium directly or indirectly,and whether or not the person or entity had an insurable interest in the property damaged. §11.4.8 A loss insured under Owner's property insurance shall be adjusted by the Owner as fiduciary and made payable to the Owner as fiduciary for the insureds,as their interests may appear,subject to requirements of any applicable mortgagee clause and of Section 11.4.10.The Contractor shall pay Subcontractors their just shares of ..w insurance proceeds received by the Contractor,and by appropriate agreements,written where legally required for validity,shall require Subcontractors to make payments to their Sub-subcontractors in similar manner. §11.4.9 If required in writing by a party in interest,the Owner as fiduciary shall,upon occurrence of an insured loss, give bond for proper performance of the Owner's duties. The cost of required bonds shall be charged against proceeds received as fiduciary.The Owner shall deposit in a separate account proceeds so received,which the Owner shall distribute in accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach,or in accordance with '* an arbitration award in which case the procedure shall be as provided in Section 4.6.If after such loss no other special agreement is made and unless the Owner terminates the Contract for convenience,replacement of damaged property shall be performed by the Contractor after notification of a Change in the Work in accordance with Article .. 7. §11.4.10 The Owner as fiduciary shall have power to adjust and settle a loss with insurers unless one of the parties in interest shall object in writing within five days after occurrence of loss to the Owner's exercise of this power;if such .. objection is made,the dispute shall be resolved as provided in Sections 4.5 and 4.6.The Owner as fiduciary shall,in the case of arbitration,make settlement with insurers in accordance with directions of the arbitrators.If distribution of insurance proceeds by arbitration is required,the arbitrators will direct such distribution. §11.5 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND §11.5.1 The Owner shall have the right to require the Contractor to furnish bonds covering faithful performance of the Contract and payment of obligations arising thereunder as stipulated in bidding requirements or specifically required in the Contract Documents on the date of execution of the Contract. AIA Document A201 rm—1997.Copyright ©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA' Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties.Unauthorized 34 reproduction or distribution of this AIA' Document,or any portion of It,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 16:30:44 on 12/28/2006 under Order No.1000271037_1 which expires on 12/7/2007,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3175293692) 1 §11.5.2 Upon the request of any person or entity appearing to be a potential beneficiary of bonds covering payment of obligations arising under the Contract,the Contractor shall promptly furnish a copy of the bonds or shall permit a copy to be made. ARTICLE 12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK §12.1 UNCOVERING OF WORK §12.1.1 If a portion of the Work is covered contrary to the Architect's request or to requirements specifically expressed in the Contract Documents,it must,if required in writing by the Architect,be uncovered for the Architect's examination and be replaced at the Contractor's expense without change in the Contract Time. §12.1.2 If a portion of the Work has been covered which the Architect has not specifically requested to examine prior to its being covered,the Architect may request to see such Work and it shall be uncovered by the Contractor.If such Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents,costs of uncovering and replacement shall,by appropriate Change Order,be at the Owner's expense.If such Work is not in accordance with the Contract Documents, correction shall be at the Contractor's expense unless the condition was caused by the Owner or a separate contractor in which event the Owner shall be responsible for payment of such costs. §12.2 CORRECTION OF WORK §12.2.1 BEFORE OR AFTER SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION §12.2.1.1 The Contractor shall promptly correct Work rejected by the Architect or failing to conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents, whether discovered before or after Substantial Completion and whether or not fabricated,installed or completed.Costs of correcting such rejected Work,including additional testing and inspections and compensation for the Architect's services and expenses made necessary thereby,shall be at the Contractor's expense. §12.2.2 AFTER SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION §12.2.2.1 In addition to the Contractor's obligations under Section 3.5,if, within one year after the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof or after the date for commencement of warranties established under Section 9.9.1,or by terms of an applicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents, any of the Work is found to be not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents,the Contractor shall correct it promptly after receipt of written notice from the Owner to do so unless the Owner has previously given the Contractor a written acceptance of such condition.The Owner shall give such notice promptly after discovery of the condition.During the one-year period for correction of Work,if the Owner fails to notify the Contractor and give the Contractor an opportunity to make the correction,the Owner waives the rights to require correction by the Contractor and to make a claim for breach of warranty.If the Contractor fails to correct nonconforming Work within a reasonable time during that period after receipt of notice from the Owner or Architect,the Owner may correct it in accordance with Section 2.4. §12.2.2.2 The one-year period for correction of Work shall be extended with respect to portions of Work first performed after Substantial Completion by the period of time between Substantial Completion and the actual performance of the Work. §12.2.2.3 The one-year period for correction of Work shall not be extended by corrective Work performed by the Contractor pursuant to this Section 12.2. §12.2.3 The Contractor shall remove from the site portions of the Work which are not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents and are neither corrected by the Contractor nor accepted by the Owner. §12.2.4 The Contractor shall bear the cost of correcting destroyed or damaged construction,whether completed or partially completed,of the Owner or separate contractors caused by the Contractor's correction or removal of Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. §12.2.5 Nothing contained in this Section 12.2 shall be construed to establish a period of limitation with respect to other obligations which the Contractor might have under the Contract Documents.Establishment of the one-year period for correction of Work as described in Section 12.2.2 relates only to the specific obligation of the Contractor to correct the Work,and has no relationship to the time within which the obligation to comply with the Contract AIA Document A201TM—1997.Copyright ®1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA"'Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties.Unauthorized 35 reproduction or distribution of this A10 Document,or any portion of It,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 16:30:44 on 12/28/2006 under Order No.1000271037_1 which expires on 12/7/2007,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3175293692) Documents may be sought to be enforced,nor to the time within which proceedings may be commenced to establish .� the Contractor's liability with respect to the Contractor's obligations other than specifically to correct the Work. §12.3 ACCEPTANCE OF NONCONFORMING WORK §12.3.1 If the Owner prefers to accept Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents,the Owner may do so instead of requiring its removal and correction,in which case the Contract Sum will be reduced as appropriate and equitable.Such adjustment shall be effected whether or not final payment has been made. ARTICLE 13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS §13.1 GOVERNING LAW §13.1.1 The Contract shall be governed by the law of the place where the Project is located. *+ §13.2 SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS §13.2.1 The Owner and Contractor respectively bind themselves,their partners,successors,assigns and legal representatives to the other party hereto and to partners,successors,assigns and legal representatives of such other party in respect to covenants,agreements and obligations contained in the Contract Documents.Except as provided in Section 13.2.2,neither party to the Contract shall assign the Contract as a whole without written consent of the other.If either party attempts to make such an assignment without such consent,that party shall nevertheless remain legally responsible for all obligations under the Contract. §13.2.2 The Owner may,without consent of the Contractor,assign the Contract to an institutional lender providing construction financing for the Project.In such event,the lender shall assume the Owner's rights and obligations under the Contract Documents.The Contractor shall execute all consents reasonably required to facilitate such assignment. §13.3 WRITTEN NOTICE §13.3.1 Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual or a member of the firm or entity or to an officer of the corporation for which it was intended,or if delivered at or sent by registered or certified mail to the last business address known to the party giving notice. §13.4 RIGHTS AND REMEDIES §13.4.1 Duties and obligations imposed by the Contract Documents and rights and remedies available thereunder shall be in addition to and not a limitation of duties,obligations,rights and remedies otherwise imposed or available by law. §13.4.2 No action or failure to act by the Owner,Architect or Contractor shall constitute a waiver of a right or duty afforded them under the Contract,nor shall such action or failure to act constitute approval of or acquiescence in a breach thereunder,except as may be specifically agreed in writing. §13.5 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS §13.5.1 Tests,inspections and approvals of portions of the Work required by the Contract Documents or by laws, .. ordinances,rales,regulations or orders of public authorities having jurisdiction shall be made at an appropriate time. Unless otherwise provided,the Contractor shall make arrangements for such tests,inspections and approvals with an independent testing laboratory or entity acceptable to the Owner,or with the appropriate public authority, and shall A bear all related costs of tests,inspections and approvals.The Contractor shall give the Architect timely notice of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that the Architect may be present for such procedures.The Owner shall bear costs of tests,inspections or approvals which do not become requirements until after bids are received or negotiations concluded. §13.5.2 If the Architect,Owner or public authorities having jurisdiction determine that portions of the Work require additional testing,inspection or approval not included under Section 13.5.1,the Architect will,upon written authorization from the Owner, instruct the Contractor to make arrangements for such additional testing,inspection or approval by an entity acceptable to the Owner,and the Contractor shall give timely notice to the Architect of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that the Architect may be present for such procedures. Such costs,except as provided in Section 13.5.3,shall be at the Owner's expense. •+ AIA Document A201 TM—1997.Copyright ®1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIAe Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties.Unauthorized 36 reproduction or distribution of this AIAe Document,or any portion of It,may result In severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 16:30:44 on 12/28/2006 under Order No.1 0002710371 which expires on 12/7/2007,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3175293692) §13.5.3 If such procedures for testing,inspection or approval under Sections 13.5.1 and 13.5.2 reveal failure of the portions of the Work to comply with requirements established by the Contract Documents,all costs made necessary by such failure including those of repeated procedures and compensation for the Architect's services and expenses shall be at the Contractor's expense. §13.5.4 Required certificates of testing,inspection or approval shall,unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents,be secured by the Contractor and promptly delivered to the Architect. §13.5.5 If the Architect is to observe tests,inspections or approvals required by the Contract Documents,the Architect will do so promptly and,where practicable,at the normal place of testing. : . §13.5.6 Tests or inspections conducted pursuant to the Contract Documents shall be made promptly to avoid unreasonable delay in the Work. §13.6 INTEREST §13.6.1 Payments due and unpaid under the Contract Documents shall bear interest from the date payment is due at such rate as the parties may agree upon in writing or,in the absence thereof,at the legal rate prevailing from time to time at the place where the Project is located. §13.7 COMMENCEMENT OF STATUTORY LIMITATION PERIOD §13.7.1 As between the Owner and Contractor: .1 Before Substantial Completion. As to acts or failures to act occurring prior to the relevant date of Substantial Completion,any applicable statute of limitations shall commence to run and any alleged cause of action shall be deemed to have accrued in any and all events not later than such date of Substantial Completion; .2 Between Substantial Completion and Final Certificate for Payment. As to acts or failures to act occurring subsequent to the relevant date of Substantial Completion and prior to issuance of the final Certificate for Payment,any applicable statute of limitations shall commence to run and any alleged cause of action shall be deemed to have accrued in any and all events not later than the date of issuance of the final Certificate for Payment;and .3 After Final Certificate for Payment. As to acts or failures to act occurring after the relevant date of issuance of the final Certificate for Payment,any applicable statute of limitations shall commence to run and any alleged cause of action shall be deemed to have accrued in any and all events not later than the date of any act or failure to act by the Contractor pursuant to any Warranty provided under Section 3.5,the date of any correction of the Work or failure to correct the Work by the Contractor under Section 12.2,or the date of actual commission of any other act or failure to perform any duty or obligation by the Contractor or Owner,whichever occurs last. ARTICLE 14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT §14.1 TERMINATION BY THE CONTRACTOR §14.1.1 The Contractor may terminate the Contract if the Work is stopped for a period of 30 consecutive days through no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor,Sub-subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work under direct or indirect contract with the Contractor,for any of the following reasons: .1 issuance of an order of a court or other public authority having jurisdiction which requires all Work to be stopped; .2 an act of government,such as a declaration of national emergency which requires all Work to be stopped; .3 because the Architect has not issued a Certificate for Payment and has not notified the Contractor of the reason for withholding certification as provided in Section 9.4.1,or because the Owner has not made payment on a Certificate for Payment within the time stated in the Contract Documents;or .4 the Owner has failed to furnish to the Contractor promptly, upon the Contractor's request,reasonable evidence as required by Section 2.2.1. §14.1.2 The Contractor may terminate the Contract if,through no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor, P,. Sub-subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work under direct or indirect contract with the Contractor,repeated suspensions,delays or interruptions of the entire Work AIA Document A201 TM—1997.Copyright ®1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserve. WARNING:This AIA°'Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties.Unauthorized 37 reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 16:30:44 on 12/28/2006 under Order No.1 0002710371 which expires on 12/7/2007,and is not for resale. — User Notes: (3175293692) by the Owner as described in Section 14.3 constitute in the aggregate more than 100 percent of the total number of days scheduled for completion,or 120 days in any 365-day period,whichever is less. §14.1.3 If one of the reasons described in Section 14.1.1 or 14.1.2 exists,the Contractor may,upon seven days' written notice to the Owner and Architect,terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner payment for Work executed and for proven loss with respect to materials,equipment,tools,and construction equipment and machinery, including reasonable overhead,profit and damages. §14.1.4 If the Work is stopped for a period of 60 consecutive days through no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons performing portions of the Work under contract with the Contractor because the Owner has persistently failed to fulfill the Owner's obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to matters important to the progress of the Work,the Contractor may,upon seven additional days' written notice to the Owner and the Architect,terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner as provided in Section 14.1.3. §14.2 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CAUSE §14.2.1 The Owner may terminate the Contract if the Contractor: .1 persistently or repeatedly refuses or fails to supply enough properly skilled workers or proper materials; .2 fails to make payment to Subcontractors for materials or labor in accordance with the respective agreements between the Contractor and the Subcontractors; .3 persistently disregards laws,ordinances,or rules,regulations or orders of a public authority having jurisdiction;or .4 otherwise is guilty of substantial breach of a provision of the Contract Documents. §14.2.2 When any of the above reasons exist,the Owner,upon certification by the Architect that sufficient cause exists to justify such action,may without prejudice to any other rights or remedies of the Owner and after giving the Contractor and the Contractor's surety,if any, seven days' written notice,terminate employment of the Contractor and may,subject to any prior rights of the surety: .1 take possession of the site and of all materials,equipment,tools,and construction equipment and machinery thereon owned by the Contractor; .2 accept assignment of subcontracts pursuant to Section 5.4;and .3 finish the Work by whatever reasonable method the Owner may deem expedient.Upon request of the Contractor,the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor a detailed accounting of the costs incurred by the Owner in finishing the Work. §14.2.3 When the Owner terminates the Contract for one of the reasons stated in Section 14.2.1,the Contractor shall not be entitled to receive further payment until the Work is finished. ' §14.2.4 If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum exceeds costs of finishing the Work,including compensation for the Architect's services and expenses made necessary thereby,and other damages incurred by the Owner and not expressly waived,such excess shall be paid to the Contractor.If such costs and damages exceed the unpaid balance, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner.The amount to be paid to the Contractor or Owner,as the case may be, shall be certified by the Architect,upon application,and this obligation for payment shall survive termination of the Contract. �* §14.3 SUSPENSION BY THE OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE §14.3.1 The Owner may,without cause,order the Contractor in writing to suspend,delay or interrupt the Work in whole or in part for such period of time as the Owner may determine. §14.3.2 The Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be adjusted for increases in the cost and time caused by suspension,delay or interruption as described in Section 14.3.1.Adjustment of the Contract Sum shall include .. profit.No adjustment shall be made to the extent: .1 that performance is,was or would have been so suspended,delayed or interrupted by another cause for which the Contractor is responsible;or .2 that an equitable adjustment is made or denied under another provision of the Contract. AIA Document A201°M—1997.Copyright 01911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIO Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties.Unauthorized 38 ., reproduction or distribution of this AIA®'Document,or any portion of It,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 16:30:44 on 12/28/2006 under Order No.1000271037_1 which expires on 12/7/2007,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3175293692) §14.4 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE §14.4.1 The Owner may,at any time,terminate the Contract for the Owner's convenience and without cause. §14.4.2 Upon receipt of written notice from the Owner of such termination for the Owner's convenience,the Contractor shall: .1 cease operations as directed by the Owner in the notice; .2 take actions necessary,or that the Owner may direct,for the protection and preservation of the Work; and .3 except for Work directed to be performed prior to the effective date of termination stated in the notice,terminate all existing subcontracts and purchase orders and enter into no further subcontracts and purchase orders. §14.4.3 In case of such termination for the Owner's convenience,the Contractor shall be entitled to receive payment for Work executed,and costs incurred by reason of such termination,along with reasonable overhead and profit on the Work not executed. AIA Document A201 Ta—1997.Copyright ®1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American rae Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA' Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties.Unauthorized 39 reproduction or distribution of this AIA'Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 16:30:44 on 12/28/2006 under Order No.1000271037_1 which expires on 1217/2007,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3175293692) I SECTION 00800- SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 1.01 GENERAL CONDITIONS: The "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction," AIA Document A201, Fifteenth Edition, 1997, Articles 1 through 14 inclusive, is a part of this Contract and is bound herein. The General Conditions and all modifications listed hereinafter shall apply to the General Contract and all subcontracts. 1.02 SUPPLEMENTS: The following supplements modify, change, delete from or add to the "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction," AIA Document A201, Fifteenth Edition, 1997. Where any Article of the General Conditions is modified or any Paragraph, Subparagraph or Clause thereof is modified or deleted by these supplements, the unaltered provisions of that Article, Paragraph, Subparagraph or Clause shall remain in effect. 1.03 REFERENCE TO DIVISION 1: Where provisions of General Conditions relate to project administrative or work-related requirements of the Contract, some of those paragraphs are supplemented by Sections of Division 1, "General Requirements" of the Specifications. The paragraphs are 3.8, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 3.13, 3.14, 3.15, 9.2 and 9.10. ARTICLE 1 -GENERAL PROVISIONS 1.1 DEFINITIONS MIN Add to 1.1 the following Subparagraph 1.1.8: 1.1.8 MISCELLANEOUS DEFINITIONS 1.1.8.1 The term "product" as used in the Project Manual includes materials, systems and equipment. 1.1.8.2 The term "provide" as used in the Project Manual means to furnish and install. ARTICLE 3 - CONTRACTOR 3.5 WARRANTY Supplement as provided in Section 01700, EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS. 3.6 TAXES " Add the following paragraph: 3.6.2 The Owner is a tax exempt institution and will obtain an exemption certificate for the Contractor for taxes on certain Products or items, for purchasing Products or items for the Work. Comply with the State of Florida laws and regulations regarding tax-exempt construction projects. 3.8 ALLOWANCES 3.8.1 Supplement as provided in Section 01210 -ALLOWANCES. 3.8.2.2 Add the following to the end of Clause 3.8.2.2: except when installation is specified as part of the allowance in Section 01210 - ALLOWANCES. 3.10 CONTRACTOR'S SCHEDULE Supplement as provided in Section 01330 - SUBMITTAL PROCEEDURES. Proj. No. 07014 Supplementary Conditions 00800-1 .0 OF 3.11 DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES AT THE SITE Supplement as provided in Section 01700 - EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS. .W 3.12 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES Supplement as provided in Section 01330 - SUBMITTAL PROCEEDURES. 3.13 USE OF SITE Supplement as provided in Section 01100 - SUMMARY. 3.14 CUTTING AND PATCHING OF WORK Supplement as provided in Section 01300 - ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS. 3.15 CLEANING UP Supplement as provided in Section 01500 -TEMPORARY FACILITIES and Section 01700 - EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS. ARTICLE 4- ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 4.5 MEDIATION Delete paragraphs 4.5.1, 4.5.2, and 4.5.3. Add the following paragraph: 4.5.1 Any claim, dispute, or other matter in question arising out of or related to this Agreement shall be subject to mediation as a condition precedent to the institution of legal proceedings by either party. The Owner and Architect shall endeavor to resolve claims, disputes and other matters between them by mediation which, unless the parties mutually agree otherwise, shall be in accordance with the Construction Industry Mediation Rules of the American Arbitration Association currently in effect. Mediation shall proceed in advance of legal proceedings, which shall not be instituted until the mediation process is concluded. It is agreed that the mediation process must be complete within one hundred twenty(120) days of receipt of a request for mediation. If the mediation process is not complete within one hundred twenty (120) days of the request for mediation, litigation in a court of competent jurisdiction can be instituted by either party. 4.6 ARBITRATION Delete this Paragraph in it's entirety. ARTICLE 5 - SUBCONTRACTORS a Add the following new paragraphs: 5.2.1.1 Not later than 30 (thirty) days from the Contract Date, the Contractor shall provide a list showing the name of the manufacturer proposed to be used for each of the products identified in the technical sections of the Project Manual, and , where applicable, the name of the installing Subcontractor. ARTICLE 7- CHANGES IN THE WORK 7.1 CHANGES Supplement as provided in Section 01290, PAYMENT PROCEDURES. 7.3 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVES 7.3.6 In the first sentence, delete the words "a reasonable allowance for overhead and profit" and .. substitute "an allowance for overhead and profit in accordance with Clauses 7.3.10.1 through 7.3.10.6 below." Proj. No. 07014 Supplementary Conditions 00800-2 • Add the following Subparagraph 7.3.10 to 7.3: 7.3.10 In Subparagraph 7.3.6, the allowance for the combined overhead and profit included in the total cost to the Owner shall be based on the following schedule: .1 For the Contractor, for Work performed by the Contractor's own forces, the percentage of the cost as stated in Agreement. .2 For the Contractor, for Work performed by the Contractor's Subcontractor,the percentage of the amount due the Subcontractor as stated in the Agreement. .3 For each Subcontractor or Sub-subcontractor involved, for Work performed by that Subcontractor's or Sub-subcontractor's own forces, a mutually-acceptable fixed fee or percent of the cost. .4 For each Subcontractor, the Work performed by the Subcontractor's Sub-subcontractors, the percent of the amount due the Sub-subcontractor. " .5 Cost to which overhead and profit is to be applied shall be determined in accordance with Subparagraph 7.3.6. .6 In order to facilitate checking of quotations for extras or credits, all proposals, except ,. those so minor that their propriety can be seen by inspection, shall be accompanied by a complete itemization of costs including labor, materials and Subcontracts. Labor and materials shall be itemized in the manner prescribed above. Where major cost items are Subcontracts, they shall be itemized also. In no case will a change involving over $1,000.00 be approved without such itemization. ARTICLE 8-TIME 8.1 TIME 8.1.1 Add to subparagraph 8.1.1 the following sentence: The Contract time shall be as stipulated in the Contractor's Bid Form, unless modified in the Agreement. 8.3 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME Add the following Clauses 8.3.1.1 and 8.3.1.2 to 8.3.1: 8.3.1.1 Delays due to abnormal weather conditions will be allowed on a monthly basis. 8.3.1.2 The Contractor shall assume for his progress schedule a maximum number of working days lost per month as follows: .1 June, July and August: 1 day per month. .2 September, October and November:2 days per month. .3 December, January and February: 4 days per month. .4 March, April and May: 2 days per month. ARTICLE 9 - PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 9.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES Supplement as provided in Section 01290- PAYMENT PROCEDURES. 9.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 9.3.1 Add to subparagraph 9.3.1 the following sentence: "The form of Application for Payment shall be notarized AIA Document G702, Application and Certification for Payment, supported by AIA Document G703, Continuation Sheet, submitted in triplicate." Proj. No. 07014 Supplementary Conditions 00800-3 Add the following Clause 9.3.1.3 to 9.3.1: 9.3.1.3 Unless otherwise stated in the Owner-Contractor Agreement, the Owner will retain, until Final Payment, 10 percent of the amount due the Contractor on account of progress payments. At the Owner's discretion, retainage may be reduced to 5% of the amount due the Contractor after 50% of the project is complete. 9.8 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION Delete the second sentence and substitute the following: Opp 9.8.5 "The payment shall be sufficient to increase the total payments to 95 percent of the Contract Sum, less such amounts as the Architect shall determine for incomplete Work and unsettled claims." 9.10 FINAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT 9.10.2 In addition to the items listed in 9.10.2, the Contractor shall deliver to the Owner the items required in Section 01700- EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS before final payment will be made. ARTICLE 10 - PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 10.2 SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY Add the following Clause 10.2.4.1 to 10.2.4: 10.2.4.1 When use or storage of explosives or other hazardous materials or equipment or unusual methods are necessary,the Contractor shall give the Owner reasonable advance notice. 10.3 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS Add to 10.3 the following Subparagraph 10.3.4: 10.3.4 Non-Use of Asbestos: The Contractor shall not use asbestos or products containing asbestos on this project. At completion of Contract,the Contractor shall submit written certification that no asbestos or product containing asbestos was incorporated into the work. ARTICLE 11 - INSURANCE 11.1 CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY INSURANCE W" Add the following Clause 11.1.1.9 to 11.1.1: 11.1.1.9 Liability Insurance shall include all major divisions of coverage and be on a comprehensive am basis including: 1. Premises Operations (including X, C and U as applicable). 2. Independent Contractors' Protective. 3. Products and Completed Operations. am 4. Personal Injury Liability with Employment Exclusion deleted. 5. Contractual, including specified provision for Contractor's obligation under Paragraph 3.18. �- 6. Owned, non-owned and hired motor vehicles. 7. Broad Form Property Damage including Completed Operations. Add the following Clause 11.1.1.10 to 11.1.1: 11.1.1.10 If the General Liability coverages are provided by a Commercial General Liability Policy on a claims-made basis, the policy date or Retroactive Date shall predate the Contract; the termination date of the policy or applicable extended reporting period shall be no earlier than the termination date of coverages required to be maintained after final payment, certified in accordance with Subparagraph 9.10.2. Proj. No. 07014 Supplementary Conditions 00800-4 Add the following Clause 11.1.2.1 to 11.1.2: 11.1.2.1 The Contractor and all Subcontractors, at their own expense, shall provide and maintain insurance in companies acceptable to the Owner as follows: 1 WORKMEN'S COMPENSATION: As required by all applicable Federal, State, Maritime or other laws including Employers' Liability with a limit of at least $100,000. .2 COMPREHENSIVE GENERAL LIABILITY: Including Contractor's Liability; Contingent Liability; Contractual Liability; Completed Operations and Products Liability all on the occurrence basis with Personal exclusion relating to Explosion, Collapse and Underground Property Damage. Completed Operations Liability shall be kept in force for at least two years after the date of final completion. Minimum limits to be as follows: BODILY INJURY Each Occurrence $1,000,000.00 Aggregate $1,000,000.00 PROPERTY DAMAGE Each Occurrence $500,000.00 Aggregate $1,000,000.00 .3 COMPREHENSIVE AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY: Including non-ownership and hired car coverage as well as owned vehicles with minimum limits as follows: BODILY INJURY Each Person $300,000.00 Aggregate $500,000.00 PROPERTY DAMAGE Each Occurrence $100,000.00 11.1.3 Add the following sentences to Subparagraph 11.1.3: "If this insurance is written on the Comprehensive General Liability policy form, the Certificates shall be AIA Document G705, Certificate of Insurance. If this insurance is written on a Commercial General Liability policy form, ACORD form 25S will be acceptable." Add the following Clause 11.1.3.1 to 11.1.3: 11.1.3.1 Furnish one copy of certificates herein required for each copy of Agreement; specifically set forth evidence of all coverage required by Subparagraphs 11.1.1, 11.1.2 and 11.1.3. Furnish to the Owner copies of any endorsements that are issued subsequently, amending coverage or limits. 11.2 OWNER'S LIABILITY INSURANCE Delete Subparagraph 11.2.1 and substitute the following: 11.2.1 The Contractor shall provide an Owner's and Contractor's Protective Liability Policy in the name of the Owner with limits as follows: BODILY INJURY Each Occurrence $500,000.00 Aggregate $500,000.00 PROPERTY DAMAGE Each Occurrence $500,000.00 Aggregate $500,000.00 Proj. No. 07014 Supplementary Conditions 00800-5 11.4 PROPERTY INSURANCE ww 11.4.1 Modify the first sentence of Subparagraph 11.4.1 to require the Contractor to purchase and maintain property insurance upon the entire work at the site to the full insurable value thereof as follows: Delete "Unless otherwise provided,the Owner" and substitute "The Contractor." Add the following sentences: The form of policy for this coverage shall be Completed Value. If the Owner is damaged by the failure of the Contractor to maintain such insurance,then the Contractor shall bear all reasonable costs properly attributable thereto. This insurance shall be specific as to coverage and not considered as contributing insurance with any permanent insurance maintained on the present premises. 11.4.1.2 Delete Clause 11.4.1.2. 11.4.1.3 Delete Clause 11.4.1.3. 11.4.4 Delete Subparagraph 11.4.4. Delete Subparagraph 11.4.6 and substitute the following: 11.4.6 Before an exposure to loss may occur,the Contractor shall file with the Owner two certified copies of the policy or policies providing this Property Insurance coverage, each containing those endorsements specifically related to the Project. Each policy shall contain a provision ` that the policy will not be canceled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days prior written notice has been given to the Contractor. 11.4.7 Modify Subparagraph 11.4.7 by substituting "Contractor"for"Owner" at the end of the first sentence. 11.4.8 Modify Subparagraph 11.4.8 by substituting "Contractor" for "Owner" as fiduciary; except that at the first reference to"Owner" in the first sentence,the word "this" should be substituted for "Owner's." w 11.4.9 Modify Subparagraph 11.4.9 by substituting "Contractor"for "Owner" each time the latter word appears, except in the last sentence. 11.4.10 Modify Subparagraph 11.4.10 by substituting "Contractor" for "Owner" each time the latter word appears. ww End of Section .w w w Proj. No. 07014 Supplementary Conditions 00800-6 V" MO SECTION 01100- SUMMARY PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Contract description. B. Contractor's use of site. 1.2 CONTRACT DESCRIPTION A. Work of the Project includes new construction of a Gate House Building for The Palms at Fleet Landing, including all sitework, building pad preparation, underground utilities, and the architectural, structural, mechanical, electrical and plumbing portions of the Work. B. Perform Work of Contract under stipulated sum contract with Owner in accordance with Conditions of Contract. M 1.3 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF SITE A. Confine operations at site to areas permitted by Law, Ordinances, Permits, and Contract Documents. No B. Limit use of site for Work and storage as follows: 1. Restrict work and storage to construction areas indicated on Drawings. 2. Access site only as designated by Owner. 3. Restrict parking to areas designated by Owner. 4. Do not perform operations that would interrupt or delay Owner's daily operations. 5. Maintain Owner, and public access at all times to existing buildings, parking, drives and walks. 6. Restrict construction personnel from access to other areas of site and existing building areas, except as required to perform new and alterations Work. C. Do not unreasonably encumber site with materials or equipment. D. Do not load structure with weight that will endanger structure. E. Assume full responsibility for protection and safekeeping of products stored on premises. F. Move stored products which interfere with operations of Owner. G. Obtain and pay for use of additional storage or work areas needed for operations. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used. END OF SECTION I" Proj. No. 07014 Summary 01100 - 1 no mw SECTION 01210 - ALLOWANCES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Cash allowances. 1.2 GENERAL: A. The Contractor shall include in his Contract Sum the Cash Allowances specified. B. Items covered by these allowances shall be supplied for such amounts and by such persons as the Owner or Architect may direct. C. Expenditures from Cash Allowances shall be only upon written authorization of the Architect, approved by the Owner. Expenditures shall be kept within amounts set forth, unless specific authorization of Architect and approval of Owner provides otherwise. D. Any unexpended balances of Cash Allowances shall revert to the Owner in the final settlement of the Contract. 1.3 CASH ALLOWANCES A. Costs Included in Cash Allowances: Cost of product to Contractor or Subcontractor, less applicable trade discounts. include delivery to site and applicable taxes. Where scheduled include labor for installation and finishing. B. Costs Not Included in Cash Allowances But Included in Contract Sum/Price: Product delivery to site and handling at site, including unloading, uncrating, and storage; protection of products from elements and from damage. C. Architect Responsibilities: 1. Consult with Contractor for consideration and selection of products, suppliers, and installers. 2. Select products in consultation with Owner and transmit decision to Contractor. �• 3. Prepare Change Order. D. Contractor Responsibilities: 1. Assist Architect in selection of products, suppliers and installers. 2. Obtain proposals from suppliers and installers and offer recommendations. 3. On notification of selection by Architect, execute purchase agreement with designated supplier and installer. 4. Arrange for and process shop drawings, product data, and samples. Arrange for delivery. 5. Promptly inspect products upon delivery for completeness, damage, and defects. Submit claims for transportation damage. 6. Coordinate installation of allowance items with related building spaces, materials, equipment and scheduling. 7. Provide adequate storage space, construction space and access to work for allowance items. 8. Notify allowance item suppliers or subcontractors of required delivery dates and installation periods established on project construction schedule. 9. Install and finish products in accordance with requirements of referenced specification sections. E. Differences in costs will be adjusted by Change Order, F. Allowances Schedule: 1. Fountain: Include in Contract Sum the cash sum of$15,000.00 for purchase, delivery and installation of materials and equipment for custom fountains. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used. Proj. No. 07014 Allowance 01210 - 1 PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used. .. END OF SECTION Proj. No. 07014 Allowance 01210 - 2 SECTION 01290 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES 9" PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Schedule of values. B. Applications for payment. C. Change procedures. D. Defect assessment. 1.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Submit printed schedule on AIA Form G703 - Continuation Sheet for G702. Contractor's standard form or electronic media printout will be considered. B. Submit Schedule of Values in duplicate within 15 days after date of Owner-Contractor Agreement. C. Format: Utilize Table of Contents of this Project Manual. Identify each line item with number and title of major specification Section. D. Include in each line item, amount of Allowances specified in this section. E. Include within each line item, direct proportional amount of Contractor's overhead and profit. F. Revise schedule to list approved Change Orders, with each Application For Payment. 1.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT A. Submit three copies of each application on AIA Form G702 -Application and Certificate for Payment and AIA G703 - Continuation Sheet for G702. B. Content and Format: Utilize Schedule of Values for listing items in Application for Payment. C. Submit updated construction schedule with each Application for Payment. D. Payment Period: Submit at intervals stipulated in the Agreement. E. Submit with transmittal letter as specified for Submittals in Section 01330. F. Substantiating Data: When Architect requires substantiating information, submit data justifying dollar amounts in question. Include the following with Application for Payment: 1. Current construction photographs specified in Section 01330. 2. Partial release of liens from major subcontractors and vendors. 3. Record documents as specified in Section 01700, for review by Owner which will be returned to Contractor. 4. Affidavits attesting to off-site stored products. 5. Construction progress schedules, revised and current as specified in Section 01330. 1.4 CHANGE PROCEDURES A. Submittals: Submit name of individual authorized to receive change documents, and be responsible for informing others in Contractor's employ or Subcontractors of changes to the Work. B. The Architect will advise of minor changes in the Work not involving adjustment to Contract Sum/Price or Contract Time by issuing supplemental instructions on AIA Form G710. C. The Architect may issue a Proposal Request including a detailed description of proposed change with supplementary or revised Drawings and specifications, a change in Contract Time for executing the change and the period of time during which the requested price MR will be considered valid. Contractor will prepare and submit estimate within 10 days. D. Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for change to Architect, describing proposed change and its full effect on the Work. Include a statement describing reason for the change, and effect on Contract Sum/Price and Contract Time with full documentation. Prod,No.(37(314 Payment Procedures 01290- 1 E. Stipulated Sum/Price Change Order: Based on Proposal Request and Contractor's fixed price quotation or Contractor's request for Change Order as approved by Architect. F. Unit Price Change Order: For contract unit prices and quantities, the Change Order will be executed on fixed unit price basis. For unit costs or quantities of units of work which are not pre-determined, execute Work under Construction Change Directive. Changes in Contract Sum/Price or Contract Time will be computed as specified for Time and Material ° Change Order. G. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue directive, on AIA Form G713 Construction Change Directive signed by Owner, instructing Contractor to proceed with change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. Document will describe changes in the Work, and designate method of determining any change in Contract Sum/Price or Contract Time. Promptly execute change. H. Time and Material Change Order: Submit itemized account and supporting data after �* completion of change, within time limits indicated in Conditions of the Contract. Architect will determine change allowable in Contract Sum/Price and Contract Time as provided in Contract Documents. I. Maintain detailed records of work done on Time and Material basis. Provide full information required for evaluation of proposed changes, and to substantiate costs for changes in the Work. J. Document each quotation for change in cost or time with sufficient data to allow evaluation of quotation. K. Change Order Forms: AIA G701 Change Order. L. Execution of Change Orders: Architect will issue Change Orders for signatures of parties as provided in Conditions of the Contract. .� M. Correlation Of Contractor Submittals: 1. Promptly revise Schedule of Values and Application for Payment forms to record each authorized Change Order as separate line item and adjust Contract • Sum/Price. 2. Promptly revise progress schedules to reflect change in Contract Time, revise sub-schedules to adjust times for other items of work affected by the change, and resubmit. 3. Promptly enter changes in Project Record Documents. 1.5 DEFECT ASSESSMENT ••a A. Replace the Work, or portions of the Work, not conforming to specified requirements. B. If, in the opinion of the Architect, it is not practical to remove and replace the Work, the Architect will direct appropriate remedy or adjust payment. C. The defective Work may remain, but unit sum/price will be adjusted to new sum/price at discretion of Architect. D. Defective Work will be partially repaired to instructions of Architect and unit sum/price will be adjusted to new sum/price at discretion of Architect. ... E. Individual specification sections may modify these options or may identify specific formula or percentage sum/price reduction. F. Authority of Architect to assess defects and identify payment adjustments, is final. G. Non-Payment For Rejected Products: Payment will not be made for rejected products for any of the following: 1. Products wasted or disposed of in a manner that is not acceptable. 2. Products determined as unacceptable before or after placement. 3. Products not completely unloaded from transporting vehicle. 4. Products placed beyond lines and levels of required Work. 5. Products remaining on hand after completion of the Work. 6. Loading, hauling, and disposing of rejected products. PART 2 AND PART 3 ., Not Used. END OF SECTION Proj. No. 07014 Payment Procedures 01290 - 2 IMP SECTION 01300 -ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Coordination and project conditions. B. Preconstruction meeting. C. Progress meetings. D. Preinstallation meetings. E. Cutting and patching. 1.2 COORDINATION AND PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and Work of various sections of Project Manual to ensure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements. B. Verify utility requirements and characteristics of operating equipment are compatible with building utilities. Coordinate work of various sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing,connecting to, and placing in service, operating equipment. C. Coordinate space requirements, supports, and installation of mechanical and electrical Work indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts, and conduit, as closely as practicable; place runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs. D. In finished areas conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements. E. Coordinate completion and clean-up of Work of separate sections in preparation for Substantial Completion. F. After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for correction of defective Work and Work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of Owner's activities. 1.3 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING A. Architect will schedule meeting after Notice of Award. B. Attendance Required: Owner, Architect, and Contractor. C. Agenda: 1. Submission of executed bonds and insurance certificates. 2. Distribution of Contract Documents. 3. Submission of list of Subcontractors, list of products, schedule of values, and progress schedule. 4. Designation of personnel representing parties in Contract, and Architect. 5. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, substitutions, applications for payments, proposal request, Change Orders, and Contract closeout procedures. 6. Scheduling. 7. Use of premises by Owner and Contractor. 8. Owner's requirements. 9. Construction facilities and controls provided by Owner. 10. Temporary utilities provided by Owner. 11. Survey and building layout. 12. Security and housekeeping procedures. 13. Schedules. 14. Application for payment procedures. 15. Procedures for testing. 16. Procedures for maintaining record documents. 17. Requirements for start-up of equipment. 18. Inspection and acceptance of equipment put into service during construction period. Prod. Na.07014 Administrative Requirements 01300 - 1 MR No D. Architect will record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with copies to Contractor, Owner, and those affected by decisions made. no 1.4 PROGRESS MEETINGS A. Schedule and administer meetings throughout progress of the Work at maximum monthly intervals. B. Make arrangements for meetings, prepare agenda with copies for participants, preside at meetings. C. Attendance Required: Job superintendent, major subcontractors and suppliers, Owner, .� Architect, as appropriate to agenda topics for each meeting. D. Agenda: 1. Review minutes of previous meetings. 2. Review of Work progress. -w 3. Field observations, problems, and decisions. 4. Identification of problems impeding planned progress. 5. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals. 6. Review of off-site fabrication and delivery schedules. 7. Maintenance of progress schedule. 8. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules. 9. Planned progress during succeeding work period. -- 10. Coordination of projected progress. 11. Maintenance of quality and work standards. 12. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination. 13. Other business relating to Work. E. Architect record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with copies to Contractor, Owner, and those affected by decisions made. 1.5 PREINSTALLATION MEETING A. When required in individual specification sections, convene preinstallation meeting at Project site prior to commencing work of specific section. B. Require attendance of parties directly affecting, or affected by, Work of specific section. C. Notify Architect four days in advance of meeting date. D. Prepare agenda and preside at meeting: 1. Review conditions of installation, preparation and installation procedures. 2. Review coordination with related work. E. Architect will record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with copies to Contractor, Owner, and those affected by decisions made. am PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Employ skilled and experienced installer to perform cutting and patching. B. Submit written request in advance of cutting or altering elements affecting: 1. Structural integrity of element. 2. Integrity of weather-exposed or moisture-resistant elements. 3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of element. 4. Visual qualities of sight exposed elements. 5. Work of Owner or separate contractor. C. Execute cutting, fitting, and patching including excavation and fill, to complete Work, and to: 1. Fit the several parts together, to integrate with other Work. 2. Uncover Work to install or correct ill-timed Work. Proi. No. 07014 Administrative Requirements 01300 - 2 3. Remove and replace defective and non-conforming Work. * 4. Remove samples of installed Work for testing. 5. Provide openings in elements of Work for penetrations of mechanical and electrical Work. D. Execute work by methods to avoid damage to other Work, and to provide proper surfaces to receive patching and finishing. E. Cut masonry and concrete materials using masonry saw or core drill. F. Restore Work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. G. Fit Work tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces. H. Maintain integrity of wall, ceiling, or floor construction; completely seal voids. IW I. At penetrations of fire rated walls, partitions, ceiling, or floor construction, completely seal voids with fire rated material in accordance with Section 07840 to full thickness of penetrated element. J. Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finishes. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection; for assembly, refinish entire unit. K. Identify hazardous substances or conditions exposed during the Work to Architect for decision or remedy. END OF SECTION Proj. No. 07014 Administrative Requirements 01300- 3 an wo ,o„ ow 0" ..r SECTION 01330- SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Submittal procedures. B. Construction progress schedules. C. Proposed products list. D. Product data. E. Shop drawings. F. Samples. G. Design data. H. Test reports. I. Certificates. J. Manufacturer's instructions. K. Manufacturer's field reports. L. Erection drawings. 1.2 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Identify Project, Contractor, subcontractor and supplier; pertinent drawing and detail number, and specification section number, appropriate to submittal. B. Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialled certifying that review, approval, verification of products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and coordination of information is in accordance with requirements of the Work and Contract Documents. C. Schedule submittals to expedite Project, and deliver to Architect. Coordinate submission of related items. D. For each submittal for review, allow 15 days excluding delivery time to and from Contractor. E. Identify variations from Contract Documents and product or system limitations which may be detrimental to successful performance of completed Work. F. Allow space on submittals for Contractor and Architect review stamps. G. When revised for resubmission, identify changes made since previous submission. H. Distribute copies of reviewed submittals as appropriate. Instruct parties to promptly report inability to comply with requirements. I. Submittals not requested will not be recognized or processed. 1.3 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULES A. Submit initial schedules within 15 days after date established in Notice to Proceed. After review, resubmit required revised data within ten days. B. Submit revised Progress Schedules with each Application for Payment. C. Distribute copies of reviewed schedules to Project site file, subcontractors, suppliers, and other concerned parties. D. Instruct recipients to promptly report, in writing, problems anticipated by projections indicated in schedules. E. Submit computer generated horizontal bar chart with separate line for each major portion of Work or operation, identifying first work day of each week. F. Show complete sequence of construction by activity, identifying Work of separate stages and other logically grouped activities. Indicate early and late start, early and late finish, float dates, and duration. G. Indicate estimated percentage of completion for each item of Work at each submission. H. Submit separate schedule of submittal dates for shop drawings, product data, and samples, including dates reviewed submittals will be required from Architect. Indicate decision dates for selection of finishes. I. Indicate delivery dates. Proj. No. 07014 Submittal Procedures 01330-1 J. Revisions To Schedules: 1. Indicate progress of each activity to date of submittal, and projected completion date of each activity. 2. Identify activities modified since previous submittal, major changes in scope, and other identifiable changes. 3. Prepare narrative report to define problem areas, anticipated delays, and impact on Schedule. Report corrective action taken, or proposed, and its effect. 1.4 PROPOSED PRODUCTS LIST A. Within 15 days after date of Notice to Proceed, submit list of major products proposed for use, with name of manufacturer,trade name, and model number of each product. B. For products specified only by reference standards, give manufacturer, trade name, model or catalog designation, and reference standards. 1.5 PRODUCT DATA A. Product Data: Submit to Architect for review for limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and design concept expressed in Contract Documents. Provide copies and distribute in accordance with SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES article and for record documents purposes described in Section 01700. B. Submit number of copies Contractor requires, plus two copies Architect will retain. -• C. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement manufacturers' standard data to provide information specific to this Project. D. Indicate product utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances. E. After review distribute in accordance with Submittal Procedures article above and provide copies for record documents described in Section 01700. 1.6 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Shop Drawings: Submit to Architect for review for limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and design concept expressed in Contract Documents. Produce copies and distribute in accordance with SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES article and for record documents purposes described in Section 01700. B. Indicate special utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances. ,.. C. Submit number of opaque reproductions Contractor requires, plus two copies Architect will retain. 1.7 SAMPLES A. Samples: Submit to Architect for review for limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and design concept expressed in Contract Documents. Produce duplicates and distribute in accordance with SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES article and for record documents purposes described in Section 01700. B. Samples For Selection as Specified in Product Sections: 1. Submit to Architect for aesthetic, color, or finish selection. 2. Submit samples of finishes textures, and patterns for Architect selection. 3. After review, produce duplicates and distribute in accordance with SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES article and for record documents purposes described in Section 01700. C. Submit samples to illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of Products, with integral parts and attachment devices. Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing work. D. Include identification on each sample, with full Project information. E. Submit number of samples specified in individual specification sections; Architect will retain one sample. F. Reviewed samples which may be used in the Work are indicated in individual specification sections. Proj. No. 07014 Submittal Procedures 01330-2 1.8 DESIGN DATA A. Submit for Architect knowledge as contract administrator or for Owner. B. Submit for information for limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and design concept expressed in Contract Documents. M" 1.9 TEST REPORTS A. Submit for Architect's knowledge as contract administrator or for Owner. B. Submit test reports for information for limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and design concept expressed in Contract Documents. 1.10 CERTIFICATES A. When specified in individual specification sections, submit certification by manufacturer, installation/application subcontractor, or Contractor to Architect, in quantities specified for Product Data. B. Indicate material or product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit -190 supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate. C. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or Product, but must be acceptable to Architect. 1.11 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS A. When specified in individual specification sections, submit printed instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, adjusting, and finishing, to Architect for delivery to Owner in quantities specified for Product Data. B. Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention, and special environmental criteria required for application or installation. 1.12 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD REPORTS A. Submit reports for Architect's benefit as contract administrator or for Owner. B. Submit report within 30 days of observation to Architect for information. C. Submit for information for limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and design concept expressed in Contract Documents. 1.13 ERECTION DRAWINGS A. Submit drawings for Architect's benefit as contract administrator or for Owner. B. Submit for information for limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and design concept expressed in Contract Documents. C. Data indicating inappropriate or unacceptable Work may be subject to action by Architect or Owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used. END OF SECTION Proj. No. 07014 Submittal Procedures 01330-3 SECTION 01353 - CADD FILE WAIVER PART I - GENERAL 1.1 DOCUMENTS A. Electronic Files: The Architect, at his sole discretion and without obligation, will make graphic portions of the contract documents available for use by the contractor in electronic format by request. The electronic documents are proprietary, and remain the Architect's Instruments of Service and shall be for use solely with respect to this project, as provided in the Standard Form of Agreement between Architect and Owner. 1.2 AVAILABILITY A. Electronic files shall be released only after bids have been received for the project and contracts have been signed with the contractors. B. The contractor shall acknowledge receipt of CAD files in DXF or DWG format for this project. The files are provided as a convenience to the User, for use in preparing shop drawings and/or coordination drawings related to the construction of this Project only. These files and the information contained within are the property of the Architect, and may not be reproduced or used in any format except in conjunction with the Project. 1.3 LIMITATIONS A. The User acknowledges that the information provided in these files is not a substitution or .m, replacement for the Contract Documents and does not become a Contract Document. The User acknowledges that neither the Architect, the Consultants, or the Owner warrant or make any representation that the information contained in these files reflect the Contract Documents in their entirety. The User assumes full responsibility in the use of these files, including the responsibility to see that all Project Manual modifications, addenda, bulletins, clarifications and changes to the drawings executed as a part of the Contract Documents have been incorporated. B. The User acknowledges that the furnishing of these files in no way relieves the User from the responsibility for the preparation of shop drawings or other schedules as set forth in the Contract between the Contractor and the Owner. 1.4 COST AND FORMAT A. The electronic documents are available in the .DWG format for AutoCAD Release 2004 for a cost of$100 for the first sheet and $30 per sheet for each sheet thereafter. Providing the documents in the .DXF format will be an additional charge of$10.00 per sheet. Charges are for the Architect's time to prepare the documents in the format stated. They are available through the Architect's office on a C.O.D. basis only. A sample of the format will be provided by the Architect upon request by the contractor, for the purpose of testing the compatibility of the format to contractor's systems. B. The electronic documents shall be stripped of the Project's name and address, the Architect's and Engineer's and any consultant's name and address, and any professional licenses indicated on the contract documents. Use of these electronic documents is solely at the contractor's risk, and shall in no way alter the contractor's Contract for Construction. Proj. No. 07014 CADD File Waver 01353 - 1 1.5 DISCLAIMER A. The User agrees to indemnify, hold harmless and defend the Architect, the Consultants, the Owner, the Client and any of their agents from any litigation resulting from the use of (by any means of reproduction or electronic media) these files. The Architect makes no representation regarding fitness for any particular purpose, or suitability for use with any software or hardware, and shall not be responsible or liable for errors, defects, inexactitudes, or anomalies in the data, information, or documents (including drawings and specifications) caused by the Architect's or its consultant's computer software or hardware defects or errors; the Architect's or its consultant's electronic or disk transmittal of data, information or documents; or the Architect's or its consultant's reformatting or automated conversion of data, information or documents electronically or disk transmitted from the Architect's consultants to the Architect. The contractor waives all claims against the Architect, its employees, officers and consultants for any and all damages, losses, or expenses the contractor incurs from such defects or errors in the electronic documents. Furthermore, the contractor shall indemnify, defend, and hold harmless the Architect, and -�• its consultants together with their respective employees and officers, harmless from and against any claims, suits, demands, causes of action, losses, damages or expenses (including all attorney's fees and litigation expenses) attributed to errors or defects in data, information or documents, including drawings and specifications, resulting from the contractor's distribution of electronic documents to other contractors, persons, or entities. PART 2— PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3—EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION A. The"Agreement"shall be submitted with accompanying payment to the Architect prior to delivery of files. END OF SECTION Proj. No. 07014 CADD File Waver 01353 - 2 :: Noelker and Hull Associates, Inc. Architecture + Master Planning + Interior Design ELECTRONIC DATA FILE RELEASE Purchasing any files indicates recipient's acceptance of the terms and conditions outlined in Section 01353. If you are in agreement with the requirements above, please fill in the required information and return via fax to Noelker and Hull Associates Inc., at 717-263-6031. Once we receive your fax we will email or mail the requested electronic documents. Name of Project: Drawings Available are limited to Floor Company Name: Plans and Roof Plans Address: City: State: Zip: Attn: Email Address: (Signature) (Date) (Please print name and title) 30 West King Street,Chambersburg,PA 17201 717.263.8464 www.noelkerhull.com Proj. No. 07014 CADD File Waver 01353- 3 no C:;cyxa.sxltin� EY-�gi�c�l,�cx�s �1 l \1"r•St l)i:u7ec+ncl �,tt•rit < • tiuite .;(rt) (_jiikc•rtilitj4. \ID 2087S RELEASE FORM FOR TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL DATA TO: I RE: The digital data being furnished to you has been generated for the exclusive use of the staff of Abel Consulting Engineers, P.A. (ACEPA). ACEPA makes no guarantee or warranty either assumed or implied as to the accuracy of this data. The use of the data by any party other than the staff of ACEPA is to be done strictly at the sole risk of that party.. If when reviewing any of this data there is a discrepancy between the drawing elements and the dimensions called out on the face of the drawing, the dimensions called out on the face of the drawing shall govern. ' The party receiving the data shall to the fullest extent permitted by law hold harmless Abel Consulting Engineers: P.A, from all claims, damages, losses and expenses, including attorney's fees, arising out of or resulting from the use of the data. Furthermore, the recipient of this data shall not transmit it to any other party without disclosing any of the above limitations. That having been said, ACEPA reserves the right to remove all indicia of ownership and/or involvement from each electronic display. if data or material prepared from this data is transmitted to other parties without fully disclosing all of the above limitations, such transmittal shall constitute an agreement to release Abel Consulting Engineers, P.A. from all liability arising from such transmittal. ACCEPTED BY: Name of Corporation,. Partnership, etc. if applicable: SIGNED BY: TITLE: DATE: EMAIL: LIST OF REQUESTED DRAWINGS: � `ili'+rr'ntr-\1 [)c�i;'u +► 1'ii11c•�>.irit;nl (;hili<rt;tticrtt ...._. ... VuJ( cP 301.'°.',� N(>58...1. • Vi\.: 15 P Wch: 4" .M ow .b SECTION 01400 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Quality control and control of installation. B. Tolerances C. References. D. Manufacturers'field services. E. Examination. F. Preparation. 1.2 QUALITY CONTROL AND CONTROL OF INSTALLATION A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and workmanship,to produce Work of specified quality. B. Comply with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence. C. When manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding. D. Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the Work except where more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship. E. Perform Work by persons qualified to produce required and specified quality. F. Verify field measurements are as indicated on Shop Drawings or as instructed by manufacturer. G. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion, or disfigurement. 1.3 TOLERANCES A. Monitor fabrication and installation tolerance control of products to produce acceptable Work. Do not permit tolerances to accumulate. B. Comply with manufacturers'tolerances. When manufacturers' tolerances conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding. C. Adjust products to appropriate dimensions; position before securing products in place. 1.4 REFERENCES A. For products or workmanship specified by association, trade, or other consensus standards, comply with requirements of standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes. B. Conform to reference standard by date of issue current on date of Contract Documents, except where specific date is established by code. C. Obtain copies of standards where required by product specification sections. D. When specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding. E. Neither contractual relationships, duties, nor responsibilities of parties in Contract nor those of Architect shall be altered from Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in reference documents. 1.5 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES A. When specified in individual specification sections, require material or product suppliers or manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, test, adjust and balance of equipment as applicable, and to initiate instructions when necessary. B. Submit qualifications of observer to Architect 30 days in advance of required observations. C. Report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers'written instructions. Proj. No. 07014 Quality Requirements 01400 - 1 to ,Mn D. Refer to Section 01330 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES, MANUFACTURERS, FIELD REPORTS article. .. PART 2 PRODUCTS No Not Used. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing site conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable for subsequent Work. Beginning new Work means acceptance of existing conditions. B. Verify existing substrate is capable of structural support or attachment of new Work being applied or attached. C. Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections. D. Verify utility services are available, of correct characteristics, and in correct locations. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance. B. Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance. C. Apply manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior to applying new material or substance in contact or bond. END OF SECTION M" .A Proj. No. 07014 Quality Requirements 01400 - 2 SECTION 01460-TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES PART GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Testing and inspection services. 1.2 QUALITY CONTROL AND CONTROL OF INSTALLATION A. Monitor quality control over services, and site conditions to produce Work of specified quality. B. Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the Work except where more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards. C. Perform Work by persons qualified to produce required and specified quality. 1.3 REFERENCES A. For products or workmanship specified by association, trade, or other consensus standards, comply with requirements of standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes. B. Conform to reference standard by date of issue current on date of Contract Documents, except where specific date is established by code. C. Obtain copies of standards where required by product specification sections. D. When specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding. E. Neither contractual relationships, duties, nor responsibilities of parties in Contract nor those of Architect shall be altered from Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in reference documents. 1.4 TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICES A. Owner will employ and pay for specified services of an independent firm to perform testing and inspection. B. The independent firm will perform tests, inspections and other services specified in individual specification sections and as required by Architect. 1. Laboratory: Authorized to operate at Project location. 2. Laboratory Staff: Maintain full time registered Engineer on staff to review services. 3. Testing Equipment: Calibrated at reasonable intervals with devices of an accuracy traceable to National Bureau of Standards or accepted values of natural physical constants. C. Testing, inspections and source quality control may occur on or off project site. Perform off-site testing as required by Architect or Owner. D. Reports will be submitted by independent firm to Architect and Contractor, in duplicate indicating observations and results of tests and indicating compliance or non-compliance with Contract Documents. E. Cooperate with independent firm;furnish samples of materials, design mix, equipment, tools, storage, safe access, and assistance by incidental labor as requested. 1. Notify Architect and independent firm 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring services. 2. Make arrangements with independent firm and pay for additional samples and tests required for Contractor's use. F. Testing and employment of testing agency or laboratory shall not relieve Contractor of obligation to perform Work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. Proj. No. 07014 Testing Laboratory Services 01460 - 1 G. Re-testing or re-inspection required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be performed by same independent firm on instructions by Architect. Payment for re-testing or re-inspection will be charged to Contractor by deducting testing charges from Contract Sum/Price. H. Agency Responsibilities: 1. Test samples of mixes submitted by Contractor. 2. Provide qualified personnel at site. Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of services. 3. Perform specified sampling and testing of products in accordance with specified standards. 4. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents. 5. Promptly notify Architect and Contractor of observed irregularities or non- conformance of Work or products. 6. Perform additional tests required by Architect. 7. Attend preconstruction meetings and progress meetings. I. Agency Reports: After each test, promptly submit two copies of report to Architect and to Contractor. When requested by Architect, provide interpretation of test results. Include the following: 1. Date issued. .. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name of inspector. 4. Date and time of sampling or inspection. 5. Identification of product and specifications section. 6. Location in Project. 7. Type of inspection or test. 8. Date of test. 9. Results of tests. 10. Conformance with Contract Documents. J. Limits On Testing Authority: 1. Agency or laboratory may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents. 2. Agency or laboratory may not approve or accept any portion of the Work. 3. Agency or laboratory may not assume duties of Contractor. 4. Agency or laboratory has no authority to stop the Work. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections and the International Building Code Chapter 17 special inspection requirements on Drawings. END OF SECTION w ■ Proj. No. 07014 Testing Laboratory Services 01460 - 2 SECTION 01500 -TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Temporary Utilities: 1. Temporary electricity. 2. Temporary lighting for construction purposes. 3. Temporary heating. 4. Temporary cooling. 5. Temporary ventilation and dehumidification. 6. Telephone service. 7. Facsimile service. 8. Temporary water service. 9. Temporary sanitary facilities. B. Construction Facilities: 1. Field offices and sheds. 2. Vehicular access. 3. Parking. 4. Progress cleaning and waste removal. 5. Project identification. „ 6. Traffic regulation. C. Temporary Controls: 1. Barriers. 2. Enclosures and fencing. 3. Protection of the Work. 4. Security. 5. Water control. 6. Dust control. 7. Erosion and sediment control. 8. Mold control. 9. Noise control. 10. Pest control. 11. Pollution control. 12. Rodent control. D. Removal of utilities, facilities, and controls. 1.2 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY A. Provide and pay for power service required from utility source as needed for construction operation. B. Provide power outlets, with branch wiring and distribution boxes located as required for construction operations. Provide flexible power cords as required for portable construction tools and equipment. C. Provide main service disconnect and over-current protection at convenient location. D. Permanent convenience receptacles may be utilized during construction. ► 1.3 TEMPORARY LIGHTING FOR CONSTRUCTION PURPOSES A. Provide and maintain incandescent lighting for construction operations to achieve minimum lighting level of 2 watt/sq ft. B. Provide and maintain 1 watt/sq ft lighting to exterior staging and storage areas after dark for security purposes. C. Provide and maintain 0.25 watt/sq ft. lighting to interior work areas after dark for security purposes. D. Provide branch wiring from power source to distribution boxes with lighting conductors, pigtails, and lamps for specified lighting levels. E. Maintain lighting and provide routine repairs. Proj. No. 07014 Temporary Facilities and Controls 01500-1 40 an F. Permanent building lighting may be utilized during construction. 1.4 TEMPORARY HEATING A. Provide and pay for heating devices and heat as needed to maintain specified conditions for construction operations. B. Enclose building prior to activating temporary heat in accordance with Enclosures article " in this section. C. Temporary heat in the enclosed structures will be required on a 24-hour basis when the ambient temperature is officially predicted or is actually at 35° F or lower. D. Prior to operation of permanent equipment for temporary heating purposes, verify installation is approved for operation, equipment is lubricated and filters are in place. Provide and pay for operation, maintenance, and regular replacement of filters and worn or consumed parts. E. Maintain minimum ambient temperature of 50 degrees F in areas where construction is in progress, unless indicated otherwise in product sections. F. Temporary heating system shall be of sufficient capacity to heat the interior of the , structure to 50°F. Or more as required when outside temperature is 0°F. or above. This service shall be continued until the entire project is completed. G. Remove soot, smudge and other deposits from walls, ceilings and exposed surfaces which are the result of the use of any temporary heating equipment. Do not proceed with finish work until such surfaces are properly cleaned. 1.5 TEMPORARY COOLING , A. Provide and pay for cooling devices and cooling as needed to maintain specified conditions for construction operations. Provide separate metering and reimburse Owner for cost of energy used. B. Enclose building prior to activating temporary cooling in accordance with Enclosures article in this section. C. Prior to operation of permanent equipment for temporary cooling purposes, verify installation is approved for operation, equipment is lubricated and filters are in place. Provide and pay for operation, maintenance, and regular replacement of filters and worn or consumed parts. D. Maintain maximum ambient temperature of 80 degrees F in areas where construction is in progress, unless indicated otherwise in specifications. •• 1.6 TEMPORARY VENTILATION AND DEHUMIDIFICATION A. Ventilate enclosed areas to achieve curing of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases. B. Provide temporary units to maintain specified, required or recommended humidity levels that have been tested and labeled by UL, FMG or another trade association. 1.7 TELEPHONE SERVICE A. Provide, maintain, and pay for cell phone service for the superintendent at time of project mobilization. 1.8 FACSIMILE SERVICE A. Provide, maintain and pay for facsimile service and dedicated telephone line to field office at time of project mobilization. .. 1.9 TEMPORARY WATER SERVICE A. Provide and pay for suitable quality water service as needed to maintain specified conditions for construction operations. B. Extend branch piping with outlets located so water is available by hoses with threaded connections. Proj. No. 07014 Temporary Facilities and Controls 01500-2 1.10 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES A. Provide and maintain required facilities and enclosures. Existing facility use is not permitted. Provide facilities at time of project mobilization. B. Permanent facilities may not be used during construction operations. C. At end of construction, return existing facilities used for construction operations to same or better condition as original condition. 1.11 FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDS A. Office: Weather tight, minimum 10 x 20 ft., with lighting, electrical outlets, heating, cooling and ventilating equipment, and equipped with sturdy furniture drawing rack, and drawing display table. B. Provide space for Project meetings, with table and chairs to accommodate 6 persons. ,► C. Provide, maintain, and pay for phone service to field office at time of project mobilization for fax machine, and separate cell phone for superintendent. D. Construction: Portable or mobile buildings, or buildings constructed with floors raised above ground, securely fixed to foundations with steps and landings at entrance doors. E. Locate offices and sheds minimum distance of 30 feet from structures. F. Heating, Cooling, and Ventilating for Offices: Automatic equipment to maintain comfort conditions. G. Storage Areas And Sheds: Size to storage requirements for products of individual Sections, allowing for access and orderly provision for maintenance and for inspection of products to requirements of Section 01600. H. Preparation: Fill and grade sites for temporary structures sloped for drainage away from buildings. I. Installation: 1. Install office spaces ready for occupancy 15 days after date fixed in Notice to Proceed. 2. Employee Residential Occupancy: Not allowed on Owner's property. J. Maintenance And Cleaning: 1. Weekly janitorial services for offices; periodic cleaning and maintenance for office and storage areas. 2. Maintain approach walks free of mud, water, and snow. K. Removal: At completion of Work remove buildings, foundations, utility services, and debris. Restore areas. 1.12 VEHICULAR ACCESS A. Construct temporary access roads from public thoroughfares to serve construction area, of width and load bearing capacity to accommodate unimpeded traffic for construction purposes. B. Extend and relocate vehicular access as Work progress requires, provide detours as necessary for unimpeded traffic flow. C. Location approved by Owner. D. Provide unimpeded access for emergency vehicles. Maintain 20 feet wide driveways with turning space between and around combustible materials. E. Provide and maintain access to fire hydrants free of obstructions. F. Use designated existing on-site roads for construction traffic as approved by Owner. 1.13 PARKING A. Provide temporary surface parking areas to accommodate construction personnel. B. Locate as approved by Owner. Aw C. When site space is not adequate, provide additional off-site parking. D. Use of designated existing on-site streets and driveways used for construction traffic is permitted. Tracked vehicles not allowed on paved areas. E. Use of existing parking facilities used by construction personnel is not permitted. F. Do not allow heavy vehicles or construction equipment in parking areas. G. Do not allow vehicle parking on existing pavement. Proj. No. 07014 Temporary Facilities and Controls 01500-3 I" ON H. Permanent Pavements And Parking Facilities: 1. Prior to Substantial Completion, bases for permanent roads and parking areas may be used for construction traffic. 2. Avoid traffic loading beyond paving design capacity. Tracked vehicles not allowed. i. Maintenance: 1. Maintain traffic and parking areas in sound condition free of excavated material, construction equipment, products, mud, snow, and ice. 2. Maintain existing and permanent paved areas used for construction; promptly repair breaks, potholes, low areas, standing water, and other deficiencies, to maintain paving and drainage in original, or specified, condition. J. Removal, Repair: 1. Remove temporary materials and construction when permanent paving is usable. 2. Remove underground work and compacted materials to depth of 2 feet; fill and grade site as specified. 3. Repair permanent facilities damaged by use, to specified condition. 1.14 PROGRESS CLEANING AND WASTE REMOVAL A. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in clean and orderly condition. B. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed or remote spaces, prior to enclosing spaces. C. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning to eliminate dust. " D. Collect and remove waste materials, debris, and rubbish from site periodically and dispose off-site. E. Open free-fall chutes are not permitted. Terminate closed chutes into appropriate containers with lids. 1.15 TRAFFIC REGULATION A. Signs, Signals, And Devices: 1. Post Mounted and Wall Mounted Traffic Control and Informational Signs: As approved by authority having jurisdiction. 2. Traffic Cones and Drums, Flares and Lights: As approved by authority having jurisdiction. 3. Flagperson Equipment: As required by authority having jurisdiction. B. Haul Routes: 1. Consult with authority having jurisdiction, establish public thoroughfares to be used for haul routes and site access. 2. Confine construction traffic to designated haul routes. 3. Provide traffic control at critical areas of haul routes to regulate traffic, to minimize interference with public traffic. C. Traffic Signs And Signals: 1. Provide signs at approaches to site and on site, at crossroads, detours, parking areas, and elsewhere as needed to direct construction and affected public traffic. 2. Provide, operate, and maintain traffic control signals to direct and maintain orderly flow of traffic in areas under Contractor's control, and areas affected by Contractor's operations. .. 3. Relocate as Work progresses, to maintain effective traffic control. D. Removal: 1. Remove equipment and devices when no longer required. 2. Repair damage caused by installation. ^" 3. Remove post settings to depth of 2 feet. 1.16 BARRIERS A. Provide barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas and to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage from construction operations. Proj. No. 07014 Temporary Facilities and Controls 01500-4 I. B. Protect vehicular traffic, stored materials, site, and structures from damage. 1.17 ENCLOSURES AND FENCING A. Construction: Commercial grade chain link fence. B. Provide 6 feet high fence around construction site; equip with vehicular gates with locks. C. Exterior Enclosures: 1. Provide temporary weather tight closure of exterior openings to accommodate acceptable working conditions and protection for products, to allow for temporary heating and maintenance of required ambient temperatures identified in individual specification sections, and to prevent entry of unauthorized persons. Provide access doors with self-closing hardware and locks. D. Interior Enclosures: 1. Provide temporary partitions as indicated on Drawings to separate work areas from Owner occupied areas,to prevent penetration of dust and moisture into Owner occupied areas, and to prevent damage to existing materials and equipment. 2. Construction: Framing and plywood sheet materials with closed joints and sealed edges at intersections with existing surfaces: a. Insulated to R 19. b. STC rating of 35 in accordance with ASTM E90. C. Maximum flame spread rating of 25 in accordance with ASTM E84. 1.18 SECURITY A. Security Program 1. Protect Work from theft, vandalism, and unauthorized entry. 2. Initiate program at project mobilization. 3. Maintain program throughout construction period until Owner occupancy. B. Entry Control: 1. Restrict entrance of persons and vehicles into Project site and existing facilities. 2. Allow entrance only to authorized persons with proper identification. 1.19 WATER CONTROL A. Grade site to drain. Maintain excavations free of water. Provide, operate, and maintain pumping equipment. B. Protect site from puddling or running water. Provide water barriers as required to protect site from soil erosion. 1.20 DUST CONTROL A. Execute Work by methods to minimize raising dust from construction operations. B. Provide positive means to prevent air-borne dust from dispersing into atmosphere. 1.21 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL A. Plan and execute construction by methods to control surface drainage from cuts and fills, AW from borrow and waste disposal areas. Prevent erosion and sedimentation. B. Minimize surface area of bare soil exposed at one time. C. Provide temporary measures including berms, dikes, and drains, and other devices to prevent water flow. 00 D. Construct fill and waste areas by selective placement to avoid erosive surface silts or clays. E. Periodically inspect earthwork to detect evidence of erosion and sedimentation; promptly MW apply corrective measures. 1.22 NOISE CONTROL A. Provide methods, means, and facilities to minimize noise produced by construction M. operations after 7 pm and before 7 am. Proj. No. 07014 Temporary Facilities and Controls 01500-5 go 40 1.23 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL A. Plan and execute construction by methods to control surface drainage from cuts and fills, from borrow and waste disposal areas. Prevent erosion and sedimentation. B. Minimize surface area of bare soil exposed at one time. C. Provide temporary measures including berms, dikes, and drains, and other devices to prevent water flow. "p D. Construct fill and waste areas by selective placement to avoid erosive surface silts or clays. 1.24 MOLD CONTROL A. Take necessary precautions to to reduce conditions and sources that encourage the groth and spread of mold spores. B. Keep materials dry during storage, and after installation. Wet materials delivered to the site, that may be susceptible to mold growth are not to be accepted except upon written approval of an independent testing laboratory. C. Upon inspection, materials on site with active mold growth are to be removed from site and replaced with new, dry materials. Encapsulation may be used when it is determined there is a satisfactorily documented remedy for the situation, and contractor has received prior approval from the Owner for the procedure. top 1.25 PEST CONTROL A. Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent pests and insects from entering facility. 1.26 RODENT CONTROL A. Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent rodents from accessing or invading premises. 1.27 POLLUTION CONTROL A. Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent contamination of soil, water, and atmosphere from discharge of noxious, toxic substances, and pollutants produced by construction operations. B. Comply with pollution and environmental control requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1.28 REMOVAL OF UTILITIES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLS A. Remove temporary utilities, equipment, facilities, materials, prior to Final Application for Payment inspection. B. Remove underground installations to minimum depth of 2 feet. C. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work. D. Restore existing facilities used during construction to original condition. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition. .� PART 2 AND PART 3 Not Used. END OF SECTION r Proj. No. 07014 Temporary Facilities and Controls 01500-6 Aw SECTION 01600 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Products. B. Product delivery requirements. C. Product storage and handling requirements. D. Substitutions and product options. E. Substitution submittal procedures. 1.2 PRODUCTS A. Furnish products of qualified manufacturers suitable for intended use. Furnish products of each type by single manufacturer unless specified otherwise. B. Furnish interchangeable components from same manufacturer for components being replaced. 1.3 PRODUCT DELIVERY REQUIREMENTS A. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Promptly inspect shipments to ensure products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and products are undamaged. ,�. C. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. 1.4 PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING REQUIREMENTS A. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. B. Store with seals and labels intact and legible. C. Store sensitive products in weather tight, climate controlled, enclosures in an environment favorable to product. D. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports above ground. E. Provide bonded off-site storage and protection when site does not permit on-site storage or protection. F. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to prevent condensation and degradation of products. G. Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in well-drained area. Prevent mixing with foreign matter. H. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. 1. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to verify products are undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition. 1.5 PRODUCT OPTIONS A. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Any product meeting those standards or description. B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers: products of one of manufacturers named and meeting specifications, no options or substitutions allowed. C. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with Provision for Substitutions: Submit request for substitution for any manufacturer not named in accordance with the following article. 1.6 SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS A. Listed Manufacturers: 1. Manufacturers listed in a product or system specification are those manufacturers considered capable of manufacturing products conforming to the specification requirements. Proj. No. 07014 Product Requirements 01600 - 1 IM 2. The "listing" of a manufacturer does not imply"acceptance" or "approval" of any standard product of that manufacturer. 3. Products offered by listed manufacturers shall be equal to or superior in all respects to specified or named products and shall meet or exceed specification requirements. 4. The description of specific qualities takes precedence over the reference standards and the description of qualities and reference standards together take precedence over the named product of listed manufacturers. B. Product Options: 1. Products specified only by Reference Standards or by Description only: any product meeting those standards or descriptions, by any manufacturer. 2. Products specified by naming several products or manufacturers: any product and manufacturer named. 3. Products specified by naming only one product and manufacturer: no option, unless a substitution is accepted. Submit a request for substitution for any product or manufacturer not specifically named. , 4. Products specified by Description, Reference Standard and naming several products or manufacturers: Any product and manufacturer named meeting those descriptions and standards. Submit a request for substitution for any product or manufacturer not specifically named. C. Limitations on Substitutions: 1. During Bidding period, Instructions to Bidders govern times for submitting requests for substitutions under requirements specified in this Section. 2. Within 30 days after date of Contract, Architect will consider written requests from Contractor for substitutions of products in place of those specified. Subsequent requests will be considered only in case of product unavailability or other conditions beyond control of Contractor, such as strikes, lockouts, bankruptcy, or • discontinued production. 3. Substitutions will not be considered when indicated or implied on shop drawings or product data submittals without separate formal request, when requested directly by subcontractor or supplier, or when acceptance will require substantial revision of Contract Documents. 4. Substitute products shall not be ordered or installed without written acceptance. 5. Only one request for substitution for each product will be considered. If substitution is not accepted, Contractor shall provide specified product. 6. Architect will determine acceptability of substitutions. D. Requests for Substitutions: 1. Submit separate requests for each substitution on Substitution Request form following this Section. 2. Incomplete forms will be returned. 3. Give cost data comparing proposed substitution with specified product, and .. amount of net change to Contract Sum. E. Contractor's Representation: Request for substitution constitutes a representation that Contractor: 1. Has investigated proposed product and determined that it is equal to or superior in all respects to specified product, or that the cost reduction offered is ample justification for accepting the offered substitution. 2. Will provide same warranties for substitution as for product specified. 3. Will coordinate installation of accepted substitution into Work, and make such other changes as may be required for Work to be complete in all respects. 4. Waives all claims for additional costs, under his responsibility, related to substitution which subsequently becomes apparent. Proj. No. 07014 Product Requirements 01600- 2 1.7 SUBSTITUTION SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: A. Submit 2 copies of each request for substitution on form following this Section. B. Architect will review Contractor's requests for substitutions with reasonable promptness. C. During the bidding period, Architect will record acceptable substitutions in Addenda. D. After award of Contract, Architect will notify Contractor, in writing, of decision to accept or reject requested substitutions. E. For accepted products, submit Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples in accordance with Section 01330. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used. END OF SECTION Proj. No. 07014 Product Requirements 01600 - 3 on ow no .m .w SUBSTITUTION REQUEST PROJECT: The Gate House at Fleet Landing PROJECT NO.: 07014 TO (ARCHITECT): FROM (CONTRACTOR): Noelker and Hull Associates, Inc. 30 West King Street Chambersburg, PA 17201 CONTRACTOR HEREBY REQUESTS ACCEPTANCE OF THE FOLLOWING PRODUCT OR SYSTEMS AS A SUBSTITUTION IN ACCORD WITH PROVISIONS OF DIVISION ONE OF SPECIFICATIONS: 1. SPECIFIED PRODUCT OR SYSTEM: Substitution request for (Generic Description): Specification Section No. Article(s) Para.(s) 2. SUPPORTING DATA: ❑ Product. data for proposed substitution is attached (description of product, reference standards, performance and test data). ❑ Sample is attached ❑ Sample will be sent if requested 3. QUALITY COMPARISON: SPECIFIED PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION Name, brand: Catalog No.: Manufacturer: Vendor: Significant variations: Maintenance Service Available: Yes No 4. PREVIOUS INSTALLATIONS: Identification of similar projects on which proposed substitution was used: (Attach list) Project: Architect: Address: Owner: Date Installed: 5. REASON FOR NON-AVAILABILITY OF SPECIFIED ITEM: Attach affidavit, certification or other data as proof of non-availability. ❑ Strikes ❑ Discontinuance of production ❑ Lockouts ❑ Proven shortage ❑ Bankruptcy ❑ Similar occurrences (explain below) 6. EFFECT OF SUBSTITUTION: Proposed substitution affects other parts of Work: ❑ No ❑ Yes (If yes, explain) Proj. No. 07014 Substitution Request 01601-1 Substitution changes Contract Time: ❑ No ❑ Yes Add/Deduct days. Substitution requires dimensional revision or redesign of structure or M & E Work: ❑ No ❑ Yes (If yes, attach complete data.) Saving or credit to Owner, if any,for accepting substitution: $ 7. CONTRACTOR'S STATEMENT OF CONFORMANCE OF PROPOSED SUBSTITUTION TO CONTRACT REQUIREMENT: I/we have investigated the proposed substitution. I/we: w • believe that it is equal or superior in all respects to specified product, except as stated above; • will provide the same warranty as specified for specified product; • have included complete cost data and implications of the substitution; „o • will pay redesign and special inspection costs caused by the use of this product; • will pay additional costs to other contractors caused by the substitution; • will coordinate the incorporation of the proposed substitution in the Work; • will modify other parts of the Work as may be needed, to make all parts of the Work complete and -e functioning; • waive future claims for added cost to Contract caused by the substitution. Contractor: Date: ' By: Answer all questions and complete all blanks - use "NA" if not applicable. ARCHITECT'S REVIEW AND ACTION: ❑ Resubmit substitution request: -. ❑ Provide more information in following categories: ❑ Sign Contractor's Statement of Conformance. ❑ Submit proof of non-availabilitly. ❑ Substitution is accepted. ❑ Substitution is accepted, with the following comments: ❑ Substitution not accepted. Noelker and Hull Associates, Inc. Date Proj. No. 07014 Substitution Request 01601-2 SECTION 01700 - EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Closeout procedures. B. Final cleaning. ,. C. Starting of systems. D. Demonstration and instructions. E. Testing, adjusting and balancing. F. Protecting installed construction. G. Project record documents. H. Operation and maintenance data. I. Manual for materials and finishes. J. Manual for equipment and systems. K. Spare parts and maintenance products. L. Product warranties and product bonds. M. Maintenance service. 1.2 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A. Submit written certification that Contract Documents have been reviewed, Work has been inspected, and that Work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for Architect's review. B. Provide submittals to Architect required by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Submit final Application for Payment identifying total adjusted Contract Sum, previous payments, and sum remaining due. 1.3 FINAL CLEANING A. Execute final cleaning prior to final project assessment. B. Clean interior and exterior glass, surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains and foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces, vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces. C. Clean equipment and fixtures to sanitary condition with cleaning materials appropriate to surface and material being cleaned. D. Replace filters of operating equipment. E.. Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, and drainage systems. F. Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces. G. Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish, and construction facilities from site. 1.4 STARTING OF SYSTEMS A. Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems. B. Notify Architect seven days prior to start-up of each item. C. Verify each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive rotation, belt tension, control sequence, and for conditions which may cause damage. D. Verify tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by equipment or system manufacturer. E. Verify wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested. F. Execute start-up under supervision of applicable Contractors' personnel in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. G. Submit a written report in accordance with Section 01300 that equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning correctly. 1.5 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS A. Demonstrate operation and maintenance of products to Owner's personnel two weeks prior to date of Substantial Completion. Proj. No. 07014 Execution Requirements 01700- 1 B. Demonstrate Project equipment by qualified representative who is knowledgeable about the Project. C. Utilize operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction. Review contents of manual with Owner's personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance. D. Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble-shooting, servicing, �* maintenance, and shutdown of each item of equipment at agreed time at equipment location. E. Prepare and insert additional data in operations and maintenance manuals when need for additional data becomes apparent during instruction. F. Required instruction time for each item of equipment and system is specified in individual sections. 1.6 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING A. Contractor shall employ services of independent firm to perform testing, adjusting, and balancing. B. Independent firm will perform services specified in Section Division 15. C. Reports will be submitted by independent firm to Architect indicating observations and results of tests and indicating compliance or non-compliance with requirements of Contract Documents. ..R 1.7 PROTECTING INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. Protect installed Work and provide special protection where specified in individual specification sections. B. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed products. Control activity in immediate work area to prevent damage. C. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections,jambs, sills, and soffits of openings. D. Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials. E. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. When traffic or activity is necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material manufacturer. F. Prohibit traffic from landscaped areas. 1.8 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Maintain on site one set of the following record documents; record actual revisions to the Work: 1. Drawings. 2. Specifications. 3. Addenda. 4. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract. 5. Reviewed Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples. 6. Manufacturer's instruction for assembly, installation, and adjusting. B. Ensure entries are complete and accurate, enabling future reference by Owner. C. Store record documents separate from documents used for construction. D. Record information concurrent with construction progress, not less than weekly. E. Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each product section description of actual products installed, including the following: 1. Manufacturer's name and product model and number. 2. Product substitutions or alternates utilized. 3. Changes made by Addenda and modifications. F. Record Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual construction including: *� 1. Measured depths of foundations in relation to finish main floor datum. 2. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements. 3. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of the Work. Proj. No. 07014 Execution Requirements 01700 - 2 4. Field changes of dimension and detail. • 5. Details not on original Contract drawings. G. Submit documents to Architect with claim for final Application for Payment. 1.9 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit data bound in 8-1/2 x 11 inch (A4)text pages, three D side ring binders with durable plastic covers. B. Prepare binder cover with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS", title of project. C. Internally subdivide binder contents with permanent page dividers, logically organized as described below; with tab titling clearly printed under reinforced laminated plastic tabs. D. Drawings: Provide with reinforced punched binder tab. Bind in with text; fold larger drawings to size of text pages. E. Contents: Prepare Table of Contents for each volume, with each product or system description identified, typed on white paper, in three parts as follows: 1. Part 1: Directory, listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Architect, Contractor, Subcontractors, and major equipment suppliers. 2. Part 2: Operation and maintenance instructions, arranged by system and subdivided by specification section. For each category, identify names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers. Identify the following: a. Significant design criteria. b. List of equipment. C. Parts list for each component. d. Operating instructions. e. Maintenance instructions for equipment and systems. f. Maintenance instructions for[special]finishes, including recommended cleaning methods and materials, and special precautions identifying detrimental agents. 3. Part 3: Project documents and certificates, including the following: a. Shop drawings and product data. b. Air and water balance reports. C. Certificates. d. Originals of warranties. 1.10 MANUAL FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES A. Submit two copies of preliminary draft or proposed formats and outlines of contents before start of Work. Architect will review draft and return one copy with comments. B. For equipment, or component parts of equipment put into service during construction and operated by Owner, submit documents within ten days after acceptance. C. Submit one copy of completed volumes 15 days prior to final inspection. Draft copy be reviewed and returned with Architect comments. Revise content of document sets as required prior to final submission. D. Submit two sets of revised final volumes in final form within 10 days after final inspection. E. Building Products, Applied Materials, and Finishes: Include product data, with catalog number, size, composition, and color and texture designations. F. Instructions for Care and Maintenance: Include manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning agents and methods, precautions against detrimental agents and methods, and recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance. G. Moisture Protection and Weather Exposed Products: Include product data listing applicable reference standards, chemical composition, and details of installation. Include recommendations for inspections, maintenance, and repair. H. Additional Requirements: As specified in individual product specification sections. I. Include listing in Table of Contents for design data, with tabbed fly sheet and space for • insertion of data. Proj. No. 07014 Execution Requirements 01700 - 3 am 1.11 MANUAL FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS A. Submit two copies of preliminary draft or proposed formats and outlines of contents before start of Work. Architect will review draft and return one copy with comments. B. For equipment, or component parts of equipment put into service during construction and operated by Owner, submit documents within ten days after acceptance. C. Submit one copy of completed volumes 15 days prior to final inspection. Draft copy be reviewed and returned after final inspection, with Architect comments. Revise content of document sets as required prior to final submission. D. Submit two sets of revised final volumes in final form within 10 days after final inspection. E. Each Item of Equipment and Each System: Include description of unit or system, and component parts. Identify function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. include performance curves, with engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and model number of replaceable parts. F. Panelboard Circuit Directories: Provide electrical service characteristics, controls, and communications; typed. G. Include color coded wiring diagrams as installed. H. Operating Procedures: include start-up, break-in, and routine normal operating instructions and sequences. Include regulation, control, stopping, shut-down, and emergency instructions. Include summer, winter, and special operating instructions. 1. Maintenance Requirements: Include routine procedures and guide for preventative �* maintenance and trouble shooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly instructions; and alignment, adjusting, balancing, and checking instructions. J. Include servicing and lubrication schedule, and list of lubricants required. ,ow K. Include manufacturer's printed operation and maintenance instructions. L. Include sequence of operation by controls manufacturer. M. Include original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams required for maintenance. N. Include control diagrams by controls manufacturer as installed. O. Include Contractor's coordination drawings, with color coded piping diagrams as installed. P. Include charts of valve tag numbers, with location and function of each valve, keyed to flow and control diagrams. Q. Include list of original manufacturer's spare parts, current prices, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage. R. Include test and balancing reports as specified in Section 01400. ••� S. Additional Requirements: As specified in individual product specification sections. T. Include listing in Table of Contents for design data, with tabbed dividers and space for insertion of data. 1.12 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE PRODUCTS A. Furnish spare parts, maintenance, and extra products in quantities specified in individual specification sections. B. Deliver to Project site and place in location as directed by Owner; obtain receipt prior to final payment. 1.13 PRODUCT WARRANTIES AND PRODUCT BONDS A. Obtain warranties and bonds executed in duplicate by responsible subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers, within ten days after completion of applicable item of work. B. Execute and assemble transferable warranty documents and bonds from subcontractors, ., suppliers, and manufacturers. C. Verify documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized. D. Co-execute submittals when required. E. Include Table of Contents and assemble in three D side ring binder with durable plastic cover. F. Submit prior to final Application for Payment. w Proj. No. 07014 Execution Requirements 01700- 4 G. Time Of Submittals: 1. For equipment or component parts of equipment put into service during construction with Owner's permission, submit documents within ten days after acceptance. 2. Make other submittals within ten days after Date of Substantial Completion, prior to final Application for Payment. 3. For items of Work for which acceptance is delayed beyond Date of Substantial Completion, submit within ten days after acceptance, listing date of acceptance as beginning of warranty or bond period. 1.14 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Furnish service and maintenance of components indicated in specification sections during warranty period. B. Examine system components at frequency consistent with reliable operation. Clean, adjust, and lubricate as required. C. Include systematic examination, adjustment, and lubrication of components. Repair or replace parts whenever required. Use parts produced by manufacturer of original component. D. Do not assign or transfer maintenance service to agent or Subcontractor without prior written consent of Owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used. END OF SECTION Proj. No. 07014 Execution Requirements 01700 - 5 ..q .� .� .�, .. .� ,. .� �. ,� SECTION 02221 - BUILDING DEMOLITION PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes demolition of designated structures; demolition of foundations and slabs- on-grade; disconnecting and capping of identified utilities; removing demolished materials from site; protection of items to remain as indicated on Drawings. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 02300 - Earthwork: Backfill materials. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01330- Submittals Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate demolition and removal sequence and location of salvageable items; location and construction of barricades, fences and temporary work. 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Section 01700- Execution Requirements: Requirements for submittals. B. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of capped utilities, and subsurface obstructions. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit description of system, inspection data, and parts lists. 1.4 QUALIFICATIONS A. Demolition Firm: Company specializing in performing work of this section with minimum 5 years experience. 1.5 SCHEDULING A. Section 01300-Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Schedule Work to precede coincide with new construction. C. Describe demolition removal procedures and schedule. D. Perform Work between hours of 7 a.m. and 7 p.m. A PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Erect, and maintain temporary barriers and security devices, including warning signs and lights, and similar measures, for protection of the public, Owner, Contractor's employees and existing improvements to remain. B. Protect existing landscaping materials, appurtenances, and structures not indicated to be »» demolished. C. Prevent movement or settlement of adjacent structures. Provide bracing and shoring. D. Mark location of utilities. 3.2 DEMOLITION REQUIREMENTS A. Conduct demolition to minimize interference with adjacent structures and occupancies. B. Cease operations immediately when adjacent structures appear to be in danger. Notify authority having jurisdiction. Do not resume operations until directed. C. Conduct operations with minimum interference to public or private accesses. Maintain protected egress and access from adjacent structures at all times. Proj. No. 07014 Building Demolition 02221 - 1 D. Obtain written permission from adjacent property owners when demolition equipment will traverse, infringe upon or limit access to their property. ,. E. Sprinkle Work with water to minimize dust. Provide hoses and water connections required for this purpose. 3.3 DEMOLITION A. Disconnect and cap designated utilities within demolition areas. B. Remove foundation walls and footings to minimum of two feet below finished grade within area of new construction. C. Remove concrete slabs on grade. D. Owner will remove materials to be retained by them before work begins. E. Backfill areas excavated resulting from demolition, in accordance with Section 02300. F. Rough grade and compact areas affected by demolition to. G. Continuously clean-up and remove demolished materials from site. Do not allow materials to accumulate in building or on site. H. Do not burn or bury materials on site. Leave site in clean condition. END OF SECTION on Proj. No. 07014 Building Demolition 02221 - 2 SECTION 02301 - EARTHWORK FOR STRUCTURES PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Provide complete earthwork for structures including: 1. Removing and storing topsoil. 2. General excavation, excavation for structures including footings. 3. Rough grading. 4. Fill and backfill 5. Finish grading. 6. Shoring and bracing excavations with temporary shoring, sheeting or retention system as required by code law or ordinance to protect excavation area, workers, nearby streets and structures. 7. Dewatering excavations. 1.2 BASIS FOR BIDS A. Excavation work will be performed on an unclassified basis. B. The cost of the removal of earth or rock formations, regardless of type of hardness of such formations, and other fill materials including but not limited to masonry, concrete, bituminous and concrete paving and bituminous debris, and replacement with the appropriate fill material, shall be included in the contract sum. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01460 -Testing and Laboratory Control. B. Section 01500 -Temporary Facilities and Controls: Tree and Plant Protection. C. Section 02362 -Termite Control. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ASTM C136- Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates. B. ANSI/ASTM D698- Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil-Aggregate Mixture Using 5.5 Ib Rammer and 12 inch Drop. C. ANSI/ASTM D2922- Density of Soil in Place by the Nuclear Methods. D. ANSI/ASTM D1557- Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil-Aggregate Mixture Using 10 Ib Rammer and 18 inch Drop. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Samples: Submit minimum 30 Ib. samples of each type of fill material to be used. Forward samples to testing laboratory packed tightly in containers to prevent contamination. B. Test Reports: If recent test results are available for fill materials to be used, submit to testing laboratory in lieu of samples. Test results are to clearly indicate types of materials and composition, hardness compatibility and suitability for proposed usage. C. Laboratory Test Reports for Following: 1. Test reports on borrow material. 2. Field Density Reports. 3. One optimum moisture-maximum density curve for each type soil encountered. 4. Materials certificate stating materials acceptable for fill and backfill. D. Certifications 1. Submit to Architect, a statement certified and sealed by Professional Structural Engineer registered in the State where project is located, attesting to adequacy of shoring, sheeting and retention system components for trenches and excavations to: a. Withstand lateral earth and hydrostatic pressure loads. b. Enable a safe wall system to allow excavation to proceed. Proj. No. 07014 Earthwork for Structures 02301-1 SP, C. That maximum allowable deflection of shoring, sheeting and retention system will not interfere with subsequent construction. 2. Certify completed system meets law, ordinance and Building Code requirements. 3. Certify that component parts are properly designed or selected for locale and application intended and installation was made in accordance with practices standard to the industry. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Shoring, sheeting, bracing and retention plans, details and other provisions necessary in order to safely excavate trenches for this project shall be prepared by a Professional Engineer registered in the state where project is located and employed by Contractor. B. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for retention plans, details, accessories and execution. C. Design and provide temporary groundwater control measures as required to control water infiltration during construction, and remain in place until compaction of the existing soils is completed and backfilling as reached a height of 2 feet above the ground water level. 1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Attain "Generic Permit for the Discharge of Produced Groundwater from Any Non- Contaminated Site Activity", permit from the State of Florida Department of Environmental Protection for discharge of produced groundwater to surface waters of the state from dewatering operations or other site activities. 1.8 PROTECTION A. Protect trees, shrubs, lawns, and other features remaining as a portion of final landscaping. B. Protect benchmarks, existing structures, fences, sidewalks, paving, and curbs from .. equipment and vehicular traffic. C. Protect above and below grade utilities which are to remain. D. Protect excavations by shoring, bracing, sheet piling, underpinning, or other methods required to prevent cave-in or loose soil from falling into excavation. Monitor shoring system and surrounding ground surface during construction to detect movement. If movement becomes significant, take contingency steps to brace excavation and adjacent utility lines. , E. Notify Architect of unexpected subsurface conditions and discontinue affected work in area until notified to resume work. F. Grade excavation top perimeter to prevent surface water run-off into excavation. 1.9 COORDINATION A. Coordinate excavation work with other trades for proper scheduling of work. Accurately record location of capped utilities prior to beginning work, including horizontal dimensions, inverts and slope gradients. 1.10 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01700. B. Accurately record slope gradients, and actual locations of utilities remaining, by horizontal dimensions, elevations or inverts. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 STOCKPILING A. Material cut or excavated from building areas which is suitable for general backfilling may be stored on site to be distributed later. Fill material required to be hauled in may be stockpiled at site until used, provided it is properly handled to prevent contamination with undesirable materials. Proj. No. 07014 Earthwork for Structures 02301-2 B. Location of stockpiles shall be subject to approval of Architect. Stockpile topsoil separate from excavated sub-soil. 2.2 SURPLUS MATERIALS A. Excluding topsoil, excavated materials not to be used in fills and backfills on this project shall be removed from site immediately. B. Materials containing rubbish, debris, or rocks shall be removed. 2.3 MATERIALS A. Structural Fill: Non-plastic granular soil with < 12% material passing the No. 200 mesh sieve and containing less than 4%organic material. Fine sands and fine sands with silt, soil classifications SP, and SP-SM on the Unified Soil Classification System are suitable fill material. B. General Fill and Backfill: 1. Suitable existing excavated on-site soil free from waste, debris, less than 2% vegetation -organic materials by weight, and other deleterious matter. 2. Material shall have a moisture content within 2% of optimum based on Standard Proctor (ASTM D698). 3. Remove tree limbs, roots, or other similar organic material greater than 1/2 in. diameter. C. Top Soil: 1. Clean natural topsoil free of vegetation, debris and other deleterious matter, and approved by Architect. 2. Upper 6 to 12 inches of topsoil stripped may be used, if suitable, otherwise use imported natural, fertile, friable soil possessing characteristics representative of productive growing soils in the area. 3. Topsoil will be rejected if excessively acid or alkaline or contains toxic substances harmful to plant growth. 4. Provide topsoil free from weeds, nutgrass, lumps, stones larger than 1 inch, roots, or similar substances. D. Fill at Existing Trees: Sharp, clean sand. 2.4 SHORING AND BRACING A. Contractor shall design using a Professional Engineer registered in the State of Florida install and provide as necessary to prevent cave-ins and slides, or as a protection for workmen in trenches and other excavation. B. Shoring and bracing shall remain in place as long as required for safety and shall be removed only as backfill is placed. Comply with all Municipal, State, and Federal requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Establish extent of excavation by area and elevation; designate and identify datum elevation. B. Set required lines and levels. C. Maintain bench marks, monuments and other reference points. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Before starting excavation, establish location and extent of underground utilities occurring in work area. Notify Florida ONE CALL- Sunshine State (1-800-432-4770) 3 to 5 days prior to excavation to mark utilities. B. Notify utility companies to remove and relocate lines which are in way of excavation. C. Maintain, reroute or extend as required, existing utility lines to remain which pass through work area. D. Protect utility services uncovered by excavation. E. Remove abandoned utility service lines from areas of excavation; cap, plug or seal such Proj. No. 07014 Earthwork for Structures 02301-3 lines and identify at grade. F. Accurately locate and record abandoned and active utility lines rerouted or extended on Project Record Documents. G. Upon discovery of unknown utility or concealed condition, discontinue affected work and notify Architect. 3.3 TOPSOIL EXCAVATION A. Excavate 6- 12 inches of topsoil from areas to be further excavated, relandscaped, or regraded, without mixing with foreign materials for use in finish grading. B. Do not excavate wet topsoil. C. Stockpile in area designated on site and protect from erosion. D. Remove excess topsoil not intended for reuse, from site. Notify Owner prior to removal. 3.4 ROUGH GRADING A. Excavation and rough grade to lines and grades shown. B. Areas to be graded shall be stripped of grass and objectionable materials before grading operation begins. C. Overcut planting and lawn areas to allow a uniform layer of topsoil not less than 6" thick. D. Maintain excavations to drain and be free of excess water. Ponding of water on site will not be permitted. E. Remove objectionable and excess materials from site when excavated. F. Exercise extreme care in grading around existing trees. Do not disturb existing grades around existing trees except as otherwise noted. When excavation through roots is necessary, perform by hand and cut roots with sharp axe. 3.5 FILLS AND BACKFILLS - GENERAL A. Verify areas to be backfilled are free of debris or water. R B. Cut out soft areas of subgrade not readily capable of in-situ compaction. C. Compact backfill using vibratory drum roller having minimum static, at-drum weight of approximately 6 tons. Provide minimum 5 overlapping passes (by at least 30%overlap) by made in each direction across the building construction area. .� 1. Keep vibratory rollers a minimum of 50 feet away from existing structures. Use track mounted bull dozer or vibratory roller operating in static mode. D. Backfill and compact upper T-0" of compacted natural soils to density of 95% of .A" maximum dry unit weight, determined by using Modified Proctor Compaction Test, within t 2% of the Modified Proctor optimum moisture content. E. Terminate compaction operations if bearing level soils experience pumping and soil strength loss during compaction operations, and perform the following: "" 1. Remove disturbed soil, backfill with dry structural fill, and recompack. 2. Allow excess moisture content within disturbed soil to dissipate before recompacting. am F. Site backfill systematically, as early as possible, to allow maximum time for natural settlement. Do not backfill over porous, wet or spongy subgrade surfaces. G. Make gradual changes in grade. Blend slopes into level areas. 3.6 FILLS WITHIN STRUCTURE A. General Fill Beneath Slabs on Grade: 1. Place Fill Material in loose lifts of 12" and compact each lift to a density of 95% of .� maximum dry unit weight, determined using ASTM D1557 Modified Proctor Compaction Test. a. Reduce to 8 inch lifts if roller operates in the static mode. b. Reduce to 6 inch lifts if hand-held compaction equipment is used. 2. Maintain moisture content during compaction within t 2 percent of the Modified Proctor optimum moisture content (ASTM D1557) during compaction operations. B. Backfill and compact upper V-0" of soil below floor slab, be compacted to density of 98% „VA of maximum dry unit weight, determined by using Modified Proctor Compaction Test, within t 2 % of the Modified Proctor optimum moisture content. ow Proj. No. 07014 Earthwork for Structures 02301-4 C. Extend fill material to minimum of 5 ft. horizontally beyond the building footprint. 3.7 FILLS OUTSIDE STRUCTURE A. Roughen and loosen filled areas before placing of fill materials. B. Spread suitable fill materials in uniform layers over area not to exceed 8" thick compaction. C. Wet and work materials as required for proper compaction and thoroughly mix. Compaction shall be by tamping rollers or by utilizing excavation equipment to spread and compact fill to a uniform density equal to natural density of material before excavating. D. Areas adjacent to building, or where compacting equipment cannot work, shall be compacted with hand tampers. E. Compact filled areas to 95% Standard Proctor and to lines and grades shown, with 1�" allowances for a final layer of topsoil at least 6"thick in lawn areas. F. Provide positive slope away from all structures. 40 3.8 BACKFILL OUTSIDE STRUCTURE A. Ensure areas to be backfilled are free from debris, snow, ice and water and that ground surfaces are note in frozen condition. B. Do not backfill over existing subgrade surfaces which are porous, wet or spongy. C. Backfill areas to grades, contours, levels and elevations indicated. D. Backfill systematically and as early as possible to allow maximum time for natural settlement and compaction. E. After permanent construction is in place, forms and trash removed, sub-soil drainage and water-proofing complete and inspections complete, backfill with approved materials and compact to approximate density of natural ground. F. Place backfill in layers not exceeding 9" loose depth, and hand or machine tamp to compaction required. G. Water may be added to backfill material as an aid to compaction; however, material shall not be wet to form a mud or paste. H. Foundation Wall Backfill 1. Utilize granular material to backfill foundation walls to minimum of 2'-0" beyond foundation walls and to within 2'-0" of ground surface. 2. Provide upper 2'-0" of foundation wall backfill with impervious clay soil to prevent surface water infiltration into backfill. 3. Carefully place backfill in uniform lifts and compact to 95% of maximum Standard Proctor density. 4. Prevent over compacting backfill pressure on wall. 5. Backfill simultaneously on each side of walls (where backfill is to occur on both sides)to equalize soil pressures. 3.9 STRUCTURAL EXCAVATION A. After satisfactory placement and compaction of required structural fill, excavate foundation areas to planned bearing levels. B. Locate and mark all existing underground utilities and services before beginning structural excavation. C. Provide excavation for structures and footings, as required for construction, bracing and removal of forms, applying waterproofing, and to permit inspection. D. Bottom of excavating shall be reasonably level. E. Maintain excavations in as near their natural moisture conditions as possible. F. Fill over-excavated areas under structure bearing surfaces in accordance with Engineer's ,. direction. G. Do not allow construction equipment to create "pumping" of soils. H. Stockpile excavated clean fill for reuse where directed. Remove excess or unsuitable excavated fill from site. I. If presence of perched water is encountered, provide dewatering operations to control water infiltration. Proj. No. 07014 Earthwork for Structures 02301-5 on 3.10 EXPLOSIVES A. Use of explosives are prohibited. .. 3.11 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR PIPING: A. Excavation: 1. Dig trenches to uniform width required for particular item to be installed, "N sufficiently wide to provide ample working room. Provide 6 in. to 9 in. clearance on each side of piping. 2. Excavate trenches to depth indicated or required. Carry depth of trenches for piping to establish indicated flow lines and invert elevations. Vertical sided trench excavation shall not exceed five feet depth. Where deeper excavations are required, use sloped back excavations so as to maintain five feet or less depth on vertical excavations. 3. For piping and conduit, do not excavate beyond indicated depths. Hand excavate bottom cut to accurate elevations and support piping on undisturbed soil. 4. Notch under piping couplings to provide solid bearing for entire body of piping. 5. Depth for Exterior Piping: Except as otherwise indicated on Civil Drawings, excavate for exterior piping to provide minimum 18 in. depth of cover. 6. Excavate near large trees (within drip line) by hand, and protect root system from damage or dryout to greatest extent possible. Maintain moist condition for root system and cover exposed roots with burlap. 7. Store excavated material (temporarily) near excavation, in manner which will not interfere with or damage excavation or other work. Do not store under trees (within drip line). Retain excavated material which complies with requirements for backfill material. B. Backfill: 1. Do not backfill until installed piping has been tested and accepted, when testing is •. required. 2. Backfill Material: Backfill piping excavations within existing slabs-on-grade with specified select fill material. Place in layers and compact as specified for fill beneath slabs-on-grade. 3. Backfill simultaneously on opposite sides of piping, and compact simultaneously; do not dislocate work from installed position. 3.12 DRAINAGE AND PUMPING A. Provide for surface drainage to keep site free of surface water, and to keep excavation free of water during entire construction period. B. Provide and operate pumping equipment as required. If seepage is encountered, excavations shall be kept free of water. 3.13 FINISH GRADING A. After rough grading has been completed and site cleared of construction debris, cover areas designated with a layer of topsoil not less than 6"thick. B. Reuse stockpiled topsoil, cleaned of foreign matter. C. Final grades shall be as shown or as directed by Architect and shall slope away from building area and shall provide drainage for area. D. Degree of finish shall be that ordinarily obtainable with blade grader or scraper operations. E. Finish surfaces shall be not be more than 0.10 feet above or below established grade elevation. F. Provide uniform roundings at top and bottom of slopes and other breaks in grade. Correct irregularities and areas where water will stand. G. Uniformly distribute topsoil to required grades;feather back to where grades remain unchanged. H. Finish lawn and unpaved areas to 1/2 in. below top of walk and curbs. I. Leave stockpile area and site clean and raked, ready to receive landscaping, seeding or sodding. Proj. No. 07014 Earthwork for Structures 02301-6 3.14 PROTECTION, CLEAN-UP AND EXCESS MATERIALS A. Protect grades from construction and weather damage, washing, erosion and rutting, and repair such damage that occurs. B. Correct any settlement below established grades to prevent ponding of water. C. At locations where lime, concrete or other foreign matter has penetrated or been mixed with earth, remove damaged earth and replace with clean material. D. Remove excess stockpiled material, debris, waste, and other material from site and leave work in clean finished condition for final acceptance. N 1.15 TESTING A. Perform in accordance with the provisions of Section 01460. B. Laboratory Sampling and Testing: For each type of off-site borrow material and site- excavated soil material proposed for use, analyze samples to provide engineering soil classification, gradation and quality description, and perform 2 representative tests for each 10,000 cubic yards of soil material as follows: 1. Tests for liquid limit, plastic limit and plasticity index of soils in accordance with ASTM D4318. 2. Tests for moisture/density relations (optimum moisture and laboratory maximum density) of soil in accordance with ASTM D698 or D1557, as applicable. 3. Laboratory moisture content test in accordance with ASTM D2216 for each soil type to calibrate nuclear density gauge. C. In Place Moisture Density Tests: 1. Optimum Moisture-Density Relationship: If changes in soil occurs which may affect optimum moisture content or laboratory maximum dry density, conduct one additional moisture-density relationship for each changed soil material in accordance with ASTM D698 or D1557. 2. In-Place Compaction Tests: Perform in-place compaction test for moisture content, and dry density of materials-in-place, to determine that subgrades, backfill and embankment fill materials have been compacted to specified density in accordance with ASTM D2167 or ASTM D2922. Perform at following frequencies: a. One test for each 10,000 square feet of area of each lift of subgrade fill or backfill placed under pavement or floor slabs, except that pavement test rate may be at minimum of 400 linear foot intervals along pavement center line. Stagger test locations in each lift from those in previous lift. Provide a minimum of 3 tests for each lift for each building pad or pavement area. b. One test for each 100 linear feet, or portion thereof, of each lift of trench backfill, with locations staggered between lifts. C. One test for each 100 linear feet, or portion thereof, of each lift of backfill placed against foundation walls or grade beams, with locations staggered between lifts. d. One test of each lift placed at any free-standing footing, pier, or similar support, with locations taken on a different side, in each case, from the lift below. e. One test for each 100 linear feet, or portion thereof, of each lift of fill placed beneath strip footings, with locations staggered between lifts. D. Reports: 1. Laboratory Test Reports: Furnish a report for each test, describing variances from specified requirements, and state whether material meets specification requirements. 2. Field Test Reports: Furnish a report stating results for each test for each area. Identify soil type, location, lift and area. Reports may be combined on a daily basis, if so desired, provided that location of each test and applicable lift are clearly identified. END OF SECTION Proj. No. 07014 Earthwork for Structures 02301-7 .� «� .� .� .� a .,� .,� SECTION 02362 -TERMITE CONTROL PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes soil treatment for termite control below grade. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 02301 - Earthwork for Structures: Backfill materials. 1.2 REFERENCES A. EPA (Environmental Protection Agency) - Federal Insecticide, Fungicide and Rodenticide Act. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01330- Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Submit toxicants to be used, composition by percentage, dilution schedule, intended application rate. C. Test Reports: Indicate regulatory agency approval reports when required. D. Quality Control Submittals: For information only. 1. Installation instructions. 2. Pest Control Applicator's license. E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify toxicants meet or exceed specified requirements. F. Certify applications followed the National Pest Control Association (NPCA) Approved Referenced Procedures (ARP) for termite control or other regional location guidance. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Section 01700- Execution Requirements: Closeout procedures. B. Project Record Documents: Record, date and rate of application , areas of application, diary of toxicity meter readings and corresponding soil coverage. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Indicate re-treatment schedule. 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS A. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the Work of this section with minimum 5 years experience and licensed at Project location. 1.6 SEQUENCING A. Section 01100 - Summary: Work sequence. B. Apply toxicant in accordance with product label supplemented by the NPCA's ARP for termiticiding or local requirements. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Section 01700- Execution Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds. MR B. Furnish five year warranty. C. Warranty: Include coverage for damage and repairs to building and building contents caused by termites. Repair damage. Re-treat where required. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER AND PRODUCTS A. Termidor (Fipronio by Aventis. B. Premise (Imadachloprid)by Bayer. C. Commadore (Permathin) bySyngenta. • D. Capture (Bifenthrin) by FMC. E. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with Section 01600. Proj. No. 07014 Termite Control 02362- 1 2.2 TOXICANTS: A. Water-based Emulsions: Soil-poisoning chemical in water emulsion in accordance with State and Federal regulations. 2.3 MIXES: A. Follow manufacturer's mixing instructions. am B. Add water soluble coloring to emulsion. .w PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Section 01300-Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Verify soil surfaces are unfrozen, sufficiently dry to absorb toxicant, and ready to receive treatment. C. Verify final grading is complete. , D. Do not begin soil poisoning work until preparations for related slab placement have been completed, except for installation of vapor retarder. E. Verify that footings, foundation walls, and other foundation work, have been completed. F. Do not apply solution when the soil or fill is excessively wet, or immediately after heavy rain. G. Apply toxicants before placement of vapor retarder. H. Do not begin work until paper, trash and debris has been removed from areas to be treated. 3.2 APPLICATION A. Apply toxicant at locations indicated in Schedule at end of section. �* B. Apply extra treatment to structure penetration surfaces including pipe or ducts, and soil penetrations including grounding rods or posts. C. Re-treat disturbed treated soil with same toxicant as original treatment. D. When inspection or testing identifies presence of termites, re-treat soil and re-test. E. Location: 1. Apply soil treatment to areas beneath concrete floor slabs-on-grade, basement floors and where concrete is placed on carton forms. — 2. Apply soil treatment to sides of footings and foundations. 3. Apply soil treatment along both sides of interior and exterior foundation grade beams. 4. Apply soil treatment beneath expansion joints and at penetrations in slabs-on- grade. F. Rate of Application: 1. Slabs-on-Grade: Apply at minimum rate of one gallon to each 10 sq. ft. of area under slabs-on-grade. 2. Grade Beams: Apply at minimum rate of 4 gallons per 10 lin. ft. for each foot of depth from grade to bottom of beam along perimeter of foundation, both sides. 3. Miscellaneous: ' a. Apply at rate of 4 gallons per 10 lin. ft. immediately below expansion joints, control joints and areas where slab will be penetrated by construction features. •,� G. Retreatment: 1. Retreat areas disturbed by subsequent excavation or other construction activities following application. 2. Retreatment of soil to be made using same chemical composition and rate of application as original treatment. 3. Apply additional treatment to building perimeter just prior to substantial completion. ., Proj. No. 07014 Termite Control 02362 - 2 3.3 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Protecting finished Work. B. Do not permit soil grading over treated work. C. Allow not less than 12 hours for drying after application, before beginning concrete placement or other construction activities. D. Post signs in areas of application indicating that soil poisoning has been applied. Remove signs when areas are covered by other construction. END OF SECTION Proj. No. 07014 Termite Control 02362 - 3 •.� .� .,� ,�. -e „k .� ,� limp SECTION 02740 - FLEXIBLE PAVEMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes asphaltic concrete paving, wearing, binder and base course; surface sealer; pavement markings, for new pavement and repair of existing surfaces. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 02300 - Rough Grading: Preparation of site for paving and base. 1.2 REFERENCES ON A. Provide hot-mix asphalt pavement according to the materials, workmanship, and other applicable requirements of the standard specifications of the state or of authorities having jurisdiction. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Paving: Designed for light duty commercial vehicles. 1.4 QUALIFICATIONS A. Installer: Company specializing in performing work of this section with minimum 5 years experience. 1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Environmental conditions affecting products on site. B. Do not place asphalt when ambient air or base surface temperature is less than 40 degrees F, or surface is wet or frozen. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MIXES A. Hot-Mix Asphalt: Provide dense, hot-laid, hot-mix asphalt plant mixes approved by authorities having jurisdiction; complying with the following requirements: 1. 1-1/2" asphaltic concrete Type S-3 Lb. Hubbard Field. 2. Thickness: Match existing. B. Pavement Markings: Alkyd-Resin type, ready-mixed, complying with FS TT-P-115, Type 1. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Section 01300 -Administrative Requirements: Verification of existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify compacted subbase is dry and ready to support paving and imposed loads. C. Verify gradients and elevations of base are correct. 3.2 SUBBASE A. 12"stabilized subgrade min. L.B.R. 40 max., plastic index of 6, compacted to 95% max, density per AASHO T-180. B. 6" compacted limerock - min. L.B.R. 75, compacted to 100% max, density per AASHO T-180. Proj. No. 07014 Flexible Pavement 02740- 1 3.3 PREPARATION - PRIMER A. Apply primer on aggregate base or subbase at uniform rate of 1/2 gal/sq yd. • B. Use clean sand to blot excess primer. 3.4 PLACING ASPHALT PAVEMENT- DOUBLE COURSE A. Place asphalt binder course within 24 hours of applying primer or tack coat. B. Place binder course to compacted thickness to match existing. C. Place wearing course within 24 hours of placing and compacting binder course. When binder course is placed more than 24 hours before placing wearing course, clean surface and apply tack coat before placing wearing course. D. Place wearing course to compacted thickness required. E. Compact pavement by rolling to specified density. Do not displace or extrude pavement from position. Hand compact in areas inaccessible to rolling equipment. F. Perform rolling with consecutive passes to achieve even and smooth finish, without roller marks. 4W 3.5 PAVEMENT MARKINGS A. Apply paint in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. B. Paint shall not track when crossed by a vehicle 1 minute after application. low 3.6 TOLERANCES A. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements: Tolerances. B. Flatness: Maximum variation of 1/4 inch measured with 10 foot straight edge. C. Scheduled Compacted Thickness: Within 1/4 inch. D. Variation from Indicated Elevation: Within 1/2 inch. 3.7 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Protecting finished work. B. Immediately after placement, protect pavement from mechanical injury for 24 hours. END OF SECTION Proj. No. 07014 Flexible Pavement 02740 - 2 SECTION 02750 - RIGID PAVEMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes concrete sidewalks, and aggregate base course. B. Related Sections: * 1. Section 02300 - Earthwork: Preparation of site for paving and base. 2. Section 02740 - Flexible Pavement: Asphalt wearing course. 3. Section 07900 -Joint Sealers: Sealant for joints. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ACI 301 (American Concrete Institute) - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings. • B. ACI 304 (American Concrete Institute) - Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete. C. ASTM A185-Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement. D. ASTM C494 - Chemical Admixtures for Concrete. E. ASTM D1751 - Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction. ► 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Paving: Designed for light duty commercial paving and pedestrian sidewalks. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Submit data on joint filler, admixtures, and curing compounds. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with State Highways standard. B. Maintain one copy of each document on site. C. Obtain cementitious materials from same source throughout. 1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01600- Product Requirements. B. Do not place concrete when base surface temperature is less than 40 degrees F, or surface is wet or frozen. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 FORM MATERIALS A. Form Materials: As specified in Section 03100. 2.2 REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Steel and Wire Fabric: Type specified in Section 03200. 2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Concrete Materials: As specified in Section 03300. Provide in accordance with State Highways standards for Class A cement concrete. 2.4 CONCRETE MIX PERFORMANCE CRITERIA A. Provide concrete to the following criteria: (Class A) * 1. Compressive Strength: 3500 psi at 28 days. 2. Slump: 1 to 3 inches. 3. Minimum Water/Cement Ratio: 0.50. Proj. No. 07014 Rigid Pavement 02750 - 1 ■ 4. Air Entrained: 6% ± 1%. B. Use accelerating admixtures in cold weather only when approved by the Architect in writing. C. Use set retarding admixtures during hot weather only when approved by the Architect in writing. 2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL AND TESTS A. Section 01400- Quality Requirements: Testing and Inspection Services: B. Submit proposed mix design to appointed firm for review prior to commencement of Work. C. Tests on cement, aggregates, and mixes will be performed to ensure conformance with specified requirements. D. Test samples in accordance with ACI 301. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Section 01300-Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Verify compacted subgrade is acceptable and ready to support paving and imposed , loads. C. Verify gradients and elevations of base are correct. 3.2 SUBBASE A. Match existing material and thickness. B. Moisten base to minimize absorption of water from fresh concrete. 3.3 FORMING A. Place and secure forms to correct location, dimension, profile, and gradient. B. Assemble formwork to permit easy stripping and dismantling without damaging concrete. C. Place joint filler vertical in position, in straight lines. Secure to formwork during concrete ' placement. 3.4 PLACING CONCRETE A. Place concrete in accordance State standards. Pub. 408. B. Saw cut contraction joints 3/16 inch wide at an optimum time after finishing. Cut 1/3 into depth of slab. 3.5 FINISHING A. General Paving: Light broom. B. Sidewalk Paving: Light broom and trowel joint edges. C. Curbs and Gutters: Light broom. D. Direction of Texturing: Transverse to pavement direction. E. Place curing compound on exposed concrete surfaces immediately after finishing. 3.6 JOINT SEALING A. Separate pavement from vertical surfaces with 3/4 inch thick joint filler. B. Place joint filler in pavement pattern placement sequence. Set top to required elevations. ..,, Secure to resist movement by wet concrete. C. Extend joint filler from bottom of pavement to within 1/4 inch of finished surface. Conform to Section 07900 for finish joint sealer requirements. 3.7 TOLERANCES A. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements: Tolerances. B. Maximum Variation of Surface Flatness: 1/4 inch in 10 ft. C. Maximum Variation From True Position: 1/2 inch. Proj. No. 07014 Rigid Pavement 02750- 2 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Section 01460 Testing and inspection services. B. Three concrete test cylinders will be taken for every 75 or less cu yds of each class of concrete placed each day. C. One additional test cylinder will be taken during cold weather and cured on site under same conditions as concrete it represents. D. One slump test will be taken for each set of test cylinders taken. E. Maintain records of placed concrete items. Record date, location of pour, quantity, air temperature, and test samples taken. 3.9 PROTECTION A. Immediately after placement, protect pavement from premature drying, excessive hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury. B. Do not permit traffic over pavement for 7 days minimum after finishing or until 75 percent design strength of concrete has been achieved. END OF SECTION 02750 - 3 Proj. No. 07014 Rigid Pavement a" 4 AN Imp 44 SECTION 02832 - VINYL FENCE PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Vinyl fence framework, panels and accessories. B. Post bases. 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. System: PVC fence, types as scheduled. B. Line Post Spacing: At intervals not exceeding 10 feet. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in commercial quality vinyl fencing with three years experience. B. Installation: In accordance with ANSUASTM F567, and manufacture's instructions. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings, product data and manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01330. B. Include plan layout, grid, spacing of components, accessories, fittings, anchorages, and schedule of components. C. Product Data: Provide product data on fabric, posts, accessories, fittings, and hardware. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate the installation of the vinyl fence with other trades. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. CertainTeed Bufftech Vinyl Fence Products (800-233-8990). B. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Extruded Vinyl: Rigid polyvinyl chloride panels meeting ASTM D1784. B. Steel Channel: Hot-dipped galvanized channel for reinforcing rails. C. Accessories: As required for complete installation. 2.3 CONCRETE MIX A. Concrete: ASTM C94; normal Portland Cement; 3000 psi at 28 days; 3 inch slump; 3/4" inch maximum sized aggregate. 2.4 COMPONENTS AND ACCESSORIES A. Posts: PVC posts, 5 x 5 in. x .170 in. wall thickness. B. Caps: PVC, sized to post dimension, set screw retained. C. Fittings: Sleeves, bands,clips, rail ends, tension bars, fasteners and fittings: Steel or PVC. D. Fence Components: 1. Type: Traditional. 2. Pickets: Extruded PVC, 7/8 x 3 in. by varying lengths. 3. Rails: Extruded PVC, 2 x 4 x 95-1/2 inches. Provide steel reinforcement in bottom rail. 4. Height: Varies. 5. Source: CertainTeed Bufftech, Danbury Thru-Picket - Concave fence. Proj. No. 07014 Vinyl Fences 02832-1 2.5 FINISHES A. PVC Color: White. B. Accessories: Same finish as framing. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install framework, accessories in accordance with manufacturers instructions. B. Set terminal, and line posts plumb, in concrete footings with top of footing 2 inches above and 24 inches below finish grade. Slope top of concrete for water runoff. Footing depth below finish grade: 24 inches. C. Attach horizontal supports to vertical posts with bolts. Provide horizontal rails to attach panels to. D. Position bottom of pickets 1 inch above finished grade. E. Fasten to rails with galvanized fasteners. 3.2 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch. B. Maximum Offset From True Position: 1 inch. .� END OF SECTION N� ,w ,N Ns w N Proj. No. 07014 Vinyl Fences 02832-2 SECTION 02843 - PRECAST BOLLARDS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes 1. Precast stone bollards and anchorage. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASTM A615- Deformed and Plain Billet Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. B. ASTM C150- Portland Cement. " C. ASTM C260 - Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01330- Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Submit unit configuration, dimensions. C. Samples: Submit two samples 4 x 4 in. illustrating surface finish. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Section 01300 -Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Coordinate the Work with pavement placement. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 CAST STONE BOLLARDS A. Concrete and Reinforcement Materials: Refer to Sections 03200 and 03300. B. Cement: ANSI/ASTM C150, Portland Type I - Normal, white color. C. Concrete Materials: ASTM C33; water and sand. D. Anchor Pins: 5/8 inch deformed bar, 2 for each bollard, extending a minimum of 4 inches below bottom of bollard. E. Concrete Mix: Minimum 5000 psi, 28 day strength, air entrained to 5 to 7 percent. F. Size: 6-1/2 inch square x 38 inches high. Provide 16 x 16 x 8 inch footer. G. Cap: Granada style cap by Stonelight. H. Reinforcing: ASTM A615, Grade 40, deformed reinforcement bars. I. Cure units to develop concrete quality, and to minimize appearance blemishes including non-uniformity, staining, or surface cracking. J. Color: As selected by Architect. K. Source: Pre-cast concrete bollards by Stonelight(www.stonelight.com ). PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Verify layout of bollard locations with pavement layout. B. Thoroughly clean surfaces to receive bollards free of dirt, sand, oil, grease or other foreign matter. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install units without damage to shape or finish. Replace or repair damaged units. B. Install units in alignment with adjacent work. C. Fasten units in place with 2 dowels for each unit. END OF SECTION Proj. No. 07014 Precast Bollards 02843- 1 SECTION 02920 - SEEDING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes preparation of subsoil; placing topsoil; fertilizing; seeding, mulching, fertilizer; and maintenance. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 02300 - Earthwork: Rough and finish grading, and topsoil requirements. 1.2 REFERENCES A. FS O-F-241 - Fertilizers, Mixed, Commercial. 1.3 DEFINITIONS AR A. Weeds: Vegetative species other than specified species to be established in given area. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide seed mixture in containers showing percentage of seed mix, germination percentage, inert matter percentage, weed percentage, year of production, net weight, date of packaging, and location of packaging. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver grass seed mixture in sealed containers. Seed in damaged packaging is not acceptable. B. Deliver fertilizer in waterproof bags showing weight, chemical analysis, and name of manufacturer. 1.6 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Maintenance service. B. Maintain seeded areas immediately after placement until grass is well established and exhibits vigorous growing condition for three cuttings. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Seed: Argentine Bahiagrass. B. Fertilizer: FS O-F-241, Type I, Grade A; recommended for grass, with fifty percent of elements derived from organic sources; of proportion necessary to eliminate deficiencies of topsoil to the following proportions: nitrogen 20 percent, phosphoric acid 10 percent, soluble potash 10 percent. C. Mulching Material:Type recommended by seed manufacturer. D. Water: Clean, fresh and free of substances or matter capable of inhibiting vigorous �. growth of grass. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Verify prepared soil base is ready to receive the Work of this section. 3.2 PREPARATION OF SUBSOIL A. Prepare sub-soil and eliminate uneven areas and low spots. • B. Maintain lines, levels, profiles and contours. Make changes in grade gradual. Blend slopes into level areas. Proj. No. 07014 Seeding 02920- 1 C. Remove foreign materials and undesirable plants and their roots. Do not bury foreign material beneath areas to be sodded. ., D. Remove contaminated subsoil. E. Scarify sub-soil to depth of 4-inches where topsoil is to be placed. F. Repeat cultivation in areas where equipment, used for hauling and spreading topsoil, has compacted subsoil. 3.3 FERTILIZING A. Apply fertilizer at rate recommended by testing laboratory. 3.4 SEEDING A. Apply seed at rate of 7.5 lbs per 1000 sq ft evenly in two intersecting directions. Rake in lightly. B. Do not seed areas in excess of that which can be mulched on same day. C. Do not sow immediately following rain, when ground is too dry, or when winds are over 5 mph. D. Immediately following seeding and compacting, apply mulch to thickness of 1/8 inches. Maintain clear of shrubs and trees. E. Apply water with fine spray immediately after each area has been mulched. Saturate to 4- inches of soil. 3.5 MAINTENANCE A. Mow grass at regular intervals to maintain at maximum height of 3 inches. Do not cut more than 1/3 of grass blade at each mowing. .. B. Perform first mowing when seedlings are 40 percent higher than desired height. END OF SECTION a Proj. No. 07014 Seeding 02920 - 2 SECTION 03100 - CONCRETE FORMS AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes formwork for cast-in place concrete,with shoring, bracing, and anchorage; openings for other work; form accessories; and form stripping. B. Products Installed But Not Furnished Under This Section: 1. Section 03300 -Cast-in-Place Concrete: Supply of concrete accessories for placement by this Section. 2. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Supply of metal fabrications for placement by this Section. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 03200 - Concrete Reinforcement. 2. Section 03300 -Cast-in-Place Concrete. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ACI (American Concrete Institute) 117- Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials. B. ACI (American Concrete Institute) 301 - Structural Concrete for Buildings. C. ACI (American Concrete Institute) 318- Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete. D. ACI (American Concrete Institute) 347- Recommended Practice For Concrete Formwork. E. AF&PA (American Forest& Paper Association) - National Design Specifications for Wood Construction. F. ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers) A17.1 - Safety Code for Elevators, Dumbwaiters, Escalators, and Moving Walks G. APA(APA/Engineered Wood Association) PS-PA1 -Construction and Industrial Plywood. H. ASTM D 1751 - Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Non-Extruding and Resilient Bituminous types). I. DFPA- (Douglas Fir Plywood Association) Duality Stamp. J. SPIB - (Southern Pine Inspection Bureau) 1994 Standard Grading Rules for Southern Pine Lumber(and Supplements). K. WCLIB - (West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau) Rule No. 17, Standard Grading and Dressing Rules. 1.3 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Design, engineer and construct formwork, shoring and bracing to conform to code requirements; resultant concrete to conform to required shape, line and dimension. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01330- Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit formwork and shoring shop drawings. 2. Indicate the following: a. Pertinent dimensions, openings, methods of construction, types of connections, materials,joint arrangement and details, ties and shores, location of framing, studding and bracing, and temporary supports. b. Means of leakage prevention for concrete exposed to view in finished construction. A0 C. Sequence and timing of erection and stripping assumed compressive strength at time of stripping, height of lift and height of drop during placement. d. Vertical, horizontal and special loads in accordance with ACI 347, Section 2.2 and camber diagrams, when applicable. Proj. No. 07014 Forms and Accessories 03100 - 1 e. Notes to formwork erector showing size and location of conduits and piping embedded in concrete in accordance with ACI 318, Section 6.3. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 318. B. For wood products furnished for work of this Section, comply with applicable provisions of AF&PA National Design Specifications for Wood Construction. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Design formwork under direct supervision of Professional Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed at Project location. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING �* A. Section 01600- Product Requirements: Products storage and handling requirements. B. Store off ground in ventilated and protected manner to prevent deterioration from moisture. so 1.8 COORDINATION A. Section 01300 -Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Coordinate this Section with other sections of work, requiring attachment of components to formwork. C. When formwork is placed after reinforcement resulting in insufficient concrete cover over reinforcement before proceeding, request instructions from Architect/Engineer. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD FORM MATERIALS A. Plywood: Douglas Fir or Spruce species; solid one side; sound undamaged sheets with clean, true edges. B. Lumber Forms: 1. Application: Use for edge forms and unexposed finish concrete. 2. Boards: 6 inches or 8 inches in width, shiplapped or tongue and groove, "Standard" Grade Douglas Fir, conforming to WCLIB Standard Grading and Dressing Rule No. 17. Surface boards on four sides. C. Plywood Forms: 1. Application: Use for exposed finish concrete. 2. Forms: Conform to PS-1; full size 4 x 8 feet panels; each panel labeled with "" grade trademark of APA/EWA. 3. Plywood for Surfaces to Receive Membrane Waterproofing: Minimum of 5/8 inch thick; APA"B-B Plyform Structural I Exterior"grade. 4. Plywood where"Smooth Finish" is required, as indicated on Drawings: "HD Overlay Plyform Structural I Exterior" grade, minimum of 3/4 inch thick. 2.2 PREFABRICATED FORMS A. Manufacturers: 1. Aluma-Systems Inc., Burke Co. 2. Economy Forms Corp. 3. Molded Fiber Glass Concrete Forms Co. 4. Perma Tubes 5. Sonoco Products Co. 6. Symons Corp. 7. Western Forms, Inc. 8. Substitutions: Section 01600- Product Requirements. B. Preformed Steel Forms: Minimum 16 gage matched, tight fitting, stiffened to support weight of concrete without deflection detrimental to tolerances and appearance of finished surfaces. w Proj. No. 07014 Forms and Accessories 03100 - 2 C. Glass Fiber Fabric Reinforced Plastic Forms: Matched, tight fitting, stiffened to support weight of concrete without deflection detrimental to tolerances and appearance of finished concrete surfaces. D. Pan Type: Steel of size and profile required. E. Tubular Column Type; Round, spirally wound laminated fiber material, surface treated with release agent, non-reusable, of sizes required on Drawings. F. Steel Forms: Sheet steel, suitably reinforced, and designed for particular use shown on Drawings. G. Form Liners: Smooth, durable, grainless and non-staining hardboard, unless otherwise shown on Drawings. H. Framing, Studding and Bracing: Stud or No. 3 structural light framing grade. 2.3 FORMWORK ACCESSORIES A. Form Ties: Snap-tie with cones having a minimum tensile strength of 3000 lbs., adjustable in length and having a full one inch depth of break-back. Furnish with plastic cone of 5/8 in. diameter and one inch length which will completely cover form hole and prevent leakage of mortar. B. Spreaders: Standard, non-corrosive metal form clamp assembly, of type acting as spreaders and leaving no metal within 1 inch of concrete face. Wire ties, wood spreaders or through bolts are not permitted. C. Form Anchors and Hangers: 1. Do not use anchors and hangers exposed concrete leaving exposed metal at concrete surface. 2. Symmetrically arrange hangers supporting forms from structural steel members to minimize twisting or rotation of member. 3. Penetration of structural steel members is not permitted. D. Form Release Agent: Colorless mineral oil which will not stain concrete, or absorb moisture. 1. "Arca{-80"; Arcal Chemical Corporation. 2. "Synthex"; Industrial Synthetics Company. 3. "Nox-Crete Form Coating"; Nox-Crete Company. 4. Substitutions: Section 01600- Product Requirements. E. Corners: Chamfer, wood strip type; 2 x 2 inch size; maximum possible lengths. F. Nails, Spikes, Lag Bolts,Through Bolts, Anchorages: Size, strength and character to maintain formwork in place while placing concrete. G. Joint Fillers: Premolded mastic strips, asphaltic impregnated, ASTM D1751. H. Form Joint Systems: 1. Form Gasket: Closed-cell tape No. 4016 by 3M, Tesa Foam Stick No. 4766 by United Mineral and Chemical Corp., Seam-Strip Closed Cell by Preco Industries, or Bear Brand Gasket Tape. 2. Caulking: Rubberized, non-staining caulking compound, silicone No. 1201 by GE or No. 781 by Dow Corning. 3. Form Tape: 1 or 2 mil thick Mylar tape, Permacel No. P-910, 3M No. 371 or Bear Brand No. 359. 2.4 COATINGS A. Coatings for Aluminum: VP 1. Sherwin Williams: Topcoat of Heavy Duty Epoxy 1367-1360133 (epoxy polyamide, self-priming). 2. Benjamin Moore: a. Primer: Epoxy Rust-Inhibitive Primer (epoxy polyamide). b. Top Coat: Epoxy Enamel (epoxy polyamide). B. Form Sealer: Formfilm by W.R. Grace, Synthex by Industrial Synthetics Corp., or Pre- Form by Nox-Crete Co. C. Release Agent: Magic Kote Form Coating by Symons Mfg. Co., or Nox-Crete Form Coating by the Nox-Crete Co. Test for non-staining of concrete. Proj. No. 07014 Forms and Accessories 03100- 3 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Verify lines, levels, and centers before proceeding with formwork. Verify dimensions agree with Drawings. �* 3.2 EARTH FORMS A. Hand trim sides and bottom of earth forms. Remove loose soil prior to placing concrete. 3.3 PREPARATION A. Earth Forms: Trench earth forms neatly, accurately, and at least 2 inches wider than footing widths shown on Drawings, unless otherwise indicated. Construct wood edge * strips at top of each side of trench to secure reinforcing and prevent trench from sloughing. Form sides of footings where earth sloughs. Tamp earth forms firm and cleaned of debris and loose material before depositing concrete. 3.4 INSTALLATION A. Formwork - General: 1. Provide top form for sloped surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical to •* hold shape of concrete during placement, unless it can be demonstrated that top forms can be omitted. 2. Construct forms to correct shape and dimensions, mortar-tight, braced, and of sufficient strength to maintain shape and position under imposed loads from construction operations. 3. Camber forms where necessary to produce level finished soffits unless otherwise shown on Drawings. .., 4. Carefully verify horizontal and vertical positions of forms. Correct misaligned or misplaced forms before placing concrete. 5. Complete wedging and bracing before placing concrete. B. Forms for"Smooth Finish" Concrete: 1. Use steel, plywood or lined board forms. 2. Use clean and smooth plywood and form liners, uniform in size, and free from surface and edge damage capable of affecting resulting concrete finish. 3. Install form lining with close-fitting square joints between separate sheets without springing into place. 4. Use full size sheets of form lines and plywood wherever possible. 5. Tape joints to prevent protrusions in concrete. 6. Use care in forming and stripping wood forms to protect corners and edges. 7. Level and continue horizontal joints. 8. Keep wood forms wet until stripped. C. Forms for Surfaces to Receive Membrane Waterproofing: Use plywood or steel forms. After erection of forms, tape form joints to prevent protrusions in concrete. D. Framing, Studding and Bracing: 1. Space studs at 16 incheson center maximum for boards and 12 inches on center maximum for plywood. 2. Size framing, bracing, centering, and supporting members with sufficient strength to maintain shape and position under imposed loads from construction operations. 3. Construct beam soffits of material minimum of 2 inches thick. 4. Distribute bracing loads over base area on which bracing is erected. 5. When placed on ground, protect against undermining, settlement or accidental impact. E. Erect formwork, shoring, and bracing to achieve design requirements, in accordance with requirements of ACI 301. F. Arrange and assemble formwork to permit dismantling and stripping. Do not damage concrete during stripping. Permit removal of remaining principal shores. Proj. No. 07014 Forms and Accessories 03100 - 4 G. Obtain Architect's approval before framing openings in structural members that are not indicated on Drawings. H. Install chamfer strips on external corners of walls. I. Do not reuse wood formwork more than 3 times for concrete surfaces to be exposed to view. Do not patch formwork. 3.5 APPLICATION - FORM RELEASE AGENT A. Apply form release agent on formwork in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Apply prior to placement of reinforcing steel, anchoring devices, and embedded items. C. Do not apply form release agent where concrete surfaces are indicated to receive special finishes or applied coverings that are affected by agent. Soak inside surfaces of untreated forms with clean water. Keep surfaces coated prior to placement of concrete. D. Reuse and Coating of Forms: Thoroughly clean forms and reapply form coating before each reuse. For exposed work, do not reuse forms with damaged faces or edges. Apply MR form coating to forms in accordance with manufacturer's specifications. Apply form coatings before placing reinforcing steel. 3.6 INSERTS, EMBEDDED PARTS, AND OPENINGS A. Provide formed openings where required for items to be embedded in passing through concrete work. B. Locate and set in place items required to be cast directly into concrete. C. Coordinate with Work of other sections in forming and placing openings, slots, reglets, recesses, sleeves, bolts, anchors, other inserts, and components of other Work. D. Install accessories straight, level, and plumb. Ensure items are not disturbed during concrete placement. E. Provide temporary ports or openings in formwork where required to facilitate cleaning and inspection. Locate openings at bottom of forms to allow flushing water to drain. F. Close temporary openings with tight fitting panels,flush with inside face of forms, and neatly fitted so joints will not be apparent in exposed concrete surfaces. G. Form Ties: 1. Use sufficient strength and sufficient quantity to prevent spreading of forms. 2. Place ties at least 1 inch away from finished surface of concrete. 3. Leave inner rods in concrete when forms are stripped. 4. Space form ties equidistant, symmetrical and aligned vertically and horizontally unless otherwise shown on Drawings. H. Arrangement: Arrange formwork to allow proper erection sequence and to permit form removal without damage to concrete. I. Construction Joints: 1. Install surfaced pouring strip where construction joints intersect exposed surfaces to provide straight line at joints. 2. Just prior to subsequent concrete placement, remove strip and tighten forms to conceal shrinkage. 3. Show no overlapping of construction joints. Construct joints to present same appearance as butted plywood joints. 4. Arrange joints in continuous line straight, true and sharp. J. Embedded Items: ,. 1. Make provisions for pipes, sleeves, anchors, inserts, reglets, anchor slots, nailers, waterstops, and other features. 2. Do not embed wood or uncoated aluminum in concrete. 3. Obtain installation and setting information for embedded items furnished under " other Specification sections. 4. Securely anchor embedded items in correct location and alignment prior to placing concrete. ,. 5. Verify conduits and pipes, including those made of coated aluminum, meet requirements of ACI 318, Section 6.3. Proj. No. 07014 Forms and Accessories 03100- 5 K. Openings for Items Passing Through Concrete: 1. Frame openings in concrete where shown on Drawings. Establish exact .. locations, sizes, and other conditions required for openings and attachment of work specified under other sections. 2. Coordinate work to avoid cutting and patching of concrete after placement. 3. Perform cutting and repairing of concrete required as result of failure to provide required openings. L. Screeds: 1. Set screeds and establish levels for tops of concrete slabs and levels for finish on slabs. 2. Slope slabs to drain where required or as shown on Drawings. 3. Before depositing concrete, remove debris from space to be occupied by concrete and thoroughly wet forms. Remove freestanding water. �* M. Screed Supports: 1. For concrete over waterproof membranes and vapor barrier membranes, use cradle, pad or base type screed supports which will not puncture membrane. 2. Staking through membrane is not be permitted. N. Cleanouts and Access Panels: 1. Provide removable cleanout sections or access panels at bottoms of forms to permit inspection and effective cleaning of loose dirt, debris and waste material. 2. Clean forms and surfaces against which concrete is to be placed. Remove chips, saw dust and other debris. Thoroughly blow out forms with compressed air just before concrete is placed. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements: Testing and inspection services. B. Inspect erected formwork, shoring, and bracing to ensure that work is in accordance with formwork design, and that supports, fastenings, wedges, ties, and items are secure. *�+ C. Notify Architect after placement of reinforcing steel in forms, but prior to placing concrete. D. Schedule concrete placement to permit formwork inspection before placing concrete. 3.8 FORM CLEANING ,« A. Clean forms as erection proceeds,to remove foreign matter within forms. B. Clean formed cavities of debris prior to placing concrete. C. Flush with water or use compressed air to remove remaining foreign matter. Ensure that water and debris drain to exterior through clean-out ports. D. During cold weather, remove ice and snow from within forms. Do not use de-icing salts. Do not use water to clean out forms, unless formwork and concrete construction proceed within heated enclosure. Use compressed air or other means to remove foreign matter. 3.9 FORM REMOVAL A. Do not remove forms or bracing until concrete has gained sufficient strength to carry its .� own weight and imposed loads and removal has been approved by Arch itect/Engineer. B. Loosen forms carefully. Do not wedge pry bars, hammers, or tools against finish concrete surfaces scheduled for exposure to view. C. Store removed forms in manner that surfaces to be in contact with fresh concrete will not be damaged. Discard damaged forms. D. Leave forms in place for minimum number of days as specified in ACI 347. 3.10 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Construct formwork to maintain tolerances required by ACI 301. B. Tolerances: Construct formwork to produce completed concrete surfaces within construction tolerances specified in ACI 117. END OF SECTION Proj. No. 07014 Forms and Accessories 03100 - 6 SECTION 03200 - CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes reinforcing steel bars, welded wire fabric and accessories for cast-in- place concrete. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03100 - Concrete Forms and Accessories. 2. Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ACI 301 (American Concrete Institute) - Structural Concrete. B. ACI 318 (American Concrete Institute) - Building Code Requirements For Structural .► Concrete. C. ACI SP-66 (American Concrete Institute) - Detailing Manual. D. ASTM A82 - Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement. E. ASTM A184- Fabricated Deformed Steel Bar Mats for Concrete Reinforcement. F. ASTM A185- Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement. G. ASTM A496 - Steel Wire, Deformed, for Concrete Reinforcement. H. ASTM A497- Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Deformed,for Concrete Reinforcement. I. ASTM A615- Deformed and Plain Billet Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. J. AWS D1.4 (American Welding Society) - Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel. K. CRSI (Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute) - Manual of Practice. L. CRSI (Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute) - Placing Reinforcing Bars. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate bar sizes, spacings, locations, and quantities of reinforcing steel and welded wire fabric, bending and cutting schedules, and supporting and spacing devices. C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify Products meet or exceed specified requirements. D. Submit certified copies of mill test report of reinforcement materials analysis. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE Ow A. Perform Work in accordance with CRSI - Manual of Standard Practice. 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS A. Detail reinforcement and prepare shop drawings in accordance with ACI 315. B. Welders' Certificates: Submit under provisions of Section 01400 Manufacturer's Certificates, certifying welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within previous 12 months. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Section 01300-Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Coordinate with placement of formwork, formed openings and other Work. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615, 60 ksi yield grade; deformed billet steel bars, unfinished. B. Welded Steel Reinforcement: Deformed low-alloy steel, ASTM A706, carbon content not exceeding 0.30%and manganese content not exceeding 0.60%. Identify and tag with manufacturer's heat identification number. C. Stirrups Steel: ASTM A82, unfinished. Proj. No. 07014 Reinforcement 03200 - 1 An D. Welded Steel Wire Fabric:ASTM A497 Deformed Type; in flat sheets; unfinished. A 2.2 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Tie Wire: Minimum 16 gage annealed type. B. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers: Sized and shaped for strength and support of reinforcement during concrete placement conditions. *� C. Provide spacers, chairs, ties, and other devices necessary for properly placing, spacing, supporting and fastening reinforcement in place. D. Where underside of concrete is exposed architectural finish, provide white plastic bar .. supports and chairs. E. For supporting bars in slabs-on-grade, provide Individual High Chairs No. HCP with welded bottom plates by Hohmann and Barnard. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Fabricate reinforcing steel to sizes, shapes, and lengths detailed in accordance with requirements of ACI 318 and ACI 315. B. Do not heat reinforcement bars to bend bars. C. Weld reinforcement in accordance with AWS D1.4. D. Reinforcement: Clean surface, weld and re-protect welded joint in accordance with CRSI. E. Locate reinforcement splices not indicated drawings, at point of minimum stress. ., PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PLACEMENT A. Accurately place reinforcing steel of sizes, shapes, lengths, spacing and other dimensions in accordance with reviewed Shop Drawings and CRSI Standard. .., B. Before placing, thoroughly clean reinforcement of coatings which would reduce bonding. C. Do not heat, cut, or bend bars without Architect's approval. Do not splice reinforcement at points of maximum stress. Stagger splices in adjacent bars and provide a minimum overlap of 30-bar diameters at splices unless specifically noted otherwise on Drawings. D. Do not displace or damage vapor retarder. E. Accommodate placement of formed openings. F. Maintain position and clearances within following tolerances using metal chairs, spacers or other supports. 1. Top bars in slabs and beams: a. Members 8 in. deep or less: t1/4 in. b. Members more than 8 in. but not over 2 ft. deep: t1/2 in. C. Members more than 2 ft. deep: t one in. 2. Lengthwise of members: t2 in. 3. Concrete cover to formed surfaces: t1/4 in. 4. Minimum spacing between bars: 1/4 in. G Install welded wire fabric in as long lengths as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh and lace splices with 16 gauge wire. Do not make end laps midway between supporting beams, or directly over beams of continuous structures. Offset end laps in adjacent widths to prevent continuous laps. H Securely saddle tie at intersections with No. 18 ga. black annealed wire. Rigidly secure reinforcement in place during concrete placing. I Provide concrete coverage and clearances for reinforcing steel as shown on Drawings, in accordance with ACI 318. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL !* A. Section 01460 - Testing Laboratory Services. END OF SECTION Proj. No. 07014 Reinforcement 03200 - 2 SECTION 03300 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes cast-in-place concrete floors and slabs on grade; control, expansion and contraction joint devices associated with concrete work, including joint sealants; and equipment pads. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03200 - Concrete Reinforcement. 2. Section 03350-Concrete Finishing. 3. Section 03390- Concrete Curing. 4. Section 07900 -Joint Sealers. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ACI 301 (American Concrete Institute) - Standard Specification for Structural Concrete for Buildings B. ACI 302 (American Concrete Institute) - Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction. C. ACI 304R (American Concrete Institute) - Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete. D. ACI 305R (American Concrete Institute) - Hot Weather Concreting. E. ACI 306.1 (American Concrete Institute) - Standard Specification for Cold Weather Concreting. F. ACI 308 (American Concrete Institute) - Standard Practice for Curing Concrete. G. ACI 318 (American Concrete Institute) - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary. H. ASTM B221 - Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes, and Tubes. I. ASTM C33 -Concrete Aggregates. J. ASTM C94 - Ready-Mixed Concrete. K. ASTM C150 - Portland Cement. L. ASTM C260 -Air Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. M. ASTM C330 - Light Weight Aggregates For Structural Concrete. N. ASTM C494 - Chemicals Admixtures for Concrete. O. ASTM C618 - Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Portland Cement Concrete. P. ASTM C1017 - Chemical Admixtures for Use in Producing Flowing Concrete. Q. ASTM C1107 - Packaged Dry, Hydraulic Cement Grout (Nonshrink). R. ASTM D994 - Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete (Bituminous Type). S. ASTM D1190 - Concrete Joint Sealer, Hot-Poured Elastic Type. T. Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types). U. Paving and Structural Construction. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Submit data on joint devices, attachment accessories and admixtures. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit installation procedures and interface required with adjacent Work. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Closeout procedures. B. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of embedded utilities and components concealed from view in finished construction. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 301. B. Acquire cement and aggregate from one source for Work. Proj. No. 07014 Concrete 03300- 1 ■ C. Conform to ACI 305R when concreting during hot weather. D. Conform to ACI 306.1 when concreting during cold weather. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Coordinate placement of joint devices with erection of concrete formwork and placement of form accessories. PART 2 PRODUCTS so 2.1 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cement: ASTM C150, Type I - Normal. B. Fine Aggregates: Clean, hard, durable, uncoated natural sand free from silt, loam or clay, meeting requirements of ASTM C33, C. Coarse Aggregate: Hard durable, uncoated crushed limestone meeting requirements of ASTM C33, Size No. 467 or Size No. 67 as scheduled. D. Water: Clean and not detrimental to concrete. E. Curing Paper: ASTM C171. 2.2 ADMIXTURES A. Air Entrainment: ASTM C260. B. Chemical: ASTM C494 Type A- Water Reducing. C. Fly Ash: ASTM C618. D. Plasticizing: ASTM C1017. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Bonding Agent: Polymer resin emulsion. B. Vapor Retarder: Refer To Section 07260. C. Non-Shrink Grout: ASTM C1107, Grade A; premixed compound consisting of non- metallic aggregate, cement, water reducing and plasticizing agents; capable of developing minimum compressive strength of 2,400 psi in 48 hours and 7,000 psi in 28 days. 2.4 JOINT DEVICES AND FILLER MATERIALS ., A. Joint Filler Type A: ASTM D1751; Asphalt impregnated fiberboard or felt, 1/4 inch thick; tongue and groove profile. B. Joint Filler Type B : ASTM D1752; Closed cell polyvinyl chloride foam, resiliency recovery of 95 percent if not compressed more than 50 percent of original thickness. C. Construction Joint Devices: Integral galvanized steel; 1/8 inch thick, formed to tongue and groove profile, knockout holes spaced at 6 inches, ribbed steel spikes with tongue to fit top screed edge. D. Expansion Joint Devices: Refer To Section 05810. E. Sealant and Primer: Refer to Section 07900. 2.5 CONCRETE MIX ^" A. Mix concrete in accordance with ACI 318. Deliver concrete in accordance with ASTM C94. B. Provide concrete to the criteria indicated on the Structural Drawings. C. Use accelerating admixtures in cold weather only when approved. Use of admixtures will not relax cold weather placement requirements. D. Use calcium chloride only when approved by Engineer. E. Use set retarding admixtures during hot weather only when approved. F. Add air entraining agent to normal weight concrete mix for work exposed to exterior. Proj. No. 07014 Concrete 03300 - 2 w� PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Section 01300- Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Verify requirements for concrete cover over reinforcement. C. Verify anchors, seats, plates, reinforcement and other items to be cast into concrete are accurately placed, positioned securely, and will not interfere with placing concrete. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare previously placed concrete by cleaning with steel brush and applying bonding agent. B. In locations where new concrete is doweled to existing work, drill holes in existing concrete, insert steel dowels and pack solid with non-shrink grout. 3.3 PLACING CONCRETE A. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 318. B. Notify Architect minimum 24 hours prior to commencement of operations. C. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts, formed expansion and contraction joints, are not disturbed during concrete placement. ' D. Install vapor retarder under interior slabs on grade. Lap joints minimum 6 inches and seal watertight. E. Repair vapor barrier damaged during placement of concrete reinforcing. Repair with vapor barrier material; lap over damaged areas minimum 6 inches and seal watertight. F. Separate slabs on grade from vertical surfaces with 1/2 inch thick joint filler. G. Place joint filler in floor slab pattern placement sequence. Set top to required elevations. Secure to resist movement by we concrete. H. Extend joint filler from bottom of slab to within 1/z inch of finished slab surface. Conform to Section 07900 for finish joint sealer requirements. I. Install construction joint devices in coordination with column and wall pattern placement sequence. Set top to required elevations. Secure to resist movement by wet concrete. J. Install joint device anchors. Maintain correct position to allow joint cover to be flush with floor finish. K. Install joint covers in longest practical length, when adjacent construction activity is complete. L. Apply sealants in joint devices in accordance with Section 07900. M. Maintain records of concrete placement. Record date, location, quantity, air temperature, and test samples taken. N. Place concrete continuously between predetermined expansion, control, and construction joints. O. Do not interrupt successive placement; do not permit cold joints to occur. P. Place floor slabs in saw cut pattern indicated. Q. Saw cut joints within 12 hours after placing. Use 3/16 inch thick blade, cut into 1/4 depth of slab thickness. R. Screed floors and slabs on grade level, maintaining surface flatness of Ff of 20. 3.5 CONCRETE FINISHING A. Finish concrete floor surfaces to requirements of Section 03350. B. In areas with floor drains, maintain floor elevation at walls; pitch surfaces uniformly to drains at 1/4 inch per foot nominal unless noted otherwise. 3.6 CURING AND PROTECTION A. Immediately after placement, protect concrete from premature drying, excessively hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury. B. Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for period necessary for hydration of cement and hardening of concrete. C. Cure concrete floor surfaces to requirements of Section 03390. Proj. No. 07014 Concrete 03300- 3 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Section 01460 -Testing Laboratory Services. B. Field inspection and testing will be performed in accordance with ACI 301 and under provisions of Section 01460. C. Provide free access to Work and cooperate with appointed firm. D. Submit proposed mix design of each class of concrete to inspection and testing firm for review prior to commencement of Work. E. Tests of cement and aggregates may be performed to ensure conformance with specified requirements. F. Three concrete test cylinders will be taken for every pour or every 75 or less cu yds of concrete placed. G. One additional test cylinder will be taken during cold weather concreting, cured on job site under same conditions as concrete it represents. -^ H. One slump test will be taken for each set of test cylinders taken. I. One air content test will be made for each set of test cylinders taken. 3.8 PATCHING A. Allow Architect/Engineer to inspect concrete surfaces immediately upon removal of forms. B. Excessive honeycomb or embedded debris in concrete is not acceptable. Notify Architect/Engineer upon discovery. �+ C. Patch imperfections in accordance with ACI 301. 3.9 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE A. Defective Concrete: Concrete not conforming to required lines, details, dimensions, tolerances or specified requirements. B. Repair or replacement of defective concrete will be determined by Architect/Engineer. C. Do not patch, fill, touch-up, repair, or replace exposed concrete except upon express • direction of Architect/Engineer for each individual area. END OF SECTION .N .. Proj. No. 07014 Concrete 03300 - 4 SECTION 03350 - CONCRETE FINISHES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Finishes on cast-in-place concrete work. B. Preparation of subfloor to receive finish flooring. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Concrete paving - Section 02750. B. Cast-in-place concrete - Section 03300. C. Concrete curing - Section 03390. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM C144 -Aggregate for Masonry Mortar. B. ASTM C150- Portland Cement. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Latex Emulsion: Latex-base liquid emulsion, by Camp's, Sonocrete by Sonneborn Building Products, or Everbond by L&M Construction Chemicals. B. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I. C. Sand: ASTM C144, 40 mesh or smaller. D. Water: Potable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. After forms are stripped, remove fins and projections, and level offsets. Patch voids, damaged places and form-tie holes as specified below for patching. B. Fill and patch bug holes one in. and larger in size in as-cast finish. „® 3.2 BUILDING SURFACE FINISHES A. As-cast Finish: No applied finish, as-cast surface produced by formwork with projections removed and voids patched as specified above for preparation. B. Rubbed Finish: Within 48 hours after stripping forms, rub surfaces with a carborundum stone, clean water and neat Portland Cement to provide a uniform, lightly sand-textured surface, entirely free of pits, holes or form marks. Large surface swirls, heavily-textured surfaces or heavy coatings of slurry are not acceptable. 3.3 TOLERANCES A. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements: Tolerances. B. Finish concrete to achieve the following tolerances: 1. Maximum Variation of Surface Flatness For Exposed Concrete Floors: 1/4 inch in 10 ft. 2. Maximum Variation of Surface Flatness Under Seamless Resilient Flooring: 1/4 inch in 10 ft. 3. Maximum Variation of Surface Flatness Under Carpeting: 1/4 inch in 10 ft. C. Correct defects in defined traffic floor by grinding or removal and replacement of defective Work. Areas requiring corrective Work will be identified. Re-measure corrected areas by same process. Proj. No. 07014 Concrete Finishes 03350-1 am 0M 3.4 FLOOR FINISHES OR FLATWORK: A. Finish concrete floor surfaces in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 302. .■ B. In areas with floor drains, maintain design floor elevation at walls; slope surfaces uniformly to drains at 1/8 inch per foot nominal, unless noted otherwise. C. Steel trowel surfaces which are scheduled to be exposed or to receive carpeting, or resilient flooring. No D. Broom Finish: Jitterbug or tamp surfaces, screed to proper elevation, then float with wood floats to obtain a tight wood float finish. Prior to final set of concrete, brush concrete surfaces with a broom with grain running as directed, to a texture to match approved 00 samples. Broom finish exterior walks, ramps, and parking garage surfaces. 3.5 SUB-FLOOR MAINTENANCE AND PREPARATION: A. Prior to installation of finish floor coverings, remove dirt, oil, grease, paint and other MW foreign matter from surfaces. B. Examine surfaces for holes, cracks and other abrasions, and fill with latex floor-leveling compound. C. Examine surfaces for deviations beyond allowable tolerances. Fill depressions with latex floor-leveling compound and grind down high spots to within allowable tolerances. D. Trowel and featheredge leveling compound to a smooth and level surface. E. Leave sub-floors clean,true to plane within allowable tolerances, and ready to receive ■� finish flooring. 3.6 PATCHING: A. Patch defective areas including voids, honeycombs and damaged areas. B. Patch and fill form-tie holes level with adjacent surfaces. C. Chip out defective areas and honeycombs, coat surface with bonding agent and patch with a mixture of white and grey cement and aggregate to match color of adjacent areas. ,■ D. After curing,finish patches to match adjacent surfaces. 3.7 CLEANING: A. Clean surfaces with soap and water until foreign matter and dirt are removed. 3.8 PROTECTION: A. Protect exposed concrete finishes from damage and soiling by other work. Mask ■.� surfaces with polyethylene film. End of Section w ■ Proj. No. 07014 Concrete Finishes 03350-2 SECTION 03355 - COLORED CONCRETE FINISH PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION: A. Provide patterned, color concrete finish. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: A. Cast-in-place concrete - Section 03300. 1.3 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature in accordance with Section 01330. Include instructions for field mixing and rate and technique of application of surface treatment materials. B. Samples: Construct two 24 x 24 in. concrete samples of patterned color hardened concrete floor finish. Approved samples will be used to judge quality and workmanship of completed work. 1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: A. Deliver packaged materials in manufacturer's original, unopened containers bearing manufacturer's name and brand. B. Protect materials delivered against inclusion of foreign matter. C. Store materials in dry location and protect against water. 1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS: A. Apply surface color hardening materials only when temperature of concrete is 50°F. or above. B. Heat area if required, to maintain minimum concrete temperature at 50°F. during curing period. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DRY-SHAKE COLORED HARDENER: A. Qualities: Dry, pre-mixed, non-metallic mixture of aggregate, streak-free intergrind of pigments, surface-conditioning and dispersing agents and cementitious binders. Color as selected by Architect. B. Source: Brickform by Rafco Products, Rancho Cucamonga, CA. 2.2 RELATED MATERIALS: A. Form Pattern: 1. Border: Yorkstone No. FM-3175 E, 18 x 30 inches form. 2. Field: Yorkstone No. FM-3175 G, 24 x 24 inches form. B. Curing and Sealing Compound: As recommended by manufacturer. C. Curing Paper: Non-staining reinforced waterproof kraft curing paper. 2.3 MIXES: Field mix curing and sealing compound in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION: A. Begin dry-shake hardener work when: 1. Slab has been darbied and wood floated to an even surface. 2. Bleed water has evaporated or been removed from surface. Proj. No. 07014 Colored Concrete Finish 03355-1 Am 3. Slab has hardened until it will sustain foot pressure with not more than 1/4 in. indentation, but is still plastic throughout. 3.2 DRY-SHAKE COLOR HARDENER APPLICATION: A. Color Hardener Application: 1. Apply color hardner in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. 2. Apply at rate recommended by manufacturer. 3. Uniformly distribute 2/3 of required material. 4. Begin distribution of materials in areas adjacent to forms, columns, and walls where moisture will evaporate first. 5. Distribute material evenly in uniform pattern, working approximately 10 sq. ft. area at a time. 6. Do not sprinkle water on surface. Mr 7. Float surface after material has absorbed moisture from slab, as indicated by darkening of surface. 8. Float sufficiently to bring moisture from base slab through surfacing material. Do not steel trowel. 9. When surface water glaze disappears, apply remaining material at right angles to original application and float. Touch-up non-uniform or weak-toned areas as necessary. *■ 10. Steel trowel surface uniformly to smooth finish, then apply a fine broom finish. Do not over-trowel or"burn" surfaces. 3.3 PATTERNED CONCRETE APPLICATION: A. Install pattern in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. 3.4 SEALING AND CURING: A. Curing: Immediately after final finishing, cure surfaces with thinned curing compound in accordance with manufacturer's instruction. Apply at rate of 350 sf per gal. Leave surfaces uncovered for 4 days, then cover with curing paper. Do not cover with plastic sheeting. B. After construction is essentially completed and final cleaning operations are in progress, thoroughly clean color hardened concrete and seal with sealing compound. C. Apply with roller in accordance with manufacturer's instruction. Immediately machine- •� brush with a rotary floor machine until dry and buffed. End of Section Proj. No. 07014 Colored Concrete Finish 03355-2 v� SECTION 03390 - CURING AND SEALING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES: A. Curing of cast-in-place concrete, including flatwork. B. Sealing of scheduled exposed concrete slabs. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS: A. Cast-in-place concrete - Section 03300. B. Concrete finishes - Section 03350. 1.3 REFERENCES: A. ASTM C156 -Water Retention by Concrete Curing Materials. „ B. ASTM C171 - Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete. C. ASTM C309- Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete. 1.4 SUBMITTALS: A. Procedures for Submittals: Section 01330. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's product data sheets. C. Quality Control Submittals: For information only. 1. Certificates: Manufacturer's certification that materials meet specification requirements. 2. Installation instructions. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Applicator: Experienced in application of specified products. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: A. Deliver materials in original sealed containers with seal and labels intact. Store in cool, dry place. B. Use materials out of original containers only. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CURING AND SEALING COMPOUND: A. Qualities: Combination curing, sealing, dustproofing compound in aromatic solvents containing 12% solids,free of oil,wax and silicone. 1. Curing: ASTM C309. 2. Hardening: Maximum loss of 30 grams. 3. Moisture Retention: ASTM C156, .037 gms. per sq. cm. 4. Compatibility: Compatible and suitable for flooring covering adhesives and painting. B. Standards: 1. ASTM C309,Type 1, Class B. 2. ASTM C156. C. Source: 1. Day-Chem Cure and Seal J-20 by Dayton Superior. 2. Sealtight CS-309 by W. R. Meadows, Inc. IW” 3. Rez-Seal by Euclid Chemical Corp. 4. Dress &Seal No. 18 by L& M Construction Chemicals. 5. MB-429 by Master Builders. ■, 6. ABCO Cure & Seal by Nox-Crete Chemicals, Inc. 7. Kure-N-Seal by Sonneborn Building Products. 8. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. Proj. No. 07014 Curing and Sealing 03390-1 a so 2.2 CURING SHEET: A. Qualities: Two layers of long-fibered kraft paper and two layers of reinforcing fibers laminated together with an inner layer of asphalt. B. Standard: ASTM C171. 2.3 MIXES: A. Field mix chemical hardener with clean water in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION: A. Prior to sealing exposed concrete slabs, verify that surfaces are free of dirt, oil, grease, �* paint and moisture. B. Prior to applying chemical hardener, verify that surfaces are dry and have cured 14 days. C. Verify that chemical hardener and abrasive aggregate finishes have been completed and accepted. �" D. Clean slabs free of oil, grease, paint and curing compounds as recommended by chemical manufacturer. 3.2 CURING PROCEDURES: A. Objective: Protect freshly deposited concrete from premature drying and excessively hot or cold temperatures. Maintain a minimum loss and a relatively constant temperature during time necessary for hydration of cement and proper hardening of concrete. B. Curing: After placing and finishing operation, maintain concrete above 50°F and in a moist condition for at least 7 days by one of following materials and methods. 1. Absorption mat or fabric kept continuously wet. 2. Continuous steam bath (not exceeding 150°F at surface of concrete). 3. Vapor mist bath. 4. Application of sheet curing material. 5. Membrane-forming curing compound. C. Restrictions on Use of Curing Compound: 1. Do not use a curing compound on surfaces that are to be rubbed or that are to receive additional concrete, mortar, topping or other cementitious finishing ., materials. 2. Do not use curing compounds for curing slabs under thinset ceramic tile. D. Duration of Curing: Continue curing until cumulative number of days or fractions of days during which ambient temperature is above 50°F has totaled 7. If high-early-strength concrete has been used, curing days may be reduced to a total of 3 days. Prevent rapid drying at the end of curing period. E. Formed Surfaces: Minimize moisture loss from steel forms heated by sun and wood forms in contact with concrete by keeping forms wet during final curing period. If forms are removed during curing period, employ one of above curing materials or methods immediately. Continue curing for remainder of curing period. F. Temperature: 1. Cold Weather: When mean daily temperature of atmosphere is less than 40°F, maintain ambient temperature of concrete between 500 and 70°F for the required curing period. When necessary, make arrangements for heating, covering, „ insulation or housing concrete work in advance of placement to maintain required temperature and moisture conditions without injury. When combustion heaters are necessary in an enclosed or protected area where concrete slabs are being placed, vent heaters. " 2. Hot Weather: When necessary, make arrangements for installation of windbreaks, shading, for spraying or wet covering of light color in advance of placement. Take such protection measures as quickly as concrete hardening and finishing operations will allow. Proj. No. 07014 Curing and Sealing 03390-2 3. Temperature Changes: Control changes in temperature of concrete at a rate as uniform as possible. Do not permit a temperature change to exceed 5°F in any one hour or 50°F in any 24-hour period. G. Protection from Mechanical Injury: During curing period, protect concrete from damaging mechanical disturbances, particularly load stresses, heavy shock and excessive vibration. Protect finished concrete surfaces from damage caused by construction equipment, materials and methods, and by rain or running water. Do not load self-supporting structures in such a way that overstresses concrete. 3.3 CURING COMPOUND METHOD: A. Apply curing compound as soon as concrete surfaces begin to take initial set after finishing. B. Spray compound on surfaces using two coats, applying second at right angle to first, at rate of 400 sq. ft. per gallon. C. Restrict traffic on surfaces during cure to prevent tracking off of protective film. 3.4 CURING PAPER METHOD: A. Begin curing concrete as soon as concrete surfaces begin to take initial set after finishing. B. Spread curing paper over surfaces, lapping ends and sides a minimum of 4 in., and maintain in place by use of suitable weights. C. Remove paper after specified curing period has elapsed. 3.5 CONCRETE FLOOR SEALER APPLICATION: A. After concrete has cured, apply additional clear curing and sealing compound as a sealer to scheduled interior exposed concrete floor slabs. 1. Apply sealer in accordance with manufacturers printed instructions. 2. Apply sealer uniformly and evenly with a short-nap roller or lambswool applicator. 3. Apply 2 coats of clear sealer, each at rate of 600 sq. ft. per gallon. Allow first coat to dry before applying second coat. End of Section Proj. No. 07014 Curing and Sealing 03390-3 op SECTION 05120- STRUCTURAL STEEL PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes structural steel framing members, support members; base or bearing plates; anchor bolts for structural steel; fasteners for connecting structural steel items; permanent shop bolts; shop bolts for shipment; field bolts for permanent connections; permanent pins; hangers essential to structural steel frame; leveling plates, wedges, shims, and leveling screws; lintels, when attached to structural steel frame; trusses; and grouting under base plates. " B. Related Sections: 1. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Steel fabrications affecting structural steel work. 1.2 REFERENCES A. AISC (American Institute of Steel Construction) - Specification for Structural Steel Buildings, Allowable Stress Design (ASD). B. AISC (American Institute of Steel Construction) - Code of Standard Practice for Structural Steel Buildings and Bridges. C. AISC (American Institute of Steel Construction) - Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings. D. ASTM A36 and A992 - Carbon Structural Steel. E. ASTM A53 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless. F. ASTM A123 -Zinc (Hot Dipped Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. G. ASTM A153 -Zinc Coating (Hot Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. H. ASTM A242 - High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel. I. ASTM A307 - Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 ksi Tensile Strength. J. ASTM A325- Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat-Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength. K. ASTM A490 - Heat-Treated Steel Structural Bolts, 150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength. L. ASTM A500- Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes. M. ASTM A501 - Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing. N. AWS D1.1 (American Welding Society) - Structural Welding Code - Steel. O. FM (Factory Mutual) - Roof Assembly Classifications. P. RCSC (Research Council on Structural Connections) - Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts, LRFD or ASD. Q. SSPC (Steel Structures Painting Council) - Steel Structures Painting Manual, Volumes 1 and 2.UL (Underwriters Laboratory, Inc.) - Fire Resistance Directory. R. UL (Underwriters Laboratory, Inc.) - Fire Resistance Directory. S. WH (Warnock Hersey) - Certification Listings. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01330 - Submittals Procedures: Submittal requirements. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate sizes, spacing, locations of structural members, openings, attachments, - and fasteners. 2. Connections. 3. Calculations. 4. Indicate welded connections with AWS A2.4 welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths. 5. Stamp all documents with engineers seal of engineer registered in the state where the project is located. C. Mill Test Reports: Submit indicating structural strength, destructive and non-destructive test analysis. Proj. No. 07014 Structural Steel 05120 - 1 OR a D. Manufacturer's Mill Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements. E. Welders Certificates: Certify welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification ow within previous 12 months. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricate structural steel members in accordance with AISC Code of Standard Practice. B. Perform Work in accordance with AISC Code of Standard Practice, Section 10, for architectural exposed structural steel work. C. Fabricator: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum 5 years experience and holding current AISC Certification. D. Erector: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum 5 years experience. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Manufacturers: 1. Bethlehem Steel Co.. 2. Canam Steel. 3. US Steel 4. Substitutions: Section 01600- Product Requirements. B. Structural Steel Members: ASTM A36 ASTM A992, Grade 50. C. Structural Tubing: ASTM A500, Grade 46. D. Pipe: ASTM A53, Grade B. E. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A325 bolts. F. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A307. G. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded. H. Grout: Non-shrink type, pre-mixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate, cement, water reducing and plasticizing additives, capable of developing minimum compressive strength of 7,000 psi at 28 days. I. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC 15, Type 1, red oxide. 2.2 FABRICATION A. Continuously seal joined members by intermittent welds and plastic filler continuous welds. Grind exposed welds smooth. B. Fabricate connections for bolt, nut, and washer connectors. C. Develop required camber for member. 2.3 FINISH A. Prepare structural component surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP1. ••� B. Shop prime structural steel members. Do not prime surfaces that will be field welded, in contact with concrete, or high strength bolted. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION -� A. Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. 3.2 ERECTION A. Allow for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain structure safe, plumb, and in alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing. B. Field weld components indicated on shop drawings. C. Field connect members with threaded fasteners; tighten to snug tight for bearing type connections. D. Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval of Arch itect/Engineer. Proj. No. 07014 Structural Steel 05120 - 2 on E. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed except surfaces to be in contact with concrete. F. Grout under base plates in accordance with Section 04065. Trowel grouted surface smooth, splay neatly to 45 degrees. 3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements: Tolerances. B. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch per story, non-cumulative. „ C. Maximum Offset From Alignment: 1/4 inch. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Section 01460- Quality Requirements: Testing and Inspection Services. END OF SECTION Proj. No. 07014 Structural Steel 05120 - 3 SECTION 05400 - COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING PART 1 GENERAL ' 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes load bearing formed steel stud exterior wall, and interior wall, framing; and formed steel joist and rafters, and slotted channel, framing and bridging. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 05120 - Structural Steel: Structural building framing. 2. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry. 1.2 REFERENCES A. AISI (American Iron and Steel Institute) - Cold-Formed Steel Design Manual. B. AISI (American Iron and Steel Institute) - Residential Steel Framing Manual. C. ASTM A123 - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. D. ASTM A570 - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Carbon, Hot-Rolled, Structural Quality. E. ASTM A611 - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Carbon, Cold-Rolled, Structural Quality. F. ASTM A645 - Standard Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Five Percent Nickel Alloy Steel, Specially Heat Treated. G. ASTM A653, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc- Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process. H. ASTM C955 - Standard Specification for Load-Bearing (Transverse and Axial) Steel Studs, Runners (Tracks), and Bracing or Bridging, for Screw Application of Gypsum Board and Metal Piaster Bases. I. AWS D1.1 (American Welding Society) - Structural Welding Code - Steel. J. AWS D1.3 (American Welding Society) - Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel. K. ML/SFA 540- (Metal Lath/Steel Framing Association, Division of National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers; NAAMM) - Lightweight Steel Framing Systems Manual. L. SSPC-Paint 15 (Steel Structures Painting Council) - Steel Joist Shop Paint. M. SSPC-Paint 20 (Steel Structures Painting Council) -Zinc Rich Primers. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Size components to withstand design loads as indicated on Drawings. B. Maximum Allowable Deflection: 1:600 of span. C. Wall System: 1. Design to AISI -Cold-Formed Steel Design Manual 2. Design to provide for movement of components without damage, failure of joint seals, undue stress on fasteners, or other detrimental effects when subject to seasonal or cyclic day/night temperature ranges. 3. Design system to accommodate construction tolerances, deflection of building structural members, and clearances of intended openings. 4. Seismic Loads: Design and size components to withstand seismic loads and sway displacement as calculated in accordance with BOCA code. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal requirements. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate component details,framed openings, bearing, anchorage, loading, welds, type and location of fasteners, and accessories or items required of related Work. 2. Indicate stud, and roof truss layout. 3. Describe method for securing studs to tracks and for framing connections. Proj. No. 07014 Cold-formed Metal Framing 05400- 1 4. Submit calculations for loadings and stresses of framing, under Professional engineer's seal. ., C. Product Data: Submit data on standard framing members; describe materials and finish, product criteria, and limitations. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention. E. Mill Certifications: Submit mill certifications for steel delivered to site. Certify steel bare metal thickness in 0.001 inch, yield strength, tensile strength, total elongation in 2 inch or 8 inch gauge length, chemical analysis, and galvanized coating thickness. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Calculate structural properties of framing members in accordance with AISI Specification for Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years experience. C. Design structural elements under direct supervision of Professional Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed at Project location. D. Form, fabricate, provide, and connect components in accordance with MUSFA 540- Lightweight Steel Framing Systems Manual. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Coordinate placement of components within stud framing system specified in Section 06100. PART 2 PRODUCTS OF! 2.1 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING A. Manufacturers: 1. Clark Steel Framing Systems. 2. Harrisson Manufacturing Co. 3. Marino\Ware. 4. Unimast Incorporated. 5. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements. 2.2 FRAMING MATERIALS ... A. Refer to Drawings for material requirements. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Bracing, Furring, Bridging: Formed sheet steel, thickness determined by performance requirements specified. B. Plates, Gussets, Clips: Formed sheet steel, thickness determined by performance requirements specified. C. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC Paint 15, Type I, red oxide. D. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC Paint 20 zinc rich. 2.4 FASTENERS A. Self-drilling, Self-tapping Screws, Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: Steel, hot dip galvanized to ASTM A123 1.25 oz/sq ft. B. Anchorage Devices: Power actuated, drilled expansion bolts, screws with sleeves, and anchor bolts. C. Welding: In conformance with AWS D1.1, and AWS D1.3. Proj. No. 07014 Cold-formed Metal Framing 05400 - 2 2.5 FINISHES A. Studs, Tracks, Headers, Joists, Purlins, Bracing, Furring, Bridging, Plates, Gussets, and Clips: Galvanize to G90 coating class. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Section 01300-Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Verify substrate surfaces building framing components are ready to receive Work. C. Verify rough-in utilities are in proper location. 3.2 ERECTION OF STUDS A. Align floor and ceiling tracks; locate to wall partition layout. Secure in place by welding at maximum 24 inches oc. B. Place studs at 16 inches oc; not more than 2 inches from abutting walls and at each side of openings. Connect studs to tracks. C. Construct corners using minimum three studs. Double stud wall openings, door jambs, and window jambs. D. Erect load bearing studs one piece full length. Splicing of studs is not permitted. E. Erect load bearing studs, brace, and reinforce to develop full strength, to achieve design requirements. F. Fully seat axial loaded studs in receiving tracks (maximum 1/16 inch gap between stud and track web). G. Coordinate placement of insulation in multiple stud spaces after erection. H. Install intermediate studs above and below openings to align with wall stud spacing. I. Install studs with deflection allowance in stud track, directly below horizontal building framing at non-load bearing framing. J. Attach furring channels to studs for attachment of fixtures anchored to walls. K. Install framing between studs for attachment of mechanical and electrical items, and to prevent stud rotation. L. Touch-up field welds and damaged galvanized surfaces with primer. 3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Section 01400 -Quality Requirements: Tolerances. B. Maximum Variation from Indicated Position: 1/8 inch. C. Maximum Variation of Members from Plane: 1/8 inch. END OF SECTION low Proj. No. 07014 Cold-formed Metal Framing 05400- 3 MR ,M "m .m SECTION 05410 - PRE-ENGINEERED COLD-FORMED METAL ROOF TRUSSES kip PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes pre-engineered, pre-fabricated light gauge cold formed steel framing elements. Work includes: 1. Light Gauge Cold formed steel roof trusses. 2. Anchorage, bracing and bridging. B. Related work 1. Section 06100- Rough Carpentry: Roof sheathing. 2. Section 07311 - Asphalt Roofing: Shingles. 3. Section 09260- Drywall Systems: Drywall attachment 1.02 REFERENCES A. Reference standards: 1. ASTM: a. ASTM A653/A653M-94"Sheet Steel, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc- Iron Alloy-Coated (Glavanealed) by the Hot Dip Process." b. ASTM A780-93a"Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings." 2. American Welding Society(AWS) a. AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code - Steel." b. AWS D1.3"Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel." 1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. AISI "Specifications": Calculate structural characteristics of cold-formed steel truss members according to AISI's "Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members, 1986 (1990)." B. Structural Performance: Design, engineer, fabricate, and erect cold-formed steel trusses to withstand specified design loads within limits and under conditions required. 1. Design Loads: As specified. 2. Deflections: Live load deflection meeting the following (unless otherwise specified) a. Roof Trusses: Vertical live load deflection less than or equal to U240 of the span, total load U180. 3. Design framing systems to provide for movement of framing members without damage or overstressing, sheathing failure, connection failure, undue strain on fasteners and anchors, or other detrimental effects when subject to a maximum ambient temperature change (range) of 120 deg F (67 deg C). 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for each type of cold- formed steel framing and accessory required. B. Submit shop drawings showing member, type, location, spacing, size and gage of members, method of attachment to supporting members and all necessary erection details. Indicate supplemental bracing, strapping, splices, bridging, accessories and details required for proper installation. C. Submit detailed floor truss and roof truss layouts. D. Submit truss drawings, sealed and signed by a qualified registered Professional Engineer, verifying truss' ability to meet local code and design requirements, including: 1. Description of design criteria. 2. Engineering analysis depicting member stresses and truss deflection. 3. Truss member sizes and gauges and connections at truss joints. 4. Truss support reactions. 5. Top chord, Bottom chord and Web bracing requirements. Proj. No. 07014 Pre-engineered C F M F Roof Trusses 05410 - 1 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Fabrication shall be performed by a cold-formed steel truss „ fabricator with experience designing and fabricating cold-formed steel truss systems equal in material, design, and extent to the systems required for this Project. 1. Cold Formed steel truss system installation shall be performed by an experienced installer approved by the steel truss system fabricator. B. Welding Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code--Steel"and AWS D1.3 "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel." 1. Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with AWS "Standard Qualification Procedure." 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's unopened containers or bundles, fully identified by "* name, brand, type and grade. Exercise care to avoid damage during unloading, storing and erection. B. Store trusses on blocking, pallets, platforms or other supports off the ground and in an upright position sufficiently braced to avoid damage from excessive bending. C. Protect trusses and accessories from corrosion, deformation, damage and deterioration when stored at job site. Keep trusses free of dirt and other foreign matter. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. During construction, adequately distribute all loads applied to trusses so as not to exceed the carrying capacity of any one joist, truss or other component. PART 2 PRODUCTS .A 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Unimast Incorporated. B. Structural Steel Systems, Inc. C. Dale/Incor Industries D. MiTek Industries 2.02 COMPONENTS A. System components: Manufacturer's recommended light gauge steel floor truss and roof truss components. B. Provide manufacturer's standard steel truss members, bracing, bridging, blocking, reinforcements, fasteners and accessories with each type of steel framing required, as recommended by the manufacturer for the applications indicated and as needed to provide a complete light gauge cold formed steel truss system. 2.03 MATERIALS A. Materials: 1. All component gauges: Fabricate components of structural quality steel sheet per .. ASTM A653 with a minimum yield strength of 40,000 psi. 2. Bracing, bridging and blocking members: Fabricate components of commercial quality steel sheet per ASTM A653 with a minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi. B. Steel truss components: Provide sizes, shapes and gages as required by truss engineer, with minimum 18 ga. C. Finish: Provide components with protective zinc coating complying with ASTM A653, minimum G60 coating. D. Fastenings: 1. Manufacturer recommended self-drilling, self-tapping screws with corrosion- resistant plated finish. Fasteners shall be of sufficient size and number to ensure the strength of the connection. 2. Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 when applicable and AWS D1.3 for welding base metals less than 1/8"thick. Proj. No. 07014 Pre-engineered C F M F Roof Trusses 05410 -2 3. Other fasteners as accepted by truss engineer. • E. Combined post-consumer and post-industrial recycled content of all cold-formed metal framing must be 75%. 2.04 FABRICATION A. Factory fabricate cold-formed steel trusses plumb, square, true to line, and with connections securely fastened, according to manufacturer's recommendations and the requirements of this Section. • 1. Fabricate truss assemblies in jig templates. 2. Cut truss members by sawing or shearing or plasma cutting. 3. Fasten cold-formed steel truss members by welding or screw fastening, or other methods as standard with fabricator. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted. a. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. ,. b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to cold-formed steel truss component manufacturer's instructions with screw penetrating joined members by not less than 3 exposed screw threads. B. Care shall be taken during handling, delivery and erection. Brace, block, or reinforce truss as necessary to minimize member and connection stresses. C. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate trusses to a maximum allowable tolerance variation from plumb, level, and true to line of 1/8 inch in 10 feet (1:960) and as follows: 1. Spacing: Space individual trusses no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3mm) from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials. 2. Squareness: Fabricate each cold-formed steel truss to a maximum out-of-square tolerance of 1/8 inch (3mm). PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine structure, substrates and installation conditions. Do not proceed with cold- formed steel truss installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Installation constitutes acceptance of existing conditions and responsibility for satisfactory performance. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Erection of trusses, including proper handling, safety precautions, temporary bracing and other safeguards or procedures are the responsibility of the Contractor and Contractor's installer. 2. Exercise care and provide erection bracing required to prevent toppling of trusses during erection. B. Erect trusses with plane of truss webs vertical and parallel to each other, accurately located at design spacing indicated. C. Provide proper lifting equipment suited to sizes and types of trusses required, applied at lift points recommended by truss fabricator. Exercise care to avoid damage to truss members during erection and to keep horizontal bending of the trusses to a minimum. D. Provide framing anchors as indicated or accepted on the engineering design drawing or erection drawings. Anchor trusses securely at bearing points. E. Install roof framing and accessories plumb, square, true to line, and with connections securely fastened, according to manufacturer's recommendations. 1. DO NOT cut truss members without prior approval of truss engineer. Proj. No. 07014 Pre-engineered C F M F Roof Trusses 05410 - 3 2. Fasten cold-formed steel roof framing by welding or screw fastening, as standard with fabricator. Wire tying of roof framing is not permitted. a. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to cold-formed roof framing Manufacturer's instructions with screw penetrating joined members by not less than 3 exposed screw threads. C. Install roof framing in one-piece lengths, unless splice connections are indicated. d. Provide temporary bracing and leave in place until trusses are permanently stabilized. F. Erection Tolerances: Install trusses to a maximum allowable tolerance variation from plumb, level, and true to line of 1/8 inch in 10 feet (1:960) and as follows: a. Space individual trusses no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm) from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials. 3.04 ROOF TRUSS INSTALLATION A. Install, bridge, and brace trusses according to manufacturer's recommendations and requirements of this Section. B. Space trusses as follows: 1. Truss Spacing as indicated on drawings. C. Do not alter, cut, or remove truss members or connections of truss members. D. Erect trusses with plane of truss webs plumb and parallel to each other, align, and accurately position at spacing indicated. E. Erect trusses without damaging truss members or connections. F. Align truss bottom chords with load-bearing studs or continuously reinforce track to transfer loads to structure. Anchor trusses securely at all bearing points. G. Install continuous bridging and permanent truss bracing per truss design requirements. H. Install necessary roof cross and diagonal bracing per design professional recommendations. 3.05 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and •,. installed cold-formed steel framing with galvanizing repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and the manufacturer's instructions. End of Section w Proj. No. 07014 Pre-engineered C F M F Roof Trusses 05410 - 4 SECTION 05500 - METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes shop fabricated metal items. B. Related Sections: +* 1. Section 05120 - Structural Steel: Structural steel components. 2. Section 09900- Paints and Coatings: Field applied paint finish. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ANSI A14.3 - Ladders, Fixed, Safety Requirements. B. ASTM A36 - Carbon Structural Steel. C. ASTM A53 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-coated Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe. D. ASTM A123 - Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. E. ASTM A153 - Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. F. ASTM A283 - Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates. G. ASTM A307- Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile Strength. H. ASTM A325 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength. I. ASTM A500 - Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Round and Shapes. J. ASTM A501 - Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing. K. AWS A2.4 (American Welding Society) - Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination. L. AWS D1.1 (American Welding Society) - Structural Welding Code. M. SSPC (Steel Structures Painting Council) - Painting Manual. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal requirements. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories. Include erection drawings, elevations, and details where applicable. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.0 welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths. C. Welders Certificates: Certify welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within previous 12 months. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements. B. Accept metal fabrications on site in labeled shipments. Inspect for damage. C. Protect metal fabrications from damage by exposure to weather. 1.5 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS - STEEL A. Steel Sections: ASTM A36. B. Steel Tubing: ASTM A500, Grade B. C. Plates: ASTM A283. D. Pipe: ASTM A53, Grade B Schedule 40, unless scheduled otherwise. E. Fasteners: Furnish galvanized with galvanized items and stainless with stainless steel items. Proj. No. 06004 Metal Fabrications 05500 - 1 1. Bolts: ASTM A307, Grade A. 2. Expansion Bolts: Expansion shield bolt anchor, Red Head Sleeve Anchor- • HN Series, or Wej-It DH-Bolt. F. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A307 grade A, galvanized to ASTM A153 for galvanized components. ., G. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded. H. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC 15,Type 1, red oxide. I. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: Galvicon or ZRC Compound. J. Grout: Non-metallic shrinkage-resistant gout, pre-mixed, non- metallic, non-corrosive, ■� non-staining product contain ing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage compensating agents, plasticizing and water reducing agents. 1. Products: Euco N.S.; Euclid Chemical Co.; Crystex; L&M Construction Chemicals; or Masterflow 713; Masterbuilders. 2.2 FABRICATION A. Fit and shop assemble items in largest practical sections, for delivery to site. �• B. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured. C. Continuously seal joined members by continuous welds. D. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints elm butt tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius. E. Exposed Mechanical Fastenings: Flush countersunk screws or bolts; unobtrusively located; consistent with design of component, except where specifically noted otherwise. F. Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related components of same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically noted otherwise. 2.3 FACTORY APPLIED FINISHES - STEEL A. Prepare surfaces to be primed in accordance with SSPC SP 1 solvent cleaning and SSPC SP2 hand-tool cleaning. B. Do not prime surfaces in direct contact with concrete or where field welding is required. ,, C. Prime paint items with one coat, 2.0 mils minimum dry film thickness, except where galvanizing is specified. D. Galvanized Structural Steel Members: Galvanize after fabrication to ASTM A123. E. Galvanized Non-structural Items: Galvanized after fabrication to ASTM A123. Furnish "" minimum 1.25 oz/sq ft galvanized coating. 2.4 FABRICATION TOLERANCES PIS A. Squareness: 1/8 inch maximum difference in diagonal measurements. B. Maximum Offset Between Faces: 1/16 inch. C. Maximum Misalignment of Adjacent Members: 1/16 inch. D. Maximum Bow: 1/8 inch in 48 inches. E. Maximum Deviation From Plane: 1/16 inch in 48 inches. ,ow PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Verify field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive Work. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required. B. Supply steel items required to be cast into concrete or embedded in masonry with setting templates to appropriate sections. Proj. No. 06004 Metal Fabrications 05500-2 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects. B. Make provisions for erection stresses. Install temporary bracing to maintain alignment, until permanent bracing and attachments are installed. C. Field weld components indicated on shop drawings. D. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1. E. Obtain approval of Architect prior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled. F. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed or galvanized, except surfaces to be in contact with concrete. 3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements: Tolerances. B. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch per story or for every 12 ft in height whichever is greater, non-cumulative. C. Maximum Offset From Alignment: 1/4 inch. D. Maximum Out-of-Position: 1/4 inch. 3.5 SCHEDULE A. Provide and install items listed in Schedule and shown on Drawings with anchorage and attachments necessary for installation. B. The Schedule is a list of principal items only. Refer to Drawing details for items not specifically scheduled. C. Items of Work, Custom Fabricated: 1. Steel wall ladders: 1/2 x 2-1/2 inch side rails spaced at 18 inches; rungs of one inch diameter solid rod spaced 12 inches on center; space rungs 7 inches from wall surface; with steel mounting brackets and attachments; prime paint finish. If adjacent structure does not extend above top rung, gooseneck extended rails back to structure to provide secure ladder access. Provide one to loft area. 2. Miscellaneous Steel Shapes: Channels, wide flange shapes, angles, plates, tubing, connections, and bolts where shown and detailed on Drawings. Hot dip galvanize where exposed to weather or touching exterior masonry after fabrication. Shim under mechanical units to provide a level frame on which to set units. Rest frame directly on joists, not on deck. Provide an angle frame Ow supported by structure around all roof penetrations including hatches and ductwork. END OF SECTION Proj. No. 06004 Metal Fabrications 05500 - 3 No .n .•a w SECTION 06100- ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Lumber. B. Plywood. C. Preservative treatment. D. Fire retardant treatment. E. Fasteners. F. Related accessories. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications. B. Section 06200- Finish Carpentry. C. Section 06410 - Custom Casework. D. Section 09900 - Painting: Finishing exposed carpentry. 1.3 REFERENCES A. American Lumber Standards Committee (ALSC) 1. Softwood Lumber Standards. B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 1. A208.1 Mat-Formed Wood Particleboard. ' C. American Plywood Association (APA) 1. E30E, Residential and Commercial Construction Guide. D. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. A307, Carbon Steel Externally Threaded Structural Fasteners. 2. D240, Heat of Combustion of Liquid Hydrocarbon Fuels by Bomb Calorimeter. 3. D226, Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felts for Use in Waterproofing and in Constructing Built-Up Roofs. 4. D2822, Asphalt Roof Cement. 5. E72, Strength Tests of Panels for Building Construction. 6. E84, Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. ` E. American Wood Preservative Association (AWPA) 1. C20, Structural Lumber Fire Retardant by Pressure Treatment. 2. C27, Structural Plywood Fire Retardant by Pressure Treatment. !" F. American Wood Preservers Bureau (AWPB) 1. LP-2, Standard for Softwood, Lumber,Timber, Plywood Pressure Treated with Waterborne Preservatives for Ground Contact Use. ,. G. Federal Specification (FS) 1. FF-B-561 C, Bolts, (Screw), Lag. 2. FF-B-575C, Bolts, Hexagon and Square. 3. FF-B-584E (1), Bolts, Finned Neck; Key Head; Machine; Ribbed Neck; Square Neck; Tee Head. 4. FF-B-588C (1), Bolt, Toggle, and Expansion Sleeve Screw. 5. FF-N-1 05B (3), INT AMD 4, Nails, Brads, Staples and Spikes: Wire, Cut and Wrought. 6. FF-N-836D (1), Nut: Square, Hexagon, Cap, Slotted, Castle, Knurled, Welding and Single Ball Seat. 7. FF-S-111 D, Screw, Wood. H. Product Standards (PS) 1. 1, Construction and Industrial plywood. Proj. No. 07014 Rough Carpentry 06100 - 1 2. 20, American Softwood Lumber Standard. I. Southern Forest Products Association (SFPA) 1. Grading Rules. J. Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (SPIB) 1. Grading Rules. .� K. West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (WCLIB) 1. Grading Rules. L. Western Wood Products Association (WWPA) 1. Wood Frame Design Manual. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit items in accordance with Section 01330. B. Product Data: Provide technical data on wood preservative and fire retardant treatment materials and application techniques/instructions. C. Samples: Provide four, 8 in. long samples of wood with stain finish selected by Architect. D. Manufacturers Certificates: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.5 CERTIFICATES A. Pressure Treated Wood: Submit certification by treating plant stating chemicals and �. process used, net amount of salts retained, and conformance with referenced standards. B. Preservative Treated Wood: Submit certification for water-borne preservative that moisture content was reduced to maximum 19%for lumber and 15%for plywood after treatment. C. Fire Retardant Treated Wood: Submit certification by testing plant stating chemicals and process used, conformance with referenced standards and governing ordinances, and non-bleeding quality of the treatment. D. Structural Values: Where materials are provided to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses, submit listing of species and grade selected for each use, in the form of a signed copy of the applicable portion of the producer's grading rules for design values. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Lumber Grading: Lumber Grading Rules and Wood Species in accordance with Voluntary Product Standards. Grading rules of following associations apply to materials furnished. 1. Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (SPIB). 2. West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (WCLIBB). 3. Western Wood Products Association (WWPA). B. Grade Marks: Identify lumber and plywood by official grade mark. •• 1. Lumber: Include symbol of grading agency, mill name, grade, species, grading rules and condition of seasoning at time of manufacturer. 2. Plywood: Include type, class identification index, and agency mark. 4W C. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies 1. Preservative and Pressure Treated Lumber and Plywood: Comply with American Wood Preservers Bureau Standards. 2. Fire Retardant Treated Materials: Comply with Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. and ASTM E84, for maximum flame spread of 25. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, handle, and protect products in accordance with Sections 01600. B. Store products above ground, on platforms or skids, and covered with waterproof coverings. Provide for adequate air circulation. C. Do not store seasoned or stained materials in damp or wet locations. D. Support products in such a way as to prevent warping and distortion. Proj. No. 07014 Rough Carpentry 06100 - 2 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Where stress rating values are given in lieu of grades, select any quality which will meet structural requirements. B. Lumber 1. Grading rules: PS 20. 2. Dimensions: Lumber dimensions are nominal except for posts and timbers; actual dimensions conform to industry standards established by the American Lumber Standards Committee and applicable rules writing agencies. Provide sizes as detailed. 3. Moisture content: 19% maximum moisture content (unless noted otherwise) after treatments for fire retardant and preservative treated woods. 4. Surfacing: Surface four sides (S4S), unless noted otherwise. 5. Species: Southern Yellow Pine or West Coast Douglas Fir, unless noted otherwise. 6. Uses, grades, and stress ratings a. Non-structural light framing (2 -4 inch thick, 2 - 4 inch wide): (1) General framing: Standard and better or Stud grade. (2) Plates, blocking, bracing, nailers: Utility grade. b. Furring and stripping: No. 4 Common Idaho White Pine or utility grade of any species, S2S. C. Plywood 1. Grading rules: PS 1, using group 1-4 species as required for rating. 2. Exposures: Provide exposure ratings as indicated. 3. Thickness: As detailed or noted, or otherwise as required to maintain span capability. 4. Uses, Grades, Ratings: a. Roof Sheathing: Refer to Structural Drawings. Provide fire retardant treated material for all roof framing unless noted otherwise. „ D. Plastic Cement: ASTM D2822, asphalt base. E. Fasteners 1. Provide fasteners in sizes, spacings, and locations to suit applications. Hot dip galvanize unless noted otherwise. 2. Bolts: FS FF-B-575, FF-B-584 or ASTM A307. 3. Nuts: FS FF-N-836. 4. Expansion shields, lag screws, and bolts: FS FF-B-561. 5. Toggle bolts: FS FF-B-588, 6. Wood screws: FS FF-S-111. 7. Nails and staples: FS FF-N-105. 8. Metal nailing discs a. Flat caps, minimum 1 inch diameter. b. Minimum 30 gage sheet metal. C. Formed to prevent dishing. d. Bell or cup shapes not acceptable. 9. Ply-clips: Extruded 6063-T6 aluminum alloy. 10. Spikes: Galvanized, size as required. F. Adhesives: Waterproof, air cured type, cartridge dispenses, of strength to suit application. Proj. No. 07014 Rough Carpentry 06100 - 3 2.2 WOOD TREATMENTS (SHOP PREPARED) A. Preservative Treated Wood 1. Preservative treat fascia blocking, roof edging, sill plates and grounds in contact with concrete (except on interior of building), roof curbs, cants and nailers for flashing, and elsewhere as noted or shown. 2. Use waterborne salt preservatives as follows: AWPB LP-2 above ground; AWPB LP 22 ground contact. Redry lumber to maximum 19% moisture content, stamp with AWPB "Dry". Redry plywood and particleboard to 15% maximum moisture content. 3. Field treat surface cuts and holes in accordance with AWPA M4. B. Fire Retardant Treated Wood 1. Use fire retardant treated wood for all wood blocking above ceilings, blocking within return air plenums, blocking within walls, and other areas required by reference building codes, and as noted on the drawings. 2. Comply with AW PA C20 for lumber and AW PA C27 for sheet materials. .� 3. Provide finished products with maximum flame spread rating of 25, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 4. Acceptable Treatment Companies/Methods a. Dricon by Koppers Company, Inc., Pittsburgh, PA. b. Flame-Proof by Osmose Wood Preserving Co., Griffin GA. 5. Where treated items are exposed to exterior or to high humidities or are to have a transparent finish applied, provide materials which show no change in fire hazard classification when subjected to standard rain test (UL790). 6. Use fire retardant treatment which will not bleed through or adversely affect type of finish indicated and which does not require brush treatment of field- made end cuts to maintain fire hazard classification. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces and conditions are ready to receive work of this section. Notify Architect of any existing conditions which will adversely affect execution. B. Beginning of execution will constitute acceptance of existing conditions. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General 1. Discard units of material with defects which might impair quality of work, and units •. which are too small to fabricate work with minimum joints or optimum joint arrangement. 2. Set carpentry work accurately to required levels and lines, with members plumb and true and accurately cut and fitted. Scribe and cope as required. 3. Securely attach carpentry work to substrates by anchoring and fastening as required by recognized standards and as required to draw members into place and securely hold same unless otherwise indicated. Use washers under all bolt heads. 4. Select fasteners of size that will not penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. 5. Make tight connections between members to develop full strength of members. 6. Install fasteners without splitting of wood. 7. Predrill as necessary. 8. Comply with APA E30a requirements for plywood. Proj. No. 07014 Rough Carpentry 06100 - 4 9. Install fasteners at spacings recommended by NFPA National Design " Specifications for Stress Grade Lumber and Its Fastening -for lumber and APA Guide E30e for Plywood, unless more restrictive code requirements dictate tighter spacing or heavier fasteners. 10. Locate members as indicated on the drawings. Size, spacing or spans shall not be changed without specific approval of Architect. Take care to place proper grades and species of members where indicated in accordance with the lumber schedule herein. B. Wood Grounds, Nailers, and Blocking 1. Provide where required for screeding or attachment of other work. 2. Form to shapes cut as necessary for true line and level of work to be attached. ' 3. Coordinate location with other work involved. 4. Attach to substrates to support applied loading. 5. Countersink bolts and nuts flush with surfaces and where built into masonry work. 6. Where possible, anchor to formwork before concrete placement. 7. Provide permanent grounds of dressed, preservative treated, key beveled lumber not less than 1/2 inch wide, and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact thickness of finish material involved. 8. Provide continuous blocking. 9. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required. 10. Curb all roof openings except where prefabricated curbs are provided. C. Wood Furring 1. Install plumb and level with closure strips at edges and openings. 2. Shim with wood as required for tolerance of finished work. 3. Provide 1 x 3 inch furring at 24 inches o.c.,vertically. D. Plywood Roof Sheathing 1. Install with long edge perpendicular to framing, edges butted, and with no joints over 1/8 inch width. 2. Place ends over framing members. 3. Secure with galvanized nails to each support spacing fasteners as indicated on the structural drawings. 4. Use edge clips where recommended by panel manufacturer for spans encountered. 3.3 TOLERANCES A. Framing members: 1/4 inch maximum from true position. B. Surface flatness of roofs: 1/4 inch in 10 feet maximum. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect products from moisture absorption and subsequent warping or deterioration until subsequent construction can proceed. END OF SECTION Proj. No. 07014 Rough Carpentry 06100- 5 up .m .w aw SECTION 06200- FINISH CARPENTRY PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Carpentry Work scheduled at the end of this section. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Blocking, bracing and back-up framing. B. Section 06410- Custom Casework. C. Section 08212-Wood Doors. D. Section 08710 - Finish Hardware. E. Section 09900 - Painting: Field finishing. F. Section 10990- Miscellaneous Specialties: Type 1 shelving. 1.3 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1. A161.2, Performance Standards for Fabricated High Pressure Decorative Laminate Countertops. 2. A208.1, Mat-Formed Wood Particleboard. B. Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI): 1. Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards, 7,h Edition, Version 1.2, 1999. C. American Plywood Association (APA): 1. E30E Residential Commercial Construction Guide. D. American Society for Testing of Materials: 1. E84, Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 2. American Wood Preserver's Association (AWPA): 3. C20, Structural Lumber Fire Retardant by Pressure Treatment. 4. C27, Structural Plywood Fire Retardant by Pressure Treatment. E. American Wood Preserver's Bureau (AWPB): 1. LP-2, Standard for Softwood, Lumber,Timber, Plywood Pressure Treated with Waterborne Preservatives. F. Federal Specifications: 1. MM-L-736C, Lumber, Hardwood. 2. MMM-A-1 30B, Adhesive, Contact. G. Product Standards (PS): 1. 1, Construction and Industrial Plywood. 2. 20,American Softwood Lumber Standard. 3. 51, Hardwood and Decorative Plywood. 4. 58, Basic Hardboard. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit following items in accordance with Section 01330. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's technical literature for factory fabricated items and components. C. Shop Drawings 1. Indicate profiles, sections, and views of stock items as well as specially fabricated items for the work, at scale large enough to permit checking for design conformity. " 2. Indicate sizes, quantities, markings, materials, wood species, finishes and accessories. Proj. No. 07014 Finish Carpentry 06200-1 3. Include assembly and installation drawings to show methods of blocking, fastening, bracing,jointing, and connecting to work of other trades. .� D. Samples 1. Two samples of each type and species of plywood and finish lumber specified, complete with applied finish. 2. Each type of hardware and fastening device required in the construction of the work specified herein. E. Certificate: Submit certification by testing plant stating chemicals and process used, conformance with referenced standards and governing ordinances, and non- bleeding ° quality of treatment. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabrication Standards: Fabricate items in accordance with AWI standards listed below using custom grade unless noted otherwise. 1. Lumber grades: AWI Section 100. 2. Standing and running trim: AWI Section 300. 3. Shelving: AW 1 Section 600. 4. Miscellaneous work: AWI Section 700. 5. Doorframes: AWI Section 900. B. Regulatory Requirements: Conform to applicable code for fire retardant requirements. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, handle, and protect products in accordance with Section 01600. B. Protect materials from damage, soiling and deterioration. C. Do not deliver finish carpentry materials until job site conditions and operations which could damage, soil or deteriorate work are complete, D. Store products and materials in ventilated, interior locations under constant minimum temperature of 60 degrees F. and relative humidity not to exceed 55%. , 1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Install finish carpentry products only when temperature and humidity conditions have been stabilized and will be maintained. B. Maintain temperature and moisture conditions as recommended by woodwork fabricator from date of installation through remainder of construction period. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General 1. Comply with quality and grading standards contained herein for each material. 2. Sizes noted on drawings or indicated herein for lumber are nominal unless detailed by specific dimensions of actual size. 3. Plywood and particleboard 3/4 inch thickness unless noted or detailed otherwise. 4. Products surfaced four sides, unless noted otherwise. B. Softwood Lumber 1. Quality standard: PS 20. 2. Grading Standard: AWI custom grade. 3. Maximum moisture content: 6%for interior work; 10%for exterior work. 4. Species: Species: Any soft wood at fabricators option, unless noted otherwise. 5. Grain: Mixed. Proj. No. 07014 Finish Carpentry 06200-2 C. Softwood Plywood 1. Quality standard: PS 1. 2. Grading standard: AWI custom. 3. Core material: C-D Plugged INT-APA. 4. Face quality: A-B INT-APA. 5. Species: Any soft wood at fabricators option, unless noted otherwise. 6. Ply construction: 3 ply- 3/8 inch; 5 ply-1/2 inch; 7 ply- 3/4 inch. D. Particleboard 1. Quality standard: ANSI A208.1 2. Grade: 1 M2, sanded both faces. 2.2 ACCESSORIES AND TREATMENT A. Contact Adhesive: FS MMM-A-1306, of type recommended by millwork manufacturer to suit application. B. Wall Adhesive: Solvent release cartridge type, compatible with substrate, capable of achieving durable bond. C. Fire Retardant Treatment: Chemically treated and pressure impregnated; capable of providing maximum flame spread of 25, fuel contribution of 15, and smoke developed of 0 per ASTM E84 for items as indicated in Schedule or otherwise required to be fire retardant treated per building code.Treat in accordance with AWPA C20 for lumber and C27 for plywood. D. Preservative Treatment 1. Treat exterior finish carpentry items. 2. Use waterborne salt preservatives in accordance with AW PB LP-2 treatment. Redry lumber to maximum 19% moisture content after treatment, and redry plywood and particleboard to 15% maximum. 3. Field treat cuts and holes in accordance with AW PB M-4. E. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins, Nails, and Screws: Size and type to suit application. F. Nails: Size and type to suit application, plain finish. G. Shelf Standards and Brackets: Adjustable type, equivalent to Model No. 85 standards (84 in.) and No. 185 brackets (12 in.) and No. 106 ANO shelf rest by Knape &Vogt Manufacturing Company, Grand Rapids, MI. Finish as selected by Architect. H. Wood Filler: Oil base,tinted to match surface finish color. 2.3 SHOP FABRICATION A. Shop fabricate assemblies in accordance with AWI custom standards. B. Shop prepare and identify components for book match grain matching during site erection. C. Sanding/Filling 1. Perform work in accordance with AWI. 2. Sand work smooth and set exposed nails and screws. 3. Apply wood filler in exposed nail and screw indentations and leave ready to receive applied finishes. 4. On items to receive transparent finishes, use wood filler which matches surrounding surfaces and of types recommended for applied finishes. D. Prime seal concealed and semi-concealed surfaces. Brush apply only. E. Provide cutouts for plumbing fixtures, inserts, appliances, outlet boxes, and other fixtures. Verify locations of cutouts from site dimensions. Seal edge surfaces of cutouts. F. Before proceeding with millwork required to be fitted to other construction, obtain measurements and verify dimensions of shop drawings details for accurate fit. G. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details shown. H. Route and groove back of flat trim members, kerf backs of other wide flat members except plywood or veneered members. Proj. No. 07014 Finish Carpentry 06200-3 I. Assemble in mill in as large of units as practicable to minimize field cutting and fitting. J. Miter joints, where required, by joining, splining, and gluing to comply with requirements for specified grade. K. Cap exposed plywood and particleboard edges with hardwood trim, 3/8 inch x width of sheet, unless noted or phown otherwise to use plastic or aluminum trim. L. Mill wood moldings to stock shapes, patterns, and sizes as follows: 1. MWM-1 thru MWM-9: Not used. 2. MWM-10: Casing: AWI #CAS-2078; 11/16"x 4-1/2". 2.4 FINISH A. Field Finish: Refer to Sections 09000- Color Legend and 09900 - Painting for field applied finish descriptions and schedule at end of this section for designated finish. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces openings and conditions are ready to receive work of this section. Notify Architect of any existing condition which will adversely affect execution. Beginning of execution will constitute acceptance of existing conditions. B. Verify that field measurements are as shown•on shop drawings. C. Verify that mechanical, electrical, and other items affecting work of this section are in place and ready to receive the work. D. Beginning of installation indicates acceptance of existing conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prime paint or seal concealed surfaces and items or assemblies which will be in contact with cementitious materials or surfaces. B. Make field cuts with extreme care to avoid splintering. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install using skilled workmen in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and recommendations. B. Install work in accordance with AWI Custom Quality Standards. Handle materials to avoid dents and other damages. C. Set and secure materials and components, rigid, plumb, and square. D. Shim as required using concealed shims. E. Cut to fit to exact size. Where woodwork abuts other finished work, scribe and cut for *■ accurate fit. Where necessary to fit at site, provide ample allowance for cutting and fitting. F. Before making cutouts, drill pilot holes at corners. G. Distribute defects allowed in quality grade to best overall advantage when installing job , assembled woodwork items. H. Install trim and molding in unjointed lengths for openings and for runs less than maximum length of lumber available. For longer runs, use only one piece less than maximum length available in straight run. Allow no joints closer than 12 feet apart. I. Stagger joints in adjacent members. J. Cope moldings at returns and miter at corners. K. Attach woodwork securely in place with uniform joints providing for thermal and building movements; blind nail where possible. L. Use finishing nails where exposed. M. Set exposed heads for filling, except for exterior wood to receive natural finish. N. Secure woodwork to anchors, built-in blocking, or directly attach to substrates. Proj. No. 07014 Finish Carpentry 06200-4 O. Preparing for Finish " 1. Clean woodwork and fill nail holes. Sand to smooth finish. 2. Where woodwork is to receive transparent finish, use matching wood filler. P. Cover exposed edges of sheet goods used for shelving and other items with 3/8 inch thick hardwood edging unless otherwise noted. Width of edging to match thickness of shelving. 3.4 TOLERANCES FOR FIELD ASSEMBLIES/JOINED ITEMS A. Maximum Variation from True Position: 1/16 inch. B. Maximum Offset from True Alignment with Abutting Materials: 1/32 inch. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Adjust work under provisions of Section 01700. B. Adjust moving or operating parts to function smoothly and correctly. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect installed millwork from maring defacement or other damage until final completion. B. Clean spaces of debris, vacuum and dust all millwork. Leave in condition ready for use. 3.7 SCHEDULE A. Shelving: 1. Type 1: Refer to Section 10990. 2. Type 2: a. 3/4 in. thick by 12 in. deep, plastic laminated plywood. ` b. Supports: Surface mounted heavy duty standards and brackets. C. Configuration: 5 high by width indicated, standards at 16 in. o.c. END OF SECTION Proj. No. 07014 Finish Carpentry 06200-5 SECTION 06410 - CUSTOM CASEWORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Loose shelving units with standards and brackets. B. On-site applied high pressure laminate work. C. Plastic laminate counter tops and lavatories. 1.2 RELATED SECTION A. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Blocking, bracing and back-up framing. B. Section 09900 - Painting: Shop and Field finishing work. C. Section 12300 - Manufactured Casework. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Exposed: Where used herein, "exposed" portions of casework includes surfaces visible when doors and drawers are closed. Bottoms of cases more than 4'-0" above finish floor are considered exposed. Visible surfaces in open cases or behind clear doors also are considered as exposed portions. B. Semi-Exposed: Where used herein, "semi-exposed" portions of cabinet work includes those members behind opaque doors, such as shelves, divisions, interior faces of ends, case backs, drawer sides, backs and bottoms, and back face of doors. Tops of cases 6 feet - 6 inch or more above finish floor shall be considered semi-exposed, unless exposed from balcony or floor above. 1.4 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1. A161.2, Performance Standards for Fabricated High Pressure Decorative Laminate Countertops. 2. A208.1, Mat-Formed Wood Particleboard. B. Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI): 1. Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards, 7th Edition, Version 1.2, 1999. C. American Plywood Association (APA): 1. E30E-85 Residential Commercial Construction Guide. D. American Society for Testing of Materials: 1. E84, Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. E. American Wood Preserver's Association (AWPA): 1. C20, Structural Lumber Fire Retardant by Pressure Treatment. 2. C27, Structural Plywood Fire Retardant by Pressure Treatment. ^* F. American Wood Preserver's Bureau (AWPB): 1. LP-2, Standard for Softwood Lumber, Timber, Plywood Pressure Treated with Waterborne Preservations. G. Federal Specifications): 1. FS MM-L-736C, Lumber Hardwood. 2. FS MMM-A-1308, Adhesive, Contact. H. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA): 1. LD-3, High Pressure Decorative Laminates. I. Product Standards (PS) 1. 1, Construction and Industrial Plywood. 2. 20, American Softwood Lumber Standard. 3. 51, Hardwood and Decorative Plywood. 4. 58, Basic Hardboard. Proj. No. 07014 Custom Casework 06410-1 M 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit following items in accordance with Section 01330. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for hardware and accessory items and for fire retardant treatment. C. Shop Drawings 1. Indicate profiles, sections, and views of stock items as well as specially fabricated items for the work, at scale large enough to permit checking for design conformity. 2. Indicate sizes, quantities, markings, materials, wood species, finishes and accessories. 3. Indicate dimensions necessary for fitting casework and adjacent equipment and appliances to fixed planes. Be responsible for details and dimensions not controlled by job conditions. 4. Indicate cut-out locations. D. Samples 1. Two samples of each type and species of plywood and finish lumber with applied finish. 2. Sample rings of high pressure laminates. 3. Each type of hardware. E. Qualification Data: Submit erector qualifications verifying years of experience; include list of completed projects having similar scope of work identified by name, location, date, reference name and phone number. map 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in fabrication of custom casework of quality and having minimum of 3 years documented experience. B. Fabrication Standards: Fabricate products and items in accordance with AWI standards listed below using custom grade unless noted otherwise. .. 1. Lumber grades: AWI Section 100. 2. Counter tops: AWI Section 400. 3. Shelving: AWI Section 600. 4. Miscellaneous work: AWI Section 700. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, handle, and protect products in accordance with Section 01600. B. Protect materials from damage, soiling and deterioration. C. Do not deliver finish carpentry materials until job site conditions and operations which could damage, soil or deteriorate work are complete. D. Store products and materials in ventilated, interior locations under constant minimum temperature of 60 degrees F. and relative humidity not to exceed 55%. 1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain temperature and moisture conditions as recommended by casework fabricator from date of installation through remainder of construction period. 1.9 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings. 1.10 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Verify that blocking is in place and backpriming complete before beginning work. Proj. No. 07014 Custom Casework 06410-2 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General 1. Comply with quality and grading standards contained herein for each material. 2. Sizes noted on drawings or indicated herein for lumber are nominal unless detailed by specific dimensions of actual size. Minimum thickness is nominal 1 x material - unless noted or shown otherwise. 3. Plywood and particleboard 3/4 inch thickness unless noted or detailed otherwise. 4. Products surfaced four sides, unless noted otherwise. B. Softwood Lumber 1. Quality standard: PS 20. 2. Grading Standard: AWI custom grade. 3. Maximum moisture content: 6%for interior work; 10% for exterior work. 4. Species: Idaho white pine or Douglas fir. 5. Grain: Plain sliced. C. Softwood Plywood 1. Quality standard: PS 1. 2. Grading standard: AWI custom. 3. Core material: C-D Plugged INT-APA. 4. Face quality: A-B INT-APA. 5. Species: Southern yellow pine. 6. Ply construction: 3 ply- 3/8 inch; 5 ply-1/2 inch; 7 ply- 3/4 inch. D. Particleboard 1. Quality standard: ANSI A208.1. 2. Grade: 1 M2, sanded both faces. E. Laminate Materials 1. High Pressure Laminate Surface a. Quality standard: NEMA, LD-3. b. Grade: General Purpose. C. Thickness: 0.050 inch for horizontal grade; 0.028 inch for vertical grade. d. Core: Standard. e. Finish: Matte. f. Acceptable Manufacturers (1) Wilsonart by Ralph Wilson Plastics. (2) Nevamar by Exxon Chemical Co. (3) Formica by Formica Corp. (4) Substitutions: Submit in accordance with Section 01600. g. Colors: Refer to Section 09000 - Color Legend. 2. Laminate Backing Sheets a. Composition: High pressure laminate of paper and melamine, without decorative finish, 0.020 inch thick minimum. b. Acceptable manufacturers: Same as for high pressure laminate surfacing. 2.2 ACCESSORIES AND TREATMENT A. Contact Adhesive: FS MMM-A-1306 of type recommended by millwork manufacturer to suit application. B. Wall Adhesive: Solvent release cartridge type, compatible with substrate, capable of achieving durable bond. C. Fire Treatment: Chemically treated and pressure impregnated; capable of providing maximum flame spread of 25, fuel contribution of 15, and smoke developed of 0 per ASTM E84. Treat in accordance with AW PA C20 for lumber and C27 for plywood and Proj. No. 07014 Custom Casework 06410-3 .m, am particleboard. D. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins, Nails, and Screws: Size and type to suite application. E. Fasteners: Size and type to suit application. F. Hardware: 1. Grommets: MG Series by Doug Mockett Co., No. MG-1, clear satin finish. Size: 2-1/2 inch. 2. Countertop Supports: Work station brackets by A & M Hardware, Inc. Manheim, Pa. (888-647-0200), 1/8 in. thick steel, 18 x 24 in. (unless noted otherwise) in black color powder coated. 2.3 SHOP FABRICATION A. Fabricate casework to AWI Custom standards as follows for reveal overlay construction as detailed (or as indicated in AWI Architectural Casework Details if details are not present). B. Identify components for proper grain matching during fabrication. C. Sanding/Filling 1. Perform work in accordance with AWI. 2. Sand work smooth and set exposed nails and screws. 3. Apply wood filler in exposed nail and screw indentations and leave ready to receive applied finishes. 4. On items to receive transparent finishes, use wood filler which matches surrounding surfaces and of types recommended for applied finishes. D. Prime seal concealed and semi-concealed surfaces. Brush apply only. E. Provide cutouts for plumbing fixtures, inserts, appliances, outlet boxes, and other fixtures. Verify locations of cutouts from site dimensions. Seal edge surfaces of cutouts. �* F. Before proceeding with millwork required to be fitted to other construction, obtain measurements and verify dimensions of shop drawings details for accurate fit. G. Fabricate casework to dimensions, profiles, and details shown. H. Route and groove back of flat trim members, kerf backs of other wide flat members except plywood or veneered members. I. Assemble casework in mill in as large of units as practicable to minimize field cutting and fitting. J. Miter trim joints, where required, by joining, splining, and gluing to complying with requirements for specified grade. K. Band exposed plywood and particleboard edges with hardwood trim, 3/8 inch x width of sheet unless otherwise noted. L. On high pressure laminate work: 1. Apply laminate finish in full, uninterrupted sheets of maximum practical lengths. Apply backing sheets to reverse side of items receiving laminate surfacing. Use decorative vertical grade laminate for cabinet interiors. 2. Form corners and butt joints with hairline joints. 3. Do not locate joints within 2 feet of sink cut-out. 4. Cap all exposed edges with laminate. M. Construction 1. General a. Construct casework bodies, bottoms, dividers, sides, tops, shelves, doors, drawer fronts and countertops of 3/4 inch sheet material. b. Use 1/2 inch thick particle board material for drawer sides, back and sub-front. C. Use 5/16 inch thick tempered hardboard for drawer bottoms and cabinet backs. 2. Provide door and drawer fronts with reveal overlay style arrangement. Proj. No. 07014 Custom Casework 06410-4 3. Methods of Joinery a. Provide face plates, paneled ends, and construction, glued under pressure. b. Provide body web frames of stile plowed and stub tenoned construction. C. Join case body members by dado or concealed dowel joints. d. Do not use mechanical fasteners or metal clips for attachment of body members to other body members or to web frames. 4. Countertops a. Provide with 1-1/2 inch deep face edge, faced with high pressure laminate unless noted or shown otherwise. b. Provide loose 4 inch high pressure laminate covered splashes typically at countertops unless taller splashes shown or noted. 5. Shelving a. 3/4 inch thick plywood up to 36 inch unsupported length. b. 1 inch thick for over 36 inch unsupported lengths (maximum 48"). 2.4 FINISH A. Sand work smooth and set exposed nails and screws. B. Apply wood filler in exposed nail and screw indentations. C. On items to receive transparent finishes, use wood filler which matches surrounding surfaces and of types recommended for applied finishes. D. Shop finish following items in accordance with AW I Section 1500: 1, AW 1 Finish System No. TR-5 - Catalyzed Vinyl a. Stain - S64 Series Wiping Stains b. Vinyl Washcoat-T67F3 Vinyl Sealer 24% (Reduced 1:6). C. Filler- D70T1 Natural Filler. d. Vinyl Sealer-T67F3 Vinyl Sealer 24%. e. Two coats Topcoat T77 Series Super Kemvar"M", Low gloss. E. Items not having shop finish will be finished in field. Refer to Section 09900. PART 3 EXECUTION �. 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces openings and conditions are ready to receive work of this section. Notify Architect of any existing condition which will adversely affect execution. Beginning of execution will constitute acceptance of existing conditions. B. Verify that field measurements are as shown on shop drawings. C. Verify that mechanical, electrical, and other items affecting work of this section are in place and ready to receive the work. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prime paint or seal concealed surfaces and items or assemblies which will be in contact with cementitious materials or surfaces. B. Make field cuts with extreme care to avoid splintering. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install work in accordance with AW I Custom Quality Standards. Handle materials to avoid dents and other damages. B. Set and secure materials and components, rigid, plumb, and square. Use joint fasteners to align and secure adjoining cabinets and countertops. Affix base cabinets to floor. C. Shim as required using concealed shims. Proj. No. 07014 Custom Casework 06410-5 •0 on D. Field Fitting 1. Cut to fit and carefully scribe. OR 2. Where casework abuts other finished work, scribe and cut for accurate fit. 3. Where necessary to fit at site, provide ample allowance for cutting and fitting. 4. Do not use overlay trim pieces to cover joints. om E. Before making cutouts, drill pilot holes at corners. F. Distribute defects allowed in quality grade to best overall advantage when installing job assembled woodwork items. G. Install trim and molding in unjointed lengths for openings and for runs less than maximum length of lumber available. For longer runs, use only one piece less than maximum length available in straight run. Allow no joints closer than 12 feet apart. H. Stagger joints in adjacent members. 1. Cope moldings at returns and miter at corners. J. Attach items securely in place with uniform joints providing for thermal and building movements; blind nail where possible. K. Use fine finishing nails where exposed. L. Set exposed heads for filling. M. Secure casework to anchors, built-in blocking, or directly attach to substrates where capable of adequately supporting load. Use toggle bolt type fasteners for wall mounted components. Secure countertops to base cabinets. N. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. O. Provide cabinet lock on each drawer and door. P. Cover exposed edges of sheet goods used for shelving and other items with 3/8 inch thick hardwood edging unless otherwise noted or shown to be trimmed with plastic. 0. On field applied laminate plastic work: 1. Apply plastic laminate finishes where indicated. 2. Adhere with adhesive over entire surface. Make joints and corners hairline. 3. Match patterns. Slightly bevel arises. 4. Cap exposed edges with plastic laminate of same finish and pattern. 5. Apply laminate backing sheet on reverse side of plastic laminate finished surfaces. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust work under provisions of Section 01600. B. Adjust moving or operating parts to function smoothly and correctly. 3.5 CLEANING/PROTECTION A. Protect casework from marring, defacement, or other damage until final completion. *� B. Clean spaces of debris and vacuum and wipe down casework. Leave in condition ready for use. 3.6 TOLERANCES FOR FIELD ASSEMBLIES/JOINED ITEMS A. Maximum Variation from True Position: 1/16 inch. B. Maximum Offset from True Alignment with Abutting Materials: 1/64 inch for plastic laminate countertops and splashes, 1/32 inch for other components. END OF SECTION Proj. No. 07014 Custom Casework 06410-6 SECTION 06631 - PLASTIC ASSEMBLIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Cellular PVC material for exterior fascia, soffit and porch ceilings. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Wood framing. B. Section 09900 - Painting: Field finishing. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in commercial quality plastic assemblies with three years experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing work of this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings, product data and manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01330. B. Include plan layout, spacing of components, accessories, fittings, anchorages, and schedule of components. C. Product Data: Provide product data on decking, accessories, fittings, and hardware. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 CELLULAR PVC MATERIAL A. Manufacturers 1. Azek Trimboards. 2. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600. B. Material: Expanded rigid poly vinyl chloride material. C. Profiles: 1. Sheet: 1/2 in. x 4 ft. x 8 ft. 2. Trimboard: 5/8" and 5/4"thick x width indicated on drawings. 3. Beadboard: 1/2"x 5-1/2" x 18 ft. D. Accessories: As required for complete installation. E. Fasteners: Galvanized screws. F. Adhesive: Material recommended by manufacturer. G. Filler: Provide color matched filler material for screw holes. 2.2 FINISHES A. Finish: Field paint in accordance with requirements of Section 09900. Color selection by Owner. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install PVC material and accessories in accordance with manufacturers instructions. B. Install starter strips where required. C. Install fascia boards at perimeter of deck. D. Fastened securely to structure. E. Bond Cellular PVC material end to end for continuous appearance. Proi. No. 07014 Plastic Composite Assemblies 06631-1 an 3.2 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch. B. Maximum Offset From True Position: 1 inch. END OF SECTION Proj. No. 07014 Plastic Composite Assemblies 06631-2 SECTION 07130- SHEET WATERPROOFING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes sheet membrane waterproofing, and protection membrane at fountain. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 02300 - Earthwork: Backfill. 2. Section 07620 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim. 3. Section 07900 -Joint Sealers. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASTM D412 - Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Rubbers and Thermoplastic Elastomers -Tension. B. ASTM E96 -Test Methods For Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. C. NBCA (National Roofing Contractors Association) -Waterproofing Manual. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate special joint or termination conditions and conditions of interface with other materials. C. Product Data: Submit data for membrane, surface conditioner, flexible flashings,joint cover sheet, and joint and crack sealants,with temperature range for application of waterproofing membrane. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit special procedures and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements. F. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with NBCA Waterproofing Manual. 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS A. Membrane Manufacturer: Company specializing in waterproofing sheet membranes with minimum three years documented experience. B. Applicator: Company specializing in performing work of this section with minimum three years experience and approved by manufacturer. 1.6 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING A. Section 01300 -Administrative Requirements: Preinstallation meeting. B. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section. 1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01600- Product Requirements. B. Maintain ambient temperatures above 40 degrees F for 24 hours before and during application and until liquid or mastic accessories have cured. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Section 01700- Execution Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds. B. Furnish five year manufacturer warranty for waterproofing failing to resist penetration of water. C. For warranty repair work, remove and replace materials concealing waterproofing. Proj. No. 07014 Sheet Waterproofing 07130- 1 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 SHEET MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING A. Manufacturers: 1. W.R. Grace & Co. 2. W.R. Meadows. 3. Polyguard Products, Inc. 4. Carlisle Coatings and Waterproofing Inc. B. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements. 2.2 COMPONENTS A. Vertical Waterproofing: 1. Qualities: 2 ply factory laminated sheet consisting of 4 mil polyethylene sheet and 56 mils of self-adhesive rubberized asphalt, with a silicone treated kraft paper interlayer, and having the following properties. a. Tensile Strength: 250 psi. b. Elongation: 300% min. C. Puncture Resistance: 40 lbs. min. d. Permeability, Water Vapor: 0.1 perms max. 2. Standards: • a. Tensile Strength and Elongation: ASTM D412. b. Puncture Resistance: ASTM E154. C. Permeability: ASTM E96, Method B. 3. Source: a. Waterproofing Membrane - Bituthene 3000 by W.R. Grace and Co. b. Sealtight Mel-Rol Waterproofing Membrane by W.R. Meadows Inc. C. Polyguard No. 650 Membrane by Polyguard Products, Inc. d. Sure-Seal Membrane Waterproofing System by Carlisle Coatings and Waterproofing Inc. 4. Location: Waterproofing at fountain. 2.3 DRAINAGE MAT A. Qualities: Foundation drainage mat consisting of filter fabric bonded to one side of compression-resistant, three-dimensional, high impact polystyrene sheet. 1. Flow Rate: 15 gpm/ft. width/side. 2. Width: 4 ft. plus 12 in.filter fabric overlap. 3. Thickness: 0.38 in. 4. Filter Fabric: Non-woven polypropylene filter fabric. B. Source: Miradrain 6000 Panels by TC MiraDRI. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Primers: Manufacturer's recommended primer for concrete surfaces. B. Elastomeric Mastic: Vertical Waterproofing: Rubberized asphalt based mastic. Elastomeric Mastic - Bituthene EM-3000 by W.R. Grace and Co., Elastomeric Mastic by Meadows, or Polyguard No. 650 Mastic. C. Liquid Membrane: Vertical Waterproofing:Two component cold applied elastomeric material. Liquid Membrane- Bituthene LM-3000 by W.R. Grace and Co. D. Tape: 8 in. wide self-adhesive tape; Preprufe CJ Tape type LT and HC. E. Fasteners: Galvanized steel, 1/2 in, long, washer-head, self-tapping screws. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Verify substrate surfaces are durable; are free from voids, spalled areas, loose aggregate, sharp protrusions or rough areas that would prevent proper installation of membrane. Proj. No. 07014 Sheet Waterproofing 07130 - 2 C. Verify that concrete is dry and has cured for minimum of 7 days. D. Verify items penetrating surfaces to receive waterproofing are securely installed. E. Verify substrate surface slopes to drain for horizontal waterproofing applications. 3.2 PREPARATION " A. Protect adjacent surfaces not designated to receive waterproofing. B. Clean and prepare surfaces to receive waterproofing. C. Vacuum horizontal substrate clean. D. Apply surface conditioner at rate of a ratio of 250 to 350 sq. ft. per gallon. Protect conditioner from rain or frost until dry. E. Vertical Applications: 1. Apply 11 in. wide strip of sheet membrane to outside corners. " 2. Apply 3/4 in. fillet of liquid membrane to inside corners. Extend coating, 90 mils thick, to a distance of 6 in. on either side of corner. 3. Apply 8 in. wide strip sheet membrane continuously over expansion joints, control joints and construction joints. 3.3 MEMBRANE APPLICATION A. Apply sheet membrane to vertical surfaces in 8 ft. lengths or less. On higher walls, apply 2 or more sheets with upper sheet overlapping lower sheet a minimum of 5 in. Cover seams with a bead of elastomeric mastic. B. Apply sheet membrane to horizontal surfaces starting at lowest point so that laps shed water. Extend membrane over edge of foundations. Turn up membrane on adjoining walls. C. Fasten laps of membrane together at 36 in. o.c. with Y2 in. long screws. Do not fasten to concrete substrate. D. Remove plastic liner on horizontal waterproofing just prior to placing concrete. E. Apply sheet membrane continuously across joints and corners, covering previously applied membrane. F. Lap edge seams 2-1/2 in. minimum and end seams 5 in. minimum. Stagger end laps. G. Double roll horizontal surfaces with 150 Ib. roller. H. Hand roll vertical surfaces applying heavy pressure to insure adequate adhesion. I. Seal sheet membrane along top edge with elastomeric mastic and along bottom edge Imp with liquid membrane. J. Seal edge of sheet with elastomeric mastic at end of each day's work. 3.4 DRAINAGE MAT INSTALLATION: A. Install drainage mat with standard grade fabric side facing excavation and with core facing toward waterproofing and concrete walls. B. Install drainage mat in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, lapping panels and filter fabric at edges. Shingle each course overlapping upper panels over lower panels. 3.5 PENETRATIONS A. Apply a double layer of sheet membrane around posts, pipes or other penetrating equipment and extend at least 6 in. in each direction. Seal edges with liquid membrane. B. As an alternate to above, apply liquid membrane 90 mils thick at penetrations. Lap liquid membrane over sheet membrane a minimum of 2 in. and extend 6 in. onto penetration. MR 3.6 ADJUSTING A. Prior to installing protection board, examine sheet membrane for application defects and repair defects. B. Patch misaligned or inadequately lapped seams and damaged areas with sheet membrane extending 6 in. in each direction beyond defect. C. Slit fishmouths and severe wrinkles, overlap flaps and repair with a patch of sheet membrane. D. Seal edges of patches with a troweling of liquid membrane. Proj. No. 07014 Sheet Waterproofing 07130 - 3 an MP 3.7 PROTECTION A. Section 01700- Execution Requirements: Protecting installed construction. B. Do not permit traffic over unprotected or uncovered membrane. C. Completely cover waterproof membrane with protection board,joints and edges butted to provide complete protection. Scribe board around pipes and projections. D. Protect completed membrane from traffic of other work until wearing surface is installed. E. Patch punctures, tears, or abrasions prior to wearing surface and back fill installation. END OF SECTION .. Proj. No. 07014 Sheet Waterproofing 07130- 4 SECTION 07218 - POLYICYNENE SPRAY INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Polyicynene spray insulation at attic surfaces, with ignition barrier. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03300—Cast-in-Place Concrete. B. Section 06100—Rough Carpentry. 1.3 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM C518,Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus. 2. ASTM D2863, Test Method for Measuring the Minimum Oxygen Concentration to Support Candle-like Combustion of Plastics (Oxygen Index). 3. ASTM E84, Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 4. ASTM E90, Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions. 5. ASTM E96, Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission Rate of Building Materials. 6. ASTM E283, Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Differences Across the Specimen. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide data on materials, describing insulation properties, surface burning characteristics. B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special treatment. C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three (3) years documented experience. B. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 3 years documented experience and certified by the manufacturer. 1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for flame and smoke ratings. 1.7 MOCK-UP A. Provide mock-up of polyicynene spray insulation. Proi. No. 07014 Polyicynene Spray Insulation 07218 - 1 B. Construct mock-up, 6 feet long by 6 feet wide, including substrate construction and truss members. C. Locate where directed. D. Mock-up may remain as part of the Work. 1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Toxicity/Hazardous Materials: 1. Outgassing/Reactivity: a. Formaldehyde: Products containing urea-formaldehyde will not be permitted. b. Chlorofluorocarbons (CFCs)/HCFCs: Products and equipment requiring or using CFCs ' or HCFCs during the manufacturing process will not be permitted. B. Airtightness: Meet specific standards of the Energy Star Program of 1.5 Air Changes/Hour at 50 Pa. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers and packaging, with labels clearly indicating manufacturer and material. B. Store materials in an area protected from damage and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Protect materials during handling and application to prevent damage and contamination. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Icynene Inc., 6747 Campobello Rd. Mississauga, Ontario L5N 21_7 Canada. Tel 800-758-7325. Fax 905-363-0102.Web Site: www.icynene.com. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Polyicynene Spray Insulation: Icynene; hydrophobic, low-density, open-cell modified polyicynene; conforming to the following: 1. Thermal Resistance (R-Value/inch): ASTM C518; 3.6 hr/sq ft/degree F/BTU. In. 2. Air Permeance (for 5.25 inches of material): ASTM E283; 0.0049 I/m2/second. 3. Water Vapor Transmission (for 5 inches of material): ASTM E96; 10 perms. 4. Corrosion: No significant corrosion when in contact with steel under 85 percent relative humidity. 5. Bacterial or Fungal Growth: No growth; no material deterioration. 6. Flame Spread and Smoke Developed Rating: ASTM E84; <20/<400. .. 7. Fuel Contribution: ASTM E84; 0. Proj. No. 07014 Polyicynene Spray Insulation 07218- 2 8. Oxygen Index: ASTM D2863; average value 23.1 percent. B. Accessories: 1. Ignition Barrier: Fire Free 88 intumescent coating by International Fire Resistant Systems, Inc. Application Rate: 100 sf/gal. 2. Vent Baffle: Rigid formed, 22 x 44 in. extruded polystyrene baffle unit for installation between roof trusses. Source: Raft-R-Mate by Owens Corning. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify that substrate is free of any foreign material that will impede application. C. Verify that other work on and within spaces to be insulated is complete prior to application. D. Notify Architect of conditions that would adversely affect the application. E. Beginning of installation means applicator accepts existing conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive insulation. B. Mask and protect adjacent surfaces from overspray or damage. C. Remove foreign materials, dirt, grease, oil, paint, laitance, efflorescence, and other substances that will affect application. D. Install baffles along edge of roof over walls as detailed on drawings. Staple in place. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply insulation in accordance with manufacturer's written application instructions. B. Apply insulation to a reasonably uniform monolithic density without voids. C. Apply to minimum cured thickness of 6 inch+/- '12 inch. D. Apply insulation to fill voids around doors and windows. E. Apply insulation to fill voids around accessible service and equipment penetrations as noted on drawings. F. Apply insulation to seal voids at truss ends to prevent wind scouring of ceiling insulation. G. Seal plumbing stacks, electrical wiring and other penetrations into attic to control air leakage. H. Apply insulation in vented attic spaces as indicated on drawings. Proj. No. 07014 Polyicynene Spray Insulation 07218 - 3 J. Where building is designed to meet the specific airtightness standards of the Energy Star Program, apply insulation as recommended by manufacturer to provide airtight construction. Apply caulking to seal joints between structural assemblies. K. Apply uniform ignition barrier over all insulation in accordance with manufacturers printed instructions. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect application for insulation thickness and density. 3.5 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Do not permit subsequent work to disturb applied insulation. 3.7 SCHEDULES Location Thickness Vented roof spaces 6 inches END OF SECTION -^ Proj. No. 07014 Polyicynene Spray Insulation 07218-4 SECTION 07240 - COATED INSULATION SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Acrylic coated insulation system for exterior walls, Class PB, Type A. B. Acrylic stucco system over exterior gypsum board sheathing and concrete substrates. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06100- Rough Carpentry. B. Section 07620- Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim. C. Section 07900 -Joint Sealers. D. Section 09260- Gypsum Board Systems: Gypsum Sheathing. „ 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. EIFS System: Class PB, Type A, as defined by Exterior Insulation Manufacturer's Association. B. Stucco System: Synthetic stucco system including base and finish coats over metal lath. C. EIFS system to have a Factory Mutual Class I Rating. D. Both system to have a ASTM E84 Flame spread classification of 0-25. 1.4 QUALIFICATIONS A. Installer: Minimum of five years previous experience and manufacturer's approval. B. Manufacturer: Minimum of five years experience producing component materials for system installed in this country. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings and Product Data: Submit copies of manufacturer's product data sheets and printed installation instructions for each product proposed for use in accordance with Section 01330. On shop drawings, indicate fabrication details,joint locations and connection to other work. B. Samples: Submit three V-0”x V-0" samples of selected finish color and texture for approval by Architect. C. Test reports certifying entire system has passed ASTM E-84 and ASTM E-108, modified for vertical walls for Class A, and Florida Building Code Product Approval. 1.6 PRODUCT, DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Deliver and store products in original unopened packaging with legible manufacturer's identification, in accordance with Section 01600. B. Store products in a cool (not less than 40 degrees F) dry place out of direct sunlight, protected from the elements and from damage, in accordance with Section 01600. 1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Weather and Environmental Conditions 1. Application of the system shall not take place during the inclement weather unless appropriate protection is employed. 2. Installation of wet materials in temperatures less than 40 degrees F shall take place only if supplementary heat is provided and is maintained for a minimum of 24 hours after application of the wet materials. B. Protection 1. Protect surrounding areas and surfaces during the application of the wall system. 2. Protect system when work ceases for the day or when an area is completed so that water will not infiltrate behind the system. Proj. No. 07014 Coated Insulation System 07240-1 1.8 COORDINATION A. The work of this section requires close coordination with related sections and trades. B. Tops of all walls must immediately be covered with either the final trim or temporarily protected to prevent water infiltration behind the system. Install cap flashing as soon as possible after the finish coat has been installed. C. Install sealants in a timely manner. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Provide 5 year labor and material warranty for entire system (including sheathing). B. Warranty to cover cracks, adhesive or bonding failure and finish degradation. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. DeGussa Wall Systems, Inc. B. Sto Corporation. C. Total Wall, Inc. D. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01630. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I or II, as approved by wall system manufacturer. B. Insulation Board 1. ASTM C578; tested in accordance with ASTM E84 with flame-spread of less than 25. 2. Insulation board must be aged. If air dried, provide board aged for not less than 6 weeks in block form prior to cutting and shipping. •• 3. Water Absorption: In accordance with ANSI/ASTM D2842, 4% by volume. 4. Density: 1.0 PCF. 5. Size: 2'-0"x 4'-0". 6. Thickness: Minimum 2" with greater thickness as detailed to maintain profiles at built-up areas. 7. Edges: Square edges. 8. Source: Stucco-shield 2 by Atlas Roofing Products. C. Metal Lath: Expanded Metal Lath, ASTM C847, galvanized, 1"diamond mesh, self- furring, 20 ga. D. Weather Resistive Barrier: 100% acrylic based fiber reinforced barrier as follows: 1. CMU and Concrete Substrates: Senershield. 2. Gypsum Sheathing Substrates: Senershield - R. 3. Fabric Tape: Manufacturer's standard fabric tape. E. Reinforcing Fabric: Balanced open mesh glass fiber fabric properly treated for compatibility with other materials of the system supplied by coating system manufacturer. Provide high impact resistant mesh minimum 20 oz/sy in addition to 6 oz/sy mesh. 1. Source: Hi-Impact 20 by Degussa. 2. Provide special detailing and corner mesh as required by EIFS manufacturer. F. Base Coat: Acrylic polymer based, compatible with the insulation board substrate, and reinforcing fabric. 1. EIFS Source: Senergy Acrylic Base Coat. 2. Stucco Source: Senergy Stucco Base Coat. G. Primers: Acrylic based, integral color, with color and texture to match finish coat. 1. EIFS Source: Senergy Tinted Primer. 2. Stucco Source: Senergy Prime. H. Finish Coat: Factory mixed, acrylic based, integral color, with color and texture to match Architect's sample. Source: Senerflex and Silcoat , Siliconized 100% acrylic polymer finish coat for both EIFS and Stucco systems. I. Mechanical Fasteners: As required by the system manufacturer. Proj. No. 07014 Coated Insulation System 07240-2 J. Accessories: 1. As required by system manufacturer recommendations. 2. EPS Custom Molded Shapes: Foam Factory , Inc., as detailed on drawings. K. Water: Clean and potable. L. Sealants: Listed by the system manufacturer and approved by the sealant manufacturer for the selected system. M. Source: 1. EIFS System: Senturion I Wall System by DeGussa Wall Systems. 2. Stucco System: Synergy Stucco Wall System by DeGussa Wall Systems. 2.3 MIXING AND PREPARATION A. Perform according to manufacturer's recommendations. B. Base Coat: 1. Use clean plastic container free of foreign substances for mixing and preparing material. Do not use container which has been used for or cleaned with a petroleum product. 2. Mixer: As recommended by manufacturer. 3. Stir base coat before adding Portland cement to assure homogeneous material. 4. Mix Portland cement with base coat in ratio recommended by manufacturer. a. Measure quantities separately before mixing. b. Add Portland cement to base coat in small increments while thoroughly mixing each. 5. Water: Added to adjust workability. 6. Pot life for mixed base coat: Same as ordinary mortar or plastic materials. Keep container closed when not in use. 7. Use no additives such as rapid binders, antifreeze, or accelerators. C. Finish Coat: Thoroughly mix factory-prepared veneer finish material with the manufacturer's recommended mixer until a uniform workable consistency is attained. 1. A small amount of clean, potable water may be added to adjust workability. 2. Use no additives such as rapid binders, antifreeze, or accelerators. 3. Finish coating shall be used immediately after mixing. Keep containers closed when not in use. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for the installation of materials. If unsatisfactory conditions exist, report them in writing to the Architect and do not commence any installation until such conditions have been corrected. B. Examine surfaces to receive the system for 1. Wood sheathing installed in proper locations. 2. Substrates contrary to recommendations of the system manufacturer. 3. Defects such as rust or coatings on the substrate that will adversely affect the execution and quality of work. 4. Deviations beyond allowable tolerances for installation of substrate material. The substrate shall have no plan or irregularities greater than 1/8 inch over 10 foot dimension. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Install in accordance with system manufacturer's printed instructions. B. Air/Moisture Barrier: install in accordance with manufacturers instruction with adequate weather overlap of seams,fastened securely to substrate. C. Metal Lath: Install metal lath to substrate over air barrier with galvanized fasteners. Proj. No. 07014 Coated Insulation System 07240-3 D. Insulation Board 1. Begin application of board to vertical surfaces at the base from firm, permanent or temporary support. 2. Apply horizontally in running bond. 3. Precut board as required to fit openings, projections, etc., stagger vertical joints and corners. E. Base Coat and Standard Reinforcing Fabric 1. Using stainless steel trowel, apply base coat mixture to a uniform thickness of 1/16 inch. 2. Immediately place reinforcing fabric against the wet base coating, trowel from center to edges, embedding fabric into the coating. a. Use reinforcing fabric continuous at corners and lapped not less than 2-1/2" at fabric edges. b. Install reinforcing fabric at all corners of openings. C. Avoid wrinkles while embedding the reinforcing fabric. 3. Verify base coating surface is dry and hard before proceeding to finish application. F. Base Coat and Reinforcing Mesh for Impact-Resistance Areas 1. Using stainless steel trowel, apply base coat to entire surface of board to a uniform thickness of 3/32 inch. -- 2. Immediately embed first layer of heavy, reinforcing mesh into wet base coat using trowel. Smooth until mesh is fully embedded. Buff ends of mesh pieces tightly. Do not lap ends. 3. Install continuous at openings and corners. 4. Allow 24 hours for base coat to form a positive bond. Protect from damage and weather while curing. 5. Apply a second layer of standard reinforcing mesh and base coat mixture over first layer of reinforcing fabric as specified above. G. Finish 1. Using clean stainless steel trowel, apply a light coat of finish material directly to the reinforced base coating. a. Apply and level during the same operation to the minimum attainable thickness consistent with uniform coverage. b. Apply and texture finish continually over an entire surface. ,. C. Work to corners or joints, and do not allow the material to set up within a distinct wall area. d. Furnish sufficient staging and workmen to accomplish a uniform appearance. " 2. Achieve final texture after veneer finish has jelled so that it does not stick to the trowel. 3. Final Texture: Fine and medium texture. .. 4. Final Thickness: Not greater than the diameter of the largest aggregate of the finish material. 3.3 TOUCH-UP A. After installation, touch-up areas where finish coat has been damaged with manufacturer's recommended primer compatible with finish coat. B. Touch-up so that repair is not obvious. 3.4 COMPLETION A. When complete assembly shall be set square, plumb and level, accurately aligned to position intended, and securely anchored to prevent movement. .� B. Levels and joints shall be sharp, straight, accurately aligned with other running components, and joints between adjoining components shall be neatly and closely fitted as indicated. C. Exposed surfaces shall be clean and free from scratches, dents, tool marks, stains, discoloration, and other defects and damage. Proj. No. 07014 Coated Insulation System 07240-4 3.5 CLEANUP A. Remove extra materials and debris from job site. B. Clean adjacent materials and surfaces and the work area of foreign materials resulting from the Work. 3.6 SCHEDULE A. EIFS System: Weather resistive barrier, insulation board, base coat, brown coat finish coat, to thickness indicated. B. Stucco System: Weather Resistive barrier, metal lath, and 3/8 - 1/2 inch thick base and top coats. END OF SECTION Proj. No. 07014 Coated Insulation System 07240-5 .. .,. .., �, w SECTION 07260 -VAPOR RETARDERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes sheet materials for controlling vapor diffusion beneath concrete slabs on grade. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03300 - Cast In Place Concrete. 1.2 SEQUENCING A. Sequence Work to permit installation of materials in conjunction with placement of concrete. t PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Fiberweb Corp. 2. Fortifiber Corp. 3. Griffolyn, Reef Industries. 4. Raven Industries. B. Vapor Retarder Membrane 1. 3-ply reinforced polyethylene sheet, reinforced with nylon cord to provide minimum 130 Ib. tear strength or reinforced kraft paper with polyethylene coating on both surfaces. a. Perm rating: .045 to 0.10. b. Water Resistance: 76 hours. 2. Products: a. Griffolyn T-65 by Griffolyn Co. b. Moistop by Fortifiber Corp. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Remove loose or foreign matter capable of impairing adhesion. B. Clean substrate surfaces to receive vapor retarder. 3.2 EXISTING WORK A. Clean and repair existing construction to provide positive and continuous seal for vapor retarders. B. Do not proceed until granular fill is level and without voids, and plumbing and electrical rough-ins are complete. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Vapor Retarder Membrane: Apply continuously directly over prepared sub-grade. Install with width of sheet parallel with direction of pour,joints lapped 6 in. 3.4 PROTECTION: A. Protect completed membranes from damage. Prior to placing concrete, inspect membrane for punctures or damage and repair. END OF SECTION Proj. No. 07014 Vapor Retarders 07260- 1 I" MR am so .A .o .. SECTION 07321 - CONCRETE ROOF TILE PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Concrete roof tiles and roof system components. B. Metal roof flashing. C. Underlayments and self seal membrane. D. Related roof accessories. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry; Roof sheathing and nailers. B. Section 07218- Polyicynene Spray Insulation. C. Section 07600- Flashing and Sheet Metal. " D. Section 07720- Roof Accessories. 1.3 REFERENCES .. A. ASTM A 90-Standard Test Method for Weight(Mass)of Coating on Iron and Steel Articles with Zinc or Zinc-Alloy Coatings; 2001. B. ASTM A525-Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet,Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process; 1993. C. ASTM A 641 -Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated(Galvanized)Carbon Steel W ire;1998. D. ASTM A 653/A 653M-Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. E. ASTM C 1492 - Standard Specification for Concrete Roof Tile. F. AWPA C2 - Lumber, Timber, Bridge Ties and Mine Ties -- Preservative Treatment by Pressure Processes; 2001. G. FRSA/TRI - Concrete and Clay Roof Tile Installation Manual (For Florida High Wind Applications, 125 mph). 1.4 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Roofing tile materials and installation shall conform to the requirements of the applicable building code. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate metal flashing profiles, joint locations, fastening locations, and installation details. Indicate tile layout with location of cut and special shaped tiles identified. D. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, two complete sets of tile colors representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns. E. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified,two full size samples representing actual product, color, and patterns. F. Certificates of Compliance: Submit to certify compliance with referenced standards. G. Copy of Florida Building Code Product Approval Letter. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications:Minimum fiveyears documented experience producing concrete roof tile and member of National Tile Roofing Manufacturer's Association. Proj. No. 07014 Concrete Roof Tiles 07321 - 1 B. Installer Qualifications: Minimum five years documented experience installing products specified in this section and/or supervision by a manufacturers authorized installation representative. C. Mock-Up: Provide a mock-up for evaluation of surface preparation techniques and application workmanship. 1. Finish areas designated by Architect. 2. Mock-up shall be a minimum of a 10 foot by 10 foot area and include the edge, ridge, valley and other typical transition conditions anticipated. 3. Do not proceed with remaining work until installation workmanship and appearance is approved by Architect. 4. Accepted mock-up may remain as part of Work. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. B. Deliver products to project site in manufacturer's unopened pallets, labeled with data indicating compliance with specified requirements. C. Maintain dry storage area for products of this section until installation of products. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits. B. Do not overload the roof. Distribute stacks of tile uniformly on roof at not greater than 12 inches in height. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Roof Tile: MonierLifetile's Limited Lifetime, Fully Transferable, Non-Prorated Product Warranty against defects in roof tile for the life of the structure. B. Installation Warranty: Warrants products of this section,as installed,to be in accord with the Contract Documents and free from faults and defects in materials and workmanship for a period of 3 years after completion. 1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS *�+ A. Provide an additional 1 percent of installed roof tiles, but not less than one full square, for Owner's use in roof maintenance. B. Furnish extra materials packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels clearly describing contents. PART 2 PRODUCTS ON 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis of Design: MonierLifetile. (www.monierlifetile.com) B. Hanson Roof Tile approved pending Architects review of submittal. C. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600- Product Requirements. 2.2 CONCRETE ROOF TILE (CRT) A. Standard Weight Tile: Flat profile - Saxony Slate. 1. Finishing Tile: Provide manufacturer's special shape rake and ridge tiles. 2. Size: 17 inches by 12-3/8 inches nominal. 3. Coverage: 94 field tiles per 100 square feet of roof area. 4. Installed weight per square: Approximately 1000 lbs. 5. Color and Finish: As selected by Architect. Proj. No. 07014 Concrete Roof Tiles 07321 - 2 2.3 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Underlayment: MonierLifetile Components: MLT TileSeal Self Adhering Underlayment. B. Nails: Conforming to ASTM A 641, Class 1. Sized to penetrate deck minimum 3/4 inch or through thickness of deck. 1. Type: Hot dipped galvanized. a C. Screw Fasteners: Sized to penetrate deck minimum 3/4 inch or through thickness of deck or batten. 1. MonierLifetile Components:Quik Drive 2-1/2 inch or 3 inch Screws,Roofing Specific, Miami Dade County Approved. 2. MonierLifetile Components: Quik Drive complying with ASTM 641, Class 1, with 2 inch or 2-1/2 inch Screws. 3. Fastener Type: Corrosion resistant fasteners formed from coated or plated steel. D. Storm Clips: MonierLifetile Components: Wind Clips - Galvanized. E. Flashings: 1. MonierLifetile Components:Ribbed Tile Pan-26 gauge Galvanized Sheet Steel side wall flashing. 2. MonierLifetile Components:Wakaflex universal flashing for abutments at chimneys, walls and other rising structures. 3. MonierLifetile Components: Flash Bar metal flashing for chimneys and other roof to wall structures. 4. Material, Unless Otherwise Indicated. Steel sheet galvanized to G90/Z275 complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M; 26 gage, 0.018 inch minimum thickness. 5. Valley Flashings: a. MonierLifetile Components: Ribbed Valley Metal 1-1/2" Ctr. Diverter, 26 gauge, Galvanized Sheet Steel. b. Type: Single center diverter. C. Width: 24 inches, minimum. d. Height of Center Diverter: 1 inch minimum. e. Edge Returns: 1 inch minimum. f. Lap Joints: 6 inches minimum. 6. Plumbing Stacks and Other Pipes Penetrating Roof for Medium and High Profile Tiles: Lead sheet, 2.5 pounds per square foot minimum thickness; or dead soft aluminum sheet, 0.032 inch minimum thickness. F. Adhesive: 1. Asphalt plastic roof cement,Type II,non-asbestos,non-running,heavy body material composed of asphalt and other mineral ingredients,formulated for use with concrete roof tile. 2. Concrete tile adhesive,must be identified by manufacturer as specifically formulated as a concrete roof tile adhesive. G. Eave Closures: Prefabricated metal eave closure; profile to match tile,fastened at minimum 18 inches on center along eave. 1. MonierLifetile Components: Vented Eave Riser- Metal. H. Hip & Ridge 1. MonierLifetile Components: Zephyr Roll - Ridge Vent&Weather Block. 2. MonierLifetile Components: Ridge Riser- Elevates ridge board to proper height. I. Rake & Gable End: MonierLifetile prefabricated Rake and Ridge tile. Choose to match tile profile and color. J. Field Venting: MonierLifetile Components: Zephyr Vents and Zephyr (Saxony style) vent. Paint to match field tile. Proj. No. 07014 Concrete Roof Tiles 07321 - 3 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. B. Verify surfaces are uniform, smooth, clean and dry C. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result under the project conditions. Im 3.3 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and the following: 1. FRSA/TRI 07320 Concrete and Clay Roof Tile Installation Manual Second Edition .n (For Florida High Wind Applications, 125 mph). 3.4 UNDERLAYMENT APPLICATION: A. Underlayment- Install underlayment in accordance with manufacturers printed instructions. .� Install ridge vents; follow vent manufacturer's installation recommendations. B. Install nailer boards at hips and ridges: 1. Use fasteners of sufficient length to penetrate minimum 3/4 inch into trusses. 2. Attach with No.26 gage galvanized strapping minimum 24 inches on center. 3.5 FLASHING INSTALLATION A. Install flashings to shed water and prevent water penetration under tiles. B. Valleys: Install preformed metal flashing over underlayment. 1. Open Valley: Miter the to form straight border a minimum of 2 inches back from the center of the valley on each side. C. Side Wall Flashing: 1. Install preformed metal pan flashing at base of wall over underlayment starting at lower end and working up. -° 2. Vertical Flange:4 inches minimum;nail vertical metal flange near top of metal edge. 3. Base Flange: 6 inches minimum. 4. Metal Edge Return: 1 inch; secure to either deck or batten strip with roofing nail through metal strap. 5. Lap Joints: 6 inches minimum. D. Counter Flashing: 1. Lap Top Flange of Base Flashing: 3 inches minimum. 2. Nail metal near edge 6 inches on center. 3. Set metal into reglets and seal thoroughly. 4. Lap Joints: 3 inches minimum. E. Install batten extenders to support tile over flashing. F. Install tiles so as not to inhibit water flow on flashings. G. Head and Apron Flashing: 1. Nail near top edge of vertical flange with minimum 4 inches on tile surface. 2. Lap metal 6 inches and seal laps with flashing cement. H. Flashing at Plumbing Stacks, Pipes, Turbines, Vents, Etc: 1. Install base flashing sealed or lapped by underlayment. 2. Install second flashing interlaced with tile coursing. 3. Seal with sealant. I. Coatings: Apply color coordinated paint to all exposed metal flashings. .. Proj. No. 07014 Concrete Roof Tiles 07321 - 4 3.6 TILE INSTALLATION A. Layout: 1. Overhang at Eave: 3/4 inch past drip edge, uniformly aligned. 2. Minimum Head Lap: 3 inches. 3. Coursing: Staggered/cross bond. B. Set perimeter tiles in mortar; apply sealer to exposed mortar. C. Secure field and perimeter tile in accordance with UBC Table 15-D-2. D. Cut field tile to form straight edge at center of hip, ridge and valley. E. Install eave closures. F. Hips: Use prefabricated hip starter. 1. Hips: Use standard hip tiles as starter. 2. Miter tile as hip starter to match eave lines. 3. Form end with color coordinated mortar. G. Hips and Ridges, Mechanically fastened: 1. Install nailer board of sufficient height to support trim tile. 2. Protect nailer board with pressure sensitive adhesive. 3. Mechanically fasten trim to nailer board with minimum 3/4 inch penetration. 4. Use approved sealant or clips. 5. Point mortar and finish to match tile surfaces. H. Rakes and Gables: Use rake tile. 1. Adjust first course to match field tile. 2. Nail rake tile with minimum two corrosion resistant fasteners of sufficient length to penetrate: a. Abut eave succeeding rake tile to nose of field tile above. 3.7 CLEANING A. Remove all broken tile, debris and excess tile from roof. B. Sweep cut tiles clean. 3.8 REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT A. Damaged Tile: 1. Break out damaged roof tile. 2. Repair torn underlayment. 3. Drive fastener flush. 4. Apply minimum 3/8 inch by 2 inch bead of approved adhesive on tile in course below replacement tile. 5. Immediately set replacement tile in position assuring proper contact. B. Damaged Small Valley and Hip Cuts: 1. Apply a minimum of 3/8 inch by 2 inch bead of approved adhesive at head of cut tile. 2. Immediately set tile in course above in position assuring proper contact. 3.9 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products until completion of project. B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION Proj. No. 07014 Concrete Roof Tiles 07321 - 5 OR an an .W no ow am .o. SECTION 07620 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes flashings and counterf lashings, gutters and downspouts and fabricated sheet metal items, and accessories. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 06631 - Plastic Assemblies: Exterior PVC trim. 2. Section 07531 - Single Ply Roofing: Flashings associated with membrane roofing. 3. Section 07900 -Joint Sealers. 4. Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings: Field painting. 1.2 REFERENCES A. AA- Designation System for Aluminum finishes. B. ASTM A167- Stainless Steel and Heat-Resisting Chromium Plate, Sheet and Strip. C. ASTM A446 - Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized), Structural Quality. D. ASTM A526 - Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized), Commercial Quality. E. ASTM B32 - Solder Metal F. ASTM B209 -Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate. G. ASTM D226 - Asphalt-Saturated Roofing Felt. H. ASTM D4586 - Fibrated Asphalt Roof Cement. I. FS FF-S-325 - Shield Expansion; Nail, Expansion; and Nail, Drive-Screw. J. FS TT-C-494A- Coating Compound, Bituminous, Solvent Type, Acid Resistant. K. FS TT-S-00230C(2) - Sealing Compound, Elastomeric Type, Single Component (For Caulking, Sealing and Glazing in Buildings and Other Structures). L. (SMACNA) - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual, Fifth Edition, 1993. 1.3 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Sheet Metal Fabrications; Conform to the criteria of SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual"where scheduled. 1.4 QUALIFICATIONS A. Fabricator and Installer: Company specializing in sheet metal work with minimum three years experience. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack material to prevent twisting, bending, and abrasion, and to provide ventilation. Slope metal sheets to ensure drainage. B. Prevent contact with materials causing discoloration or staining. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 SHEET METAL MATERIAL A. Aluminum: ASTM B209, alloy 3003 temper H14, thickness or gauge as scheduled. ■ B. Galvanized Steel: ARMCO Zincgrip Paintgrip, ASTM A526 commercial quality, coating designation G90, gauge as scheduled. 2.2 FASTENERS A. Nails: Galvanized steel aluminum or stainless steel material, flathead, wire, barbed, slating type. For washers use lead or neoprene. B. Screws: Self-tapping sheet metal type. C. Rivets: Aluminum material, type and size as recommended by sheet metal manufacturer. Proj. No. 07014 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07620 - 1 2.3 RELATED MATERIAL A. Solder: ASTM B32, alloy grade 58, 50% tin, 50% lead. B. Flux: Phosphoric acid type, manufacturer's standard. C. Sealant: Polyurethane, FS TT-S-00230c, type II, Class A. D. Bituminous Plastic Cement: ASTM D4586, Type I; asbestos free. E. Asphaltic Coating Compound: FS TT-C-494A, Type IL ** F. Underlayment: Asphalt saturated, unperforated roofing felt, ASTM D226, 15 lbs. type. 2.4 FABRICATION - GENERAL A. Fabricate work in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual and reviewed Shop Drawings. B. Form sheet metal on bending brake. C. Shape, trim and hand seam metal on bench insofar as practicable. -•® D. Make angle bends and folds for interlocking metal with full regard for expansion and contraction to avoid buckling or fullness in metal after installation. E. Form materials with straight lines, sharp angles and smooth curves. F. Fold back edges on concealed side of exposed edge to form hem. G. Weld or solder joints on parts that are to be permanently and rigidly assembled. 2.5 FABRICATED ITEMS: A. Flashings, Counterflashings and Misc: 26 galvanized steel formed in minimum 10 ft. lengths, two piece system with metal flashing receiver at masonry walls, SMACNA Figure 4-4. B. Hung Gutters: 1. .032 in. aluminum, formed in 10 ft. lengths. Rivet and seal. 2. Fabricate gutters to ogee profile and 6 inch size. 3. Provide outlet thimble to fit downspouts complete with downspout strainer. 4. Provide expansion joints at 50 ft. o.c. maximum, SMACNA Figure 1-6. C. Downspouts: .032 in. aluminum, upper sections telescoped into lower sections 1-1/2 in., and riveted. Rectangular profile, 3 x 4 inch size. D. Soffit Vent: 2"wide aluminum, vented soffit vent, model No. VENTBWH by Flamco. Net free area required is minimum 7.625 sq. in./ft. E. Roof Penetration Flashing - Pipes: 26 ga. galvanized.sheet steel, SMACNA Figure 4-14, Figure A. F. Umbrella Counterflashing: 26 ga. galvanized sheet steel, similar to SMACNA Figure 4- 14, Figure C, two-piece construction, fabricated as detailed. G. Baffles: .040 in. aluminum, SMACNA Plate No. 24. H. Downspout Adaptor: Plastic PVC transition piece to connect downspout to buried storm pipe. 2.6 FINISH A. Aluminum: Prefinished on a continuous coil coating line with a fluoropolymer coating based on Kynar 500 resin, standard color selected by Architect. B. Field finish galvanized metal items in accordance with the requirements of Section 09900 - Painting. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, and vents through roof are solidly set, and nailing strips located. * B. Verify roofing termination and base flashings are in place, sealed, and secure. Proj. No. 07014 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07620 - 2 3.2 PREPARATION A. Install starter and edge strips, and cleats before starting installation. B. Install surface mounted reglets to lines and levels indicated on Drawings. Seal top of reglets with sealant. C. Paint concealed metal surfaces with protective backing paint to minimum dry film thickness of 15 mil. 3.3 INSTALLATION: A. General: 1. Install work watertight, without waves, warps, buckles, fastening stresses or distortion, allowing for expansion and contraction. 2. Install fabricated sheet metal items in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual 3. Coat contact surfaces of dissimilar metals with asphalt coating compound. Do not use materials incompatible with elastomeric sheet roofing. +. B. Flashings, Counterflashings: 1. Extend flanges into reglets and securely fasten. 2. Where nailing is required, nail at 6 in. o.c. 3. Overlap 4 in. on base flashing, lap ends of sheets 3 in. C. Hung Gutters: 1. Extend inner edge under gravel guard and secure to substrate. 2. Secure gutter by fastening with 18 ga. straps of same material as gutter, spaced at 3 ft. o.c. maximum. Install level. 3. Solder and rivet downspout thimbles, extend 2 in. into downspout. Install strainers at each downspout. D. Downspouts: Install plumb and level, attached to wall with 22 ga. 1-1/4 in. wide straps at top, bottom, and 10 ft. o.c. maximum. E. Roof Penetration Flashing-Pipes: Install at multiple pipes and small pipes and conduit penetrating roof. Fully solder connections and seams. F. Umbrella Counterflashing (Option for single pipe penetration): 1. Install sleeve with deck flanges. 2. Fully solder connections and seams. 3. Set umbrella in mastic and tighten draw bands. 4. Seal top of umbrella with sealant. 3.4 CLEANING: A. Remove flux and residual acid immediately by neutralizing with baking soda and washing with clean water. B. Leave work clean and free of stains, scrap, and debris. END OF SECTION Proj. No. 07014 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07620 - 3 SECTION 07840- FIRESTOPPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Firestopping penetrations through fire-rated walls and partitions. 2. Firestopping openings between tops of fire-rated partitions and floor or roof systems. B. Related sections: 1. Section 09260 -Gypsum Drywall Systems. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASTM E84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. B. ASTM E136 - Non-combustibility of Elementary Materials. C. ASTM E814- Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops. D. FS HH-1-521 F- Insulation Blankets, Thermal. E. UL 1479 - Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops. F. UL Building Materials Directory-Through-Penetration Firestop Systems (XHEZ), Through-Penetration Firestop Devices (XHCR) and Fill, Void or Cavity Materials (XHHW). 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design Criteria- Firestopping System: 1. Capable of providing required fire resistance rating. 2. Expanding type materials that fill cavities or adhere to substrate and that will maintain seal under normal expected movements of substrates. 3. Materials which exhibit shrinkage, cracking, spalling or signs of visible degradation of the firestop seal will not be acceptable. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's descriptive product data sheets for each product. B. Quality Control Submittals (For Information Only): 1. Test Reports: Submit 2 copies of certified test reports of firestopping application to substrate materials similar to project conditions and test reports from an independent testing agency of each product proposed for use, which indicates conformance to ASTM E814. 2. Certificates: Submit applicator's certification that firestopping has been completed in accordance with code requirements to provide necessary fire resistance ratings. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE �. A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. UL Classification: Firestopping products currently classified with UL as "Fill, Void or Cavity Materials", "Through Penetration Firestop Devices" and "Through Pene- tration Firestop Systems." 2. Fire Tests: Tested in accordance with ASTM E814 and UL1479. B. Fire Resistance Rating: Same as partition, wall, floor or roof being penetrated. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original, tightly sealed containers or unopened packages, with labels intact and with legible mixing and application instructions. B. Store materials out of the weather in original containers, at temperatures as recommended by manufacturer. C. When using firestopping foam, store unmixed liquid components in their original, unopened containers at a temperature between 65 and 80°F. for 12 hours before use. Proj. No. 07014 Firestopping 07840-1 1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not apply sealants or foams when temperature of substrate material and surrounding .. air is below 40°F. B. Maintain sealant at a minimum 70°F. for best workability. C. Do not apply firestop mortar if ambient temperature or substrate temperature is below 40°F. during installation, or is anticipated to be below 40°F. during the first 24 hours after installation. D. Use forced air ventilation when installing foam if areas of installation have less than 2 cubic feet of free air for each pound of liquid mixture being foamed. ., PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FIRE SAFING INSULATION A. Qualities: Mineral fiber safing insulation, 4 pcf density, 4 in. thick. (deep). 1. Fire Hazard Classification: 15/0/0, ASTM E84. ,.. 2. Combustibility: Non-combustible, ASTM E136. B. Standard: FS HH-1-521 F, Type 1, Class A. C. Source: Thermafiber Safing Insulation by U.S. Gypsum Co. 2.2 FIRESTOPPING SEALANT A. Qualities: Single component silicone penetration sealant or intumescent elastomer sealant capable of bonding to most common construction materials. 1. UL Classification: Fill, void or cavity material for use in through-penetration firestop systems. B. Source: 1. Fire Stop Sealant by Dow Corning. 2. Fire Barrier Caulk CP-25 by 3M. 3. Biotherm Firestop Sealant by Bio Fireshield, Inc. 2.3 FIRESTOPPING PUTTY A. Qualities: One component ceramic fiber base putty or intumescent elastomer putty. 1. UL Classification: Fill, void, or cavity materials for use in through-penetration firestop systems. B. Source: 1. Fiberfrax Fyre Putty by Sohio-Carborundum Co. 2. Fire Barrier Putty 303 by 3M. 3. Bio RS90P Mastic by Bio Fireshield, Inc. 2.4 FIRESTOPPING FOAM A. Qualities: Two-component foamed silicone elastomer, 14-18 pcf free foam density. ••, 1. UL Classification: Fill, void, or cavity material for use in through-penetration firestop systems. B. Source: Fire Stop Foam, liquid components Part A (black) and Part B (off-white) by Dow Corning Corp. 2.5 RELATED MATERIALS A. Safing Clips: Thermafiber galvanized steel safing impaling clip by USG. B. Damming Materials: Alumina silicate fire board, mineral fiberboard, mineral fiber matting, mineral fiber putty, or mineral wool. C. Sleeves: Galvanized sheet steel. D. Backer Rod: Open cell urethane foam. 2.6 MIXES - FOAM A. If ambient temperature is not between 65 and 800F., adjust temperature of Part A and Part B liquid components to obtain a snap time between 1 and 2 minutes when mixed. Proj. No. 07014 Firestopping 07840-2 B. Stir Part A and Part B in their original containers until settled fillers or pigments are thoroughly dispersed. C. Combine and mix Part A and Part B in accordance with mixing instructions. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces of openings are sound, clean, dry, and ready to receive application of firestopping. B. Verify that penetration elements are securely fixed and properly located to comply with minimum and maximum annular space allowable between penetration elements and adjacent substrate. C. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean contact surfaces free of dirt, grease, oil, loose material, or other matter which may affect bond of firestopping. B. Remove incompatible materials which affect bond, by scraping, brushing, scrubbing, or sand blasting. C. Confirm compatibility of surfaces to receive firestopping materials. 3.3 GENERAL APPLICATION A. Apply fire safing and firestopping materials in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations to comply with fire rating requirements. B. Use fire safing insulation and sealant for firestopping periphery of fire-rated partitions and walls. C. Use foam, sealant, putty or sleeves for firestopping small, simple penetrations of walls, partitions and floors. D. Use foam, composite sheet or mortar for fire-stopping large floor openings with multiple pipes or cables passing through floor. 3.4 APPLICATION - FIRE SAFING INSULATION A. Partition Periphery: Install safing insulation in openings between periphery of fire rated partitions and structural elements. Friction fit safing insulation, completely filling openings, including deck flutes. 3.5 APPLICATION - SEALANT AND PUTTY A. Apply sealant and putty in sufficient thickness to achieve required rating. B. Pack material solidly around penetrations; fill openings to depth required for each fire rating. 3.6 APPLICATION - FIRESTOPPING FOAM A. Follow manufacturer's installation instructions for damming penetration. B. Seal gaps or cracks left after damming materials are in place. C. Immediately after mixing, dispense liquid foam into penetration opening in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. D. Do not fill penetration opening more than one-third full; foam expands 3 to 4 times its original volume during cure. E. When dispensing continuously, do not exceed measured snap time or a maximum of 3 minutes, whichever is less. F. If opening is not filled when shot reaches measured snap time or a maximum of 3 minutes, stop application for at least 15 minutes to allow foam to set. G. Repeat injection-and-cure procedure until opening is filled, allowing 15 minutes between + . application of each shot. H. Leave dam in place for 24 hours to allow foam to fully cure. Proj. No. 07014 Firestopping 07840-3 40 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect cured penetration seals after 24-hour cure by removing damming materials to „R examine seal. B. Cured firestopping shall completely fill penetration. Fill remaining gaps with additional firestopping. C. Reinspect after added material has cured 24 hours. Wn D. Replace damming materials required to achieve a fire rating. E. Correct other unacceptable firestopping work and provide further inspection to verify compliance with requirements. IM 3.8 CLEANING A. Remove excess material, droppings, and debris. B. Remove sealant, putty and foam from materials and surfaces not specifically required to be sealed. 3.9 PROTECTION A. Protect adjacent surfaces and equipment from damage. B. Protect applied firestopping from damage. End of Section Proj. No. 07014 Firestopping 07840-4 SECTION 07900 - JOINT SEALERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Preparing sealant substrate surfaces. B. Sealant and backing. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this Section with minimum 3 years documented experience. B. Applicator: Company specializing in applying the work of this Section with minimum 3 years documented experience and approved by sealant manufacturer. C. Conform to Sealant and Waterproofers Institute requirements for materials and installation. 1.3 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install solvent curing sealants in enclosed building spaces. B. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and after installation. 1.4 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate the work of this Section with all Sections referencing this Section. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Warranty: Include coverage of installed sealants and accessories which fail to achieve air tight and watertight seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure. 1.6 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Deliver materials in unopened containers as packaged by manufacturer. Store in a manner to protect materials from weather. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Pecora Chemical Corp. B. Tremco Manufacturing Co. C. Sonneborn Division of Contech D. General Electric Silicone Products Division. E. Dow Corning Corp. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Polyurethane (Type 1 Sealant): 1. One-part conforming to FS TT-S-00227E, Class A, Type I (self-leveling) and ASTM-920. 2. Color: As selected by Owner. 3. Acceptable products a. Urexpan NR-210, Pecora. b. Sonolastic SL-1, Sonneborn. B. Silicone, General Purpose (Type 2 Sealant): 1. One-part rubber based silicone conforming to FS TT-S- 001543, Class A, Type II and ASTM C-920. • 2. Color: Match substrate. 3. Acceptable products a. 790 Building Sealant, Dow Corning. Proj. No. 07014 Joint Sealers 07900-1 b. Silpruf, General Electric. C. Spectrum 1, Tremco. , C. Silicone, Paintable (Type 3 Sealant): 1. One-part silicone rubber sealant for interior use. 2. Acceptable product: Silicone Rubber Sealant, Paintable Dow Corning. D. Silicone, Sanitary(Type 4 Sealant): 1. One-part conforming to FS TT-S-001543, F.D.A. Regulation 21 CFR177.2600, and FDA Food Additive Regulation 121.2514. 2. Color: White. 3. Acceptable Products a. (1) 786 Silicone Rubber Sealant, Dow Corning. b. SCS1702, General Electric. E. Acrylic Latex (Type 5 Sealant): 1. One-part, non-sag acrylic latex, meeting requirements of ASTM C834. 2. Acceptable products a. AC-20, Pecora. b. Sonolac, Sonneborn-Contech, Inc. C. Acrylic Latex 834 Caulk, Tremco. F. Acrylic Sealant (Type 6 Sealant): 1. One-part, non-sag, acrylic polymeric conforming to FS TT-S-00230. 2. Acceptable products a. Unicrylic 60, Pecora. b. Mono, Tremco Manufacturing Co. G. Polyurethane (Type 7 Sealant): 1. One-part conforming to FS TT-S-00227E, Class A, Type II (non-sag) and ASTM-920. 2. Color: As selected by Owner. . 3. Acceptable products a. Dynatrol i, Pecora. b. Sonolastic NP-1, Sonneborn. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials. ... B. Joint Backing: ANSI/ASTM D1056 and D1565 round. In vertical joints use closed cell polyethylene foam rod; oversized 30 to 50 percent larger than joint width. In horizontal joints, use solid neoprene or butyl rubber, Shore A hardness of 70. PART 3 EXECUTION ,M 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces and joint openings are ready to receive work and field measurements are as shown on Drawings and recommended by the manufacturer. B. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing substrate. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. ., B. Remove loose materials and foreign matter which might impair adhesion of sealant. C. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant. D. Perform preparation in accordance with ASTM C804 for solvent release sealants, C790 for latex base sealants, C919 for acoustical applications, and C962 for elastomeric sealants. E. Protect elements surrounding the work of this Section from damage or disfiguration. Proj. No. 07014 Joint Sealers 07900-2 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install sealants in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Measure joint dimensions and size materials to achieve required width/depth ratios. C. Install joint backing (if required) to achieve a neck dimension no greater than 1/3 the joint width. D. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges. E. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags. F. Tool joints concave. Sealant shall achieve a firm skin before surface coating is applied. G. On fire retardant putty and foam, install in such a manner as to maintain hourly rating of element which is being penetrated. 3.4 CLEANING AND REPAIRING A. Clean adjacent soiled surfaces. B. Repair or replace defaced or disfigured finishes caused by work of this Section. MR 3.5 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect sealants until cured. 3.6 SCHEDULE SEALANT TYPE APPLICATION 1 a. Horizontal control and expansion joints in concrete flooring and pedestrian paving and at junctures between these materials and other adjacent materials. 2 a. Sealing of joints between plumbing fixtures and substrates and between plastic laminate splashes and adjacent tops and walls. 3 a. General caulking as part of interior painting in joints subject to movement. 4 a. Sealing joints between countertops and substrates which may be in contact with food. = " 5 a. General caulking as part of interior painting. 6 a. Setting sill plates to slabs. 7 a. Sealing of joints in exterior soffit work. b. Control joints in masonry work and at juncture between masonry work and adjacent materials. END OF SECTION A Proj. No. 07014 Joint Sealers 07900-3 .e low om" •R am SECTION 08217- MOLDED WOOD FIBER DOORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes molded fiber wood doors; pre-hung; panel configuration; rated and non- rated. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 08710 - Door Hardware: Entry door hardware. 2. Section 09900 - Painting: Field painting. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ANSI A135.4 - Basic Hardboard. B. ASTM E413 - Classification for Rating Sound Insulation Class. C. HPMA HP (Hardwood Plywood and Veneer Association formerly HPMA) - Hardwood and Decorative Plywood. D. NFPA 80 (National Fire Protection Association) - Fire Doors and Windows. E. NFPA 252 (National Fire Protection Association) - Standard Method of Fire Tests for Door " Assemblies. F. UL (Underwriters Laboratories Inc.) - Building Materials Directory. G. UL 10B (Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.) - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. H. WH (Warnock Hersey) - Directory of Listed Products. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. " B. Shop Drawings: Illustrate door opening criteria, elevations, sizes, types, swings, undercuts required, special blocking for hardware, factory finishing criteria, and identify cutouts for glazing. C. Product Data: Submit information on door core materials and construction. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit special installation instructions. 1.4 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years experience. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements. B. Protect doors with resilient packaging. Do not store in damp or wet areas; or in areas where sunlight might bleach veneer. Seal top and bottom edges when stored more than one week. Break seal on site to permit ventilation. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Section 01300 -Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Coordinate Work with door opening construction, door frame and door hardware installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD FIBER DOORS A. Manufacturer: 1. Masonite International Corp. 2. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements. �r• B. Doors: 1. Construction: Pressed high density fiberboard, non-rated as scheduled on Drawings. Proj. No. 07014 Molded Wood Fiber Doors 08217 - 1 ■ 2. Panel Design: Textured finish; refer to Drawings for profiles. 3. Frame: Wood as detailed and scheduled, pre-assembled. 4. Assembly: Non-rated doors to be pre-hung in frame. 5. Hardware: Refer to Section 08710. 6. Source: Molded Panel Doors by Masonite International Corp. a. Interior panel doors (MWF): 1-3/8 inch Six-panel prefinshed doors by Masonite with textured face panel door. b. Interior louver doors (WD): 1-3/8 inch thick; Miami Louver Doors by Masonite; louver over panel configuration. 2.2 FABRICATION A. Furnish lock blocks at lock edge and for hardware reinforcement. B. Bond edge banding to cores. �* C. Factory machine doors for finish hardware in accordance with hardware requirements and dimensions. Do not machine for surface hardware. D. Pre-hang doors in frames. +� 2.3 SHOP FINISHING A. Seal door top edge. B. Factory Finish: Primer. •� C. Field Finish: Refer to Section 09900 - Painting. D. Color: Refer to Section 09000 - Color Legend. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Section 01300- Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Verify opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable. C. Do not install doors in openings that are not plumb or are out-of-tolerance for size or alignment. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. ., B. Trim non-rated door width by cutting equally on both jamb edges. C. Trim door height by cutting bottom edges to maximum of 3/4 inch. D. Machine cut doors for hardware installation. E. Coordinate installation of doors with installation of hardware specified in Section 08710. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Testing, adjusting, and balancing. B. Adjust door for smooth and balanced door movement. END OF SECTION Proj. No. 07014 Molded Wood Fiber Doors 08217 - 2 SECTION 08262 -ALUMINUM SLIDING GLASS DOORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes sliding glass and aluminum doors and frames, including glass and glazing, operating hardware, and insect screen. • B. Related Sections: 1. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Framed openings. 2. Section 07213 - Batt Insulation: Fibrous stuffing insulation at sliding door frame perimeter. 3. Section 07900 -Joint Sealers: Perimeter sealant and backup materials. 4. Section 08800 - Glazing: Product requirements for glass units. 1.2 REFERENCES A. AAMA/NWWDA (American Architectural Manufacturers Association/National Wood Window and Door Association) 101/I.S.2 - Voluntary Specifications for Aluminum, Vinyl (PVC) and Wood Windows and Glass Doors. B. ANSI Z97.1 - Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test of Safety Glazing Used in Buildings. C. ASTM B221 - Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bar, Rod, Wire, Shape, and Tube. D. ASTM D3656 - Insect Screening and Louver Cloth Woven from Vinyl-Coated Glass Yarns. E. ASTM F842 - Methods For Measurement of Forced Entry Resistance of Horizontal Sliding Door Assemblies. F. GANA (Glass Association of North American, formerly FGMA) - Glazing Manual. G. NFRC (National Fenestration Rating Council) 100 - Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product Thermal Properties (Currently Limited to U-Value). H. SIGMA (Sealed Insulated Glass Manufacturers Association) - Sealed Insulating Glass: Glass to Elastomer Edge, Glass to Mastic Edge, Special Glasses. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION e A. Sliding Doors: Extruded aluminum sections, factory fabricated, vision glass, threshold, related flashings, anchorage and attachment devices. B. Configuration: Horizontal sliding unit and one fixed unit. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Primary Performance Requirements: AAMA 101 SGD-HC40 Heavy Commercial or better. B. Air Infiltration: Limit air infiltration through assembly to 0.34 cfm/min/sq ft of wall area, measured at reference differential pressure across assembly of 6.24 psf as measured in accordance with ASTM E283. C. Water Leakage: None, when measured in accordance with ASTM E331 with test pressure difference of 15% of the positive design pressure. D. System Internal Drainage: Drain water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channel, and moisture occurring within system to exterior by weep drainage network. E. Thermal Movement: Design sections to permit thermal expansion and contraction of components to match perimeter opening construction. F. Riser Height 2.25" = 7.5 psf field performance and 9 psf lab test. G. Design Pressure Requirements: Refer to Structural Drawings. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate opening dimensions, framed opening tolerances, method for achieving air and vapor barrier seal to adjacent construction, pan flashing and concealed flashings, anchorage locations, affected related Work, and installation requirements. Proj. No. 07014 Aluminum Sliding Glass Doors 08262 - 1 C. Product Data: Submit component dimensions, fastener types, glass, internal drainage details, and cutouts for hardware and accessories. D. Samples: Submit two 12 x 12 inch in size illustrating typical sliding door panel corner construction, door frame corner construction, threshold profile, and finishes. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit special procedures and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. *� F. Copy of Florida Building Code Product Approval Letter. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company speftlizing in manufacturing commercial fabrication of sliding .� aluminum doors with minimum three years documented experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing commercial installation of sliding aluminum doors with minimum three years experience. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Section 01600- Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements. .. B. Protect finished surfaces with strippable coating. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings that bond to substrate when exposed to sunlight or weather. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Section 01700- Execution Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds. B. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for insulated glass units from seal failure, interpane dusting or misting, and replacement of same. C. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for laminated glass units from delimitation due to moisture or chemicals, and replacement of same. D. Warranty: Include coverage for degradation of color finish. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 SLIDING GLASS AND ALUMINUM DOORS A. Manufacturer and Product: 1. Series 8000 Wide Stile Aluminum Sliding Glass Door by WinDoor, Inc., Orlando, FI. 2. Substitutions: Section 01600- Product Requirements. 2.2 COMPONENTS A. Extruded Aluminum: Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221; 6063 alloy, T5 temper typical, 6061 alloy,T6 temper for extruded structural members. B. Sheet Aluminum: ASTM 6209, 5005 alloy, H15 or H34 temper. C. Unit Frame Construction: Extruded with welded corner construction and optional 8-1/2 inch high bottom rail. D. Fixed and Sliding Frame: Construction: Extruded aluminum with welded corner construction and optional 8-1/2 inch high bottom rail. E. Insulating Glass: Sealed double pane units; conform with requirements in Section 08800: 1. Outer Pane: 3/16 inch clear tempered glass. 2. Inner Pane: 7/16 inch tempered laminated glass. 3. Pane Thickness: Minimum 1/4 inch thick. 4. Minimum Total Unit Thickness: 1 inch. 5. Glazing: Manufacturer's standard conforming with IGCC-CBA rating for large missile impact. F. Glass Stops: Formed extruded aluminum to match doors, sloped for wash. "'• G. Compression weatherstripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable compressible weatherstripping gaskets of molded neoprene complying with ASTM D 2000 or molded Vinyl complying with ASTM D 2287. Proj. No. 07014 Aluminum Sliding Glass Doors 08262 -2 H. Sliding weatherstripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable weatherstripping of wool, polypropylene, or nylon woven pile, with nylon fabric or aluminum strip backing, complying with AAMA 701.2. I. Hardware: 1. Pull Handles: a. Interior: Olympus Sliding Door Handle by WinDoor, lockable. b. Exterior: ADA compliant pull. 2. Sliding Panel Bottom Rollers: Nylon, adjustable from interior. 3. Limit Stops: Resilient rubber. 4. Keyed Cylinder Locks: Dual point adjustable mortise lock with interior latch lever. 5. Weatherstripping: Wool pile type profiled to effect weather seal. 6. Threshold: Extruded aluminum; sloped for positive wash; fit under frame to 1/2 inch beyond wall face; one piece full width of opening. 7. Sill Riser: 13/16 x 2-1/4 inches. J. Transition Threshold: Model no. 259R rubber ramp by Zero International. Provide at main slider. K. Insect Screen Frame: Rolled aluminum frame of rectangular sections; fit with adjustable hardware; nominal size similar to operable glazed unit. L. Insect Screens: ASTM D3656, Class 2, 18 by 14 mesh, charcoal color. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Anchors: Galvanized steel. B. Bituminous Paint: Fibered asphaltic type. C. Aluminum Brick Mold: Snap in covers. Color to match frame. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Size and fabricate door assembly to allow for tolerances of rough framed openings, clearances, shim spacing and shims around perimeter of assemblies. B. Ensure joints and connections are flush, hairline, and waterproof. C. Form sills and stools in one piece. Slope sills for wash. D. Assemble insect screen frames with mesh set into frame and secured. Fit frames with adjustable roller hardware. E. Accurately and rigidly fit joints and corners. F. Match components to ensure continuity of line. G. Furnish drainage to exterior for moisture entering joints and glazing spaces and condensation occurring within frame construction. H. Furnish glass in fixed and sliding units in accordance with manufacturer's standard method conforming with GANA Glazing Manual I. Provide minimum 32 inch clear opening for operable panel to meet ADA requirements. • 2.5 FINISHES A. Interior and Exterior Surfaces: Kynar 500 (70% PVDF) Custom color as selected by Architect. B. Threshold: Clear anodized. C. Screens Frame: Color as selected by Architect. D. Pull Handles: Color as selected by Architect. A0 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Section 01300 -Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Verify openings are ready to receive Work and opening dimensions and clearances are as indicated on shop drawings. Proj. No. 07014 Aluminum Sliding Glass Doors 08262- 3 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare opening to permit correct installation of door unit in conjunction with air and vapor seal. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Attach frame and shims to perimeter opening to accommodate construction tolerances and other irregularities. B. Use anchorage devices to securely fasten sliding door assembly to wall construction without distortion or imposed stresses. C. Coordinate installation with placement of air and vapor seals at frame perimeter. D. Coordinate installation of batt thermal insulation at shim spaces at frame perimeter as specified in Section 07213. E. Place threshold in bed of butyl sealant. + F. Install perimeter trim. G. Apply coat of bituminous paint on concealed aluminum surfaces in contact with cementitious or dissimilar materials. 3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements: Tolerances, B. Maintain dimensional tolerances and alignment with adjacent Work. •• C. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/16 inch. D. Maximum Variation from Level: 1/16 inch. E. Longitudinal or Diagonal Warp: Plus or minus 1/8 inch from 10 foot straight edge. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Testing, adjusting, and balancing. B. Adjust hardware for smooth operation. 3.6 CLEANING A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Final cleaning. B. Remove protective material from factory finished surfaces. C. Remove labels and visible markings. D. Wash surfaces by method recommended and acceptable to manufacturer; rinse and wipe surfaces clean. 3.7 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Protecting installed construction. B. Do not permit continuing construction activities near unprotected finish surfaces. END OF SECTION ., Proj. No. 07014 Aluminum Sliding Glass Doors 08262 - 4 SECTION 08310 -ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes fire resistive rated and non-rated access doors and panels with frames. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 09900 - Paints: Field paint finish. 1.2 REFERENCES A. NFPA 80 (National Fire Protection Association) - Fire Doors and Fire Windows. B. UL (Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.) - Building Materials Directory. C. WH (Warnock Hersey) - Directory of Listed Products. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION: A. Wall and ceiling access doors are required: 1. Where specifically scheduled or noted on Drawings. 2. Where service access is required by Code. 3. Where service access is required for serviceable, operable, adjustable or resettable mechanical, plumbing and electrical items. B. Provide fire rated access doors in fire rated walls and partitions. C. Provide insulated doors at attic access locations, and other locations as noted. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate exact position of access door units. C. Product Data: Submit literature indicating sizes, types, finishes, hardware, scheduled locations, fire resistance listings, and details of adjoining Work. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit installation requirements and rough-in dimensions. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Closeout procedures. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of access units. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire Resistance Ratings: Where indicated as fire rated provide assemblies from manufacturers listed in UL Directory or Warnock Hersey Directory. 1.7 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified with minimum three years experience. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate Work under provisions of Section 01300- Project Coordination. B. Coordinate Work with work requiring controls, valves, traps, dampers, cleanouts, and similar items requiring operation being located behind finished surfaces. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS A. Products specified are manufactured by J.L. Industries or Milcor and are listed as a standard of quality. Proj. No. 07014 Access Doors and Panels 08310 - 1 IN go B. Products of the following manufacturers are acceptable subject to meeting specification requirements: 1. Babcock-Davis Hatchways, Inc. 2. Karp Associates, Inc. 3. Larsen's Manufacturing Co. 4. Nystrom Products Co. 5. O'Keeffe's Inc. 6. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements. 2.2 TRIMLESS ACCESS DOOR: A. Qualities: Metal flush panel access door for concealed flange (trimless) installation in gypsum board walls and ceilings. 1. Metal: Sheet steel, factory prime coated; stainless steel at pool and locker • rooms. a. Frame: 16 ga. galv. steel with galvanized steel drywall bead. b. Panel: 14 ga, steel. 2. Size: 12 x 12 in. minimum, or larger where scheduled or required for service, maintenance or repair of equipment. 3. Hardware: a. Lock: Manufacturer's standard slotted cam lock. b. Hinge: Concealed type with removable pin and spring type limit, 175 degree opening. B. Acceptable Steel Products: we 1. Milcor DW Access Door by Milcor Ltd. Partnership. 2. Model WB by J.L. Industries. 3. Model TM by J.L. Industries for large openings. .W 2.3 FIRE RATED ACCESS DOORS: A. Qualities: Flush insulated panel fire rated access door, self closing and automatic latching, installation in gypsum board walls and ceilings. 1. Metal: Sheet steel, prime coated. a. Frame: 16 ga., one inch exposed flange, 20 ga. stainless steel with stainless steel drywall bead. b. Panel: 20 ga.,welded pan type, 16 ga. stainless steel, flush design. ,. 2. Insulation: Nominal 2 inch mineral wool insulation sandwiched between inner and outer door panels. 3. Size: 12 x 12 in. minimum, or larger where scheduled or required for service, maintenance or repair of equipment. 4. Hardware: a. Latch: Automatic. b. Hinge: Continuous type pin. C. Lock: Manufacturer's standard slotted cam lock. 5. Label: UL 1-1/2 hour"B" label. B. Acceptable Steel Products: 1. Milcor Fire Rated Door by Milcor Ltd. Partnership. 2. Model FD by J.L. Industries. 2.4 ACCESS DOORS - INSULATED: A. Qualities: Metal flush panel access doors with flanged frames. 1. Metal: Sheet steel, galvanized, factory prime coated. a. Frame: 14 ga., one inch exposed flange around perimeter for masonry, gypsum board installations. Provide drip cap on exterior frame. b. Panel: 14 flush with gasketing on exterior locations. 2. Size: 22 x 30 in. minimum, or larger where scheduled or required for service, maintenance or repair of equipment. 3. Hardware: a. Lock: Manufacturer's mortise lock, key to Best Lock system. Proj. No. 07014 Access Doors and Panels 08310 - 2 b. Hinge: Concealed type with removable pin and spring type limit, 175 degree opening. B. Acceptable products: 1. XT model by Nystrom Building Products. 2.5 RELATED MATERIALS: A. Anchors: Factory attached masonry anchors for masonry locations, 1/2 in. x 4 in. galv. steel stud headed anchors for concrete locations, 2 on each side. For plaster applications, furnish with galvanized expanded metal lath and exposed casing bead, welded to perimeter of frame. 2.6 FINISHES A. Shop Finishing: 1. Galvanized, hot dipped or wiped coat finish. Prime coat units with baked on primer. 2. Finish: Field finish in accordance with the requirements of Section 09900. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Section 01300 -Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Verify rough openings for access doors and panels are correctly sized and located. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install access doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, plumb, level, securely *" anchored or fastened and in proper alignment with finish surfaces. B. Secure frames rigidly in place, plumb and level in opening, with plane of door and panel face aligned with adjacent finished surfaces. 1. Set concealed frame type units flush with adjacent finished surfaces. C. Position unit to provide convenient access to concealed work requiring access. D. Install fire rated units in accordance with NFPA 80 and requirements for fire listing. END OF SECTION Proj. No. 07014 Access Doors and Panels 08310 - 3 No NO .w A s SECTION 08410 - METAL-FRAMED STOREFRONTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes aluminum-framed storefronts and fixed windows including aluminum and glass doors, frames, hardware, and glass. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Steel fabricated attachment devices. 2. Section 07900 -Joint Sealers: System perimeter sealant and back-up materials. 3. Section 08800 - Glass and Glazing. 1.2 REFERENCES A. AA (Aluminum Association) - Designation System for Aluminum Finishes. B. AAMA (American Architectural Manufacturers Association) - Metal Curtain Wall, Window, Store Front and Entrance- Guide Specifications Manual. C. AAMA (American Architectural Manufacturers Association) - Curtain Wall Manual #10 - Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum From Shop to Site. D. AAMA 1503.1 (American Architectural Manufacturers Association) -Test Method for Thermal Transmittance and Condensation Resistance of Windows, Doors, and Glazed Wall Sections. E. AAMA SFM-1 (American Architectural Manufacturers Association) - Aluminum Storefront and Entrance Manual. F. ASCE (American Society of Civil Engineers) 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures. G. ASTM A36 - Structural Steel. H. ASTM A123 - Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. I. ASTM A653 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheets, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc- Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. J. ASTM B209/M -Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate. K. ASTM B221/M -Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bar, Rod, Wire, Shape, and Tube. L. ASTM E283 - Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors. M. ASTM E330 - Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. N. ASTM E331 -Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. O. ASTM E547 - Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Cyclic Static Air Pressure Differential. P. ASTM E1105 -Test Method for Field Determination of Water Penetration of Installed Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform or Cyclic Static Air Pressure Difference. Q. NFRC (National Fenestration Rating Council) 100 - Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product Thermal Properties (Currently Limited to U-Value). R. SSPC (Steel Structures Painting Council) - Paint 25 Red Iron Oxide, Zinc Oxide, Raw Linseed Oil and Alkyd Primer (Without Lead and Chromate Pigments). S. South Florida Building Codes. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Aluminum-framed storefront system includes tubular aluminum sections with supplementary internal support framing, aluminum and glass entrances, shop fabricated, factory finished, glass and glazing, related flashings, anchorage and attachment devices. B. System Assembly: Site assembled. Proj. No. 07014 Metal-framed Storefronts 08410 - 1 WR .w 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. System Design: Design and size components to withstand dead and live loads caused by positive and negative wind pressure acting normal to plane of wall, including building corners. 1. As calculated in accordance with South Florida Building Code Protocols, TAS 201, 202 and 203. B. Wind Loads: Complete storefront system shall withstand wind pressure loads normal to wall plane indicated: 1. Positive pressure: Refer to structural drawings. 2. Negative pressure: Refer to structural drawings. C. Deflection: In accordance with ASTM E330, limit mullion deflection to 1/175 for spans under 13'-6"and 1/240 plus 1/4 inch for spans over 13'-6"; with full recovery of glazing materials. " D. Impact Resistance: Large missile tested in accordance with ASTM E-1886 requirements. E. System Assembly: Accommodate without damage to components or deterioration of seals, movement within system, movement between system and peripheral construction, dynamic loading and release of loads, deflection of structural support framing. F. Air Infiltration: Limit air leakage through assembly to 0.02 cfm/min/sq ft of wall area, measured at reference differential pressure across assembly of 12 psf as measured in accordance with ASTM E-283. G. Vapor Seal: Maintain continuous vapor retarder throughout assembly, primarily in line with pane of glass and heel bead of glazing compound. H. Condensation Resistance Factor: CRF of not less than 70 when measured in accordance with AAMA 1503.1. I. Thermal Transmittance of Assembly (Excluding Entrances): Maximum U Value of 0.42 Btu/sq ft per hour per deg F when measured in accordance with NFRC100-2001. J. Expansion/Contraction: Provide for expansion and contraction within system ..! components caused by cycling temperature range of 180 degrees F over 12 hour period without causing detrimental effect to system components and anchorage. K. System Internal Drainage: Drain water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channels, or migrating moisture occurring within system, to exterior by weep drainage network. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate system dimensions, framed opening requirements and tolerances, affected related Work and expansion and contraction joint location and details. C. Product Data: Submit component dimensions, describe components within assembly, anchorage and fasteners, glass and infill, and internal drainage details. D. Samples: Submit two samples 12 x 12 inches in size illustrating finished aluminum surface, glass units, glazing materials. E. Design Data: Indicate framing member structural and physical characteristics, and dimensional limitations. F. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements. G. Copy of Florida Building Code Product Approval Letter. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with AAMA- Metal Curtain Wall, Window, Store Front and Entrance - Guide Specifications Manual. 1.7 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer and Installer: Company specializing in manufacturing aluminum glazing systems with minimum three years experience. B. Design structural support framing components under direct supervision of Professional Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed at Project location. C. Products must have Florida Building Code Product Approval. Proj. No. 07014 Metal-framed Storefronts 08410 -2 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements. B. Protect finished aluminum surfaces with wrapping. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings which bond when exposed to sunlight or weather. 1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01600 - Product Requirements. B. Do not install sealants nor glazing materials when ambient temperature is less than 40 • degrees F during and 48 hours after installation. 1.10 COORDINATION A. Section 01300 -Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Coordinate the Work with installation of vapor retarder, components or materials. 1.11 WARRANTY A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds. B. Furnish ten year manufacturer warranty for insulated glazed units. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS „ A. Manufacturers: 1. YKK AP America. 2. Substitutions: Section 01600- Product Requirements B. Product Description: 1. Frames: Exterior, 2-1/2 x 5 inch profile, thermally broken; hurricane impact resistant with 1-5/16 in. insulated laminated glass; center glazed stops; drainage holes; internal weep drainage system. Source: YKK-AP YHS 50 TU hurricane impact resistant system. 2.2 COMPONENTS A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221; 6063 alloy, T5 temper typical, 6061 alloy, T6 temper for extruded structural members. B. Sheet Aluminum: ASTM 8209, 5005 alloy, H15 or H34 temper. C. Sheet Steel: ASTM A653; galvanized to minimum G90 (Z275). D. Steel Sections: ASTM A36/A36M; shaped to suit mullion sections, galvanized to G60. E. Glass: Refer to Section 08800 for glass types. F. Glazing Materials: As specified in Section 08800 and approved by system manufacturer for impact testing. G. Flashings: Minimum 0.032 inch thick aluminum. H. Vapor Retarder: Sheet EDPM. I. Sealant and Backing Materials: 1. Sealant Used Within System (Not Used for Glazing): Manufacturer's standard materials to achieve weather, moisture, and air infiltration requirements. 2. Perimeter Sealant: Specified in Section 07900. J. Fasteners: Stainless steel. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Fabricate components with minimum clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of assembly, yet enabling installation and dynamic movement of perimeter seal. B. Accurately fit and secure joints and corners. Make joints flush, hairline, and weatherproof. C. Prepare components to receive anchor devices. Fabricate anchors. D. Arrange fasteners and attachments to conceal from view. E. Reinforce interior horizontal head rail to receive blind track brackets and attachments. F. Prepare components with internal reinforcement for door hardware. Proj. No. 07014 Metal-framed Storefronts 08410 - 3 go G. Reinforce framing members for imposed loads. on 2.4 SHOP FINISHING A. Painted Aluminum Surfaces: AA-M12C12R1x non-specular as fabricated mechanical finish, chemically cleaned, and prepared for applied coating; with organic coating. 1. High Performance Organic Coating: Fluoropolymer coating system complying with AAMA 605.2 minimum two-coat, with minimum 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin. 2. Color: Custom color as selected by Architect. . , B. Concealed Steel Items: Galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123 to thickness Grade 85, 2.0 oz/sq ft. C. Apply bituminous paint to concealed aluminum and steel surfaces in contact with cementitious or dissimilar metals. D. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Steel Surfaces: SSPC Paint 20 zinc rich. im PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Section 01300 -Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. * B. Verify dimensions, tolerances, and method of attachment with other Work. C. Verify wall openings and adjoining air and vapor seal materials are ready to receive Work of this Section. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install wall system in accordance with AAMA- Metal Curtain Wall, Window, Store Front and Entrance - Guide Specifications Manual and manufacturers printed instructions to meet impact requirements. B. Attach to structure to permit sufficient adjustment to accommodate construction tolerances and other irregularities. C. Provide alignment attachments and shims to permanently fasten system to building structure. D. Align assembly plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain assembly dimensional tolerances. E. Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation. F. Install sill flashings. Turn up ends and edges; seal to adjacent Work to form water tight dam. G. Coordinate attachment and seal of perimeter vapor barrier materials. H. Pack fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of thermal barrier. I. Install integral flashings and integral joint sealers. J. Coordinate installation of glass with Section 08800; separate glass from metal surfaces. K. Coordinate installation of perimeter sealants with Section 07900. 3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Section 01400- Quality Requirements: Tolerances. B. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 0.06 inches every 3 ft non-cumulative or 1/16 inches per 10 ft, whichever is less. C. Maximum Misalignment of Two Adjoining Members Abutting in Plane: 1/32 inch. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Testing, adjusting and balancing. B. Adjust operating hardware for smooth operation. 3.5 CLEANING + A. Section 01700- Execution Requirements: Final cleaning. B. Remove protective material from pre-finished aluminum surfaces. Proj. No. 07014 Metal-framed Storefronts 08410 - 4 C. Wash down surfaces with solution of mild detergent in warm water, applied with soft, clean wiping cloths. Take care to remove dirt from corners. Wipe surfaces clean. D. Remove excess sealant by method acceptable to sealant manufacturer. 3.6 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Protecting installed construction. B. Protect finished Work from damage. END OF SECTION Proj. No. 07014 Metal-framed Storefronts 08410 - 5 Am SECTION 08710 - DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES: A. Finish hardware for doors. B. Hardware schedule. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS: A. Doors - Section 08217. B. Toilet accessories - Section 10800. 1.3 REFERENCES: A. NBHA - Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware- 1975. B. NBHA- Basic Builders Hardware -October 1969. C. BHMA Product Standards, latest editions. 1.4 SUBMITTALS: A. Schedules: Submit detailed finish hardware schedule in accordance with Section 01330. Schedule shall be complete, including type, manufacturer's name and number, and finish of each item required. Include complete schedule of keying system. B. Templates: Furnish templates required for fabrication of hollow metal frames, wood doors, pressed wood fiber doors, or other items related to hardware. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Local and State Building Codes. 2. National Fire Protection Association: "Standard for Fire Doors and Windows," NFPA 80, latest edition. 3. Americans with Disabilities Act. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: A. Package and deliver hardware items separately and mark each to correspond with heading numbers on hardware schedule. B. Include necessary instructions, templates, drawings and fasteners for proper installation. Include extra fasteners. 1.7 COORDINATION: A. Review Shop Drawings of related work and verify that scheduled finish hardware is suitable for each related item of work. B. Deliver templates and finish hardware to pressed fiber wood door supplier for fitting. C. Coordinate installation of electric door holders, locks and hinges with installation of electrical connections. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS: A. Lock Manufacturer: 1. Products listed are items manufactured by Schlage Lock Co. and are listed as a standard of quality. 2. Equivalent products of following manufacturers are acceptable: a. Corbin-Russwin Hardware. b. Sargent & Co. C. Yale Locks. B. Manufacturers of Other Items: 1. Butts: Hager Hinge Co., McKinney Mfg. Co., or Stanley Hardware. Proj. No. 07014 Door Hardware 08710 - 1 2. Kickplates, Push Plates: Hager Companies, Trego Industries or Quality Hardware Mfg. Co., Inc. 3. Stops: Trimco or Quality Hardware Mfg. Co., Inc. 2.2 MATERIALS: A. Screws and Fasteners: 1. Provide screws and fasteners required for proper installation. 2. Metal and finish of fasteners same as item fastened. B. Butts: 1. Full mortise template hinges, 5-knuckle type, plain-bearing except at doors with closers or doors over 40 in. width furnish ball-bearing type. 2. Non-removable pin and heavy weight at exterior doors. 3. Furnish quantity of hinges per door as follows: a. Doors up to 90 in. height- 3 butts. b. Doors over 90 in. and less than 120 in. -4 butts. 4. Furnish hinge sizes as follows for 1-3/4 in. doors: a. Up to 3-0"wide -4-1/2 x 4-1/2. b. Over 3'-0"to 3'-4" wide -5 x 4-1/2. C. Over 3-4"wide- heavy 5 x 4-1/2. d. Width of hinges adjusted as required to clear adjacent trim. .. C. Locksets and Latchsets: Schlage"AL"Series bored locksets, Flair lever design, function as listed on schedule (function identification numbers of BHMA-PS). Backsets and strike types as required by conditions. Furnish curved lip type strikes. D. Interior Stops: Furnish wall-type dome stop where doors strike masonry walls; furnish a floor-type dome stop at other locations. Where floor or wall stops cannot be used, furnish overhead door holder. E. Silencers: Quality No. 1337-A. Furnish 3 per single door, 2 per pairs of doors. ,. F. Wire Pull: Model BLD4670, 5 in. long, by Baldwin Hardware. G. Bi-fold Door Hardware: 1700 Series by Johnson Hardware. Include hangers, guides, track and pulls. 2.3 LABEL REQUIREMENTS: A. Furnish Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. approved hardware items, meeting requirements of NFPA No. 80, at doors scheduled to be label doors. 2.4 FINISHES: A. Locksets and Related Trim: 1. Interior: US10. 2. Exterior: US 32D. B. Plates and Misc.: Match locksets. 2.5 KEYING: A. Provide keying in accordance with Owner's requirements and approved keying schedule. Furnish 2 change keys for each lock. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION: A. Examine door frames and related items for conditions that would prevent proper application of finish hardware. B, Do not proceed until defects are corrected. * 3.2 INSTALLATION: A. Securely install finish hardware items in accordance with approved schedule and templates furnished with hardware. B. Install mortised items flush with adjacent surfaces. w Proj. No. 07014 Door Hardware 08710 - 2 C. Install locksets, closers and trim after finish painting. D. Locate items in accordance with NBHA "Recommended Locations for Builder's Hardware", unless otherwise noted. E. Test and adjust hardware for quiet, smooth operation, free of sticking, binding or rattling. F. At final completion, properly tag and identify keys and deliver to Owner. 3.3 HARDWARE SCHEDULE: A. Furnish each door leaf with hardware items scheduled in hardware set. Furnish size, type and quality as specified in Article 2.2. Furnish specific function or component as scheduled below, or as required to function with specific door details. Set No. 1 [Privacy] Butts Lockset - F76 function Stop Set No. 2 [Passage] Butts Latchset - F75 function Stop Set No. 3 Bi-Fold Door Hardware End of Section Proj. No. 07014 Door Hardware 08710 - 3 vw up .R SECTION 08800 - GLASS AND GLAZING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES: A. Glass and glazing for: 1. Hollow metal glazing frames. 2. Door lights. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS: A. Hollow metal frames and doors- Section 08110. B. Wood doors - Section 08212. C. Glazing of aluminum framing and entrance doors - Section 08410. 1.3 REFERENCES: A. ANSI Z97.1a-1977 - Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings. B. ASTM C1036 - Flat Glass. C. ASTM C1048 - Heat-Treated Flat Glass - Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass. D. Glazing Manual, 1997 Edition. E. FS TT-S-00230C(2) - Sealing Compound, Elastomeric Type, Single Component (for caulking, sealing and glazing in buildings and other structures). 1.4 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature of specified products in accordance with Section 01330. B. Samples: Submit samples, 10 in. square of each type of glass. C. Certification: Submit manufacturer's certification confirming that materials meet specification requirements. D. Copy of Florida Building Code Product Approval Letter. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Installer Qualifications: Experienced in glazing specified materials. B. Regulatory Requirements: Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials,16 CFR 1201, as established by Consumer Product Safety Commission. C. Windows must have Florida Building Code Product Approval, 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: A. Deliver glass with manufacturer's labels intact. Do not remove labels until glass has been installed. B. Keep glass free from contamination by materials capable of staining glass. C. Deliver compounds in manufacturer's unopened, labeled containers. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds. B. Furnish ten year warranty to include coverage for sealed glass units from seal failure, interpane dusting or misting, and replacement of same. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GLAZING MATERIALS: A. Insulating Glass - Laminated Impact Rated Glass (LIG): 1. Qualities: 1- 5/16 inch thick clear laminated insulating glass units composed of an outer light of 1/4 in.clear tempered low-E float glass and an inner light of 2 layers of 1/4 in. clear tempered float glass, PVB interlayer .090 inch thick, and '/a in. air space. 2. Standards: a. Glass: ASTM C1048. Proj. No. 07014 Glass and Glazing 08800-1 b. Overall Product: Class CBA, ASTM E6 P3. C. Visible Light Transmittance: 0.53 percent. d. Shading Coefficient: 0.55. e. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.5. 2.2 ACCESSORIES: A. Channel Glazing Compound: M-251 by Pecora. B. Setting Blocks: Neoprene, 70-90 shore "A" durometer hardness. C. Spacers: Neoprene, 40-50 shore "A" durometer hardness. D. Glazing Sealant: Curing-type gunnable non-sag polysulfide sealant, FS TT-S-00227,Type II, Class A or B, color as selected. E. Mirror-Setting Mastic: Mirro-Mastic by Palmer Products Corp. •+w PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION: A. Verify that glazing channels and glass are free of imperfections or damage that would prevent proper installation of glass. B. Carefully measure glass openings and provide minimum required tolerances and clearances. C. Clean metal, wood and glass surfaces free of foreign matter and coatings. D. Perform glazing only when temperature is above 40°F. 3.2 GLAZING: A. Install in accordance with applicable procedures recommended in FGMA Glazing Manual, and in accordance with requirements of 16 CFR 1201. B. Set and block glass to provide equal margins at perimeter, with glass not in contact with ••A frames. C. Wet glaze hollow metal frames, hollow metal door lights and wood door lights with channel glazing compound or sealant. 1. Hold glass in place with spacers and back-bed to insure full beds. 2. Apply sealant or compound to face with sufficient force to eliminate voids. 3. Trim excess to form watershed away from glass. D. Glaze windows(not shop glazed)with glazing tape,snap-in glazing beads, neoprene wedge .. and cap bead of sealant in accordance with window manufacturer's instructions. Use glazing materials specified in Section 08410. 3.3 MIRROR INSTALLATION: A. Install framed mirrors in accordance with manufacturer's directions. B. Install non-framed mirrors using mirror-setting mastic applied in spots at 6 in. o.c.to provide coverage over 60% of mirror back area. Provide stainless steel clips at top and bottom of mirrors. 3.4 CLEANING: A. Remove excess glazing compound from installed glass. B. Remove labels from glass. C. Thoroughly wash and polish both faces of glass. Abrasive cleaners prohibited. D. Remove debris from site. 3.5 PROTECTION: A. Attach crossed streamers away from glass face. B. Replace broken, scratched, chipped or otherwise-damaged glass. End of Section Proj. No. 07014 Glass and Glazing 08800-2 , SECTION 09000 COLOR LEGEND A ITEM&MANUFACTURER SYMBOL PRODUCT NUMBER&NAME REMARKS 06410/12300-CUSTOM MILLWORK/MANUFACTURED CASEWORK PLASTIC LAMINATE PL WILSONART PL-1 Williamsburg Cherry 7936-78 Cabinet NOT USED PL-2 NEVAMAR AP PL-3 Papier Au Lait Textured P82002T Counterto MIN 09300-CERAMIC TILE CT NOT USED CT-1-16 CERAMICHE MARCA CORONA CT-17 Ekos Stone Pavimenti Lito res P503 Es.Silice 30 12x12 Garden State Tile,Jenny Wawrz niak 717-917-7110 CERAMICHE MARCA CORONA CT-18 Ekos Stone Pavimenti Lito res P600,Es.Silice 15 6x6 Garden State Tile,Jenny Wawrz niak 717-917-7110 CERAMICHE MARCA CORONA CT-19 Ekos Stone Pavimenti Lito res P601 Es.Ouarzo 15,6x6 Garden State Tile,Jenny Wawrz niak 717-917-7110 CERAMICHE MARCA CORONA CTB-20 Ekos Stone Battisco a,P726 Battisc.Es.Silice,3x12 Garden State Tile,Jenny Wawrz niak 717-917.7110 09510-ACOUSTICAL CEILING BOARD ACB NOT USED ACB-1-2 ARMSTRONG COMMERCIAL ACB-3 Cerama uard Fine Fissured Perforated #607,24"x 24"x 5/8" 09650-RUBBER BASE R8 NOT USED RB-1 ROPPE RB-2 Cove P158 Sand 09900-PAINT P SHERWIN WILLIAMS P-1 Antique White SW6119 SHERWIN WILLIAMS P-2 Believable Buff SW6120 10501-METAL LOCKERS LF NOT USED LF-1 PENCO LF-2 Grey,028 s w s OR w� w� w� w e SECTION 09260- GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes metal stud wall framing; metal channel ceiling framing; gypsum board and joint treatment; cementitious backer board; and acoustic insulation. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 05400- Cold Formed Metal Framing. 2. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking. 3. Section 07212 - Board Insulation: Thermal insulation. 4. Section 07213 - Batt Insulation: Thermal insulation. 5. Section 08310 -Access Doors and Panels: Metal access panels. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASTM C36 -Gypsum Wallboard. B. ASTM C442- Gypsum Backing Board and Coreboard. C. ASTM C475-Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board. D. ASTM C645- Non-Load Bearing (Axial) Steel Studs, Runners (Track), and Rigid Furring Channels for Screw Application of Gypsum Board. E. ASTM C754- Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum Board. F. ASTM C840- Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board. G. ASTM C1002 - Steel Drill Screws for Application of Gypsum Board or Metal Plaster Bases. H. ASTM E90 -Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne-Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions. I. ASTM E119 -Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. J. GA-214 (Gypsum Association) - Recommended Specification: Levels of Gypsum Board Finish. K. GA-216 (Gypsum Association) - Recommended Specifications for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board. L. GA-600 (Gypsum Association) - Fire Resistance Design Manual. M. UL (Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.) - Fire Resistance Directory, N. WH (Warnock Hersey) -Certification Listings. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Installation Design Criteria: 1. Perform gypsum board systems work in accordance with recommendations of ASTM C754 and GA-216 except as otherwise specified in this Section. 2. Install partition systems to withstand a 5 psf load applied perpendicular to partition, with a maximum deflection not exceeding U240 , of span of partition. 3. Provide for vertical movement of building structure to prevent transfer of compressive loads to partition systems. B. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Fire-rated Assemblies: Listed and rated by Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. or generic fire resistance ratings listed in GA-600. 2. Fire-Hazard Classification: Listed and labeled by Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. C. Fire Endurance Ratings: Per local building code. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01330- Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate special details associated with fireproofing, and acoustic seals. C. Product Data: Submit data on metal framing, gypsum board, joint tape, finish, and acoustic accessories. Proj. No. 07014 Gypsum Board Assemblies 09260- 1 .0 on 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with ASTM C840, ASTM C1280, GA-214, GA-216 and GA- ,m 600. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section am with minimum three years documented experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years documented experience. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES A. Manufacturers: 1. Celotex Building Products 2. G-P Gypsum Corp. 3. National Gypsum Co. 4. United States Gypsum Co. 5. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements. 2.2 COMPONENTS A. Framing Materials: 1. Studs and Tracks: ASTM C645; galvanized sheet steel, 25 gage thick, C shape. Provide 20 ga. studs where required to meet design criteria. 2. Furring, Framing, and Accessories: ASTM C645. 3. Fasteners: Screws -ASTM C1002. 4. Anchorage to Substrate: Tie wire, nails, screws, and other metal supports, of type and size to suit application; to rigidly secure materials in place. B. Gypsum Board Materials: 1. Moisture Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C630; 5/8 inch thick, rated material, maximum available length in place; ends square cut, tapered edges. Source: DensArmor by Georgia-Pacific. 2. Exterior Gypsum Sheathing: ASTM U465, moisture resistant type; 112 inch thick board, maximum available size in place; ends square cut, square edges; surface coated glass mat on face, back, and long edges. Source: DensGlass Gold, by G- P Gypsum. 3. Cementitious Backing Board: High density, glass fiber reinforced, 1/2 inch thick; 2 inch wide, coated glass fiber tape for joints and corners; Durock manufactured by U.S. Gypsum. 2.3 RELATED MATERIALS A. Acoustic Insulation: ASTM C665; preformed glass fiber,friction fit type, unfaced, 3 inches thick. B. Acoustic Sealant: Non-hardening, non-skinning, for use in conjunction with gypsum board. C. Corner Beads: Metal; Dur-A-Bond No. 101, galvanized; by U.S. Gypsum. D. Edge Trim (Casing Bead): GA-216; No. 200-A or 200-B metal trim, galvanized; by U.S. Gypsum. E. Joint Materials: ASTM C475; reinforcing tape,joint compound, adhesive, and water. Fiberglass Tape for Cementboard: 2 in,wide coated fiberglass mesh tape. F. Molding: Aluminum "L"Trim molding model DRML-50 by Fry Reglet Corp.; 1/2 in. wide. G. Fasteners: ASTM C1002, Type S12 and GA-216. Durock Type S or Rock-on Type S-12 screws for cementitious backing board. H. Hanger Wire: 8 ga. galvanized steel wire. Proj. No. 07014 Gypsum Board Assemblies 09260 - 2 , PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Section 01300-Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Verify site conditions are ready to receive work and opening dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings. C. Building should be enclosed and weather tight before the work of this section begins unless prior approval is received by the Owner. 3.2 METAL FRAMING INSTALLATION A. Metal Stud Installation: 1. Install studs in accordance with ASTM C754, GA-216 and GA-600. 2. Metal Stud Spacing: 16 inches on center, unless noted otherwise. 3. Refer to Drawings for indication of partitions extending stud framing through ceiling to structure above. Maintain clearance under structural building members to avoid deflection transfer to studs. Provide extended leg ceiling runners. 4. Door Opening Framing: Install double studs at door frame jambs. Install stud tracks on each side of opening, at frame head height, and between studs and adjacent studs. 5. Blocking: Bolt or screw steel channels to studs. Install blocking for support of plumbing fixtures, toilet partitions, wall cabinets, toilet accessories, and hardware. B. Wall Furring Installation: 1. Erect wall furring for direct attachment to concrete masonry and concrete walls. 2. Erect furring channels vertically; space maximum 16 inches oc, not more than 4 inches from floor and ceiling lines. Secure in place on alternate channel flanges at maximum 24 inches on center. 3. Install thermal insulation in conjunction with Section 07212 - Board Insulation between Z-furring channels directly attached to concrete masonry and concrete walls. 4. Erect metal stud framing tight to concrete and concrete masonry walls, attached by adjustable furring brackets. C. Furring For Fire Ratings: Install furring as required for fire resistance ratings indicated and to GA-600 requirements. D. Ceiling Framing installation: 1. Install in accordance with GA-216. 2. Coordinate location of hangers with other work. 3. Install ceiling framing independent of walls,columns, and above ceiling work. 4. Reinforce openings in ceiling suspension system which interrupt main carrying channels or furring channels, with lateral channel bracing. Extend bracing minimum 24 inches past each end of openings. 5. Laterally brace entire suspension system. 6. Install horizontal shaft construction in accordance with referenced Fire Resistant assembly, and manufacturer's Council of American Building Officials evaluation report for horizontal shaft systems. 3.3 GYPSUM BOARD INSTALLATION A. Gypsum Board Installation: 1. Install gypsum board in accordance with GA-216 and GA-600. 2. Erect single layer gypsum board vertical, with ends and edges occurring over firm bearing. 3. Erect single layer fire rated gypsum board vertically, with edges and ends occurring over firm bearing. 4. Erect exterior gypsum sheathing in accordance with manufacturers instructions and ASTM C1280, horizontally, with edges butted and ends occurring over firm bearing. 5. Use screws when fastening gypsum board to metal furring or framing. Proj. No. 07014 Gypsum Board Assemblies 09260 - 3 6. Double Layer Applications: Secure second layer to first with fasteners. 7. Place second layer perpendicular to first layer. Offset joints of second layer from ,. joints of first layer. 8. Treat cut edges and holes in moisture resistant gypsum board with sealant. 9. Install cementious backing board over metal studs. 10. Control Joints: Install over face layer gypsum board with 9/16 in. staples spaced 6 in. o.c. in each flange. Install control joints in following locations. a. At detailed or scheduled locations. b. Changes in back-up material or substrate. C. Vertically at each steel door frame jamb. d. In partitions at 30'-0" o.c. maximum without break. e. Horizontally at each floor in stairwell partitions. f. In ceilings at 30'-0" o.c. maximum each way. 11. Place corner beads at external corners. Use longest practical length. Place edge trim where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials. B. Joint Treatment: 1. Treat joints, interior angles,fastener depressions and finishing trim on face-layer gypsum board, including gypsum board in ceiling plenums. 2. Prefill, tape, fill and finish in accordance with GA-216 and GA-214. 3. Schedule of Treatment and Finish Levels: .n a. Level 1: Ceiling plenums. b. Level 2: W/R gypsum board at tile finishes. C. Level 3: Surfaces scheduled to receive eggshell or semi-gloss paint, with an high solids latex primer. d. Level 4: Surfaces scheduled to receive low-gloss paint or wall covering. e. Level 5: Surfaces scheduled to receive eggshell or semi-gloss paint. f. Special Finish: Install MR gyp board Type 2 in accordance with ■m manufacturer's instructions. Treat joints with 6 in. mesh tape and synthetic material in Section 07240. 4. Sand finish coat and leave surfaces smooth, uniform, and free of fins, depressions, cracks and other imperfections. 5. Treat joints and corners of cementitious backing board with 2 in. wide fiberglass tape embedded in mortar used to set ceramic tile. Fill gaps with mortar prior to tapping. 6. Taping, filling, and sanding is not required at surfaces behind ceramic tile. 7. Fill and finish joints and corners of cementitious backing board. 3.4 RELATED MATERIALS A. Acoustic Accessories Installation: 1. Install resilient channels at maximum 24 inches on center. 2. Place acoustic insulation in partitions tight within spaces, around cut openings, .. behind and around electrical and mechanical items within or behind partitions, and tight to items passing through partitions. 3. Install acoustic sealant at gypsum board perimeter at: a. Metal Framing: One beads. b. Base Layer. C. Seal penetrations of partitions by conduit, pipe, duct work, rough-in boxes. 4. Install perimeter isolation board at edge of drywall ceilings at mechanical room. 3.5 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements: Tolerances. B. Maximum Variation of Finished Gypsum Board Surface from Flat Surface: 1/8 inch in 10 feet. A END OF SECTION Proj. No. 07014 Gypsum Board Assemblies 09260 - 4 SECTION 09300 - TILE PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes porcelain tile for floor applications using thinset application method. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03350 - Concrete Finishing: Troweling of floor slab for tile application. 2. Section 07900 -Joint Sealers. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ANSI A108 Series/A118 Series/A136.1 -American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile. B. ANSI A108.5 - Installation of Ceramic Tile with Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar or Latex- Portland Cement Mortar. C. ANSI A108.10 - Installation of Grout in Tilework. D. ANSI A118.1 - Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar. E. ANSI A118.4- Latex-Portland Cement Mortar. F. ANSI A118.6 - Ceramic Tile Grouts. G. ANSI A137.1 - Ceramic Tile. H. TCA (Tile Council of America) - Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate the layout, patterns, color arrangement, perimeter conditions, junctions with dissimilar materials, control and expansion joints, and setting details. C. Product Data: Submit instructions for using grouts. D. Samples: Submit tile and grout samples, illustrating pattern, color variations, and grout color. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Closeout procedures. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit recommended cleaning methods, cleaning materials, stain removal methods, and polishes and waxes. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with TCA Handbook and ANSI A108 Series/A118 Series. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years experience. 1.7 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING A. Section 01300- Administrative Requirements: Preinstallation meeting. B. Convene minimum one week before starting Work of this section. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Section 01600- Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements. B. Protect grouts from freezing or overheating. 1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01600- Product Requirements. B. Do not install adhesives and grouts in unventilated environment. Proj. No. 07014 Tile 09300- 1 C. Maintain ambient and substrate temperature of 50 degrees F during installation of mortar materials. 1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Section 01700- Execution Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products. B. Supply in the amount of 2%of total project, tile of each size, color, and surface finish. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 TILE A. Tile CT-1 thru CT-16): Not used. B. Glazed Porcelain Tile (CT-17 thru CT-19, and CTB-20): Conforming to the following: 1. Size: a. CT- 17: 12 x 12 inches. b. CT- 18: 6 x 6 inches. C. CT- 19: 6 x 6 inches. d. CTB-20: 3"x 12" inches. 2. Surface Finish: Glazed porcelain. 3. Edge: Square. 4. Color: Refer to Section 09000 Finish Legend. 5. Source: Ekos Stone by Ceramiche Marca Corona. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Mortar Materials: 1. Mortar Bed Materials: Portland cement, sand, latex additive, and water. 2. Mortar Bond Coat Materials: Latex-Portland Cement type: ANSI A118.4. B. Grout: 1. Ceramic Tile: Latex-Portland cement type as specified in ANSI A118.6. 2. Color: As selected by Architect. ., C. Crack Isolation Membrane: Schluter Ditra, fleece lined polyethylene membrane. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Verify surfaces are ready to receive work. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Protect surrounding work from damage. B. Vacuum clean surfaces. C. Seal substrate surface cracks with filler. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install tile, and grout in accordance with applicable requirements of ANSI A108.1 through Al 08.10, and TCA Handbook recommendations. B. Lay the to pattern indicated. Do not interrupt tile pattern through openings. C. Cut and fit tile to penetrations through tile, leaving sealant joint space. Form corners and bases neatly. Align floor, base and wall joints. D. Place tile with 3/8 in.joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size. Make joints watertight, without voids, cracks, excess mortar, or excess grout. E. Form internal and external angles square. F. Sound tile after setting. Replace hollow sounding units. G. Keep expansion joints free of adhesive or grout. Apply sealant to joints. H. Allow tile to set for a minimum of 48 hours prior to grouting. I. Grout tile joints. Use standard grout unless otherwise indicated. Proj. No. 07014 Tile 09300 -2 1 J. Apply sealant to junction of tile and dissimilar materials and junction of dissimilar planes. K. Installation - Floors -Thin-Set Methods: 1. Over interior concrete substrates, install in accordance with TCA Handbook Method F113, latex-portland cement bond coat with standard grout, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide crack isolation membrane under all floor the installations over slab on grade, in accordance with the manufacturers printed instructions. I,. 3.4 CLEANING A. Section 01700- Execution Requirements: Final cleaning. B. Clean the and grout surfaces. 3.5 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. Section 01700- Execution Requirements: Protecting installed construction. B. Do not permit traffic over finished floor surface for 4 days after installation. END OF SECTION Proj. No. 07014 Tile 09300 - 3 OR A SECTION 09510- SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes suspended metal grid ceiling system and perimeter trim; and acoustic panels. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 07900-Joint Sealers. 2. Division 15-Air Outlets and Inlets: Air diffusion devices in ceiling system. 3. Division 16 - Interior Lights: Light fixtures in ceiling system. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASTM C635 - Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings. B. ASTM C636- Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels. C. ASTM E1264 - Classification of Acoustical Ceiling Products. D. CISCA (Ceilings and Interior Systems Contractors Association) -Acoustical Ceilings: Use and Practice. E. UL (Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.) - Fire Resistance Directory. F. WH (Warnock Hersey) -Certification Listings. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Suspension System: Rigidly secure acoustic ceiling system including integral mechanical and electrical components with maximum deflection of 1/360. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01330- Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate grid layout and related dimensioning, junctions with other work or ceiling finishes, interrelation of mechanical and electrical items related to system. Indicate method of suspension where interference exists. C. Product Data: Submit data on metal grid system components and acoustic units. D. Samples: Submit two samples, 8 x 10 inch in size, illustrating material and finish of each acoustic or wood unit. E. Samples: Submit two samples each, 6 inches long, of each type of suspension system. F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to CIRCA requirements. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years experience. . B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years experience. 1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01600 - Product Requirements. B. Maintain uniform temperature of minimum 60 degrees F and maximum humidity of 40 percent prior to, during, and after acoustic unit installation. 1.8 SEQUENCING A. Section 01100 - Summary: Work sequence. Proj. No. 07014 Suspended Acoustical Ceilings 09510- 1 .m B. Sequence Work to ensure acoustic ceilings are not installed until sufficient heat is provided, dust generating activities have terminated, and overhead work is completed, tested, and approved. C. Install acoustic units after interior wet work is dry. 1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products. B. Furnish 40 sq ft of extra panels of each type to Owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS A. Manufacturers: 1. Armstrong World Industries. 2. Celotex Building Products. 3. USG Interiors. B. Substitutions: Section 01600- Product Requirements. 2.2 COMPONENTS A. Acoustic Panels Type ACB-1: Not Used. B. Acoustic Panels Type ACB-2: Not Used. C. Acoustic Panels Type ACB-3: ASTM E1264, conforming to the following: 1. Size: 24 x 24 inches. 2. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 3. Composition: Mineral and ceramic composite. 4. Light Reflectance: .82. .� 5. NRC Range: .55. 6. Fire Hazard Classification: Class A. 7. Edge: Square. 8. Surface Color: White. 9. Surface Finish: Perforated. 10. Grid: 15/16 in. Aluminum Prelude Plus. 11. Source: Fine Fissured Ceramaguard - No. 607, by Armstrong World Industries. D. Grid: 1. Non-fire Rated Grid: ASTM C635, heavy duty; exposed T components die cut and interlocking. 2. Grid Materials: Aluminum. 3. Exposed Grid Surface Width: Refer to ACB descriptions above. 4. Grid Finish: White. 5. Accessories: Stabilizer bars, clips, perimeter moldings, and hold down clips, required for suspended grid system. 6. Support Channels and Hangers: Galvanized steel; size and type to suit application and ceiling system flatness requirement specified. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Touch-up Paint: Type and color to match acoustic and grid units. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Section 01300 -Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Verify layout of hangers will not interfere with other work. Proj. No. 07014 Suspended Acoustical Ceilings 09510 - 2 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Lay-In Grid Suspension System: 1. Install suspension system in accordance with ASTM C636 and as supplemented in this section. 2. Install system capable of supporting imposed loads to deflection of 1/360 maximum. 3. Lay out system to balanced grid design with edge units no less than 50 percent of acoustic unit size. Arrange system with long dimension of tile parallel to long dimension of the space. 4. Locate system on room axis according to reflected plan. 5. Install after major above ceiling work is complete. Coordinate location of hangers with other work. 6. Install hanger clips during steel deck erection. Install additional hangers and inserts as required. 7. Hang suspension system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Where carrying members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of face plane of adjacent members. 8. Where ducts or other equipment prevent regular spacing of hangers, reinforce nearest affected hangers to span extra distance. 9. Do not support components on main runners or cross runners when weight causes total dead load to exceed deflection capability. 10. Do not eccentrically load system, or produce rotation of runners. 11. Perimeter Molding: a. Install edge molding at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces. b. Use longest practical lengths. C. Miter corners. d. Install at junctions with other interruptions. 12. Form expansion joints as detailed. Form to accommodate plus or minus 1 inch movement. Maintain visual closure. B. Acoustic Units: 1. Fit acoustic units in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to appearance and function. 2. Lay directional patterned units one way with pattern parallel to longest room axis. Fit border trim neatly against abutting surfaces. 3. Install units after above ceiling work is complete. 4. Install units level, in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp, and dents. 5. Cutting Units: a. Cut to fit irregular grid and perimeter edge trim. b. Cut edges to field cut units. C. Double cut and field paint exposed edges of tegular units. 6. Where round obstructions occur, install preformed closures to match perimeter molding. 7. Where bullnose concrete block corners occur, install preformed closures to match perimeter molding. 8. Lay acoustic insulation at location indicated on Drawings. 9. Install hold-down clips to retain panels tight to grid system within 20 ft of exterior doors. 3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements: Tolerances. B. Maximum Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 1/8 inch in 10 feet. C. Maximum Variation from Plumb of Grid Members Caused by Eccentric Loads: 2 degrees. END OF SECTION Proj. No. 07014 Suspended Acoustical Ceilings 09510- 3 OR SECTION 09650- RESILIENT FLOORING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes resilient base. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASTM E84 -Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials, B. ASTM E662 -Test Method for Specific Optical Density of Smoke Generated by Solid Materials. C. ASTM F1861 -Thermoset Vulcanized Rubber. D. FS SS-W-40A- Wall Base, Rubber and Vinyl Plastic. E. NFPA 253 (National Fire Protection Association) - Method of Test for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Submit data describing physical and performance characteristics; including sizes, and colors available; and installation instructions. C. Samples: Submit manufacturer's complete set of color samples for initial selection. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Section 01700- Execution Requirements: Closeout procedures. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials. 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS O A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years experience. MP 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements. B. Protect roll materials from damage by storing on end. 1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01600 - Product Requirements. B. Maintain temperature in storage area between 55 degrees F and 90 degrees F. C. Store materials for not less than 48 hours prior to installation in area of installation at temperature of 70 degrees F to achieve temperature stability. Thereafter, maintain „ conditions above 55 degrees F. 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products. B. Furnish 100 sq ft of flooring, 100 lineal feet of base, of each type and color specified. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 RESILIENT BASE A. Manufacturers: 1. Roppe Corp. 2. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600. Proj. No. 07014 Resilient Flooring 09650- 1 B. Base (RB-1 thru RB-2): 1. Material: Rubber. 2. Height: 4 inch, coved. 3. Thickness: 0.125 inch thick. 4. Color: Refer to Section 09000. 5. Length:. Roll. 6. Source: Roppe Rubber Cove Base. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Primers and Adhesives: Waterproof;types recommended by flooring manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate. B. Apply primer as required to prevent "bleed-thru"or interference with adhesion by substances cannot be removed. - 3.2 INSTALLATION - BASE A. Fit joints tightly and make vertical. Maintain min. dimension of 36 in. between joints. B. Miter internal corners. At external corners, 'V'cut back of base strip to 2/3 of its thickness and fold. C. Install base on solid backing. Bond tightly to wall and floor surfaces. D. Scribe and fit to door frames and other interruptions. 3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION " A. Section 01700- Execution Requirements: Final cleaning and protection. B. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage. ww END OF SECTION wee w ■ Proj. No. 07014 Resilient Flooring 09650 - 2 SECTION 09900 - PAINTS PART1 GENERAL " 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes surface preparation and field application of paints, stains, and other coatings to all interior and exterior exposed surfaces unless noted otherwise. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 05500- Metal Fabrications: Shop primed items. 2. Section 06410 - Custom Casework: Shop finished cabinet work. 3. Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Taping and bedding of gypsum board. 4. Division 15 - Mechanical Identification. 5. Division 16 - Basic Electrical Materials and Methods. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASTM D16 -Terminology Relating to Paint, Varnish, Lacquer, and Related Products. B. ASTM D523 -Test Method for Specular Gloss. C. ASTM D4442 -Test Methods for Direct Moisture Content Measurement of Wood and Wood-Base Materials. D. NACE (National Association of Corrosion Engineers) - Industrial Maintenance Painting. E. NPCA(National Paint and Coatings Association) - Guide to U.S. Government Paint Specifications. F. PDCA (Painting and Decorating Contractors of America) -Architectural Specifications Manual. *' G. SSPC (Steel Structures Painting Council) - Steel Structures Painting Manual 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Conform to ASTM D16 for interpretation of terms used in this section. B. Measurement of specular gloss; ASTM D523. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Submit data on finishing products. Include VOC data. 1. Submit product data, including label analysis for each product proposed for use. 2. Specifically include percent solids-by-volume, volatile organic compound (VOC) content (lb/gal), and lead content (percent of weight of dried film). 3. Schedule: a. List each material proposed for use, and cross-reference to specific coating system and substrate application. b. Identify each material by manufacturer's catalog number, product name, and generic classification. C. Include typewritten list identifying coating systems and colors applied to each room, space, or item. C. Samples: 1. Prepare one sample of each transparent coating system scheduled on actual wood substrate proposed for use. Apply in each top coat color scheduled. 2. Prepare one sample of each opaque coating system scheduled on actual substrate materials proposed for use. Apply in each top coat color scheduled. 3. Step back each coat and process at least one inch to show bare substrate and each coat and process in system build-up. 4. Minimum sample size of 4 by 8 inches. 5. Label each sample to indicate materials, color, sheen, DFT of each coat applied, and total system DFT. Proj. No. 07014 Paints 09900 - 1 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single Source Responsibility: Provide products of single manufacturer. .., B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in commercial painting and finishing with 5 years documented experience. C. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Comply with CPSC 16 CFR 1303 and other applicable federal, state, and local regulations limiting lead content of coatings to be applied. 2. Comply with applicable regulations limiting volatile organic compound (VOC) content of coatings to be applied. Conduct and report measurement of volatile organic compounds'in coatings in accordance with Ozone Transport Commission restrictions for Pennsylvania. D. Certifications: Submit certification from manufacturer that materials furnished meet or exceed specified requirements and comply with applicable lead and VOC content. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Closeout procedures. B. Operation.and Maintenance Data: Submit data on cleaning, touch-up, and repair of painted and coated surfaces. 1.7 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Applicator: Company specializing in performing work of this section with minimum five years documented experience. 1.8 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING A. Section 01300 -Administrative Requirements: Preinstallation meeting. B. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing Work of this section. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Section 01600- Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements. ' B. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability. C. Container Label: Include manufacturer's name,type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color • designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing. D. Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and maximum of 90 degrees r, in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions. 1.10 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01600- Product Requirements. B. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside temperature �. ranges required by paint product manufacturer. C. Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow when relative humidity is <20% or >85%, when temperature is <5 degrees above dew point, or moisture content of surfaces exceed those required by paint product manufacturer. D. Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 45 degrees F for interiors; 50 degrees F for exterior; unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. E. Minimum Application Temperature for Varnish and solvent reducable Finishes: 65 degrees F for interior or exterior, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. F. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candle measured mid-height at substrate surface. 1.11 SEQUENCING A. Section 01100-Summary: Work sequence. B. Sequence application to the following: 1. Do not apply finish coats until paintable sealant is applied. 2. Back prime wood trim before installation of trim. Proj. No. 07014 Paints 09900 - 2 • 1.12 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products. B. Supply 1 unopened gallon of each color; store where directed. C. Label each container with color, type, texture, and room locations, in addition to manufacturer's label. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PAINTS AND COATINGS A. Manufacturers: 1. Sherwin-Williams Inc. products are listed as a minimal standard of quality. Products that are of equal or better quality of the following manufacturer's are acceptable pending Architects approval. 2. PPG Architectural Finishes. ++ 3. Pratt and Lambert, Inc. 4. ICI Paints. 2.2 COMPONENTS ' A. Coatings: Ready mixed, except field catalyzed coatings. Prepare coatings: 1. To soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to homogeneous coating. 2. For good flow and brushing properties. 3. Capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags. 4. Ensure VOC contents of field applied coatings do no exceed limits, after thinning, per requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction. B. Accessory Materials: Linseed oil, shellac, turpentine, paint thinners and other materials not specifically indicated but required to achieve finishes specified;commercial quality. C. Patching Materials: Latex filler. D. Fastener Head Cover Materials: Latex filler. 2.3 MIXING A. Use factory prepared colors matching approved samples. Site tinting will not be permitted. B. Apply coatings of consistency recommended by manufacturer. Thin only within recommended limits using thinners approved by coating manufacturer. 2.4 MATERIALS A. Paint: Refer to Schedule at end of section for specific product selections. Select primary products of a single manufacturer for each coating or paint system, unless otherwise specified. B. Secondary products such as linseed oil, turpentine and shellacs shall be first line quality products of a reputable manufacturer. C. Colors: Refer to Section 09000 - Color Legend. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Section 01300 -Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Verify substrate conditions are ready to receive Work as instructed by product manufacturer. C. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report conditions capable of affecting proper application. D. Do not proceed with surface preparation or coating applications until conditions are suitable. E. Application of paint or finish to surfaces shall constitute acceptance of that surface. Proj. No. 07014 Paints 09900 - 3 .. IM F. Test shop applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials. G. Measure moisture content of surfaces using electronic moisture meter. Do not apply OR finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums: 1. Gypsum Wallboard and glass fiber reinforced gypsum: 17 percent. 2. Masonry, Concrete, and Concrete Unit Masonry: 12 percent. 3. Interior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D4442. 4. Concrete Floors: 8 percent. H. Surfaces Not To Be Painted: 1. Architectural concrete. 2. Clay and glass unit masonry, decorative concrete unit masonry, and stone. 3. Aluminum and aluminum based alloys, copper and copper based alloys, lead and lead based alloys, nickel and nickel based alloys, stainless steel, plated architectural metals, and "weathering" metals. 4. Decorative plastic and metal laminates, and synthetic countertops. 5. Elastomeric membranes and flashings, roofing materials, and exterior sealants and calking. 6. Acoustic materials. 7. Rubber, vinyl, or plastic seals and bumpers. 8. Surfaces concealed or inaccessible in finished construction unless specifically required. 9. Other surfaces specifically scheduled or indicated to remain unfinished or unpainted. I. Materials and Products Not To Be Painted: 1. Items with integral or factory-applied final finish unless indicated otherwise. 2. Moving parts of operating equipment such as valve and damper operators, linkages, sensing devices, motor and fan shafts. 3. UL, FM or other code-required labels, name plates, identification or performance rating labels. 4. Sprinkler heads. 5. Mechanical and electrical items within unfinished spaces unless noted otherwise. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: 1. Correct minor defects. 2. Remove temporary labels, wrappings, and protective coverings from surfaces to be coated. 3. Seal stains, marks, and other imperfections which may bleed through surface finishes. B. Gypsum Board: 1. Refer to Sections 09260 for general surface preparation. 2. Fill remaining cracks, depressions, holes and other irregularities with spackling ..� compound. 3. Sand rough or high spots left by joint cement or spackling compound without damaging paper face. 4. Remove dust by wiping with damp cloths or vacuuming. C. Steel - Uncoated: 1. Remove weld spatter by chipping or grinding. 2. Clean interior and weather protected steel in accordance with SSPC SP2 "Hand Tool Cleaning" and SP3 "Power Tool Cleaning". Clean areas of excessive corrosion or scale in accordance with SSPC SP7 "Brush-Off Blast Cleaning". 3. Clean exterior steel permanently exposed to elements in accordance with SSPC SP6 "Commercial Blast Cleaning". 4. Apply metal conditioner to bare surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, paying particular attention to abrasions, welds, bolts, and nuts. Allow to set as recommended by solution manufacturer. Rinse with clean water with rust inhibitor mixed with water or applied immediately following rinse. Allow to dry. Proj. No. 07014 Paints 09900 - 4 5. Prime coat immediately. D. Steel - Prime Coated: 1. Remove loose primer and rust to feather-edge at adjacent sound primer by cleaning in accordance with SSPC SP2 "Hand Tool Cleaning" and SP3 "Power Tool Cleaning". 2. Apply metal conditioner to abrasions, welds, bolts, and nuts in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Allow to set as recommended by manufacturer. Rinse with clean water with rust inhibitor mixed with water or applied immediately following rinse. Allow to dry. 3. Prime coat bare areas immediately. E. Steel - Galvanized: 1. Remove white rust by cleaning in accordance with SSPC SP2 "Hand Tool Cleaning" and SP3 "Power Tool Cleaning". Exercise care not to remove galvanizing. 2. Pretreat surfaces to receive solvent reducible coatings immediately. F. Wood -Opaque Finish: 1. Remove excess residue from knots, pitch streaks, cracks, open joints, and sappy spots. Remove or seal over grade stamp markings. 2. Sand wood surfaces and edges smooth. Remove dust after each sanding. 3. Apply compatible stain sealer to knots, pitch and resinous sapwood before applying prime coat. Do not apply shellac to exterior surfaces, or under latex or urethane finishes. 4. After primer is dry and before second coat, countersink nails and fill nail holes, cracks, open joints and other defects with putty or plastic wood filler. G. Wood -Transparent Finish: 1. Remove excess residue from knots, pitch streaks, cracks, open joints, and sappy spots. Ensure exposed fasteners are countersunk. 2. Sand wood surfaces and edges smooth. Remove dust after each sanding. 3. After stain is dry and before sanding sealers are applied, fill nail holes, cracks, open joints and other defects with putty or plastic wood filler. 4. Tint fillers to match stain and finish coatings. Work fillers well into and perpendicular to grain before set. Wipe excess from surface. 3.3 APPLICATION A. General Requirements: 1. Coat all surfaces specified, scheduled, illustrated, and otherwise exposed unless „ specifically noted otherwise. 2. Apply coatings of type, color, and sheen as scheduled. 3. Apply products in accordance with Section 01600. Use application materials, equipment, and techniques as recommended by coating manufacturer and best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. 4. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are improperly prepared. 5. Number of coats specified are minimum number acceptable. 6. Apply coating systems to total dry film thickness scheduled. Apply material at not less than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. Do not exceed maximum single coat thickness recommended by coating manufacturer. Do not double-back with spray equipment building up film thickness of two coats in one pass. 7. Ensure that edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive dry film thickness equivalent of flat surfaces. 8. Finish edges of coatings adjoining other materials or colors sharp and clean, without overlapping. B. Prime Coats: 1. Apply initial coat to surfaces as soon as practical after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. 2. Backprime exterior woodwork with specified primer. Proj. No. 07014 Paints 09900- 5 .A 3. Backprime interior woodwork scheduled to receive transparent finish with gloss varnish reduced 25 percent with mineral spirits. • 4. Apply primer to wood and metal sash before field glazing. C. Intermediate and Top Coats: 1. Allow previously applied coat to dry before next coat is applied. 2. Sand and dust lightly between coats as recommended by coating manufacturer. 3. Apply each coat to achieve uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage free of brush and roller marks, runs, misses, visible laps or shadows, hazing, bubbles, pin holes, or other defects. ,. 4. If stains, undercoats, or other conditions show through final topcoat, correct defects and apply additional topcoats until coating film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. D. Finish Matching: 1. Finish closets same as adjoining rooms, unless otherwise specified. 2. Finish tops, bottoms, and edges of doors same as door faces. Apply sanding sealer to cut-outs. When faces are different colors, finish edges of doors to ..R match space from which they are visible when door is in partly open position. 3. Finish other surfaces not specifically mentioned to match adjoining surfaces. E. Finishing Mechanical And Electrical Equipment: 1. Paint metal surfaces, including pipes, conduit, machinery, equipment, panels and boxes where exposed in finished spaces, mechanical rooms or on exterior. Paint equipment machinery gray, paint pipes and conduits to match adjacent surfaces. 2. Paint exterior exposed air handling units with 2 coats of exterior enamel. 3. Paint sight-exposed galvanized ducts on interior of building. 4. Paint all roof protrusions including but not limited to roof ventilators, goosenecks, PVC plumbing stacks, exhaust fans and vents on roof, including aluminum items. 5. Paint exposed PVC condensate drain pipe on exterior of building. 6. Remove prefinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical components and paint separately, color to match adjacent surface. 7. Paint interior surfaces of air ducts visible through grilles and louvers with one coat of flat black paint to visible surfaces. Paint dampers exposed behind louvers, grilles, to match face panels. 8. Paint exposed conduit and electrical equipment occurring in finished areas. 9. Paint both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical and telephone ., equipment before installing equipment. 10. Refer to Divisions 15 and 16 for schedule of color coding and identification banding of equipment, duct work, piping, and conduit. 11. Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed prior to finishing. 12. Apply each coat of paint uniformly to minimum dry film (MDF) thickness specified in schedule below, or as recommended by manufacturer. .� 3.4 CLEANING A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Final cleaning. B. Promptly remove spilled, splashed, or spattered coatings. Clean spots, oil, and other soiling from finished surfaces using cleaning agents and methods which will not damage materials. C. If completed construction is damaged beyond normal cleaning or repair by painting ., operations, replace damaged items at no additional cost to Owner. D. Maintain premises and storage areas free of unnecessary accumulation of tools, equipment, surplus materials, and debris. E. Collect waste, cloths, and material which may constitute fire hazards and place in closed metal containers; remove from site daily along with empty containers.Collect waste material which may constitute fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and remove daily from site. Proj. No. 07014 Paints 09900 - 6 F. Upon completion of work, remove paint and varnish spots from floor, glass, and other finished surfaces. Remove from premises rubbish and accumulated materials. Leave work in clean, orderly, and acceptable condition. G. Spot painting will be allowed to correct soiled or damaged paint surfaces only when touch- up spot will blend into surrounding finish and is invisible to normal viewing. Otherwise, re- coat entire section to corners or visible stopping point. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect completed finish and painting work, and protect adjacent finish surfaces from paint splatter, spills and stains. B. Use adequate drop cloths and masking procedures during progress of work. 3.6 SCHEDULE A. Metal Surfaces: 1. Interior non-ferrous metals and zinc-coated (galvanized) steel. 1 st Coat: S-W ProCryl Universal Water Based Primer, B66-310 Series (5 mils wet, 2 mils dry) 2nd Coat: S-W ProMar 200 Latex Eg-Shel, B20-200 Series 3rd Coat: S-W ProMar 200 Latex Eg-Shel, 620-200 Series (4 mils wet, 1.5 mils dry per coat) 2. Exterior non-ferrous metals and zinc-coated (galvanized) steel. 1 st Coat: S-W A-100 Exterior Latex Satin, A82 Series 2nd Coat: S-W A-100 Exterior Latex Satin, A82 Series (4 mils wet, 1.3 mils dry per coat) 3. Interior ferrous metals. 1 st Coat: S-W All Surface Enamel Latex Primer, A41 W210 (4 mils wet, 1.6 mils dry) 2nd Coat: S-W ProMar 200 Latex Eg-Shel, B20-2200 Series 3rd Coat: S-W ProMar 200 Latex Eg-Shel, B20-2200 Series (4 mils wet, 1.5 mils dry per coat) 4. Exterior non-ferrous metals and zinc-coated (galvanized) steel. 1 st Coat: S-W All Surface Enamel Latex Primer, A41 W210(10 mils wet, 5 mils dry) 1 st Coat: S-W A-100 Exterior Latex Satin, A8 Series 2nd Coat: S-W A-100 Exterior Latex Satin, A8 Series (4 mils wet, 1.3 mils dry per coat) B. Gypsum Surfaces: 1. Interior gypsum board walls (typical). 1st Coat: S-W PrepRite 200 Latex Primer, B28W101 (6 mils wet, 1.2 mils dry) 2nd Coat: S-W ProMar 200 Latex Eg-Shel, B20-2200 Series 3rd Coat: S-W ProMar 200 Latex Eg-Shel, B20-2200 Series (4 mils wet, 1.6 mils dry per coat) 2. Interior gypsum board ceilings. 1 st Coat: S-W PrepRite 200 Latex Primer, 628W 101 (6 mils wet, 1.2 mils dry) 2nd Coat: S-W ProMar 200 Latex Flat, B30-200 Series 3rd Coat: S-W ProMar 200 Latex Flat, B30-200 Series (4 mils wet, 1.3 mils dry per coat) C. Wood Surfaces: 1. Painted Interior wood and wood doors. 1st Coat: S-W ProClassic Waterborne Acrylic Satin, B20W51 (4 mils wet, 1.4 mils dry) 2nd Coat: S-W ProClassic Alkyd Satin, B33-220 Series 3rd Coat: S-W ProClassic Alkyd Satin, B33-220 Series (4 mils wet, 1.8 mils dry per coat) Proj. No. 07014 Paints 09900 - 7 D. Cellular PVC Surfaces: 1. Coating System No. PVC-1: Surface: Azek Trimboards. Sheen: Satin. Under Coat: Exterior Latex House Paint at 1.3 mils. Top Coat: Exterior Latex House Paint at 1.3 mils. System DFT: 2.6 mils E. Miscellaneous Surfaces: 1. Coating System No. MS-100: ■■. Surface: Paint all incidental items including but not limited to: plumbing stacks exposed on roof ladders lintels fire extinguisher cabinet frames any exposed items not scheduled above. 3.7 SCHEDULE - COLORS A. Refer to Section 09000 - Color Legend for color selections. w■ END OF SECTION w ■ ■ Proj. No. 07014 Paints 09900 - 8 SECTION 10350 - FLAGPOLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Relocation of existing ground set flagpole. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Cast-in-place concrete- Section 03300. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Design Criteria: 1. Flagpole, bases and anchorage devices designed to resist 120 mph wind velocity minimum, unflagged. 2. Design flagpole foundation under direct supervision of Professional Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed at Project location. B. Reference Standards: 1. ASTM 8221, Aluminum-Alloy extruded bars, rods, wire, shapes and tubes. 2. Aluminum Association (AA) - Designation System for Aluminum Finishes. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Section 01340. Indicate general layout, construction, dimensions,foundation and base accessories. 1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Spiral wrap flagpole with heavy kraft paper, wood strip and steel band or polyethylene wrap to protect until reinstallation. B. Store flagpole, in area protected from weather, moisture and damage. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FLAGPOLE A. Existing flagpole with nautical mast to be relocated. B. Dimensions: 1. Overall height: Approximately 25 feet. 2. Setting depth: Match existing. 2.2 MOUNTING A. Ground Set Foundation Assembly: 1. Base: Cast aluminum flash collar,finish to match flagpole. 2. Foundation Sleeve: 16-ga., corrugated, galvanized steel tube with foundation sleeve plate. " 3. Centering Wedges: Four internal steel wedges, welded to support plate and foundation sleeve for centering of flagpole. 4. Ground Spike: 3/4 in. steel spike, extending 12 in. below footing, welded to foundation sleeve plate. 5. Foundation Support Plate: 3/16 in. thick steel welded to ground spike at base of concrete foundation. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION: A. Examine foundations for proper depth and size of sleeve. B. Paint portions of flagpole below grade with heavy coat of bituminous paint. pow Proj. No. 07014 Flagpoles 10350-1 3.2 INSTALLATION: A. Install flagpole, base assemblies and fittings plumb and secure in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Provide positive lightning ground for flagpole installation. C. Test and adjust for smooth operation of halyard system. End of Section •. M ■ Proj. No. 07014 Flagpoles 10350-2 SECTION 10500- METAL LOCKERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes metal lockers and accessories. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 06100- Rough Carpentry: Wood grounds and attachment strips. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASTM A653 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc- Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvanealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01330- Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate locker plan layout, numbering plan. C. Product Data: Submit data on locker types, sizes and accessories. D. Samples: Submit two 3 x 6 inches in size, of each color scheduled; applied to specified base metal. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Section 01600- Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements. B. Protect locker finish and adjacent surfaces from damage. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 LOCKERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Art Metal Products. 2. List Industries, Inc. 3. Lyon Metal Products, Inc. 4. Penco Products, Inc. 5. Republic Storage Systems Co., Inc. 6. Substitutions: Section 01600- Product Requirements. B. Product Description: Metal standard lockers, of configurations scheduled at the end of this section. Individual unit construction, each locker having individual doors, frame,top and bottom with interchangeable parts. 2.2 COMPONENTS A. Sheet Steel: Mild, cold rolled and leveled unfinished steel; thicknesses as scheduled. B. Knock-Down Type: 1. Body and Shelf: 24 gage. 2. Door Face: a. 30 in. or higher: 16 gage. b. 12 in. or less in width: 18 gage. C. Box lockers 15 in. or less in width: 18 gage. 3. Door Frame: 16 gage. 4. Hinges: 0.074 inch, 2 in. high. 5. Base: 16 gage. 6. Sloping Top: 20 gage. 7. Trim: 20 gage. 8. Source: Standard Lockers by Republic Storage Systems Co., Inc. Proj. No. 07014 Metal Lockers 10500 - 1 2.3 FABRICATION A. Doors: Bottom and top edges flanged and vertical side edges formed to channel shape. Provide 3 hinges per door over 36 in. high; provide 2 hinges per door 36 in. high and under. Standard louver arrangements. B. Handles: Lift type with polished plated finish, concealed padlock eye, and integral padlock strike. C. Locking Device: Spring actuated galvanized steel locking channel enclosed in door, engaging with door strike jamb. Prelocking and self-latching. Provide rubber silencers on door frame. •• 1. Location: Double-tier lockers. D. Frame: Formed channel shape sheet steel, bolted at max. 9 in. o.c. or fully welded where scheduled. E. Hinges: Five knuckle type, projection welded to door frame, and fastened to side flange of door. F. Closure Panels: Match locker finish. G. Base: 4 in. high 7" base, except where concrete is detailed. H. Recess Trim: 18 ga. trim, 3 in. face x 3/8 in. return at top and jambs of recessed units. I. Number Plates: Furnish rectangular shaped aluminum plates. Form numbers 1 inch high of block font style, in contrasting color. J. Furnish ventilation openings at top and bottom of each locker. G* K. Form recess for operating handle and locking device. L. Finish edges smooth without burrs. M. Fabricate sloped metal tops, ends and closure pieces. , N. Furnish end panels and filler strips. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Hooks: Two double prong wall hooks, hat shelf. 2.5 FACTORY FINISHING A. Clean, degrease, and neutralize metal; prime and finish with one coat of baked enamel. B. Colors: Refer to Section 09000. • PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Section 01300-Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Verify prepared bases are in correct position and configuration. C. Verify bases are properly sized. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install lockers plumb and square. B. Place and secure on prepared base. C. Secure lockers with anchor devices to suit substrate materials. Minimum Pullout Force: 100 Ib. D. Bolt adjoining locker units together to provide rigid installation. E. Install end panels, filler panels, tops, and bases. F. Install accessories. G. Replace components not operating smoothly. • 3.3 CLEANING A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Final cleaning. B. Clean locker interiors and exterior surfaces. 3.4 SCHEDULES A. Type 1: 12 in.W x 15 in. D x 72 in. double tier lockers, ventilated, sloping top. END OF SECTION Proj. No. 07014 Metal Lockers 10500- 2 SECTION 10523- FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes fire extinguishers; and fire extinguisher cabinets, and brackets for wall mounting. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 06100 -Wood Blocking and Curbing: Wood blocking and shims. 2. Section 09260 - Gypsum Drywall Systems: Roughed-in wall openings. 3. Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings: Field applied paint finish. 1.2 REFERENCES A. NFPA 10 (National Fire Protection Association) - Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers. B. UL (Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.) - Fire Protection Equipment Directory. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to NFPA 10 and applicable code. B. Provide extinguishers classified and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. C. Provide fire extinguisher cabinets classified and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate cabinet physical dimensions, rough-in measurements for recessed cabinets, wall bracket mounted measurements, location, and fire ratings. C. Product Data: Submit extinguisher operational features, color and finish, and anchorage details. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit special criteria and wall opening coordination requirements. E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify Products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Closeout procedures. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit test, refill or recharge schedules and re- certification requirements. 1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Environmental conditions affecting products on site. B. Do not install extinguishers when ambient temperature are capable of freezing extinguisher ingredients. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: 1. JL Industries. 2. Kiddie Fire Extinguishers. 3. Larsen's Manufacturing Co.. 4. Potter Roemer. 5. Substitutions: Section 01600- Product Requirements. B. Note: Larsen's used as a standard of quality in products below where model numbers or styles are indicated. Proj. No. 07014 Fire Extinguishers and Cabinets 10523- 1 ON 2.2 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. Multi-purpose dry chemical type U.L. 299, (amonium phosphate), with pressure gauge: „ 1. Capacity: 10.0 lbs. 2. U.L. Rating: 4A:80B:C 3. Extinguisher Finish: Steel, enamel, red color. 4. Acceptable product: MP10 2.3 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS A. Cabinet: Formed sheet steel, 20 gage, primed, semi-recessed type, Cameo Series Model FS C2409-5R for fire rated walls and C2409-R for non-rated walls.; size 24" x 9" x 3 -'/2 inches. B. Trim Type: Flat Returned to wall surface, with 5/16 inch projection 1- %2 inch wide face, pre-finished color as selected by Architect. *" C. Door: Primed steel, 20 gage thick, reinforced for flatness and rigidity; latch; full acrylic bubble. D. Glass: 1/8 inch thick acrylic bubble. E. Cabinet Mounting Hardware: Appropriate to cabinet. F. Form cabinet enclosure with right angle inside corners and seams. Form perimeter trim and door stiles. G. Pre-drill for anchors. 4' H. Hinge doors for 180 degree opening with continuous piano hinge. Furnish nylon roller type catch. I. Weld, fill, and grind components smooth. J. Glaze doors with resilient channel gasket glazing. " K. Finishing Cabinet Exterior Trim and Door: Primed for field paint finish. L. Finishing Cabinet Interior: White baked enamel. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Extinguisher Brackets: Formed steel, chromed black enamel finish. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION + A. Section 01300-Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Verify rough openings for cabinet are correctly sized and located. 3.2 INSTALLATION do A. Install cabinets plumb and level in wall openings, 12 inches from finished floor to inside bottom of cabinet. B. Secure rigidly in place. C. Place extinguishers on wall brackets. 3.3 SCHEDULE A. One semi-recessed cabinet with one extinguisher at each location noted on drawings. B. Mechanical room: Provide one extinguisher at locations shown on drawings, mounted on bracket. END OF SECTION Proj. No. 07014 Fire Extinguishers and Cabinets 10523 - 2 SECTION 10800 -TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes toilet and bath accessories. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: In-wall framing and plates for support of accessories. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASTM A123 -Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. B. ASTM A269- Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service. C. ASTM A653/A653M - Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. D. ASTM A666-Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar. E. ASTM 8456- Electrodeposited Coatings of Copper Plus Nickel Plus Chromium and Nickel Plus Chromium. F. ASTM C1036 - Flat Glass. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures. B. Product Data: Submit data on accessories describing size, finish, details of function, attachment methods. C. Samples: Submit two samples of each accessory illustrating color and finish. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit special procedures, conditions requiring special attention. lab 1.4 COORDINATION A. Section 01300-Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Coordinate the Work with placement of internal wall reinforcement and reinforcement of toilet partitions to receive anchor attachments. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES A. Products scheduled are based on the following manufacturers: 1. Bradley Corp. 2. Bobrick. 3. Ginger products. 4. NuTone. 5. Basco. 6. Moen. B. Substitutions: Section 01600- Product Requirements. 2.2 COMPONENTS A. Accessories - General: Shop assembled, free of dents and scratches and packaged �. complete with anchors and fittings, steel anchor plates, adapters, and anchor components for installation. 1. Grind welded joints smooth. 2. Fabricate units made of metal sheet of seamless sheets, with flat surfaces. B. Keys: Furnish 2 keys for each accessory to Owner. C. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A666 , Type 304. D. Stainless Steel Tubing: ASTM A269, stainless steel. Proj. No. 07014 Toilet and Bath Accessories 10800 - 1 w E. Galvanized Sheet Steel: ASTM A653, G60. F. Adhesive: Two component epoxy type, waterproof. • G. Mirror Glass: Float glass,Type I, Class 1, Quality q2 (ASTM C 1036), with silvering, copper coating, and suitable protective organic coating to copper backing in accordance with FS DD-M-411. H. Fasteners, Screws, and Bolts: Hot dip galvanized. I. Expansion Shields: Fiber, lead, or rubber as recommended by accessory manufacturer for component and substrate. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. TA-1 thru TA-7A: Not used. B. TA-76: Medicine Cabinet: Metro Collection by Broan model no. 52WH244DP, 15 x 25 x 5 inches, with beveled mirror,for recessed installation. Location -Typical bathroom. C. TA-8 thru TA-14: Not Used. D. TA-15: Double Roll Toilet Tissue Dispenser: Bradley 5241-50 for two rolls. E. TA-16: Not Used. F. TA-17: Paper Towel Dispenser: Surface mounted Bobrick model B-4262 Contura Series for 400 C-fold or 525 multifold towels. G. TA-18: Soap Dispenser: Surface mounted Bobrick Model B-4112 Contura Series liquid soap dispenser, 40 oz. capacity. �^* 2.4 FACTORY FINISHING A. Stainless Steel: No. 4 satin brushed finish, unless otherwise noted. , B. Chrome/Nickel Plating: ASTM 8456, Type SC 2, satin finish, unless otherwise noted. C. Baked Enamel: Pretreat to clean condition, apply one coat primer and minimum two coats epoxy baked enamel. D. Galvanizing for Items other than Sheet: ASTM A123 to 1.25 oz/sq yd. Galvanize ferrous �* metal and fastening devices. E. Shop Primed Ferrous Metals: Pretreat and clean, spray apply one coat primer and bake. F. Back paint components where contact is made with building finishes to prevent electrolysis. PART 3 EXECUTION .. 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Section 01300 -Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Verify exact location of accessories for installation. C. Verify field measurements are as indicated on product data. D. See Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry for installation of blocking in wall. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Deliver inserts and rough-in frames to site for timely installation. B. Provide templates and rough-in measurements as required. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate. B. Mounting Heights and Locations: As required by accessibility regulations or as indicated on Drawings. END OF SECTION " e Proj. No. 07014 Toilet and Bath Accessories 10800 - 2 , SECTION 10990- MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES PART 1 GENERAL " 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes miscellaneous specialties as scheduled. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Metal supports. 2. Section 06100- Rough Carpentry: In-wall framing and plates for support of items scheduled. 3. Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry: Type 2 shelving. 4. Section 09900 - Painting. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Submit data on miscellaneous specialties describing size, finish, details of function, attachment methods. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit special procedures, conditions requiring special attention. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Section 01300 -Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Coordinate the Work with placement of internal wall reinforcement and reinforcement of partitions to receive anchor attachments. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 WIRE COATED SHELVING A. Material: Epoxy coated steel wire ventilated shelving units, white color,for all closet locations. B. Type 1: 12 inch deep shelf and rod. C. Type 2: Refer to Section 06200. D. Accessories: Provide wall brackets, end caps, anchors, support braces and other necessary hardware for a complete installation. E. Standard: Ventilated shelving by Shulte Storage Systems. 2.2 BAHAMA SHUTTERS A. Material: Pultruded structural fiberglass. B. Design: Custom, operable, decorative, hinged bahama shutters. C. Size: 1. Width: Match window size. 2. Length: Equal to diagonal created with shutter in open position and projecting straight out from window sill. D. Accessories: Two part hinges, tilt arms, clevis pins, anchors and other required components for a complete installation. Apo E. Finish: Urethane, color as selected by Architect. F. Source: Bahama Shutters by Atlantic Premium Shutters (Dist. by Exterior Supply (904- 387-8684). PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Verify exact location of accessories for installation. ,.R Proj. No. 07014 Miscellaneous Specialties 10990- 1 C. Verify field measurements are as indicated on product data. D. See Section 06100- Rough Carpentry for installation of blocking in wall. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Deliver inserts and rough-in frames to site for timely installation. B. Provide templates and rough-in measurements as required. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install items in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate. C. Mounting Heights and Locations: As required by accessibility regulations or as indicated on Drawings. END OF SECTION Proj. No. 07014 Miscellaneous Specialties 10990 - 2 SECTION 11450 - RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES: A. Residential appliances. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS: A. Unit Prices: Section 01270. B. Cabinets- Section 12300. C. Plumbing connections - Division 15. D. Electrical connections - Division 16. 1.3 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit in accordance with Section 01330. Submit manufacturer's literature for each specified product, including installation instructions and rough-in data. 1.4 COORDINATION: A. Coordinate with related work for proper installation of equipment in cabinets and proper connection of plumbing and electrical supply. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MICRO-REFRIGERATOR A. Provided by Owner and installed by Contractor. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION: A. Install equipment plumb, level, and secure in prepared rough openings in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. B. Connect to permanent utilities in accordance with manufacturers printed instructions. C. After connections are complete, test and adjust operation and leave in complete working order. End of Section Proj. No. 07014 Residential Appliances 11450-1 ,® 40 .w y A t SECTION 12300- MANUFACTURED CASEWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Plastic laminate-faced wood casework. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Carpentry- Section 06100. B. Rubber base - Section 09660. C. Sinks, strainers and tail pieces - Division 15. D. Electrical rough-in - Division 16. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers: Minimum 5 years experience in manufacturing casework of quality specified. B. Source: Items furnished shall be the products of a single manufacturer,except as otherwise specified. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01330. B. Shop Drawings: Identify item number and location of equipment, detail equipment in related and dimensional position with sections, and indicate door swings. Indicate materials, construction and installation details. C. Product Data: Submit data indicating casework characteristics,component dimensions,and hardware. '" D. Samples: Provide three each of the following: 1. 4 x 4 in. wood sample with selected stain. 2. 2 x 2 in. color samples of plastic laminates for selected by Architect. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store and handle casework to prevent damage and disfigurement. B. Protect surfaces from damage during transit. +» C. Provide temporary skids under units. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of casework with related work to prevent cutting and patching. B. Verify field dimensions and job conditions. C. Coordinate service rough-ins and installation of service fixtures. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. LSI Corporation of America. B. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600. 2.2 PLASTIC LAMINATE CASEWORK A. Plastic Laminate: High-pressure plastic laminate,textured or matte finish, and patterns by Wilson Art, Pionite, Formica, or Nevamar, color as selected by Architect, meeting requirements of NEMA Publication LD3-1985. Cover surfaces with following thicknesses: 1. Exposed Exterior Surfaces: .030 in. 2. Exposed Interior Surfaces (behind doors): .020 in. 3. Tops: (Square-edge): .050 in. •• 4. Color: Refer to Section 09000- Color Legend for color schedule. B. Core: Premium industrial particle board, 45 lbs./cu. ft. density, conforming to CS236-66, Type 1, Grade B, Class 2. Provide exterior grade plywood at sink locations. Proj. No. 07014 Manufactured Casework 12300-1 C. Hardwood: Manufacturer's option, clear and sound,free of checks and defects, air and kiln dried to a moisture content of 4%. D. Drawer Bodies: '/2 in. hardwood plywood drawer boxes and 1/4 in. tempered hardboard bottoms. Provide clear sealer on drawer interiors. E. Edge Banding: Vinyl edge molding, 3 mm thick, color as selected by Architect. F. Hardboard: Masonite tempered hardboard, S2S, 1/4 in. thick. G. Countertop Supports: Work station brackets by A&M Hardware, Inc. Manheim, Pa. (888- 647-0200), 1/8 in. thick steel, 18 x 24 in. in black color powder coated. H. Hardware: .� 1. Hinges: Heavy duty, stainless steel, 5 knuckle hinge, 2-3/4 in. 2. Pulls, Door and Drawers: Stanley 4483-1/2, US26D. 3. Drawer Slides: Standard drawers, KV No. 1485, 150 lbs. per pair capacity; file drawers, KV# 1485, 150 lbs. per pair capacity; kneespace drawers, KV #8400 full .� extension slides. 4. Shelf Standards: 1/4 in. dia. steel pin supports or K.V. No. 255/256 (recessed). 5. Locks: Manufacturer's standard 5-pin tumbler, cam type, keyed differently, subject to masterkey. Furnish 2 keys per lock and 3 masterkeys. 6. Flush Pull: Ives Model 225, 1-3/4 x 3/8 in., 26D finish. I. Adhesive: CS-3561, Type II. 2.3 FABRICATION A. General: 1. Fabricate casework complete at factory, ready for installation. 2. All casework shall be standard overlay type construction. All parts shall be machined for accurate fit and assembled in case clamps under pressure using wood dowels and glue to ensure secure joints and cabinet squareness without exposed fasteners. 3. Mill joints for close fit and drill holes for standards and shelf supports. 4. Laminate plastic sheets to core stock under pressure, using water-resistant adhesive. Provide plastic laminate edge bands on countertops and exposed panel edges. 5. Provide finished ends on cabinets at ends of an assembly and at sight exposed base cabinet ends under continuous countertops. 6. Fabricate countertops in continuous lengths, configuration and size as detailed. 7. Fabricate doors and shelves with matching plastic laminate on both faces and PVC edges. 8. Provide special arrangements, special face panels, filler panel, tops, supports and other items as detailed and scheduled. Provide filler panels required to fill gaps between ends of cabinets and walls. B. Plastic Laminate Base Cabinets: 1. Sides: 3/4 in. particle board, finished outside with selected plastic laminate and inside with matching plastic laminate or champagne-colored liner. Sides rabbetted ., to receive back. 2. Back: 3/8 in. particle board matching plastic laminate on exposed side, balanced backer on opposite side rabbetted, glued and screwed to sides, top, and bottom. 3. Exposed Back: 3/4 in. particle board with matching plastic laminate on inside and balanced selected plastic laminate on exterior. 4. Case Top and Bottom: 3/4 in. particle board with matching plastic laminate or champagne-colored lineron interiorand balanced backeron exterior;dadoed,glued, and screwed to sides and back. 5. Base: Integral with cabinet body, 4 x 3-1/2 in. toespace, with 4 in. high unfinished toeboard. 6. Doors and Drawer Fronts: Constructed of 3/4 in.particle board with matching plastic laminate on interior and selected plastic laminate on exterior, and edged with matching plastic laminate. Drawer fronts attached to a separate four sided drawer box. 7. Drawer Boxes: Constructed of 1/2 in. hardwood plywood and 1/4 in. tempered hardboard bottoms,dadoed into sides. Sides,ends,and bottoms glued and stapled Proj. No. 07014 Manufactured Casework 12300-2 into an integral box using lock shoulder joints at all 4 corners.Apply clear wood finish to side and end panels. 8. Shelves: 3/4 in.thick core finished plastic laminate both sides with matching plastic laminate on exposed front edge. Shelves over 3 ft. length shall be 1 in. thick core. 9. Vertical Interior Partitions: 3/4 in.particle board with plastic laminate,edges finished with matching plastic laminate or champagne-colored liner. 10. Dividers: Prefinished hardboard, smooth both faces, dadoed in cabinet. C. Wall Cabinets: Constructed same as base cabinets except bottom horizontal member shall be finished wood veneer or plastic laminate on exterior, accordingly. D. Tali Cabinets: Constructed same as base cabinets except full height shelving shall have a fixed center shelf. E. Plastic Laminate Countertops: Particle board or plywood, surfaced with laminate, balanced with backer sheet,and self edged. Use only exterior grade plywood cores at tops with sinks. Mating edges shall be jointed and sealed. Backsplash shall be 3/4 in. x 4 in. particle board with balanced plastic laminate installed and sealed to top. Provide continuous plastic laminate countertops for all casework units 60 in. long or less. 2.4 FINISHES A. Stain Color: Selections by Owner. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine grounds and supports of casework for adequate anchorage, foreign material, moisture and unevenness that would prevent quality installation of casework. B. Assure that electrical and plumbing rough-ins for casework are complete and in proper order. C. Do not proceed with installation until defects are corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install casework plumb with countertops level to within 1/16 in. in 10 ft, B. Level base cabinets to within allowable tolerances. C. Scribe and fit scribe strips to irregularities of adjacent surfaces: Maximum gap opening 0.025 in. D. Secure cases permanently to floor and wall construction using anchors spaced at maximum of 30 in. o.c., minimum of two for each case. E. Support wall cases on continuous wood cleats, secured with toggle bolts to studs or expansion bolts to concrete masonry units. F. Bolt adjoining cases together, maximum width of joints 1/32 in. G. Fasten tops to bases with screws driven through base cabinet top frame into bottom of countertop. 3.3 CLEANING A. On completion of installation, touch up marred or abraded finished surfaces. B. Remove crating and packing materials from premises. C. Wipe down surfaces to remove fingerprints and markings, and leave in clean condition. End of Section Proj. No. 07014 Manufactured Casework 12300-3 o .. mo, ..A SECTION 12493- HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes horizontal wood slat louver blinds and operating hardware. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Blocking for attachment of headrail brackets. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal requirements. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate opening sizes, tolerances required, method of attachment, clearances, and operation. C. Product Data: Submit data indicating physical and dimensional characteristics, and operating features. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention. 1.3 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. A 1.4 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication. 1. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Section 01310 -Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Coordinate the Work with window installation and placement of concealed blocking to support blinds. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS A. Manufacturers: 1. Graber Window Treatments. 2. Hunter Douglas Window Fashions. 3. Levolor Contract. B. Source: Hunter Douglas 2"WoodMates Blinds. 2.2 COMPONENTS A. Blinds: Horizontal slat louvers hung from full-width headrail with full-width bottom rail; manual control of raising and lowering by cord with full range locking; blade angle adjustable by control wand. B. Wood Slats: 1. General: Faux wood species, square slat corners. '* 2. Width: 2 inch. 3. Finish: Ecru or Pickett Fence. Color selection by Owner. C. Slat Support: Woven polypropylene cord, ladder configuration. D. Headrail: Pre-finished, formed aluminum box, with end caps; internally fitted with hardware, pulleys, and bearings for operation; same depth as width of slats. 1. Color: Same as slats. E. Bottom Rail: Pre-finished, formed aluminum; with end caps. 1. Color: Same as slats. Proj. No. 07014 Horizontal Louver Blinds 12493 - 1 OR F. Lift and Control Cords: Braided polyester; continuous loop. 1. Free end looped through wall mounted spring tensioned pulley. 2. Color: As selected by Owner. G. Headrail Attachment: Brackets as required for attachment to aluminum window frames. H. Accessory Hardware: Type recommended by blind manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION .w 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Verify openings are ready to receive work. C. Verify structural blocking and supports are correctly placed. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install blinds. AAR B. Secure in place with concealed fasteners. 3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements: Tolerances. B. Maximum Variation of Gap at Window Opening Perimeter: 1/4 inch. C. Maximum Offset From Level: 1/8 inch. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Testing, adjusting, and balancing. B. Adjust blinds for smooth operation. 3.5 CLEANING A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Final cleaning. B. Clean blind surfaces just prior to occupancy. 3.6 SCHEDULE A. Location: Exterior windows excluding sliding doors and loft windows. END OF SECTION Proj. No. 07014 Horizontal Louver Blinds 12493 - 2 SECTION 16642A- DIESEL GENERATOR, SUBBASE TANK, AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Provide factory test, startup by a supplier authorized by the manufacturer, and on-site testing of the system. B. The generator set manufacturer shall warrant all equipment provided under this section so that there is one source for warranty and product service. Technicians specifically trained and certified by the manufacturer to support the product and employed by the generator set supplier shall service the generator sets. 1.2 CODES AND STANDARDS A. The generator set and its installation and on-site testing shall conform to the requirements of the following codes and standards: 1. IEEE446—Recommended Practice for Emergency and Standby Power Systems for Commercial and Industrial Applications. 2. IEEE587 for voltage surge resistance. 3. Mil Std 461 D—1993. Military Standard, Electromagnetic Interference Characteristics. 4. Mil Std 462D-1993. Military Standard, Measurement of Electromagnetic Interference Characteristics. 5. NEMA ICS10-1993—AC Generator sets. ►* 6. NFPA70—National Electrical Code. Equipment shall be suitable for use in systems in compliance to Article 700, 701,and 702. 7. NFPA99—Essential Electrical Systems for Health Care Facilities 8. NFPA110—Emergency and Standby Power Systems. The generator set shall meet all requirements for Level 1 systems. Level 1 prototype tests required by this standard shall have been performed on a complete and functional unit, component level type tests will not substitute for this requirement. 9. UL508. The entire control system of the generator set shall be UL508 listed and labeled. B. The generator set manufacturer shall be certified to ISO 9001 International Quality Standard and shall have third party certification verifying quality assurance in design/development, production, installation, and service, in accordance with ISO 9001. 1.3 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS Only approved bidders shall supply equipment provided under this contract. Equipment specifications for this project are based on microprocessor-based generator sets manufactured by Baldor Generators. Equipment by other suppliers that meets the requirement of this specification are acceptable, if approved not less than 2 weeks before scheduled bid date. Proposals must include a line by line compliance statement based on this specification. Proj. No.07014 DIESEL GENERATOR, SUBBASE TANK, AND ACCESSORIES 16642A-1 PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERATOR SET A. Ratings 1. The generator set shall operate at 1800 rpm and at a voltage of 120/240Volts AC, single phase, three-wire, 60 hertz. 2. The generator set shall be nominally rated at 4014Y at 1.0 PF (37KW on natural gas and 41 KW on propane), based on site conditions of: Altitude 500 ft., ambient temperatures up -� to 104 degrees F. 3. The generator set rating shall be based on emergency/standby service. B. Performance 1. Voltage regulation shall be plus or minus 0.5 percent for any constant load between no load and rated load for non-parallel applications. Random voltage variation with any steady load from no load to full load shall not exceed plus or minus 0.5 percent. 2. Frequency regulation shall be isochronous from steady state no load to steady state —* rated load. Random frequency variation with any steady load from no load to full load shall not exceed plus or minus 0.25%. 3. The engine-generator set shall be capable of single step load pick up of 100% nameplate " kW and power factor, less applicable derating factors,with the engine-generator set at operating temperature. 4. The alternator shall produce a clean AC voltage waveform,with not more than 5%total harmonic distortion at full linear load,when measured from line to neutral, and with not more than 3%in any single harmonic. Telephone influence factor shall be less than 40. C. Construction 1. The engine-generator set shall be mounted on a heavy-duty steel base to maintain alignment between components. The base shall incorporate a battery tray with hold- down clamps within the rails. D. Connections 1. The generator set load connections shall be composed of silver or tin plated copper bus bars, drilled to accept mechanical or compression terminations of the number and type as shown on the drawings. Sufficient lug space shall be provided for use with cables of the number and size as shown on the drawings. 2. Power connections to auxiliary devices shall be made at the devices, with required protection located at a wall-mounted common distribution panel. �* 3. Generator set control interfaces to other system components shall be made on a common, permanently labeled terminal block assembly. 2.2 ENGINE AND ENGINE EQUIPMENT Proj. No.07014 DIESEL GENERATOR, SUBBASE TANK, AND ACCESSORIES 16642A-2 A. The engine shall be dry fuel, 4 cycle, radiator and fan cooled. Minimum displacement shall be 262 cubic inches, with 6 cylinders. The horsepower rating of the engine at its minimum tolerance level shall be sufficient to drive the alternator and all connected accessories. Engine accessories and features shall include: B. Automatic gas changeover system. Natural gas shall be the primary fuel source with LP gas vapor as an emergency fuel source. System shall automatically change during operation without any disruption of power to load. C. An electronic governor system shall provide automatic isochronous frequency regulation. D. Skid-mounted radiator and cooling system rated for full load operation in 104 degrees F(40 degrees C)ambient as measured at the generator air inlet, based on 0.5 in H2O external static head. Radiator shall be sized based on a core temperature which is 20F higher than the rated IMP operation temperature. The cooling system shall be filled with a 50/50-ethylene glycol/water mixture by the equipment manufacturer. Rotating parts shall be guarded against accidental contact. E. Electric starter capable of three complete cranking cycles without overheating. F. Positive displacement, mechanical, full pressure, lubrication oil pump. G. Full flow lubrication oil filters with replaceable spin-on canister elements and dipstick oil level indicator. H. Replaceable dry element air cleaner. I. Engine mounted battery charging alternator,40-ampere minimum and solid-state voltage regulator. J. Coolant heater 1. Engine mounted, thermostatically controlled, coolant heater. Heater voltage shall be as shown on the project drawings. The coolant heater shall be UL499 listed and labeled. 2. The coolant heater shall be installed on the engine with silicone hose connections. The coolant heater installation shall be specifically designed to provide proper venting of the system. 3. The coolant heater shall be provided with a thermostat, installed at the engine thermostat housing. An AC power connection box shall be provided for a single AC power connection to the coolant heater system. 4. The coolant heater shall be sized as recommended by the engine manufacturer to warm the engine to a minimum of 80 in a 40F ambient. K. Provide vibration isolators, spring/pad type, quantity as recommended by the generator set manufacturer. L. Starting and Control Battery shall be lead acid type, 12 volt DC, sized as recommended by the engine manufacturer, complete with battery cables and connectors. Battery shall be supplied by the manufacturer's distributor. Proj. No.07014 DIESEL GENERATOR, SUBBASE TANK, AND ACCESSORIES 16642A-3 .A M. Provide exhaust silencer as recommended by the generator set manufacturer and approved by the engine manufacturer. The mufflers shall be critical grade. Exhaust system shall be installed according to the engine manufacturer's recommendations and applicable codes and standards. N. A UL listed 10 amp voltage regulated battery charger shall be provided for the engine-generator set. The charger shall require an input of 120AC voltage and provide and output of 12VDC output. Chargers shall be equipped with float and equalize charge settings. The charger shall include an Analog DC voltmeter and ammeter, 12 hour equalize charge timer, and AC and DC fuses. 2.3 AC GENERATOR go A. The AC generator shall be; synchronous,four pole, 2/3 pitch, revolving field, drip-proof construction, single prelubricated sealed bearing, air cooled by a direct drive centrifugal blower fan, and directly connected to the engine with flexible drive disc. All insulation system so components shall meet NEMA MG1 temperature limits for Class H insulation system. Actual temperature rise measured by resistance method at full load shall not exceed 125 degrees Centigrade. B. The generator shall be capable of delivering rated output at rated frequency and power factor, at any voltage not more than 5 percent above or below rated voltage. C. A permanent magnet generator(PMG)shall be included to provide a reliable source of excitation power for optimum motor starting and short circuit performance. The PMG and controls shall be capable of sustaining and regulating current supplied to a single phase or three phase fault at approximately 300%of rated current for not more than 10 seconds. •� 2.4 GENERATOR SET CONTROL. ,.e The generator set shall be provided with a microprocessor-based control system that is designed to provide automatic starting, monitoring, and control functions for the generator set. The control system shall also be designed to allow local monitoring and control of the generator set as described in this specification. The control shall be mounted on the generator set. The generator set mounted control shall include the following features and functions: A. Control Switches 1. Mode Select Switches. The mode select switches shall initiate the following control modes. When in the RUN or Manual position the generator set shall start, and accelerate to rated speed and voltage as directed by the operator. In the OFF position the generator set shall immediately stop, bypassing all time delays. In the AUTO position the generator set shall be ready to accept a signal from a remote device to start and accelerate to rated speed and voltage. B. Generator Set AC Output Metering. 1. Voltmeter, Ammeter, Frequency. Voltmeter and ammeter shall display all three phases. „ 2. Digital metering set, 0.5% accuracy, to indicate generator RMS voltage and current, frequency, output current, output KW, KW-hours, and power factor. Generator output voltage shall be available in line-to-line and line-to-neutral voltages. C. Generator Set Alarm and Status Display. Proj. No.07014 DIESEL GENERATOR, SUBBASE TANK, AND ACCESSORIES 16642A-4 1. The generator set shall be provided with alarm and status indicating lamps to indicate non-automatic generator status, and existing warning and shutdown conditions. The lamps shall be high-intensity LED type. The lamp condition shall be clearly apparent under bright room lighting conditions. The generator set control shall indicate the existence of the following alarm and shutdown conditions on an alphanumeric digital display panel: low oil pressure (alarm) low oil pressure(shutdown) oil pressure sender failure (alarm) low coolant temperature (alarm) lop high coolant temperature(alarm) high coolant temperature (shutdown) low coolant level (alarm or shutdown--selectable) overcrank(shutdown) overspeed (shutdown) low battery voltage (alarm) high battery voltage(alarm) weak battery(alarm) low fuel-daytank(alarm) engine kW over load (alarm) battery charger failure fuel leak maintenance interval timer 2. Provisions shall be made for indication of four customer-specified alarm or shutdown conditions. Labeling of the customer-specified alarm or shutdown conditions shall be of the same type and quality as the above specified conditions. The non-automatic indicating lamp shall be red, and shall flash to indicate that the generator set is not able to automatically respond to a command to start from a remote location. D. Engine Status Monitoring. 1. The following information shall be available from a digital status panel on the generator set control : engine oil pressure (psi or kPA) engine coolant temperature (degrees F or C) engine speed(rpm) number of hours of operation (hours) battery voltage(DC volts) E. Engine Control Functions. 1. The control system provided shall include a cycle cranking system,which allows for user selected crank time, rest time, and#of cycles. Initial settings shall be for 3 cranking periods of 15 seconds each,with 15-second rest period between cranking periods. 2. The control system shall include time delay start(adjustable 0-30 seconds), time delay stop(adjustable 0-60 minutes), and engine maintenance(0-5000hours)functions. 3. The control system shall include sender failure monitoring logic for speed sensing and oil pressure. F. Alternator Control Functions: Proj. No.07014 DIESEL GENERATOR, SUBBASE TANK,AND ACCESSORIES 16642A-5 1. The generator set shall include an automatic voltage regulation system. It shall be immune from misoperation due to load-induced voltage waveform distortion.The voltage regulation system shall be equipped with three-phase RMS sensing and shall control buildup of AC generator voltage to provide a linear rise and limit overshoot. The system shall include a torque-matching characteristic,which shall reduce output voltage in proportion to frequency below a threshold of[58-59] HZ. The voltage regulator shall include adjustments for gain, damping, and frequency roll-off. „ 2. Controls shall be provided to individually monitor all three phases of the output current for short circuit conditions. The control/protection system shall monitor the current level and voltage. The controls shall shut down and lock out the generator set when output current level approaches the thermal damage point of the alternator(short circuit shutdown). 3. A battery monitoring system shall be provided which initiates alarms when the DC control and starting voltage is less than 25VDC or more than 32 VDC. During engine cranking (starter engaged), the low voltage limit shall be disabled, and if DC voltage drops to less than 14.4 volts for more than two seconds a"weak battery"alarm shall be initiated. G. Provide and install a 15-light LED type remote alarm annunciator with horn, located as shown on the drawings or in a location that can be conveniently monitored by facility personnel. The remote annunciator shall provide all the audible and visual alarms called for by NFPA Standard 110 for level 1 systems; and in addition shall provide indications for high battery voltage, low .. battery voltage, loss of normal power to the charger. Alarm silence and lamp test switch shall be provided. Alarm horn shall be switchable for all annunciation points. Alarm horn (when switched on)shall sound for first fault, and all subsequent faults, regardless of whether first fault has been cleared, in compliance with NFPA110 3-5.6.2.The annuniciator shall be connected to the engine generator set controller via a RS485 port. The interconnection wires shall be limited to four. H. The generator set shall be provided with a mounted main line circuit breaker, sized to carry the rated output current of the generator set on a continuous basis. The circuit breaker shall be U.L. listed for use with the specified ASCO 300 automatic transfer switch. 2.5 OUTDOOR WEATHER-PROTECTIVE SOUND ATTENUATED ENCLOSURE A. Generator set housing shall be provided factory-assembled to generator set base and radiator cowling. Housing shall provide ample airflow for generator set operation at rated load in the ** ambient conditions previously specified. The enclosure must meet applicable National Electric Code (NEC)and National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)code relating to clearances of all items included with the generator set. Clearances must be adequate for maintenance personal and doors must be located such that service personnel have adequate access. Housing must contain sound deadening material in order to reduce overall noise level to less than 25 dBA at 23 ft. Maximum sound level at the property line shall be 65 dBA and additionally shall meet all local sound ordinances. B. The enclosure will be of modular construction allowing complete flexibility in design and use. The enclosure must be capable of being modified in the factory or after installation to meet various field conditions. Modifications include reversing the door swing, adding or removing doors, adding or removing intake and exhaust louvers, adding sound attenuating hoods, etc. C. When the enclosure is installed it must be capable of withstanding a 120mph wind and shall meet the wind loading requirements of the Florida Building Code. Intake louvers and enclosure must be able to maintain less than .01 ounces of moisture penetration per square foot of louver free area during a 4"/hr rainfall. Proj. No.07014 DIESEL GENERATOR, SUBBASE TANK,AND ACCESSORIES 16642A-6 D. Roof and walls shall be constructed of.080" 5052-H32 Aluminum formed into 3.0"thick panels. Lifting provisions must be provided in the base that enable the complete engine generator set to be lifted without damage. E. Wall sections shall be bolted together using a SAE .25"-20,grade 5 bolts.The wall sections will have a flange arrangement to allow them to overlap one another.All bolts shall be fastened through these flanges. All fasteners will be Rivnut, Nylock, or equivalent to eliminate any loosening during shipment or operation.The walls will be bolted through the base rails. Between the base rails and the walls will be placed a .23"thick x 2"wide neoprene gasket to eliminate water leakage and vibration. The front panel will be punched to allow the maximum airflow while maintaining protection from the radiator core. Expanded metal grating is not acceptable. Each wall section shall be removable in case replacement is required due to shipping damage or if the customer desires to change design. F. The roof section shall be in sections no wider than 42"with flanges no less than 2.25"width, folded up so water cannot run into the enclosure. In addition the roof must extend a minimum of one inch beyond the walls of the enclosure to provide a drip lip. The roof must be capable of supporting the largest commercially available silencer recommended for this particular engine generator set. Roof panels will be pitched to accommodate water drainage. G. The housing shall have hinged side-access doors and rear control door. All doors shall be lockable. All surfaces of all metal parts shall be primed and painted. The painting process shall result in a coating which meets the following requirements: Primer thickness, 0.5-2.0 mils. Top coat thickness, 1.5-2.5 mils. Gloss, per ASTM D523-89, 80%plus or minus 5%. Gloss retention after one year shall exceed 50%. Crosshatch adhesion, per ASTM D3359-93, 413-513. Impact resistance, per ASTM D2794-93, 120-160 inch-pounds. Salt Spray, per ASTM 8117-90, 1000+ hours. Humidity, per ASTM D2247-92, 1000+hours. Water Soak, per ASTM D2247-92, 1000+ hours. H. Provide 48 inch two lamp fluorescent light fixture with wire guard, light switch and a 20A, 120V GFI duplex outlet. 2.6 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH The automatic transfer switch shall be a service-rated 200A, 120/240V, 2 pole, enclosed switch in a NEMA 3R enclosure. Basis of design is an ASCO 300 Automatic Transfer Switch. Provide a 240V main circuit breaker(with shunt trip)with a short circuit rating of at least 22KAIC. The switch shall comply with NEMA ICS2-447, NFPA 70, NFPA 99, NFPA 110, and UL 1008. The short circuit with- stand rating for the switch shall be at least 22K symmetrical Amps at 240V. The switch shall have front access to all control panels and contacts. Plexiglas covers shall shield electronic controls and main contact connections. Wiring shall be numbered for easy identification.The switch shall incorpo- rate solid state programmable logic, be assembled and tested, and include: UL 1008 listed for total system loads. Operating transfer switch consisting of single solenoid, electrically operated, mechanically held. Pilot lights in face of enclosure indicating source to which the ATS is connected and available sources. Frequency of emergency at transfer, 70 to 90 percent(adjustable). Solderless connectors for normal source cables, emergency source cables, load cable, and solid neu- tral bar. No load manual transfer mechanism. Proj. No.07014 DIESEL GENERATOR, SUBBASE TANK, AND ACCESSORIES 16642A-7 High fault withstanding capacity(at least 22K symmetrical Amps). Voltage monitoring of each phase of normal source (full protection), adjustable 70 to 90 percent. Voltage and frequency monitoring of one phase of emergency source. Voltage of emergency at transfer, 70 to 90 percent(factory set 90 percent). Frequency of emergency at transfer, 70 to 90 percent (factory set 90 percent). Time delay, engine starting, adjustable 0.1 to 10 seconds, set at 3 seconds. Engine cool down timer(adjustable 1 to 30 minutes) Time delay, normal to emergency(0 to 300 seconds adjustable) Time delay, emergency to normal (adjustable to 30 minutes (factory set 5 minutes)) Time delay bypass switch mounted on face of enclosure In-phase monitor to transfer motor loads,without any intentional off time,to prevent inrush currents .. from exceeding normal starting levels. Mode selector switch in the face of the enclosure marked auto/test. Fast test mode: resets engine minimum run(to 10 seconds), engine cool down (to 0 seconds), and return to utility(0 to 5 seconds) Engine exerciser to automatically test engine generator each week. Include control switch for select- ing whether to test with or without load. Elevator pre-transfer and post-transfer signal contact Auxiliary contacts to indicate position of main contacts, one for normal, one for emergency. Neutral lug provided with switch PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION A. Generator set shall start on receipt of a start signal from remote equipment. B. The generator set shall complete a time delay start period as programmed into the control. C. The generator set control shall initiate the starting sequence for the generator set. D. On reaching rated speed and voltage, the generator set shall operate as dictated by the control system. E. When all start signals have been removed from the generator set, it shall complete a time delay stop sequence. The duration of the time delay stop period shall be adjustable by the operator. F. On completion of the time delay stop period, shall shut down. 3.2 SUBMITTALS. Within 10 days after award of contract, provide six sets of the following information for review: A. Manufacturer's product literature and performance data, sufficient to verify compliance to specification requirements. B. Shop drawings showing plan and elevation views with certified overall dimensions, as well as •* wiring interconnection details. C. Interconnection wiring diagrams showing all external connections required;with field wiring terminals marked in a consistent point-to-point manner. 3.3 FACTORY TESTING. Proj. No. 07014 DIESEL GENERATOR, SUBBASE TANK, AND ACCESSORIES 16642A-8 ,� A. The generator set manufacturer shall perform a complete operational test on the generator set prior to shipping from the factory. A certified test report shall be provided. Equipment supplied shall be fully tested at the factory for function and performance. 3.4 INSTALLATION A. Equipment shall be installed by the contractor in accordance with final submittals and contract documents. Installation shall comply with applicable state and local codes as required by the authority having jurisdiction. B. Installation of equipment shall include furnishing and installing all interconnecting wiring between all major equipment provided for the on-site power system. The contractor shall also perform interconnecting wiring between equipment sections (when required), under the supervision of the equipment supplier. C. Equipment shall be installed on concrete housekeeping pads. Equipment shall be permanently fastened to the pad in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Equipment shall be initially started and operated by representatives of the manufacturer. E. All equipment shall be physically inspected for damage. Scratches and other installation damage shall be repaired prior to final system testing. Equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned to remove all dirt and construction debris prior to initial operation and final testing of the system. 3.5 ON-SITE ACCEPTANCE TEST: A. The complete installation shall be tested for compliance with the specification following completion of all site work. Testing shall be conducted by representatives of the manufacturer, with required fuel supplied by Contractor. The Engineer shall be notified in advance and shall have the option to witness the tests. B. Installation acceptance tests to be conducted on-site shall include a 'cold starttest, a two hour full load test,and a one step rated load pickup test in accordance with NFPA 110. Provide a resistive load bank and make temporary connections for full load test, if necessary. C. Perform a power failure test on the entire installed system. This test shall be conducted by opening the power supply from the utility service. Coordinate timing and obtain approval for start of test with site personnel. 3.6 TRAINING A. The equipment supplier shall provide training for the facility operating personnel covering operation and maintenance of the equipment provided. The training program shall be not less than 2 hours in duration and the class size shall be limited to 5 persons. Training date shall be coordinated with the facility owner. 3.7 SERVICE AND SUPPORT A. The manufacturer of the generator set shall maintain service parts inventory at a central location which is accessible to the service location 24 hours per day, 365 days per year. B. The generator set shall be serviced by a local service organization that is trained and factory certified in generator set service. The service organization shall be on call 24 hours per day, 365 days per year. ,� Proj. No.07014 DIESEL GENERATOR, SUBBASE TANK, AND ACCESSORIES 16642A-9 go am C. The manufacturer shall maintain model and serial number records of each generator set provided for at least 20 years. 3.8 WARRANTY A. The generator set and associated equipment shall be warranted for a period of not less than 2 years from the date of commissioning against defects in materials and workmanship. B. The warranty shall be comprehensive. No deductibles shall be allowed for travel time, service hours, repair parts cost, etc. .r. END OF SECTION r Proj. No. 07014 DIESEL GENERATOR, SUBBASE TANK,AND ACCESSORIES 16642A-10 tsa CITY OF ATLANTIC BEACH 800 SEMINOLE ROAD J =.' ATLANTIC BEACH,FL 32233 ,s INSPECTION PHONE LINE 247-5826 INSPECTION EMAIL REQUEST: Building-dept&gab.us Application Number . . . . . 07-00001704 Date 12/21/07 Property Address . . . . . . 6010 FLEET LANDING BLVD Application type description ELECTRIC ONLY Property Zoning . . . . . . . TO BE UPDATED Application valuation . . . . 0 ---------------- -- --- ---------------- ---------- --- ---- --- ---- -- ------------- Application desc early power gate house -- -- ------------- -- ----- ----- - ----- - ----- - - ------ -- - ---- ---- --- - ---- - ------- Owner Contractor -------------------- ---- ---- --- ------- ---------- AMERICAN ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR Q/A:GRASS, ROBERT 5065 ST. AUGUSTINE RD. #3 JACKSONVILLE FL 32207 (904) 737-7770 ------------ ------- ---------------- ------ -- --- ----------- --- ---------------- Permit . . . . . . ELECTRICAL PERMIT Additional desc . . Permit Fee . . . . 300 . 00 Plan Check Fee . 00 Issue Date . . . . 12/19/07 Valuation . . . . 0 Expiration Date . . 6/18/08 ------------------------------------------------- ----------- ---------------- Fee summary Charged Paid Credited Due ----------------- ------ ---- --------- - - ------- -- -- -------- Permit Fee Total 300 . 00 300 . 00 . 00 . 00 Plan Check Total . 00 . 00 . 00 . 00 Grand Total 300 . 00 300 . 00 . 00 . 00 PERMIT IS APPROVED ONLY IN ACCORDANCE WITH ALL CITY OF ATLANTIC BEACH ORDINANCES AND THE FLORIDA BUILDING CODES. Ile, �1I�t✓�,, Y S, CITY OF ATLANTIC BEACH 800 SEMINOLE ROAD _, ATLANTIC BEACH,FL 32233 INSPECTION PHONE LINE 247-5826 INSPECTION EMAIL REQUEST: Building:-dept.c coab.us Application Number . . . . . 07-00001612 Date 1/17/08 Property Address . . . . . . 1 FLEET LANDING BLVD Application type description COMMERCIAL OTHER Property Zoning . . . . . . . TO BE UPDATED Application valuation . . . . 28000 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- Application desc INSTALL FOUNTAIN AT GATEHOUSE ENTRY ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- Owner Contractor ------------------------ ------------------------ SURFSIDE POOLS 313 BEACH BLVD. JAX BEACH FL 32250 (904) 246-2666 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- Permit ELECTRICAL PERMIT Additional desc GROUNDING FOR FOUNTAIN Permit Fee . . . . 70 . 00 Plan Check Fee . 00 Issue Date . . . . Valuation . . . . 0 Expiration Date . . 7/15/08 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- Special Notes and Comments PUBLIC UTILITIES RECOMMENDS BACKFLOW PREVENTER RPZ TYPE ON SERVICE LINE TO PUMP. *2004 FLORIDA BUILDING CODE W/ 105- 106 SUPPLEMENTS. 2004 FLORIDA FIRE PREVENTION CODE 2005 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- Fee summary Charged Paid Credited Due ----------------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- Permit Fee Total 70 . 00 70 . 00 . 00 . 00 Plan Check Total . 00 . 00 . 00 . 00 Grand Total 70 . 00 70. 00 . 00 .00 PERMIT IS APPROVED ONLY IN ACCORDANCE WITH ALL CITY OF ATLANTIC BEACH ORDINANCES AND THE FLORIDA BUILDING CODES. HP Offlee et 7410 Log for Personal Printer/Fax/Copier/Scanner Information Systems 904-247-5845 Dec 11 2007 5:26AM Lest Transaction Date Time Tye Identification Duration Pages Result Dec 11 5:25AM Fax Sent 96657372 1:03 2 OK Jan 15 08 09: 17a David Pruette 's Electrica 904-272-7229 P. 1 CITY OF ATLANTIC BEACH ELECTRICAL PERMIT APPLICATION r Date: d' } Property Address: FLS o'nci n Owner: L � A -C % Telephone#: Contractor. sad �c ��u'� Telephone#: Contractor Address: 331- Q q �c Vr t A 09 Fax#: r, Contractor Si tore• In consideaion of permit given for doing tl►e wa&as demlxd in the above stalcment.we hereby agree to perfm m said work m accordance with ffie attached pians and spai6canoos which are a part hamf and is aocordanc a witk the City of Atlantic Beach ordinance and standards of smd practice tisiod therein. Building Building Type: a Traiter Service if atha coastnscfim is t�New 0des O Temp. u New idence being dom on s"'bWdiag Or site,Fist the bWkWg 0 Old tv'Comtaen W o Signs a lnee'ease P au numbm v Re-wire O Addition Sq.Ft. O Repair Conductor Size: AMPS: COPPER ALUbGNUM Switch or RACE Braker AMPS PH W VOLT WAY Existing_Service RACE size AMPS PH W VOLT WAY Meter Number Feeders: NO. SIZE NO SIZE NO SIZE L*b mg Outlets CONCEALED OPEN Recgpoucks CONCEALED OPEN 11 IM AhM swig . rncandesrew. Fluorescent & M.V. Fixed 0.100AAeS OVER BELL fiances TRANSFER Air H.P.RATING H.P.RATING CEILING KW-HEAT Conditioning COMP.MOTOR OTHER MOTORS AMPS HEAT Motors 0-I H.P. VOLTAGE PH NO. OVER 1 H.P. PHS I�dOov 01rE1tt;oov Trams NO. KVA NO. KVA NoNeon Traasf. Ea. size Miscellaneous 808 Seminole Road.Atlantic Basch,FkwMa 31.233-S40 Phone:MQ Z47-5880. Fam (9"7,47-3s4S. htfoJlwww ci atiantic beach fl ne S> lj✓. ^ 04 - Ike �1 CITY OF ATLANTIC BEACH C�S ELECTRICAL PERMIT APPLICATION JA Date: tj Property Address: Owner: ';7 L l f\ -O G V\ Telephone#: Contractor: t ICU "`C '\-)� �A'Q Telephone#: Contractor Address: 'S Q 4 1C ft AL, 09 Fax#: D77ia Contractor Signature: In consideration of permit given for doing the work as described in the above statement, we hereby agree to perform said work in accordance with the attached plans and specifications which are a part hereof and in accordance with the City of Atlantic Beach ordinance and standards of good practice listed therein. Building: Building Type: ❑ Trailer Service: IOr if other construction is @t"New ❑ residence ❑ Temp. 13New being done on this building c3 Old W Commercial ElSigns 11Incre-a— site,list the building Permit number: ❑ Re-wire ❑ Addition Sq.Ft. Conductor Size: AMPS:_ Switch or ( < 1 �� t RACE Breaker AMPS j \\ )LT WAY Existing Service � �-T RACE Size AMPS Y ILT WAY Meter Number Feeders: NO. SIZE 1 -� Lighting Outlets �� I CONCEALED Receptacles CONCEALEDIQAABK Switches Incandescent Fluorescent & M.V. _ Fixed 0.100 AMPS r OVER BELL Appliances TRANSFER. Air H.P.RATING H.P.RATING CEILING KW-HEAT -Conditioning COMP.MOTOR OTHER MOTORS AMPS HEAT Motors 0-1 H.P. VOLTAGE PH NO. OVER 1 H.P. PHS OVER6tlOV Transformers NO. KVA NO. KVA No.Neon Transf. _J Ea Si _ Miscellaneous 80 Seminole Road.Atlantic Beach,Florida 32233-5445 Phone..(904)247-5800. Fax: (904)247-5845. http://www.ci.atlantic-beach.fl.us